FAM.

1C-27J-1A

FLIGHT MANUAL - SUPPLEMENTAL MANUAL

COMMUNICATION / NAVIGATION /
IDENTIFICATION - MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
(CNI-MS) OPERATOR MANUAL

C-27J AIRCRAFT
FUERZA AÉREA MEXICANA
Commanders are responsible for bringing this This publication is incomplete without
publication to the attention of all personnel FAM.1C-27J-1 Flight Manual
cleared for operation of subject aircraft

The content of this publication is intellectual property of Alenia Aeronautica S.p.A. a Finmeccanica Company. It must not be used for any purpose other than
for which it is supplied. It must not be disclosed to unauthorized persons or reproduced without written authorization from the owner of the copyright.

© 2011 Alenia Aeronautica S.p.A. - A Finmeccanica Company. All rights reserved.

15 JULY 2011
FAM.1C-27J-1A

INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.

Note: The portion of the text affected by changes is indicated by a vertical line on
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES the outer margine of the page. Changes in illustrations are indicated by
pointing hands. Changes in wiring diagrams are indicated by shaded areas.

Dates of issue for original and changed pages are:

Original ................ 0 ........... 15 July 2011

Total number of pages in this manual is 548 consisting of the following:

Page No. Change No. (*) Page No. Change No. (*) Page No. Change No. (*)

Title ............................................. 0 3C-1 thru 3C-11 ........................... 0 3H-1 thru 3H-53 ........................... 0
A .................................................. 0 3C-12 blank ................................. 0 3H-54 blank ................................. 0
i thru x ......................................... 0 3D-1 thru 3D-35 ........................... 0 3J-1 thru 3J-15 ............................. 0
1-1 thru 1-88 ............................... 0 3D-36 blank ................................. 0 3J-16 blank .................................. 0
2-1 thru 2-42 ............................... 0 3E-1 thru 3E-67 ........................... 0 3K-1 thru 3K-93 ........................... 0
3-1 thru 3-28 ............................... 0 3E-68 blank ................................. 0 3K-94 blank ................................. 0
3A-1 thru 3A-25 ........................... 0 3F-1 thru 3F-5 ............................. 0 3L-1 thru 3L-7 .............................. 0
3A-26 blank ................................. 0 3F-6 blank ................................... 0 3L-8 blank .................................... 0
3B-1 thru 3B-17 ........................... 0 3G-1 thru 3G-39 .......................... 0
3B-18 blank ................................. 0 3G-40 blank ................................. 0

(*) Zero in this column indicates an original page.

CAUTION

• This publication is valid only when composed of the above listed pages.

• Ensure that any preceding changes have been incorporated before inserting latest change.

A
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Sections page

1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................ 1-1

2 CNI-MS OPERATING PROCEDURES ...................................................................................... 2-1

3 CNI-MS DISPLAYS AND DATA ENTRY .................................................................................... 3-1

i
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Use Operator Manual

for your safety!!

SCOPE WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

This CNI Operator Manual contains the necessary The following definitions apply to "Warnings", "Cau-
information for safe and efficient operation of C-27J tions", and "Notes" found throughout the manual:
aircraft. The data contained in this Operator Manual is
applicable to C-27J aircraft (Industrial Baseline) CNI-
MS software menus and pages. WARNING
These instructions provide you with a general knowl-
edge of the aircraft and its characteristics and specific
normal and emergency operating procedures. Your Operating procedures, techniques,
experience is recognized; therefore, basic flight princi- etc., which could result in personal in-
ples are avoided. Instructions in this manual are pre- jury or loss of life if not carefully fol-
pared to be understandable by the least experienced lowed.
crew that can be expected to operate the aircraft. This
manual provides the best possible operating instruc-
tions under most circumstances, but it is not a substi-
CAUTION
tute for sound judgment. Multiple emergencies,
adverse weather, terrain, etc. may require modifica-
tion of the procedures. Operating procedures, techniques, etc.,
which could result in damage to equip-
ment if not carefully followed.
CHANGE SYMBOL
The change symbol, is illustrated by a black line in the
NOTE
outer margin of the column or page, adjacent to the
affected text, like the one printed next to this para- Operating procedures, techniques, etc.,
graph. The change symbol indicates text and tabular which is considered essential to empha-
illustration changes made to the current issue. size.
Changes to illustrations (except tabular and plotted
illustrations) are indicated by a pointing hand or by a
shaded area box located at the upper right side of the USE OF WORDS "SHALL", "WILL", "SHOULD",
illustration. AND "MAY"
The box is divided into eight equal parts which repre-
sent eight proportional areas of the illustration. The The words "shall", "will", "should", and "may" have the
shaded area of the box represents the area of the following meanings in this manual:
illustration which contains a change. "Shall" is used whenever the manual expresses a
provision that is mandatory.
"Will" is used to express a declaration of purpose or in
cases where simple futurity is required.
"Should" and "may" are used whenever it is neces-
sary to express non mandatory provisions.

ii
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS, QUOTATION AIRCRAFT EFFECTIVITY

MARKS, COMMAS AND VIRGULES
the text and figures contained in this manual apply to
The use of capital letters and quotation marks in this C-27J FAM Configuration aircraft.
manual are as follows:

In descriptive information: PRODUCTION SEQUENCE NUMBERS AND

MILITARY SERIES NUMBERS
1. Placarded name of switches, con- - CAPITALS
trols, fuses, circuit breakers, illumi- The list below provides a cross-reference between
nated annunciator lights, CNI-MS Production Sequence Numbers (PS No.) and Aircraft
messages, and illuminated push- Tail Numbers (AT No.) of the C-27J FAM aircraft.
button switch lights.
PS No. AT No.
2. Unplacarded name of switches/ - lower case
controls. 146 3401
128 3402
3. Marked or unmarked switch/con- - CAPITALS
trol positions. 142 3403

4. CNI-MU (ICDU), SAMU, CNRP - CAPITALS 147 3404

pages.

The use of capital letters in abbreviations in this man-

ual is as follows:
– The general rule is that if the letters are spoken they
will be in capitals (i.e., APU, MGT, VHF). If the word
is spoken they will be in lower case (i.e., tacan, ra-
dar).
– Exceptions to the above are for abbreviations that
are part of a proper name, formula, symbol, etc.
(i.e., KHz, NESA, dB).

iii
FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

iv
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

GLOSSARY

A BE SPD Brake Energy Speed

BHD Behind
A/A or AA Air to Air BIT Built-In Test
AAA Anti-Aircraft Artillery BIU Bus Interface Unit
A/C or a/c Aircraft BLW Below
ABV Above BOD Bottom Of Descent
ACAWS Advisory Caution and Warning System BOW Basic Operating Weight
ACT Active BRG Bearing
ACTN Actuation BRT Bright
ADF Automatic Direction Finder
AERAD Aeronautical Radio (company)
AEO All Engine Operating C
AFT After
AGL Above Ground Level °C Temperature in degrees Celsius
AHD Ahead (Centigrade)
AI Airborne Intercept CADC Central Air Data Computer
ALE Automatic Link Establishment CARP Computed Air Release Point
ALIGN Alignment CAS Calibrated Airspeed or Calculated
ALT Altitude Airspeed
ALTN Alternate CBIT Continuous Built In Test
ACT Active CDI Course Deviation Indicator
AM Amplitude Modulation CDS Container Delivery System
ANG Angle CEI Critical Engine Inoperative
ANT Antenna CEP Circular Error Probable
AOA Angle Of Attack CFL Critical Field Length
APP Approach CF Course to a Fix
APPR Approach CH Channel
APT Airport CHAN Channel
ARINC Aeronautical Radio Incorporated CHNL Channel
ARR Arrival CHS Cargo Handling System
ASD Aircraft Specific Data CLB Climb
ASI Airspeed Indicator CMD Command
ASDR Accelerate Stop Distance Reference CMDU Color Multipurpose Display Unit
ATA Actual Time of Arrival CMPLT Complete
ATC Air Traffic Control CNI Communication/Navigation/Identification
ATCS Automatic Thrust Control System CNI-MS Communication/Navigation/Identification
ATP Automatic Test Program -Management System
ATIS Automatic Terminal Information System CNI-MU Communication/Navigation/Identification
AUM All Up Mass -Management Unit
AUTO Automatic CNI-SP Communication/Navigation/Identification
AVAIL Available -System Processor
AZ Azimuth CNRP Communication/Navigation/Radio Panel
COEF Coefficient
COMSEC Communications Security
B COMM Communication
CP Copilot or Curved Path
BAL Ballistic CRM Crew Resource Management
BARO Barometric Altitude CRZ Cruise
BATH Best Available True Heading CRS Course
BAU Bus Adapter Unit CRP LN Creeping Line
BBC Backup Bus Controller CTRL Control
BC Bus Controller CW Continuous Wave
CWA Caution/Warning/Advisory

v
FAM.1C-27J-1A

D ETA Estimated Time of Arrival

ETD Estimated Time of Departure
DA/DH Decision Height/Decision Altitude ETE Estimated Time Enroute
DA/FD Digital Autopilot/Flight Director ETP Equal Time Point
DAC Dangerous Air Cargo EXP SQ Expanding Square
DADS Distribution Air Data System
DB Database
DEF Defined F
DESEL Deselect
DF Direct to a Fix or Direction Finder °F Temperature in degrees Fahrenheit
DEG Degree(s) FA Course from a Fix to an Altitude
DEL Delete FAA (US) Federal Aviation Authority
DEP Departure FAF Final Approach Fix
DES Desired or Descent FCRS Front Course
DEST Destination FD Flight Director
DIM Dimming FEBA Forward Edge of the Battle Area
DIST Distance FF or F/F Fuel Flow
DIVR Diversion FH Frequency Hopping
DH Decision Height FIH Flight Information Handbook
DL Data Link FL Flight Level
DME Distance Measuring Equipment FLC Flight Level Change
DMM Data Memory Module FLT Flight
DOD Department Of Defense FLT LVL Flight Level
DR Dead Reckoning FMS Flight Management System
DRP Drop FOB Fuel On Board
DS-DTS Dual Slot-Data Transfer System FOM Figure Of Merit
DTC Data Transfer Cartridge FP Flight Plan or Flight Program
DTG Distance To Go FPDI Flight Path Director Indicator
D TK FX Down Track Fix FPM Feet Per Minute
DTM Data Transfer Module FPS Feet Per Second
DTS Data Transfer System FREQ Frequency
DTOA Desired Time Of Arrival FRMG Fuel Remaining
DTU Data Transfer Unit FSS Flight Service Station
DZ Drop Zone FT or ft Foot or Feet
FTD Forward Travel Distance
FTI Flight Test Instrumentation
E FTT Forward Travel Time
FUS Fuselage
E East
EAT Exit at Time
EGI Embedded Global Position/ G
Inertial Navigation
EHE Estimated Heading Error or G or g Gravity (load factor)
Estimated Horizontal G Grid
ELF Extreme Low Frequency GC Gyro Compass
ELEM Element GDC Global Data Center
EMCON Emissions Control GHC Get Home Control
EMG Emergency GMS Ground Maintenance System
EMER Emergency GND Ground
EMERG Emergency GNE Gross Navigation Errors
ENG Engine GPS Global Positioning System
ENT Entered GRAD Gradient
EOD End Of Descent GS Ground Speed
ESC Escape GSPD Ground Speed
ET Exit Time GSI Glide Slope Intercept

vi
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

H KIAS Indicated Airspeed in Knots

KT Knots
H Hours kt or kts Knots
HA High Altitude
HAT Height Above Runway Threshold
HDG Heading L
HE Heavy Equipment
HF High Frequency L Left
HG or Hg Mercury LA Low Altitude
HI High LAT Latitude
HIST History LB or LBS Pounds
HIU Headset Interface Unit LBL Label
HP Horsepower or High Pressure LDG Landing
HQ Have Quick LE Leading Edge
HR or hr Hour LGTH Length
HS Heading Select LH Left Hand
HT Height LL Latitude Longitude
HUD Head Up Display LM Load Master
Hz Hertz (cycles per second) LNAV Lateral Navigation (or Lateral Guidance)
LO Low
LOC Localizer
I LON Longitude
LONG Longitude
IAA Indicated Absolute Altitude LOS Line Of Sight
IAS Indicated Airspeed LPCR Low Powered Color Radar
IBIT Initiated Built-In-Test LPD Last Point of Diversion
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization LRU Line Replaceable Unit
ICDU Integrated Control Display Unit LVL Level
ICS Interphone Communication System LZ Landing Zone
IDENT or ID Identification
IF Initial Fix
IFA In-Flight Alignment M
IFF Identification Friend or Foe
ILS Instrument Landing System M or m Meters or Minutes
IN or in Inch(es) MAG Magnetic
INAV Integrated Navigation MAG VAR Magnetic Variation
INH Inhibit MAN Manual
INS Inertial Navigation System MAP Missed Approach Point or Map
INTC Intercept MAR Maritime
INTL International MAX Maximum
INU Inertial Navigation Unit MB Marker Beacon or Millibars
IOC Input/Output Controller mb Millibar
IP Initial Point MC Mission Computer
IPC Interprocessor Communications MDC Mission Data Cartridge
ISA International Standard Atmosphere MDT Mission Data Tables
ITA Indicated True Altitude MDA/MDH Minimum Descent Altitude/Minimum
Descent
MET Meteorology or Meteorological
K METAR Meteorological Aviation Routine
METO Maximum Effort Take-Off
K Kilo (Thousand) METRO Meteorological Reporting Organization
KCAS Calibrated Airspeed in Knots MFP Mission Flight Plan
KG or kg Kilogram(s) MGM Monopulse Ground Mapping
kHz Kilo Hertz MGN Magenta

vii
FAM.1C-27J-1A

MGRS Military Grid Reference System P

MH Magnetic Heading
MLV Memory Loader and Verifier P Pilot or Precision
MNPS Minimum Navigation Performance PA Pressure Altitude or Public Address
Specification PARAL Parallel
MHz Mega Hertz PAYLD Payload
MIN Minute(s) or Minimum PBD Place/Bearing/Distance
mm Millimeter PBIT Power-up Built In Test
MM Middle Marker PBPB Place/Bearing/Place/Bearing
MOD Modulation or Provisional PDRP Portable Down Range Planner
MOS Military Operating Standard PER Personnel
MPS Mission Planning System PERF Performance
MPU Magnetic Pulse Unit PFD Primary Flight Display
MRK Mark PI Point of Impact
MRP Map Reference Point PIREPS Pilot Reports
ms Milliseconds PLA Power Lever Angle
MSL Mean Sea Level PMA Portable Maintenance Aid
MSN Mission PNL Panel
MSTR AV Master Avionic PNR Point of No Return
MU Management Unit POB Persons On Board
MWOD Multiple Word Of Days POS Position
P-P Point to Point
PPOS Present Position
N PRD Predicted
PROG Progress
N North PTRS Pointer
NARF Navigation-Alignment Refining Feature PWR Power
NAV Navigation
NAVAIDS Navigation Aids (radio)
NCS National Charter Set Q
NDB Navigation Database or Non Directional
Beacon QFE Field Elevation Barometric Setting
NE Northeast QNE Standard Atmosphere Setting
NESA Non-Electrostatic Formulation - A QNH MSL Barometric Setting
NM Nautical Mile QUOT Quotient
NORM Normal QTY Quantity
NOS Normal Operating Standard
NOTAM National Operational Travel Advisory
Memorandum
NP Non-Precision R
NVM Non-Volatile Memory
NVIS Night Vision Imaging System R Right
NW Northwest RA Resolution Advisory
RAD Radio or Radar or Radius
RCR Runway Condition Reading
RCV Receive
O
REC Receive or Record
REDLT Red Light
O/B Out of Bound REF Reference
OAP Offset Aim Point REV Reverse
OAT Outside Air Temperature RF Radio Frequency or Rate of Fall
OEI One Engine Inoperative RH Right Hand
OFP Operational Flight Program RMM Removable Memory Module
OM Outer Marker RNDZ Rendezvous
OPS Operations ROS Reduced Operating Standard
OVRD Override

viii
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

ROT Radius Of Turn TAF Terminal Aerodrome Forecast

RPI Runway Point of Intercept TAS True Airspeed
RRSC Remote Radio Set Control TAT Total Air Temperature
RSC Runway Surface Covering TBD To Be Defined
RSR Runway Surface Reading TCAS Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance
RSV Reserve System
RT Receiver Transmitter or Remote Terminal TCH Threshold Crossing Height
RTE Route TD Touchdown
RW or RWY Runway TDZE Touchdown Zone Elevation
TE Trailing Edge
TEC Temperature Error Correction
S TEMP Temperature
TF Track to a Fix
TGT Target
S South or Seconds
THR Threshold
SALT Safety Altitude
THRE Threshold Elevation
SAM Surface to Air Missile
THR ELEV Threshold Elevation
SAMU Single Avionics Management Unit
TOA Time Of Arrival
SAR Search and Rescue
TOC Top Of Climb
SARAW Search and Rescue Approach Waypoint
TOD Top Of Descent
SAT Static Air Temperature
TOLD Take-Off and Landing Data
SATCOM Satellite Communications
TOT Time Over Target
SD Slow Down
TP Turn Point
SE Southeast
TR-REC Transmit-Receive
SEC Second
TTG Time-To-Go
SECTR Sector
TRK Track
SEL Selection
SFC Surface
SELCAL Selective Calling
SEN Sensed U
SH Stored Heading
SID(S) Standard Instrument Departure(s) UHF Ultra High frequency
SIGMETS Significant Meteorological Information UPS Universal Polar Stereographic
SKE Station Keeping Equipment UR Unrestricted
SNOWTAM Snow Notice To Airmen USB Upper Side Band
SOC Start Of Climb UTC Universal Coordinated Time
SOLN Solution UTM Universal Transverse Mercator
SP System Processor
SPD Speed
SQ or SQL Squelch V
STA Station
STAR(S) Standard Terminal Arrival Route(s)
V Velocity
STBY Standby
V1 Take-off refusal speed
SV Space Vehicle
V2 Take-off obstacle clearance speed
SW Southwest or Software
VA Heading from a Fix to an Altitude
VAR Variable
V APP Approach Speed
T V CEF Critical Engine Failure Speed
V CO Clearance Obstacle Speed
T/O Take-off VDI Vertical Deviation Indicator
T True or Temperature or Terminal VFR Visual Flight Rules
TR Transmit/Receive VHF Very High frequency
TA Traffic Advisory VI Heading from a Fix to an Intercept
TAC Tacan or Tactical V LO Lift-off Speed
TACAN Tactical Air Navigation VM Heading to a Manual Termination

ix
FAM.1C-27J-1A

VMCA Minimum Control Speed in Air

VMCG Minimum Ground Control Speed
VNAV Vertical Navigation (or Vertical Guidance)
VOR VHF Omnidirectional and Range
VORVHF Omni-directional Radio/VHF
Omni-Range
VORDME VOR/DME
VORTAC VOR/TACAN
VR Rotation speed
V REF Refusal speed
V ROT Rotation speed
VS Vertical Speed
VVI Vertical Velocity Indicator (indication)

W West
WHT White
WOD Word Of Days
WOW Weight-On-Wheel
WPT Waypoint
WRN Warning
WS Wind Shear
WT or WTG Weight
WWNDB World Wide Navigation Data Base
WX Weather

XFER Transfer
XFR Transfer
XMIT Transmit
XTK Crosstrack
XTK LIM Crosstrack Limit

YEL Yellow

ZFW Zero Fuel Weight

x
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Section 1

INTRODUCTION

Contents page System integration is achieved through software

rather than hardware, with several systems, such as
COMMUNICATION / NAVIGATION / ACAWS, existing only as software resident in the mis-
IDENTIFICATION - MANAGEMENT SYSTEM .... 1-1 sion computer (MC).
INTREGRATED NAVIGATION SOLUTION ......... 1-8
FLIGHT PLANNING ........................................... 1-12
MISSION OPERATIONS ................................... 1-47 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS ...................... 1-81
The CNI-MS consists of:
• 2 – Mission Computers (MC),

COMMUNICATION/NAVIGATION/ • 2 – Bus Interface Units (BIU),

IDENTIFICATION - MANAGEMENT • 5 – Bus Adapter Units (BAU),

SYSTEM • 1 – Dual Slot - Data Transfer System (DS-DTS),
• 2 – CNI System Processors (CNI-SP),
The Communication, Navigation, and Identification
Management System (CNI-MS) is an integrated hard- • 2 – Communication / Navigation / Identification -
ware and software package that performs communi- Management Units (Integrated Control Display
cation, navigation, identification, and other mission Units) CNI-MUs (ICDU).
management functions. System integration allows
crew members to select, access, control, and display
Mission Computer (MC)
aircraft generated data. Crew interface with the CNI-
MS is mainly performed via the two Communication/ The MC controls the information exchanged between
Navigation/Identification - Management Units (Inte- all aircraft systems via MIL-STD-1553B data buses.
grated Control Display Units) CNI-MUs (ICDU), the The aircraft employs separate 1553B serial data
Communications/Navigation/Radio Panel (CNRP), buses to collect and distribute information to the vari-
and the two Single Avionics Management Units ous subsystems such as the bleed air control system
(SAMUs). and the fire and overheat detection system.
Each databus consists of two independent pairs of
The CNI-MS controls the following equipment: bus lines labeled left and right. Bus communications
are controlled by a Bus Controller (BC) which controls
• 2 – V/UHF communication radios,
the flow of information transmitted across the bus to
• 2 – HF communication radios, and from all the equipment on the bus. Remote Termi-
nals (RTs) are devices, which generate or receive the
• 2 – Embedded GPS/INS (EGI) units, data available on the bus under the direction of the
• 2 – VOR/ILS/MB navigation radios, BC. The BC controls data flow across the bus by
sending commands specifically addressed to individ-
• 2 – TACAN navigation radios, ual RTs. The RTs, upon receiving a command
addressed to them, transmit or receive the desired
• 1 – ADF navigation radio,
information.
• 1 – Identification Friend or Foe (IFF) transponder.

1-1
FAM.1C-27J-1A

All buses have Backup Bus Controllers (BBC) which Bus Interface Units (BIU)
perform the same functions as the RTs until the BC
fails, then the BBC assumes control of the data bus The BIUs function as an interface between the MCs
and functions as the BC. The crew is alerted to a BC and six of the 1553B data buses and equipment using
failure by ACAWS message, however there is no serial data. Normally the BIUs are configured as RTs
degraded data bus performance in the event of a BC to provide data acquisition and interface functions to
failure, since all buses have BBCs. Each MC serves the display, avionics and panel 1553B data buses.
as a Backup Bus Controller (BBC) for the other mis- The BIU converts serial data, discrete and analog volt-
sion computer. One MC is capable of performing the ages and aircraft synchro-transmitter signals into digi-
functions of both MCs with no reduction in capability. tal equivalents. The digitized signals are then sent to
the mission computer via the IPC bus for processing.
MC No.1 serves as the BC for the left avionics data
bus, left panel data bus, left display data bus and the Bus Adapter\ Units (BAU)
Interprocessor Communications (IPC) data bus. The
IPC bus is used to transfer information between the 2 BAUs interface discrete and analog signals from vari-
MCs and the 2 BIUs. MC No. 1 also serves as BBC ous aircraft components with the 1553B data bus
for the right avionics data bus, right panel bus and architecture. BAUs function as RTs controlled by the
right display data buses. 1553B data bus BC. Type I BAUs typically provide
MC No. 2 serves as the BC for three buses: right avi- control and power for control panels and switch lights
onics data bus, panel data bus and display data bus. It throughout the flight station and in the cargo compart-
also serves as BBC on four buses: left avionics data ment. Type II BAUs and the BIUs provide relay com-
bus, panel data bus, display data bus and IPC data mands and status feedback for their respective
buses. subordinate components.

If one MC fails, the other MC assumes control of all

Dual Slot - Data Transfer System (DS-DTS)
seven buses with no loss of system integration perfor-
mance. If both mission computers fail, the BIUs The DS-DTS is a solid-state digital system used to
assume the BC functions for the data buses they are upload mission-planning data to the CNI-SPs and to
connected to: BIU No. 1 to the left avionics, panel, and record maintenance trends, faults, and aircraft/engine
display buses and BIU No. 2 to the right avionics, performance data for review after flight. The DS-DTS
panel, and display buses. In this role, called BIU consists of one Dual Slot - Data Transfer Unit (DS-
backup mode, the BIUs perform a limited number of DTU), located on the copilot side panel and two
the mission computer flight critical functions to ensure Removable Memory Modules (RMMs). One RMM is
that enough capability is maintained to get the aircraft used to record maintenance information from the air-
home safely. CNI-SP 1 and 2 serve as the BC and craft to the Ground Maintenance System (GMS) for
BBC for the left and right communications/navigation maintenance trend analysis and must be installed for
(COMM/NAV) data buses. The MCs are treated as all flights. A second RMM, called a Mission Data Car-
RTs on the COMM/NAV data buses. tridge (MDC), is used to transfer mission-planning
data from the ground planning system to the aircraft.
The primary displays and controls for the MC and the
CNI-MS are the four CMDUs, one CNRP, and two
SAMUs. The CMDUs generate their own symbology CNI System Processors (CNI-SP)
and drive signals based on control signals and data The CNI-SPs contain the operational software that
received from the MC. Displayed information is allows control and utilization of the communications,
derived from aircraft systems, instrumentation, sen- navigation and identification equipment. The CNI-SPs
sors and crew inputs. The SAMUs and CNRP display control all the other CNI devices, integrating all inputs
alphanumeric text in the form of menus used to con- and outputs, and performing all the calculations nec-
trol operation of the avionics systems. essary to manage the communications and navigation
functions.
The avionics system must interface with a number of For redundancy, each CNI-SP has full functionality
aircraft systems (fuel system, flight controls, landing and calculates its own solutions independently, com-
gear, etc.) that are not digital. Bus Adapter Units paring its solutions with the other CNI-SP. Either CNI-
(BAU) are used for this purpose. SP can perform all the CNI functions should the other
CNI-SP fail. The MCs provide the CNI-SPs with nec-
essary inputs and send CNI-SP outputs to other air-
craft devices that need CNI information.

1-2
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

The CNI-SP performs all CNI-MS bus controller, mon- Each bus has a primary channel A and standby
itor, and synchronization functions for the left and right redundant channel B. In the event a component stops
COMM/NAV data buses. The COMM/NAV data buses communicating on the primary channel A, the CNI
interface the CNI-SPs with the MCs and the communi- annunciates the component bus A failure to the mis-
cations and navigation equipment. sion computer and switch communication for that
component to the standby redundant channel B.
The CNI-MS periodically polls component status on
Communication/Navigation/Identification - the standby redundant channel B to determine health
Management units (Integrated Control Display
Unit) CNI-MUs (ICDU) of the channel B. In the event a component does not
respond on channel B, the CNI-MS annunciates the
CNI-MUs (ICDU) (Figure 1-1) is the primary crew component bus B failure to the mission computer.
interface with the CNI-MS. The CNI-MU (ICDU) allows Data transfers on the buses occurs primarily on the
access to the flight management system, which con- same side. For example, communication radios desig-
trols all communication systems, navigation systems, nated HF 1, and V/UHF 1 receives tuning/mode con-
identification systems, tactical systems, TOLD compu- trol data and transmit tuning/mode status and BIT
tation and soft panels. Soft panels provides a backup data via the left 1553 bus. Exceptions to the on-side
means of controlling some of the aircraft control pan- data transfers are the MC and the CNI-MU (ICDU)s.
els (pilot and copilot lighting panels and radar control The CNI-MS provides MC redundancy data transfers
panel). These backup panels, with some minor excep- to the off-side MC in the event one MC fails. For
tions, are capable of emulating all the functions found example, if MC No. 2 fails on the right 1553 bus, then
on the corresponding control panels. The system also the CNI-MS transfers data to MC No. 1 via the right
provides a backup capability in the event of a cata- 1553 data bus.
strophic loss of the bus structure. A number of sub-
systems are intentionally not integrated with the
aircraft, such as Standby instruments and the Get Discrete Interfaces
Home Control, to provide an independent source of Hard-wired discrete interfaces provide CNI-MS direct
attitude information and radio communication in the control over certain functions/equipment independent
event of a total data bus failure. of the 1553B data buses. For example, the Remote
Radio Set Control (RRSC) panel provides indepen-
The CNI-MUs (ICDU) process display data from either dent communications tuning and control of the V/UHF
CNI-SP No. 1, CNI-SP No. 2 or the MC. These data No. 1 radios for emergency or backup operations.
are displayed in data fields on the CNI-MU (ICDU) dis- When the RRSC discrete is asserted (on MHIU trans-
play screen, adjacent to, above, and below the soft- mission selector switch set to BACKUP mode of oper-
keys. CNI-MS power-up default configuration is CNI- ation), the CNI-MS indicates MANUAL on the COMM
SP No. 1 controlling the pilot’s CNI-MU (ICDU) dis- TUNE INDEX page and tuned identifier field. The
play, CNI-SP No. 2 controlling the copilot’s CNI-MU CNI-MS also inhibits CNI-MU (ICDU) page branching
(ICDU) displays. The crew member can change SP to the COMM TUNE VU1 pages.
source selection via the SYSTEM CONTROL page. The discrete interfaces include input discretes from
the aircraft and CNI output discretes for the communi-
cation and navigation components.
SYSTEM INTERFACES
a. Input Discrete Interfaces: RRSC and the LOAD
The CNI-MS interfaces to aircraft panels, mission ENABLE switch (determines cold start power-up
computers and communications and navigation com- maintenance or normal operation).
ponents via the MIL-STD-1553B data buses and hard
b. Output Discrete Interfaces: V/UHF 1 radio power
wire discrete interfaces.
control, zeroize function and the V/UHF tone func-
tion.
MIL-STD-1553B Data Bus The zeroize function discrete provides V/UHF and
The 1553B data bus operations are command/ EGI zeroize control and is selectable via the
response, time division and digitally multiplexed. The ZEROIZE 1/2 page. The UHF TOD discrete provides
BC manages all data transfers on the bus by issuing command capability to UHF radios to load TOD for
appropriate transmit/receive command messages. HAVE QUICK II operations and is selectable via the
The components listen for valid transmit/receive com- U1 HAVE QUICK II 2/2 page. The V/UHF tone dis-
mands on the bus and respond with status and asso- crete provides control to activate the V/UHF time gen-
ciated data. erator and is selectable via the COMM TUNE VU1 (or
VU2) page.

1-3
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-1 Integrated Control Display Unit

1-4
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

SYSTEM FEATURES Built In Test (BIT)

The CNI-MS System Processor (SP) performs an ini-
Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) tial Power-up Built-In-Test (PBIT) and subsequent
Continuous Built-In-Test (CBITs). Additional ground
The CNI-MS stores selected, computed and crew-
maintenance/test BIT capabilities are available. BIT is
entered mission data, in NVM for various purposes,
to ensure hardware integrity during normal operation
including system initialization. NVM is data storage
and to support ground maintenance Initiated Built-In-
that remains after the aircraft is shut down after flight.
Test (IBIT). BIT errors detected in the hardware are
NVM includes the navigation database, the mission
classified critical for normal operation and result in the
database, CNI-MS data, Magnetic Variation (MAG
failed SP being reset repetitively as long as the BIT
VAR) tables and BIT detected failures. The navigation
error persists. PBIT and CBIT require no specific
database is accessed whenever the crew enters a
operator action. IBIT is not a flight crew function.
navaid or airfield identifier. The mission database is
Should a master reset occur, the crew may be
accessed whenever the crew enters a custom way-
required to operate the CNI-MS in single mode opera-
point identifier and includes:
tion.
• Flight plan (route 1 and route 2),
The CNI-SPs conduct data wrap-around tests to also
• Stored routes, ensure that LRU RTs on the bus are communicating
• Alternate flight route, properly. The BC transmits data words to each LRU
RT and the LRU RT is required to transmit the same
• Flight plan historical waypoints, data word back to the BC. The BC compares data
• Mark points, words received against the data words sent. Any dif-
ference constitutes a fault. If the LRU fails three con-
• Performance initialization data, secutive read-back tests, the BC sets the component
failed communications status bit.
• Take-off and landing data (TOLD),
• Communication radio preset lists, A watchdog timer prevents transmission on the data
bus from exceeding 800 microseconds. Because no
• Custom waypoints, valid transmission can be longer than 660 microsec-
• Inhibited navaids, onds, only a failed RT or BC could produce a trans-
mission longer than 800 microseconds. If the timer
• Parachute ballistic data. detects a longer transmission, the CNI-SP is reset by
a watchdog timer-generated interrupt. This feature
The CNI-MS validates the mission database stored in
prevents continuous transmission on the bus that
NVM prior to use. If the CNI-MS detects a corrupt mis-
would render the bus unusable for other transmis-
sion database, advisory messages notify the crew of
sions. In the event of a bus hang, the timeout monitor
the invalid condition.
causes the cycle to terminate and generate a proces-
CNI-MS data is accessed for initialization from a cold
sor fault.
start power-up and includes the following data:
• Last valid present position,
CNI-SP OPERATIONS
• Last navigation database effectivity cycle,
The CNI-MS automatically powers up when power is
• Last valid aircraft configuration, applied to the aircraft. The CNI-SP is automatically ini-
• Communication radio states, tialized at start-up processing. Start-up processing
includes warm/cold start determination and decision
• Navigation radio states, logic for determining the next mode of operation.
• Current magnetic variation table.
The CNI-SPs function in two operational modes: nor-
The CNI-MS uses the current superseding magnetic mal operational mode and ground maintenance
variation table in NVM, if valid. If the CNI-MS does not mode. The normal operational mode supports CNI-
have a valid magnetic variation table stored in NVM, MS flight/mission operations. Ground maintenance
CNI-MS will alert the crew. The CNI SP also records mode supports loading the Operational Flight Pro-
BIT detected failures in NVM. The first 10 failure faults gram (OFP), navigation database and magnetic varia-
detected in BIT can be read from NVM as a mainte- tion table and ground maintenance testing.
nance operation.

1-5
FAM.1C-27J-1A

The CNI-SPs can also operate in one of three redun- At this point, the two CNI-SPs determine if system
dancy modes: Dual (both CNI-SPs operating and syn- integrity allows operation in the dual redundancy
chronized), single active/inactive (one CNI-SP mode. The CNI-MUs (ICDU) initialize with the
operating) and independent (both CNI-SPs operating POWER UP page displayed.
but not synchronized).
Normal Operational Mode
System Start Up and Initialization
Cold starts with the LOAD ENABLE switch, located at
When aircraft power is applied to the CNI-MS, a start- the top of the Avionics Rack between the PMA port
up bootstrap program initializes and sequences CNI and the WX Radar Fill port, in the normal position,
equipment to an operational state. The bootstrap pro- results in CNI-SP performing a PBIT and entering the
gram initializes the CNI-SPs to a known functional CNI-MS operational mode. In the normal operational
state and determines whether a hot or cold start is mode the CNI-SP supports all CNI-MS flight/mission
required. A hot start is initiated when the CNI-SP is operations. Warm starts are non-discernible to the
recovering from a short-term power loss of less than operator as the CNI-SP returns all functionality estab-
50 microseconds. Short-term interrupts of this type do lished prior to the power interrupt. If a power interrup-
not cause loss of the selections and status of the sys- tion is significant, the CNI-SP performs a cold start
tem prior to the power interrupt. and branches to the next mode of operation based on
During a cold start the CNI-SPs initiate a PBIT and the state of the aircraft (ground versus flight) and the
delays entry to the operational state for approximately position of the LOAD ENABLE switch. Cold start
40 seconds. The bootstrap program delay allows MC branching to operational mode results in the following
initialization before synchronization with the CNI CNI management system initialization:
equipment.
a. The first powered CNI-SP defaults to the naviga-
When entering a cold start, the CNI-SPs check the
tion master operating in single CNI-SP operation.
data on the World Wide Navigational Database
All two CNI-MU (ICDU) displays initialize to the
(WWNDB) to assess valid dates and provide a CNI-
POWER-UP page.
MU (ICDU) annunciation to the crew.
b. The navigation master CNI-SP attempts re-syn-
Once start-up is complete, the CNI-SPs revert to the chronization with the other CNI-SP to establish
appropriate operational mode. The operational mode dual CNI-SP operations.
compares the current configuration of the WWNDB to
the previous power-up configuration stored in NVM to c. On the ground, the CNI-MS initializes all communi-
determine if it has been updated. If the WWNDB has cation radios and navigation radios to OFF.
been updated, the CNI-SPs clear all stored routes and d. While airborne, the CNI-MS initializes all communi-
inhibited NAVAIDs. Once this sequence is complete, cation radios and navigation radios to the last com-
system initialization proceeds as follows: manded state or ON if last state is unknown.
• The CNI-SPs configure the data bus Input/Output
Controller (IOC) as the COMM/NAV BC and the Ground Maintenance Mode
BBC depending on the hardware status (i.e., Dual,
Independent, or Single mode of operation). Cold starts with the LOAD ENABLE switch, located at
the top of the Avionics Rack between the PMA port
• The CNI-SPs initialize the HF and V/UHF commu- and the WX Radar Fill port, in the load position while
nication radios, and the LF-ADF, V/UHF DF, and the aircraft is on the ground, result in the CNI-SPs
TACAN navigation radios to the states directed by entering the maintenance mode. In maintenance
the mission flight plan. mode, the CNI-SPs are configured as MIL-STD-1553
The first CNI-SP that completes its power up remote terminals and then process Portable Mainte-
sequence successfully assumes control of both the nance Aid (PMA) Memory Loader and Verifier (MLV)
left and right COMM/NAV buses. When the second operations for loading the CNI-SP Operational Flight
CNI-SP completes its power up sequence success- Program (OFP), navigation database, or magnetic
fully, the two units exchange software version num- variation table. In maintenance mode the CNI-SP also
bers to determine if they are both running the same supports PMA test mode operations for reporting
software. If these agree, the CNI-SP in control of the detailed PBIT results, executing and reporting IBIT
buses relinquishes control of one bus to the other results, input and output discrete test and Automatic
CNI-SP such that each CNI-SP then controls the on- Test Program (ATP) bus control tests.
side bus.

1-6
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

After completing PMA operations the operator must In active single mode, the CNI-SP is operating in a
return the aircraft LOAD ENABLE switch to normal normal manner and controls the CNI-MS. Active sin-
and cycle CNI-SP power to return to the operational gle mode is the default mode initially set when the
mode. CNI-SP is powered on. Active single mode is also set
when a CNI-SP assumes control of the offside
COMM/NAV bus. In this mode, the CNI-SP supports
Dual Redundancy Mode Operations all CNI-MS operations including maintenance of
Dual operation is the normal CNI-SP operating mode. COMM/NAV bus redundancy.
The CNI-SPs attain dual mode when both CNI-SPs
are operating, are communicating with each other, At power up, a CNI-SP begins operating in the active
and are synchronized. To achieve dual mode operat- single mode to determine whether it can and should
ing, the following criteria must be met: assume control of the COMM/NAV bus. When the
CNI-SP detects no activity by the other CNI-SP, it
a. The navigation databases are identical or both assumes control of both left and right buses. When a
navigation databases are invalid. CNI-SP detects activity by the other CNI-SP, it verifies
b. The mission databases are identical. the other CNI-SP has the same OFP version. When
OFPs compare, the CNI-SP assumes control of the
c. Both CNI-SPs are periodically exchanging contin- onside COMM/NAV bus and backup control of the off-
uous cross load data. Cross load data includes: side bus. When the OFPs do not compare, the last
CNI-SP to power up enters the inactive single mode.
• Navigation radio synchronization data,
In inactive single mode, each CNI-SP is quietly idling
• Flight Plan synchronization data, in a self-imposed state of functional isolation. In this
mode, the CNI-SP does not communicate with, con-
• Navigation database synchronization data, trol, or monitor any external devices.
• Present position validity,
• Lateral guidance engaged state, Independent Redundancy Mode Operations

• Master CNI-SP flag, If the CNI-SPs determine that a difference exists

between the navigation or mission databases, the
• Sequence flight plan data, CNI-SPs wait (independent mode operation) until the
operator corrects the difference. In essence, during
• CNI-MU (ICDU) page identifiers.
independent operation both CNI-SPs are operating in
During normal (dual mode) operations, each CNI-SP a normal manner, and are communicating, but they
acts as the BC for the on-side (left for CNI-SP1 and are not synchronized. The crew can initiate a transfer
right for CNI-SP2) COMM/NAV bus and BBC for the of the navigation and/or mission databases to allow
off-side bus (right for CNI-SP1 and left for CNI-SP2). dual operation, or the crew can configure for single
In dual mode, each CNI-SP communicates with the operation by powering off one of the CNI-SPs.
other CNI-SP to establish and maintain primary navi-
gation and guidance control, data redundancy, and The independent mode is actually a transitional state
synchronization between the two computed naviga- that exists when both CNI-SPs are operating properly,
tion solutions. but a mismatch in navigation or mission database
If, during dual mode operation, a BC detects no data exists. The operator is required to take some
responses and the BBC detects no messages on a action to allow CNI-SP selection of dual or single
COMM/NAV bus, the BC relinquishes control of the mode operation. In independent mode, the CNI-SPs
bus, the BBC assumes control, and further bus control periodically exchange cross load data.
handoff is inhibited. (The BBC enters the active single
mode, and the BC enters the inactive single mode.)

Single Active/Inactive Redundancy Mode

Operations
The single mode consists of two sub modes, active
single and inactive single. Either CNI-SP is capable of
controlling the left and right COMM/NAV data buses.
When a single CNI-SP is operational (single mode), it
assumes control of both COMM/NAV data buses.

1-7
FAM.1C-27J-1A

INTEGRATED NAVIGATION To exclude a particular sensor from the CNI-MS solu-

tion, the operator can press the soft-key adjacent to
SOLUTION the name of the sensor. The CNI-MS will then ignore
that sensor when calculating the CNI-MS position and
return the display name to large font, standard video.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This sensor will not be used in any navigation solution
The Integrated Navigation subsystem (INAV) is con- until re-selected.
figured with its primary mode of operation as a dual
system with a pilot side and a copilot side. Each of A sensor which is displayed in small font in not avail-
these modes is defined by the navigation sensors able for use in the CNI-MS solution and cannot be
designated for use, the method by which the CNI Sys- designated by the crew.
tem Processors select sensor data, and the method of
coordination between the two CNI System Proces-
sors.
NAVIGATION SOLUTION SELECTION
Once the sensors have been designated, the crew The NAV CTRL function allows for either manual or
then selects the mode (automatic or manual) by which automatic solution selections. The automatic mode is
the CNI-MS processes data from among those sen- preferred unless for operational or tactical reasons a
sors. The CNI-MS determines the position of the air- specific navigation solution is preferred. In manual,
craft using data provided by these sensors to create the crew selects the solution that is available for a par-
two distinct navigation solutions. The CNI-MS pro- ticular CNI-SP: EGI, INS, GPS or INS/RAD. In auto-
cesses navigation sensor data directly, either auto- matic the CNI-MS selects the best navigation solution
matically or according to crew input. Once processed, from among all of the designated navigation solutions.
the CNI-MS makes one navigation position available
to aircraft systems for navigation purposes according Manual selection of any specific navigation solution is
to crew selection (master ship solution). performed through soft-key selection on the INAV
CTRL SOLN 1/3 page. Any prompt for a solution that
is available for selection is displayed in large font, nor-
NAVIGATION SENSOR SELECTION mal video on the CNI-MU (ICDU). If the selection is
The crew must first designate the sensors that the not available (e.g. the CNI-MS can not activate that
CNI-MS may use for determining the aircraft position. mode for any reason) then the mode prompt is dis-
The sensors include: played in small font, normal video. A navigation solu-
tion is available if its sensors have been designated.
• 2 EGIs, each of which includes a GPS and an INS,
Automatic selection is performed by selecting
• 2 TACAN Radios,
AUTONAV soft-key on the POWER UP page or AUTO
• 2 VOR Radios, soft-key on the INAV 1 (or 2) CTRL SOLN 1/3 page.
The best solution is determined to be the one that has
• Distributed Air Data Systems (DADS). the lowest Figure Of Merit (FOM) combined with the
Except for air data, crew selection of available sen- lowest value for Estimated Horizontal Error (EHE). If
sors for the CNI-MS navigation solution is accom- two solutions have the same values, then the selec-
plished via the NAV CTRL function. Air data inputs are tion is made on the basis of solution preference. The
automatically selected from the DADS via logic asso- order of preference for selection is EGI, INS/RADIO,
ciated with the selected master ship solution and the INS, and finally, GPS.
selected DAFD. The crew, via the INAV CTRL SEN-
SORS 2/3 page in the CNI-MU (ICDU), can designate Navigation solutions can be made unavailable for
the allowable individual navigation sensors. Crew AUTO selection by deselecting their contributing sen-
members may designate the on-side INS, on-side sor(s). In AUTONAV, the CNI-MS initiates the quickest
GPS, either side TACAN and VOR for use in CNI-MS method of obtaining a navigation solution that meets
navigation solution. When designated, the CNI-MS the full specification for quality. This includes initiating
can use a sensor to generate or display a navigation navigation system alignment, switching to navigation
solution. Navigation sensors available for use in the mode when the alignment is complete and continuous
CNI-MS solution are displayed using large font in monitoring of solution accuracy in flight.
standard video. Selecting the soft-key adjacent to the
sensor name will cause the CNI-MS to designate that
sensor for use, and to change the display of its name
to large font, inverse video.

1-8
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

If the navigation sensors are in a condition where GPS operation is not dependent on or affected by the
AUTONAV can not be completed, that is, where a method of selection (manual or automatic).
valid solution cannot be obtained with the sensors
available to the CNI-MS, then the operator is
prompted to correct the conditions before AUTONAV INS Solution
can be performed. Such a condition occurs if the time The INS solution provides free inertial navigation and
and date are not entered, or if no present position is attitude results. In this solution, the INS is allowed to
available and selected. drift at its free, uncorrected rate. As a result, the accu-
If the AUTONAV process results in computation and racy of this navigation solution is affected over time by
selection of a navigation solution, that solution is drift. The INS, in conjunction with inputs from the air
annunciated on the INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page by data computer, provides a complete set of navigation
illuminating (large font, inverse video) the prompt that and attitude data, irrespective of other navigation sen-
indicates the selected solution. The prompt for the sors. Crew selection of the INS solution is performed
AUTO selection function (the AUTO/MAN soft-key) is through the following sequence.
also illuminated.
AUTONAV can only be selected once for any opera- a. Access the INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page.
tional sequence (power up) of the CNI-MS. b. Select INS by depressing the soft-key adjacent to
the INS prompt.
EGI Solution If the AUTO selection function is active, selection of
The EGI solution is the primary navigation solution of the INS solution causes the AUTO selection feature to
the CNI-MS subsystem. In this navigation solution, the terminate and the MAN selection to illuminate.
optimal solution is obtained from the EGI for use in the INS operation is not dependent on or affected by the
aircraft. This solution results from optimal mixing of method of selection (manual or automatic).
GPS, INS, and DADS data using a Kalman Filter.
Crew selection of the EGI solution is performed INS/RADIO Solution
through the following sequence.
The INS/RADIO solution provides a solution that is
a. Access the INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page. based on radio DME-DME or DME - bearing update to
b. Select EGI by depressing the soft-key adjacent to the free inertial solution, providing continuous smooth
the EGI prompt. data through periods of navaid signal loss. In order to
use this solution, the navigation radios must be pow-
If the AUTO selection function is active (AUTO/MAN ered on and selected for use. This is the only solution
soft-key on the INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page displays that is calculated totally within the CNI-MS. Crew
AUTO), then selection of the EGI mode causes the selection of the INS/RADIO solution is performed
AUTO selection feature to terminate and the MAN through the following sequence.
selection to illuminate.
EGI operation is not dependent on or affected by the a. Access the INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page.
method of selection (manual or automatic). b. Select INS/RAD by depressing the soft-key adja-
cent to the INS/RAD prompt.
GPS Solution If the AUTO selection function is active, selection of
The GPS solution computes a set of navigation data the INS/RAD solution causes the AUTO selection fea-
obtained from the GPS receiver for use in determining ture to terminate and the MAN selection to illuminate.
the aircraft position and velocity. INS/RADIO operation is not dependent on or affected
Crew selection of the GPS solution is performed by the method of selection (manual or automatic).
through the following sequence.
a. Access the INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page. CNI SP Redundancy Modes versus the
Navigation Solution
b. Select GPS by depressing the soft-key adjacent to
the GPS prompt. Each CNI-SP references its own set of primary sen-
sors and maintains or computes its own navigation
If the AUTO selection function is active, selection of solution, irrespective of the navigation solution of the
the GPS solution causes the AUTO selection feature opposite CNI-SP. It is possible for each CNI-SP to
to terminate and the MAN selection to illuminate. have different navigation solutions based on the navi-
gation sensors selected for that CNI-SP.

1-9
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Master Ship Solution MANUAL UPDATE (OVERFLY UPDATE)

The navigation solution that is used by the aircraft Entry to the manual position update is initiated by
systems is called the master ship solution. Selection entering a reference position on the POSITION
of the master ship solution is performed through set- UPDATE page. An Offset Aim Point (OAP) may also
tings made on the SAMU. Crews may choose either be used for the reference position. The operator can
INAV1 or INAV2, designating the pilot (INAV1) or the overwrite this position by using any normal form of
copilot (INAV2) navigation solution as the master ship position entry (latitude/longitude, navigation or custom
solution. The crew selects the master ship solution via database, PBD, or PBPB). Once the reference posi-
the PFD page (INAV 1/2 soft-key) on either SAMU. tion is established and the PPOS FREEZE soft-key is
Sensors that make up this INAV solution are selected activated, the CNI-MS then places itself in the MAN-
via the NAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page on the respective UAL POSITION UPDATE and computes the position
CNI-MU (ICDU). difference between the reference position and the cur-
rent frozen position. The position difference is not
applied to any navigation solution until the operator
Position Update accepts it.
The navigation solution has provisions for aircrew initi-
ated position updates. These updates are used to add Two ACCEPT prompts are presented, one for each
a position bias to the EGI navigation solution. Under EGI. Activation of the soft-key adjacent to either
normal circumstances, there is no requirement for the ACCEPT prompt causes the CNI-MS to add the dis-
crew to perform such updates and the use of this played position difference to the indicated EGI solu-
function must carefully be considered as it may lead to tion. The other EGI navigation solution is left
a degraded navigation solution. unchanged, and the computed bias (position differ-
This is particularly true if GPS position data is avail- ence) is applied to the selected solution only.
able since the accuracy of this sensor is normally far
greater than any possible manual update. The subtle NOTE
inaccuracies of unverified survey points and chart
printing combined with position round off errors and Position updates applied to the EGI pro-
physical overflight limitations can easily introduce viding the current ship solution may
navigation errors of 500 yards or more. Even an cause a map shift. If the autopilot is en-
unkeyed GPS receiver used for position updates is gaged and is tracking the INAV solution,
generally more accurate than a crew-entered update. the aircraft may initiate an uncommanded
In the absence of GPS position data, crew initiated turn.
position updates can be one of the most accurate
means of navigation, especially for flights of long The procedure for update and acceptance of the bias
duration or outside radio navaid coverage. values can be performed as many times as desired.
Each subsequent bias is summed with all prior bias
There are three methods for placing this bias value on values to create a final set of bias values.
the current EGI solution updates are not available for Before the crew can apply a new bias value, the old
the other navigation solutions. These methods are value, the frozen position, must be deleted. When this
manual, cursor, and quick cursor modes. The position is done, the FREEZE prompt is shown in large font,
update function is performed on the POSITION indicating that a new freeze position can be selected.
UPDATE page. The position update process allows Once a position update has been accepted, a CLEAR
the crew to modify the current navigation solution prompt appears adjacent to that EGI solution. The
when the EGI solution has been selected. In all cases, update bias value can be removed from the EGI solu-
the position update bias value is applied to the naviga- tion by activating the CLEAR prompt. The CLEAR
tion solution output by the CNI-MS (displayed on CNI- operation erases all biases that have been previously
MU (ICDU), sent to PFD, etc.), while the internal EGI accepted in the CNI-MS.
solution remains unaffected. This allows position
updates to be applied and canceled as desired with-
CURSOR UPDATE
out disturbing the internal EGI navigation solution. When cursor is selected for position update, the
Application of any navigational bias to the EGI posi- update function must be initialized by selection of a
tion is signified by a U displayed adjacent to the EGI reference position which corresponds to the predeter-
label on the CNI-MU (ICDU). mined position of a cursor target. As for the case of
manual update, any valid position definition can be
used.

1-10
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Once the reference position is established, cursor is This bias remains active until QUICK is deactivated
activated by use of the switches on the radar cursor through the radar cursor control or until a new bias is
control panel. indicated by the crew through use of selections on the
radar cursor controller.
Using the cursor controller for the Low Power Color
Radar (LPCR), the crew can designate an identifiable The crew has the option of accepting this position dif-
point, and the LPCR will calculate the latitude and lon- ference for the purpose of making the bias perma-
gitude of the cursor position based on the current nent. A permanent bias remains in force until cleared
Master ship solution. Once the position calculation is by the operator. Two ACCEPT prompts are presented
complete, the cursor control transmits these coordi- to the operator when a QUICK bias is active: one for
nates to the mission computer, which then relays the EGI 1 and one for EGI 2. Activation of the soft-key
data to the CNI-SP. The position difference between adjacent to either ACCEPT prompt causes the CNI-
the reference position and the computed cursor posi- MS to add the displayed position difference to the EGI
tion is displayed on the CNI-MU (ICDU). The crew solution indicated. The other EGI navigation solution
then has the option of accepting this position differ- is left unchanged, and the computed bias (position dif-
ence for the purpose of updating the navigation posi- ference) is applied to the selected solution only.
tion. As in the manual update method, two ACCEPT
prompts are presented. Activation of the soft-key adja-
cent to either ACCEPT prompt causes the CNI-MS to Offset Aim Point (OAP) Management
add the displayed position difference to the EGI solu- OAPs are earth-referenced locations that are defined
tion indicated. The other EGI navigation solution is left by crew entry or by data upload. An OAP is used for
unchanged, and the computed bias (position differ- establishing a reference position in performing a posi-
ence) is applied to the selected solution only. tion update, either in the manual mode or in one of the
cursor modes. OAPs are maintained in a list on the
Designation of a new cursor position can be per- CURSOR TARGET pages, accessible through the
formed at any time, whether the prior position bias has POSITION UPDATE page or from the INDEX 2/2
been accepted or not. BIAS values from cursor and page. Once accessed, the CURSOR TARGET pages
manual updates can be mixed in any manner desired. display a list of offset aim points. Each OAP contains
An accepted bias value from any source is added to an identifier, the OAP latitude and longitude, and the
the existing bias in a vector manner to result in a final OAP elevation.
summed bias. Selecting CLEAR erases all summed
biases, leaving the navigation solution in an unbiased OAP ENTRY
condition.
Entries into the OAP list are made through the keypad
QUICK CURSOR UPDATE on the CNI-MU (ICDU), and the characters entered
are placed in the OAP list through activation of soft-
In a similar manner to both manual and cursor keys. The entry consists of a waypoint identifier. Once
updates, when QUICK is selected for position update, entered, the CNI-MS fills in the latitude and longitude
the update function must be initialized by selection of values for that identifier, and that identifier is added to
a reference position. As for the case of manual the OAP list. If the identifier entered is not contained
update, any method of position entry can be used. in the database of identified waypoints currently in the
Once the reference position is established, the QUICK system, then the CUSTOM DATA page is displayed
position update is activated by use of the buttons on on the CNI-MU (ICDU). The operator can now enter a
the radar cursor controller. custom waypoint that defines the desired OAP.

Using the cursor controller for the LPCR, the crew can OAP SELECTION FOR UPDATE
select an identifiable point, and the LPCR calculates
the latitude and longitude of the cursor position based Using the CURSOR TARGET page the operator can
on the current master ship solution. Once complete, select any OAP listed by the normal down-select pro-
the LPCR will transmit these coordinates to the mis- cedure. This identified OAP can be placed in the REF-
sion computer, which then relay the data to the CNI- ERENCE POSITION field on the POSITION UPDATE
SP. The position difference between the reference page by returning to that page and selecting soft-key
position and the LPCR-computed position is displayed L3, placing the down selected OAP position into the
on the CNI-MU (ICDU), and the calculated bias value reference position.
is immediately applied to the active navigation solu-
tion creating a temporary position bias.

1-11
FAM.1C-27J-1A

OAP DELETION While the avionics system allows for flexible, real-time
flight planning, the system is designed to allow crews
Deletion of an OAP is performed on the CURSOR or other operations personnel to preplan missions
TARGET page. The DEL key is selected and then the using a separate, computer-based mission planning
soft-key adjacent to the desired OAP is selected. The system. Mission plans created on this system are
CNI-MS then deletes that OAP from the list. stored on a Data Transfer Cartridge (DTC) RMM and
uploaded to the aircraft prior to flight.

The crew must ensure that the uploaded flight plans

FLIGHT PLANNING are accurate and still meet the needs of the mission.
Crews may need to change uploaded data based on
actual conditions during preflight. Such changes may
GENERAL FLIGHT PLANNING PROCEDURES include differences in aircraft weight or drag because
of aircraft confuguration, or TOLD modifications (e.g.,
Flight planning consists of creating a lateral and verti-
bleed air configuration) because of changes in atmo-
cal flight path required for mission completion.
spheric conditions.
The crew has the ability to define two completely dif-
ferent flight plans using ROUTE 1 and ROUTE 2.
Crews can also plan missions while at the aircraft, and
These routes contain an origin airfield, destination air-
may employ different techniques that minimize ground
field, and an alternate airfield (if desired).
time. For example, on cross country flights when fuel
Waypoints may inserted and connected in the routes
is not a concern, a flight plan can be quickly planned
by using any valid combination of waypoint descrip-
in the cockpit by loading only the departure airport,
tions (Table 1). Partial route segments may also
destination, and the first few waypoints of the flight
inserted in each route using the STORED ROUTE
plan. The additional points may be loaded once the
function.
aircraft is at cruise altitude after any direct routing is
approved by air traffic control.
Proper flight planning is essential for two-pilot opera-
A discontinuity is a segment in the flight plan where
tions and for effective use of the avionics.
there is no lateral flight plan definition (Table 2).

Table 1 Waypoint descriptions

Term Definition

Flight Plan Waypoint A flight plan waypoint has an associated identifier, label, type, definition string,
procedure identifier, and location. Flight Plan waypoints are one to five char-
acters long.

Airport A valid four-character airport waypoint identifier matched, by the CNI-MS, with
an airport identifier in the valid navigation database retrieves the airport data.
An invalid airport identifier match results in the NOT AN AIRPORT message
being displayed.

Runway A runway waypoint identifier is an alphanumeric string RWnns, where “nn” is

the runway identifier and “s” is the runway suffix associated with the runway of
the associated airport in the WWNDB.

NAVAID A three-character identifier for a TACAN or VOR facility or waypoint stored in

the WWNDB.

ILS/MLS Four-character identifier stored in the WWNDB.

Named Waypoint A five-character identifier stored in the WWNDB. Named waypoints in the
WWNDB include named intersection waypoints, non-directional beacons
(NDB), and named procedure waypoints.

1-12
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 1 Waypoint descriptions (Continued)

Term Definition

Unnamed waypoints Unnamed waypoints have no identifiers and are defined by a latitude/longi-
tude in the WWNDB.

Custom Waypoint A three- to five-character identifier stored in the custom database. Custom
waypoints are defined by specifying a unique identifier (i.e., identifier not
stored in the WWNDB), and a position. An elevation can also be specified for
any custom waypoint that is created by the operator. The position can be
defined in the following ways:
– Bearing and range from a referenced waypoint (PBD).
– Intersection of bearings from two referenced waypoints (PBPB).
– Position (latitude/longitude).
– Military Grid Reference System position (MGRS).

Temporary Waypoint A waypoint that cannot be retrieved once deleted. All temporary waypoints
start with a *. Temporary waypoints may be defined by one of four methods:
– Place/Bearing/ A PBD waypoint is defined by a bearing and distance referenced from a way-
Distance (PBD) point. These waypoints have unique waypoint identifiers named * PBnn,
Waypoint where “nn” are numbers from 01 to 99 that are assigned by the CNI-MS. The
BEARING MUST BE IN TRUE message is displayed if the PBD waypoint
location falls in the polar region and a magnetic bearing entry is used to create
the temporary waypoint.
– Place/Bearing/ A waypoint defined by two bearings and two reference waypoints. Place/bear-
Place/Bearing ing/place/bearing waypoints have unique waypoint identifiers named * RRnn,
(PBPB) Waypoint where “nn” are numbers from 01 to 99 assigned by the CNI-MS.
– Latitude/Longitude A waypoint defined by a latitude/longitude position. Latitude/Longitude way-
Waypoint points have unique waypoint identifiers named * LLnn, where “nn” are num-
bers from 01 to 99 assigned by the CNI-MS.
– MGRS Waypoint A waypoint defined by the Military Grid Reference System (MGRS). MGRS
waypoints have a unique waypoint identifier named * MGnn, where “nn” are
numbers from 01 to 99 assigned by the CNI-MS.

Computed Waypoints Waypoints determined by the CNI-SP as a result of specific operator actions.
Specific operator actions include direct-to, course intercept, and present posi-
tion hold. Intercept and altitude termination leg types specifically, heading
from a fix to an intercept (VI leg), heading from a fix to an altitude (VA leg),
and course from a fix to an altitude (FA leg) will also result in the creation of
computed waypoints by the CNI-MS. These waypoints may be embedded in
procedures such as SIDs and STARs.
– Altitude Waypoints Waypoints with leg types of heading from a fix to an altitude (VA leg) and
course from a fix to an altitude (FA leg). These waypoints have unique way-
point identifiers named * ALTnn, where “nn” are numbers from 01 to 99
assigned by the CNI-MS.
– Intercept Waypoints Waypoints with leg type of heading from a fix to an intercept (VI leg). These
waypoints have unique waypoint identifiers named * INTnn, where “nn” are
numbers from 01 to 99 assigned by the CNI-MS.

1-13
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 1 Waypoint descriptions (Continued)

Term Definition

Waypoint Label A two-character label can be added to a waypoint by entering the label fol-
lowed by / at the desired waypoint, (i.e., A2/, XX/, AB/). A label can be
changed by entering the new label followed by / at the label/waypoint to be
changed. Labels attached to waypoints cannot be removed without deleting
the label/waypoint combination. The DUPLICATE LABEL message is dis-
played when attempting to enter a label that is already in the flight plan.

Soft Waypoint A waypoint defined by a position computed by the CNI-MS where the way-
point is not displayed on the LEGS or ROUTE pages. These include the Slow
Down point (SD) for an airdrop profile, vertical profile waypoints such as Top
of Climb (TOC), Top of Descent (TOD), and Bottom of Descent (BOD) points,
and Equal Time Point (ETP). Although not displayed on the LEGS and
ROUTE pages, they are displayed as solid dots on the NAV-Radar display
flight plan overlay.

Table 2 Flight Plan Discontinuity

Term Definition

Flight Plan Discontinuity A discontinuity is a segment in the flight plan where there is no lateral flight
plan definition. A discontinuity may exist within the primary flight plan legs.
Discontinuities can be the result of some revisions to the flight plan. Some
procedures and airways contain discontinuities. However, there must be a lat-
eral definition prior to, and following, a discontinuity. Since there are some
times when it is necessary to have a discontinuity, the following rules apply:
a. When adding or deleting a single waypoint, no discontinuity is inserted in
the flight plan. The flight plan is linked directly between the waypoints. De-
leting several waypoints at a time does not cause a discontinuity.
b. When linking flight plans or inserting a procedure, there is no discontinuity
when there is a common waypoint. If there is not a common waypoint, the
inserted flight plan or procedure is linked at the point of insertion but has a
discontinuity at the end. For example, if the last waypoint of a SID is also a
waypoint in the flight plan, the flight plan and procedure are linked at that
waypoint with no discontinuity. If the last waypoint of a SID is not also in
the flight plan, there is a discontinuity between the SID and the flight plan.
c. Waypoints inserted from a stored flight plan can be deleted under the same
operation for deleting waypoints. This operation causes no discontinuity.
d. A DIRECT-TO to a waypoint on the flight plan does not cause a disconti-
nuity, even though several waypoints may be deleted or a single waypoint
added.
e. If an airway plus a waypoint is inserted in the flight plan, there is no discon-
tinuity since the crew has to specify the end point and the point of insertion.
f. If an arrival or departure procedure from the WWNDB has a discontinuity
defined, a discontinuity is placed in the flight plan where it exists in the pro-
cedure.
g. When a runway is inserted as a waypoint at the destination or alternate
destination, a discontinuity is placed before the runway waypoint.

1-14
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 2 Flight Plan Discontinuity (Continued)

Term Definition

h. When the first waypoint of an arrival procedure (either a STAR transition,

STAR, or runway transition waypoint) does not match the last waypoint in
the flight plan, then a discontinuity is inserted into the flight plan between
the last flight plan waypoint and the first arrival procedure waypoint.

NOTE
A discontinuity can be cleared using the route bypass operation
or the delete function key, if the discontinuity is not within a SID or
STAR procedure or the discontinuity does not precede a runway.
If the discontinuity is within a SID or STAR procedure and an at-
tempt to clear the discontinuity is made, the NOT ALLOWED
message is displayed.

Flight Plan Waypoint Verification Flight Plan Size

Stored routes retrieved from the custom database are
NOTE
verified when they are inserted into a flight plan as fol-
lows. The source waypoint is defined as the waypoint Large flight plans, consisting of more than
retrieved from the stored route. 120 waypoints, should not be entered in
a. When the retrieved waypoint to be inserted into the route 1 and route 2 simultaneously. When
flight plan is a navaid, airport, runway or named FLIGHT PLAN FULL message is dis-
waypoint and the waypoint does not match its ref- played, crews should ensure the other
erence in the WWNDB, a # character is inserted at route contains less than 60 waypoints.
the beginning of the waypoint identifier. The
source waypoint data is used, and the FPL CON- There is a limit of 60 waypoint spaces allotted for the
TAINS INVALID WPT message is displayed. flight plan and the alternate flight plan including the
primary and alternate destinations. If a flight plan revi-
b. When the retrieved custom waypoint to be inserted sion causes the total number of waypoints to exceed
into the flight plan does not match its reference in 60, the CNI-MS does not perform the flight plan revi-
the custom database, a # character is inserted at sion and displays the FLIGHT PLAN FULL message.
the beginning of the waypoint identifier. The For example, if a SID, STAR, AIRWAY, or stored flight
source waypoint is used and the FPL CONTAINS plan added to a flight plan causes the limit to be
INVALID WPT message is displayed. exceeded, none of the inserted waypoints are added
to the flight plan.
c. When the retrieved waypoint to be inserted into the
flight plan is a mark point and the waypoint does
not match an existing mark point, the # character Waypoint History
replaces the character at the beginning of the way-
point identifier. The source mark point data is used, The active flight plan is partitioned into the flight plan
and the FPL CONTAINS INVALID WPT message waypoints and the historical waypoints. A waypoint
is displayed. becomes a historical waypoint when it is sequenced
by lateral guidance. The CNI-MS can store and dis-
d. When the retrieved waypoint to be inserted into the play up to five historical waypoints on the LEGS HIST
flight plan is a temporary waypoint, (i.e., PBD, LL, page.
MGRS, or RR waypoints), the # character replaces
the character at the beginning of the waypoint
identifier. Entering a Flight Plan via the Data Transfer
Cartridge
Flight plan data is most quickly uploaded via the DTC
RMM. The DATA TRANSFER pages can be accessed
from the POWER UP page.

1-15
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Crews have the ability to upload 9 different subsets of A CNI message will inform the crew of this condition
data to the CNI-MS: route 1, route 2, TOLD, communi- and a data transfer can be accomplished using the
cation presets, stored routes, custom waypoints, DATA TRANSFER 3/3 page.
inhibited navaids, or airdrop parachute data.
Any combination of data sets may be uploaded to the
CNI by individually selecting that data set. Selection of Entering a Flight Plan via the CNI-MU (ICDU)
the ALL soft-key will upload all available data. Data When manually entering a flight plan, the crew must
that is available for upload is indicated on the DATA first enter an origin and a destination, in either inactive
TRANSFER page in large font, normal video. Labels route 1 or route 2.
shown in small font indicate that no data is available The crew must then enter individual waypoints or
for upload. Selection of a data set causes the label to strings of waypoints to construct the route between
be displayed in large font, inverse video. Once the origin and destination. Once the primary route is
selected, the LOAD soft-key will initiate the data entered, the operator may enter an alternate destina-
upload. tion as well as a flight plan to the alternate.

The length of time required for the download is a func- The following applies to manual flight plan entry:
tion of the amount of data selected from upload. Multi-
ple DTCs can be used to upload data. For example, a. Origin and destination: An origin or destination can
local unit data for communication presets, stored be any waypoint contained in the database (i.e.,
routes, and custom waypoints might be loaded from NAVAIDS, crew-defined waypoints, temporary
one DTC, while mission specific route data could be waypoints, or other named waypoints), except run-
uploaded from another DTC. Crews must ensure all way identifiers. Origins and destinations are nor-
uploaded data meets actual mission requirements for mally airport identifiers and are entered in the
each flight. Route Plan (RTE1/RTE2) page.

ORIGIN RUNWAY INSERTION

NOTE
When a runway associated with the flight plan origin
• Any time a file is selected for upload airport is selected and the flight plan does not contain
to the CNI-MS, corresponding data a SID procedure, the runway is inserted into the
present in NVM will be purged. All selected flight plan as the first waypoint. When a run-
data files are uploaded in this man- way identifier is entered for the origin airport and the
ner. runway identifier does not describe a runway associ-
ated with the origin airport, then the runway is not
• Custom chute ballistic files that are
inserted and the RUNWAY NOT FOUND message is
uploaded do not replace the 20 stan-
displayed. If a runway associated with the flight plan
dard chutes contained in the CNI-MS
origin airport is selected, the flight plan contains a SID
software. A custom chute file image
procedure, and the SID exists for the new runway
loaded into NVM is used as a priority
then the runway is replaced and the SID procedure
for all CARP INIT pages. The stan-
legs are reconstructed. When a SID does not exist for
dard chute file can only be accessed
the new runway the RUNWAY N/A FOR SID message
when custom chute file is not present.
is displayed.
If a standard chute file is required for
a CARP mission, then a custom chute SID INSERTION
file should be assembled for the stan-
dard chute ballistic when custom Selecting a new SID in the selected flight plan when a
chute files are loaded. departure procedure already exists in the selected
flight plan causes the existing SID waypoints to be
• DATA TRANSFER 1/3 and 2/3 pages deleted. If a runway transition exists, the runway tran-
are not operational. sition waypoints are inserted after the runway way-
During normal dual operation of the CNI-MS, point. When a runway transition is inserted, the SID
uploaded data is transferred between both CNI-SPs. waypoints are inserted following the last waypoint of
Under certain conditions, the crew may need to manu- the runway transition. If a SID transition is selected,
ally initiate data transfers between the CNI-SPs. the SID transition waypoints are inserted into the flight
These transfers are required when the CNI-SPs plan following the last waypoint of the SID.
power up and remain in the independent mode of
operation.

1-16
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NOTE selected flight plan as the last waypoint in the alter-

nate route.
Published data in printed form is the only
certified source for navigational data. FLIGHT PLAN ALTERNATE DESTINATION
Navigational databases provide a supple-
mentary means of navigational data The flight plan to the alternate destination is an exten-
where published data exists. Crews are sion of the primary flight plan and have as its origin,
advised to continue to verify and cross- the primary destination. When a runway associated
check all FMS guidance with published with the flight plan alternate destination airport is
data, using primary means of navigation selected, the runway is inserted into the selected flight
(e.g., navigation radios). plan as the last waypoint in the alternate route.

WAYPOINT INSERTION
DESTINATION RUNWAY INSERTION
Individual waypoints may be inserted in the route on
When a runway associated with the flight plan primary either the ROUTE or LEGS pages. If a waypoint is
destination airport is selected, the runway is inserted entered that does not have a unique identifier, the
into the selected flight plan as the last waypoint in the WAYPOINT SELECT page is displayed and the oper-
primary route. ator is challenged to choose the correct waypoint out
STAR INSERTION of a list of waypoints with the same name. Upon
selection of the desired waypoint location, the CNI-
Selecting a new STAR in the selected flight plan when MU (ICDU) returns to the page on which the waypoint
an arrival procedure already exists in the selected insertion was originally attempted.
flight plan causes the existing STAR waypoints to be
deleted. When a STAR transition is selected, the AIRWAYS
STAR transition waypoints are inserted into the flight Airways stored in the WWNDB can be inserted in the
plan following the last waypoint of the flight plan. If a flight plan using the VIA or TO fields of the ROUTE
STAR is to be inserted and the STAR contains a page. They also may be inserted on the left side of the
STAR transition, the STAR waypoints are inserted fol- LEGS page. In order to insert an airway, the start
lowing the last waypoint of the STAR transition. point, the airway identifier, and the end point of the air-
If a runway transition exists, the runway transition way must be specified. The airway identifier and end-
waypoints are inserted after the last waypoint of the ing waypoint are entered in the format: airway name;
STAR. When a destination airport is entered as a way- period; ending waypoint.
point in the flight plan, the runway selected as part of For example, to fly from the Rome Vortac (RMG) to
the arrival procedure replaces the destination way- the Meridian Vortac (MEI) using V417, the crew would
point. If the destination airport is not in the flight plan enter V417.MEI after a waypoint labeled RMG.
as a waypoint, the runway selected as part of the Both the start and ending waypoints must be in the
arrival procedure is inserted as the last waypoint in airway. If the specified ending waypoint is not included
the flight plan and is considered to be the destination. in the airway, the airway is not inserted and the END-
Only the primary flight plan waypoints are affected ING WPT NOT FOUND message is displayed. Two
when a STAR procedure is to be inserted into the airways having the same airway identifier, but in oppo-
flight plan as the arrival at the primary destination air- site directions, are displayed separately. Once an air-
port. Similarly, only the waypoints on the path to alter- way is part of the flight plan, it can be deleted all at
nate destination are affected when a STAR procedure once by deleting the airway identifier on the ROUTE
is to be inserted into the flight plan as the arrival at the page or it can be deleted one waypoint at a time on
alternate destination airport. When inserting a STAR the LEGS page.
procedure as the arrival at the origin airport, the origin
airport is used as the destination airport and the way- Flight plans containing airways which are uploaded/
points between the origin and destination are downloaded using a DTC do not show the airway rout-
removed. ing; each waypoint on the airway is displayed as a
FLIGHT PLAN ALTERNATE DESTINATION unique lat/long.

The flight plan to the alternate destination will be an STORED ROUTES

extension of the primary flight plan and have as its ori- A stored route, or portion thereof, can be inserted in
gin, the primary destination. When a runway associ- the flight plan as a string of waypoints starting at the
ated with the flight plan’s alternate destination airport point of insertion.
is selected, the runway will be inserted into the

1-17
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Stored routes are incorporated into the existing flight Arming the Alternate
plan using the VIA and TO fields of the ROUTE page
or the left side of the LEGS page. To insert a stored The alternate flight plan is a flight plan from the pri-
route, the operator specifies the stored route name as mary destination to the alternate destination. Guid-
a minimum, which results in the entire stored route ance to the alternate destination of the active flight
being inserted into the flight plan. If desired, the oper- plan is not provided until the ARM ALT prompt on the
ator can specify the stored route name appended with LEGS page is selected.
an ending waypoint that is included in the stored route Selecting the prompt causes the aircraft to proceed
in the form stored flight plan ending waypoint. along the flight plan to the primary destination and
For example, HERC1.MEI may be entered following a then provides guidance along the alternate flight plan
waypoint labeled RMG (Rome VORTAC) to enter to the alternate destination. A path is created from the
stored route waypoints from Rome to Meridian, MS. If last waypoint (runway or waypoint) in the original pri-
the specified ending waypoint is not included in the mary flight plan to the first waypoint in the alternate
stored route the ENDING WPT NOT FOUND mes- flight plan. Arming the alternate causes the alternate
sage is displayed. Once a stored flight plan is part of destination to become the new primary destination
the flight plan, it can only be deleted one waypoint at a and the waypoints in the alternate flight plan to
time. become the primary flight plan waypoints. If a STAR
procedure in the original primary flight plan exists, the
STAR waypoints are retained including the STAR
Route Bypass Operation identifiers and associated constraints, but as a string
of waypoints on to the first waypoint in the alternate
A portion of the flight plan may be easily circumvented
flight plan.
using the route bypass operation. To bypass a portion
Since the alternate destination has replaced the pri-
of the flight plan a waypoint identifier or label/waypoint
mary destination, the STAR procedure available for
identifier is entered at a selected waypoint. The
modifications via the DEP/ARR page is associated
entered waypoint identifier or label/waypoint identifier
with the new primary destination or the original alter-
must exist in the flight plan down path of the selected
nate destination.
waypoint. The matching waypoint cannot be the
* CARP or * DZESC waypoints of a CARP, the
* SARnn waypoints of a SAR, the * SD, * GSI, * FAF, Flight Plan Complete Operation
* MAP, or * LZnn waypoints of a CNI-MS approach,
and part of a STAR procedure. The selected waypoint The crew has the option of declaring flight complete
cannot be the active waypoint, the * CARP or upon landing or within 10 NM of the flight plan’s pri-
* DZESC waypoints of a CARP, the * SARnn way- mary destination by selecting the FLT CMPLT prompt
points of a SAR, the * RWnn waypoints of airport, the on the PROGRESS 2/4 page. When the aircraft tran-
* SD, * GSI, * FAF, * MAP, or * LZnn waypoints of an sitions from in-the-air to on-the-ground and the aircraft
approach, and part of a SID or STAR procedure. is within 10 NM of the flight plan primary destination,
the FLT COMPLETE message is displayed and the
FLT CMPLT prompt on the PROGRESS 2/4 page
Activation of Route 1 or 2 changes to large font. When selected, all performance
and TOLD initialization is cleared and the CNI-MS
When activation of route 1 is initiated, route 1 deletes all navaids from the temporary NAVAID
becomes the provisional flight plan with the activation INHIBIT list. There is not a requirement to press
pending. Upon pressing the EXEC hard-key, route 1 EXEC hard-key to verify flight complete.
becomes the active flight plan and route 2 the inactive
flight plan. Similarly, activation of route 2 causes route
2 to become the provisional flight plan with the activa- Lateral Flight Plan (LNAV) Operations
tion pending until the EXEC hard-key is pressed at
which time route 2 becomes the active flight plan and The flight plan is constructed as a series of lateral legs
route 1 the inactive flight plan. Selection of the ACTI- and is provided to LNAV as a series of leg types. Leg
VATE soft-key without pressing the EXEC hard-key types are described below:
allows the crew to view the provisional flight plan on a. Initial Fix (IF) – An IF is defined as a point used by
the NAV display without affecting the current flight flight planning either to define the beginning point
plan. of a flight plan, or as a runway.
b. Course to a Fix (CF) – A CF leg is defined by an
ending waypoint, a course into the ending way-
point, and a leg length.

1-18
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

c. Track to a Fix (TF) – A TF leg is defined by a be- LNAV Disengage

ginning waypoint, an ending waypoint, and the
great circle path between the two waypoints. When providing navigation data to the autopilot, cer-
tain flight plan or flight conditions may cause the auto-
d. Direct to a Fix (DF) – A DF is initially defined by a pilot to disengage guidance. Disengagement takes
waypoint. When it becomes the active leg, the place under the following conditions:
course into the waypoint is computed based on
current aircraft track and position. a. Flight Plan Discontinuities – LNAV requests the
autopilot heading hold mode for 2 seconds and
e. Course from a Fix to an Altitude (FA) – An FA leg then disengages when the leg prior to a flight plan
is defined as a CF leg with the ending waypoint discontinuity is sequenced.
specified as the estimated point the aircraft will
reach the specified altitude. b. End of Flight Plan – LNAV disengages when the
last flight plan waypoint (END OF FLIGHT PLAN)
f. Heading from a Fix to an Altitude (VA) – A VA leg is sequenced.
is treated by LNAV as if it were an FA leg.
c. Missed Hold Pattern entry – If the Holding Pattern
g. Heading to an Intercept (VI) – A VI leg is construct- Cross Track is greater than 1.0 NM at the point
ed as a CF leg where the ending waypoint is de- where a holding pattern becomes the active leg.
fined as the intercept point with the next leg.
d. Manual Waypoint Sequence – If the Manual se-
h. Heading to a Manual Termination (VM) – A VM leg quence mode is active and a manual flight plan leg
is be handled by LNAV as follows: sequence is executed (Heading Hold remains ac-
tive).
1. When the VM leg is the next leg, LNAV overflys
the waypoint prior to the VM leg. e. Active Route Switching – If the ACTIVE ROUTE is
changed from route 1 to route 2 or from route 2 to
2. When the VM leg becomes active, LNAV turns
route 1 while LNAV is captured.
the aircraft onto the specified heading.
f. Ship Solution Switching – If the crew changes the
3. After 10 seconds, LNAV requests the autopilot
single ship navigation solution from SP1 to SP2 or
HEADING HOLD mode for 2 seconds.
from SP2 to SP1 while LNAV is engaged.
4. After the 2 seconds, the autopilot engages the
HEADING HOLD mode and automatically dis-
Lateral Leg Transition Processing
engages LNAV.
The CNI-MS determines flight path geometry for each
i. Heading Select (HS) – An HS leg is handled by
transition by calculating the position of a number of
LNAV as follows:
points about the transition waypoint. For each way-
1. When the HS leg is the next leg, LNAV overflys point transition, the CNI-MS may compute locations
the waypoint prior to the HS leg. and distances as follows:

2. When the HS leg becomes the active leg, • Turn Center – The point about which the aircraft
LNAV requests the autopilot HEADING HOLD turns.
mode for 2 seconds.
• Turn Radius – The radius of turn based on ground
3. After 2 seconds, LNAV disengages. Normally speed and bank angle. The CNI-MS further refines
the autopilot engages the HEADING HOLD this radius to account for winds during the turn.
mode and automatically disengages LNAV.
• Initial Turn Point – The point at which the aircraft
Typical flight plan legs are IF legs and a series of TF rolls to turn to the transition waypoint.
legs. The CNI-MS constructs a DF leg when the crew
• Final turn point – The point at which the aircraft lev-
executes a Direct-to. Legs such as FA, VA, VI, and
els off en route to the next waypoint.
VM legs are constructed when the crew selects proce-
dures such as STARs and SIDs. • Roll anticipation distance – This is the distance that
the aircraft flys in the time it takes to roll to the nom-
inal bank angle and begin turning (or to roll out of
a turn and resume straight and level flight).
• Turn initiation distance – This is the distance from
the waypoint where the aircraft begins its turn to
the next waypoint. (may be zero in some cases).

1-19
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Based on the CNI-MS computed distances, and the The selection is based on leg geometry and will be
placement of the applicable points, the lateral guid- either a Curved Path (CP) or a Point-to-Point (P-P)
ance function constructs flight path geometry for transition.
LNAV guidance during the turn. Furthermore, the CNI-
MS transmits the locations of relevant positions as
well as the turn direction to the mission computers for Short Leg Processing
construction of the approximate flight path geometry Under certain conditions, two or more waypoints in
on the NAV/RADAR flight plan overlay. sequence may require special processing due to their
close proximity. This is known as short leg processing.
Crew-Selectable Lateral Transitions
This may occur if the computed turn radius is large
The crew has the capability to select the type of tran- when compared to the distance to the next waypoint,
sition for a given leg or for the entire flight plan. The if there is a relatively large course change, or if the
types of transitions are handled by LNAV as described transition to the next leg overlaps the transition at the
in the following paragraphs. second waypoint. There are four cases of short leg
transitions:
Curved Path (CP) – In the CP transition mode, LNAV
a. If both waypoint transitions are in the same direc-
causes the aircraft to turn early to the next leg without
tion, the CNI-MS moves the turn center of the sec-
necessarily overflying the TO waypoint in an attempt
ond transition so that the two transition path arcs
to smoothly intersect the next leg.
meet. When the two transitions are in the same di-
rection, the CNI-MS alters the turn radii (if possi-
Radius of Turn (ROT) – In the ROT transition mode,
ble), the turn initiation distance, and, therefore, the
LNAV overflys the waypoint, turn and then fly directly
position of the turn center such that the aircraft flies
to the next waypoint. No attempt is made to intercept
a single arc to transition both waypoints.
the course which connects the overfly waypoint and
next waypoint. b. Short Point-to-Point (P-P) legs that include a CP
transition followed by a P-P transition. LNAV pro-
Point to Point (P-P) – In the P-P transition mode, vides guidance to the CP curved path transition un-
LNAV overflys the waypoint and turns to intercept the til it reaches the sequence distance for the short
course which connects the overfly waypoint and the leg, at which time it provides guidance based on
next waypoint. the P-P transition following the short leg.
c. Short legs that include a P-P transition followed by
a CP transition. LNAV provides guidance to the CP
curved path transition immediately after the P-P
sequence has occurred.
d. Short legs that include two P-P transitions. LNAV
provides guidance to the leg following the short leg
immediately after sequencing the leg preceding
the short leg. LNAV completely skips the short leg
in this case.

Degraded Navigation Mode Transitions

NOTE
Crew selected transitions may be selected on the
Route page for the entire flight plan, or for individual When DEGRADED NAV is displayed,
waypoints on the WAYPOINT DATA page 2/2. procedure waypoints is removed. The
course to the active waypoint should be
There are some instances when a CNI-SP will not verified.
accept a crew-selected transition. These instances
include legs in SIDs and STARs, holding patterns, In the event of a dual mission computer failure, the
search and rescue patterns, and CARPs. In addition, CNI-MS has no access to air data for sensor aiding. In
in order to align the aircraft for initial entry, the CNI-SP terms of CNI-MS navigation functions, this is known
will determine the type of transition for the last way- as degraded navigation mode.
point prior to entering a mission area.

1-20
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Using groundspeed only, LNAV supports Direct-to Active Leg Modification

operations and sequence the flight plan in a degraded
mode. The CNI-MS does not support any mission The majority of flight plan operations will not be
functions (CARP, SAR, RENDEZVOUS, or LANDING allowed on the active leg. The only operations allowed
ZONE). during the active leg are waypoint sequencing, direct-
to operations, present position holding, and course
intercepts into a waypoint.
Waypoint Sequencing
LEG SEQUENCING
NOTE The sequencing of the active leg enables the CNI SP
Guidance for a ROT course change to a to maintain the active flight plan relative to the aircraft
waypoint placed within 0.5 NM of the position. Lateral Guidance decides when to sequence
North or South Pole may perform a 270 a flight plan leg. When the active leg is the last leg in
degree turn versus a direct turn to the po- the active primary flight plan and the active waypoint
lar waypoint. Crews should use CP or P- is not the destination, the LAST LEG message is dis-
P transitions or manually fly the waypoint played. Upon sequencing the last waypoint in the
transition to the pole. active primary flight plan and the last waypoint in the
active primary flight plan is not the destination, the
END OF FLIGHT PLAN message is displayed.
The method for the sequencing of waypoints can be
selected by the crew as automatic (AUTO) or manual MANUAL FLIGHT PLAN SEQUENCE OPERATION
(MAN) on the RTE 1 or RTE 2 page 1/3, soft-key R4.
The default position is AUTO for each route. The operator has the ability to manually sequence the
In the AUTO mode, when the aircraft crosses the active flight plan. This is not to be confused with man-
active TO waypoint (or a point abeam the waypoint), ual waypoint sequencing. A manual flight plan
the next waypoint in the flight plan becomes the active sequence can be accomplished (only when the air-
TO waypoint and causes the last leg flown to become craft is airborne) by entering an active waypoint identi-
a historical leg. The bearing pointer associated with fier or label/waypoint identifier into line L1 of the LEGS
the INAV solution changes to point toward the new page and pressing the EXEC hard-key. When the
desired track. This occurs for each waypoint in the manual sequence operation is performed, the
flight plan. selected waypoint becomes the active waypoint and
all waypoints from the present position to the selected
If manual waypoint sequencing is selected for a par- waypoint are deleted. This effectively constructs a
ticular route, then the following occurs when the active course intercept to the new TO waypoint, with the
TO waypoint is overflown: original inbound track to that waypoint as the inbound
course. The manual sequence operation can not be
a. LNAV provides steering away from the waypoint at performed when the selected waypoint is the * CARP
the same course as the flight plan inbound course or * DZESC waypoints of a CARP or the * SD, * FAF,
to that waypoint. The inbound course and the way- * GSI, * MAP, or LZnn waypoints of a CNI-MS
point position generate the lateral path distance-to- approach. Attempting to manually sequence the
go. active flight plan by way of the ROUTE pages, when
b. The FROM/TO indication shall be changed to the aircraft is airborne is not allowed and results in the
FROM after the waypoint is passed. NOT ALLOWED message being displayed.

c. In the event that the crew maneuvers the aircraft DIRECT-TO OPERATION
back to a position on the inbound side of the active
A direct-to a waypoint when the aircraft is airborne
waypoint, steering shall be provided to the original
can be issued to on flight plan and off flight plan way-
flight plan leg which has not been sequenced.
points. The direct-to operation is performed on the
d. If the crew reselects the AUTO sequence mode, LEGS DIRECT/INTERCEPT page, which can be
LNAV shall determine the active flight plan leg accessed by pressing the DIR/INTC hard-key.
based on aircraft position, and sequence the flight
plan according to normal sequencing logic. An on flight plan direct-to can be performed by enter-
ing an active flight plan waypoint identifier or label/
waypoint into the "DIRECT TO" field of the LEGS
DIRECT/INTERCEPT page and pressing the EXEC
hard-key.

1-21
FAM.1C-27J-1A

The selected waypoint becomes the active TO way- When the on flight plan intercept is issued (i.e., the
point and all waypoints from the present position to EXEC hard-key is pressed), the selected waypoint
the selected waypoint are deleted. becomes the active waypoint or the to-waypoint and
The INVALID DIRECT TO message is displayed when all waypoints from the present position to the selected
an on flight plan direct-to operation is attempted on waypoint are deleted. The default or entered intercept
the * CARP or * DZESC waypoints of a CARP and course is used as the selected waypoints course to.
* MAP or runway waypoints of a CNI-MS approach. The on flight plan intercept operation is not permitted
when the selected waypoint is the * CARP or
An off flight plan direct-to can be performed by enter- * DZESC waypoints of a CARP and * MAP or runway
ing a waypoint identifier that is not in the active flight waypoints of a CNI-MS approach.
plan into the "DIRECT TO" field of the LEGS DIRECT/
INTERCEPT page and pressing the EXEC hard-key. An off flight plan intercept can be performed by enter-
The entered waypoint identifier becomes the active ing a waypoint identifier that is not in the active flight
TO waypoint and a discontinuity is inserted between plan adjacent to INTC LEG on the LEGS DIRECT/
the active waypoint and the next waypoint in the INTERCEPT page. The default course can be utilized
active flight plan. If the active waypoint prior to the or a course can be entered adjacent to INTC CRS on
direct-to is a waypoint associated with a CARP or the INTERCEPT LEGS page. When the off flight plan
SAR, then all waypoints associated with that CARP or intercept is issued, (i.e., the EXEC hard-key is
SAR are deleted. All CNI-MS approach waypoints pressed), the entered waypoint identifier becomes the
besides the * TP waypoint are deleted if any of these active waypoint and a discontinuity is inserted
CNI-MS approach waypoints were the active waypoint between the active waypoint and the next waypoint in
prior to entering the off flight plan direct-to waypoint. If the active flight plan.
the active waypoint prior to entering the off flight plan The default or entered intercept course is used as the
direct-to waypoint was a holding pattern, the hold data selected waypoint course to. If the active waypoint
is set to the default values and the hold is removed at prior to entering the off flight plan intercept waypoint,
the fix waypoint but the fix waypoint is not deleted. is a CARP waypoint all CARP waypoints are deleted.
When a direct-to operation is performed using an
alternate flight plan waypoint identifier or label/way- Similarly, if the active waypoint prior to entering the off
point identifier as the direct-to waypoint, the operation flight plan intercept waypoint is a SAR waypoint all
is similar to that of an on flight plan direct-to. In this SAR waypoints are deleted. All CNI-MS approach
case, the remainder of the primary flight plan way- waypoints besides the * TP waypoint are deleted if
points are deleted, the alternate waypoints from the any of these CNI-MS approach waypoints are the
selected alternate waypoint to alternate destination active waypoint prior to entering the off flight plan
become the primary flight plan waypoints, and the intercept waypoint. If the active waypoint prior to
alternate destination becomes the primary destina- entering the off flight plan intercept waypoint is a hold-
tion. ing pattern, the hold data is set to the default values
and the hold is removed at the fix waypoint but the fix
COURSE INTERCEPT OPERATION waypoint is not deleted.
An intercept to a course onto a waypoint, when the
aircraft is airborne can be issued to a waypoint on the When an intercept operation is performed using an
active flight plan and off the active flight plan. When a alternate flight plan waypoint identifier or label/way-
course intercept is issued and the intercept course point identifier as the intercept waypoint, the operation
does not intercept the aircraft heading, the NOT ON is similar to that of an on flight plan intercept. In this
INTERCEPT HEADING message is displayed. The case, the remainder of the primary flight plan way-
direct-to operation is performed on the LEGS points are deleted, the alternate waypoints from the
DIRECT/INTERCEPT page, which can be accessed selected alternate waypoint to alternate destination
by pressing the DIR/INTC hard-key. become the primary flight plan waypoints, and the
alternate destination becomes the primary destina-
An on flight plan intercept can be performed by enter- tion.
ing an active flight plan waypoint identifier or label/ ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
waypoint identifier adjacent to INTC LEG on the
LEGS DIRECT/INTERCEPT page. The default course Direct-to operations which cause waypoints with alti-
can be utilized or a course can be entered adjacent to tude constraints to be skipped causes all waypoint
INTC CRS on the INTERCEPT LEG page. associated altitude constraints to also be removed.

1-22
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINT DELETION Vertical Flight Plan (VNAV)

Single waypoints can be deleted from the flight plan. The CNI-MS has the ability to predict and guide the
Waypoint deletion is accomplished by utilizing the aircraft through the vertical profile of the flight. The
DEL function key, which inserts DELETE into the CNI-MS predicts vertical profile by predicting aircraft
scratch pad. After entering DELETE in the scratch airspeed, altitude, groundspeed, fuel on board, and
pad, line selecting deletes the associated waypoint. time en-route for each waypoint in the flight plan.
When the waypoint is deleted, the flight plan is closed Independent vertical profiles are generated for route
and linked together. As described above, waypoints 1, route 2, and the provisional flight plan when dis-
can be deleted by entering a waypoint which is in the played. The complete flight plan profile is used to fore-
flight plan forward of the point of entry. When the way- cast the fuel needed to fly to the current final
point to be deleted is part of a CARP, SAR, approach, destination, estimate the extra fuel available, and pre-
or airway, their associated waypoints are deleted. dict an optimal endurance time.
When the waypoint to be deleted is a holding pattern,
the hold data is deleted at the fix but the fix waypoint Flight plan predictions are generated for each way-
is not deleted. When the waypoint to be deleted is the point, in sequence, according to flight phase(s). Flight
alternate destination, the alternate destination and the phases are climb, cruise, or descent. Each phase is
procedure waypoints (STAR and approach) associ- defined by Start of Climb (SOC), Top of Climb (TOC),
ated with the alternate destination are deleted. Top of Descent (TOD), Bottom of Descent (BOD) and
End of Descent (EOD) points. These points are deter-
The INVALID DELETE message is displayed, when mined using PERF INIT page altitude entries and
the waypoint to be deleted is part of a SID or STAR waypoint entries made on the legs page based on
procedure or is the active waypoint. crew defined climb and descent profile values.
Multiple climb, cruise, and descent phases are speci-
fied by Legs page cruise altitude entries. Climb and
Holding Patterns descent phase predictions also use Legs page alti-
HOLDING AT A FIX tude, speed, and descent angle constraint entries.

The holding fix latitude and longitude, inbound course, Figure 1-2 sheet 1 illustrates a vertical flight profile
turn direction, and leg time or distance defines a hold- beginning with an altitude-constrained climb to the
ing pattern. By selecting the WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 first cruise phase followed by a step descent to a
page for a waypoint, the crew can then select the CARP in the third cruise phase. This phase is followed
HOLD soft-key. This defines a hold at the waypoint by a climb to the forth cruise phase then a path
using default conditions for a standard hold. The CNI- descent to the fifth cruise phase then the final descent
MS issues guidance commands defined by the hold to the destination.
fix and an outbound fix, with TF legs inbound to each. Figure 1-2 sheet 2 and 3 show the illustrated profile as
it would be displayed on the LEGS pages. All vertical
PPOS HOLD
profile predictions are estimates based on the planned
The crew may elect to enter a Present Position flight as defined by operator entries and are advisory
(PPOS) hold by selecting PPOS on the MISSION only.
Page. The PPOS hold is functionally the same as The CNI-MS also determines minimum and maximum
holding at a fix. When a present position hold is speci- allowable speeds based on current aircraft configura-
fied, a computed waypoint * PPOS is inserted into the tion (flap position, landing gear position, and load fac-
active flight plan at the position the hold was issued. tor). These speeds are not used for predictions but
they are used to limit the current commanded speed
HOLD PROFILE determined by the vertical guidance function. The
CNI-MS minimum speeds are not associated with or
The HOLD page displays and accepts entry of the
integrated into the stall warning system.
hold speed and altitude target. The hold speed entry
The CNI-MS also generates equal time point data for
changes the LEGS page WPT SPD/ALT. The hold alti-
the active flight plan. Equal time point data can be
tude is used to determine the hold profile.
used to estimate a point of no return for a specified
section of the active flight plan. ETPs are discussed
The HOLD page also accepts entry of the Exit at Time
later under cruise operations.
(EAT). When a hold has a valid specified EAT (later
than initial ETA at the hold waypoint), the EAT is used
to determine predicted time en-route to the waypoint
immediately following the hold.

1-23
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-2 Basic Vertical Flight Profile (sh. 1/3)

1-24
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-2 Basic Vertical Flight Profile (sh. 2/3)

1-25
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-2 Basic Vertical Flight Profile (sh. 3/3)

1-26
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Performance Initialization/Vertical Profile • CNI annunciations associated with speed and alti-
Definition Parameters tude changes,
In order for the CNI-MS to make performance and ver- • CNI annunciations associated with speed and alti-
tical profile predictions and calculations, the crew tude errors,
must fully define the flight plan scenario in these
areas: • CNI-MU (ICDU) displays of vertical track error for
path descents.
• Aircraft Basic Weight,
• Payload Weight, NOTE

• Fuel on Board, The complexity of the vertical profile defi-

nition may vary widely depending on
• Intended Climb Profile (airspeeds vs. altitudes), whether the flight plan is a strategic climb-
• Atmospheric data (winds, temperatures), cruise-descent profile or a tactical profile
with multiple climbs and descents.
• Intended Cruise Profile (altitude, airspeed, and fuel
flow),
Flight Profile Predictions
• Intended Descent Profile (airspeeds vs. altitudes),
Each flight plan is composed of single or multiple
• Flight Plan Routing (with associated altitudes as climb, cruise, and descent phases of flight. These
applicable). phases are grouped into bounded flight segments.
Each segment begins at the origin, the present posi-
The non-flight-plan parameters are enterable on the
tion or the end of the previous segment.
four pages of the CNI-MU (ICDU) Performance Initial-
Each segment ends at a waypoint with a cruise alti-
ization (PERF INIT) pages.
tude entry (or at the destination). Figure 1-3, Figure 1-
The first page allows crew entry of the aircraft weight,
4, and Figure 1-5 show typical flight segment defini-
fuel, and payload data, the second page allows crew
tions for segments that begin with an SOC, TOD, or
definition of the climb profile, the third page allows
BOD.
crew definition of the cruise profile, and the fourth
page allows crew definition of the descent profile.
Specific details of required data entry are addressed NOTE
in Section 3 of this manual. For a basic strategic pro-
A SOC, TOD, or BOD can be crew de-
file (unrestricted climb to a fixed cruise altitude, fol-
fined (fixed at a waypoint) or may be at a
lowed by a single descent to the destination),
position calculated by the CNI-MS (soft
completion of the PERF INIT data entry is all that is
waypoint). A vertical profile waypoint or
required to define the entire vertical profile. Tactical
pseudo-waypoint is crew-defined (fixed)
military missions with multiple climbs and descents,
or CNI-MS calculated.
and missions that include mission functions such as
airdrops require additional data entry procedures. In
PERF INIT page entries provide the basic information
these cases, the remainder of the data can be entered
needed to define a single cruise flight profile. Entering
on the LEGS pages and MISSIONS pages such as
cruise altitudes at waypoints on the Legs page allows
CARP, SAR, and LZ.
the aircrew to specify additional cruise phases by
defining an SOC, TOD, or BOD. If the crew specifies
CNI-MS computed data is then represented to the
no altitude, the CNI-MS defaults to the cruise altitude
crew in the form of:
specified on the PERF INIT CRUISE page.
• TOC, TOD, and BOD waypoints, or soft waypoints The crew may specify altitudes on the LEGS page by
depicted on the flight plan overlay, inserting the appropriate altitude, with a letter suffix
that identifies the type of vertical requirement. The fol-
• Commanded speeds and altitudes on the lowing altitude suffixes are used in VNAV profiles:
PROGRESS Page,
None - at restriction
• Predicted times to TOC, TOD, and BOD displayed A - at or above restriction
on the PROGRESS page,
B - at or below restriction
• Predicted Fuel-on-board for the planned route, C - cruise altitude (defines a fixed SOC or a fixed
• Predicted altitudes at waypoints for the planned BOD)
route, D - Descent (defines a fixed TOD).

1-27
FAM.1C-27J-1A

It is important to distinguish between vertical profile Tactical flight profiles contain multiple climb, cruise,
commanded altitudes (C and D suffixes) and altitude and descent phases defined by cruise altitude entries
constraints (A, B, or no suffix). on the LEGS page. Waypoint altitude constraint
Crews must enter either a C (most often) or D to entries (at, at-or-above, or at-or-below altitude con-
change cruise altitudes within a flight plan (e.g., for straints, e.g., altitude entries with no suffix, an A suffix,
multiple climb-cruise-descent paths). Normally, the A or B suffix, respectively) should not be used for tacti-
and B suffix, or AT constraints are generated by pub- cal profile definition. They should be limited to the
lished procedures (SID/STARS) in the WWNDB. takeoff climb and the descent to the final destination
(e.g., SID and STAR procedures).
Cruise altitude entries support tactical vertical flight
profiles with multiple climb/cruise/descent flight seg- During a climb (and prior to takeoff), the active SOC is
ments. The CNI-MS supports predictions for up to 20 defined at the current aircraft position and altitude. A
vertical profile segments. down path SOC is defined by an SOC cruise altitude
When the CNI-MS determines there are more than 20 entry and predicted waypoint altitude. An SOC cruise
segments in route 1 or 2, it displays a RTE1 PERF altitude entry is made by entering a C suffix altitude at
LIST FULL or RTE2 PERF LIST FULL message. LEGS page waypoint (e.g., 22000C or FL220C). If the
When the CNI-MS determines there are more than 20 waypoint has a predicted altitude that is lower than the
segments in the provisional flight plan, it displays a cruise altitude entry, an SOC is specified and a climb
MOD PERF LIST FULL message. commences at that waypoint.

Aircraft performance data is used to generate vertical Figure 1-3 shows the typical flight segment definitions
profile predictions and calculate TOLD. When the for segments that begin with a SOC. The SOC-SOC
CNI-MS determines that a performance data set segment definition occurs when a climb to one cruise
boundary is exceeded in the provisional flight plan, a altitude is followed by a waypoint with higher cruise
MOD PERF DATA O/B message is generated. When altitude entry. As an example, predictions would start
the CNI-MS determines a performance data set with the SOC-SOC definition when the aircraft is in an
boundary is exceeded in route 1 or 2, a RTE1 PERF active climb to a initial cruise altitude of 18000 (CRZ
DATA O/B or RTE2 PERF DATA O/B message is gen- ALT1) and 22000C is entered at a down path way-
erated. Additionally, the speed associated with a par- point in the initial cruise phase (WPT2). The SOC-
ticular waypoint may be a commanded speed TOD segment definition occurs when a climb is fol-
(integrated with the vertical profile with the entry of the lowed by a waypoint in the cruise phase with a D suf-
C or D altitude suffix), or a speed constraint. Com- fix altitude entry.
manded speed changes are fully integrated into the
vertical profile calculations. Speed constraints may Normally, crews should define the final descent to a
not be. Furthermore, the planned speed change pro- destination through use of C (preferred) or D suffix.
file may be different. For example, if a flight plan indi- Otherwise, the SOC-BOD and SOC-EOD segment
cates a BOD at a CARP Turn Point, with a definitions in Figure 1-3 have a 100 nautical mile
deceleration to slower airspeed, the crew should range for determining whether an altitude constraint
decelerate when commanded by the vertical profile as entry (e.g., 10000, 10000A, or 10000B) applies to the
it transitions from descent phase to cruise phase. If a climb or the descent. If an altitude constraint entry
speed constraint to a slower airspeed exists in a flight occurs at a waypoint that is within this range of the pri-
plan (including the slowdown point in a landing zone), mary destination, it is used as a descent constraint,
the crew should monitor the PROGRESS page 1/4 otherwise it is used as a climb constraint.
and commence deceleration prior to the constrained
waypoint. If the crew does not commence decelera- The TOC is computed as the predicted point along the
tion soon enough, the CHECK SPEED CONSTRAINT climb phase flight path where the aircraft reaches
message is annunciated (the CHECK SPEED CON- cruise altitude (based on aircraft performance data).
STRAINT message is not applicable to commanded This is always a soft waypoint.
speed changes).
The TOD is a point along the cruise phase flight path
where the aircraft begins a descent phase. A TOD
Flight Phase Definition may be either a soft waypoint or a hard waypoint (a
The basic flight profile consists of three flight phases: flight plan waypoint displayed on the LEGS page),
climb, cruise, and descent. The PERF INIT pages fully depending on the way the aircrew defines the
support the definition of a basic flight profile. descent.

1-28
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

A soft TOD is computed by the CNI-MS and is pro- NOTE

jected back from a defined bottom of descent (a way-
point with a lower cruise C-suffixed altitude). Accuracy of the vertical profile function is
Computed soft TOD points begin a path descent to optimized when the flight is flown as
the BOD. A hard TOD is defined by entering a D suf- planned. Deviating from the plan may
fixed altitude at a Legs page waypoint (e.g., 5000D). A cause the vertical profile and related func-
descent then begins at that waypoint, predicting a tions to lose synchronization.
speed descent to a computed soft BOD.
Situations where synchronization loss may occur
Figure 1-4 shows the typical flight segment definitions include:
for segments that begin with a specified TOD. Altitude • Failing to commence an altitude change as
constraints are not supported within the TOD-SOC planned (e.g., fly over at an LZ).
and TOD-TOD segment definitions, so crews must
carefully monitor their descents to ensure constraints • Failing to fully execute a mission parameter, such
are met. If an unsupported altitude constraint is as CARP.
entered, predictions are invalidated.
• Executing an early level-off during a climb or de-
The BOD is a point along the descent phase flight
scent.
path where the aircraft reaches a lower cruise altitude.
A soft computed BOD is projected from a hard defined Results of this synchronization loss may include:
TOD. The default destination BOD that terminates the
final descent is labeled EOD. A hard defined BOD is • Disagreement between CMD SPD and phase of
specified at a waypoint with a BOD cruise altitude flight.
entry using a C suffix altitude at a LEGS page way- • Target Speed ambiguities.
point (e.g., 5000C). When the previous cruise altitude
is higher than the entered cruise altitude, a BOD is In these cases, sufficient information must be supplied
specified and a soft TOD is computed back along the to the CNI-MS to regain synchronization.
flight plan.
Corrective actions include:
Figure 1-5 shows the typical flight segment definitions
• Sequencing a waypoint with a vertical command
for segments that begin with a defined BOD. Altitude
(altitude followed by the letter C).
constraints are not supported within the BOD-SOC
and BOD-TOD segment definitions. If an unsupported • Entering a cruise altitude (the current altitude, if de-
altitude constraint is entered, predictions are invali- sired) or speed into the PERF INIT CRUISE page.
dated.

The EOD is the final descent BOD. When the last Crossovers
waypoint in the flight plan has a defined elevation, the Crews may inadvertently define a flight plan segment
CNI-MS predicts the EOD position then computes the where the CNI-MS predicted TOC is down path of the
TOD for the final descent. The default EOD is placed next predicted, or defined, TOD. Similarly, they may
10 nautical miles prior to the last waypoint in the flight have inadvertently defined a descent segment where
plan. If the last waypoint in the flight plan does not the CNI-MS predicted BOD down path of the next
have a defined elevation, the CNI-MS does not predict defined SOC. These situations are called crossovers.
a final descent profile (the last cruise phase profile Should a crossover occur prior to the aircraft actually
ends at the last waypoint). being established on the initial vertical segment, all
performance predications down path of the crossover
When generating flight profile predictions for the become invalid (dashes appear on the LEGS page
active flight plan, the CNI-MS generates an UNABLE where speed and altitude predictions normally are dis-
NEXT ALT message if the active waypoint has a spec- played).
ified altitude constraint or a specified BOD cruise alti- When a crossover condition is determined, the CNI-
tude that cannot be achieved using the climb and MS recognizes that the designated cruise altitude will
descent profiles defined on the PERF INIT pages. not be achieved. If the crossover occurs on the active
This message is generated for current conditions and profile segment, the CNI-MS assumes the aircraft will
is intended to advise the pilot so corrective action may maintain its current altitude until the new cruise alti-
be taken to achieve the next altitude target (e.g., devi- tude becomes active.
ate from the defined climb or descent profile to make Figure 1-6 illustrated the situation where the aircraft
the constraint). levels off prior to reaching the predicted TOC.

1-29
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-3 Start to Climb Profile

1-30
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-4 Top of Descent Profile

1-31
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-5 Bottom of Descent Profile

1-32
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-6 Early Level-off Altitude Prediction

1-33
FAM.1C-27J-1A

This causes the TOC to move down path (in Figure 1- CNI messages associated with VNAV:
6, TOC #1 becomes TOC #2) eventually crossing the
a. RESET ALT SEL? – Approaching climb or descent
next defined or calculated TOD. In such a case, the
action points, the CNI generates this message if
CNI-MS bases vertical profile predictions on flying at
the aircraft is within 1 minute of a required altitude
the level-off altitude until reaching the defined TOD
change and the crew has not reset the ALT REF on
(TOD #2), or re-locates the computed TOD position
the Reference Set/Warning Panel.
(TOD #2B) based on the early level-off altitude.
b. PERFORMANCE LIST FULL – The CNI-MS gen-
If a crossovers occurs anywhere else (i.e., in a seg- erates this message when the number of vertical
ment that is not the active segment or while the air- profile climb-descent segments in a flight plan ex-
craft is on the ground) vertical profile terminates ceeds 20.
predictions at the crossover. This results in the LEGS
page indicating dashes for airspeed/DA and altitude at c. UNABLE NEXT ALT – The CNI-MS generates this
all down path waypoints. message if the active waypoint has a specified al-
titude constraint or a specified BOD cruise altitude
that cannot be achieved.
Prediction Termination
d. OFF PLANNED ALTITUDE – The CNI-MS gener-
Vertical profile performs flight plan predictions in a ates this message if the aircraft deviates more than
sequential process starting at the beginning of the first 2150 feet above or below the active flight plan
leg in the route. When an invalid profile definition is cruise altitude during a cruise flight phase.
encountered or a condition that does not support
determination of a valid flight profile occurs, the CNI- e. CHECK SPEED CONSTRAINT – The CNI-MS
MS terminates the flight profile prediction process. generates this message if the aircraft cannot de-
Flight plan prediction data is invalid starting at a way- celerate to the defined speed constraint within 0.25
point where: NM of the assigned waypoint. This annunciation
applies only to decelerations, not accelerations.
• A down path TOC crosses the following TOD.
• A down path predicted BOD crosses the following Performance Initialization
SOC waypoint.
Before the CNI-MS can perform VNAV calculations,
• The leg profile cannot be determined in a manner the PERF INIT pages must be completed fully in order
consistent with the profiles illustrated in Figure 1-3, to describe the aircraft configuration and atmospheric
Figure 1-4, and Figure 1-5. conditions. Once this is accomplished, calculations
can be completed for TOLD, fuel computations, TIME
• The total number of vertical profile flight segments
NAV, and various mission profiles. If any data are
in a route exceeds 20. A flight segment begins at
omitted or defined in a way that causes the CNI to
the origin or present position or the end of the pre-
look for data outside of the defined data tables, VNAV
vious segment. A flight segment ends at a way-
is not performed. This significantly reduces the
point with a cruise altitude entry or at the
amount data available to the crew on the PROGRESS
destination, whichever comes first.
pages.
• A SAR exit waypoint has a BOD cruise altitude en-
try.
Aircraft Operating Configuration

Vertical Profile Annunciations The variety of aircraft operating configurations plays

an important part in ensuring correct performance cal-
The end result of the vertical profile is to provide culations and predictions. While the CNI-MS is pro-
dynamically-updated flight plan symbology as well as grammed for baseline C-27J lift and drag
annunciations to advise the crew of speed and alti- characteristics, the crew still needs to define the par-
tude changes required to execute the mission as ticular operating modes of the individual aircraft used
planned. Annunciations also include advisories to the for a particular mission. This is done primarily by
crew that the aircraft is not predicted to achieve the defining the DRAG INDEX and ICING configuration
planned airspeed or altitude. The CNI-MS issues (ON/OFF) on the PERF INIT and TOLD INIT pages.
these annunciations as Caution/Warning Advisory
(CWA) alerts, which in turn annunciate a ACAWS CNI
MESSAGE advisory.

1-34
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

The DRAG INDEX selection found on the TOLD INIT At and At-or-Below altitude constraints (e.g., 10000
3/3 page allows the crew to define the specific equip- and 10000B, respectively) limit the climb phase profile
ment configuration of the aircraft. The default value for altitude up to the waypoint with the constraint.
DRAG INDEX is “0”. At-or-Above (e.g., 10000A) constraints do not modify
the climb phase profile. Climb phase speed (CAS)
Use of anti-ice and deice equipment also effects air- constraints limit the climb profile speed up to the way-
craft performance and must be accounted for. The point with the constraint. If multiple climb speed con-
CNI-MS allows the crew to indicate anti-ice and deice straints exist, the lowest speed constrains the profile.
use in two places and uses this selection for planning When the next cruise altitude change point is a TOC,
purposes only. On the PERF INIT CLIMB page, the current distance and time to TOC is displayed on the
crew can identify icing equipment use for climb, PROGRESS 1/4 page. During climb, the PROGRESS
cruise, and descent. 1/4 page displays the current commanded speed and
On the TOLD INIT 2/3 page, the crew can identify the altitude. Commanded speed is limited by current mini-
use of icing equipment for take-off only. In both mum and maximum allowed speed and applicable
places, the appropriate soft-key is labeled ICING and speed constraints. The selected altitude and applica-
has selections for ON and OFF. Select ON if icing ble altitude constraints limit the commanded altitude.
equipment is planned for use. The two selections are
independent of each other and may be selected at
any time. These selections are also independent of Cruise Phase Profile
actual anti-ice and deice cockpit switch positions. The The cruise phase profile is defined via the PERF INIT
crew must manually select the appropriate ICING CRUISE page, and includes the cruise altitude, cruise
option on the applicable CNI-MU (ICDU) page based speed (defined as CAS or TAS), a forecast cruise
on the actual status of the anti-ice equipment. wind and temperature deviation, and cruise Fuel Flow
(FF). For a strategic profile, this data applies the entire
Minimum and Maximum Speeds cruise phase.
Multiple cruise phases may be pre-planned by enter-
Once the PERF INIT pages are complete, the CNI-MS ing cruise speed and altitude on the LEGS page and
determines minimum and maximum allowable speeds leg fuel flow on the WAYPOINT DATA 2/2 page. In this
for current aircraft gross weight, vertical acceleration, case, the cruise profile definition on the PERF INIT
landing gear position, and flap position. CRUISE page applies to the first cruise phase. Sub-
These speeds are only used to limit the current com- sequent vertical profile speed and altitude changes
manded speed determined by the vertical guidance change as each waypoint with a vertical profile speed
function and are displayed on the PROGRESS 1/4 and/or altitude command is sequenced.
page. The CNI-MS determined speeds are not associ- ETA predictions include an acceleration or decelera-
ated or integrated with the aircraft stall warning sys- tion time adjustment of 1 knot per second for a speed
tem. change specified at a cruise waypoint when the leg
falls entirely in the cruise phase. Predicted decelera-
tions occur just before sequencing the waypoint with
Climb Phase Profile the speed change. Predicted accelerations occur after
Climb performance data, PERF INIT CLIMB page completing the transition to the leg following the way-
climb speeds and altitudes, and the applicable cruise point with the specified speed change (Figure 1-8).
altitude (PERF INIT CRUISE page cruise altitude or Once cruise altitude is reached, the CNI-MS gener-
LEGS page cruise altitude entry) are used to deter- ates an OFF PLANNED ALTITUDE message if the
mine the default profile for each climb phase. aircraft deviates from the planned cruise altitude by
Climb performance data provides the predicted maxi- more than 2150 feet (above or below).
mum continuous power climb CAS and time to climb
to TOC. The PERF INIT CLIMB page provides the Wind Model
three speed/altitude bands that define the default
climb profile: 180 KCAS to 10000 feet, 170 KCAS The PERF INIT CRUISE page supports entry of cruise
from 10001 to 15000 feet, and 160 KCAS from 15001 winds. The wind direction entry on the PERF INIT
feet to current cruise altitude. The PERF INIT CLIMB CRUISE page are displayed as magnetic unless suf-
page speed/altitude band speeds are used to predict fixed with a “T” (e.g., 320T/20). CNI-MS calculations
the along track distance traveled during a climb. convert displayed magnetic winds to true winds using
Figure 1-7 represents a default climb profile modified the appropriate magnetic variation for the flight plan
by a speed and altitude constraint entry of 170/8000 leg in question prior to making flight plan calculations.
at WPT02.

1-35
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PERF INIT CRUISE winds are propagated down path Path descent profiles are generated backwards from
in the flight plan to each waypoint unless the crew defined BODs (C-suffixed altitudes) or from waypoints
enters a wind at the waypoint. If a wind value is with a descent altitude constraint (B suffix or no suf-
entered at a waypoint, this new wind is propagated fix). The PERF INIT DESCENT page provides five
down path in the flight plan. The CNI-MS uses sensed speed/altitude bands that define the default descent
winds for all active leg computations. profile as follows:

Each waypoint predicted altitude and the applicable

• 214 KCAS from 29000 to 26001 feet,
cruise wind are used to predict the waypoint wind. The • 226 KCAS from 26000 to 23001 feet,
wind direction for each waypoint is always displayed
as magnetic (no suffix). The CNI-MS applies the way- • 234 KCAS from 23000 to 20001 feet,
point magnetic variation to this displayed wind before • 250 KCAS from 20000 feet to the End of Descent
using the wind in leg calculations. Crew entry of true (EOD) target altitude,
wind data on a specific waypoint using a T suffix is
converted and displayed as magnetic on the CNI-MU • 210 KCAS for altitudes at or below the EOD target
(e.g., a true wind of 320T/20 entered at a waypoint altitude (EOD target altitude defaults to the eleva-
with a magnetic variation of 4 degrees West is dis- tion at the last primary waypoint in the flight plan
played as 324/20). Crew-entered winds are displayed plus 2000 feet).
in large font. Waypoint winds displayed in small font
Cruise altitude and speed are used to predict the
indicate that the wind direction and velocity have been
descent profile when the cruise altitude is higher than
propagated from a previous waypoint or the PERF
the top descent speed/altitude band. Figure 1-9 repre-
INIT CRUISE page. Velocities for propagated winds
sents a default descent profile modified by a speed
are scaled for the predicted waypoint altitudes as a
and altitude constraint entry of 230/23000 at
simple linear interpolation of the magnitude from 100
WPT02.0.
percent of the propagated value at altitudes at or
above the cruise altitude down to 0 percent at an alti-
When the next cruise altitude change point is a TOD,
tude of 0 feet.
current distance and time to TOD are displayed on the
PROGRESS 1/4 page. When the next cruise altitude
Leg and Waypoint Flight Profile Data change point is a specified BOD, current time and dis-
tance to the BOD are displayed.
The vertical flight profile also predicts aircraft altitude,
airspeed, groundspeed, fuel on board, gross weight, During path and speed descents, the PROGRESS 1/4
wind, and time en-route to each waypoint in a flight page displays the current commanded speed and alti-
plan. The LEGS page displays predicted speed, ETE/ tude. Commanded speed is limited by current mini-
ETA, and altitude for each waypoint. The WAYPOINT mum and maximum allowed speeds and applicable
DATA 1/2 page displays predicted wind for each way- speed constraints. The selected altitude and applica-
point. The WAYPOINT DATA 2/2 page displays pre- ble altitude constraints limit commanded altitude.
dicted fuel flow, fuel on board, gross weight, and fuel
endurance time for each waypoint. A LEGS page descent angle entry is applied only to
Predicted groundspeed is determined using the appli- the leg that terminates at the waypoint with the speci-
cable cruise wind. Cruise wind can also be entered at fied descent angle.
a waypoint on the WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 page.
Cruise wind entered on the WAYPOINT DATA 1/2
page propagates forward and applies from that way- Path Descent
point to the end of the flight plan or to the next entered
Path descent profiles are determined using the appli-
cruise wind.
cable descent angle and are constructed as a vertical
path that terminates at a defined hard BOD waypoint.
Descent Phase Profile At, at-or-above, and at-or-below altitude constraints
are treated in the same manner as at altitude con-
The PERF INIT DESCENT page descent speeds, straints in a path descent phase profile.
descent altitudes, and descent angle are used to
determine the default profile for each descent phase Descent phase speed (CAS) constraints limit the path
(Figure 1-9). Speed descent profiles are generated descent profile speed from the waypoint with the con-
forward from defined TODs (D-suffixed waypoints). straint to the end of the descent or the next descent
phase speed constraint.

1-36
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-7 Climb Profile

1-37
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-8 Speeds for Cruise Legs

1-38
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-9 Descent Profile

1-39
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Speed Descent This data applies to both landing and take-off. The
TAKEOFF DATA pages display CNI take-off data cal-
Speed descent profiles are projected from a defined culated using the performance lookup tables. Simi-
hard TOD using the applicable descent angle to gen- larly, the LANDING DATA page displays the
erate the soft BOD. At and at-or-above altitude con- calculated landing data. The basis for all TOLD is
straints are treated like At altitude constraints in a FAM.1C-27J-1-1 Performance Data Manual and rules
speed descent profile. At-or-below altitude constraints are applied in the same manner as the manual.
do not modify a speed descent profile. Descent phase
speed (CAS) constraints limit the speed descent pro- For take-off, the calculated V REF (refusal speed),
file speed from the waypoint with the constraint to the V ROT (rotate speed) and V CO (obstacle clearance
end of the descent or the next descent phase speed speed) can be manually inserted as V1, VR and V2 on
constraint. the V SPEED page to allow for the speeds to be dis-
played on the CMDUs Primary Flight Displays (PFDs).
NOTE This page is accessed from the MC INDEX page.
• Speed descents do not result in a de- TOLD INIT
fined or fixed BOD point as do path
descents. As conditions change The TOLD INIT page allows the crew to identify
(headwind, tailwind, temperature) the important take-off parameters for data calculation. It
CNI-MS continuously recomputes the also allows data calculation for what-if scenarios as
position of the BOD throughout the well to determine the affects of different take-off condi-
descent. Recomputations also occur tions. The crew can also select the take-off/landing
if the crew does not follow the type (TOLD TYPE) as NORM or TAC, as appropriate.
planned descent profile precisely.
When the CNI-MS recomputes the If the active route already has an origin airport
position of the BOD, the length of the defined, the airport name is displayed in the FIELD
succeeding cruise segment changes. line (L1). If the route has a runway/SID defined in it,
This may result in variations in time then the RWY line is populated. The crew has the
navigation computations. ability to enter either value if not present.

• Crews should avoid entering TOD

NOTE
and BOD vertical commands at adja-
cent waypoints unless a cruise seg- If the crew manually enters a runway la-
ment is ensured to occur between the bel that is not in the navigation database,
two descents. When flying TOD and an error message is generated. Switching
BOD vertical commands at adjacent to the ACT RTE page allows the runway
waypoints, crews should monitor the to be selected from a list of database de-
NAV flight plan display to ensure TOD fined runways.
and BOD waypoints do not cross.
When a runway is selected from the database, the
The default final descent is a speed descent to a point
runway length, elevation, slope, and heading fields on
on the flight plan 10 miles before the final primary
both TOLD INIT pages are filled. The pilot always has
flight plan waypoint at the EOD altitude.
the ability to manually define these values, even if a
EOD altitude defaults to the elevation at the last pri-
database runway does not exist. The values must be
mary waypoint in the flight plan plus 1500 feet (500
filled for the CNI to calculate TOLD.
feet below the default EOD target altitude) or as
entered on the PERF INIT DESCENT page.
Once the aircraft is airborne, the FIELD line automati-
cally changes from the origin runway to the destina-
Take-off and Landing Data tion runway, allowing for the calculation of landing
data at the destination. Prior to switching, the landing
The CNI-MS provides TOLD calculations to support data is displayed for the origin runway, allowing for an
crew operations. TOLD is separated into three gen- emergency return if required.
eral areas: Initialization, Take-off Data, and Landing
Data. The initialization area, TOLD INIT, allows the
crew to identify atmospheric data, aircraft configura-
tion, and runway data.

1-40
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

TAKEOFF DATA Defining Time Navigation Targets

Take-off data is only calculated if the required informa- Time navigation information is provided to the first
tion is input and remains within the bounds of the per- active flight plan waypoint with a crew-entered DTOA
formance lookup tables. A PERF DATA O/B message or TOT. The crew may enter a DTOA for any waypoint
is generated if the data is out of bounds. in the flight plan. Exceptions include LZ constructed
Data displayed on the TAKEOFF DATA page are waypoints other than the final landing zone (LZ**)
described in FAM.1C-27J-1-1 Performance Data Man- waypoint, and SAR constructed waypoints other than
ual, and the data is calculated using the rules of that the Initial Point (IP).
manual. soft-key L3, Brake Energy Speed (BE SPD) A DTOA is entered on the Legs WAYPOINT DATA 1/2
is the maximum speed allowed to apply brake for a page for the waypoint that the crew wishes to arrive at
refused take-off. a particular time. WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 page is
accessed by selecting the right soft-key next to the
LANDING DATA waypoint that requires a DTOA. Figure 1-10 indicates
Landing data is accessible from either the TOLD INIT the WAYPOINT DATA page for the waypoint RENFO
or the TAKEOFF DATA pages. Data are presented for in the flight plan. A DTOA has been entered as
both landing ground roll and landing from a 50-foot 0036.35 using soft-key R1 (displayed as 0036:35).
obstacle for all selectable flap positions.
Calculations are made in accordance with FAM.1C- NOTE
27J-1-1 Performance Data Manual.
The WAYPOINT DATA page TOA is not
The crew has the ability to highlight any data calcu-
equivalent to a CARP/LZ TOT. Enter the
lated for a given flap setting by toggling soft-key R1.
CARP/LZ TOT on the applicable CARP/
Data is not calculated and appropriate error mes-
LZ INIT page.
sages are generated if the calculations are outside the
performance data bounds, if available runway is insuf-
ficient, or if the aircraft is too heavy to land (aircraft ini- LZ DTOA may be entered on the LZ INIT 1/2 page
tial breaking speed exceeds maximum brake energy (select R1). CARP TOT is entered on the CARP INIT
speed). 1/5 page (select R1) or on CARP PROGRESS 1/2
page (select L4). Examples are shown in Figure 1-11.

CNI-MU TIME NAV PAGE

TIME NAVIGATION
Once a DTOA is entered for the desired waypoint,
The crew may enter a Desired Time of Arrival (DTOA)
time navigation information is provided to the crew on
at any waypoint in the flight plan. Time navigation
the TIME NAV page to assist the crew in reaching the
information is then provided to assist the crew in arriv-
waypoint at the desired time. Figure 1-12 shows the
ing on time at the designated waypoint. Time naviga-
TIME NAV page after a CARP TOT has been entered.
tion also provides the crew with information to
The TIME NAV page may be reached by branching
determine if a flight plan change is necessary to
from the MISSION page, LEGS WAYPOINT DATA
achieve DTOA/Time on Target (TOT), or if the DTOA/
page, or the LEGS PROGRESS page. The time navi-
TOT is unachievable. Multiple DTOAs may be entered
gation TOT may be changed or removed using R1.
in the flight plan, but time navigation information is
provided to the first active waypoint in the flight plan
with a DTOA/TOT. TOT entries used for CARP mis-
CAUTION
sions are functionally identical to DTOA.
Before time navigation information can be calculated,
the crew must first ensure the PERF INIT pages are Time navigation target speeds are navi-
complete. Without this information, vertical navigation gational calculations only and do not take
can not be predicted and time navigation is not possi- into account aircraft airspeed limitations.
ble. Attempting to fly displayed target speeds
may result in flight outside safe speed lim-
NOTE itations.
Time navigation data may not be accu-
rate. If data is not reasonable, review
flight plan and performance inputs before
accepting time navigation cues.

1-41
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Long Term Time Navigation (Long Term Long-term constant CAS and GS are valid only when
Constant Target Speeds) the aircraft flight phase is CRUISE. When the aircraft
is in a CLIMB or DESCENT phase, the long-term con-
The crew has the ability to select CAS or GS as the
stant target speeds are blank.
long term constant target speed. Cycling between the
CAS value and the GS value causes the values to
change as the CNI-MS performs different computa- Short Term Time Navigation (Active Waypoint
tions with different assumptions. When CAS is high- Target Speed)
lighted, the CNI takes total distance to the time-
Speed values displayed on soft-key R5 display speed
constrained waypoint and time remaining to the
that will get the aircraft back on the planned time pro-
DTOA/TOT and calculates a cruise CAS that places
file by the next waypoint. The pilot can not change
the aircraft at the waypoint on time. In making this cal-
these speeds. The CNI calculates the time required to
culation, the CNI assumes all en route climbs and
fly from the next waypoint to the time constrained
descents are performed using the climb and descent
waypoint to establish an ETA for the next waypoint
profiles defined on the PERF INIT pages. Winds
that achieves the DTOA/TOT. This calculation
defined for the upcoming legs (PERF INIT or waypoint
assumes the aircraft flies the planned profile from the
defined) are used in this calculation. The associated
next waypoint to the time-constrained waypoint. Once
GS value represents the current leg GS that results
the ETA is calculated, the CNI-MS computes a
from flying the long-term CAS during cruise segments.
groundspeed for the current leg that places the air-
Long term target CAS is the speed that the pilot could
craft at the next waypoint at this ETA. Using actual
fly on all cruise segments between present position
winds for the current leg, the CNI-MS computes a
and the target waypoint to arrive on time. If the pilot
CAS that achieves the calculated groundspeed.
flies this airspeed, the Ahead/Behind time would
Once the aircraft sequences the next waypoint, the
slowly go to zero at the target DTOA/TOT waypoint (in
Ahead/Behind (AHD/BHD) time should be zero and
this case distance to go is 73.06 NM).
the aircraft should follow the preplanned speeds and
altitudes.
CAUTION
When the active waypoint is SLOWDOWN on a
CARP, the active waypoint target groundspeed is also
Time navigation target speeds are not based on making up the ahead/behind time to SLOW-
limited to aircraft configuration or perfor- DOWN and resuming the predicted flight profile at
mance speed limitations. Attempt to waypoint (SLOWDOWN) sequence.
achieve displayed target speeds may re- When the distance to waypoint sequence is less than
sult in flight outside safe speed limita- 3 NM, the active waypoint target speeds values are
tions. frozen.

Active waypoint target groundspeed and target CAS

NOTE for the active waypoint are valid only when the aircraft
If the cruise speed on the PERF INIT flight phase is CRUISE. When the aircraft is in a
CRUISE page is changed to the recom- CLIMB and DESCENT phase, the active waypoint tar-
mended long-term constant CAS, the get speeds are blank.
Ahead/Behind (AHD/BHD) time would go
to zero (i.e., the CNI-MS recognizes the Ahead/Behind Time
new planned speed to the time-con-
strained waypoint). The AHD/BHD time provides the crew with an indica-
tion on how far the aircraft is ahead or behind the
When GS is selected, the airspeed displayed is the DTOA. Figure 1-12 shows the aircraft is currently 22
constant groundspeed that the pilot could fly on all seconds behind. In this case, if no corrective action is
cruise segments between present position and the taken, the aircraft would arrive 22 seconds late at the
target waypoint to arrive on time. The associated CAS CARP. AHD/BHD times should be allowed to stabilize
value, now in small font, represents the current CAS after flight plan changes and should be ignored during
required to achieve the commanded groundspeed. waypoint transitions (turns). AHD/BHD times should
This CAS value changes as winds and aircraft true be referenced during level flight at a stabilized air-
airspeed change, ensuring the long-term ground- speed (even though visible during climbs and
speed is maintained. descents).

1-42
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Ahead/Behind time is calculated by the vertical profile The AHD/BHD time jumps when the aircraft
function and is displayed using a 24-hour clock con- sequences a waypoint not flown at the commanded
vention, with a maximum value of 2359:59. airspeed. AHD/BHD time jumps can occur at a way-
point transition if the crew has entered a speed con-
NOTE straint (slow down or acceleration), and the aircraft
remains at its current speed. AHD/BHD jumps can
Occasionally, because of the nature and also occur if a cruise wind that is not the actual wind is
complexity of time navigation calcula- entered at a waypoint. If a wind of 090/25 is placed on
tions, the maximum value may flash mo- the WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 page, the CNI-MS uses this
mentarily, or remain displayed for one or wind to predict a groundspeed.
two vertical profile calculation cycles (up Once the aircraft sequences this waypoint, the CNI-
to 20 seconds). If a large value (>20 MS calculations for the current leg change from the
hours) appears and persists, the crew pilot entered winds to the sensed winds. If the wind is
should verify the entered value for way- actually 090/50, then CNI-MS time navigation compu-
point DTOA. tations update the AHD/BHD times accordingly, possi-
bly causing a time jump.
For example, if the crew entered a DTOA for a way- The same logic applies to a climb or descent, where
point (including CARPs and LZs) of 1630:00, the cur- actual winds may differ from predicted wind entries.
rent time when the crew made the entry was 1700:00,
with 15 minutes estimated time en route to the way- NOTE
point, the ahead/behind calculation would indicate
2315:00. The time navigation function has estimated The CNI-SP uses current leg conditions
the time of arrival to be 1715:00, but assumes that the to calculate the fuel and time estimates
DTOA is 1630:00 the next day. This also may occur if for the next waypoint. If a level segment
the crew enters multiple DTOAs along the flight plan. exists between TOC or BOD and the fol-
If the aircraft sequences a waypoint with an entered lowing waypoint, all time estimates
DTOA, and the timing situation for the next time navi- shown during the climb or descent are bi-
gation waypoint is similar to the example above, the ased according to current conditions. If
same type of display characteristic occurs. accurate down track estimates are re-
The CNI-SP uses current leg conditions to calculate quired under these conditions, a user-de-
the fuel and time estimates for the next waypoint. fined waypoint should be added to the
route at or slightly beyond the predicted
NOTE TOC or BOD.

• If a level segment exists between When a wind is entered on the PERF INIT CRUISE
TOC or BOD and the following way- page, it is applied down path to all waypoints (until the
point, all time and fuel estimates next crew-entered wind) (WAYPOINT DATA 1/2
shown during the climb or descent will page).
be erroneous. If accurate down-track Groundspeeds are based on the crew-entered wind
estimates are required under these for every flight plan leg except the active waypoint leg.
conditions, a user-defined waypoint If the crew does not enter a wind on the PERF INIT
should be added to the route at the CRUISE page, then the current winds are applied
predicted TOC or BOD. down path until the next crew-entered wind (WAY-
POINT DATA 1/2 page).
• TNAV cues including AHD/BHD time
and target speeds may vary errone-
ously during waypoint transition. Reli- NOTE
able values return within If no wind is entered on the PERF INIT
approximately 30 seconds of way- CRUISE page, but the aircraft sequences
point passage. a waypoint with a crew-entered wind (in-
cluding CARP profiles), then that wind is
AHEAD/BEHIND TIME JUMPS
automatically placed on the PERF INIT
Time navigation calculation necessarily results in CRUISE page and is used for down path
jumps under certain circumstances. AHD/BHD time predictions.
jumps can occur at waypoint transitions or after a
climb or descent.

1-43
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-10 Speeds for Cruise Legs

1-44
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-11 Mission Pages

1-45
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-12 Time Navigation

1-46
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

TIME/DISTANCE TO GO NOTE
Time to Go and Distance to Go to the DTOA/TOT Performance data (time and fuel esti-
waypoint are provided to the crew on the TIME NAV mates) may disappear from the PERF
page as shown in Figure 1-12. INIT and LEGS pages if a delay of more
than approximately 45 minutes occurs
between flight plan activation and take-
Fuel Planning and Management off. Performance data will return after
The vertical profile determines current fuel on board take-off or if airfield elevation is entered
using current fuel flow. If current fuel flow is invalid, temporarily as cruise altitude on the
fuel on board is determined from sensed fuel on PERF INIT CRUISE page.
board. Vertical profile uses predicted fuel burn for
each leg in the flight plan to estimate the total fuel
needed to complete the flight (trip fuel), the remaining
fuel at flight completion (extra fuel and reserves as MISSION OPERATIONS
applicable), and the maximum time the flight could be
extended using the extra fuel (endurance time). Pre-
dicted trip fuel, extra fuel, and endurance time are dis- GENERAL MISSION PROCEDURES
played on the PERF INIT WEIGHT page.
While missions are created on the CNI-MU (ICDU),
these functions are controlled by the mission com-
CAUTION puter and are inserted in the CNI-MS lateral and verti-
cal flight plans. Because mission segments are not
computed by the CNI-MS, any route which contains a
Critical fuel decisions should not be pre- mission that is saved as a stored route will not contain
dicted on the information provided by the these mission segments if the stored route is later
CNI-SP calculations alone. Performance loaded into the CNI.
manual charts should be cross-checked
before proceeding on a fuel critical course The vertical profile supports flight profile predictions
of action. for all mission flight procedures (CARPs, SARs, LZs,
and rendezvous (RZ)). Included in this section are
Adjustments to the amount of fuel on board and the details on the holding function, which is also calcu-
fuel burn rate (fuel flow) can be made for any or all lated in the CNI-SP. The general rules for determining
waypoints by entry on the WAYPOINT DATA 2/2 a flight profile are applicable for predicting mission
page. flight procedures profiles but each type has unique
attributes that are used to specify its profile.
For example, each CARP has a specific drop altitude
NOTE
and speed that are used to generate the CARP pro-
No indications are provided at down path file. A SAR is usually flown at 180 kts in a specific pat-
waypoints to indicate that a fuel adjust- tern. An LZ has an FAF/GSI altitude, glide slope, and
ment is in effect. Crews should monitor an associated LZ speed (CAS). An RZ has an initial
the fuel management panel fuel quantity target time, track, and groundspeed. A hold has a hold
readout subsequent to fuel adjustments speed and altitude, and may have an Exit At Time
and ensure that fuel-on-board data is cor- (EAT). Details of how these affect the vertical profile
rect. are addressed in the following paragraphs.

When the predicted active flight plan fuel on board

and the sensed fuel on board differ by more than 2500 HOLDING
pounds for 10 minutes, the CNI-MS generates a The CNI-MS provides a procedure that performs con-
FUEL QTY ERROR message. When extra fuel is zero ventional hold patterns via the lateral guidance func-
or less, the CNI-MS generates a LOW CALCULATED tion. The HOLD function constructs a hold pattern at
FUEL message. any eligible flight plan waypoint or at the aircraft
present position. The CNI-MS allows one hold pattern
at a time to be defined in the active route.

1-47
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Hold Definition Parameters When the crew specifies only the hold radial, the CNI-
MS determines the quadrant based on the sectors
Similarly to other mission functions, the CNI-MS above and displays the result to the crew on the
requires a fully defined pattern initialization. Pattern HOLD page.
initialization includes standard default parameters, If the crew specifies only the quadrant, the CNI-MS
crew entries, and dynamic inputs from CNI-MS sys- assigns the hold radial based on the quadrant entered
tems. The parameters that are either standard according to the following:
defaults or crew entries are:
• N / 0.0 degrees,
• Hold fix label/identifier,
• NE / 45.0 degrees,
• Speed and Altitude,
• E / 90.0 degrees,
• Inbound course,
• SE / 135.0 degrees,
• Turn Direction,
• S / 180.0 degrees,
• Leg Time,
• SW / 225.0 degrees,
• Leg Distance,
• W / 270.0 degrees,
• Fuel Flow,
• NW / 315.0 degrees.
• Hold Quadrant/Radial,
The CNI-MS will reference all bearing information dis-
• Exit At Time, played on the TOLD page to magnetic North, except
• Entry Type and Course, in the Polar Regions, where the CNI-MS references
true North.
• Hold Time Available.
HOLD FUEL FLOW (HOLD FF)
HOLD FIX LABEL/IDENTIFIER (LBL/IDENT)
The HOLD page displays the intended fuel flow for the
The HOLD page (Figure 1-13) displays the hold fix hold pattern procedure. This CNI-MS uses this value
LBL/IDENT selected by the crew. This data is of stan- to determine the HOLD AVAIL time, and for down path
dard format and is determined by the crew when the predictions of fuel on board and gross weight. The
HOLD function is selected via the WAYPOINT DATA CNI-MS sets the default value for the HOLD FF to the
page. For Present Position Holds, PPOS appears. LEG fuel flow that can be found on the Waypoint Data
page for the hold fix. As this value is modified, it also
HOLD SPEED/TARGET ALTITUDE (SPD/TGT modifies dynamically the HOLD AVAIL time and down
ALT)
path predictions for fuel on board and gross weight.
The hold speed is the CAS that determines hold pat-
tern geometry (size) based on the resultant ground- NOTE
speed. The default hold speed is 170 KCAS, which
normally is displayed on the HOLD page. This value • HOLD FF does not appear on the
also is echoed on the LEGS page at the hold way- HOLD INIT page for a hold placed at
point. Crew entry on the HOLD page, or a crew an off-flight-plan waypoint followed by
entered speed constraint at the hold waypoint over- a discontinuity. Manually enter the
write the default. The TGT ALT defaults to FLXXX, HOLD FF value from the PERF INIT
however, if a cruise altitude or waypoint altitude con- or WAYPOINT DATA page.
straint is available for the hold fix, that value is dis-
• The hold fuel burn computed prior to
played as the TGT ALT.
entry of the hold is based on the leg
HOLD QUADRANT/RADIAL fuel flow and not the hold fuel flow.
The hold fuel flow is used once in the
The CNI-MS provides to the crew options for selecting hold.
the position of the hold pattern relative to the hold fix
that may apply to any specific hold situation. Specifi-
cally, the crew may specify a quadrant relative to the
fix in which to hold, or the CNI-MS indicates in which
quadrant a crew-defined hold pattern lies.

1-48
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

INBOUND COURSE HOLD AVAILABLE TIME (HOLD AVAIL)

The inbound course to the hold fix. The inbound The HOLD AVAIL provides the crew with a dynamic
course defaults to the current flight plan course readout of how long (hhmm:ss) it will take to burn the
inbound to the hold fix. If desired, the crew may over- calculated extra fuel at the hold fuel flow. The CNI-MS
write the default value. recomputes this value dynamically if the crew
changes the fuel flow, or alters the flight plan or per-
TURN DIRECTION formance initialization such that the fuel reserve
The turn direction is the desired direction in which the requirements change.
aircraft turns outbound after each crossing of the hold
fix. The turn direction defaults to a right turn pattern. Hold Pattern Entry Procedure
FIX ETA/EAT A soft-key element in HOLD Pattern definition and
execution is determination of the appropriate type of
The CNI-MS either calculates an ETA for reaching the
entry that the CNI-MS performs upon reaching the
hold fix (note that the ETA allows for time to complete
hold fix. Figure 1-14 illustrates that the CNI-MS deter-
the hold entry procedure), or accepts crew entry of an
mines the type of entry based on the relationship
EAT. The EAT is the time at which the crew desires to
between the inbound track crossing the hold fix and
exit the hold. The ETA updates at each circuit of the
the defined inbound course for the hold pattern.
hold pattern, with the CNI-MS assuming that the air-
The CNI-MS makes this determination dynamically
craft performs only one more circuit. The CNI-MS pro-
and compensates for changes in the aircraft track
cesses EAT entries as addressed below.
inbound to the hold fix.
LEG DISTANCE
NOTE
The leg distance is the distance of the inbound leg.
There are adjustments to the pattern to allow for roll in The holding pattern entry type selected
and roll out distances. The displayed distance is in by the CNI-MS is displayed on the HOLD
nautical miles and has a default value based on the page, but the predicted aircraft track is
default leg time (1:00 minute below 14000 feet and not displayed on the NAV/RADAR or dig-
1:30 minutes at 14000 feet and above). If desired, the ital map display.
crew may overwrite the default value. If the crew
desires to specify a value for leg length, the CNI-MS DIRECT ENTRY
recomputes the leg time based on the hold ground-
speed. There are two types of direct entry procedures; Direct
Entry Turn One and Direct Entry Outbound Leg. For
LEG TIME the first type of direct entry (Turn One), the CNI-MS
directs that lateral guidance cross the hold fix and
The leg time is the duration of the inbound leg. The immediately capture turn one. This is apparent to the
default leg time is equal to 1:00 minute below 14000 crew by observing that the lateral guidance indicators
feet and 1:30 minutes at 14000 feet and above. This (e.g., CDI needle, XTK error readout) track the first
value is used to compute the leg distance, which is turn. For the second type of entry (Outbound Leg), the
also displayed on the HOLD page. If desired, the crew CNI-MS directs that lateral guidance cross the hold fix
may overwrite the default value. If the crew desires to and capture the outbound leg. Again, if the crew
specify a value for leg time, the CNI-MS dynamically observes the lateral guidance indicators, the desired
recomputes the leg distance based on the hold course indications revert immediately upon crossing
groundspeed. the hold fix to track the outbound leg.
ENTRY TYPE AND COURSE (ENTRY/CRS) TEAR DROP
The ENTRY/CRS indicates the current type of hold In this entry procedure, the CNI-MS directs lateral
entry procedure determined by the CNI-MS. The entry guidance to cross the hold fix, then turn to an entry leg
procedure determination is based on the relationship inside the hold pattern 30 degrees displaced from the
between the entry track crossing the hold fix and the inbound course. The CNI-MS determines the length of
defined inbound course for the hold pattern. Details of the entry leg based on the defined hold altitude and
the CNI-MS determination are addressed below. the groundspeed when the aircraft crosses the hold
fix.

1-49
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-13 HOLD CNI page

1-50
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-14 Holding Pattern Entry

1-51
FAM.1C-27J-1A

If the hold altitude is below 14000 feet, the entry leg PPOS HOLD
takes slightly longer than 1 minute, provided the
groundspeed does not change significantly. At 14000 An alternate method to establish the aircraft in a hold
feet and above, the entry leg takes approximately pattern, should the crew desire to hold at the aircraft
1:30 minutes. The entry procedure is not depicted on present position, is via the PPOS HOLD function.
the NAV/RADAR Flight Plan Overlay. This function is available via the MSN hard-key versus
right line selection of the hold fix waypoint on the
PARALLEL LEGS page. The definition parameters are the same
as for normal holds; however, the process and prereq-
The CNI-MS accomplishes a parallel entry by con- uisites to activate the function are different. For a
structing an entry leg parallel to the inbound leg of the PPOS HOLD to be available, the aircraft must be on
holding pattern on a reciprocal course. The entry leg an established flight plan leg with a crosstrack error of
is constructed outside the holding pattern such that no more than 0.25 NM and wings near level. When-
the aircraft captures the course with no overshoot. ever these prerequisites are met, the crew may initial-
The CNI-MS determines the length of the entry leg ize the PPOS HOLD function via the MSN hard-key.
based on the defined hold altitude and the ground- Availability of the PPOS HOLD function is indicated by
speed when the aircraft crosses the hold fix. the PPOS HOLD legend being displayed in large font
If the hold altitude is below 14000 feet, the entry leg at L4.
takes approximately 1 minute, provided the ground- Upon selecting L4 the PPOS HOLD page appears
speed does not change significantly. At 14000 feet and the EXEC light illuminates. After the crew com-
and above, the entry leg takes approximately 1:30 pletes the hold pattern definition, pressing the EXEC
minutes. At the end point of the entry leg, the aircraft hard-key updates the hold pattern and establishes
turns toward the defined hold pattern and capture the guidance in the hold procedure.
inbound leg of the hold pattern. The entry procedure is
not depicted on the NAV/RADAR Flight Plan Overlay.
NOTE
Crews should select and execute a PPOS
Hold Pattern Execution in Flight
HOLD prior to the waypoint sequence
FUNCTION SELECTION transitioning to the next leg. Otherwise,
the crew should delete and reselect
At any flight plan waypoint where the crew desires to PPOS HOLD or fly the hold pattern.
establish a hold pattern, the operator must select the
waypoint data page for that waypoint. Then, if a hold
HOLD PATTERN EXIT
pattern is available for that waypoint, pressing the
HOLD soft-key results in the waypoint HOLD page There are two primary methods for the crew to com-
being displayed on the CNI-MU (ICDU). mand an exit from a holding pattern. Normally, when
established in holding and crew decides to leave hold-
HOLD PATTERN SYMBOLOGY ing, they arm the exit using R6. The aircraft turns to
The flight plan overlay depiction of the hold pattern via the holding fix, then exits holding. If desired, the crew
the flight plan overlay shows the hold pattern (no entry may choose to activate L6 to exit the holding pattern
procedures) depicted to scale for the groundspeed at immediately. For this exit procedure, the aircraft turns
hold pattern entry and 25 degree angle of bank turns. directly to the next waypoint.
Depending on the scale selected, the aircraft symbol
may not appear directly on the symbology present on The holding pattern still allows the crew to perform
the displays. standard route bypass procedures such as direct-to
and course intercepts that result in an exit from the
Excessive groundspeed may result in annunciation of holding pattern.
the HIGH HOLDING GND SPD message. This mes-
HOLD EAT OPERATIONS
sage occurs when the calculated turn radius exceeds
a maximum value based on the altitude of the hold The crew may enter a hold EAT via the CNI-MU
pattern. (ICDU) page where the Holding Pattern is defined. In
such a case the holding leg lengths are adjusted to
achieve the EAT.

1-52
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

The process for leg adjustment is as follows: CARP Data Definition

Each inbound leg, the CNI-MS computes the amount The computation of the CARP location is determined
of time required to complete a full orbit in holding and by a set of parameters defined on the CARP INIT
a shortened orbit (an outbound and an inbound turn pages. These parameters are grouped into five classi-
with no straight legs), then compares specific sums of fications: Drop Zone, Payload, Meteorological, Alti-
these times to the time available until the EAT. tude, and Parachute Ballistics.
– If there is sufficient time to do at least one full orbit DROP ZONE PARAMETERS
and one shortened orbit, the CNI-MS completes the
following full orbit and recalculates on the next in- a. Drop Zone Definition – Information on the geo-
bound leg. graphical layout of the drop zone is defined on the
CARP INIT 1/5 page (see Figure 1-16). These data
– If there is not enough time to do a complete full orbit are necessary for defining and flying the lateral
and a shortened orbit, but more than enough time segment of the CARP mission. An example of the
to do two short orbits, the CNI-MS modifies the next lateral flight path of the CARP mission is shown.
two hold patterns (shorten the straight segments)
so as to arrive at the hold fix the second time at the b. Point of Impact (PI) Location – The PI location is
EAT. the latitude/longitude position where the first ele-
ment dropped out of the aircraft is to land. The
– If there is not enough time to do two complete short- LBL/IDENT defines the identifier of the PI location
ened orbits, the CNI-MS attempts to do one orbit and the PI POSITION is the latitude/longitude of
with shortened straight segments. the PI location. The usual operation for defining the
In each case, on the final orbit prior to the EAT, the PI location is by way of the inclusion of the PI in the
CNI-MS annunciates a FINAL HOLD message. The flight plan. The sequence necessary for creating a
crew must then arm the hold exit using R6. CARP in the flight plan is as follows:
If on any inbound leg the CNI-MS determines that the 1. Insert the PI location into the flight plan as a
aircraft cannot complete the following orbit and reach waypoint.
the hold fix within 30 seconds of the EAT, the CNI-MS
annunciates an EAT UNACHIEVABLE message. 2. Select the MFP prompt on the WAYPOINT
DATA page for the PI waypoint.
TIME NAVIGATION WITH A HOLDING PATTERN
IN THE FLIGHT PLAN 3. Select CARP INIT on the MISSIONS page.
The PI identifier is displayed in the LBL/IDENT
If the holding pattern is at a down path waypoint, the field and the latitude/longitude of the PI loca-
CNI-MS determines the estimated time/distance to fly tion is displayed in the PI POSITION field on
from the holding fix (initial overfly) to the next way- the CARP INIT 1/5 page.
point. The time/distance includes the entry procedure
time/distance, one circuit pattern time/distance, and
NOTE
the time/distance from the holding fix (upon exiting the
pattern) to the next waypoint. If a PI is not defined, a default magnetic
variation of +8 degrees is used to calcu-
late the CARP run-in course. Upon enter-
AIRDROP OPERATIONS PLANNING ing a PI, or defining the CARP to a
The CNI-MS supports airdrop operations by calculat- waypoint in the flight plan, the run-in
ing required CARP and drop zone parameters. (see course is adjusted to the new magnetic
Figure 1-15 through Figure 1-19). The CNI-MS sup- variation at the newly defined PI or way-
ports Personnel (PER), Container Delivery System point.
(CDS), and Heavy Equipment (HE) airdrop operations
in both low and high altitude profiles. The high altitude The PI location is also defined or overwritten di-
profile typically may be a two-stage drop. Two-stage rectly on the CARP INIT 1/5 page by entering the
drops allow for an additional free fall component. The waypoint identifier or label/identifier combination
CNI-MS integrates CARP as a set of waypoints defin- into the LBL/IDENT field.
ing the airdrop profile in the flight plan. There can be c. Drop Zone Length (LE - TE, LE - PI) – The length
up to 10 separate airdrops in each flight plan route, of the useable drop zone is determined by the CNI-
with each one having the capability to run multiple MS using the LENGTH LE-TE and LE-PI.
passes over the drop zone. CARP lateral path is
shown in Figure 1-15.

1-53
FAM.1C-27J-1A

LENGTH LE-TE is the distance in yards from the System (CDS), and Heavy Equipment (HE) for a
leading edge of the drop zone to the trailing edge. given airdrop. Selection of the payload type is pro-
The LE-PI field is the distance in yards from the vided through the LOAD soft-key L1 on the CARP
leading edge of the drop zone to the PI location. INIT 2/5 page. The payload type is used to set de-
The useable drop zone length starts at the PI loca- fault airdrop speeds and to narrow the selection of
tion and ends at trailing edge. Any required safety allowable parachutes. Once a CARP mission is
zone must be subtracted from the trailing edge of completely defined in the flight plan, the payload
the drop zone. type cannot be changed since it would invalidate
the parachute ballistics and the CARP drift solu-
d. Run-in Course (RUN IN CRS) – The Run-In
tion. The airdrop would have to first be removed
Course, RUN IN CRS, defines the alignment of the
from the flight plan before the payload type could
drop zone axis. The turn point, slow down, and
be changed.
drop zone escape locations as computed by the
CNI are aligned with the run-in course. The course b. Number of Stages – The CNI supports single- and
is entered referenced to magnetic or true north, but two-stage airdrops through the STAGE soft-key L2
in the Polar Regions (point of impact latitude is on the CARP INIT 2/5 page. For the single-stage
north of 72.5° N or south of 59.5° S) the run-in airdrop, the CNI computes a single drift vector from
course must be entered with a true north refer- the drop altitude to the surface. For the two-stage
ence. The magnetic variation is computed using airdrop, the CNI computes a high velocity drift vec-
the PI location and the magnetic variation table. tor from the drop altitude to the actuation altitude,
and a parachute-deployed drift vector from the ac-
e. Slow Down Distance (SD DIST) – Slow Down Dis- tuation altitude to the surface. The two-stage drop
tance (SD DIST) is the great circle distance, in requires additional altitude, wind, and temperature
nautical miles, from the slow down point to the values at the actuation altitude.
CARP. The CNI-MS uses this fixed distance to
manage any speed change and altitude change c. Parachute Identifier and Number of Chutes – The
necessary to be at the drop speed and altitude be- parachute ballistic database contains ballistics on
fore overflying the CARP location. The operator 20 parachutes, which are accessible to the opera-
must insure there is sufficient distance to execute tor using the CHUTE LIST. The parachute identifi-
the speed and altitude change since the CNI-MS ers in the CHUTE LIST are categorized by payload
uses a fixed linear deceleration rate of 90 knots/ type. The parachute identifier and number of para-
minute. The entry of a slow down distance must be chutes are repeated on the CARP INIT 5/5 page,
less than the turn point distance. where the parachute ballistics are displayed.
f. Turn Point Distance (TP DIST) – The turn point is d. Fuselage Station and Load Station – The station
the beginning of the airdrop lateral path and is a identifies the location of the first element to be
waypoint defined by the CNI using the TP DIST dropped during a CDS airdrop. The element sta-
which is a fixed distance in nautical miles from the tion location in the cargo area affects the payload
airdrop release point. The entry of a turn point dis- exit time. Default value for payload station is 574.
tance must be greater than the slow down dis-
e. Exit Location – For personnel drops, an EXIT loca-
tance.
tion may be specified as DOOR or RAMP. The lo-
g. Drop Zone Escape (DZ ESC) Distance – The DZ cation affects the exit time used in the drift
ESC waypoint defines the end of the airdrop lateral computation. Exit location is not selectable for HE
flight path. The drop zone escape distance, DZ and CDS drops.
ESC, is the distance in nautical miles from the red
f. Element and Payload Weight – The CNI uses the
light location to the DZ ESC waypoint. A 0.5 NM
element weight, ELEM WT, in computing the ele-
distance is used as the default.
ment ballistics that ultimately affect the CARP
PAYLOAD PARAMETERS computation. The number of elements to be
dropped is used to compute the total payload
The data defining the characteristics of the payload to weight, DROP PAYLD. If the total payload weight
be dropped are entered on the CARP INIT 2/5 page is different from the value computed by the CNI,
(see Figure 1-16). These data are necessary for com- the operator must change the DROP PAYLD to the
puting the element’s drift, which is used to determine correct value. The total payload weight is used on
the release point location. the CARP PROGRESS 2/2 page to adjust PERF
a. Payload Type – The CNI supports three types of INIT weight payload value after the airdrop is per-
payload, Personnel (PER), Container Delivery formed.

1-54
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-15 CARP Lateral Path

1-55
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-16 CARP Initialization

1-56
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

g. Drop Speed – The drop speed CAS is the speed at The computed values for temperature and barometric
which the aircraft overflies the drop zone, from pressure are over-written by the operator by simply
GREEN LIGHT to RED LIGHT. The CNI-MS as- entering the value on the CARP INIT 3/5 page. The
sumes a deceleration is applied from the preced- operator returns to the default values by deleting the
ing cruise speed to the drop speed once the entered values.
aircraft passes the slow down point. When the pay-
a. Drop Altitude Temperature – The drop altitude tem-
load type is personnel, the CNI initially uses a drop
perature, ALT TEMP on the CARP INIT 3/5 page,
speed of 130 knots CAS. For CDS and heavy
is the temperature at the drop altitude. The CNI-
equipment payloads, the initial drop speed is 140
MS uses this data, along with payload and para-
knots CAS.
chute data, to compute a ballistics solution.
h. Racetrack – The CNI-MS supports multiple runs
b. Actuation Altitude Temperature – For a two-stage
over the same drop zone using the same airdrop
airdrop, the actuation altitude temperature, ACTN
data. The RACETRACK soft-key L5 allows the op-
TEMP on the CARP INIT 3/5 page, is the temper-
erator to select the multiple run option. When ESC
ature at the actuation altitude. There is no actua-
is selected, the aircraft exits the airdrop when the
tion altitude temperature for a single stage airdrop.
DZ ESC waypoint is sequenced. When L is select-
The CNI-MS uses this data, along with payload
ed, the aircraft flies a left turn racetrack back to the
and parachute data, to compute a ballistics solu-
TP waypoint. When R is selected, the aircraft flies
tion.
a right turn racetrack back to the TP waypoint.
Since the distance between the TP and DZ ESC c. Surface Temperature – The surface temperature,
waypoints defines the length of the racetrack, SFC TEMP on the CARP INIT 3/5 page, is the tem-
changing the TP distance modifies the racetrack perature measured at the point of impact. The CNI-
length. This allows for shorter or longer runs over MS uses this data, along with payload and para-
the drop zone after the initial run. chute data, to compute a ballistics solution.
METEOROLOGICAL PARAMETERS d. Barometric Pressure – The barometric pressure
entered on the CARP INIT 3/5 page is either de-
The meteorological data used by the CNI-MS includes fined referenced to QNH or QFE. QNH is the baro-
wind, temperature, and barometric pressure. For each metric pressure measured at sea level (i.e., the
temperature not entered on the CARP INIT 3/5 page altimeter would read the current MSL altitude).
(Figure 1-17, sheet 1), the CNI-MS displays the stan- QFE is the barometric pressure as measured at
dard temperature for the corresponding altitude and the point of impact (i.e., the altimeter would read
applies the current temperature deviation when using zero at the point of impact elevation). The baromet-
this temperature in CARP calculations. ric pressure is entered in units of inches Hg or mil-
libars. The CNI-MS uses this data, along with
The CNI-MS defaults to temperature deviation and payload and parachute data, to compute a ballis-
barometric pressure from the air data computer for the tics solution.
initial computation if the operator has not entered tem-
perature and barometric pressure values when the If the crew does not enter an altimeter setting, the
CARP computation is performed. Since the CARP CNI-MS defaults to the altimeter setting of the se-
computation is not performed periodically, only when lected DA/FD or ship solution side.
executing the airdrop profile, the operator does not
necessarily see en route changes in the CARP tem- e. CARP Winds – Wind is defined in the CNI-MS as a
perature or barometric pressure when air data true wind. Winds may be entered by the crew or
changes. The barometric pressure from the air data computed (sensed) by aircraft systems using data
computer is directly used as the default value for the from the navigation sensors and the air data com-
barometric pressure of the airdrop. For each tempera- puter.
ture not entered on the CARP INIT 3/5 page, the CNI-
MS computes the temperature using the current tem- The CNI-MS calculates a CARP using a ballistic
perature deviation and the associated altitude stan- wind. The ballistic wind is defined as the vector av-
dard temperature. For example, the drop altitude erage of two winds. For a single-stage airdrop, the
temperature is the sum of the standard temperature at vector average of the drop altitude and surface
the drop altitude and the temperature deviation. When winds is used for the ballistic wind. The CARP
the associated altitude has not been defined, the tem- computation of a two-stage airdrop makes use of a
perature cannot be calculated by the CNI-MS. low and a high ballistic wind.

1-57
FAM.1C-27J-1A

The high ballistic wind is the vector average of the c. Indicated absolute altitude (IAA) is the height
drop altitude and actuation altitude winds and is above the QFE pressure level in the standard at-
used to calculate ballistics for the free fall portion of mosphere. IAA is used for the actuation altitude to
the airdrop. The low ballistic wind is the vector av- define the height above the point of impact that the
erage of the actuation altitude and surface winds parachute is deployed. (An altimeter placed at the
and is used to calculate ballistics under canopy. PI and set to QFE indicates zero.)
When altitude winds are sensed and change rapid-
Elevations along the surface of the drop zone area are
ly, the ballistic wind also changes if it remains in
required to complete the definition of the vertical axis
the calculated mode (small font). The CARP
for the CARP computation. These elevations are
changes as a result. If the altitude wind is entered,
entered in feet above mean sea level.
the ballistic wind remains fixed, even if calculated,
and the CARP remains fixed. If a ballistic wind is a. PI elevation is the elevation at the point of impact
directly entered by the crew, it will be used directly and is used to compute the distance the element
in the CARP calculation and remains fixed until de- will drop; i.e., from drop altitude to PI elevation.
leted. There is no need to input altitude or surface
winds if the ballistic wind is entered. b. Drop zone elevation is the highest elevation in the
drop zone area. For a single stage airdrop, the
For a two-stage airdrop, the high ballistic wind, HI drop zone elevation is used along with the mini-
BAL W/V on the CARP INIT 3/5 page and HI BAL mum drop height to define the minimum altitude re-
on the CARP PROGRESS 1/2 page (Figure 1-17, quired to assure the parachute deployment before
sheet 2), is computed when the drop altitude and the element reaches the ground. For two-stage air-
actuation altitude winds are defined. The low bal- drops, the drop zone elevation is not entered.
listic wind, LO BAL W/V on the CARP INIT 3/5 For a single stage airdrop, the CNI-MS computes a
page and LO BAL on the CARP PROGRESS 1/2 minimum drop altitude based on the entries made on
page, is computed when the actuation altitude and the CARP INIT 4/5 page. The crew must specify either
surface winds are defined. All ballistic winds can the drop zone elevation and minimum drop height, or
be overwritten by crew entry. specify the obstruction elevation and required clear-
ance height. The minimum drop altitude is the sum of
ALTITUDE AND ELEVATION PARAMETERS
drop zone elevation and minimum drop height or the
The altitudes and elevation values used by the CNI- sum of obstruction elevation and required clearance.
MS to define the airdrop profile are defined on the When all four parameters are available the minimum
CARP INIT 4/5 (Figure 1-17, sheet 3). The types of drop altitude is the greater of the two sums. If no drop
altitudes available to the operator are different for sin- altitude has been entered, then the minimum drop alti-
gle stage and two-stage airdrops. The two-stage air- tude is used for the drop altitude.
drop has an additional actuation altitude requirement.
The references of the drop and actuation altitude The various methods by which the altitudes and ele-
depend on the type of airdrop mission to be flown. vations can be defined gives flexibility to the operator
The drop altitude is referenced as either a Pressure to fit the data entered to the airdrop mission. The CNI-
Altitude (PA) or an indicated true altitude (QNH). The MS uses the entered altitude, PI elevation, tempera-
actuation altitude is referenced as a PA, indicated true ture, and altimeter setting to determine the distance
altitude (QNH), or an indicated absolute altitude the element will fall from the aircraft to the point of
(QFE). impact. This distance is used directly in the CARP
computation and any difference between the entered
a. Pressure Altitude is the height above the QNE data and the actual conditions adversely affect the
pressure level in the standard atmosphere. It is the accuracy of the CARP solution.
altitude the altimeter displays when the barometric
setting is 29.92 inHg. Figure 1-17 sheet 4 is a single stage example of using
b. Indicated true altitude is the height above the QNH a QNH drop altitude in a drop zone where there is a
pressure level in the standard atmosphere. The al- known obstruction. In this case, minimum drop alti-
timeter displays the PI elevation when it is located tude is the sum of the obstruction elevation and
at the PI location. (An altimeter placed at the PI required clearance. Notice that the drop altitude is
and set to QNH indicates PI elevation). above the minimum drop altitude. When a drop alti-
tude is entered that is less than the computed mini-
mum drop altitude, the CNI-MS displays the DROP
ALT BELOW MIN message on the CNI-MU (ICDU).

1-58
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

The two-stage model is used in determining the In addition to this data, a two-stage airdrop requires
release point for high altitude airdrops. The initial deceleration distance, deceleration time, deployed
stage (free fall) of a two-stage high altitude airdrop rate of fall, and the high velocity rate of fall. The
begins when the parachute exits the aircraft and ends deployed rate of fall is the same as the single-stage
at actuation altitude. The second stage (deployment) rate of fall. The high velocity rate of fall is the free fall
is from the actuation altitude until ground impact. velocity of the element.

Figure 1-17 sheet 5 is an example of a two-stage high

altitude airdrop showing the relationship between drop CARP Progress
altitude, actuation altitude, and PI elevation. The progress of the airdrop mission is managed and
monitored through the CARP PROG pages. The
Figure 1-17 sheet 6 is an example of a single-stage pages display dynamic parameters associated with
high altitude airdrop using a PA drop altitude, mini- the airdrop that are useful for monitoring the airdrop
mum drop height, and drop zone elevation. Because mission during flight.
of the high altitude, the minimum drop altitude has no The data predominantly modified during the airdrop
impact to this type of airdrop mission. The parachute operation are also accessible on the CARP PROG
is deployed at the high altitude with no free-fall stage. pages. The dynamic parameters displayed on the
This would result in large variations in the computa- CARP PROG 1/2 page are the computed CARP offset
tion of the CARP waypoint location with small location, sensed wind, figure of merit, ahead/behind
changes in the drop altitude wind. This may not be time, time to the release point, and time to red light.
desirable when approaching the release point and the
aircraft is past the slow down point. To remove the From the CARP PROG pages the operator may per-
effect of variations in the CARP computation, the form the following selections: branch to abort the air-
operator can enter a ballistic wind or switch to ENT drop, adjust the position of the release point, confirm
entered winds on the CARP PROGRESS 1/2 page. the payload dropped, or make adjustments to the pay-
Either action would freeze the CARP computation load dropped in the event of a partial/incomplete drop.
such that the run-in lateral path would not shift for the Other modifiable parameters are the sensed/entered
remainder of the profile. wind selection, drop altitude and speed, required time
over target, racetrack left/right selection, and the vari-
PARACHUTE BALLISTICS ous airdrop winds.
Parachute ballistic data are specified for an airdrop in
the mission plan on the CARP INIT 2/5 or 5/5 page by SENSED AND ENTERED WINDS
entering a parachute identifier into the chute/number The WINDS soft-key L2 on the CARP PROGRESS 1/
field. The required ballistic data is then loaded into the 2 page indicates which drop altitude wind data
CNI from a lookup table for the selected chute. The (sensed or entered), the CNI-MS is currently using in
pilot may also directly input any of the ballistic data to the CARP computation. The sensed wind based on
include overwriting default lookup table data. the ship solution is used in the CARP computation in
This allows flexibility for the crew if the actual para- place of the drop altitude wind under the following
chute used is not available for selection in the CNI conditions:
tables.
• The ballistic wind has not been entered,
• The aircraft has passed the slow down point,
CAUTION
• The aircraft is within 200 feet of the drop altitude.

Do not enter CARP inputs which are out- The WINDS soft-key is used to override the CNI
side the bound of the chute ballistics ta- selection, but is non-operational when the ballistic
ble. wind has been entered (high ballistic wind for a two-
stage airdrop). In this case, the entered ballistic wind
As long as the crew or the CNI loads all of the is used in the CARP computation. When the drop alti-
required drop parameters, a CARP calculation can be tude wind (sensed wind) is varying widely in magni-
made. The required parameters to define a CARP for tude and/or direction during the airdrop, the operator
a single-stage airdrop are vertical distance, time of fall may select ENT via the WINDS soft-key to fix the drop
constant, exit time, rate of fall, and the deceleration altitude wind in the CARP computation and stop the
quotient. movement of the CARP waypoint caused by the vary-
ing winds.

1-59
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-17 CARP CNI Pages and Staged Airdrop Profiles (sh. 1/6)

1-60
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-17 CARP CNI Pages and Staged Airdrop Profiles (sh. 2/6)

1-61
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-17 CARP CNI Pages and Staged Airdrop Profiles (sh. 3/6)

1-62
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-17 CARP CNI Pages and Staged Airdrop Profiles (sh. 4/6)

1-63
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-17 CARP CNI Pages and Staged Airdrop Profiles (sh. 5/6)

1-64
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-17 CARP CNI Pages and Staged Airdrop Profiles (sh. 6/6)

1-65
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Entering a drop altitude wind following completion of The estimated time takes into account planned speed
CARP initialization (expanded) also sets the WINDS and altitude changes, waypoint transitions, and the
soft-key to select and use entered winds. If the crew slowdown to drop speed. Any deviations from the plan
desires to switch back to using sensed values, the such as flying a different speed from the planned
crew must manually switch to sensed via the CARP speed or bypassing waypoints in the flight plan result
PROGRESS page. in variations in the time to go.
When the crew desires to execute a multiple-run race-
track, the sensed/entered logic resets each time, such RED LIGHT TIME
that computations switch to using sensed wind values The red light time is the duration of time estimated to
at the next slow down (unless the winds are again fly over the drop zone from the release point to red
entered manually). light. It is estimated using the entered drop altitude,
DROP ALTITUDE AND DROP SPEED speed, and wind. After passing the release point and
the aircraft is over the drop zone, the red light time is
The drop altitude and speed fields reflect the altitude determined using the distance to the end of the drop
and speed values that are entered on the CARP INIT zone and the current groundspeed.
pages. The drop altitude entry has the same refer-
ence as the drop altitude entry on the CARP INIT 4/5 DROP RESULTS
page, defined by drop altitude type, either PA or QNH. The drop results allow the operator to adjust the loca-
When no drop altitude is entered (i.e., the CARP com- tion of the CARP waypoint. This function may be
putation is using the computed minimum drop alti- used, for example, on multiple-run CARPs to refine
tude), the CNI uses the drop altitude type of QNH for the airdrop accuracy. Before any particular run over
the entry of a drop altitude. the drop zone the CARP position is computed by
TIME ON TARGET using the element drift distance and direction then
adjusted by using the drop results entered on the
The crew may enter a TOT for an airdrop on the CARP PROGRESS 2/2 page.
CARP INIT, CARP PROG, WAYPOINT DATA, and Figure 1-18 illustrates the application of drop results
TIME NAV pages. Entering a time on any one of these to the CARP solution. Note the drop results direction
pages results in a single time over target value set for is relative to the run in course.
that airdrop.
When a TOT is set for the next airdrop in the flight PAYLOAD DROPPED CONFIRMATION
plan, the CNI-MS uses the difference between the After the payload is dropped, the crew should update
current time and the entered TOT value to annunciate the payload weight used by the CNI-MS. Initially, the
the 20 MIN UNTIL CARP and 10 MIN UNTIL CARP payload dropped on the CARP PROGRESS 2/2 page
messages. The ETA and Time To Go (TTG) to the is the drop payload shown on the CARP INIT 2/5
CARP waypoint are not used for these messages page. The initial TOTAL PAYLOAD displayed on this
when a TOT value is set. page is derived from crew entry of payload weight on
For example, the 20 MIN UNTIL CARP message is the PERF INIT WEIGHT page. If a different weight of
annunciated for a TOT value of 1025:00 when the payload is dropped during the airdrop, then the actual
time on the POWER UP page is 1005:00. amount released must be entered in the payload
dropped field. When the CONFIRM prompt is pressed
When the aircraft overflys the CARP waypoint during the payload dropped is subtracted from the total pay-
the airdrop profile, the time over target value for that load. For multiple runs over the same airdrop the
airdrop is removed. If there are multiple runs over the amount of payload dropped after each pass over the
same drop zone, a new TOT value is entered during drop zone is confirmed.
the racetrack and is applicable to the next run over the
drop zone. CARP ANNUNCIATION MESSAGES
TIME TO GO When approaching the drop zone the operator is pro-
vided the following CNI-MU (ICDU) Alert annuncia-
The time it takes the aircraft to fly along the flight plan tions on the progress of the airdrop:
to the release point (CARP waypoint) is displayed in
the time to go field. The CNI-MS estimate of this time 20 MINUTES UNTIL CARP
uses the current ground speed for the active leg and
10 MINUTES UNTIL CARP
predicted times en-route for the down path legs in the
flight plan, up to the CARP waypoint. 6 MINUTES UNTIL CARP (for personnel only)

1-66
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

2 MINUTES UNTIL CARP c. When the aircraft crosstrack error is greater than
150 meters, the CARP XTK annunciation is dis-
1 MINUTES UNTIL CARP played. If both the vertical and crosstrack condi-
10 SECONDS UNTIL CARP tions occur at the same time, the CARP XTK/VERT
message is displayed. If the condition that resulted
5 SECONDS UNTIL CARP in the message being displayed no longer exists,
4 SECONDS UNTIL CARP the message is automatically cleared. The mes-
sage is also cleared when the aircraft crosses the
3 SECONDS UNTIL CARP red light location.
2 SECONDS UNTIL CARP If either CARP XTK or CARP VERT conditions is true,
the aircraft does not automatically select the green
1 SECOND UNTIL CARP
light. The crew must be prepared to manually select
GREEN LIGHT the green light if these messages are displayed when
the aircraft crosses the CARP.
RED LIGHT
AIRDROP LATERAL GUIDANCE
SLOWDOWN
The lateral approach to the drop zone begins when
CARP XTK
the initial point is sequenced and the TP is the active
CARP VERT waypoint and ends when the DZ ESC waypoint is
sequenced. The transition at the TP is curve-path and
CARP XTK/VERT. the CNI sequences and flies the curve path transition
If there is no TOT specified the CNI estimates the time onto the CARP leg as a normal transition. At this
to the CARP (ETA) and displays the appropriate mes- point, the approach to the airdrop release point and
sage based on this estimated time to go. Each Until beyond to the DZ ESC is aligned with the drop zone
CARP message has a range of time that it is dis- axis (run-in course).
played and does not depend on the time to go to pass When the aircraft is abeam the release point the
through the Until time. The 6 MIN UNTIL CARP mes- CARP waypoint is not sequenced as with a normal
sage is displayed only when the payload type is per- transition. Instead, the CARP remains active to allow
sonnel. for the aircraft to fly over the drop zone multiple times
The SLOW DOWN message is displayed when the as described under the Multiple Run Airdrop section.
distance to the release point is less than or equal to If ESC is selected on the RACETRACK soft-key, the
the slow down distance, SD DIST specified on the CARP waypoint will be sequenced when the aircraft is
CARP INIT 1/5 page. abeam the DZ ESC waypoint. At this time the DZ ESC
waypoint is also sequenced and a radius of turn tran-
Starting at 30 seconds before the aircraft reaches the sition is flown to the next leg in the flight plan.
release point, the CNI monitors the vertical and
crosstrack deviations. When the aircraft is not on the When the aircraft is between the TP and DZ ESC
planned drop altitude, per the following conditions: waypoints, the CNI-MS switches to a sensitive steer-
ing mode (approach gains) and reports the crosstrack
a. When the drop altitude is at least 2000 feet above error in yards instead of miles. The roll command to
the PI elevation and the aircraft altitude is off the the autopilot is normally limited to 3 degrees/second
drop altitude by more than 200 feet (above or be- and the acceleration is limited to ±1 degree/second,
low). but when using sensitive steering, there is no roll rate
b. When the drop altitude is less than 2000 feet limiting and no acceleration limiting on the roll com-
above the PI elevation and the aircraft altitude is mand. The bank angle still is limited to 30 degrees. If
above the drop altitude by more than 200 feet or there is a notable difference between the entered and
the aircraft altitude is 10 percent below of the drop sensed winds or it is a high altitude airdrop, the CARP
altitude (AGL). The 10 percent formula has a mini- position may move significantly when the aircraft
mum of 50 feet, (e.g., the CARP VERT message is passes the slow down. The smaller the difference
displayed if the aircraft altitude is 149 feet AGL between the entered drop altitude wind and the actual
when the drop altitude is 200 feet AGL). sensed wind, the less movement of the CARP posi-
tion.

1-67
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-18 CARP Drop Results

1-68
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Also, once slow down occurs and the CNI begins SEARCH AND RESCUE OPERATIONS
using the sensed winds continuously for the CARP PLANNING
computation, the CARP position may move in
Each Route supports up to four SAR procedures.
response to variations in ballistics computations, most
Each procedure can be one of four types of SAR pat-
notably those resulting from variable sensed wind
terns: CREEPING LINE search, PARALLEL search,
computations. If the ballistic wind is entered (high bal-
SECTOR search, and EXPANDING SQUARE search.
listic wind for a two-stage airdrop), the sensed wind is
Only the first SAR procedure is expanded into the
not used and the only movement in the CARP position
flight plan. Profiles of these patterns are shown in Fig-
will be due to changes in groundspeed.
ure 1-20. The patterns are created and entered into
the flight plan via the MISSIONS page and SAR INIT
The CNI-MS determines the Distance To Go (DTG)
pages. Once a SAR is active, flight progress is dis-
and TTG to the release point when the CARP is the
played on the SAR PROG page. SARs are created
active waypoint and the aircraft has not reached the
and entered in the flight plan by pressing the MFP
release point. If slow down has not occurred the CNI-
soft-key on the Waypoint Data page for the waypoint
MS uses a 90 knot/minute deceleration to the drop
that becomes the IP for the SAR.
speed when estimating the TTG. After slow down, the
CNI uses the current speed to compute TTG. When
the aircraft is between the CARP and red light, the SAR Components
CNI determines DTG and TTG to the red light. When
the aircraft is between red light and DZ ESC, the CNI For each SAR there is an entry, a defined pattern, and
determines DTG and TTG to the DZ ESC waypoint. If a termination.
the aircraft is on the return path to the CARP for a
ENTRY
multiple run, the CNI determines DTG and TTG back
to the release point. Figure 1-19 illustrates the profile The type of entry determined by the CNI-MS depends
of a CARP with a drop altitude that is below the pre- on the course change between the inbound leg to the
dicted CARP * TP waypoint altitude. The profile SAR IP and the initial leg of the SAR pattern.
shows that the predicted descent to the drop altitude Figure 1-21 shows the SAR entry geometry for course
and the predicted deceleration (90 knots per minute) changes less than 135 degrees at the SAR IP.
to the drop speed both begin at the slow down point. If The CNI-MS constructs a SAR Approach Waypoint
a racetrack is specified, the go around is predicted (SARAW) on the same course as the first leg of the
using a racetrack speed of 140 KCAS. SAR pattern at a distance that allows a normal curved
path transition to overfly the SAR IP. The transition is
As the CARP is flown, the PERF INIT CRUISE page such that the aircraft rolls wings level as the IP is over-
cruise altitude and speed get modified. When the SD flown.
position is reached the drop speed becomes the
cruise speed and the drop altitude becomes the cruise NOTE
altitude.
The SARAW location is dynamically com-
Special restrictions are applied to LEGS page descent puted based on current conditions when
angle/speed and altitude entries for the * CARP way- the SAR IP is the active WPT. When air-
point of a CARP (CARP data can only be modified on craft speed or altitude changes are per-
the CARP INIT page). formed on the SAR IP Leg it is possible to
cause the aircraft not to overfly the IP.
NOTE
Figure 1-21 shows the SAR entry geometry for course
The CNI-MS assigns airspeed and alti- changes greater or equal to 135 degrees at the SAR
tude constraints at the DZ ESC equal to IP. The aircraft overflies the IP at a course 150
the drop speed and altitude. The vertical degrees from the SAR course and perform a teardrop
profile propagates these constraints procedure. The teardrop outbound distance is based
throughout the remainder of the flight plan on the aircraft turn radius required to overfly the IP at
until the CNI-MS encounters new vertical the SAR course.
profile constraints. As such, whenever a When flying the SARs, the corners are cut with a tan-
CARP is part of a vertical profile flight gential curved path transition based upon a 23
plan, the crew must enter a new cruise degrees bank angle with a bank limit of 25 degrees.
airspeed and altitude at the DZ ESC way- This is based on the LNAV nominal bank angle for
point. turns greater than or equal to 90 degrees.

1-69
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PATTERN The sector pattern does not have an automatic exit,

and the crew must exit manually.
The SAR INIT page (Figure 1-22) on the CNI-MU
(ICDU) allows the crew to define the pattern geometry
for each pattern type. The type of pattern selected by Creeping Line Search Pattern
the crew must be based on the SAR situation, with
A right aligned creeping line search pattern is shown
environmental conditions and target characteristics
in Figure 1-20. The crew may enter the required pat-
determining the specifics of each pattern.
tern parameters on the SAR INIT page as follows:
Details of these patterns are addressed in the follow-
ing paragraphs. The CNI-MS relays the pattern itself a. Label/Identifier – The label associated with the
to the MCs, allowing display of the pattern on the nav- SAR IP is displayed at L1 on the SAR INIT page.
igation display flight plan overlay (within the normal
limitations of number of waypoints allowable). b. IP Position – The IP coordinates are displayed on
the SAR INIT page at L2.
SAR PROCEDURE SEQUENCING
c. Pattern Type (SAR PATTERN) – The selected
All SAR waypoints are sequenced as curved path (highlighted) pattern determines the available op-
transitions including the SAR EXIT to the next flight tions for pattern geometry. For example, the SAR
plan WPT. A bypass, DIR TO, or DIR INTC can be turn/alignment data field at R5 displays SAR
performed to any down path SAR WPT and the SAR ALIGN if the SAR type is parallel or creeping line,
procedure continues. and TURNS if otherwise (sector, expanding, etc.).
The primary and secondary routes can be swapped To select a sector pattern, the crew must toggle L3
during a SAR. The SAR curved path is predicted until CPR LN is highlighted in large font.
using 23 degrees bank angle (based on the default
d. Initial Course (INIT CRS) – The crew-entered initial
LNAV nominal bank angle for turns greater than or
course is displayed on the SAR INIT page at L4.
equal to 90 degrees) with a bank angle limit of 25
The initial course entered by the crew defines the
degrees. A MARK point or P/B/D from the MARK point
track for the first leg of the pattern. This track is
can be used to expand a new SAR procedure in the
perpendicular to the main axis of the search pat-
second route while retaining the SAR procedure in the
tern. The primary search legs are on the entered
primary route.
course, or on the reciprocal thereof.
The crew may use a PPOS Hold to pause the SAR
procedure (a HOLD at a SAR WPT is not supported). e. Radius/Range (RAD/RANGE) – The crew-entered
A MARK point or P/B/D WPT from a MARK point can SAR pattern range is displayed, in nautical miles,
be used to expand a new SAR procedure in the sec- on the SAR INIT page at R4. The CNI-MS con-
ond route while retaining the SAR procedure in the structs a pattern that extends the entered value
primary route when the primary route is re-activated. from the SAR IP perpendicular to the initial course.
f. Leg Spacing (SPACE/WIDTH) – The crew-entered
NOTE leg spacing and width are displayed, in nautical
Reentry to a SAR procedure following a miles, on the SAR INIT page at L5. The crew must
bypass or DIR TO may automatically se- enter these values as depicted in Figure 1-20 to
quence several down path waypoints define the pattern geometry. The spacing is the
based upon geometry of the reentry path. distance between primary legs, and the pattern
A DIR INTC to the desired SAR WPT width is the length of the primary legs.
should be performed. g. SAR Alignment (SAR ALIGN) – The crew-selected
SAR alignment is highlighted on the SAR INIT
EXIT/TERMINATION page at R5. The default value is L indicating a left
The crew may allow the CNI-MS to provide guidance aligned pattern (the first turn after the initial leg is
through the entire pattern or manually command an to the left). Toggling this soft-key reverses the
exit from the SAR at any time via the SAR PROG alignment of the pattern.
page SAR EXIT prompt. This action results in a direct
to the first waypoint after the SAR. The expanding
square and creeping line patterns are exited automat-
ically if complete through to the first SAR transition
point outside the SAR area.

1-70
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-19 CARP Pattern Profile

1-71
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-20 SAR Pattern Profiles

1-72
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-21 SAR Entry for Course Change

1-73
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-22 SAR CNI Page for Expanding Square Search

1-74
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

h. Minimum Turn Radius/Extended Turns – For the f. Leg Spacing (SPACE) – The crew-entered leg
creeping line procedure only, the CNI-MS may spacing is displayed, in nautical miles, on the SAR
modify the turn transitions along the outside of the INIT page at L5. The crew must enter this value as
pattern based on the expected turn radius of the depicted in Figure 1-20 to define the pattern geom-
aircraft and the leg spacing entered by the crew. If etry. The CNI-MS uses the leg spacing and the
the CNI-MS determines that the leg spacing is less search pattern radius to determine the number of
than twice the expected turn radius, the CNI-MS di- primary legs in the pattern. The shorter the leg
rects an extended turn to ensure that the aircraft spacing in relation to the radius, the greater the
traverses the next primary search leg on the in- number of legs required to complete the pattern.
tended track. The turn radius calculation is based
g. SAR Alignment (SAR ALIGN) – The crew-selected
on a 25 degrees bank limit and the true airspeed
SAR alignment is highlighted on the SAR INIT
(corrected to effective groundspeed by applying
page at R5. The default value is L indicating left
the headwind component) prior to reaching the se-
turns in the pattern (all turns after the initial leg are
quence point for the affected turnpoint. This type of
to the left). Toggling this soft-key reverses the
turn is a unique type of short leg transition applica-
alignment of the pattern.
ble to SAR procedures.
h. Progress/Exit – When the SAR has become active,
i. Progress/Exit – When the SAR has become active,
the crew can monitor flight progress by selecting
flight progress can be monitored by selecting R6 to
R6 to bring up the SAR PROG page. The SAR is
bring up the SAR PROG page. The SAR normally
manually exited by selecting SAR EXIT R6 on the
exits when crossing the pattern length distance. It
SAR PROG page. There is no automatic exit for
can manually exited by selecting SAR EXIT R6 on
the sector search.
the SAR PROG page.

Parallel Search Pattern Sector Search

a. Label/Identifier – The label associated with the
A parallel search pattern is shown in Figure 1-20.
SAR IP is displayed at soft-key on the SAR INIT
a. Label/Identifier – The label associated with the page.
SAR IP is displayed on the SAR INIT page.
b. IP Position – The IP coordinates are displayed on
b. IP Position – The IP coordinates are displayed on the SAR INIT page at L2.
the SAR INIT page at L3.
c. Pattern Type (SAR PATTERN) – The selected
c. Pattern Type (SAR PATTERN) – The selected (highlighted) pattern determines the available op-
(highlighted) pattern determines the available op- tions for pattern geometry. For example, the SAR
tions for pattern geometry. For example, the SAR turn/alignment data field at R5 displays SAR
turn/alignment data field at R5 displays SAR ALIGN if the SAR type is parallel or creeping line,
ALIGN if the SAR type is parallel or creeping line, and TURNS if otherwise (sector, expanding, etc.).
and TURNS if otherwise (sector, expanding, etc.). To select a sector pattern, the crew must toggle L3
To select a sector pattern, the crew must toggle L3 until SECTR is highlighted in large font.
until PARL is highlighted in large font.
d. Initial Course (INIT CRS) – The crew-entered initial
d. Initial Course (INIT CRS) – The crew-entered initial course is displayed on the SAR INIT page at L4.
course is displayed on the SAR INIT page at L4. The initial course entered by the crew defines the
The initial course entered by the crew defines the track for the first leg of the pattern. Each search leg
track for each primary leg of the pattern. Each is on the entered course, or on subsequent cours-
search leg is parallel to the search axis on the en- es determined by the CNI-MS based on the crew-
tered course. entered search spacing and pattern radius.
e. Radius/Range (RAD/RANGE) – The crew-entered e. Radius/Range (RAD/RANGE) – The crew-entered
SAR pattern range is displayed, in nautical miles, SAR pattern range is displayed, in nautical miles,
on the SAR INIT page at R4. The CNI-MS con- on the SAR INIT page at R4. The CNI-MS con-
structs a pattern that extends the entered value structs a pattern that extends the entered value
down the entered course from the SAR IP. from the SAR IP outward.

1-75
FAM.1C-27J-1A

f. Leg Spacing (SPACE) – The crew-entered leg e. Radius/Range (RAD/RANGE) – The crew-entered
spacing is displayed, in nautical miles, on the SAR SAR pattern range is displayed, in nautical miles,
INIT page at L5. The crew must enter this value as on the SAR INIT page at R4. The CNI-MS con-
depicted in Figure 1-20 to define the pattern geom- structs a pattern that extends the entered value
etry. The CNI-MS uses the leg spacing and the from the SAR IP outward.
search pattern radius to determine the angle that
f. Leg Spacing (SPACE) – The crew-entered leg
defines the pattern geometry. The shorter the leg
spacing is displayed, in nautical miles, on the SAR
spacing in relation to the radius, the smaller the an-
INIT page at L5. The crew must enter this value as
gle and, therefore, the greater the number of legs
depicted in Figure 1-20 to define the pattern geom-
required to complete the pattern. For example, if
etry. The CNI-MS uses the leg spacing and the
the pattern radius is 10 NM and the leg spacing is
search pattern radius to determine the number of
5 NM, the angle between primary legs is approxi-
squares to include in the pattern geometry. The
mately 30 degrees. For a radius of 10 NM and a leg
shorter the leg spacing in relation to the radius, the
spacing of 1 NM, the angle is approximately 6 de-
greater the number of expanding squares in the
grees. The second pattern has five times as many
pattern. The actual number of increments in the
sectors as the first pattern.
pattern is equal to the radius divided by the legs
g. SAR Turn Direction (TURNS) – The crew-selected spacing, rounded up to the next whole number.
turn direction is highlighted on the SAR INIT page
g. SAR Turn Direction (TURNS) – The crew-selected
at R5. The default value is L indicating left turns in
turn direction is highlighted on the SAR INIT page
the pattern (all turns after the initial leg are to the
at R5. The default value is L indicating left turns in
left). Toggling this soft-key reverses the alignment
the pattern (all turns after the initial leg are to the
of the pattern.
left). Toggling this soft-key reverses the alignment
h. Progress/Exit – When the SAR has become active, of the pattern.
the crew can monitor flight progress by selecting
h. Progress/Exit – When the SAR has become active,
R6 to bring up the SAR PROG page. The SAR is
crew can monitor the flight process by selecting R6
manually exited by selecting SAR EXIT R6 on the
to bring up the SAR PROG page. The SAR is nor-
SAR PROG page. There is no automatic exit for
mally exited when exceeding the pattern radius. It
the sector search.
can manually exited by selecting SAR EXIT R6 on
the SAR PROG page.
Expanding Square Search
A right aligned expanding square search pattern is SAR Progress
shown in Figure 1-20 and Figure 1-22.
The CNI-MS displays progress of the aircraft through
a. Label/Identifier – The label associated with the the active search pattern via the SAR PROGRESS
SAR IP is displayed at L1 on the SAR INIT page. page. The SAR PROGRESS page does not allow for
any data entry by the user, but allows crew selection
b. IP Position – The IP coordinates are displayed on
of the SAR EXIT function. Data displayed are as fol-
the SAR INIT page at L2.
lows:
c. Pattern Type (SAR PATTERN) – The selected
a. Active Course (ACT CRS) – This field displays the
(highlighted) pattern determines the available op-
course for the active leg of the SAR procedure be-
tions for pattern geometry. For example, the SAR
ing flown.
turn/alignment data field at R5 displays SAR
ALIGN if the SAR type is parallel or creeping line, b. Next Course (NEXT CRS) – This field displays the
and TURNS if otherwise (sector, expanding, etc.). course for the next leg of the SAR procedure being
To select a sector pattern, the crew must toggle L3 flown.
until EXP SQ is highlighted in large font.
c. Distance to Go to Next Course (DTG NEXT CRS)
d. Initial Course (INIT CRS) – The crew-entered initial – This field displays the active leg distance to go
course is displayed on the SAR INIT page at L4. before turning on course to the next leg of the SAR
The initial course entered by the crew defines the procedure being flown.
track for the first leg of the pattern. Each search
d. Time to Go to Next Course (TTG NEXT CRS) –
legs is on the entered course, or on courses 90,
This field displays the time to go before turning on
180, or 270 degrees from the initial course.
course to the next leg of the SAR procedure being
flown.

1-76
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

e. Crosstrack Error (XTK ERROR) – This field dis- Special restrictions are applied to legs page descent
plays the crosstrack error, left (L) or right (R) rela- angle/speed and altitude entries for the * SD, * FAF,
tive to the active leg of the SAR procedure being * GSI, * MAP, and * LZnn waypoints. Additionally,
flown. PERF INIT CRUISE page, cruise speed and cruise
altitude entries are not allowed at the * TP, * SD,
f. Wind (H,T/WIND; WIND; X/WIND) – These fields
* FAF, or * GSI waypoint.
display the current sensed true wind along with
head/tail wind and crosswind components.
The LZ may be flown as a maneuver during any por-
g. True Airspeed/Groundspeed (TAS/GSPD) – tion of the flight. If flown prior to the destination, the
These fields display the current true airspeed and, crew must return to the PERF INIT CRUISE pages to
if available, the aircraft groundspeed. make any desired changes from the LZ parameters.

h. Drift (DRIFT) – This field displays the current air-

craft drift angle, in degrees left (L) or right (R). Drift RENDEZVOUS OPERATIONS
angle is the difference between the aircraft head-
ing and ground track. The rendezvous function computes an intercept posi-
tion, which may be sequenced into the active route,
that facilitates a rendezvous with a moving target. In
LANDING ZONE APPROACH OPERATIONS addition to intercept position, the rendezvous function
computes and displays intercept time, great circle dis-
The LZ procedure is a special type of LNAV and tance to the intercept position, and bearing to the
VNAV procedure that provides lateral and vertical intercept position.
guidance to a point on a landing zone. The guidance Rendezvous intercept positions may be generated for
is based on the aircraft navigation solution and may up to five separate rendezvous waypoints for each of
be created for a precision, non-precision, or tactical route 1 and route 2 (10 total). Rendezvous waypoint
approach. Since it is self-contained to the mission definitions are specific to each route.
computer and CNI, there is great flexibility in its use.
Due to limitations on the accuracy of vertical path cal-
culations, minimums for LZ approach procedures Rendezvous Parameters
should typically be higher than those of approaches
A rendezvous intercept position is computed using
based on ground facilities.
crew-entered target data and current or planned air-
craft data as shown in Figure 1-24. The crew entered
Figure 1-23 illustrates the LZ approach profiles. The
target data consists of:
profiles show the predicted cruise from TP to FAF/GSI
with a speed change at SD followed by a descent at • Target initial position,
the specified descent angle/glide slope ending at the
LZ point then continuing in cruise at the LZ CAS. • Time the target was (or will be) at the initial position
(the target time is interpreted to be in the 24-hour
The essential difference between the profiles is how range defined from 12 hours before to 11 hours 59
vertical guidance is computed and how low that guid- minutes after the aircraft current time),
ance takes the aircraft. Vertical guidance is provided • Target groundspeed,
to the pilot only via the PROGRESS page, where he is
able to determine his raw deviation from the calcu- • Target course,
lated path. The maneuver can be flown with the auto- • Desired trail distance (0 - 20 NM) to place the inter-
pilot, but the pitch axis cannot be coupled to the cept position behind the target.
guidance.
The CNI-MS uses the following current or planned air-
As the aircraft flies the LZ, the PERF INIT CRUISE craft data used by the to compute and update the ren-
page cruise altitude and speed get modified. When dezvous position:
the SD waypoint is sequenced the LZ CAS becomes
• Own position,
the cruise speed. The cruise altitude and speed are
maintained up to the first waypoint with a cruise alti- • Own time,
tude and/or speed entry. When the FAF/GSI waypoint
is sequenced, the LZ runway altitude constraint • Own groundspeed (a default of 320 knots is used
becomes the cruise altitude. if a current or planned speed is not available),
• Own course.

1-77
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Rendezvous Computed Data d. Enter the target data - initial position, time, course,
groundspeed, and offset distance. The crew must
The CNI-MS calculates the rendezvous intercept posi- specify the initial position; the initial position does
tion using the crew-entered target data and the not default to the calling waypoint position selected
planned aircraft position, groundspeed, and ETA at via the LEGS page.
the waypoint prior to the rendezvous waypoint. Once
the rendezvous waypoint becomes the active way- The CNI-MS calculates the rendezvous intercept posi-
point, the CNI-MS calculates the rendezvous way- tion using the crew-entered target data and the
point position using the crew-entered target data and planned aircraft position, groundspeed, and ETA at
the current aircraft position, groundspeed, and time. the waypoint prior to the Rendezvous waypoint.
If a valid intercept position exists, the rendezvous
If a valid intercept position exists, the CNI-MS com- waypoint is inserted into the flight plan at the intercept
putes the following and displays the data on the REN- position computed using current conditions. The ren-
DEZVOUS page: dezvous waypoint is named * RZ0n, where n is the
Rendezvous number (1 through 5).
• Intercept Position (displayed as Latitude and Lon-
gitude), Invalid intercept results are not to be inserted into a
• Intercept Course/Distance to Go (great circle bear- flight plan. If the CNI-MS determines an intercept
ing and distance from the current aircraft position location becomes invalid following insertion in the
to the computed intercept point at the current time), flight plan, the last valid intercept location is retained.

• Target Bearing/Range (great circle bearing and

distance from the current aircraft position to the in- Rendezvous not in a Flight Plan
tercept target current position),
A rendezvous not in a flight plan requires that the
• Time to Intercept (displayed as ETE on the ground operator perform the following:
and as ETA when airborne).
a. On the MISSIONS page, select the desired route.
If a valid intercept position does not exist, the com- b. On the MISSIONS page, enter the desired rendez-
puted data fields on the RENDEZVOUS page are vous number and select RNDZ to branch to the
blank. In addition, if the rendezvous is the first rendez- RENDEZVOUS page.
vous in the active flight plan, the INVALID INTER-
CEPT message will be displayed in the scratch pad. c. On the RENDEZVOUS page, enter the target air-
craft data - initial position, time, course, ground-
If the computed Intercept Distance to Go for the first speed, and offset distance.
rendezvous in the active flight plan is greater than 999
The CNI-MS calculates the rendezvous intercept posi-
NM, the INTERCEPT RANGE > 999 MI is displayed in
tion using the crew-entered and current aircraft posi-
the scratch pad.
tion, groundspeed, and time. The crew may use the
displayed information to manually conduct the inter-
Rendezvous within a Flight Plan cept. The rendezvous must be entered into the flight
plan for guidance to the intercept.
A rendezvous inserted into a flight plan requires that
the operator perform the following:
Flying the Rendezvous
a. From the LEGS page, select the right soft-key at
the waypoint to follow the rendezvous waypoint. In flight, rendezvous intercept locations are updated at
This results in a branch to the WAYPOINT DATA least every 30 seconds for the purposes of CNI-MU
page. (ICDU) display. Updates to flight plan intercept loca-
tions occur at a minimum of every 60 seconds. If cur-
b. On the WAYPOINT DATA page, select MFP> to
rent conditions are stable, (i.e., own aircraft
branch to the MISSIONS page.
groundspeed, etc are not changing due to varying
c. On the MISSIONS page, enter the desired rendez- wind or maneuvering), the RZxx waypoint does not
vous number (1 through 5) and select RNDZ to move and the leg is essentially identical to any other
branch to the RENDEZVOUS page. If the entered flight plan leg. If conditions change, however, the
rendezvous number already exists in the flight intercept location may also change. If there is a signif-
plan, the NOT ALLOWED message is displayed. icant change in the current conditions (own aircraft
turns away from the intercept location), the intercept
location may move significantly.

1-78
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-23 Landing Zone Approach Profile

1-79
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-24 Rendezvous

1-80
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

When the along-track distance-to-go to an active Valid end point pairs can be custom waypoint identifi-
intercept point is less than 5 NM, the intercept output ers or navigation database named waypoints,
position is frozen at the value existing prior to penetra- NAVAID, ILS, or airport identifiers. Also, the crew may
tion of the 5 NM distance. designate the aircraft present position as a reference
Although the rendezvous output position is frozen, position. When a valid flight plan is entered, any way-
modification of the crew-entered target data on the point on the flight plan can be used as an end point.
corresponding RENDEZVOUS page updates the ren- As stated earlier, the PPOS of the aircraft is available
dezvous output position. for use as the FROM waypoint of a from/to pair. Cou-
pling the PPOS with a down path waypoint results in
NOTE dynamically-updated bearing, distance and ETE infor-
mation to the waypoint.
Advisories are only provided for the first The CNI-MS uses the current groundspeed to calcu-
RZ in the active flight plan. Down path RZ late from/to data. If data based upon another ground-
procedures should be checked on the speed is desired, the CNI-MS allows the operator to
RENDEZVOUS page if flight plan chang- enter the speed on the FROM/TO page. If the aircraft
es are made subsequent to RZ entry into is not airborne and the operator does not provide a
the flight plan. groundspeed, the CNI-MS from/to function uses 320
knots groundspeed as the default.
For rendezvous in the flight plan, when the aircraft
sequences the RZxx waypoint, the guidance following FROM/TO IMPLEMENTATIONS
waypoint sequence will be toward the next waypoint in FROM/TO computations are a convenient way to
the flight plan. Guidance will NOT be toward the target examine the effect on ETA/ETE of changing the end
or down the target track. It would be expected that the points or groundspeed associated with any down
crew would acquire the target visually or by other track leg or off route segment.
means prior to sequencing the RZ waypoint. The interdependence of these flight parameters is not
This effort would be assisted by the Target Bearing/ always intuitive. The from/to table computations func-
Range data displayed on the RENDEZVOUS page. tion adds flexibility to enroute flight planning and
Target acquisition would facilitate a manual rendez- reduced-capability operations.
vous or join up. When the crew desires to resume the
flight plan route, the succeeding waypoint would then COURSE CORRECTION
be the active waypoint in the flight plan route.
Implementing a minor change in the active flight plan
can impact flight plan constraints considerably. A tacti-
cal detour that significantly increases the ETA to a
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS destination may be modified to reduce the impact.

Fix Information
FROM-TO AND FIX INFORMATION
For purposes of the FIX INFO function, a fix generally
At times during strategic or tactical flight profiles, it is a waypoint not on the flight plan. Information about
may be necessary for the crew to determine distances the position of a radial from a fix to the active route
(therefore times, fuel burns, etc.) between geographic can be determined using the FIX INFO function.
locations, or perform related functions associated with Given a fix, a radial from the fix, and an active flight
the planned route. Two CNI-MS functions assist the plan, the CNI-MS determines the Fix Radial Intercept
crew in such efforts; the FROM/TO function and the Point on the current leg of the primary flight plan. If an
FIX INFO function. intercept point is found, the CNI-MS determines the
distance from the fix to the intercept point, the esti-
mated time enroute to the intercept point, the along
FROM/TO track distance from the present position to the inter-
cept point, and the predicted altitude at the intercept
The CNI-MS FROM/TO function allows for entry of
point. The CNI-MS determines fix radial/flight plan leg
two reference points and a selected groundspeed,
intercept data for up to three different radials through
then computes bearing, distance and estimated time
two different fixes.
between the two positions. Up to 20 independent
from/to reference point pairs are permitted from the
FROM/TO pages.

1-81
FAM.1C-27J-1A

FIX INFO may be used to evaluate the current route From this information the crew can plan to deviate
for purposes such as steering around restricted air- from the active FP at the intercept point.
space. If deviation from the primary flight plan is nec- From the MC INDEX page 2/2, the crew must press
essary due to ATC direction or unforeseen L2 to branch to the FIX INFO page. From the FIX
circumstances, FIX INFO may be used to provide INFO PAGE 1/2, the crew then enters the Fix way-
guidance. point identifier and inserts it into the identifier field by
pressing the L2. Undefined identifier entries generate
A computed intercept point may be selected and used the message NOT IN DATABASE. The crew then
in the flight plan. Selection of the soft-key next to the must enter 120 (reciprocal of 300) at L2 to insert the
desired fix intercept results in the identifier being dis- radial. The FIX INFO page then displays the down
played in the scratch pad, which can then be trans- track fix bearing, ETA, along track Distance To Go
ferred to any LEGS page. (DTG) and altitude. Pressing L5 at this point displays
the abeam radial to the fix.
FIX TO AIRCRAFT
ABEAM FIX INTERCEPT POINT
It is not necessary to provide a fix radial for calculating
Fix-To-Aircraft data. Given a fix waypoint identifier and The abeam intercept point is a special case of a fix
a valid flight plan, the FIX INFO function determines radial intercept point where the intercept bearing is
the bearing, distance and along track distance from a ninety degrees to the flight plan active leg. The abeam
given fix position to the aircraft and updates the infor- fix intercept point, ETA and DTG to the Intercept point
mation on the FIX INFO Pages. and the intercept altitude are automatically calculated
and displayed on the FIX INFO Page 1/2 whenever a
fix identifier is entered and an intersection exists
Fix Radial Intercept Point within 400 NM of the fix. The FIX INFO page displays
Figure 1-25 illustrates typical fix information scenario. the point at which the aircraft will be abeam the SPA
The crew has entered the Spartanburg identifier, SPA, reference position. In this case, the aircraft will be
into the reference position L1. abeam (or at its closest point of approach) SPA on
The information adjacent to the identifier is the Spartanburg 314 radial at a distance of 39 NM. (This
dynamically-calculated bearing and range from the would indicate that the flight plan leg at that point
reference position to the aircraft position. The crew would be on a course of 224 degrees, or 90 degrees
also has queried the CNI-MS for fix information on the from the abeam intercept radial).
330, 290, and 270 radials from SPA. The displayed
information indicates that the active flight plan inter-
sects those radials at 40, 42, and 43 NM, respectively. MARK POSITION
The page also indicates the time and distance-to-go to The mark point function provides the means to record
each of these intercept points. the current aircraft position, date, and time (refer to
part 3L). A list of up to 10 mark points may be created
The following scenario demonstrates entry of a and stored in non-volatile memory. Mark points may
named waypoint and a radial through the waypoint. be used as waypoints in a flight plan. The MARK
The FIX INFO function provides the ETA, altitude and POSITION page, shown in Figure 1-26, displays infor-
distance to the point along the active leg where the mation relative to an individual mark point. The MARK
aircraft may deviate from the primary flight plan. LIST page displays the current list of mark points and
their positions.
While flying a leg of an active route, the crew deter-
mines that an emergency landing is required. The
crew identifies a suitable landing site and enters the Creating and Deleting Mark Points
location as a Named Waypoint. The crew then can
Simply press the MARK hard-key to create a mark
enter the waypoint identifier and use the FIX INFO
point. The CNI-MS records the current ship solution
function to decide the best way to fly to the landing
position (latitude/longitude and MGRS), the current
strip. The crew, knowing there are terrain features to
system time at the time of the mark, and the date.
avoid, decides that the fastest and safest approach to
Mark points are named sequentially as MRK01
the landing strip is on a 300 inbound course. The fix
through MRK10. If the CNI-MS does not have a valid
information page is programmed with the waypoint
position when the crew presses the MARK hard-key, a
and the desired approach radial. The CNI provides
mark point is not created and the NO PRESENT
the Fix Radial Intercept Point of the radial through the
POSITION message is displayed in the scratch pad.
fix to the active leg.

1-82
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-25 Typical Fix Information

1-83
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-26 MARK Pages

1-84
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Once the mark list is full, the CNI-MS overwrites exist- TIMER 3 Operation
ing mark points in a circular fashion. The 11th press of
the MARK hard-key overwrites MRK01. This overwrite TIMER 3 is a periodic timer that alerts the operator at
logic holds unless a mark point is used in either flight time intervals with TIMER 3 INTERVAL. Selection of
plan route. Therefore, if MRK02 exists in a flight plan R3 when the TIMER 3 target time has been entered
and MRK03 does not, the 12th press of the "MARK" into the scratch pad starts TIMER 3 interval timing.
hard-key overwrites MRK03. DELETE results in the target time being cleared and
TIMER 3 disengagement. Commonly, maintenance
When a crew member presses the MARK hard-key procedures, observations, and recordings are periodic
and all 10 mark points exist in a flight plan, the CNI- crew functions requiring the use of the Interval Timer.
MS annunciates the LIST FULL message in the CNI-
MU (ICDU) scratch pad and no mark point is overwrit-
ten. A mark point may be deleted from the mark list
ZEROIZE
unless the mark point exists in a flight plan. The CNI supports system zeroize and Mission Com-
If the mark point exists in a flight plan, deletion is puter RECORD INHIBIT via the ZEROIZE pages
inhibited, the WPT IN FP message is displayed in the shown in Figure 1-28. Zeroize of certain data may be
scratch pad, and the mark point is retained. necessary or desired to clear unwanted data from
non-volatile memory, or may be required for opera-
tional security purposes.
TIMERS
The CNI-MS provides three timers that can be used The following elements can be selected for zeroize:
for event timing and issuing crew alerts. Each of the ZEROIZE 1/2 page
three timers is accessible from the TIMERS page
prompt on the INDEX 2/2 page. The timers are global • ROUTES,
functions, therefore the three CNI-MU (ICDU)s show
the same TIMERS page, with all time values for timers • CUSTOM DATABASE,
1, 2, and 3 displayed identically for all CNI-MU • COMM PRESELECTS,
(ICDU)s. The timers are identified as TIMER 1,
TIMER 2, and TIMER 3 as shown in Figure 1-27. • VU1/VU2,
• GPS,
TIMER 1 Operation • IFF,
TIMER 1 is a simple count up/down timer that will • DATA TRANSFER MODULE,
increment from 00:00 to an elapsed time or decre-
ment from and entered time to 00:00. When the timer ZEROIZE 2/2 page
reaches either the entered time or 00:00, the function
annunciates TIMER 1 EXPIRED on the CNI-MUs. • PERFORMANCE DATA,
• MISSION DATA,
The crew enters the TIMER 1 target elapsed time via
scratch pad entry then selection of R1. To increment • CUSTOM WAYPOINTS,
to the target elapsed time or decrement to 00:00, the
• STORED ROUTES,
crew must choose the TIMER 1 direction with L1 (UP
to increment or DOWN to decrement). To start TIMER • TOLD,
1, the crew must press L5, and to stop TIMER 1 the
crew must press L4. Reset of TIMER 1 target time to
• CHUTES,
zero and halting the timer is accomplished via R4. • INHIBITED NAVAIDS.
The ZEROIZE 1/2 page is accessed via selection of
TIMER 2 Operation the ZEROIZE (L6) soft-key on the INDEX 1/2 page.
Selectable elements are displayed in normal video
TIMER 2 is an alarm that annunciates TIMER 2 TAR-
large font. Selection of individual elements or ALL
GET when system time reaches the operator-entered
(R5) results in selectable elements displayed in
target system time. When the TIMER 2 target time is
inverse video large font, and the VERIFY (R6) prompt
entered in the scratch pad, selection of R2 engages
displayed in normal video large font. In each page,
TIMER 2. The delete operation (DEL key and R2)
selection of VERIFY (R6) commands zeroization of
clears TIMER 2 target time and stops the timer.
the selected elements.

1-85
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-27 TIMERS Page

1-86
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 1-28 ZEROIZE Pages

1-87
FAM.1C-27J-1A

In addition, a zeroize ALL option (in ZEROIZE 1/2 Zeroize CNI COMM Radios
page) can be selected enabling the operator to select
all available options with one key press. When The CNI communication radios support UHF HAVE
Zeroize is commanded, the selected elements display QUICK II (HQ) and maintain internal programmed
transitions to normal video small font. Certain data are data to support these operations. The CNI-MS sup-
zeroized within the CNI-SP, and other data are ports discrete interfaces to command the VU radios
zeroized via the CNI-MS mission computer interface zeroize, and MIL-STD-1553 interfaces to command
or discrete interfaces as described in the Input/Output HF zeroize.
Management section. The ZEROIZE 1/2 page, the L4 prompt (VU1/VU2)
acts as rotary switch for zeroize selection. Selection of
ALL (R5) prompt or initial selection of L4 results in
Zeroize System Processor selection of VU1/VU2. Each subsequent selection of
L4 results in individual selection of VU1, then VU2,
The CNI-MS retains mission data including ROUTES,
then none, then back to all. Based on the items
CUSTOM DATABASE and COMM PRESELECTS in
selected and selection of the VERIFY (R6) prompt,
the System Processor’s internal non-volatile memory.
the CNI issues the appropriate VHF zeroize discrete
Zeroizing of these elements result in clearing the CNI-
output to zeroize the selected radio.
SP internal memory for the selected elements.

ROUTES ZEROIZE Zeroize EGI

ROUTES zeroize commands result in the system pro- The Embedded GPS/INS (EGI) contains sensitive
cessor clearing the following internal data: GPS satellite data. On ZEROIZE 1/2 page selection of
• Route 1, the GPS (L5) prompt or ALL (R5) prompt and VERIFY
(R6) prompt results in the CNI-MS commanding EGI
• Route 2, zeroize via the appropriate discrete interface.
• CARP,
Record Inhibit
• SAR,
The ZEROIZE 1/2 page supports crew interface to the
• LZ,
DTS mission recorder ON/OFF control. Selection of
• Rendezvous and equal time point data. the soft-key L6 from ON to OFF (OFF displayed
inverse video large font), result in the CNI-MS
CUSTOM DATABASE ZEROIZE requesting the mission computer to inhibit mission
recorder. Selecting the soft-key L6 from OFF to ON
CUSTOM DATABASE zeroize results in the system
(ON displayed inverse video large font), result in the
processor clearing the following internal data:
CNI-MS requesting the mission computer to enable
• Custom Waypoint List, mission recorder.
• Stored Route List,
Mission Computer Zeroize
• Inhibited navaids,
The ZEROIZE 1/2 page supports crew interface to the
• FROM/TO Data,
mission computer to request zeroize IFF and/or DTM.
• Mark Point Data, Individual selection of the IFF (R1) prompt, DTM (R4)
prompt, or ALL (R5) prompt and selection VERIFY
• PERF INIT Data, (R6) prompt results in the CNI-MS requesting the mis-
• TOLD Data, sion computer to issue the appropriate zeroize com-
mand.
• OAP Data.

COMM PRESELECTS ZEROIZE

COMM PRESELECTS zeroize results in the system
processor clearing the following internal data:
• HF presets,
• V/UHF presets.

1-88
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Section 2

CNI-MS OPERATING PROCEDURES

Contents page Contents page

SCOPE ................................................................ 2-2 NAVIGATION AIDS ........................................... 2-27

NORMAL NAVIGATION INITIALIZATION ............ 2-2 CNRP ............................................................ 2-27
CNI-MU (ICDU) POWER UP ........................... 2-2 CNI-MU (ICDU) ............................................. 2-27
AUTONAV ALIGNMENT ................................. 2-2 PAIRING ....................................................... 2-28
AUTOTUNE .................................................. 2-28
ALTERNATE NAVIGATION INITIALIZATION ....... 2-3
OPERATION OF NAV RADIOS .................... 2-28
GC ALIGNMENT ............................................. 2-3
SH ALIGNMENT .............................................. 2-4 IFF/TCAS .......................................................... 2-29
BATH ALIGNMENT ......................................... 2-5 IFF/TCAS OPERATION ................................ 2-29
IN-FLIGHT ALIGNMENT (IFA) ........................ 2-6 MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEMS ......................... 2-30
NAVIGATION SYSTEM CONFIGURATION NAV INHIBIT ................................................. 2-30
AND UPDATE .................................................. 2-7 TIMERS ........................................................ 2-30
SYSTEM CONTROL ....................................... 2-7 SOFT PANELS ............................................. 2-31
NAV CONTROL ............................................... 2-7 TACTICAL PLOT .......................................... 2-31
POSITION UPDATE ........................................ 2-8 ZEROIZE ...................................................... 2-32
MISSION DATA TRANSFER ........................... 2-9 MISSIONS ......................................................... 2-32
PERFORMANCE AND TOLD DATA .................. 2-10 MISSION HARD-KEY UPLOAD ................... 2-32
PERFORMANCE DATA ................................ 2-10 WAYPOINT ASSIGNED UPLOAD ............... 2-32
TAKE-OFF AND LANDING DATA ................. 2-12 CARP ............................................................ 2-33
CARP ACTIVATION ..................................... 2-35
FLIGHT PLANNING ........................................... 2-13
CARP PROGRESS ....................................... 2-35
ROUTE PLAN PAGE SETUP ........................ 2-13
CARP EXIT ................................................... 2-36
WAYPOINT ENTRY ...................................... 2-14
SAR PROCEDURES .................................... 2-36
ENROUTE WAYPOINT CHANGES .............. 2-17
SAR ACTIVATION ........................................ 2-38
ACTIVATING THE INACTIVE ROUTE .......... 2-17
SAR PROGRESS ......................................... 2-38
HOLDING ...................................................... 2-18
SAR EXIT ...................................................... 2-38
MISCELLANEOUS INDEX 2/2 PAGE
FUNCTIONS .................................................. 2-18 LZ OPERATIONS ......................................... 2-38
LZ ACTIVATION ........................................... 2-41
COMMUNICATIONS ......................................... 2-19
RENDEZVOUS ............................................. 2-41
OPERATION OF COMM RADIOS ................. 2-19
RENDEZVOUS ACTIVATION ...................... 2-42
V/UHF RADIO OPERATION .......................... 2-20
HF RADIO OPERATION ............................... 2-26

2-1
FAM.1C-27J-1A

SCOPE NOTE
Before initializating the CNI, ensure that
This section provides the procedures to accomplish on the EGI submenu (SAMU MISCELLA-
general tasks using the CNI-MS. The procedures are NEOUS menu) both EGI 1 / 2 are ON.
presented sequentially, reflecting the approximate
order of data entry during the course of a normal 1. Check the alignment position on pilot and copi-
flight. See Section 3 for specific data entry formats lot POWER UP pages for accuracy.
and CNI-MS page descriptions.
NOTE
• The reference present position can
NORMAL NAVIGATION be selected as GPS, LAST, or REF. If
GPS is selected and available the
INITIALIZATION current lat/long position is displayed
on the POWER UP page. Selecting
The following normal procedures are used to apply LAST displays the lat/long of the air-
power, initialize, and configure the navigation system craft when power was last removed
via the CNI-MU (ICDU). from the CNI-SP. Selecting REF al-
lows any lat/long or reference way-
point to be entered. Entering a lat/
CNI-MU (ICDU) POWER UP long in the scratch pad and selecting
After power is applied to the aircraft, the CNI-MU L4 to input the data automatically se-
(ICDU) automatically displays the POWER UP page. lects the REF selection.

1. Enter the date in the following format: day, • If reference waypoint is selected as
three-letter month abbreviation and last two LAST or REF the Zulu time is re-
numbers of the year (e.g., 11 Sep 01). quired.

2. Check the navigation database dates in both • When power has been applied to the
the pilot and copilot CNI-MU (ICDU) for curren- GPS and a minimum of four satellites
cy. are being received, the GPS provides
the present position to the POWER
3. Select R4 soft-key MSTR AV ON. UP page.
a. The font changes from large to small. If GPS FOM ≤ 4:
b. Power is applied to V/UHF radios,
TACANs, VORs, ADF, and sets IFF to 2. Select AUTONAV on the POWER UP page to
standby. start the EGI alignment.

NOTE
AUTONAV ALIGNMENT
If AUTONAV is in small font (not select-
AUTONAV causes an automatic gyrocompass align- able), a manual gyrocompass alignment
ment and requires only a one-button push to align the must be performed. See gyrocompass
EGIs, select all available sensors, and choose the alignment procedure.
best navigation source by setting the AUTO/MAN soft-
key to AUTO.
Monitoring Alignment Status

Starting AUTONAV Alignment 1. Press NAV CTRL hard-key and press PREV
PAGE hard-key to select INAV CTRL INDEX 3/
3 page.
CAUTION a. Select INS 1 (or 2) to display the INS STA-
TUS 1/2 page.
Before initiate AUTONAV alignment both 2. Select ALIGN to display the INS ALIGN page.
GPS FOM must be ≤ 4, otherwise a large
Navigation error be induced.

2-2
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NOTE ALTERNATE NAVIGATION

An alternate method is to select INS 1 (or INITIALIZATION
2) ALIGN from the INDEX 2/2 page.
The following alternate procedures can be used to ini-
Approximately 30 seconds after selecting AU- tialize the navigation system via the CNI-MU (ICDU).
TONAV: Procedures for the following types of navigation align-
3. Verify NAV status changed from NAV in small ments are included:
font to DEGRADED large font. • Gyrocompass (GC)
• Stored Heading (SH)
NOTE
• Best Available True Heading (BATH)
If desired, NAV mode may be selected
• In-flight Alignment (IFA)
when DEGRADED is displayed; howev-
er, full navigation system accuracy is not
guaranteed. GC ALIGNMENT
During alignment, the ALIGN STATUS counts down When an AUTONAV alignment is not available or
from 8.00 to 0.8. When ALIGN STATUS reaches 0.8, desired (e.g., EGI was powered down after a previous
alignment is complete and the system enters the NAV AUTONAV, or an extended alignment time is desired
mode. DEGRADED is replaced by NAV if AUTONAV prior to selecting NAV mode to improve system accu-
is commanded. racy), a GC alignment can be initiated individually for
each INS. In this alignment mode, the NAV mode
4. Select EGI 1 (or 2) to display the EGI STATUS must be selected manually.
1/2 page.
1. Verify correct present position on the POWER
a. Verify present position, FOM (figure of UP page.
merit), and EHE (estimated heading error)
are displayed.
NOTE
b. Verify NARF (Navigation Alignment Refin-
ing Feature) is displayed under MODE, if In case of GPS 1 / 2 not good select the
the aircraft is not moving. LAST or REF as reference PPOS.
5. Press INAV CTRL hard-key, then press NEXT
2. Press NAV CTRL hard-key and press PREV
PAGE hard-key to select INAV CTRL SEN-
PAGE hard-key to select INAV CTRL INDEX 3/
SORS 2/3 page.
3 page.
a. Verify desired sensors are selected (high-
a. Select INS 1 (or 2) for INS STATUS 1/2
lighted).
page. Then select ALIGN.
6. Press PREV PAGE hard-key to select INAV
If GPS FOM ≤ 4:
CTRL SOLN 1/3 page.
3. On the INS ALIGN page.
a. Verify AUTO is selected (highlighted).
b. Verify present position, FOM and EHE. a. Check GPS selected.
b. Press (R2) soft-key to select GC.
If there are errors in the alignment:
If GPS FOM > 4:
7. Select EGI submenu on the SAMU MISCEL-
LANEOUS menu and restarts (recycles) the 3. On the INS ALIGN page.
EGI.
a. Press (R4) soft-key to deselect GPS.
8. Follow GC procedures for a new alignment. b. Press (R2) soft-key to select GC.
4. Approximately 45 seconds after selecting GC,
DEGRADED appears above NAV (large font)
and ALIGN STATUS begins to count down
from 8.00 to 0.8.
a. NAV is available in DEGRADED mode.

2-3
FAM.1C-27J-1A

5. After about 4 minutes when DEGRADED dis- SH Prerequisites

appears above NAV, select NAV (large font) to
enter the NAV mode. To accomplish an SH alignment, the system must be
properly set up prior to the SH alignment attempt. The
a. The NAV legend should highlight. EGIs must be successfully GC aligned and then shut
down (without transitioning to any other mode), and
NOTE the aircraft cannot be moved after shutdown.
If the criteria for a successful SH alignment is not met,
At latitudes up to 65 degrees, a 6-minute the system reverts to a BATH or GC alignment when
gyrocompass alignment yields full speci- STORED HDG is selected.
fied performance.
The EGI transitions to the GC alignment mode if the
6. Select EGI 1 (or 2) to display the EGI STATUS aircraft has been moved since the set up.
1/2 page.
The EGI automatically transitions to BATH mode after
a. Verify present position, FOM, and EHE are
STORED HDG is selected if:
displayed.
b. Verify NARF is displayed under MODE, if • The prerequisites for an SH alignment are satis-
the aircraft is not moving. fied, and the pilot enters true heading, magnetic
heading or present position; or
7. Press NAV CTRL hard-key, then press NEXT
PAGE hard-key to select INAV CTRL SEN- • The SH mode has not been properly set up.
SORS 2/3 page.
NOTE
a. Select desired sensors.
If the aircraft position is greater than 70
NOTE degrees latitude, a SH alignment must
not be accomplished. In this case a BATH
When CNI-SP 1 is in control of the CNI- alignment is necessary.
MU (ICDU), INS 2 and GPS 2 are not se-
lectable (small font). When CNI-SP 2 is in
control of the CNI-MU (ICDU), INS 1 and SH Setup Procedures
GPS 1 are not selectable. Only onside
1. Power both EGIs
sensors can be selected.
a. If the aircraft is powered, recycle power to
8. Press PREV PAGE hard-key to select INAV both EGIs.
CTRL SOLN 1/3 page. b. If the aircraft is not powered, conduct a
a. Select AUTO. normal aircraft power-up sequence.

b. Verify present position, FOM, and EHE of 2. On the POWER UP page

the selected best solution.
a. Enter the current date.
b. Select GPS as the alignment position.
NOTE
c. If GPS is not available, select LAST as the
When GPS becomes good reselect GPS alignment position.
and perform step 7. and 8.
NOTE
SH ALIGNMENT Do not select AUTONAV alignment.
Stored Heading is a fast inertial alignment mode. It is
3. Select INS 1 (or 2) ALIGN page.
generally used when the aircraft is on ready alert or
when located at very high latitudes where full GC a. Select GC alignment on each page.
alignments can be lengthy. Usable navigation perfor-
mance results from a successful SH alignment. 4. Verify EGIs are fully aligned.
a. Align Status is 0.80.
b. DEGRADED has changed to NAV.
c. NAV is in large font.

2-4
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NOTE NOTE
Do not select NAV. If the CNI-MU (ICDU) scratch pad dis-
plays HEADING REQUIRED, the system
5. On SAMU MISCELLANEOUS menu. was unable to complete the SH alignment
and has transitioned to a BATH align-
a. Select EGI submenu. ment. See BATH Alignment.
b. Select EGI 1 “OFF”, VERIFY and EGI 2
“OFF”, VERIFY. 6. Select NAV (large font) to enter the NAV mode.
a. NAV script highlights.
NOTE
7. Press NAV CTRL hard-key, then press NEXT
• Do not recycle the EGIs. PAGE hard-key to select INAV CTRL SEN-
• To successfully execute an SH align- SORS 2/3 page.
ment, the aircraft must not be moved a. Select INS and GPS as INAV control sen-
or powered until SH activation. sors.
8. Press PREV PAGE hard-key to select INAV
SH Activation CTRL SOLN 1/3 page.
1. Conduct a normal aircraft power up sequence. a. Select AUTO or an appropriate INAV Con-
2. On the POWER UP page trol Solution, as desired.
The EGIs are now usable and ready for flight.
a. Enter the current date.
b. Select LAST as the align position
BATH ALIGNMENT
NOTE
Do not select AUTONAV. BATH Prerequisites
Transition to BATH is selected automatically by the
3. Press INDX hard-key. EGI, and is not directly user selectable.
4. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select INDEX
2/2 page. NOTE

a. Select INS 1 (or 2) ALIGN soft-key. The BATH alignment mode, which is a
fast reaction alignment capability, pro-
5. Select STORED HDG on each page. vides degraded but usable performance.

NOTE When SH is selected on the INS ALIGN page, a BATH

alignment is initiated under the following two condi-
The STORED HDG selection is not avail-
tions:
able if LAST is not selected as the align
position. a. The prerequisites for an SH alignment are not sat-
isfied.
a. Verify align status counts down from 8.00
b. The prerequisites for an SH alignment are satis-
to 0.80 (in approximately 25 to 30 sec-
fied, but within the first 30 seconds after SH selec-
onds).
tion, the true heading is entered on the INS ALIGN
b. Verify NAV shifts to large font. page by the operator. True heading is requested
c. Verify DEGRADED is no longer displayed. on the INS ALIGN page and must be entered with
a “T” following the heading.

2-5
FAM.1C-27J-1A

BATH Procedures 5. Press NAV CTRL hard-key and press PREV

PAGE hard-key to select INAV CTRL INDEX 3/
If an SH alignment is not successful, the CNI-MU 3 page.
(ICDU) displays the scratch pad message HEADING
REQUIRED. a. Select INS 1 (or 2) to display the INS STA-
TUS 1/2 page.
1. Press INDX hard-key.
6. Select ALIGN to display INS ALIGN page.
2. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select INDEX
2/2 page. a. Select GPS (R4) and monitor GPS FOM.
a. Select INS 1 (or 2) ALIGN soft-key.
NOTE
3. On the INS ALIGN page, insert heading.
GPS should be highlighted since it was
a. Insert magnetic heading (xxx) from the wet selected as a sensor. GPS FOM is con-
compass, or stantly displayed on the INS ALIGN page
b. Insert the estimated true heading (xxxT). and when GPS FOM is > 4, IFA will not be
selectable (small font).
NOTE
b. Select IFA (R3).
A “T” must be entered following the head-
ing entry. NOTE

4. When DEGRADED appears, manually select When airborne, the airplane must be
DEGRADED NAV. flown straight and level until DEGRADED
appears above NAV to ensure proper at-
NOTE titude determination. Once this occurs,
the aircraft can be maneuvered for a fast-
The respective EGI has degraded navi- er alignment (15-degree angle of bank
gation accuracy. turns left and right would be satisfactory)
until the degraded navigation mode is
5. To obtain maximum navigation accuracy of the When DEGRADED disappears above
respective EGI, conduct an IFA. NAV, select NAV (large font) to enter the
NAV mode. NAV script highlights.

IN-FLIGHT ALIGNMENT (IFA) 7. When DEGRADED disappears above NAV,

select NAV (large font) to enter the NAV mode.
Perform an IFA on one EGI at a time, since the atti-
NAV script highlights.
tude information from the aligning EGI is not available
for approximately 1 minute. GPS FOM must be ≤ 4 for 8. Press NAV CTRL hard-key and press NEXT
the CNI-SP to allow an IFA to be selected. PAGE hard-key to select INAV CTRL SEN-
IFAs may also be performed on the ground, at any lat- SORS 2/3 page.
itude including polar regions, and achieve full perfor-
a. Select INS 1 (or 2), GPS 1 (or 2) and all
mance from the EGIs.
other desired sensors.
1. From the SAMU PFD menu, select the ATT
9. Press PREV PAGE hard-key to select INAV
REF INU 1 (or 2) source which is not to be
CTRL SOLN 1/3 page.
aligned.
a. Select the desired solution (AUTO, if de-
2. Select EGI submenu on the SAMU MISCEL-
sired) and verify present position, FOM,
LANEOUS menu and restarts (recycles) the
and EHE for the EGI and INS solutions.
EGI 1 (or 2).
A full performance IFA has now been completed.
3. When the EGI is on again, ON will appear un- Under these conditions, the IFA should be completed
der the MODE of the INS STATUS 1/2 page or within 10 minutes.
EGI STATUS 1/2 page. If an IFA is performed on EGIs that do not have
4. Wait until a complete GPS constellation is ob- crypto-variables loaded, the IFA could take as long as
tained (receiving four satellites). View this on 20 minutes.
the GPS STATUS 2/4 page.

2-6
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NAVIGATION SYSTEM Grid Factor

CONFIGURATION AND UPDATE 1. Press INDX hard-key.
2. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select INDEX
The following are procedures to configure the naviga- 2/2 page.
tion system via the CNI-MU (ICDU). Procedures for
System Control, Position Updates, and Mission Data 3. Select SYS CONTROL.
Transfer are included. 4. Enter a grid convergence factor (between -
1.00000 and 1.00000), obtained from a navi-
gation chart, into the CNI-MU (ICDU) scratch
SYSTEM CONTROL pad.
The SYSTEM CONTROL page (figure 3H-17) is used 5. Select GRID FACTOR to enter value.
to select the navigation source in control (CNI-SP 1 or
CNI-SP 2), the heading reference and the grid factor
for the particular CNI-MU (ICDU). NAV CONTROL

CNI-MU (ICDU) Source INAV Source Selection

1. Press INDX hard-key. 1. Press NAV CTRL hard-key.
2. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select INDEX a. INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page is displayed.
2/2 page.
b. Ensure AUTO is selected unless equip-
3. Select SYS CONTROL. ment failure makes manual selection of a
navigation solution desirable.
4. Select ICDU SOURCE.
c. Ensure desired navigation source is select-
ed.
NOTE
If both SPs are operational, the ICDU INAV Sensor Selection
SOURCE soft-key cycles between CNI-
SP 1 and CNI-SP 2 as the navigation 1. Press NAV CTRL hard-key.
source for the CNI-MU (ICDU). Otherwise
a. INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page is displayed.
selection is nonfunctional.
2. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to display the
INAV CTRL SENSORS 2/3 page.
Heading
a. Ensure all required/desired navigation
1. Press INDX hard-key. sensors are selected unless equipment
2. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select INDEX failures makes selection of navigation sen-
2/2 page. sor undesirable.

3. Select SYS CONTROL.

EGI, GPS, INS
4. Select HEADING.
1. Press NAV CTRL hard-key.
NOTE a. INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page is displayed.
The HEADING soft-key cycles the head- 2. Press PREV PAGE hard-key to display the
ing reference between MAG, TRUE, and INAV CTRL INDEX 3/3 page.
GRID. Soft-key only selects the heading
reference for this CNI-MU (ICDU) display. 3. Select EGI to select the EGI STATUS 1/2
page.
a. Ensure NAV script is under MODE.
b. Check FOM and EHE for reasonableness.
c. Check current present position at the top of
the page.

2-7
FAM.1C-27J-1A

4. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to display the EGI POSITION UPDATE

STATUS 2/2 page.
Two types of position updates can be executed using
the CNI-MS, manual and cursor target update:
NOTE
• The Manual position update is normally used
This page allows checking Pitch, Roll, when over a preloaded reference position; freez-
and Azimuth. ing, comparing and updating the aircraft position
through the CNI-MU (ICDU).
3. Select GPS.
• The Cursor Target position update is used with
a. Verify GPS STATUS 1/4 page for FOM, preloaded cursor target positions; slewing to the
EHE, position and time. correct radar position with the cursor slew on the
4. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to display the cursor control panel or pilot/copilot yoke and in-
GPS STATUS 2/4 page. serting the update through the cursor control panel
with the cursor in the Computer or Quick Update
a. Check the number of good satellites. mode. The update positions for both type updates
are loaded in the CNI-MU (ICDU), and the updates
NOTE are accepted or cleared through the CNI-MU
(ICDU).
Three or four satellites are required for
present position to be displayed.
Manual Position Update
3. Select INS to display the INS STATUS 1/2 UPLOADING THE REFERENCE POSITION
page.
1. Press NAV CTRL hard-key.
a. Ensure NAV script is under MODE.
b. Check present position, FOM and EHE. a. INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page is displayed.

4. Select ALIGN to display the INS ALIGN page. 2. Select UPDATE to display the POSITION UP-
DATE page.
a. Ensure NAV script is selected.
3. Insert the REF POS on the POSITION UP-
5. Select INS and press NEXT PAGE hard-key to DATE page.
display the INS STATUS 2/2 page.
UPDATING TO THE REFERENCE POSITION
NOTE 1. Select FREEZE when overhead the REF POS
to display the position error.
This page allows you to check Pitch, Roll,
and Azimuth. 2. After comparing the update range/bearing dis-
played above ACCEPT, select ACCEPT to up-
date the EGI bias solution with the position
DADS
bias.
1. Press NAV CTRL hard-key.
2. Press PREV PAGE hard-key to display the
NOTE
INAV CTRL INDEX 3/3 page. An update can only be made when the
3. Select DADS to display the DADS page. EGI is the selected solution and is only
applied to the EGI solution.
4. Displays DADC data: CAS, Press Alt, Baro Alt,
SAT, TAS, V/S, TDEV STD, and TAT. 3. To clear all updates to the EGI bias solution,
select CLEAR for EGI 1 and/or EGI 2.
3. To accomplish an update to the same REF
POS, delete the SELECTED POS.
4. To update using a different REF POS, insert
the REF POS on the POSITION UPDATE
page.

2-8
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Cursor Target Position Update • If a quick cursor is used, the calculat-

ed bias value is immediately applied
NOTE to the active navigation solution creat-
ing a temporary position bias. This
Position Updates applied to the EGI pro- bias remains active until the cursor
viding the current ship solution may mode is changed.
cause a map shift. If the autopilot is en-
gaged and is tracking the INAV solution, • To maintain the updating for naviga-
the aircraft may initiate an uncommanded tion, ACCEPT selection is necessary.
turn.
3. To clear any updates to the EGI solution, se-
lect CLEAR for EGI 1 and/or EGI 2.
UPLOADING THE CURSOR TARGET POSITION
1. Press NAV CTRL hard-key.
MISSION DATA TRANSFER
a. INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page is displayed.
The purpose of the DATA TRANSFER pages is to pro-
2. Select UPDATE to display the POSITION UP- vide a means to transfer mission data using the Dual
DATE page. Slot - Data Transfer System (DS-DTS) from an RMM
3. Select computer or quick cursor mode on cur- to the CNI-SPs (DATA TRANSFER 1/3 page) or trans-
sor control panel. fer data between CNI-SP 1 and CNI-SP 2 (DATA
TRANSFER 3/3 page).
4. Select CURSOR TGT to display the CURSOR DATA TRANSFER 2/3 page is currently not functional
TARGET page. to transfer from the CNI-MS to the RMM.
5. Insert up to 10 cursor targets on CURSOR
TARGET pages 1/2 and 2/2. DS-DTS Transfer to the CNI-SPs
6. Select the desired cursor target through the 1. Ensure mission data transfer card RMM is in-
cursor control panel, in the computer or quick stalled in either DS-DTS slot.
cursor modes.
2. Press INDX hard-key.
NOTE a. INDEX 1/2 page is displayed.
b. Select DATA XFR to select the DATA
A manual REF POS must be deleted on
TRANSFER 1/3 page.
the CURSOR TARGET page, prior to ac-
cessing the cursor target. 3. Select specific information to be transferred or
select ALL to transfer all information from the
UPDATING THE CURSOR TARGET POSITION RMM. Selected information should highlight.
1. Slew the cursor over the reference position. In- 4. Select LOAD to initiate transfer.
sert the updated position by pressing the insert
update switch on the cursor control panel, to NOTE
the CNI-MU (ICDU).
A TRANSFER IN PROGRESS message
2. After comparing the update range/bearing dis- appears in the CNI-MU (ICDU) scratch
played above ACCEPT, select ACCEPT to up- pad. A TRANSFER COMPLETE mes-
date the EGI bias solution. sage appears in the CNI-MU (ICDU)
scratch pad when transfer is complete.
NOTE
5. Verify accuracy of information.
• In the quick cursor mode, this step is
not necessary for course guidance
correction. An update can only be
made when the EGI is the selected
solution.

2-9
FAM.1C-27J-1A

SP-SP Data Transfer PERF INIT WEIGHT 1/4 page

The data contained in each CNI-SP is constantly 1. Enter the Basic Operating Weight (BOW).
being monitored and when a discrepancy exists
between SPs, a MISSION DB MISCOMPARE or NAV NOTE
DB MISCOMPARE message appears in the CNI-MU
This is a required entry and cannot be de-
(ICDU) scratch pad. When these messages appear,
leted while airborne.
the CNI-MU (ICDU) defaults to the DATA TRANSFER
page 3/3.
2. Enter the PAYLOAD Weight.
1. Select TRANSMIT or RECEIVE as appropri-
3. Check the Fuel On Board (FOB) value to en-
ate.
sure it matches the fuel panel readout.

NOTE NOTE
TRANSMIT is displayed in large font if on- Prior to take-off, crews should manually
side CNI-SP has valid data. RECEIVE is enter the fuel panel total fuel value as the
displayed in large font if offside CNI-SP PERF INIT WEIGHT page FOB if the val-
has valid data. ues differ following mission planning sys-
tem data transfers or fueling operations
a. Verify transfer status appears in the middle completed after initial power-up. After
of the screen. performing mission planning system data
transfers, crews should also review the
PERF INIT WEIGHT page to ensure fuel
reserve values are correct, since trans-
PERFORMANCE AND TOLD DATA ferred data may not use the same default
values as the CNI-MS.
The CNI-MS is designed to provide all the information
necessary for the crew to perform take-offs and land- 4. Enter the TRIP fuel needed to complete the re-
ings in the vast majority of conditions. All calculations maining flight plan.
are based on the associated FAM.1C-27J-1-1 Perfor-
mance Data Manual. Extreme conditions such as a NOTE
crosswind component exceeding 35 knots, or more
than a 30 °C temperature deviation from standard day This is a required entry as signified by box
exceed the boundaries of the CNI-MS capability. prompt; however, once the performance
If a set of conditions exist that cause any of the out- initialization is complete, the CNI-MS
puts to exceed the boundaries of the tabular data, the computes this data. If the crew desires to
message Takeoff Data Out of Bounds (T/O DATA O/B) input a value in advance of completing
or Landing Data Out of Bounds (LDG DATA O/B) is performance initialization, it is recom-
displayed in the scratch pad. mended that the entered value be deleted
The output that caused the out of bounds condition once the CNI-MS computed value is
also displays “XXX”. If an output is invalid, dashes are available.
displayed. The message INVALID ENTRY is dis-
played in the scratch pad whenever an entry is not 5. Enter the weight of FIXED fuel reserves (if re-
within parameters or is not a reasonable value. quired to change the default value).
6. Observe the Reserve (% VAR) fuel.

PERFORMANCE DATA
PERF INIT CLIMB 2/4 page
NOTE
1. Enter the TRANS ALT of the departure area.
Critical TOLD data should be verified
against FAM.1C-27J-1-1 prior to use.
NOTE
The altitudes above the TRANS ALT are
displayed as Flight Levels (FL) and those
below remain as thousands of feet.

2-10
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PERF INIT CRUISE 3/4 page All automatic altitudes may be overwritten
by the crew if the EOD altitude cannot be
1. Enter the planned CRZ ALT. determined as shown above.

NOTE 2. Enter the TRANS LVL for the destination.

The entered altitude cascades down 3. Enter the desired DES ANGLE which deter-
throughout to all unconstrained way- mines the location of the Top of Descent
points in the flight plan on the LEGS pag- (TOD).
es.
NOTE
2. Enter an average CRZ WIND if the predicted
winds are available for your route of flight. Initially, 4.7 degrees is displayed, but may
be manually overridden and changed.
NOTE
If predicted winds are not available, the WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 page
CRZ WIND is an optional entry and is dis- 1. Manually change the WINDS to reflect briefed
played as dashes (applied as 000 de- winds.
grees /0 kt.
NOTE
3. Enter the CRZ SPEED (CAS / TAS / GS).
The WINDS displayed are the actual
NOTE sensed winds at altitude. Only the active
leg uses the sensed wind; all subsequent
Entry cascades down through the flight legs use the wind entered on the PERF
plan and is applied to all downrange, non- INIT CRUISE page. Manually entering
active Legs. the leg wind cascades down through the
flight plan to the next manually entered
4. Enter a CRZ Fuel Flow (FF). leg wind.

NOTE WAYPOINT DATA 2/2 page

Entry cascades down through the entire 1. Select the desired NOM BANK setting. This
flight plan, including the active Leg. only affects the individual leg.

5. Enter the planned cruise T DEV/TOC OAT at 2. Select WP TRANS setting.

the cruise altitude.
NOTE
PERF INIT DESCENT 4/4 page The setting is similar to the NOM
BANK. The global leg setting is controlled
1. Enter the End of Descent (EOD) speed/alti-
on the RTE page and changing the set-
tude.
ting on the WAYPOINT DATA 2/2 page
affects only the individual leg.
NOTE
The EOD speed defaults to 210 knots and 3. Ensure a FUEL FLOW value is displayed or
the EOD altitude is automatically set to entered.
the destination runway plus 2000 feet if a
runway is selected. If a destination run- NOTE
way has not been selected, the EOD alti-
tude is set to airport elevation plus 2000 The entry is applied to the individual leg
feet. If a non-precision Landing Zone (LZ) and cascades down through flight plan to
is present, the EOD altitude is set to the the next manually entered fuel flow.
MDA. If a precision or tactical LZ is
present, the EOD altitude is set to the
Threshold Crossing Height (TCH).

2-11
FAM.1C-27J-1A

4. Enter FUEL ADJUST (if required). 5. Select the desired number of engines in re-
verse setting for take-off (REV ENG).
NOTE 6. Enter the OAT for take-off (°C or °F).
This is an optional entry which may be 7. Enter the take-off surface winds (SFC
used to add or subtract the amount of to- WINDS).
tal fuel on board. For example, if fuel were
dumped, this is where the change would
NOTE
be inserted.
An entry is not required. Initially dashes
are displayed and a wind of 00/000 is ap-
TAKE-OFF AND LANDING DATA plied to the take-off or landing data.

TOLD INIT 1/3 page 8. Enter the most current local altimeter setting
(in.Hg or Millibars).
1. Enter the take-off airfield (FIELD) identifica-
tion. 9. Enter the elevation of the take-off runway
threshold (ELEV/PA).
NOTE
NOTE
If an origin has been selected on the RTE
page, it is automatically transferred and If an origin/destination runway has been
displayed. Since the take-off airfield is not selected, the elevation of the runway is
a required entry, no entry is required if extracted and displayed if the airfield in-
dashes appear. formation is included in the worldwide da-
tabase.
2. Enter the takeoff runway (RWY) in use.
TOLD INIT 2/3 page
NOTE
1. Enter the magnetic runway heading (RWY
If a runway has previously been selected HDG).
from the route section, it is automatically
transferred and displayed. This is not a NOTE
required entry and may be left as dashes.
If a runway has previously been selected
3. Enter the gross weight of the aircraft (GROSS from the route section, the runway head-
WT). ing is automatically extracted and dis-
played if the airfields information is
included in the worldwide database.
WARNING
2. Enter the runway length (RWY LGTH).
The automatic gross weight update on
TOLD page is unreliable. NOTE
The crew must always manually insert If a runway has previously been selected
the gross weight data on TOLD page. from the route section, the runway length
TOLD data are to be used as reference is automatically extracted and displayed if
only. the airfields information is included in the
worldwide database.
NOTE
3. Select the desired icing protection system con-
If the PERF INIT WEIGHT page has been
figuration for take-off (ICING).
previously completed, the gross weight is
automatically transferred and displayed. 4. Enter the climb speed ratio value by manually
changing the CLB SPD RATIO default of 1.23
4. Select the desired TOLD TYPE. to the desired value.

2-12
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

5. Enter the minimum climb gradient value by 3. Enter the calculated refusal speed V1 dis-
manually changing the MIN CLB GRAD default played on the TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 page into
of 2.50 to the desired value. the V REF field.
6. Enter the current RCR/RSC values for the run- 4. Enter the calculated rotate speed VR displayed
way conditions by manually changing the on the TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 page into the V
RCR/RSC default of 23/0 to the desired val- ROT field.
ues.
5. Enter the calculated obstacle climb speed V2
displayed on the TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 page
NOTE into the V CO field.
RCR and RSC cannot both be changed
from their default value (23/0). Only one NOTE
or the other can be changed or entered
These entered speeds is posted in the
per entry therefore an entry of 23/0 re-
CMDU PFD with carets as 1 and R. V2
sults in an invalid entry message since
uses the reference airspeed bug only on
both values are being entered.
CMDU PFD.
7. Enter the estimated/known take-off runway
slope to the nearest 10th of a degree (SLOPE).
FLIGHT PLANNING
NOTE
A positive designates an up slope and
negative designates a down slope. Slope ROUTE PLAN PAGE SETUP
information is not included in the world-
wide database. ORIGIN, DEST, ALTN Entry
1. Select ROUTE 1 or 2 plan page from the POW-
TOLD INIT 3/3 page ER UP page, or INDEX 1/2 page.
1. Enter the drag index for the current aircraft 2. Enter ORIGIN.
configuration (DRAG INDEX).
NOTE
NOTE
Entering an ORIGIN deletes all previous
This is not held in memory and must be entered route data.
entered for each flight.
3. Enter DEST and ALTN (if desired).
2. Enter the brake coefficient value by manually
changing the BRAKE COEF default of 0.50 to
the desired value.
NOTE

3. Enter the refusal speed ratio value by manually If origin and/or destination airport are not
changing the REF SPD RATIO default of 1.00 included in the database, a manual coor-
to the desired value. dinates insertion must be provided, in this
case the airports are considered as cus-
4. Enter the lift-off speed ratio value by manually tom waypoint (no standard procedure
changing the LO SPD RATIO default of 1.18 to available).
the desired value.
Leg Parameters Selection
V SPEEDS page
1. Enter NOM BANK on WAYPOINT DATA 2/2
1. Press MC INDX hard-key. page (if not already entered) or use default val-
ue.
a. MC INDEX page is displayed.
2. Select WP SEQ (MAN/AUTO) and WP TRANS
2. Select V SPEEDS soft-key.
(CP/ROT/P-P) on RTEn page (if required).
a. V SPEEDS page is displayed.

2-13
FAM.1C-27J-1A

DEP/ARR Select Legs Page Access

1. Soft-key DEP/ARR procedure if desired. 1. Selecting LEGS from the RTE page displays
the associated LEGS 1 or LEGS 2 page.
NOTE 2. Selecting the LEGS hard-key displays the ac-
ORIGIN ARR deletes all previous entered tive LEGS page or LEGS 1 if neither route is
waypoint data. active.

2. Input OTHER DEP or ARR to reference navi- Legs Page Waypoint Entry
gation database information without route in-
put. NOTE
Waypoints can be entered on the left side
RWY, SID/STAR, TRANS Select of the LEGS page or either side of the
1. Select available navigation database selec- RTE pages.
tions if desired.
1. Select LEGS page from a RTE page or NEXT
PAGE hard-key for RTE 2/2 page.
SID/STAR REVIEW page
2. Enter waypoint data in the scratch pad by the
1. Select SID/STAR REVIEW page if desired, following methods:
changes to DEP/ARR can made prior to LEGS
page input. a. Enter a selected navigation database
point, identified by a navaid, airfield or re-
porting point name. The WAYPOINT SE-
WAYPOINT ENTRY LECT page is displayed if a point has
multiple locations.
The CNI-MS selects the first WPT in the flight plan
b. Enter latitude/longitude by either whole de-
during flight plan operations and may select a WPT
grees, degrees and minutes, or degrees,
other than the desired WPT. To ensure the correct
minutes and 10th/100th minutes (named
waypoint is used when making flight plan changes,
LLxx).
the crew may add a one or two character label to each
turn point or waypoint in the flight plan: c. Enter a radial/distance from a point. (e.g.,
DOB/180/10 named PBxx), defining a
a. Enter one or two characters followed by a place bearing waypoint.
slash (/). d. Enter the intersection of 2 radials from two
b. Press the soft-key associated with the way- points (e.g., DOB/165/ATL/045 named
point to be labeled. RRxx), defining a radial/radial waypoint.
e. Enter a MGRS (Military Grid Reference
NOTE System) waypoint with grid reference se-
ries and coordinates (named MGxx).
Duplicate waypoints in a flight plan may f. Enter a selected custom data point defined
be problematic for certain flight plan mod- in the custom data list.
ifications. To prevent any undesired route
bypasses (e.g., resulting from a direct-to),
create a unique waypoint label for each NOTE
duplicate waypoint by entering a one or If not already defined, the CUSTOM
two character label followed by a slash. DATA page is displayed for definition.
For example, if the waypoint RMG occurs
twice in a flight plan, the crew may enter
g. Enter the defined waypoint in the flight plan
the first with 1/RMG and the second with
adjacent to the position desired, by press-
2/RMG.
ing that soft-key.
h. Enter waypoint (e.g., 01/ or A/) labels if de-
sired, in the scratch pad, and selecting the
waypoint, on the LEGS or RTE page.

2-14
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Route Page Waypoint Entry Route Storage and Retrieval

Via Airway Stored Route Entry: To Store a Route:
1. Press INDX hard-key.
NOTE
a. INDEX 1/2 page is displayed.
Airways or stored route entry can be en-
b. Select ROUTE 1 or 2 to select RTE plan
tered on the left side of the LEGS page or
page.
either side of the RTE pages.
2. Enter the route name in the scratch pad, using
1. Enter an airway or stored route entry name and 6 to 10 characters.
exiting point (e.g., J41. FLO) in the scratch
pad, and enter with the soft-key adjacent to the 3. Select STORE RTE soft-key to store the route.
position desired.
NOTE
NOTE Routes do not store departures, arrivals
• The previous waypoint must already or mission data (CARP, LZ, SAR, RNDZ).
be a defined point on that airway, as
the airway or stored route entry point. To Retrieve a Stored Route:
All waypoints between the airway en- 1. Press INDX hard-key.
try and exit point are displayed on the
LEGS page. a. INDEX 1/2 page is displayed.
b. Select RT LIST to select STORED ROUTE
• In case that a waypoint or airway
LIST page.
does not present in the database a
message (i.e. “WAYPOINT NOT 2. Select soft-key adjacent to the desired route
FOUND”) appears in the scratch pad. and check route displayed on the scratch pad.
3. Select ROUTE (soft-key R6) or INDEX (soft-
Route Alternate Entry key L6) and ROUTE 1 or 2 to select RTE plan
page.
1. Select ROUTE ALTN page from the RTE pag-
es. 4. Select RETRIEVE RTE soft-key to transfer the
scratch pad data to the display.
2. Enter the route segment to the alternate en-
tered, by waypoint or via airway entry.
ACTIVATE/EXEC Route
Waypoint Review 1. Select ACTIVATE on the ROUTE page.
1. Delete >>DISCONTINUITY<< from LEGS a. Green EXEC light illuminates.
pages, as described in Part 3K.
NOTE
NOTE
Changes an inactive route to a provision-
Discontinuities between RWY and DEP, al route with (MOD).
and ARR and RWY cannot be deleted.
2. Press EXEC hard-key to execute the provi-
2. Review courses, distances, ETE/ETAs, air- sional route.
speeds and altitudes on the LEGS pages.
3. Review default values on the WAYPOINT NOTE
DATA pages. Changes a provisional route (MOD) white
4. Enter TOA, if required, on the WAYPOINT line on CMDU NAV Radar to an active
DATA 1/2 page. route (ACT) blue line on CMDU NAV Ra-
dar.

2-15
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Legs History and Progress Pages 1. Enter the desired XTK LIM (crosstrack limit) if
different from the default 3.75 NM (9.99 NM is
1. Press LEGS hard-key. maximum).
2. Press PREV PAGE hard-key to select LEGS
HIST 1/x page. NOTE
When the entered XTK LIM is exceeded,
NOTE exceeded, a “XTK LIMIT EXCEEDED”
LEGS HIST displays the last 5 se- ACAWS advisory message is triggered.
quenced waypoints.
2. Enter the desired POS ALERTS 1 & 2 if differ-
3. Select PROGRESS branching from any LEGS ent than the 1.0/5.0 NM default values.
page.
4. Select PROGRESS 1/4 page to display LAST, PROGRESS-ETP 3/4 page
TO, NEXT, DEST data, PERF command
speeds and altitudes, and TOA error. NOTE
5. Select PROGRESS 2/4 page to display true • Initially, the ETP segment is the great
airspeed, wind, speed, temp data, crosstrack circle path from an airport (last
error, and position alerts. NEAREST APT) direct to a specific
flight plan waypoint (LAST WPT),
6. Select PROGRESS-ETP 3/4 page to calculate
along the flight plan to a specified
and display an ETP position.
waypoint (FIRST WPT), and direct to
7. Enter ETP LAST and FIRST WPTs. an airport (first NEAREST APT).

• This page should be completed while

NOTE on the ground before take-off since
the LAST WPT entry must be a point
LAST and FIRST WPTs entered must be
on the route of flight and once transi-
in the active flight plan.
tioned, cannot be entered.
8. Enter ETP NEAREST WPTs. 1. Enter the LAST WPT (if required).

NOTE NOTE
PERF page required data must be en- Entry should be the initial waypoint from
tered for ETP position calculation. which the ETP is calculated.

9. Select PROGRESS 4/4 page to calculate and 2. Enter the last NEAREST APT (R1).
display two divert waypoints.
NOTE
PROGRESS 1/4 page
Entry should be the closest suitable air-
The PROGRESS 1/4 page allows the operator to view field to the WPT where the aircraft is ca-
flight plan progress information. See Part 3K for pable of landing.
description and data entry.
3. Enter the FIRST WPT.
PROGRESS 2/4 page
NOTE
NOTE Entry should be the final waypoint from
which the ETP is calculated.
The VTK ERROR displayed on the
PROGRESS 2/4 page is not equivalent to
4. Enter the first NEAREST APT (R2).
a VOR/ILS precision approach glides-
lope.

2-16
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NOTE NOTE
This should be the closest suitable airfield A waypoint can not be deleted if it is the
to the first WPT following the ETP. TO waypoint or part of a procedure (e.g.,
DEP or ARR).
PROGRESS-DIVR 4/4 page
4. Press EXEC hard-key to activate.
The PROGRESS-DIVR 4/4 page allows the operator
to view flight plan divert waypoint information. See
DIR/INTC Function
Part 3K for description and data entry.
1. Press DIR/INTC hard-key.

ENROUTE WAYPOINT CHANGES 2. Enter the waypoint in the DIRECT TO soft-key

boxes.
NOTE or
The operator can enter WPTs after the 2. Enter the waypoint in the INTC LEG soft-key
route destination on the active route legs boxes.
pages. However, following the sequence
of the route destination, the CNI-MS does 3. Enter the inbound course for the INTC LEG, in
not provide vertical profile predictions for the soft-key boxes.
these WPTs. The departure/arrival and 4. Press EXEC hard-key to activate.
WPT insertion operations do not recog-
nize these WPTs as part of the active
route. The operators should confirm the Erase
WPT order following any flight plan
1. Select ERASE on the LEGS or RTE pages, to
changes during the active sequence of
erase flight plan changes.
WPTs after the route destination.

NOTE
Waypoint Insert
Any flight plan change can be erased pri-
1. Select LEGS or RTE page. or to selecting EXEC hard-key, without af-
2. Define the waypoint and insert to the desired fecting the active route.
flight plan position.
a. Green EXEC light illuminates. Arm the Route to Alternate
1. Select any ROUTE page other than 1/x.
NOTE
2. Select ROUTE ALTN soft-key.
A waypoint cannot be inserted as the TO
3. Select ARM ALTN soft-key.
waypoint.
a. Green EXEC light illuminates.
3. Press EXEC hard-key to activate.
4. Press EXEC hard-key to activate.

Waypoint Delete NOTE

1. Select LEGS or RTE page. Places the route to alternate waypoints
2. Press DEL key. after the active route DEST.

a. DELETE appears on the scratch pad.

ACTIVATING THE INACTIVE ROUTE
3. Press the soft-key adjacent to the desired way-
point for deletion. 1. Press INDX hard-key.
a. Green EXEC light illuminates. a. INDEX 1/2 page is displayed.

2-17
FAM.1C-27J-1A

2. Select the inactive route (active route is shown 2. Enter SPD/TGT ALT which is the speed (de-
in page title). faul is 170 KCAS) and altitude target for the
holding fix.
3. Select ACTIVATE soft-key (R6) on appropriate
route page. 3. Enter QUAD/RADIAL, which is the position of
the hold pattern relative to the hold fix and ver-
a. The 2nd route becomes active. ify INBD CRS/DIR (inbound course/turn direc-
b. Green EXEC light illuminates. tion).
4. Press EXEC hard-key to execute the 2nd route. or
3. Enter INBD CRS/DIR (inbound course/turn di-
NOTE
rection) and verify QUAD/RADIAL, which is the
Activating and executing the 2nd route (in- position of the hold pattern relative to the hold
active route), puts the 1st route (active fix.
route) in an inactive state. 4. Verify or enter HOLD FF (hold fuel flow) for the
hold pattern as required.
HOLDING 5. Verify FIX ETA (computed Estimated Time Ar-
rival) of the next fix crossing or enter an EAT
NOTE Exit At Time (time at which the crew desires to
exit the hold).
Only one HOLD pattern can be in the
flight plan at a time. 6. Verify or enter LEG TIME which is the duration
of the inbound leg.

Present Position HOLD 7. Verify or enter LEG DIST which is the distance
of the inbound leg.
1. Press MSN hard-key.
8. Press EXEC hard-key to activate.
a. MISSIONS page is displayed.
2. Select PPOS HOLD to select the HOLD page. NOTE
The HOLD IP FIX is determined when
NOTE EXEC is selected.
Can be activated at any point when within
0.25 NM of crosstrack and on flight plan HOLD Pattern Exit
course to an active waypoint.
1. Select HOLD ---ARM (soft-key R6) direct guid-
ance transition to the hold fix before steering to
Down track HOLD the next waypoint.
1. Press LEGS hard-key. or
a. ACT LEGS page is displayed. 1. Select NOW ---EXIT (soft-key L6) for direct
2. Select LEGS page with the desired down track steering to the next waypoint.
holding waypoint.
3. Press right soft-key, adjacent to that waypoint. MISCELLANEOUS INDEX 2/2 PAGE FUNCTIONS
a. WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 page is displayed.
Fix
4. Select HOLD to select the HOLD page.
1. Press INDX hard-key.

HOLD Parameters Definition 2. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select INDEX

2/2 page.
1. Enter LBL/IDENT using waypoint identifier of
the hold fix (only for Down Track HOLD). 3. Select FIX soft-key to branch to the FIX INFO
page.

2-18
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

4. Enter a FIX position. NOTE

5. Enter FIX radials crossing the active flight plan, Displays navigation database info for any
in the left soft-key positions, to calculate FIX entered NAVAID or airfield.
DME, ETA, DTG, and ALT.
6. Select ABEAM to calculate abeam FIX DME, Custom Data List
ETA, DTG, and ALT.
1. Press INDX hard-key.

From/To 2. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select INDEX

2/2 page.
1. Press INDX hard-key.
3. Select CUSTOM DATA soft-key to branch to
2. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select INDEX the CUSTOM DATA LIST page.
2/2 page.
4. Enter a CUSTOM DATA point in the soft-key
3. Select FROM/TO soft-key to branch to the boxes.
FROM/TO page.
4. Enter two points separated by a /. NOTE
• Displays CUSTOM DATA position
NOTE and elevation, if defined.
Computes course, distance, ETA/ETE • Entering an undefined point automat-
between two points, and airspeed can be ically displays a blank CUSTOM
entered. DATA page for lat/long and elevation
input.
5. Enter /xxxx to calculate present position to a
point (PPOS/xxxx) data.

Mark COMMUNICATIONS
1. Press INDX hard-key.
2. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select INDEX
OPERATION OF COMM RADIOS
2/2 page.
CNRP
3. Press MARK hard-key.
1. Press COMM hard-key.
a. MARK POSITION page is displayed.
2. Enter frequency/channel into CNRP scratch
4. Select MARK LIST page from the MARK PO-
pad.
SITION page, or INDEX 2/2 page.
3. Assign frequency/channel to desired radio by
5. Select the right soft-key adjacent to MARK
pressing associated soft-key.
point, to view MARK POSITION page.

CNI-MU (ICDU)
NAV Data
COMM TUNE INDEX PAGE
1. Press INDX hard-key.
1. Press COMM TUNE hard-key.
2. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select INDEX
2/2 page. a. COMM TUNE INDEX page is displayed.
3. Select NAV DATA soft-key to branch to the 2. Enter frequency/channel into CNI-MU (ICDU)
NAV DATA page. scratch pad.
4. Enter a NAV DATA IDENT. 3. Assign frequency/channel to desired radio by
pressing corresponding right soft-key.

2-19
FAM.1C-27J-1A

COMM TUNE PAGE Frequency Hopping Operation of the V/UHF

Communication Radio
1. Press COMM TUNE hard-key.
Frequency hopping is a function within the V/UHF
a. COMM TUNE INDEX page is displayed. radio where the frequency is rapidly changed many
2. Select desired radio by pressing correspond- times per second to provide a jam resistant means of
ing left soft-key. communicating in a hostile operating environment.
In the Active mode, the radio has the ability to receive
a. Desired radio COMM TUNE page is dis- and process two simultaneous transmissions on the
played. same net. This conference capability is available only
when operating in the Active mode with net numbers
3. Enter frequency/channel into CNI-MU (ICDU)
ending in .X50 or .X25.
scratch pad.
In a conference net, the second transmitting radio
4. Press soft-key L1 to assign frequency/channel. automatically shifts its transmission frequency by 25
kHz when it monitors a transmission on the primary
ENTER PRESET RADIO FREQUENCY net frequency. The receiver receives both transmis-
sions without the interference associated with radios
1. Press COMM TUNE hard-key.
simultaneously transmitting on the same frequency.
a. COMM TUNE INDEX page is displayed. Three simultaneous transmissions result in garbled
reception.
2. Select desired radio.
3. Enter optional label into scratch pad (2-5 char-
Have Quick Operational Procedures
acters) followed by a slash.
Have Quick has a Training mode and a Combat
4. Enter frequency in the scratch pad. If a label is
mode. In the Training mode, the frequencies that are
not used, frequencies must be preceded with a
used are operator-entered. In the Combat mode, the
slash.
frequencies used are selected from the frequency
5. Assign to channel number pressing left soft- tables stored in nonvolatile memory in the V/UHF
keys. radio.
To operate in the Active mode, the radios must be
6. Use NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE hard-keys tuned to a valid UHF frequency, then be initialized by
to access additional channels. setting time of day, word of day, and net number into
the radio.
V/UHF RADIO OPERATION TIME OF DAY (TOD)

NOTE The TOD consists of a very precise time and an oper-

ational day. The radio uses the operational day to
Do not turn off the V/UHF radio before determine which Multiple Word of Day (MWOD) to
PBIT is complete. PBIT is complete when use. The operational day is in the range 1 through 31,
selections on the COMM TUNE VU page and corresponds to a day of the month.
are displayed in large font inverse video.
The radio internal clock loses time synchronization
any time power is lost. Therefore, when power is
Emergency Operation of the V/UHF applied or reapplied to the system, a TOD must be
Communication Radio
entered into the radio. TOD entry is normally done on
The double installation of the V/UHF radio system the ground prior to take-off, although it can be entered
should make emergency operation of the radio unnec- or corrected while in flight. A TOD may be transmitted
essary, since a malfunctioning radio could be to the radio from one of three sources:
switched off and the remaining radios operated in its
• from GPS via a discrete relay in the aircraft,
place. If the equipment fails in some particular func-
tion, the remaining workable functions may satisfy • from another airborne or ground-based radio,
minimum requirements for operation. If transmission
on a preset channel is not possible, an attempt may • from a self TOD generated using the SELF TOD
be made to use a manually selected channel or the soft-key.
guard frequency. If reception fails on a selected chan-
nel, reception on the guard frequency may be tried.

2-20
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

TOD INITIAL AND UPDATE RECEPTION Active Mode

There are two TOD modes: Normal and Active. The Active mode TOD transmission allows a time
It is possible to transmit and receive time of day infor- update to take place if a radio is drifting out of syn-
mation in both modes by using the U1 (or 2) HAVE chronization. The radio requires an update when
QUICK II 1/2 page RCV RADIO TOD and XMIT TOD incoming message quality from several radios is infe-
soft-keys. In Normal mode, a complete TOD message rior. If incoming messages from only one radio are
is transmitted; in Active mode, only an updating time- inferior, then it is that radio which requires an update.
tick is used. To receive a TOD update in Active mode, no operator
action is required.
Normal Mode If TOD drift is suspected due to deteriorating transmit
The radio automatically accepts the first TOD mes- and receive quality, then a single Have Quick radio
sage received after power-up; subsequent messages can be designated to transmit a time-tick to the other
are ignored. If GPS time is available when radio radios in the Have Quick net. This TOD update is only
power is applied, a discrete GPS TOD relay is closed effective if the TOD drift does not exceed 25 msec. If
for 60 seconds and no operator action is required to the time synchronization has drifted beyond the allow-
receive GPS TOD. For an over-the-air TOD, the radio able limit, then it is necessary to perform a Normal
must be tuned to the frequency over which the TOD mode TOD acquisition.
will be sent. Selecting RCV RADIO TOD, even if the
radio already has a TOD, opens a 1-minute window in
WORD OF DAY
which the radio can receive a TOD or update from The WOD defines the Training or Combat mode and
another radio. Selecting RCV RADIO TOD while the choice of frequency hopping pattern and rate for
active reverts the radio back into the single frequency. the operational day. A WOD looks like a list of six UHF
frequencies. Each frequency is called a segment; thus
Selecting SELF TOD generates an internal TOD set to a WOD has six segments.
UTC midnight. SELF TOD is also known as an emer-
gency clock start. The radio contains a TOD, but is not
NOTE
able to communicate with another Have Quick radio
unless this TOD is sent over the air to another radio. After entering a Have Quick net, if the
The XMIT TOD soft-key can be used to transmit a user receives a tone in the headset and
1667 Hz TOD tone to another radio. If the radio does an INVALID WOD message is displayed,
not contain a TOD when this soft-key is selected, a perform the following steps if the WOD is
normal 1020 Hz tone will be heard. The radio receiv- believed to be valid:
ing a TOD over the air must be tuned to the same fre-
quency as the transmitting radio. 1. Enter the last fixed frequency (or any valid
UHF frequency).
NOTE
2. Select HQ soft-key to branch to the U1 (or 2)
• If GPS time of day is desired (normal HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page.
operations), wait until a GPS time is
3. Press PREV PAGE or NEXT PAGE hard-key
displayed on the POWER UP page
to select U1 (or 2) HAVE QUICK II 2/2 page.
before selecting the MSTR AV ON
soft-key. The radio searches for GPS 4. Select RCV GPS TOD soft-key.
time automatically during initialization
5. Press PREV PAGE or NEXT PAGE hard-key
only (during power-up BIT while the
to select U1 (or 2) HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page.
60-second GPS TOD relay is closed).
Otherwise, perform a GPS TOD prior 6. Enter the desired Have Quick net.
to HAVE QUICK operations.
7. Repeat this procedure up to three times if nec-
• In Normal mode, the radio accepts essary.
the next TOD message received pro-
vided that it arrives within 1 minute of If this does not allow entry into the Have Quick net,
the time RCV RADIO TOD is select- perform the following:
ed. 1. Validate the WOD if necessary.
2. Press PREV PAGE or NEXT PAGE hard-key
to select U1 (or 2) HAVE QUICK II 2/2 page.

2-21
FAM.1C-27J-1A

3. Select SELF TOD soft-key. NOTE

4. Select RCV GPS TOD soft-key. During the transition from single to multi-
ple WOD operation, the single WOD
5. Press PREV PAGE or NEXT PAGE hard-key
method is still available.
to select U1 (or 2) HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page.
6. Enter the desired Have Quick net. WORD OF DAY DATA STORAGE
If this procedure results in an INVALID WOD mes- When the radio is powered off, the WOD data remains
sage, perform the RCV RF TOD function in coordi- in nonvolatile memory. However, when the radio is
nation with another user. powered on, the WOD data must be transferred from
the nonvolatile memory to the volatile memory of the
Training Mode
receiver-transmitter switching unit of the radio.
If the WOD starts with 300.0XX, the Training mode will
be selected and the last five segments define the five WORD OF DAY DATA ENTRY
frequencies that make up the Have Quick I training The applicable soft-keys of the U1 (or 2) HAVE
frequency table. There is also another training fre- QUICK II 1/2 page are used to enter WOD data. The
quency table called the Frequency Managed Training six WOD segments are entered in channel spaces 20
(FMT) net. The FMT net contains 16 frequencies. through 15. The day of the month associated with the
Combat Mode WOD is entered using the 20-15 DAY soft-key. Upon
entry of this date, the MWOD load mode is initiated
If the first segment of a WOD starts with anything and the WOD is loaded for that day. Entry of the cur-
other than 300.0XX, then Combat mode is selected. rent day and selection of the TODAY soft-key is used
The XX digits in the first segment provide the hop to recall an MWOD for use. Brief tones heard in the
rate, with 00 being the slowest and 75 being the fast- headset indicate that a WOD has been recalled.
est hop rate.
Conferencing Capability NOTE

In the Active mode, the radio processes and receives Exiting the U1 (or 2) HAVE QUICK II 1/2
two simultaneous transmissions on the same net. This page before selecting the 20-15 DAY
conferencing capability is enabled if the second seg- soft-key to store the WOD segments en-
ment of the WOD ends with 00 or 50. If the second tered in channel spaces 20 through 15
segment ends with 25 or 75, conferencing is disabled. deletes all entered data from the page.
In a conference net, the second transmitting radio
automatically shifts its transmission frequency by 25 NET NUMBER
kHz when it monitors a transmission on the primary
A net number is a six-digit alphanumeric code,
frequency. The wide band receiver reads both trans-
expressed as a variable, representing the Active
missions without the interference normally associated
mode. The net number ranges from A00.0XX to
with radios transmitting on the same frequency simul-
A99.9XX. The A position in the net number places the
taneously. However, three simultaneous transmis-
radio in the Anti-Jam mode and programs the radio to
sions result in garbled reception.
use the net number following the A.
MULTIPLE WOD The three digits after the A define this net, and the last
two digits designate the frequency table to be used.
Multiple WOD (MWOD) may be entered in the Have This provides 1000 possible net numbers for each fre-
Quick radio. Each WOD has an associated data code quency table stored in the radio. The valid Training
that specifies the day of the month that it is to be (T), net (Have Quick I), and FMT net (Have Quick II)
used. The MWOD capability allows for up to six Training mode numbers, as well as the valid Combat
WODs to be loaded into the radio. At midnight, the mode net numbers, are designated in the lists below:
TOD transitions, and the radio automatically transi-
tions to the next WOD associated with the new date. COMBAT MODE NET NUMBERS
If a WOD is not available in the radio for the next day
• A00.000 to A99.900 for Have Quick I frequency ta-
during the TOD transition, the radio continues to use
bles,
the current WOD. WOD entry is normally done prior to
take-off, although it is possible to enter or correct it • A00.025 to A99.925 for Have Quick II NATO fre-
while in flight. quency tables,

2-22
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

• A00.050 to A99.950 for Have Quick II Non-NATO HAVE QUICK MWOD LOADING VIA MISSION
frequency tables. DATA CARD

TRAINING MODE NET NUMBERS 1. Press INDX hard-key.

• A00.000 to A00.400 for Have Quick I (five frequen- a. INDEX 1/2 page is displayed.
cy table used), 2. Select POWER-UP soft-key.
• A00.025 to A01.525 for Have Quick II (16 frequen- a. POWER-UP page is displayed.
cy table used).
3. Select DATA XFR soft-key.
Combat Mode
a. DATA TRANSFER 1/3 page is displayed.
In Combat mode, net numbers ending in 00 select the
Have Quick I A-net or B-net frequency table. Net num- 4. Select HAVE QUICK soft-key (large font).
bers ending in 25 select the Have Quick II NATO/
Europe frequency table, and net numbers ending in NOTE
50 select the Have Quick II non-NATO frequency
tables. Net numbers ending in 75 constitute a set of For successful data transfer, all V/UHF
invalid net numbers which result in a pulsating warn- radios must be powered on.
ing tone in the headset.
5. Select LOAD soft-key to initiate data transfer.
Training Mode
TO INITIATE HAVE QUICK OPERATIONS:
When operating with a Training mode WOD, selection
of a non-training net number results in a pulsating
warning tone in the headset. When operating in the T- NOTE
net, the radio hops between the 5 frequencies loaded If GPS time of day is desired (normally it
with the WOD (segments 19 through 15). When using is desired), wait until a GPS time is dis-
an FMT net training mode net number, the radio hops played on the POWER UP page before
between the 16 FMT net training frequencies. selecting the MSTR AV ON soft-key.
ANTI-JAM OPERATIONAL MODE
1. Select MSTR AV ON from the POWER UP
Before entering into the Anti-Jam operational mode, page or V/UHF from the COMM TUNE page.
the radio must contain a TOD and a valid WOD. Once
2. Tune to a valid UHF frequency.
TOD and WOD have been entered, any valid active
net number may be entered using the scratch pad. If 3. On the COMM TUNE VU page, select HQ soft-
the radio does not contain either of these two vari- key to branch to the U1 (or 2) HAVE QUICK II
ables, the entry of a net number results in a constant 1/2 page.
warning tone in the headset until the radio is returned
to normal mode. 4. Set TOD:

NOTE
Have Quick II Operations
The radio automatically accepts the first
To operate in the Active mode, set the TOD, WOD, TOD message received after power-up,
and the net number in the radio. whenever it occurs. Subsequent messag-
es are ignored.
NOTE
a. GPS TOD: If GPS TOD is desired (normal-
• TOD entry is normally done on the
ly it is desired), wait until a GPS time is dis-
ground, although it can be entered or
played on the POWER UP page before
corrected while airborne.
selecting the MSTR AV ON soft-key.
• MWOD loading is normally performed b. Over the air TOD: Tune the radio to the fre-
using the mission data card, but quency over which the TOD will be trans-
MWOD may be loaded manually. mitted. Select RCV RADIO TOD on VU
HAVE QUICK 2/2 page. The radio receives
the first TOD transmitted within 60 sec-
onds.

2-23
FAM.1C-27J-1A

If a TOD is not received within the first 60 5. Repeat step 4. for segments 19 through 15.
seconds, reselect RCV RADIO TOD.
6. Enter the date code for the WOD in the scratch
c. Self TOD: Select SELF TOD on U1 (or 2) pad.
HAVE QUICK II 2/2 page.
a. Select 20-15 DAY soft-key.
5. Set WOD/MWOD:
7. If multiple WODs are to be stored, repeat steps
a. Select U1 (or 2) HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page. 4. through 6. for each WOD.
b. Enter WOD in the 20, 19, 18, 17, 16, and
15 soft-keys. NOTE
c. Enter corresponding date code on the 20 -
15 DAY soft-key. Observe WOD disap- • The radio can store up to six WODs at
pear. Enter next WOD set and date code one time. The radio retains the six
until all WODs are entered. most recent WODs entered. If a WOD
is entered having the same date code
6. Set current date to select WOD to be used: as one previously stored in the radio,
a. Select U1 (or 2) HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page. the new entry overwrites the previous
entry.
b. Enter current date (or desired date) into the
scratch pad. • When the 20-15 DAY soft-key is se-
c. Press TODAY soft-key. lected, there should be brief beeps in
the headset and the entries for chan-
nels 20 through 15 should disappear
NOTE
from the display.
• Beeps indicate the WOD has been re-
called. HAVE QUICK FMT NET TRAINING
FREAQUENCY LOADING
• A steady tone indicates either an im- 1. Press COMM TUNE hard-key.
proper TOD or WOD.
a. COMM TUNE INDEX page is displayed.
7. Set assigned net number:
2. Select VU1 or VU2 radio.
a. Select U1 (or 2) HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page.
b. Enter A, followed by the net number, into a. COMM TUNE VU1 (or 2) page is dis-
the scratch pad. played.
c. Press FREQ/NET soft-key. 3. Select HQ soft-key to branch to the U1 (or 2)
HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page.
NOTE 4. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to branch to the
A beeping tone indicates an improper net U1 (or 2) HAVE QUICK II 2/2 page.
number has been entered. 5. Enter the first FMT frequency in the following
format: 1/XXX.XXX.
HAVE QUICK MWOD MANUAL LOADING
a. Select FMT ENTER soft-key.
1. Press COMM TUNE hard-key.
6. Repeat step 5. for FMT frequencies 2 through
a. COMM TUNE INDEX page is displayed. 16.
2. Select VU1 or VU2 radio.
NOTE
a. COMM TUNE VU1 (or 2) page is dis-
played. • After the last FMT frequency is en-
tered, the soft-key FMT LOAD chang-
3. Select HQ soft-key to branch to the U1 (or 2) es to large font.
HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page.
• Before selecting FMT LOAD, the FMT
4. Enter first segment of WOD (channel 20) in frequency entries can be recalled for
scratch pad. review by entering the CH/ in the
a. Select 20 soft-key. scratch pad and selecting FMT EN-
TER.

2-24
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

7. Select FMT LOAD soft-key. SENDING AN OVER THE AIR TOD (MICKEY)
1. Verify that sending radio contains a TOD.
NOTE
2. Verify communications with receiving station/
When FMT LOAD is selected, there radio on UHF frequency.
should be brief beeps in the headset and
the last FMT channel/frequency entry 3. Select XMIT TOD soft-key.
should disappear from the display.
NOTE
HAVE QUICK ACQUISITION OF TOD
The user must press the XMIT TOD soft-
Prerequisites: key twice to execute the command in the
following cases:
1. Press COMM TUNE hard-key.
a. to execute XMIT TOD a second time
a. COMM TUNE INDEX page is displayed. sequentially after the first.
2. Select VU1 or VU2 radio. b. if the first attempt did not successfully
synchronize the radio to the network.
a. COMM TUNE VU1 (or 2) page is dis-
played. 4. Listen for transmission of audible TOD tone in
the headset.
3. Select HQ soft-key to branch to the U1 (or 2)
HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page. Creating a Self TOD.
4. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to branch to the 1. Select SELF TOD soft-key.
U1 (or 2) HAVE QUICK II 2/2 page.
Receiving a TOD. NOTE
The Self TOD is unique and cannot be
NOTE used for communication with the other ra-
dios unless it is transmitted to other radi-
The corresponding EGI should have an
os in the net. Self TOD is not selectable if
FOM of 7 or less before attempting a GPS
the radio is in the Active mode.
HAVE QUICK TOD acquisition. An alter-
nate method for determining valid GPS
time availability is to observe the POWER HAVE QUICK ACTIVE TRAINING MODE
INITIATION
UP page. GPS time is displayed whenev-
er it becomes available if time has not Prerequisites:
been entered manually. GPS received
time is represented in small font with a Z a. WOD or MWOD have already been loaded into
appended on the POWER UP page. the radio (refer to Have Quick MWOD Manual
Loading) for the desired day(s) of operation.
1. Select RCV GPS TOD soft-key. b. A TOD is already loaded into the radio (refer to
Acquiring an over the air TOD (Mickey). Have Quick Acquisition of TOD).
c. For Have Quick II FMT net utilization, the 16
1. Verify communications with cooperating sta-
FMT frequencies must already be loaded (re-
tion/radio on UHF frequency.
fer to Have Quick FMT Net Training Frequency
2. Select RCV RADIO TOD soft-key. Loading)
Procedure:
NOTE
1. Press COMM TUNE hard-key.
In Normal mode, the radio accepts the
next TOD message received provided a. COMM TUNE INDEX page is displayed.
that it arrives within 1 minute of the time 2. Select VU1 or VU2 radio.
RCV RADIO TOD is selected.
a. COMM TUNE VU1 (or 2) page is dis-
3. Listen for audible TOD tone in the headset. played.

2-25
FAM.1C-27J-1A

3. Select HQ soft-key to branch to the U1 (or 2) ZEROIZING HAVE QUICK

HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page.
1. Press INDX hard-key.
4. Enter current date (or desired date) in the
scratch pad. a. INDEX 1/2 page is displayed.

a. Assign to TODAY soft-key. 2. Select ZEROIZE soft-key.

5. Enter the assigned Training Net number in the a. ZEROIZE 1/2 page is displayed.
scratch pad. 3. Select VU1/VU2/H1/H2 soft-key (L4) as re-
a. Select FREQ/NET soft-key. quired.

NOTE NOTE

A steady tone in the headset indicates ei- Radios must be ON to select for zeroiz-
ther an improper WOD or TOD. A broken ing.
tone indicates an improper net number
has been entered. 4. Select VERIFY soft-key.

HAVE QUICK ACTIVE COMBAT MODE

INITIATION HF RADIO OPERATION

Prerequisites: To put the radio into operation:

a. WOD or MWOD have already been loaded into 1. Press COMM TUNE hard-key.
the radio (refer to Have Quick MWOD Manual a. COMM TUNE INDEX page is displayed.
Loading) for the desired day(s) of operation.
b. A TOD is already loaded into the radio (refer to NOTE
Have Quick Acquisition of TOD).
The CNRP can also be used to tune the
Procedure: communication radios.
1. Press COMM TUNE hard-key.
2. Select H1 or H2 radio.
a. COMM TUNE INDEX page is displayed.
a. COMM TUNE H1 (or 2) 1/8 page is dis-
2. Select VU1 or VU2 radio. played.

a. COMM TUNE VU1 (or 2) page is dis- 3. Select PWR soft-key to ON.
played.
3. Select HQ soft-key to branch to the U1 (or 2) NOTE
HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page. Selection of MSTR AV ON does not turn
4. Enter current date (or desired date) in the ON the HF radio system.
scratch pad.
4. Select a preset channel or manual frequency.
a. Assign to TODAY soft-key.
5. Enter the assigned Combat Net number in the NOTE
scratch pad.
If a radio is not powered, tuning the radio
a. Select FREQ/NET soft-key. applies power to the associated system.

NOTE 5. Set HF mode control soft-key (R4) to the de-

sired mode (USB, LSB, AM or CW).
A steady tone in the headset indicates ei-
ther an improper WOD or TOD. A broken
tone indicates an improper net number
has been entered.

2-26
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NOTE NOTE
When the transmitter is keyed with the ra- The SELCAL legend is reverse highlight-
dio set to a frequency near 3 MHz, an er- ed and all side tones are removed from
roneous coupler fault may occur in the the headset.
unkeyed system.

6. To transmit, set the rotary transmission selec-

tor on the ICS CONTROL panel to the HF po- NAVIGATION AIDS
sition and press the spring-loaded interphone/
radio transmit switch on the ICS CONTROL
Both the CNRP and CNI-MU (ICDU) can be used to
panel or control wheel to RADIO.
tune any navigation radio (tacan, VOR/ILS, or ADF).
7. Set the master volume control for desired au- The use of one over the other is purely operator pref-
dio level via the ICS CONTROL panel. erence. To tune a new frequency, enter the desired
frequency in the scratch pad and select one of the fol-
8. Set SQUELCH soft-key (R5) to desired lowing pages for display; CNRP NAV page, CNI-MU
squelch control (0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5). (ICDU) NAV TUNE INDEX page or the individual
9. To receive only, pull the H1 or H2 monitor NAVAIDs CNI-MU (ICDU) NAV TUNE Xn page.
switch-volume knob on the ICS CONTROL Under normal circumstances, tacan, VOR and ADF
panel; then turn the knob to the mid-range po- radios are commanded on when MSTR AV ON soft-
sition to adjust the volume. key is selected from the POWER UP page. Whenever
the NAVAID is not powered, OFF is displayed where
10. To turn the HF communication radio system the frequency is normally displayed.
off, select PWR soft-key to OFF.

CNRP (Refer to FAM.1C-27J-1)

SELCAL Operation
The CNRP provides a means of tuning all communi-
1. Press COMM TUNE hard-key. cation/navigation radios. The NAV page requires only
a. COMM TUNE INDEX page is displayed. a single switch activation of the NAV hard-key to dis-
play the status (ON or OFF) and currently tuned fre-
2. Select H1 or H2 radio. quency for all NAVAIDs. To tune a NAVAID, enter the
a. COMM TUNE H1 (or 2) 1/8 page is dis- desired frequency in the scratch pad, then assign the
played. frequency by selecting the appropriate soft-key adja-
cent to the NAVAID you wish to change.
3. Establish HF communication with the control- When a frequency is entered in the CNRP scratch
ler. pad, the CNRP delays removing an entered frequency
for approximately 3 seconds, allowing two radios to be
4. Pass 4 letter code to the controller or enter de-
tuned to the same frequency if both radio soft-keys
sired ARINC SELCAL address.
are selected within 3 seconds.
a. Press soft-key R3 to send address to radio.
5. When the tone sounds, contact the controller. CNI-MU (ICDU)

NOTE The NAV TUNE INDEX page displays the current fre-
quency for each NAVAID. This is a top-level page and
When a controller desires to establish can be displayed with a single switch actuation of the
communication, the previously provided NAV TUNE hard-key.
SELCAL address is used to activate the To tune a new frequency, enter the desired frequency
HF radio audio. This deselects SELCAL, or NAVAID identification in the CNI-MU (ICDU)
causing a single tone to sound as well as scratch pad, then assign the frequency to the radio by
HF radio side tones to be heard in the selecting the appropriate right side soft-key adjacent
headset. to the NAVAID you wish to change.
The NAVAID can also be tuned by entering the navi-
6. When communication is complete, reselect gation database NAVAID identification in the CNI-MU
SELCAL. (ICDU) scratch pad then selecting the desired
NAVAID on the CNRP NAV page.

2-27
FAM.1C-27J-1A

This NAVAID identification is the navigation database CNI-MU (ICDU)

NAVAID identification (e.g., ATL for Atlanta tacan and
VOR). NAV TUNE INDEX PAGE
The NAV TUNE VOR1, NAV TUNE VOR2, NAV 1. Press NAV TUNE hard-key.
TUNE TAC1, NAV TUNE TAC2, and NAV TUNE
ADF1 all replicate the individual control heads used to a. NAV TUNE INDEX page is displayed.
tune and change operating modes of the NAVAIDs.
2. Enter frequency/channel/ID in the scratch pad.
To tune a new frequency or label from a NAV TUNE
Xn page, enter the desired frequency or label in the 3. Assign frequency/channel to desired radio
CNI-MU (ICDU) scratch pad, then assign the fre- (right soft-key).
quency or label by selecting soft-key L1. Assigning a
frequency by any of the means above applies power NOTE
the radio if not previously powered on.
To tune to a Y tacan station on the CNI-
MU (ICDU), the channel number must be
PAIRING followed by a letter Y.
Selecting pairing on either a VOR or tacan ties the
NAV TUNE PAGE
radio pair (VOR1/TACAN1 and VOR2/TACAN2)
together. When the pilot tunes either radio, they are 1. Press NAV TUNE hard-key.
both tuned to the new station if the station has collo-
cated VOR and tacan ability. a. NAV TUNE INDEX page is displayed.
2. Select desired radio (left soft-key).

AUTOTUNE a. Desired NAV TUNE Xn page is displayed.

Selecting AUTOTUNE places the radios under the 3. Enter frequency/channel/ID in the scratch pad.
control of the CNI-SP, which selects stations for tuning
a. Press soft-key L1 to assign frequency/
to optimize the INS/RADIO navigation solution.
channel.
If pairing has been selected, both radios are placed in
AUTOTUNE. AUTOTUNE is not available, or is auto- AUTOTUNE
matically deselected, when the radio is selected as
the CDI source. 1. Press NAV TUNE hard-key.
a. NAV TUNE INDEX page is displayed.
OPERATION OF NAV RADIOS 2. Verify desired radio is not the CDI source.
3. Enter A in the scratch pad.
CNRP
a. Press right soft-key for desired radio.
1. Press NAV hard-key.
2. Enter frequency/channel in the CNRP scratch NAVAID Test
pad.
3. Assign frequency/channel to desired radio ra- NOTE
dio by pressing associated soft-key. For all NAVAID tests, valid radio (i.e.,
VOR, tacan, ADF) signals are required.
NOTE
To tune to a Y tacan station on the CNRP,
VOR
the channel number must be followed by 1. Press SAMU - PTRS hard-key.
a decimal point.
a. NAV SELECT menu is displayed.
2. Press SAMU - PNTR 1 soft-key.
a. POINTER 1 menu is displayed.

2-28
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

3. Press VORn SAMU - POINTER 1 soft-key. 6. Press left soft-key (L5) next to desired radio.
4. Assign PFD to a CMDU on operator side of the a. Desired NAV TUNE ADF1 page is dis-
aircraft. played.
5. Press CNI-MU (ICDU) - NAV TUNE hard-key. A bearing of 90 ± 3 degrees from original bearing indi-
cates a valid test.
a. NAV TUNE INDEX page is displayed.
6. Press left soft-key (L1 or L2) next to desired ra-
dio.
IFF/TCAS
a. Desired NAV TUNE VORn page is dis-
played.
The following provides the procedures to initialize and
7. Select TEST soft-key to ON. configure the IFF and TCAS via the CNI-MU (ICDU).

A bearing of 315 ± 3 degrees indicates a valid test.

IFF/TCAS OPERATION
TACAN
After power is applied to the aircraft, the CNI-MU
1. Press SAMU - PTRS hard-key.
(ICDU) automatically displays the POWER UP page
a. NAV SELECT menu is displayed. and the operator selects the MSTR AV ON soft-key.
MSTR AV ON automatically selects the IFF to ON and
2. Press SAMU - PNTR 1 soft-key. places it in the STBY mode. Use the following proce-
a. POINTER 1 menu is displayed. dures to activate the IFF/TCAS system:

3. Press TACn SAMU - POINTER 1 soft-key. 1. Press IFF hard-key.

4. Assign PFD to a CMDU on operator side of the a. IFF 1/3 page is displayed.
aircraft. 2. Verify POWER ON is selected.
5. Press CNI-MU (ICDU) - NAV TUNE hard-key. 3. Ensure EMER is selected to OFF.
a. NAV TUNE INDEX page is displayed. 4. Verify MODE S, MODE C and MODE 3 are
6. Press left soft-key (L3 or L4) next to desired ra- ON. MODE C and MODE 3 may also be veri-
dio. fied by checking that 3 and C are displayed on
the COMM or NAV pages of the CNRP.
a. Desired NAV TUNE TACn page is dis-
played. 5. Enter assigned MODE 3 code in the scratch
pad and press soft-key L6. Assigned MODE 3
7. Select TEST soft-key to ON. also be entered on the CNRP COMM or NAV
pages.
A bearing of 180 ± 3 degrees and 0.0. ± 0.5 DME indi-
cates a valid test. 6. Select desired IFF mode: STBY or ON.

ADF 7. Select desired TCAS mode: STBY, TA, or TA/

RA.
1. Press SAMU - PTRS hard-key.
a. NAV SELECT menu is displayed. NOTE
2. Press SAMU - PNTR 1 soft-key. TCAS does not enter TA or TA/RA mode
until weight off wheels.
a. POINTER 1 menu is displayed.
3. Press ADF1 SAMU - POINTER 1 soft-key. 8. Select desired altitude search:
- ABV (+ 8700 feet to - 2700 feet),
4. Assign PFD to a CMDU on operator side of the - BLW (+ 2700 feet to - 8700 feet) or
aircraft. - NORM (± 2700 feet).
5. Press CNI-MU (ICDU) - NAV TUNE hard-key. 9. Select FLT LVL: ON or OFF as desired.
a. NAV TUNE INDEX page is displayed. 10. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select IFF 2/3
page.

2-29
FAM.1C-27J-1A

11. Ensure MODE 1, 2, and 4 are ON and codes 2. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select INDEX
entered as appropriate. 2/2 page.
12. Select mode 4 code DAY A or B as appropri- 3. Press NAV INHIBIT to branch to the NAVAID
ate. INHIBIT page.
4. Press DEL key.
NOTE
a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
TCAS is only operational when the IFF is
transmitting. 5. Select NAVAID to restore (un-inhibit).

TIMERS
MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEMS The TIMERS page is used to count time up or down,
or to alert the crew at a specific time or interval. The
entered time or counter (up/down) can be removed
NAV INHIBIT using the DEL key.
Nav inhibit is used to prevent a NAVAID from being
used by the CNI-SP in AUTOTUNE mode. The Timer 1 - Up/Down Counter
NAVAID identifier can still be used to manually tune
the NAVAID or entered into the flight plan as a way- 1. Press INDX hard-key.
point. a. INDEX 1/2 page is displayed.
2. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select INDEX
Permanent 2/2 page.
Entering the NAVAID into the permanent list removes 3. Press TIMERS to branch to the TIMERS page.
it from AUTOTUNE list until either a new database is
loaded or an operator deletes it. 4. Select TIMER 1 soft-key UP or DOWN.
5. Press RESET soft-key to return the counter to
Temporary zero.

Entering the NAVAID into the temporary list removes it 6. Press START soft-key to start counter.
from AUTOTUNE list until power is removed or an 7. Press STOP soft-key to stop counter.
operator deletes it.
NOTE
Procedures
STOP and START can be used repeated-
TO INHIBIT A NAVAID ly to interrupt and restart the timer.
1. Press INDX hard-key.
At expiration, the TIMER 1 EXPIRED system advisory
a. INDEX 1/2 page is displayed. message is displayed on CNI-MU (ICDU).
2. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select INDEX
2/2 page. Timer 2 - Target Time Alert
3. Press NAV INHIBIT to branch to the NAVAID 1. Press INDX hard-key.
INHIBIT page.
a. INDEX 1/2 page is displayed.
4. Enter NAVAID ID in the scratch pad.
2. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select INDEX
5. Select either PERMANENT (L1-L5) or TEM- 2/2 page.
PORARY (R1-R5) soft-key as desired.
3. Press TIMERS to branch to the TIMERS page.
TO RESTORE A NAVAID 4. Enter time in the scratch pad.
1. Press INDX hard-key. a. Press soft-key R2 next to ALERT AT.
a. INDEX 1/2 page is displayed.

2-30
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

When entered time is reached, the TIMER 2 TARGET • It is a requirement to verify the soft
system advisory message is displayed on CNI-MU panel configuration agrees with the
(ICDU). settings on the hard panel to prevent
inadvertent system operation when
switching from soft to hard panel op-
Timer 3 - Interval Time Alert eration.
1. Press INDX hard-key.
a. INDEX 1/2 page is displayed. Exiting the Selected Soft Panel

2. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select INDEX 1. Ensure soft panel switch positions match up
2/2 page. with the switch positions of the hard panel.

3. Press TIMERS to branch to the TIMERS page.

NOTE
4. Enter time in the scratch pad.
Failure to do so results in a message in
a. Press soft-key R3 next to ALERT EVERY. the CNI-MU (ICDU) scratch pad, CHK
HARD PNL. This is to inform the crew that
At the entered time interval, the TIMER 3 INTERVAL an action is required to match the hard
system advisory message is displayed on CNI-MU panel to the present configuration of the
(ICDU). soft panel prior to exiting the selected soft
panel.
NOTE
2. Press R5 to select OFF to exit the soft panel
The timer continues to alert at the entered and apply power back to the hard panel.
interval until the reset option is selected
or the DEL key is used to clear the timer.
TACTICAL PLOT
Tactical plot is used to input the locations, ranges, and
SOFT PANELS
labels of up to 6 surface threats which can be dis-
Once a soft panel has been selected and turned on, played on the CMDU using SAMU overlays.
the hard panel is disabled. Selecting another CNI-MU
(ICDU) screen/menu has no affect on the operation of
Tactical Plot Display
the system being operated via the soft panel. Refer to
FAM.1C-27J-1 for hard panel controls and indicators 1. Press the MC INDX hard-key.
descriptions.
a. MC INDEX page is displayed.

Accessing the Soft Panel Page 2. Press TAC PLOT to branch to the TACTICAL
PLOT page.
1. Press the MC INDX hard-key.
3. Press TYPE as required.
a. MC INDEX page is displayed.
4. Enter location of threat in the scratch pad.
2. Press the soft-key corresponding to the soft
panel desired. a. Press soft-key L2 to assign LAT/LON.

a. Desired Soft Panel page is displayed. 5. Enter radius of threat in the scratch pad.

3. Press soft-key to turn on the desired soft panel. a. Press soft-key L4 to assign RADIUS.
This removes power from the hard panel. 6. Enter a label in the scratch pad (optional).
a. Press soft-key R1 to assign LABEL.
NOTE
7. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key as required to in-
• PNL soft-key R5 is always be the but-
put additional threats.
ton to turn on/off any soft panel once
the desired panel is selected.

2-31
FAM.1C-27J-1A

ZEROIZE MISSIONS HARD-KEY UPLOAD

Zeroize is used to delete selected data from non-vola- To select the mission and data:
tile memory, particularly military keys, codes, and
1. Press MSN hard-key.
databases, and to prevent the unintended release of
sensitive information. Operators can zeroize all data a. MISSIONS page is displayed.
or selectively zeroize data.
2. Press L1 to select the desired route (ROUTE 1/
ROUTE 2).
Zeroize Data
1. Press INDX hard-key. NOTE

a. INDEX 1/2 page is displayed. Uploading a mission and data from the
MSN hard-key stores the mission param-
2. Press ZEROIZE to branch to the ZEROIZE 1/2 eters, without assigning them to a route or
page. waypoint. The route identifier on the MIS-
3. Select options as desired or ALL. SIONS page always defaults to route 1.
Therefore, if route 2 is active, the crew
4. Press VERIFY soft-key to confirm initiation of should always verify the proper route
the ZEROIZE command. identifier selection when accessing mis-
sions via this page. For example, CARP 1
in route 1 is not associated with CARP 1
Inhibit Data Recording
in route 2.
1. Press INDX hard-key.
For CARP Definition:
a. INDEX 1/2 page is displayed.
3. Enter number 1-10 in the scratch pad.
2. Press ZEROIZE to branch to the ZEROIZE 1/2
page. a. Press CARP# INIT to branch to the CARP
1-10 INIT 1/5 page.
3. Press REC INHIBIT soft-key (OFF in large
font) Mission Computer inhibit mission record- For SAR Definition:
er.
3. Enter number 1-4 in the scratch pad.
To restore recording:
a. Press SAR# INIT to branch to the SAR 1-4
4. Press REC INHIBIT soft-key (ON in large font) INIT page.
Mission Computer enable mission recorder.
For LZ Definition:
3. Enter number 1-4 in the scratch pad.

MISSIONS a. Press LZ# INIT to branch to the LZ 1-4

INIT 1/2 page.
The CNI-MS allows for aircrew interface with four dif- For RNDZ Definition:
ferent mission functions: Computed Air Release Point 3. Enter number 1-5 in the scratch pad.
(CARP), Search and Rescue (SAR), Landing Zone
(LZ), and Rendezvous (RNDZ). a. Press RNDZ# to branch to the RENDE-
The parameters for each mission function are entered VOUZ 1-5 page.
on the CNI-MU (ICDU) and are displayed on the CNI-
MU (ICDU), CMDU.
The most efficient procedure for entering mission WAYPOINT ASSIGNED UPLOAD
parameters are described in this following para-
To assign the mission directly to a waypoint:
graphs.
1. Press LEGS hard-key.
a. ACT LEGS page is displayed.

2-32
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

2. Press the right soft-key, adjacent to the desired CARP

waypoint of CARP identification.
A CARP can be assigned to any existing waypoint, or
a. WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 page is displayed. defined as a custom waypoint by the specific PI (point
of impact), and entered into the flight plan. There can
3. Select MFP (soft-key R6) to branch to the MIS-
be up to 10 separate CARP in each flight plan route.
SIONS page.
The CARP mission waypoint is further defined with
the five CARP INIT pages; CARP INIT 1/5 page for
NOTE DZ (drop zone) survey data and run-in parameters,
CARP INIT 2/5 page for drop payload and chute defi-
• The active waypoint cannot be as-
nition, CARP INIT 3/5 page for wind, temperature, and
signed a mission; MFP in small font.
altimeter setting input, CARP INIT 4/5 page for eleva-
• Only the referenced route is dis- tion and altitude input, and CARP INIT 5/5 page for
played adjacent to L1, with no toggle the resulting ballistics.
option.
NOTE
For CARP Definition:
The CARP can be activate only if all infor-
4. Enter number 1-10 in the scratch pad.
mation data are defined.
a. Press CARP# INIT to branch to the CARP
1-10 INIT 1/5 page.
CARP INIT 1/5 Page
For SAR Definition:
1. Enter PI POSITION coordinates as required.
4. Enter number 1-4 in the scratch pad. Coordinates are automatically entered when
using a waypoint assigned upload procedure.
a. Press SAR# INIT to branch to the SAR 1-4
INIT page. 2. Enter TOT if desired.
For LZ Definition:
NOTE
4. Enter number 1-4 in the scratch pad.
CARP entered TOT overrides assigned
a. Press LZ# INIT to branch to the LZ 1-4 waypoint TOA.
INIT 1/2 page.
For RNDZ Definition: 3. Enter surveyed LENGTH LE-TE (Leading
Edge to Trailing Edge) and LE-PI (Leading
4. Enter number 1-5 in the scratch pad. Edge to PI position).
a. Press RNDZ# to branch to the RENDE-
VOUZ 1-5 page. NOTE
The green light time is calculated from the
NOTE difference between LENGTH LE-TE and
LE-PI.
The LBL/IDENT and POSITION defaults
to the assigned waypoint on INIT page.
4. Enter SD DIST (Slowdown in NM from the PI)
to determine where sensed altitude, winds,
and temperature are used.
5. Enter TP DIST (Turnpoint in NM from the PI) to
determine where sensitive steering (crosstrack
in yards versus NM) is displayed.

NOTE
TP DIST must be ≥ SD DIST.

2-33
FAM.1C-27J-1A

6. Enter RUN IN CRS in magnetic or true (T re- CARP INIT 3/5 Page
quired for true).
1. Enter ALT W/V (Altitude wind direction and ve-
7. Enter DZ ESC for distance desired after red locity) and ALT TEMP (in °C or °F).
light to initiate the turn to the next waypoint or
racetrack. 2. Enter SFC W/V (Surface wind direction and ve-
locity) and SFC TEMP (in °C or °F).
8. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key.
a. CARP INIT 2/5 page is displayed. NOTE
• BAL W/V (Ballistic wind and direction)
CARP INIT 2/5 Page is averaged from ALT and SFC W/V,
or can be entered to override the av-
1. Select planned LOAD: PER/CDS/HE. eraged ALT and SFC wind, as well as
the sensed W/ V.
a. For PER, select DOOR or RAMP.
b. For CDS, select FUS STA (Fuselage Sta- • For 2 stage airdrop, parachute ACTN
tion). W/V (actuation) and TEMP are en-
tered, and HI and LO BAL W/V are
2. Select STAGE 1 or STAGE 2 for CARP air-
calculated.
drop.
3. Enter the ALTIMETER SETTING for QNH or
3. Select CHUTE from the soft-key selected
QFE, in IN (in. Hg) or MB (millibars).
CHUTE LIST page.
a. Select CHUTE LIST to branch to the NOTE
CHUTE LIST page.
b. Press the desired soft-key adjacent to the A manual altimeter setting is permissible,
desired chute to copy to the scratch pad. but must be continually updated to ensure
proper CARP calculations. Failure to up-
c. Select CARP INIT (soft-key L6) to branch date the manual entry may inhibit a green
the CARP INIT 2/5 page. light at the required time, because of the
d. Enter / and number of parachutes, if more altitude differences between the pilot set-
than one parachute is used per load. ting on the Reference Set/Warning panel
e. Press CHUTE / # soft-key to upload the and the manual entry.
parachute type / number entered on the
scratch pad. 4. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key.
a. CARP INIT 4/5 page is displayed.
NOTE
A chute cannot be entered if it does not CARP INIT 4/5 Page
support the load selected.
1. Enter the DROP ALTITUDE.
4. Enter the ELEM WT in pounds, and / QTY per 2. Enter the PI ELEVATION.
airdrop run. The DROP PAYLD totals the
LOAD dropped per airdrop run. 3. Enter the RQD CLNC HT (Required Clearance
Height), which is the minimum altitude flown on
5. Enter desired airdrop CAS, (default is 130). the run-in, (default is 500 feet).
6. Enter racetrack setting as desired (ESC (no 4. Enter the determining OBSTR ELEV, which is
racetrack) L (left racetrack), or R (right race- the highest point or obstruction used for the
track)). Default racetrack speed is 140 knots. run-in.
7. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key. 5. Enter the MIN DROP HT (Minimum Drop
a. CARP INIT 3/5 page is displayed. Height) required to assure full parachute de-
ployment before the load impacts the ground.
6. Enter DZ ELEV (Drop Zone Elevation), which
is normally the highest point on the DZ.

2-34
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NOTE 9. Enter VERT DIST (Vertical Distance).

• The QNH/PA can be entered or cal-

culated by the greater sum of REQ NOTE
CLNC HT + OBSTR ELEV or MIN Data adjacent to R4 displays LO ALT RF
DROP HT + DZ ELEV. If the QNH/ PA (Low Altitude Rate of Fall).
is entered but less than the calculated
sum, DROP ALT BELOW MIN opera- 10. Enter DECEL DIST (Deceleration Distance).
tional advisory message is displayed
on CNI-MU (ICDU). 11. Press R6 to branch to CARP PROGRESS
page (if desired).
• For 2 stage airdrop, QNH/PA, DROP
ALTITUDE, ACTUATION ALTITUDE
and PI ELEVATION are the only en- CARP ACTIVATION
tries.
1. Press EXEC hard-key to activate the CARP.
7. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key.
2. Select LEGS n soft-key (L6) to branch to the
a. CARP INIT 5/5 page is displayed. ACT LEGS page.
3. Check (*TP, *CARP, *DZESC) displayed.
CARP INIT 5/5 Page
NOTE
NOTE
Every change needs to be confirmed.
If stage is selected to 2, HI ALT RF and Press the green-illuminated EXEC hard-
LO ALT RF are displayed. If stage is se- key to confirm and execute the change.
lected to 1, data in L5, R1, R4, and R5 are
blank.
CARP PROGRESS
1. Enter chute identifier and number of chutes.
The CARP PROG pages display dynamic parameters
associated with the airdrop that are used for monitor-
NOTE ing the airdrop mission during flight.
• Chute identifier can be selected from
the chute list and entered in the CARP PROG 1/2 Page
scratch pad for transfer into this field.
1. Access CARP PROG 1/2 page from the CARP
• Ballistic data is computed automati- INIT pages or MISSIONS page or LEGS page.
cally dependent upon chute selec-
tion, but may be overridden by the 2. Review the following data reported from CARP
crew. INIT pages:

Enter the following parameter as required: a. WINDS: SEN / ENT (sensed / entered).
b. BAL (ballistic winds) or HI BAL (high ballis-
2. Enter ET/FTT (Exit Time and Forward Travel
tic winds for 2 stage airdrop).
Time).
c. D ALT / CAS.
3. Enter TFC (Time of Fall Constant).
d. ACTN (actuation altitude winds for 2 stage
4. Enter RF (Rate of Fall). airdrop).
e. TOT as required.
5. Enter DECEL TIME (Deceleration Time).
f. LO BAL (low ballistic winds for 2 stage air-
6. Press L6 to branch back to originating page (if drop)
desired). g. RACETRACK: ESC / L / R (ESC (no race-
7. Enter TIMER DELAY (seconds). track) L (left racetrack), or R (right race-
track)).
8. Enter DECEL QUOT (Deceleration Quotient).
h. SFC (surface winds).

2-35
FAM.1C-27J-1A

3. Review the following CNI-MS calculated data: 2. Press SAR# INIT (L2) to branch to the SAR
INIT page.
a. CARP drift effect in long/short and left/right
distance. 3. Enter LBL/IDENT using airfield identifier, lat/
b. SEN (sensed wind). long, or waypoint as required. Information is
automatically entered when using a waypoint
c. FOM (Figure Of Merit).
assigned upload procedure.
d. AHD/BHD (ahead/behind).
e. TTG (Time To Go). 4. Press SAR PATTERN soft-key until EXP SQ
(expanding square) is selected.
f. REDLT (time until red light).
5. Enter INIT CRS (initial course) for expanding
4. Select the following as desired: square pattern.
a. SEN/ENT toggle for sensed or entered 6. Enter SPACE for the SAR expanding square
winds. pattern.
b. RACETRACK toggle for ESC / L / R
7. Enter RAD/RANGE (radius/range). For ex-
5. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key. panding square this value is radius.
a. CARP PROG 2/2 page is displayed. 8. Press TURNS until the appropriate direction is
selected.
CARP PROG 2/2 Page
SAR INIT Page (Creeping Line Search)
1. Review aircraft drift angle.
The SAR creeping line search pattern is designed to
2. Enter appropriate amount for load dropped
locate a target with an estimated flight path from a
and select LOAD DROPPED CONFIRM (R5),
previously known position. The SAR IP should be the
to adjust TOTAL DROPPED, LOAD REMAIN-
last known position. The direction or line of search
ING, and GROSS WT after each drop in multi-
should be parallel to the estimated flight path of the
ple run CARP.
target. The SAR creeping line search pattern width is
3. Enter DROP RESULT, direction/yards relative twice the estimated maximum displacement from the
the DZ PI, if an adjustment is needed for future center of the proposed flight path of the target.
racetrack airdrops.
NOTE

CARP EXIT When performing a SAR creeping line

search pattern with a leg spacing less
1. On ACT LEGS page displayed. than the turn radius of the airplane, the
2. Select EXIT HOLD soft-key (L6) to exit the CNI-MS executes extended turns and
holding pattern. overrides short-leg-logic WPT bypass.
These extended turns start at the end of
or (alternative method) each SAR leg with a 30 degree down pat-
tern turn followed by direct intercept
2. Select CARP PROG soft-key (L6) to branch to
cross-track steering to the next SAR leg
the CARP PROG 1/2 page.
end WPT. The active WPT during a SAR
3. Select CARP ABORT soft-key (R6) to abort an requiring extended turns is always a SAR
active or provisional CARP. leg end WPT and the current leg and the
short spacing-leg sequence simulta-
neously during the extended turn Short-
SAR PROCEDURES leg-logic WPT bypass is inhibited only
while performing the SAR pattern and
crews should monitor flight path predic-
SAR INIT Page (Expanding Square Search)
tions for flight plan changes (DIR TO SAR
Access SAR INIT pages via MISSION page or way- WPT uses normal turn predictions) to en-
point assigned upload from the LEGS page. sure the desired flight path is achieved.
1. Press MSN hard-key.
Access SAR INIT pages via MISSION page or way-
a. MISSIONS page is displayed. point assigned upload from the LEGS page.

2-36
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

1. Press MSN hard-key. 3. Enter LBL/IDENT using airfield identifier, lat/

long, or waypoint as required. Information is
a. MISSIONS page is displayed.
automatically entered when using a waypoint
2. Press SAR# INIT (L2) to branch to the SAR assigned upload procedure.
INIT page. 4. Press SAR PATTERN soft-key until SECTR
3. Enter LBL/IDENT using airfield identifier, lat/ (sector) is selected.
long, or waypoint as required. Information is 5. Enter INIT CRS (initial course) for sector pat-
automatically entered when using a waypoint tern.
assigned upload procedure.
6. Enter SPACE for the SAR sector pattern.
4. Press SAR PATTERN soft-key until CRP LN
(creeping line) is selected. 7. Enter RAD/RANGE. For sector this value is ra-
dius.
5. Enter INIT CRS (initial course) for creeping line
pattern.
NOTE
6. Enter SPACE/WIDTH for the SAR creeping
line pattern. The radius of the sector pattern is the to-
tal distance from the SAR IP that the crew
is required to search.
NOTE
The WIDTH of the creeping line pattern is 8. Press TURNS until the appropriate direction is
twice the distance from the SAR pattern selected.
centerline the crew desires to search.
SPACE and WIDTH are entered together
SAR INIT Page (Parallel Search)
with the two entries separated by a /. Ex-
ample: 5. 5/10. The SAR parallel search pattern is designed to assist
crews in locating a target whose location is in ques-
7. Enter RAD/RANGE (radius/range). For creep- tion, but the general flight path is known.
ing line this value is range. The SAR IP should be the last known position, best
estimated position or the beginning of the general
NOTE area that the target could be.
The range of the SAR pattern should be the farthest
The range of the creeping line pattern is point along the flight path that the target could possi-
the total distance from the SAR IP that the bly be. The direction or line of search should always
crew is required to search. be parallel to the estimated flight path of the target.
The search pattern width is twice the estimated maxi-
8. Press TURNS until the appropriate direction is mum displacement from the center of the proposed
selected. flight path that the target could be located on.

Access SAR INIT pages via MISSION page or way-

SAR INIT Page (Sector Search) point assigned upload from the LEGS page.
The SAR sector search pattern is designed to assist
1. Press MSN hard-key.
crews in locating a target whose position is relatively
well known. a. MISSIONS page is displayed.
2. Press SAR# INIT (L2) to branch to the SAR
Access SAR INIT pages via MISSION page or way-
point assigned upload from the LEGS page.
INIT page.
3. Enter LBL/IDENT using airfield identifier, lat/
1. Press MSN hard-key.
long, or waypoint as required. Information is
a. MISSIONS page is displayed. automatically entered when using a waypoint
assigned upload procedure.
2. Press SAR# INIT (L2) to branch to the SAR
INIT page. 4. Press SAR PATTERN soft-key until PARL
(parallel) is selected.

2-37
FAM.1C-27J-1A

5. Enter INIT CRS (initial course) for parallel SAR EXIT

search pattern.
1. On SAR PROG page displayed.
6. Enter SPACE/WIDTH for the SAR parallel pat-
tern. 2. Select SAR EXIT soft-key (R6) to exit the SAR
pattern.
NOTE a. A provisional is created and EXIT ARMED
appears adjacent to R6.
The WIDTH of the parallel pattern is twice
b. Green EXEC light illuminates.
the distance from the SAR pattern center-
line the crew desires to search. 3. Press EXEC hard-key to activate the SAR pat-
SPACE and WIDTH are entered together tern exit.
with the two entries separated by a /. Ex-
ample: 2/10. NOTE
7. Enter RAD/RANGE. For the parallel pattern Selection of the EXEC hard-key results in
this value is range. a branch to the LEGS 2/x page.

NOTE
LZ OPERATIONS
The range of the SAR pattern is the total
The LZ data entered in the CNI-MU (ICDU) defines
distance along the estimate flight path
the approach to landing at an airfield without an instru-
from the SAR IP that the crew is required
ment approach. This information is inserted in the
to search.
flight plan so it may be used for flight director/autopilot
guidance, and is displayed on the CMDU NAV-radar
8. Press TURNS until the appropriate direction is
display. Three types of approaches may be defined by
selected.
the LZ data: precision, non-precision and tactical.

SAR ACTIVATION Define LZ as Airfield Characteristic in NAV

Database
1. Press EXEC hard-key to activate the SAR.
This procedure allows to use the airfield characteristic
2. Select LEGS 1 soft-key (L6) to branch to the
(RWY threshold position, course and touchdown zone
ACT LEGS page.
elevation for the LZ) contained in the navigation data-
3. Check (*SARnn) displayed. base.

NOTE NOTE

Every change needs to be confirmed. • An active FPL in ROUTE 1 or 2 is re-

Press the green-illuminated EXEC hard- quired.
key to confirm and execute the change.
• If DEST airfield is different from the
actual one insert new airfield identifier
SAR PROGRESS as DEST (destination) on ROUTE 1/n
page. Modify the RTE WPT's if re-
The SAR PROG page is accessed from the SAR INIT quired on ROUTE n/n pages and
page or MISSIONS page or LEGS page, and displays press EXEC hard-key to activate the
the status of a SAR in progress. new DEST airfield.
No data entry can be made on this page. See Section
3 for page layout and details. 1. On ROUTE 1/n page, select DEP/ARR to dis-
play the DEP/ARR INDEX page.
2. Select DESTINATION ARR and choose the
active arrival runway.

2-38
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

3. Press INDX hard-key. 7. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select LZ INIT

2/2 page.
a. INDEX 1/2 page is displayed.
8. Enter GLIDE SLOPE angle (default 3 de-
4. Select ROUTE 1 or 2 to branch to the ROUTE grees).
1 or 2 Plan page and select DEP/ARR.
9. Verify TCH (Threshold Cross Height). Default
a. DEP/ARR INDEX page is displayed. 50 feet. May be overwritten if desired and a dif-
5. Select DESTINATION LZ to select the LZ INIT ferent RPI will be calculated.
page.
10. Enter RPI (Runway Point of Intercept) if re-
a. LZ INIT 1/2 page is displayed. quired. Defaults to value calculated based on
GLIDE SLOPE and TCH.

Precision Approach
NOTE
1. On LZ INIT 1/2 page displayed.
Point TCH and RPI are mutually related.
2. Enter LBL/IDENT using airfield identifier, lat/ Changing GLIDE SLOPE, will be
long, or waypoint as required. changed RPI or TCH depending on which
of the two value was forced before by pilot
NOTE in way to maintain the forced value.
If no entry was made before, RPI will be
Information is automatically entered changed.
when using:
a. Waypoint assigned upload procedure 11. Enter THR ELEV (Threshold Elevation).
(WPT IDENT 3 - 5 digit).
12. Enter GSI ALT (Glide Slope Intercept Altitude).
b. Define LZ as airfield characteristic in
NAV database 13. Verify GSI (Glide Slope Intercept) distance.
(Runway IDENT RWnn). Distance is calculated based on entered val-
ues for GLIDE SLOPE, THR ELEV, and GSI
3. Press TYPE soft-key until P (for Precision Ap- ALT.
proach) is displayed in large font/inverse vid-
eo. 14. Enter SD (Slow Down) distance.

4. Verify or enter TDZE (Touchdown Zone Eleva-

NOTE
tion) as required. This information is displayed
automatically when an airfield with a known el- SD distance must be ≥ GSI distance.
evation is entered.
5. Enter either DALT (Decision Altitude in feet, 15. Enter TP (Turn Point) distance.
MSL) or HAT (Height Above Touchdown in
feet, AGL). NOTE
• TP distance must be ≥ SD distance.
NOTE
• When the LZ MFP is complete, pseu-
The MSL altitude is calculated based on do waypoints (*TP, *SD, *FAF, and
the entered AGL altitude and the TDZE, *MAP) are displayed on the LEGS
or the AGL altitude is calculated based on page, and on the CMDU NAV-radar
the entered MSL altitude and the TDZE, flight plan overlay.
depending on the order of entry.
16. Enter CAS (defaults to 130 knots).
6. Enter CRS (course) for the approach, if re-
quired. This course is the extended runway
Non-Precision Approach
heading. This data is automatically entered
when using define LZ as airfield characteristic 1. On LZ INIT 1/2 page displayed.
in navigation database.
2. Enter LBL/IDENT using airfield identifier, lat/
long, or waypoint as required.

2-39
FAM.1C-27J-1A

NOTE NOTE
Information is automatically entered • Entry is not allowed.
when using:
• While not a glideslope, it does repre-
a. waypoint assigned upload procedure
sent the minimum descent angle that
(WPT IDENT 3 - 5 digit).
the aircraft must attain in order to
b. Define LZ as airfield characteristic in reach the MDA before crossing the
NAV database MAP.
(Runway IDENT RWnn).
12. Enter SD (Slow Down) distance.
3. Press TYPE soft-key until NP (for Non-Preci-
sion Approach) is displayed in large font/in-
NOTE
verse video.
4. Verify or enter TDZE (Touchdown Zone Eleva- SD distance must be ≥ FAF distance.
tion) as required. This information is displayed
automatically when an airfield with a known el- 13. Enter TP (Turn Point) distance.
evation is entered.
NOTE
5. Enter either MDA (Minimum Descent Altitude
in feet, MSL) or HAT (Height Above Touch- • TP distance must be ≥ SD distance.
down in feet, AGL).
• When the LZ MFP is complete, pseu-
do waypoints (*TP, *SD, *FAF, and
NOTE *MAP) are displayed on the LEGS
The MSL altitude is calculated based on page, and on the CMDU NAV-radar
the entered AGL altitude and the TDZE, flight plan overlay.
or the AGL altitude is calculated based on
14. Enter CAS (defaults to 130 knots).
the entered MSL altitude and the TDZE,
depending on the order of entry.
Tactical Approach
6. Enter MAP (Missed Approach Point) distance.
1. On LZ INIT 1/2 page displayed.

NOTE 2. Enter LBL/IDENT using airfield identifier, lat/

long, or waypoint as required.
MAP distance must be FAF (Final Ap-
proach Fix) distance, if entered and valid.
NOTE
7. Enter CRS (course) for the approach, if re- Information is automatically entered
quired. This course is the extended runway when using:
heading. This data is automatically entered a. waypoint assigned upload procedure
when using define LZ as airfield characteristic (WPT IDENT 3 - 5 digit).
in navigation database.
b. Define LZ as airfield characteristic in
8. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select LZ INIT NAV database
2/2 page. (Runway IDENT RWnn).
9. Enter FAF (Final Approach Fix) distance. 3. Press TYPE soft-key until TAC (for Tactical
Approach) is displayed in large font/inverse
10. Enter FAF ALT (Final Approach Fix Altitude). video.
11. Verify DESCENT ANGLE, displayed in small 4. Verify or enter TDZE (Touchdown Zone Eleva-
font once MDA, MAP distance, FAF distance, tion) as required. This information is displayed
and FAF Altitude are entered and valid. automatically when an airfield with a known el-
evation is entered.
5. Enter either MDA (Minimum Descent Altitude
in feet, MSL) or HAT (Height Above Touch-
down in feet, AGL).

2-40
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NOTE 16. Enter SD (Slow Down) distance.

The MSL altitude is calculated based on

the entered AGL altitude and the TDZE, NOTE
or the AGL altitude is calculated based on SD distance must be ≥ FAF distance.
the entered MSL altitude and the TDZE,
depending on the order of entry. 17. Enter TP (Turn Point) distance.

6. Enter MAP (Missed Approach Point) distance.

NOTE

NOTE • TP distance must be ≥ SD distance.

MAP distance must be < FAF (Final Ap- • When the LZ MFP is complete, pseu-
proach Fix) distance, if entered and valid. do waypoints (*TP, *SD, *FAF, and
*MAP) are displayed on the LEGS
7. Enter CRS (course) for the approach, if re- page, and on the CMDU NAV-radar
quired. This course is the extended runway flight plan overlay.
heading. This data is automatically entered
18. Enter CAS (defaults to 130 knots).
when using define LZ as airfield characteristic
in navigation database.
8. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to select LZ INIT LZ ACTIVATION
2/2 page.
1. Press EXEC hard-key to activate the LZ.
9. Enter DESCENT ANGLE, if desired. Defaults
2. Select LEGS 1 soft-key (L6) to branch to the
to 3 degrees.
ACT LEGS page.
10. Verify TCH (Threshold Cross Height). Default
3. Check (*TP, *SD, *LZnn, *GSI, *FAF, *MAP)
50 feet. May be overwritten if desired and a dif-
displayed.
ferent RPI will be calculated.
11. Enter RPI (Runway Point of Intercept) if re- NOTE
quired. Defaults to value calculated based on
DESCENT ANGLE and TCH. Every change needs to be confirmed.
Press the green-illuminated EXEC hard-
12. Verify RPI (Runway Point of Intercept). RPI is key to confirm and execute the change.
calculated using DESCENT ANGLE and TCH.
Change if required a different TCH will be cal-
culated. RENDEZVOUS
The rendezvous function computes an intercept posi-
NOTE
tion, which may be sequenced into the active route,
Point TCH and RPI are mutually related. that will facilitate a rendezvous with a moving target.
Changing DESCENT ANGLE, will be Rendezvous intercept positions may be generated for
changed RPI or TCH depending on which up to five separate rendezvous waypoints for each of
of the two value was forced before by pilot route 1 and route 2 (10 total). Rendezvous waypoint
in way to maintain the forced value. If no definitions are specific to each route.
entry was made before, RPI will be
changed.
RENDEZVOUS Page
13. Enter THR ELEV (Threshold Elevation). 1. Press MSN hard-key.
14. Enter FAF ALT (Final Approach Fix Altitude). a. MISSIONS page is displayed.
15. Verify FAF distance. Distance is calculated 2. Press RNDZ# (L5) to branch to the RENDEZ-
based on entered values for DESCENT AN- VOUS page.
GLE, THR ELEV, FAF ALT, and TCH.

2-41
FAM.1C-27J-1A

NOTE RENDEZVOUS ACTIVATION

Up to five rendezvous profiles can be 1. Press EXEC hard-key to activate the REN-
loaded per route. If more than one are DEZVOUS.
loaded, the pilot must specify which ren-
2. Select LEGS 1 soft-key (L6) to branch to the
dezvous to access by typing 1 through 5
ACT LEGS page.
in the scratch pad prior to selecting RNDZ
on the MISSIONS page. 3. Check (*RZ0n) displayed.

3. Enter the initial position of the target in the NOTE

scratch pad.
Every change needs to be confirmed.
a. Press INIT POS soft-key. Press the green-illuminated EXEC hard-
4. Enter the time the target departs the initial po- key to confirm and execute the change.
sition in the scratch pad.
a. Press INIT TIME soft-key.
5. Enter the track of the target from the initial po-
sition in the scratch pad.
a. Press INIT TRK soft-key.
6. Enter the groundspeed of the target in the
scratch pad.
a. Press INIT GS soft-key.
7. Enter the desired in-trail distance for ownship
relative to the target in the scratch pad.
a. Press IN-TRAIL soft-key. This defines the
distance of ownship behind the RNDZ po-
sition.

NOTE
The IN-TRAIL distance defaults to dash-
es (assumes 0.0), but can be changed to
any numeric from 0.0 to 20.

8. Relative to the intercept point, the course/dis-

tance-to-go (CRS/DTG), estimated time en-
route (ETE), computed bearing and range
(TGT BRG/RNG), and rendezvous position
(POS) are computed and displayed on the
RENDEZVOUS page.

NOTE
Computed bearing and range is dynamic
throughout the rendezvous. All computed
data assumes that target parameters re-
main constant. If target parameters
change, the CNI-MU (ICDU) cannot up-
date the computed data.

2-42
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Section 3

CNI-MS DISPLAY AND DATA ENTRY

Contents page one Communication / Navigation / Radio Panel

(CNRP), and two Single Avionics Management Units
COMMUNICATION / NAVIGATION / (SAMU) that provides primary control of the following
IDENTIFICATION MANAGEMENT systems:
SYSTEM DISPLAYS ....................................... 3-1
• Communication tuning
COMMUNICATION / NAVIGATION /
IDENTIFICATION MANAGEMENT UNIT • Navigation tuning
(INTEGRATED CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT) .... 3-2
• Legs and routes (flight planning) operations
DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL AREAS ..................... 3-2
MODE SELECT HARD-KEYS ......................... 3-5 • Navigation systems and operation
PAGE FORMATS AND DATA LABELS ........... 3-6 • Mission control operations
CNI-MU (ICDU) ALERT MESSAGES .................. 3-7 • Direct/intercept
CNI-MS DATA ENTRY CONVENTIONS ........... 3-14 • Take-off and Landing Data (TOLD) operations
PART 3A - COMM TUNE .................................. 3A-1 • Index operations.
PART 3B - NAV TUNE ...................................... 3B-1
The CNI-MS, through the CNI-MUs (ICDU), provide
PART 3C - IFF ................................................... 3C-1 user interface and control of the following mission
computer (MC) functions:
PART 3D - NAV CONTROL .............................. 3D-1
• Mission computer index operations
PART 3E - MISSION CONTROL PAGE ............ 3E-1
PART 3F - DIRECT-TO/INTERCEPT ................ 3F-1 • Identification friend or foe

PART 3G - PERFORMANCE DATA ................. 3G-1 The CNI-MS also has the capability to replicate the
control functions of systems that have retained their
PART 3H - INDEX ............................................. 3H-1 individual control panels. The operator may control
PART 3J - MC INDEX ........................................ 3J-1 the function of the applicable system via a CNI-MU
(ICDU) panel of the following systems:
PART 3K - LEGS .............................................. 3K-1
• Copilot lighting
PART 3L - MARK ............................................... 3L-1
• Pilot lighting
• Radar control

COMMUNICATION/NAVIGATION/ The CNRP gives the pilots an easy accessible head-

up means of tuning the communication and navigation
IDENTIFICATION MANAGEMENT radios. Individual communication and navigation radio
SYSTEM DISPLAYS power is controlled from the CNI-MU (ICDU). Fre-
quencies can be set, modified, and toggled from the
The Communication / Navigation / Identification Man- CNRP. The SAMU allows the operator to select a wide
agement System (CNI-MS) consists of two Communi- variety of information to be displayed on the CMDU.
cation / Navigation / Identification - Management Units
(Integrated Control Display Units) CNI-MUs (ICDU),

3-1
FAM.1C-27J-1A

The SAMU also allows the operator to select the SCRATCH PAD
source of the desired information to be displayed and
the specific CMDU to be used. The scratch pad is the bottom line of the display. This
This section describes CNI-MS displays (data pages line displays alphanumeric data or messages. Data is
and alerts) and functional data entry (see data entry entered into the scratch pad with the alphanumeric
format table). The various parts within this section keys or an soft-key, or automatically by the CNI-MU
present data pages accessible with each CNI-MU (ICDU). The pilot cannot normally enter data into the
(ICDU) hard-key. Used in conjunction with Section 1 scratch pad when a CNI-MU (ICDU) message is dis-
and Section 2 in this manual and the basic Flight Man- played there.
ual FAM.1C-27J-1, this section provides the informa- Scratch pad entries are independent of page selection
tion required to operate the systems. and remain displayed until cleared, even when page
changes occur. Scratch pad data entries and dele-
tions affect only the associated CNI-MU (ICDU). How-
ever, messages can be displayed and erased on both
CNI-MUs (ICDU) simultaneously.
COMMUNICATION/NAVIGATION/
IDENTIFICATION MANAGEMENT
Soft-keys
UNIT (INTEGRATED CONTROL
Soft-Keys are referenced in the text to either the left or
DISPLAYS UNIT) right side of the display area (Ln or Rn, where n is the
key number), and numbered from top to bottom (L1
The CNI-MU (ICDU), shown in Figure 3-1, has a full through L6 or R1 through R6), even though they are
alphanumeric keyboard along with mode, function, not labeled as such.
and data entry keys. The keyboard also contains advi-
sory annunciators, one integral automatic display light DIRECT ACCESS PROMPTS/MODE SELECTS
sensor, and a rocker switch to manually adjust display
The soft-keys are the most versatile keys on the CNI-
brightness.
MU (ICDU). When coupled with a display unit they are
the most frequently used keys on a CNI-MU (ICDU).
In the case of an index display, the soft-keys can be
DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL AREAS
used to select various functions within the modes. In
The display functional areas of the CNI-MU (ICDU) displays other than the index pages, the soft-keys
are the liquid crystal display (LCD) screen, soft-keys, located in the bottom left and right corners, are prima-
brightness control, and annunciators. Refer to the rily used for direct access to other modes in the CNI-
CNI-MU (ICDU) shown in Figure 3-1, for the following MS. This reduces the number of button pushes signif-
explanations. icantly which minimizes crew workload. The crew may
also access these modes via the main navigation and
performance menus if so desired. The modes that are
Display most likely to be accessed from the present page are
The LCD display screen has 14 lines with a total of 24 displayed as prompts.
characters per line. The display is divided into differ- Pressing an soft-key next to a page prompt (indicated
ent areas listed below. by a caret (< >) next to the page name) displays that
page (or the first page of that series).
TITLE FIELD
SELECT TO SCRATCH PAD
The title field is the top line of the display area. It iden-
tifies the subject or title of the data on the displayed Data can be copied to the scratch pad through the use
page. It also identifies page number and the number of a soft-key. Pressing a soft-key when there is no
of pages in a series. data in the scratch pad copies the data from the
selected field to the scratch pad in some applications.
LEFT, CENTER AND RIGHT FIELDS
SELECT TO DISPLAY PROMPTS
These fields are made up of six pairs of lines extend-
ing from the left side of the display to the right side. A Once data has been entered into the scratch pad,
line pair has a header line and a data line. either via soft-key selection or manual keyboard entry,
The pilot controls the left and right data lines with the it may be selected to any of the allowable line fields on
adjacent soft-keys. a given page.

3-2
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

This can be accomplished simply by pressing the soft- • Waypoint data page 1 and 2,
key adjacent to the line in which you wish the scratch
pad data to be inserted. • Any departure runways, SIDS, or transition
pages,
• Any SID or STAR review page,
BRT Rocker Switch
• Any arrival runway page,
The BRT rocker switch controls the brightness of the
display. The brightness of the backlit keys is con- • Any arrival transition page,
trolled by the PILOT LIGHTING and COPILOT
LIGHTING control panels. • Hold at page,
• Progress page 2.
Annunciators
The annunciators alert the crew to CNI-MU (ICDU) sta- Alphanumeric Keyboard
tus. The alphanumeric keyboard is used to enter letters
and numbers into the scratch pad: 39 keys provide A
DSPY
through Z, 0 through 9, decimal point, plus/minus, and
The DSPY annunciator is illuminated when control in- a slash. Letters and numbers can be entered together
formation is being displayed that is NOT controlling the as required.
aircraft. Listed below are the times when this annunci-
ator is turned on. The conditions apply both in the air
SLASH Key
and on the ground.
The slash “/” key is used to separate data that is
• When displaying active flight plan pages other
entered into the data lines in pairs (for example, air-
than page two,
speed and Mach (280/.720), wind direction and veloc-
• When displaying a stored flight plan page, ity (240/75), bearing and distance (180/20), or
airspeed and altitude (250/10000)). The trailing entry
• When displaying any of the review pages for of an entry pair must be preceded by the slash if it is
SIDs and STARs, entered by itself.
• When defining the intercept waypoint on the
active leg. Space Key
MSG The space key inserts a space between the following:
The MSG annunciator is illuminated, and the CNI MSG – Words or characters that are entered into the
advisory ACAWS message is displayed, anytime a scratch pad,
message is in the scratch pad. Pressing the CLR key
turns the MSG annunciator off and clears the message – When entering messages directly into the lines
from the scratch pad. when using the CNI-MU (ICDU) for other sub-
systems operations,
FAIL
– When data transfer from the scratch pad to the
The FAIL annunciator illuminates whenever the CNI- MFD requires spaces.
MU (ICDU) is not receiving data from the CNI-SP or
MC. A CNI-MU (ICDU) internal failure can also illumi-
nate this annunciator. PLUS/MINUS Key
The plus/minus (+/–) key is used to give a plus or
EXEC minus value to a number that is entered in the scratch
The EXEC corresponding green light is illuminated pad. The first press of the +/– key inserts a minus sign
when a provisional flight plan exists and any of the fol- into the scratch pad. The second press inserts a plus
lowing CNI-MU (ICDU) pages are displayed for the sign. Subsequently pressing the +/– key toggles the
provisional route: sign between plus and minus.

• Route pages 1 and 2,

• Any legs page,

3-3
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Figure 3-1 CNI-MU (ICDU)

3-4
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

CLR (Clear) Key

The CLR key is used to clear messages and data
from the scratch pad or from a data field. If an alpha- PREV PAGE Hard-key
numeric entry resides in the scratch pad, one charac-
Pressing the PREV PAGE hard-key causes the previ-
ter is cleared from the scratch pad (from right to left)
ous page in the sequence to be displayed. If the first
each time the CLR key is pressed. Pressing and hold-
page in a multiple page sequence is displayed and the
ing the CLR key for more than 1 second, characters is
PREV PAGE hard-key is pressed, the last page is dis-
cleared from right to left for as long as the key is
played.
pressed, at about 10 characters per second.
Pressing the CLR key also clears messages dis-
played on the scratch pad (one message for each key NEXT PAGE Hard-key
press). When the last message is cleared, the MSG
annunciator goes out. Pressing the NEXT PAGE hard-key causes the next
page in the sequence to be displayed. If the last page
in a multiple page sequence is displayed and the
DEL (Delete) Key NEXT PAGE hard-key is pressed, the first page is dis-
played.
When there is no message in the scratch pad and the
DEL key is pressed, *DELETE* appears right justified
in the scratch pad. *DELETE* can then be used to COMM TUNE Hard-key
delete certain items on some of the CNI-MU (ICDU)
pages by using the soft-keys. Items deleted by this Pressing the COMM TUNE hard-key displays the
method are replaced with the default value or with COMM TUNE INDEX page. The COMM TUNE pages
entry prompts. When the DEL key is pressed, any allow access and control of the communication radios.
items in the scratch pad are pushed down in a stack
for later use. NAV TUNE Hard-key
Once the *DELETE* has been used with a soft-key,
the scratch pad is empty or the first item from the Pressing the NAV TUNE hard-key displays the NAV
stack is displayed. If an event causing a message TUNE INDEX page. The NAV TUNE pages allow ac-
occurs while *DELETE* is displayed, the *DELETE* is cess and control of the navigation radios.
stacked and the message is displayed.
The DEL key is inoperative when a message or data
is displayed in the scratch pad. IFF Hard-key
Pressing the IFF hard-key displays the IFF page. The
IFF page provides access to the IFF control functions.
MODE SELECT HARD-KEYS
The mode hard-keys enable the crew to select the NAV CTRL Hard-key
various pages as listed below. When a mode is
selected, the CNI-MU (ICDU) displays that mode Pressing the NAV CTRL hard-key displays the INAV
index or primary display page. Selection of a mode CTRL SOLN 1/3 page. The NAV CTRL pages provide
hard-key is independent of scratch pad data, so that access to the status and control of the integrated nav-
the scratch pad may contain data when a mode hard- igation (INAV) equipment.
key is pressed. The CNI-MU (ICDU) has 15 mode
hard-keys located directly under the display.
MSN Hard-Key
Pressing the MSN hard-key displays the MISSIONS
EXEC Hard-key
page that allows the crew to select specialized holding
EXEC hard-key illuminates to allow the crew to con- functions.
firm any changes to the lateral or vertical profile of the
mission plan. Pressing the EXEC hard-key when the
DIR/INTC Hard-Key
green light illuminated results in execution of the mod-
ification. Pressing the DIR/INTC hard-key displays the DIR/
INTC pages. The DIR/INTC pages provide a means of
flying direct to, or intercepting a course to any way-
point.

3-5
FAM.1C-27J-1A

TOLD Hard-Key Small Font

Pressing the TOLD hard-key displays the TOLD INIT Default or CNI-MU (ICDU)-calculated values are dis-
1/3 page. The TOLD pages allow access to the take- played in small font. When this data is next to an soft-
off and landing data initialization and data page. key, it can be changed by the pilot. When the data has
been changed by the pilot, it is displayed in large font.
INDX Hard-Key
Large Font
Pressing the INDX hard-key displays the INDEX 1/2
page. The INDEX pages provide access to the various Pilot entries are displayed in large font.
CNI-MS functional areas.
Line Title
MC INDX Hard-Key
The line title (or header line) is displayed in small font,
Pressing the MC INDX hard-key displays the MC IN- it identifies the data displayed on line(s) below it.
DEX page. Certain mission computer functions are ac-
cessed using the MC INDEX pages.
Scratch Pad

LEGS Hard-Key The bottom line of the display is the scratch pad.This
line displays CNI-MU (ICDU) generated messages,
Pressing the LEGS hard-key displays the LEGS page keyboard entries, and data that is being moved from
which contains information for each waypoint in the one line to another. When a scratch pad CNI-MU
mission plan. (ICDU) message is displayed, the MSG annunciator
at the top right side of the CNI-MU (ICDU) lights.
MARK Hard-Key
Pressing the MARK hard-key displays the MARK pag-
Data Line
es and creates the mark point. The mark function The data line contains box prompts, dashes, brackets,
records information about the aircraft present ship's computer generated data (small font), or crew entered
solution position and time. data (large font).

PAGE FORMATS AND DATA LABELS Page Number

Two sizes of type (fonts) are used on the display If multiple pages of associated data are available,
pages. The display page format and data labels are page numbers are displayed in the upper right corner
described in the following paragraphs. of the display. The first digit indicates the page num-
ber and the second digit indicates total number of
related pages. For example, “1/2” indicates there are
Page Title two pages of related data and page 1 is displayed.
The page title identifies the selected page and the
type of data displayed on that page. Box Prompts ( )
Boxes mean that data entry is required. Data is
Dash Prompts ( – – – – – ) entered in the scratch pad and then transferred to this
Dashes mean that data can be entered to define field by pushing the associated soft-key. After the data
parameters. This data entry is optional. Data is has been entered, it is displayed in large font.
entered in the scratch pad and then transferred to this
field by pushing the associated soft-key.
After the data has been entered, it is displayed in
large font.

3-6
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

CNI-MU (ICDU) ALERT MESSAGES Caution messages indicate the existence of a hazard-
ous or impeding hazardous condition requiring atten-
tion, but not necessarily immediate action. System
The CNI-MS and mission computer generate alert Advisory messages indicate aircraft configuration,
messages which are displayed on the CNI-MU (ICDU)
condition of performance, operation of essential
scratch pad. These messages are based on the status
equipment, or attract attention for routine purposes.
monitoring of the systems on the Left and Right
Operational Advisories indicate improper operation of
Comm/Nav Buses, and also as a result of incorrect
the CNI-MS.
CNI-MU (ICDU) keyboard entries.
There are no format differences between scratch pad
When an alert message displays on the CNI-MU
Cautions and Advisories. Cautions have the highest
(ICDU) scratch pad, the CNI MSG Advisory ACAWS
priority and Operational Advisories have the lowest
message is activated. Scratch pad messages are
priority.
cleared by pressing the CLR key on the CNI-MU
These Cautions and Advisories do not relate directly
(ICDU), or when the CNI-SP determines the condition
to ACAWS Cautions and Advisories, although there
no longer exists. When more than one scratch pad
are instances where both a CNI-MU (ICDU) scratch
message is active, the CLR key is used to suppress
pad message and an ACAWS message is generated.
the currently displayed item and allow the next active
message to be displayed.
CNI-MS ACAWS messages are described in Section
Successive presses of the CLR key allow all active
III in the basic Flight Manual FAM.1C-27J-1.
messages to be displayed in priority order.
The CNI-MU (ICDU) alert messages are grouped in
The following tables 1 through 4 provide a summary of
three categories; Cautions, System Advisories, and
the CNI-MU (ICDU) scratch pad messages generated
Operational Advisories.
by the CNI-SP and MC.

Table 1 CNI-MU (ICDU) Scratch Pad CAUTION Messages

Scratch Pad Messages Condition

EGI 1 FAIL * * EGI 1 failure detected.

EGI 2 FAIL * * EGI 2 failure detected.

GPS 1 FAIL GPS 1 failure detected.

GPS 2 FAIL GPS 2 failure detected.

HF 1 FAIL * HF 1 failure detected.

HF 2 FAIL * HF 2 failure detected.

INDEPENDENT OPERATION CNI-MS is operating in Independent Mode (both SPs operating, but
not synchronized and Nav solutions differ by more than 10 miles).

INS 1 FAIL INS 1 failure detected.

INS 2 FAIL INS 2 failure detected.

LF-ADF FAIL * LF-ADF failure detected.

NO NAV 1 Attempting to activate a route with no navigation sensor selected on

the INAV 1 CTRL SENSORS 2/3 page.
Upon deselection of all navigation sensors.

NO NAV 2 Attempting to activate a route with no navigation sensor selected on

the INAV 2 CTRL SENSORS 2/3 page.
Upon deselection of all navigation sensors.

3-7
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 1 CNI-MU (ICDU) Scratch Pad CAUTION Messages (Continued)

Scratch Pad Messages Condition

RESYNC OFFSIDE Indicates the SP is performing a resync crossload of flight plan data
after power up. CNI-MU (ICDU) key depressions are ignored while
RESYNC OFFSIDE is displayed.

SINGLE OPERATION CNI-MS is operating in Single Mode (one SP providing all function-
ally, other SP failed).

SP 1 FAIL SP 1 detects internal fault or power is lost

SP 1 MC 1 FAIL MC 1 failure detected by SP 1.

SP 1 MC 2 FAIL MC 2 failure detected by SP 1.

SP 2 FAIL SP 2 detects internal fault or power is lost

SP 2 MC 1 FAIL MC 1 failure detected by SP 2.

SP 2 MC 2 FAIL MC 2 failure detected by SP 2.

TACAN 1 FAIL * TACAN 1 failure detected.

TACAN 2 FAIL * TACAN 2 failure detected.

VOR 1 FAIL * VOR 1 failure detected.

VOR 2 FAIL * VOR 2 failure detected.

V/UHF 1 FAIL * V/UHF 1 failure detected.

V/UHF 2 FAIL * V/UHF 2 failure detected.

Note: * Indicates a related ACAWS Advisory is generated.

* * Indicates a related ACAWS Caution is generated.

Table 2 CNI-MU (ICDU) Scratch Pad SYSTEM ADVISORY Messages

Scratch Pad Messages Condition

CHECK ALT CONSTRAINT Conflicting altitude constraints have been detected in the active
flight plan.

CHECK SPEED CONSTRAINT An active flight plan waypoint speed constraint cannot be met.

COPILOT CNI-ICDU FAIL * Copilot CNI-MU (ICDU) failure detected.

END OF FLIGHT PLAN Indicates sequence of the last leg waypoint in the active flight plan.
The active route is now invalid. The other route must be activated to
recover.

ENTER DATE System date has not been entered.

FLT PATH TOO STEEP? A descent flight path angle has been selected that exceeds the limit.

3-8
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 2 CNI-MU (ICDU) Scratch Pad SYSTEM ADVISORY Messages (Continued)

Scratch Pad Messages Condition

FUEL QTY ERROR Estimated fuel for active flight plan and total fuel quantity differ by
more than approximately 2500 pounds for more than 10 minutes.

GREEN LIGHT Aircraft at CARP.

HIGH HOLDING GND SPD The holding pattern turn radius exceeds that maximum allowed
(function of altitude).

INDICATE FLIGHT COMPLETE Aircraft is on the ground within 10 NM of the primary destination
waypoint LAT/LON.

INVALID ADF 1 CONTROL A mode or control command from the SP to the LF-ADF has not
been carried out by the LF-ADF.

INVALID ADF 1 TUNE A tuning command from the SP to the LF-ADF has not been carried
out by the LF-ADF.

INVALID HF 1(2) CONTROL A mode or control command from the SP to HF 1 or HF 2 has not
been carried out by the HF comm.

INVALID HF 1(2) TUNE A tuning command from the SP to HF 1 or HF 2 has not been car-
ried out by the HF comm.

INVALID TAC 1(2) CONTROL A mode or control command from the SP to TACAN 1 or TACAN 2
has not been carried out by the TACAN.

INVALID TAC 1(2) TUNE A tuning command from the SP to TACAN 1 or TACAN 2 has not
been carried out by the TACAN.

INVALID V/UHF 1(2) WOD The V/UHF has not carried out the Word of the Day command.

INVALID VOR 1(2) CONTROL A mode or control command from the SP to VOR 1 or VOR 2 has
not been carried out by the VOR.

INVALID VOR 1(2) TUNE A tuning command from the SP to VOR 1 or VOR 2 has not been
carried out by the VOR.

INVALID VU 1(2) CONTROL A mode or control command from the SP to V/UHF 1 or V/UHF 2
has not been carried out by the UHF comm.

INVALID VU 1(2) TUNE A tuning command from the SP to V/UHF 1 or V/UHF 2 has not
been carried out by the UHF comm.

INVALID VU 1(2) HAVEQUICK The V/UHF 1 or V/UHF 2 has not carried out an SP Have Quick tun-
ing command.

LAST LEG Indicates the active GO TO WPT on the LEGS page. It is the LAST
WPT in the active route.

LOW CALCULATED FUEL Fuel on board is not sufficient to complete route and taxi without
using up reserve fuel.

MAG VAR MISCOMPARE Indicates a difference exists in the calculated MAG VAR between
the Master and the Slave SP.

3-9
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 2 CNI-MU (ICDU) Scratch Pad SYSTEM ADVISORY Messages (Continued)

Scratch Pad Messages Condition

MISSION DB MISCOMPARE The mission data bases in the CNI-SPs are not the same (Comm
presets, custom waypoints, stored routes, inhibited waypoints, para-
chute data).

NAV DB MISCOMPARE The data or effectivity cycle for the worldwide navigation databases
in the CNI-SPs are not the same.

NO ACTIVE ROUTE Attempting to select LNAV with no active route selected.

NOT ON INTERCEPT HEADING LNAV armed and aircraft is not on an intercept heading that allows
the LNAV route to be captured, or a course intercept is selected
which does not intercept the current aircraft heading.

PILOT CNI-ICDU FAIL * Pilot CNI-MU (ICDU) failure detected.

POSITION DIFFERENCE Computed navigation position from the CNI-SPs differ by more than
10 NM.

RED LIGHT End of drop window reached.

RESET ALT SEL? The SP has detected a condition where a change of altitude is com-
manded but the preselected altitude has not been reset.

SELCAL SELCAL link established.

SLOWDOWN Preprogrammed slowdown point has been reached.

SP1(2) DEFAULT MAG VAR The current magnetic variation table is invalid and the affected SP 1
or SP 2 is using the Operational Flight Program (OFP) default table.

SP1(2) MISSION DB INVALID SP 1 or SP 2 mission data base is invalid.

SP1(2) NDB INVALID The worldwide navigation data base in SP 1 or SP 2 is corrupted.

SP1(2) NDB OUT OF DATE The worldwide navigation data base in SP 1 or SP 2 is not current.

SP SW MISCOMPARE The software part numbers for SP 1 and SP 2 are not the same.

TIMER 1 EXPIRED Count down/up timer has finished.

TIMER 2 TARGET Current time has reached crew selected time.

TIMER 3 INTERVAL Selected periodic time interval has elapsed.

TRANSFER ABORTED An error occurred while transferring data to/from the mission com-
puter and the transfer was aborted.

TRANSFER COMPLETE A data transfer to/from the mission computer has been successfully
completed.

TRANSFER IN PROGRESS A data transfer to/from the mission computer is in progress.

UNABLE NEXT ALT Altitude constraint for the active waypoint cannot be achieved.

UNABLE TO EXPAND SAR CNI is unable to expand SAR pattern as initialized.

3-10
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 2 CNI-MU (ICDU) Scratch Pad SYSTEM ADVISORY Messages (Continued)

Scratch Pad Messages Condition

X MIN UNTIL CARP Indicates the number of minutes to the CARP

(X = 20, 10, 6, or 1)

X SEC UNTIL CARP Indicates the number of seconds to the CARP

(X = 10, 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1)

XTK LIM EXCEEDED? The crosstrack distance from aircraft to route exceeds the
crosstrack limit entered on the PROGRESS 2/4 page.

Note: * Indicates a related ACAWS Advisory is generated.

Table 3 CNI-MU (ICDU) Scratch Pad OPERATIONAL ADVISORY Messages

Scratch Pad Messages Condition

* DELETE * Displayed when the DEL key is entered and no other messages are
displayed in the scratch pad.

ALREADY IN PERM LIST Inhibited NAVAID is already in the permanently inhibited NAVAID
list.

ALREADY IN TEMP LIST Inhibited NAVAID is already in the temporarily inhibited NAVAID list.

BEARING MUST BE IN TRUE Attempting to define a place/bearing/distance waypoint using a

magnetic bearing with a latitude greater than 72.5° N. or 59.5° S.
Attempting to enter a magnetic runway heading with an invalid to
airfield on a takeoff airfield TOLD page.

DUPLICATE ID Indicates an entry of a duplicated radio preselect ID.

DUPLICATE LABEL Indicates a duplicate waypoint label in the flight plan.

FLIGHT PLAN FULL An attempt is made to enter more than 60 waypoints in a flight plan.

FPL CONTAINS INVALID WPT Inserted custom waypoint is not found in the custom waypoint data-
base.

GPS/REF POS DISAGREE The entered alignment position disagrees with the GPS position.

HEADING REQUIRED Attempting an INU alignment without a heading entered.

INTERCEPT RANGE >999 MI Indicates the range to the intercept is greater than 999 NM.

INVALID DELETE An item has been selected for delete that cannot be deleted.

INVALID DIRECT TO Attempting to perform a direct to a CARP or DZESC waypoint.

Attempting to perform a direct to when the preceding waypoint was
an approach waypoint.

INVALID ENTRY The entry of data to a soft-key field is attempted, but the data in the
scratch pad does not match the correct format, (e.g., characters
instead of numbers, etc.).

3-11
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 3 CNI-MU (ICDU) Scratch Pad OPERATIONAL ADVISORY Messages (Continued)

Scratch Pad Messages Condition

INVALID INTERCEPT Indicates that a valid intercept solution does not exist.

LIST FULL The displayed list is full.

NO PRESENT POSITION Attempting an INU alignment without an entered present position.

NOT A NAVAID No NAVAIDs were found with the given identifier.

NOT ALLOWED An invalid operation has been attempted using the soft-keys.

NOT AN AIRPORT No airport was found for the entered identifier.

NOT IN DATABASE No navigation or custom database items were found with the given
identifier.

RADIALS DO NOT INTERSECT Radials entered to define a waypoint using place/bearing/place/

bearing do not intersect.

ROUTE ALREADY EXISTS A stored route with the same identifier already exists.

RUNWAY N/A FOR SID A runway is selected for the origin airport, the flight plan contains a
SID, but it is not applicable to the selected runway.

RUNWAY NOT FOUND Runway identified for the origin airport not a valid runway.

WAYPOINT NOT FOUND Specified waypoint is not in the stored route.

WIND OUT OF LIMITS The surface wind velocity is greater than the surface wind limit.

WPT IN FP Attempt to delete a custom waypoint was aborted because the way-
point is being used in route 1 or route 2.

WPT LIST FULL Attempt to create a new custom waypoint was aborted because the
list was full.

Table 4 MC Generated CNI-MU (ICDU) Scratch Pad CAUTION Messages

Scratch Pad Messages Condition

CHK HARD PNL Self explanatory.

LDG CG TOO FAR AFT Self explanatory.

LDG CG TOO FAR FWD Self explanatory.

OFF DENIED - PNL FAIL The MC has lost communication with the hard panel and an attempt
was made to select the associated soft PNL OFF.

OVER LDG ALLOW LOAD Self explanatory.

OVER LDG MAX GWT Self explanatory.

OVER MAX AIRDROP WT Self explanatory.

3-12
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 4 MC Generated CNI-MU (ICDU) Scratch Pad CAUTION Messages (Continued)

Scratch Pad Messages Condition

OVER MAX PAYLD WT Self explanatory.

OVER MAX ZFW Self explanatory.

OVER T/O ALLOW LOAD Self explanatory.

OVER T/O MAX GWT Self explanatory.

OVER ZFW ALLOW LOAD Self explanatory.

T/O CG TOO FAR AFT Self explanatory.

T/O CG TOO FAR FWD Self explanatory.

3-13
FAM.1C-27J-1A

CNI-MS DATA ENTRY

CONVENTIONS

Each entry made to the CNI-MU (ICDU) is checked for

correct syntax at the time the entry is line selected
from the scratch pad.
The Table 5 shows the standard input conventions for
each type of data entry into the CNI system.
Symbols used for entry format are:
n - Indicates that the entry is a number.
a - Indicates that the entry is a letter.
c - Indicates that the entry is a letter or a number.
____ - Indicates an optional entry.
- Indicates a mandatory entry.

Table 5 CNI-MU (ICDU) Data Entry Conventions

Entry Format - Description Range

ALTITUDE (ANY ALTITUDE ENTRY)

nnnnn (altitude)
FLnnn (flight level)

Entry in feet with one to five numbers. Entry in flight level with FL plus -1300 to 30000
two or three numbers. Leading zeros not required, may have a minus FL000 to FL300
sign. Minimum display for altitude is three numbers without leading
zeros.
NOTE
Altitude entries above the transition altitude are displayed
in flight levels if the entry is divisible by 100. If not, the ac-
tual altitude is displayed.

ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT/CRUISE ALTITUDE CHANGE

nnnnn (altitude)
nnnnna (altitude)
FLnnn (flight level)
FLnnna (flight level)

Altitude/flight level without letter suffix (a) indicates on altitude. See ALTITUDE (ANY ALTI-
Altitude/flight level with letter suffix indicates constraint as follows: TUDE ENTRY
A - at or above Altitude Constraint,
B - at or below Altitude Constraint,
C - change Cruise Altitude (start of climb/bottom of descent),
D - descent to Cruise Altitude (top of descent).

BANK ANGLE LIMIT

nn

One or two numbers, leading zero not required. 10 ≤ nn ≤ 30

3-14
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 5 CNI-MU (ICDU) Data Entry Conventions (Continued)

Entry Format - Description Range

BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
nnnn (millibars)
nnnn/ (millibars)
nn.nn (inches of mercury)
/nn.nn (inches of mercury)

Mbar: Three or four numbers, leading zero not required. Mbar: 940 to 1050
inHg: Two to four numbers with decimal point, trailing decimal point and inHg: 27.80 to 31.00
trailing zeros not required.

CHANNEL (VHF)
nn

Leading zeros not required. 1 to 28 and 60 to 88

CHUTE NAME/NUMBER
cccccccc (name only)
cccccccc/ (name only)
cccccccc/n (chute name/number)
/n (number only)

Chute name: one to eight characters. 1 to 9 parachutes

Chute number: one number for the number of parachutes per element.

COURSE
nnn (magnetic course)
nnnT (true course)

Course in degrees. Entry of one to three numbers, leading zeros not 0 to 360 (Entry)
required. Display range is 0 to 359. 0 to 359 (Display)
When course is referenced to magnetic north (nnn), and the latitude is
greater than 72.5° N. or 59.5° S., entry stays in scratch pad and BEAR-
ING MUST BE IN TRUE message displays.
When course is referenced to MGRS, displayed course is followed by
G.

DATE
nnaaann

Entry in Day-Month-Year order. Day entry is one to two numbers, lead- Day: 1 to 31
ing zeros not required, Month entry required to be three alpha charac- Month: First three characters for
ters, and Year entry required to be two numbers. one of the 12 months
Year: 00 to 99

DESCENT ANGLE
nn.n

Entry in degrees. Entered in increments of 10ths of degrees. Leading LZ: 0.1 to 89.9 in 0.1 increments
zeros not required. Decimal and trailing zero not required. non-LZ: 0.1 to 15.0 in 0.1 incre-
ments

3-15
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 5 CNI-MU (ICDU) Data Entry Conventions (Continued)

Entry Format - Description Range

DESCENT ANGLE or SPEED

nn.n (descent angle)
nnn (CAS)
nnna (TAS or GS)

See DESCENT ANGLE See DESCENT ANGLE

See SPEED See SPEED

DESTINATION or DIRECT TO WAYPOINT

See WAYPOINT NAME, PLACE/BEARING/DISTANCE, PLACE BEAR-

ING/PLACE BEARING, MGRS, or LATITUDE /LONGITUDE.

DIRECTION
None

None See COURSE

DISTANCE (CARP)
nn.n

Distance is in NM. One or two numbers, optionally followed by a deci- 0.1 to 99.9 NM
mal and another number.

DISTANCE (NAV)
n.nn

Distance is in NM. One number, optionally followed by a decimal and 0.01 to 9.99 NM
two numbers.

DISTANCE (NM)
nnn.n

Distance is in NM. One to three numbers, optionally followed by a deci- 0.1 to 999.9 NM (entry)
mal and another number. 0.0 to 9999 (display)

DISTANCE (FEET)
See ELEVATION

See ELEVATION See ELEVATION

DISTANCE (VERTICAL)
nnn
nnnn

Entry in feet. One to three, or one to four numbers. 0 to 999

Leading zeros not required. 0 to 9999

3-16
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 5 CNI-MU (ICDU) Data Entry Conventions (Continued)

Entry Format - Description Range

DRAG INDEX
nn

One to two digits. Leading zeros not required. 0 to 20

DROP RESULTS
nnn/nnn (relative direction/distance)
nnn (relative direction)
nnn/ (relative direction)
/nnn (distance)

Direction in degrees. Distance in yards. One to three numbers. Leading See COURSE
zeros not required. Direction value is relative to the run-in course. Distance: 0 to 999 yards

ELEMENT WEIGHT/QUANTITY
nnnnn/nnn (weight/quantity)
nnnnn (weight only)
nnnnn/ (weight only)
/nn (quantity only)

Weight: Weight per element in pounds. One to five numbers. Leading Weight: 1 to 11000
zeros not required. Quantity: 1 to 99
Forward slash (/): Required for Weight/Quantity or Quantity only,
optional for Weight only.
Quantity: Number of elements, one to two numbers. Leading zeros not
required. Default is 1 (not displayed).

ELEVATION
nnnnn

Entry in feet. One to five numbers, leading zeros optional, may be pre- -1300 to 32500
ceded by a minus sign.

ENTRY TYPE (HOLDING PATTERN)

None

Display: PARALLEL, DIRECT, or TEAR DRP None

ESTIMATED HORIZONTAL ERROR (EHE)

None

None 0.00 to 9.99 NM

ESTIMATED TIME ENROUTE

None

None HHMM:SS
0000:00 to 5059:59

3-17
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 5 CNI-MU (ICDU) Data Entry Conventions (Continued)

Entry Format - Description Range

FIGURE OF MERIT
None

None 0 to 9

FLIGHT PLAN NAME (ANY ENTRY)

cccccccccc

Six to ten alphanumeric characters in any combination. None

First character may not be a dash.

FREQUENCY (ADF)
nnnn.n

Minimum of the three numbers left of decimal required. 100.0 to 2199.5 KHz in steps of
Leading zero not required. Decimal and trailing zero not required. 0.5 KHz

FREQUENCY (HF)
nn.nnnn

Minimum of the second number required. Leading zero not required. 2.0000 to 29.9999 MHz in steps
Decimal and numbers following the decimal are optional. of 0.0001 MHz

FREQUENCY (TACAN)
nnna

Tacan channel, one to three numbers. Leading zeros not required. Y channels: 1Y to 126Y
Letter (a) is X or Y. Blank defaults to X. X channels: 1X to 126X

FREQUENCY (UHF)
nnn.nnn

Minimum of the three numbers left of decimal required. Leading zeros 225.0 to 399.975 MHz in steps
not required. of 0.025 MHz

FREQUENCY (VHF)
nnn.nnn (High band)
nn.nnn (Low band)

Minimum High band entry is three numbers left of decimal, decimal and AM receiver: 108.0 to 117.975
trailing zeros not required. AM receiver/xmitter (VHF AM or
Minimum Low band entry is two numbers left of decimal, decimal and ATC band): 118.0 to 135.975 in
trailing zeros not required. steps of 8.33 KHz
Frequencies are selectable in 0.025 MHz steps. AM: 136.0 to 155.975
FM Low band: 30.0 to 87.975
FM High band: 156.0 to 173.975

3-18
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 5 CNI-MU (ICDU) Data Entry Conventions (Continued)

Entry Format - Description Range

FREQUENCY (VOR)
nnn.nn

Minimum of the three numbers left of decimal required, decimal and Frequency: 108.0 to 117.95 MHz
trailing zeros optional.

FUEL FLOW
nnnn (fuel flow)
nnnnn (climb fuel flow)

Minimum of three numbers, leading zeros not required. Fuel Flow: 130 to 9999 pounds
per hour
Climb Fuel Flow: 130 to 12000
pounds per hour

FUSELAGE STATION
nnn

One to three numbers, leading zeros not required. 236 to 574 inches

GRID FACTOR
n.nnnnn

Decimal and trailing numbers not needed for entries of 1 and -1. -1.00000 to 1.00000

HOLD LEG DISTANCE/APPROACH FAF DISTANCE

nn.n

Leg distance in NM and 10ths of miles. Leading zeros, decimal, and 0.1 to 99.9
trailing zeros not required.

HOLD LEG TIME

nn
nn.nn

Leg time in minutes and seconds. Leading zeros not required. 0.00 to 59.59 in 0.1 increments

IDENTIFIER
ccccc

Two to five alphanumeric characters. None

3-19
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 5 CNI-MU (ICDU) Data Entry Conventions (Continued)

Entry Format - Description Range

INBOUND COURSE/DIRECTION
nnn/a (magnetic course/turn direction)
nnnT/a (true course/turn direction)
nnn (magnetic course)
nnn/ (magnetic course)
nnnT (true course)
nnnT/ (true course)
/a (turn direction)

Inbound course: See COURSE. See COURSE

Turn direction (a) is L or R.

L/R INDICATOR
a

Display (a) is L or R. None

LATITUDE
None

None See LATITUDE/LONGITUDE

LATITUDE/LONGITUDE
annnn.nnannnnn.nn

Latitude (annnn.nn): Entry in degrees, minutes, and 100ths of minutes. Latitude: Degrees: 0 to 90
Letter (a) entry required to be N or S. Minimum numeric entry is a four Minutes: 0 to 59
digit; first two digits are interpreted as degrees; next two digits are inter- Hundredths: 0 to 99
preted as minutes. Decimal, fractional minutes, and trailing zeros not
required.
Longitude (annnnn.nn): Entry in degrees, minutes, and 100ths of min- Longitude: Degrees: 0 to 180
utes. Letter (a) entry required to be E or W. Minimum numeric entry is a Minutes: 0 to 59
five number; first three numbers are interpreted as degrees; next two Hundredths: 0 to 99
numbers are interpreted as minutes. Decimal, fractional minutes, and
trailing zeros not required.
NOTE
For coordinate entries of 1 to 5 characters, where a way-
point name may also be entered, the waypoint list is exam-
ined first for an occurrence of the entered character string.
If found, the entry is interpreted as a named waypoint. For
coordinate entries of 6 to 10 characters, where a flight plan
name may also be entered, the flight plan list is examined
first for an occurrence of the entered character string. If
found, the entry is interpreted as a flight plan name.

LENGTH (YARDS)
nnnnn

One to five numbers. 1 to 99999

3-20
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 5 CNI-MU (ICDU) Data Entry Conventions (Continued)

Entry Format - Description Range

LIST POSITION
nn

One or two numbers. Leading zero is optional. 1 to 40

LOAD STATION
nnnn

Three to four numbers. Leading zero is optional. 345 to 1017 inches

LONGITUDE
None

None See LATITUDE/LONGITUDE

MAG VAR
None

None 0 to 90 East or West

MILITARY GRID REFERENCE SYSTEM (MGRS)

aaannnn (polar MGRS (from UPS grid))
aaannnnnn (polar MGRS (from UPS grid))
aaannnnnnnn (polar MGRS (from UPS grid))
aaannnnnnnnnn (polar MGRS (from UPS grid))
nnaaannnn (non-polar MGRS (from UTM grid))
nnaaannnnnn (non-polar MGRS (from UTM grid))
nnaaannnnnnnn (non-polar MGRS (from UTM grid))
nnaaannnnnnnnnn (non-polar MGRS (from UTM grid))

Polar MGRS applies north of 84° N. and south of 80° S. Polar:

Polar MGRS: Grid zone: Y or Z for north pole,
a - grid zone designation, A or B for south pole
aa - 100 km square identification, Square (1st character): A to Z,
nnnnnnnnnn - easting/northing. except D, E, I, M, N, O, V, and W
Non-polar MGRS: Square (2nd character): A to Z,
nn - grid zone designation, except I and O
aaa - 100 km square identification, easting/northing: 0 to 9
nnnnnnnnnn - easting/northing (two to five pairs of numbers). Non-Polar:
Grid zone: 01 to 60
Square (1st character): C to X,
except I and O
Square (2nd character): A to Z,
except I and O
Square (3rd character): A to V,
except I and O
easting/northing: 0 to 9

3-21
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 5 CNI-MU (ICDU) Data Entry Conventions (Continued)

Entry Format - Description Range

NAVIGATION SOURCE
None

None None

NET
Ann.nXX

nn.n is the HAVE QUICK Net number. See FREQUENCY (UHF)

XX is the HAVE QUICK Wave Form with the following range:
HAVE QUICK I Net: XX = 00
HAVE QUICK II NATO Net: XX = 25
HAVE QUICK II non-NATO Net: XX = 50
The Net is entered by entering an A in the place of the first number of a
valid UHF frequency.

OFFSET
ann.n

Entry of direction (a) plus nautical miles and 10ths of nautical miles 0.1 to 99.9 in 0.1 increments
(nn.n). Leading zeros not required. Decimal and trailing zero not
required. Entry of direction requires R (right) or L (left).

PERCENT
nnn

One to three numbers, leading zeros not required. 1 to 100

PLACE/BEARING/DISTANCE
ccccc/nnn/nnn.n (magnetic bearing)
ccccc/nnnT/nnn.n (true bearing)

Place: See IDENTIFIER. See COURSE

Bearing: See COURSE. See DISTANCE (NM)
Distance: See DISTANCE.
Forward slash (/): Required between Place and Bearing, and Bearing
and Distance.

PLACE/BEARING/PLACE/BEARING
ccccc/nnn/ccccc/nnn (magnetic bearings)
ccccc/nnnT/ccccc/nnnT (true bearings)
ccccc/nnn/ccccc/nnnT (magnetic bearing/true bearing)
ccccc/nnnT/ccccc/nnn (true bearing/magnetic bearing)

Place: See IDENTIFIER. See COURSE

Forward slash (/): Required between Place and Bearing, and Bearing
and Place.
Bearing: See COURSE.

3-22
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 5 CNI-MU (ICDU) Data Entry Conventions (Continued)

Entry Format - Description Range

POSITION
None

See WAYPOINT NAME, MGRS, LATITUDE/LONGITUDE, PLACE/

BEARING/DISTANCE, and PLACE/BEARING/PLACE/BEARING.

POST ADDRESS
ccccccccccccccc

Entry of up to fifteen alphanumeric characters in any combination. Must be included in radio’s pro-
grammed list of addresses

QUADRANT/RADIAL
aa (quadrant)
nnn (magnetic radial)
nnnT (true radial)
aa/nnn (quadrant/magnetic radial)
aa/nnnT (quadrant/true radial)

Quadrant: One to two letters, eight possible entries (N, NE, E, SE, S, See COURSE
SW, W, NW).
Radial: See COURSE.

ROUTE NAME
See FLIGHT PLAN NAME (ANY ENTRY)

See FLIGHT PLAN NAME (ANY ENTRY). None

ROUTE STATE
None

Display: ACT indicates active, MOD indicates provisional, or blank indi- None
cates inactive.

RUNWAY
nna
RWnna

Runway number (nn) followed by letter (a). Letter is C (center), L (left), 1 to 36

or R (right).

RCR/RSC
nn (RCR only)
nn/ (RCR only)
/nn (RSC only)

RCR (Runway Condition Reading): one or two numbers, leading zero RCR: 0 to 23
not required. RSC: 0 to 10
RSC (Runway Surface Covering): one or two numbers, leading zero
not required. Entry is in 10ths of an inch depth.

3-23
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 5 CNI-MU (ICDU) Data Entry Conventions (Continued)

Entry Format - Description Range

RUNWAY LENGTH
nnnnn

Entry in feet. Four to five numbers, leading zeros not required. 1000 to 16000

RUNWAY SLOPE
n.n
-n.n

Entry in percent. Minimum entry of one number, decimal and 10ths not 5.0 to -5.0 percent
required. Minus sign is optional.

SELCAL ADDRESS (ARINC)

aaaa

Entry of four alpha characters. Allowed letters are:

All four letters must be different from one another. A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L, M,
The first two letters must be in alphabetical order. P, Q, R and S
The second two letters must be in alphabetical order.

SPEED/ALTITUDE
nnna/nnnnna (speed/altitude)
nnna/FLnnna (speed/flight level)
nnna (speed only)
nnna/ (speed only)
nnnna (altitude only)
nnnnna (altitude only)
/nnnnna (altitude only)
FLnnna (flight level only)
/FLnnna (flight level only)

Speed: See SPEED. See SPEED range

Altitude: See ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT. See ALTITUDE range

SPEED
nnn
nnna

Entry in knots. Two or three numbers, leading zeros not required. No Groundspeed: 50 to 530
letter suffix (a) indicates CAS. Letter suffix T indicates true airspeed, G CAS: 50 to 260
indicates groundspeed. TAS: 50 to 330

TEMPERATURE
nnn (°C)
nnn/ (°C)
/nnn (°F)

One to three numbers; leading zero not required; minus sign optional. °C: -60 to 80
°F: -76 to 176

3-24
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 5 CNI-MU (ICDU) Data Entry Conventions (Continued)

Entry Format - Description Range

TIME
nnnna
nnnn.nna

Time format (nnnn.nn) is hours-minutes-seconds order. First two num- 0 to 2359:59

bers are hours, second two are minutes and last two are seconds.
Leading zero not required.
Letter suffix (a) indicates time zones A to Z.
NOTE
Time zone only applies to the POWER UP page.

TIME SECONDS
n.n
nn.n
nnn.n
nnn

Entry in seconds and 10ths of seconds. One to three numbers, option- n to n.n: 0 to 9.9
ally followed by a decimal and another number. Leading zero not nn.n: 0 to 60.0
required. nnn.n: 0 to 999.9
nnn: 0 to 999

TUNE MODE
None

Display data: None

A - autotune,
E - external tune,
M - manual tune,
P - procedure tune,
R - remote tune,
blank - invalid.

VERTICAL POINT TITLE

None

Display data: None

TO TOC - to Top Of Climb,
TO TOD - to Top Of Descent,
TO BOD - to Bottom Of Descent,
blank - invalid or out of range.

VERTICAL SPEED (V/S)

nnnn
-nnnn

One to four numbers. Minus sign and leading zeros optional. -9999 to 9999

3-25
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 5 CNI-MU (ICDU) Data Entry Conventions (Continued)

Entry Format - Description Range

VERTICAL SPEED (F/S)

nnn.n

Entry in feet/second. One to three numbers, optionally followed by a 0.1 to 999.9

decimal and another number.

VIA.TO
ccccc.ccccc (airway.waypoint)
cccccccccc.ccccc (flight plan name.waypoint)
cccccccccc (flight plan name)

Airway: None
Not a required entry. One to five alphanumeric characters in any combi-
nation. Airway entry must have anending waypoint entry.
FPL Name: See FLIGHT PLAN NAME (ANY ENTRY).
Waypoint: See WAYPOINT NAME.

VOR/TACAN IDENTIFIER
cccc

Entry of one to four alphanumeric characters. None

WAYPOINT LABEL
cc/

Enter one or two alphanumeric characters, followed by a slash (/). None

Defined waypoint labels may be use in place of the waypoint to which it
refers.

WAYPOINT NAME
cccccc

Enter two to five alphanumeric characters in any combination. First None

character may not be a “-” dash. First character is assigned a “*” when
the CNI-SP names the waypoint, and then one to five alphanumeric
characters may follow.

WAYPOINT TYPE
cccc

Waypoint type: CARP, SAR, WPT, LZ, RNDZ None

3-26
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 5 CNI-MU (ICDU) Data Entry Conventions (Continued)

Entry Format - Description Range

WEIGHT
nn.n
nnn.n

Weight in thousands of pounds. One to two, or one to three numbers BOW: 36.0 to 60.0
with a decimal number. Leading zeros not required. Decimal and trail- Payload: 0.0 to 22.1
ing zero not required. Leading zeros not displayed. Fuel on board: 0.0 to 20.6
Trip fuel: 0.0 to 20.6
Taxi fuel: 0.0 to 20.6
Reserve fuel: 0.0 to 20.6
Gross weight: 37.5 to 70.1
Fuel adjustment: -20.6 to 20.6

WEIGHT (CARP)
nnnnn

Weight in pounds or kilograms. One to five numbers. Leading zeros not Payload:
required. Leading zeros not displayed. 0 to 22100 Lbs or 0 to 10000 kg

WIND (ANY WIND ENTRY)

nnn/nnn (magnetic bearing/speed)
nnnT/nnn (true bearing/speed)
nnn (magnetic bearing)
nnnT (true bearing)
nnn/ (magnetic bearing)
nnnT/ (true bearing)
/nnn (wind speed)

Wind speed: One to three numbers; leading zeros not required. Wind Speed: 0 to 200 knots
Wind bearing: See COURSE. Bearing entry (knots) is in direction wind Wind bearing: See COURSE
is from.

WIND (CARP)
nnn/nn (magnetic bearing/speed)
nnnT/nn (true bearing/speed)
nnn (magnetic bearing)
nnnT (true bearing)
nnn/ (magnetic bearing)
nnnT/ (true bearing)
/nn (wind speed)

Wind speed: One to two numbers; leading zeros not required. Wind Speed: 0 to 99 knots
Wind bearing: See COURSE. Bearing entry (knots) is in direction wind Wind bearing: See COURSE
is from.

3-27
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Table 5 CNI-MU (ICDU) Data Entry Conventions (Continued)

Entry Format - Description Range

WIND (SURFACE)
nnn/nn-nn (magnetic bearing/speed-gusts or limit)
nnnT/nn-nn (true bearing/speed-gusts or limit)
nnn (magnetic bearing)
nnnT (true bearing)
nnn/ (magnetic bearing)
nnnT/ (true bearing)
nnn/nn (magnetic bearing/speed)
nnnT/nn (true bearing/speed)
/nn (wind speed)
/nn-nn (wind speed-gusts or limit)
-nn (-gusts or limit)

Wind speed: One or two numbers; leading zeros not required. Wind Speed: 0 to 99 knots
Wind bearing: See COURSE. Bearing entry (knots) is in direction wind Wind bearing: See COURSE
is from. Wind gusts/limit: 0 to 99 knots
Wind gusts or limit: One or two numbers, leading zero not required.

3-28
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PART 3A. COMM TUNE

Contents page Contents page

COMMUNICATION CONTROL ........................ 3A-1 V/UHF PRESETS PAGES ................................ 3A-7

CNRP CONTROLS ....................................... 3A-1 PRESETS VU1 1/16 PAGE .......................... 3A-7
CNI-MU (ICDU) CONTROLS ........................ 3A-2 HF RADIO CNI-MU (ICDU) PAGES ................. 3A-8
CHANNELIZATION OF PRESET COMM TUNE H1 1/8 PAGE ......................... 3A-8
RADIO FREQUENCIES ............................... 3A-2
ACAWS MESSAGES ................................... 3A-2 COMM TUNE INDEX PAGE DATA ENTRY ... 3A-13
V/UHF COMM RADIO GPS COMM TUNE V/UHF PAGE
TOD CONTROL ............................................ 3A-2 DATA ENTRY ............................................. 3A-15
COMM TUNE INDEX ........................................ 3A-2 COMM TUNE V/UHF PAGE (MARITIME
COMM TUNE INDEX PAGE ......................... 3A-3 MODE) DATA ENTRY ................................ 3A-17

V/UHF RADIO CNI-MU (ICDU) PAGES ........... 3A-4 UHF HAVE QUICK II 1/2 PAGE
COMM TUNE VU1 PAGE ............................. 3A-4 DATA ENTRY ............................................. 3A-19
COMM TUNE MAR VU1 UHF HAVE QUICK II 2/2 PAGE
(MARITIME MODE) PAGE ........................... 3A-5 DATA ENTRY ............................................. 3A-21
HAVE QUICK II PAGES ................................... 3A-6 PRESETS V/UHF PAGE DATA ENTRY ......... 3A-23
U1 HAVE QUICK II 1/2 PAGE ...................... 3A-6 COMM TUNE HF PAGE DATA ENTRY ......... 3A-25
U1 HAVE QUICK II 2/2 PAGE ...................... 3A-7

COMMUNICATION CONTROL HAVE QUICK provide the operator with frequency

hopping, anti-jamming capabilities. With this system,
certain codes are programmed into the radio manu-
Both the CNRP and CNI-MU (ICDU) can be used to
ally, and are used by the radio to establish frequency-
tune any communication radio (V/UHF, or HF). The
hopping patterns.
use of one over the other is purely an operator’s pref-
erence. To tune a new frequency or channel, enter the
desired frequency or channel into a scratch pad and CNRP CONTROLS (Refer to FAM.1C-27J-1)
select one of the following pages for display: (CNRP)
COMM page, (CNI-MU) COMM TUNE INDEX page or The CNRP provides a means of tuning all communi-
the individual radio’s COMM TUNE Xn page. cation radios. The COMM page requires only a single
switch activation of the COMM hard-key to display the
Under normal circumstances, V/UHF radios are com- status (on or off) and currently tuned frequency for all
manded “on” when MSTR AV ON soft-key is selected communication radios.
from the POWER UP page. To tune a new frequency or channel, enter the desired
The HF radios are not commanded “on” by the MSTR frequency or channel in the scratch pad, then assign
AV ON soft-key for ground crew safety reasons and the frequency or channel to the radio by selecting the
OFF is displayed adjacent to HF soft-key. The HF appropriate soft-key adjacent to the radio you wish to
radios are commanded “on” when PWR (soft-key R1) change.
is selected ON from the COMM TUNE H page.

3A-1
FAM.1C-27J-1A

When a frequency is entered in the scratch pad, the V/UHF COMM RADIO GPS TOD CONTROL
CNRP delays removing an entered frequency or
channel for approximately 3 seconds, allowing two The CNI-MS provides redundant control by means of
radios to be tuned to the same frequency if both radio independent open/ground relay driver discretes for
soft-keys are selected within 3 seconds. To select the the GPS TOD transfers from the EGIs to the V/UHF
previously tuned frequency, select the soft-key adja- radios. The relay driver ground state enables the TOD
cent to the radio you wish to change without anything transfer. The relay driver ground state is enabled for
being entered in the scratch pad. the applicable radio by the CNI-MS when any of the
following conditions are true:
– V/UHF radio HQ RCV GPS TOD has been select-
CNI-MU (ICDU) CONTROLS ed;
The COMM TUNE hard-key on the CNI-MU (ICDU) – At initial power up of the V/UHF radio system.
allows access to the associated communication tune
pages (Figure 3A-1) to control and tune the radios. When a condition is true as determined above, the
relay driver ground state is enabled for 60 seconds
The pages include: (± 2 seconds).

• COMM TUNE INDEX

• COMM TUNE VU
COMM TUNE INDEX
• U HAVE QUICK
• PRESETS VU The COMM TUNE INDEX page (Figure 3A-2) allows
access to desired communication radio tune pages
• COMM TUNE H
and provides an overview of the communication radio
configuration by displaying current and previous iden-
tification information, preset channel numbers, and
CHANNELIZATION OF PRESET RADIO
FREQUENCIES frequencies for all communication radios. The COMM
TUNE INDEX page also allows frequencies to be
All communication radios (V/UHF and HF) use the modified via the CNI-MU (ICDU) scratch pad.
same logic and methodology to channelize frequen- The COMM TUNE INDEX page allows manual tuning
cies. Up to 80 V/UHF and 40 HF frequencies are of specific radios by entering the identifier, channel, or
stored in the CNI-SP, and a label of up to 5 characters frequency into the scratch pad and selecting the right
can be used to identify each frequency/channel. soft-key. With nothing in the scratch pad, pressing the
V/UHF frequencies are preset on the PRESETS VU right soft-key tunes the previously selected frequency.
pages, and HF frequencies are preset on the COMM Pressing the left soft-key branches to the selected
TUNE H pages. radio COMM TUNE page that offer detailed control of
Once a V/UHF frequency has been preset on the each radio. In addition to the control interface via the
PRESETS VU page, it can be used by any of the two CNI-MU (ICDU), each radio is connected to the ICS
V/UHF radios. Once an HF frequency has been pre- CSU, which provides a two-way audio interface to the
set on a COMM TUNE H page, it may be used by operator.
either HF radio. The COMM TUNE INDEX page displays the top-level
tuning and control information for the communication
radios.
ACAWS MESSAGES
The V/UHF system is interfaced with the ACAWS for NOTE
displaying advisories and system fault messages. • Data adjacent to a soft-key is in small
The associated messages and specific crew action font if the radio is powered off or
are listed in the Section III of the FAM.1C-27J-1 man- failed, and in large font otherwise.
ual.
The HF system is interfaced with the ACAWS for dis- • If an identifier or channel number/fre-
playing advisories. quency is entered and is not con-
The associated messages and specific crew actions tained in the radio database list, the
are listed in the Section III of the FAM.1C-27J-1 man- error message NOT IN DATABASE is
ual. displayed.

3A-2
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

COMM TUNE INDEX PAGE R1 - V/UHF1 CHANNEL NUMBER AND

FREQUENCY
Page Access Data displayed adjacent to R1 applies to the V/UHF 1
radio. The currently commanded channel number and
Select the COMM TUNE hard-key (Figure 3-1).
frequency are displayed. If the commanded frequency
is not in the V/UHF tuning list or MANUAL is displayed
Display in the IDENT field, the channel number and frequency
fields are blanked.
L1 - BRANCH TO COMM TUNE VU1 PAGE The identifier/channel number/frequency that was pre-
viously commanded is placed below the current chan-
Data displayed adjacent to L1 shows identifier and
nel number/frequency. If the radio is powered off,
tune mode/channel/frequency of the V/UHF1 radio. V
tuning requests result in the radio being powered up
or U is highlighted to display the current operating fre-
and tuned. Selection with a valid scratch pad entry
quency band. If no identifier is present, “-----” is dis-
results in the new identifier/frequency being com-
played. OFF or FAILED is displayed in the IDENT field
manded.
if the V/UHF1 radio is powered off or failed.
Selection without a scratch pad entry results in com-
If GUARD has been selected on the COMM TUNE
manding the previously commanded identifier/fre-
VU1 page, GUARD is displayed in large font inverse
quency. The currently commanded identifier/
video. During RRSC control, displays MANUAL high-
frequency is placed in the previously tuned fields.
lighted in IDENT field. If TR+G mode is selected,
GUARD frequency is displayed under the VU1 and on R2 - V/UHF2 CHANNEL NUMBER AND
RRSC. FREQUENCY
Data in the line directly below L1 displays the previ-
ously commanded identifier for VU1 in small font. R2 has the same functionality as R1, except opera-
Pressing L1 branches to the COMM TUNE VU1 page. tions apply to the V/UHF2 radio.

L2 - BRANCH TO COMM TUNE VU2 PAGE R3

L2 has same functionality as L1, except operations Not operational.

apply to the V/UHF2 radio. Pressing L2 branches to
the COMM TUNE VU2 page. V or U is highlighted to R4 - HF1 CHANNEL NUMBER AND FREQUENCY
display the current operating frequency band. Data displayed adjacent to R4 applies to the HF1
radio. The currently commanded channel number and
L3 frequency are displayed. If the commanded frequency
Not operational. is not in the HF tuning list, the channel number field is
blanked.
L4 - BRANCH TO COMM TUNE H1 PAGE The identifier/channel number/frequency that was pre-
viously commanded is placed below the current chan-
Data displayed adjacent to L4 shows identifier and
nel number/frequency. If the radio is powered off,
tune mode/channel/frequency of the HF1 radio. If no
tuning requests result in the radio being powered up
identifier is present, “-----” is displayed. OFF or
and tuned. Selection with a valid scratch pad entry
FAILED is displayed in the IDENT field if the HF1
results in the new identifier/frequency being com-
radio is powered off or failed. Data in the line directly
manded.
below L4 displays the previously commanded identi-
Selection without a scratch pad entry results in com-
fier for HF1 in small font. Pressing L4 branches to the
manding the previously commanded identifier/fre-
COMM TUNE H1 page.
quency. The currently commanded identifier/
L5 - BRANCH TO COMM TUNE H2 PAGE frequency is placed in the previously tuned fields.

L5 has the same functionality as L4, except opera- R5 - HF2 CHANNEL NUMBER AND FREQUENCY
tions apply to the HF2 radio. The previously tuned
R5 has the same functionality as R4, except opera-
HF2 frequency is available for selection but is not dis-
tions apply to the HF 2 radio.
played.
Pressing L5 branches to the COMM TUNE H2 page. R6
L6 Not operational.
Not operational.

3A-3
FAM.1C-27J-1A

V/UHF RADIO CNI-MU (ICDU) L6 - BRANCH TO HAVE QUICK PAGE

PAGES Pressing L6 branches to the U HAVE QUICK II 1/2
page.
The No. 1 and No. 2 V/UHF radio can be controlled by R1 - POWER CONTROL
any CNI-MU (ICDU) or the CNRP panel. Volume is
controlled via the ICS control panels. The power soft-key (OFF/ON) controls power to the V/
UHF radio.

COMM TUNE VU1 PAGE NOTE

The functional description of this page also applies to Power is applied when on POWER UP
the COMM TUNE VU2 page, except as indicated. page MSTR AV ON is selected. The PWR
Refer to Figure 3A-3. soft-key may be used to toggle power as
V or U is highlighted in the page title to display the desired.
current operating frequency band.
R2 - GUARD FREQUENCY SELECTION
Page Access
Pressing R2 toggles emergency guard frequency tun-
a. Press L1 (VU1 prompt) on the COMM TUNE IN- ing between OFF, 121.500 MHz (VHF), 243.000 MHz
DEX page to display the COMM TUNE VU1 page. (UHF) and then back to OFF.

b. Press L2 (VU2 prompt) on the COMM TUNE IN-

DEX page to display the COMM TUNE VU2 page.
NOTE
If a emergency guard frequency is select-
Display ed, the Maritime mode can not be select-
ed ON until the emergency guard
L1 - V/UHF TUNED IDENTIFIER/CHANNEL/ frequency is turned OFF.
FREQUENCY
Data adjacent to L1 displays the identification, preset R3 - V/UHF MODE CONTROL
channel number, frequency, and tune mode. If emer- Pressing R2 toggles mode between main transmitter/
gency frequency selected, displays EMERG high- receiver only (TR), main transmitter/receiver + guard
lighted in IDENT field. During RRSC control, displays (TR+G), Direction Finder (DF) and then back to TR.
MANUAL highlighted in IDENT field. If TR+G mode, When TR is selected, the main receiver and the trans-
guard frequency is displayed on RRSC. mitter are ready for use, and the guard receiver is
To change ident, frequency, or channel, enter required inoperative.
data in scratch pad and press L1. If TR+G is selected, the main receiver and transmitter
are ready for use on the selected frequency and the
L2 guard receiver monitors the guard frequency.
Not operational. When DF is selected, the guard receiver is disabled
and the main receiver is switched to the V/UHF DF
L3 - MARITIME TUNING SELECTION antenna. Also, when DF is selected, no transmissions
can be made from VU1 radio. Direction finding mode
The control of tuning of maritime channels is per-
is functional with V/UHF 1 only.
formed by this soft-key. Pressing L3 toggles maritime
mode ON and OFF. If selected ON, submenu page R4 - SQUELCH CONTROL
branches to the COMM TUNE MAR VU1 maritime
page. R4 enables (ON) or disables (OFF) the V/UHF radio
main and guard receiver squelch.
L4 - BRANCH TO PRESETS PAGE
R5 - TONE CONTROL
Pressing L4 branches to the PRESETS VU1 1/16
page. V or U is highlighted in the page title to display The tone soft-key (ON/OFF) when selected to ON,
the current operating frequency band. produces a Continuous Wave (CW) 1020 Hz tone
which is transmitted on the selected frequency for
L5 homing operations.
Not operational.

3A-4
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Pressing R5 commands the VUn radio to switch tone L6 - SHIP/SHORE SELECTION

ON for a nominal 1 second, and then to switch it back
OFF. Pressing L6 selects ship-to-ship or ship-to-shore
Pressing R5 and holding it ON, commands the VUn mode for V/UHF radio communications and highlights
radio to keep the tone switch ON until the soft-key is the selected mode (SHIP or SHORE).
released. R1 - POWER CONTROL
R6 The power soft-key (OFF/ON) controls power to the V/
Not operational. UHF radio.

NOTE
COMM TUNE MAR VU1 (MARITIME MODE)
PAGE Power is applied when on POWER UP
page MSTR AV ON is selected. The PWR
The functional description of this page also applies to soft-key may be used to toggle power as
the COMM TUNE MAR VU2 maritime page, except as desired.
indicated. Refer to Figure 3A-4.
V or U is highlighted in the page title to display the R2 - EMERGENCY MARITIME CHANNEL TUNING
current operating frequency band.
Pressing R2 toggles the main transceiver emergency
frequency tuning between OFF and ON. When
Page Access selected ON, tunes emergency maritime channel 16
Select ON (L3 MARITIME soft-key) from the COMM on the VUn main transceiver.
TUNE VU1 normal page brings up the COMM TUNE
MAR VU1 maritime page. NOTE
If a emergency frequency is selected, the
Display Maritime mode can not be selected ON
until the emergency frequency is turned
L1 - V/UHF TUNED MARITIME IDENTIFIER/ OFF.
CHANNEL/FREQUENCY
Data adjacent to L1 displays the identification, preset R3 - V/UHF MODE CONTROL
channel number, frequency, and tune mode. If emer-
Pressing R3 toggles mode between transmitter/
gency frequency selected, displays EMERG high-
receiver only (TR), transmitter/receiver + guard
lighted in IDENT field. During RRSC control, displays
(TR+G), Direction Finder (DF) and then back to TR.
MANUAL highlighted in IDENT field.
When TR is selected, the main receiver and the trans-
To change ident, frequency, or channel, enter required
mitter are ready for use, and the guard receiver is
data in scratch pad and press L1.
inoperative.
L2 If TR+G is selected, the main receiver and transmitter
are ready for use on the selected frequency and the
Not operational. guard receiver monitors the guard frequency.
When DF is selected, the guard receiver is disabled
L3 - MARITIME TUNING SELECTION and the main receiver is switched to the V/UHF DF
The control of tuning of maritime channels is per- antenna. Also, when DF is selected, no transmissions
formed by this soft-key. Pressing L3 toggles maritime can be made from VU1 radio. Direction finding mode
mode ON and OFF. If selected OFF, page branches is functional with V/UHF 1 only.
back to the COMM TUNE VU1 (Normal Mode) page.
R4 - SQUELCH CONTROL
L4 AND L5 R4 enables (ON) or disables (OFF) the V/UHF radio
Not operational. main and guard receiver squelch.

3A-5
FAM.1C-27J-1A

R5 - TONE CONTROL Display

The tone soft-key (ON/OFF) when selected to ON, L1 - UHF FREQUENCY OR NET
produces a Continuous Wave (CW) 1020 Hz tone
which is transmitted on the selected frequency for L1 accepts and displays the UHF frequency (for nor-
homing operations. mal mode) or the HAVE QUICK net number (for active
Pressing R5 commands the VUn radio to switch tone mode) entered in the scratch pad.
ON for a nominal 1 second, and then to switch it back
OFF. NOTE
Pressing R5 and holding it ON, commands the VUn
• The radio must be tuned to a UHF fre-
radio to keep the tone switch ON until the soft-key is
quency (225.000-399.975 MHz) prior
released.
to selecting a HAVE QUICK net or us-
R6 ing HAVE QUICK functions.

Not operational. • A warning tone sounds in the headset

when the active mode is selected and
either a WOD is not loaded or the ra-
dio does not contain a TOD.
HAVE QUICK II PAGES L2 THROUGH R1 - CHANNEL 20 - 15
FREQUENCY
For HAVE QUICK frequency hopping (FH) anti-jam
L2 through R1 are used to load the WOD frequencies
operation, the V/UHF radio system requires certain
entered in the scratch pad into storage, for associa-
data to be filled into the radio. Frequency hopping
tion with a channel for a given operational day. WOD
data include Word Of Day (WOD), Time Of Day
frequency storage starts at L2 (corresponding to
(TOD), and an active net number. FH data is loaded
channel 20) and may extend through R1 (correspond-
into the V/UHF radio system by manual entry utilizing
ing to channel 15).
the HAVE QUICK II pages.
The loading of the frequency hopping data is normally R2 - 20 - 15 DAY OF MONTH
accomplished during preflight setup.
R2 accepts the two digit operational date entered in
the scratch pad, and commands the radio to load the
U1 HAVE QUICK II 1/2 PAGE WOD elements displayed in channels 20 through 15
into the UHF radio.
The U1 HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page (Figure 3A-5) con- An MWOD may vary in length and requires from one
trols HAVE QUICK II operations, loading of WOD and to six of these channels, starting with channel 20.
multiple WOD (MWOD) elements, and selection of the
operational date. When all the FH data is loaded in R3 - OPERATIONAL DAY
the V/UHF radio and an active net number is selected,
the radio operates in active (jam-resistant) mode. Oth- Entry allows the operator to select the operational day
erwise, the V/UHF radio is in normal AM/FM voice for HAVE QUICK II operations, and defines the
mode on the selected UHF frequency. MWOD to be used for this function.
The normal mode provides voice transmission and
reception on AM or FM (225.000 to 399.975 MHz). NOTE
The active mode provides active FH on the desig-
nated net number. Entry of an operational day must be en-
The functional description of this page also applies to tered prior to selecting an active net num-
the U2 HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page, except as indicated. ber for HAVE QUICK operations.

R4 AND R5
Page Access
Not operational.
Select L6 (HQ prompt) from the COMM TUNE VU1
page brings up the U1 HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page. R6 - BRANCH TO VU1 PAGE
Pressing R6 branches to the COMM TUNE VU1
page. When on the U2 HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page,
pressing R6 branches to the COMM TUNE VU2 page.

3A-6
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

U1 HAVE QUICK II 2/2 PAGE This selection becomes enabled when all 16 non-zero
values for frequency are loaded in the FMT ENTER
U1 HAVE QUICK II 2/2 page (Figure 3A-5) provides field.
HAVE QUICK II TOD control and Frequency Managed
Training (FMT) net loading. R1 THROUGH R5
The functional description of this page also applies to
the U2 HAVE QUICK II 2/2 page, except as indicated. Not operational.

R6 - BRANCH TO VU1 PAGE

Page Access
Pressing R6 branches to the COMM TUNE VU1
Select the NEXT PAGE or PREV PAGE hard-key page. When on the U2 HAVE QUICK II 2/2 page,
while the Un HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page is displayed. pressing R6 branches to the COMM TUNE VU2 page.

Display
L1 - RECEIVE GPS TOD PROMPT V/UHF PRESETS PAGES
Pressing the L1 commands the radio to receive a
TOD signal from the Global Positioning System (GPS) PRESETS VU1 1/16 PAGE
receiver.
PRESETS VU1 1/16 page (Figure 3A-6) displays the
NOTE currently tuned V/UHF frequency and is used to
assign up to five preset channels to V/UHF frequen-
The radio must be in the normal mode of cies. Each of the sixteen identical PRESETS VU
operation prior to making selections of pages can display five preset channels, for a total of
any of the TOD functions. Selection of a 80. Once a V/UHF frequency has been preset on the
TOD function while in an active mode re- PRESETS VU page, it can be used by any of the four
sults in the radio reverting back to normal V/UHF radios.
mode on the last tuned frequency. V or U is highlighted in the page title to display the
current operating frequency band.
L2 - RECEIVE RADIO TOD PROMPT The functional description of this page also applies to
the PRESETS VU2 page, except as indicated.
Pressing the L2 commands the radio to receive a
TOD via RF signal on the currently tuned frequency.
Page Access
L3 - SELF TOD PROMPT
a. Press L4 (PRESETS prompt) on the COMM TUNE
Pressing the L3 commands the radio to self-initialize a VU1 page to display the PRESETS VU1 1/16
TOD by resetting its own internal clock. page.
L4 - TRANSMIT TOD PROMPT b. To select pages 2/16 through 16/16, press the
NEXT PAGE or the PREV PAGE hard-key.
Pressing the L4 commands the radio to transmit the
TOD via RF signal on the currently tuned frequency.
Display
L5 - FMT CHANNEL FREQUENCY
L1 - V/UHF TUNED IDENTIFIER/CHANNEL/
L5 accepts the FMT channel number and channel fre- FREQUENCY
quency. If only a channel number is entered, the result
is the display of that channel frequency for that chan- Displays V/UHF current operating database identifier,
nel shown. Entry of both a channel number and a fre- preset channel number, and frequency. Database
quency results in replacement of the current identifier, preset channel or frequency can be modified
frequency associated with the entered channel. via the scratch pad and pressing the soft-key.
If emergency frequency selected, displays EMERG
L6 - FMT LOAD highlighted in IDENT field. During RRSC control, dis-
plays MANUAL highlighted in IDENT field.
L6 commands the UHF radio to load the FMT fre-
quency values that were manually entered in the FMT
ENTER field at L5.

3A-7
FAM.1C-27J-1A

L2 THROUGH L6 - STORING V/UHF IDENTIFIER/ Page Access

CHANNEL/FREQUENCY
a. Press L4 (H1 prompt) on the COMM TUNE INDEX
Displays V/UHF stored database identifier, preset page to display the COMM TUNE H1 1/8 page.
channel number, and frequency (5 presets per page
for total of 80 V/UHF frequencies available for each of b. Press L5 (H2 prompt) on the COMM TUNE INDEX
V/UHF radio). If scratch pad is empty selects stored page to display the COMM TUNE H2 1/8 page.
preset channel to the scratch pad, ready for selection
as current frequency on COMM TUNE VU page of the Display
current V/UHF radio. Presets can be added to the list
by entering frequency, or database identifier and fre- L1 - HF TUNED IDENTIFIER/CHANNEL/
quency divided by a slash in the scratch pad and FREQUENCY
selecting an available soft-key.
Data field adjacent to L1 displays HF current operat-
Use NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE hard-keys to
ing database identifier, preset channel number, and
access additional channels.
frequency. L1 accepts the identifier/channel/frequency
Presets can be deleted by pressing the DEL key
entered in the scratch pad for the HF radio to be
which enters DELETE into the scratch pad, then
tuned. The tune mode is displayed adjacent to the fre-
pressing soft-key.
quency.
R1 THROUGH R5 L2 THROUGH L6 - STORING HF IDENTIFIER/
Not operational. CHANNEL/FREQUENCY
The fields adjacent to L2, L3, L4, L5, and L6 display
R6 - BRANCH TO VU1 PAGE
the first 5 inactive available HF preset identifiers/chan-
Pressing R6 branches to the COMM TUNE VU1 nels/frequencies. The fields adjacent to L2, L3, L4, L5,
page. When on the PRESETS VU2 page, pressing R6 and L6 on COMM TUNE H1 pages 2/8 through 8/8
branches to the COMM TUNE VU2 page. display the remaining 40 inactive available HF preset
identifiers/channels/frequencies.
If scratch pad is empty selects stored preset channel
to the scratch pad, ready for selection as current fre-
HF RADIO CNI-MU (ICDU) PAGES quency.
Presets can be added to the list by entering fre-
quency, or database identifier and frequency divided
The HF 1 and 2 communication systems are con- by a slash in the scratch pad and selecting an avail-
trolled through the COMM TUNE H1 1/8 pages (Fig- able soft-key.
ure 3A-7). The functions available on the COMM Use NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE hard-keys to
TUNE H pages include: preset frequency channel access additional channels.
assignment (40 preset channels are available), power Presets can be deleted by pressing the DEL key
control, SELCAL address assignment, mode control, which enters DELETE into the scratch pad, then
squelch control, and page branching. Once an HF fre- pressing soft-key.
quency has been preset on a COMM TUNE H page, it
may be used by either HF radio. Transmit/receive and R1 - POWER CONTROL
volume control of the HF radio is accomplished
through the associated ICS/monitor panels at the The power soft-key (OFF/ON) controls power to the
crew station. selected HF radio.

NOTE
COMM TUNE H1 1/8 PAGE
The MSTR AV ON functions on POWER
The functional description of this page also applies to PU page does not apply power to the HF
the COMM TUNE page for HF 2 radio, except as indi- radios. Power must be applied through
cated. the COMM TUNE H page.

R2
Not operational.

3A-8
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

R3 - HF SELCAL CONTROL
Pressing R3 accepts the ARINC SELCAL address
entered in the scratch pad. Valid ARINC SELCAL
addresses can contain the characters A, B, C, D, E, F,
G, H, J, K, L, M, P, Q, R, or S.
All four letters must be different in the address. The
first two and last two must be in alphabetical order.

R4 - HF EMISSION MODULATION CONTROL

Pressing R4 selects the HF operating mode as fol-
lows:
– USB (Upper Sideband) – Receiver/transmitter re-
ceives and transmits audio signals in upper side-
band with suppression of the carrier.
– LSB (Lower Sideband) – Receiver/transmitter re-
ceives and transmits audio signals in lower side-
band with suppression of the carrier.
– CW (Continuous Wave) – Receiver/transmitter re-
ceives and transmits telegraphic single tone sig-
nals.
– AM (Amplitude Modulation) – Receiver/transmitter
receives and transmits audio signals in amplitude
modulation.

R5 - SQUELCH LEVEL UP
Pressing R5 increases the level (0 through 5) of
receiver squelch.

R6 - SQUELCH LEVEL DOWN

Pressing R6 decreases the level (5 through 0) of
receiver squelch.

3A-9
FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3A-10
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

COMM TUNE Branching

Figure 3A-1

3A-11
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: This page displays tuning information for the communication radios. V or U highlighted in title
indicates which frequency band is currently tuned.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 VU1 Branches to the COMM TUNE VU1 page. If in TR+G mode, GUARD
frequency is displayed under VU1.
L2 VU2 Branches to the COMM TUNE VU2 page. If in TR+G mode, GUARD
frequency is displayed under VU2.
L3 NOT USED
L4 H1 Branches to the COMM TUNE H1 page.
L5 H2 Branches to the COMM TUNE H2 page.
L6 NOT USED
R1-R2 List position and Displays V/UHFn current and previous preset channel and radio fre-
frequency quency. Selection inserts the scratch pad frequency as the active fre-
quency and moves the previous frequency to standby. If there is no
frequency in the scratch pad, selection switches between active and
standby.
R3 NOT USED
R4-R5 List position and Displays HFn current and previous preset channel and radio fre-
frequency quency. Selection inserts the scratch pad frequency as the active fre-
quency and moves the previous frequency to standby. If there is no
frequency in the scratch pad, selection switches between active and
standby.
R6 NOT USED

Figure 3A-2 COMM TUNE INDEX page

3A-12
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

COMM TUNE INDEX PAGE DATA NORMAL TUNING

ENTRY 1. Enter identifier, preset channel number, or fre-
quency for desired radio into scratch pad - En-
tered.
PREREQUISITES a. Press desired radio right soft-key -
1. None. Pressed.
b. Entered identifier/channel number/fre-
quency is displayed.
DATA ENTRY
1. Press COMM TUNE hard-key - Pressed. NOTE

a. COMM TUNE INDEX page is displayed. • The previous identifier/channel num-

ber/frequency moves to the alternate
2. Press L1 to select COMM TUNE VU1 page (as (standby) position and is displayed in
required) - Pressed. small font.
3. Press L2 to select COMM TUNE VU2 page (as • If there is no identifier/channel num-
required) - Pressed. ber/frequency in the scratch pad,
4. Press L4 to select COMM TUNE H1 page (as pressing the right soft key switches
required) - Pressed. the radio between active and standby
mode.
5. Press L4 to select COMM TUNE H2 page (as
required) - Pressed.

3A-13
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: This page displays information pertaining to the control of the V/UHF radio in the NORMAL
Mode. V or U highlighted in title indicates which frequency band is currently tuned.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 IDENT CH FREQ Displays V/UHF operating database identifier, preset channel number,
selected frequency, and tune mode of the tuned radio. Database identi-
fier, preset channel number or frequency can be modified via the
scratch pad.
L2 NOT USED
L3 MARITIME Controls and displays the maritime mode (ON/OFF). When ON is
selected, the page layout changes to a MARITIME mode submenu.
L4 PRESETS Branches to the PRESETS VU setup page.
L5 NOT USED
L6 HQ Branches to the U HAVE QUICK II page.
R1 PWR Controls and displays the V/UHF radio power (OFF/ON).
R2 EMERG Selects the emergency receiver/transmit frequency between OFF,
121.5, and 243.
R3 MODE Selects mode between transmitter/receiver only (TR) and transmitter/
(TR/TR+G/DF) receiver plus guard (TR+G). Direction finder (DF) is selectable for
V/UHF1 only.
R4 SQL Controls and displays the main and the guard receiver squelch (OFF/
ON).
R5 TONE Controls and displays the V/UHF tone status (ON/OFF). Selection
sends a tone for as long as the key is pressed.
R6 NOT USED

Figure 3A-3 COMM TUNE VU page (Normal Mode)

3A-14
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

COMM TUNE V/UHF PAGE DATA 6. Press R2 to select guard frequency (as de-
sired) - Selected.
ENTRY
a. Selected emergency tuning (OFF, 121.5,
or 243) appears in large font.
PREREQUISITES 7. Press R3 to select V/UHF radio mode (as re-
1. Press COMM TUNE hard-key - Pressed. quired) - Selected.

a. COMM TUNE INDEX page displayed. a. Selected mode (TR, TR+G, or DF) appears
in large font.
2. Select VU1 or 2 radio (L1 or L2) - Pressed.
8. Press R4 to set squelch status (as required) -
a. COMM TUNE VU1 or 2 page displayed. Selected.
a. Selected squelch status (OFF or ON) ap-
DATA ENTRY pears in large font.

1. Enter identifier, preset channel number, or fre- 9. Press R5 to transmit tone (as required) -
quency into scratch pad for desired V/UHF ra- Pressed.
dio - Entered.
a. Press L1 - Pressed.
b. Entered identifier/channel number/fre-
quency is displayed on IDENT CH FREQ
field.
2. Press L3 to set the maritime mode (as re-
quired) - Selected.
a. Selected maritime mode (OFF or ON) ap-
pears in large font.
3. Press L4 to branch to PRESETS VU page (as
required) - Pressed.
4. Press L6 to branch to U HAVE QUICK II 1/2
page (as required) - Pressed.
5. Press R1 to set V/UHF radio power off or on
(as required) - Selected.

3A-15
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: This page displays information pertaining to the control of the V/UHF radio in the MARITIME
Mode. V or U highlighted in title indicates which frequency band is currently tuned.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 IDENT CH FREQ Displays V/UHF operating database identifier, preset channel number,
and selected frequency of the tuned radio. Database identifier, preset
channel number or frequency can be modified via the scratch pad.
L2 NOT USED
L3 MARITIME Controls and displays the maritime mode (ON/OFF). If selected OFF
branches back to COMM TUNE VU1 page. Not operational if emer-
gency frequency tuned.
L4-L5 NOT USED
L6 SHIP-TO- Controls the maritime mode between (simplex mode) SHIP-TO-SHIP
and (duplex mode) SHIP-TO-SHORE.
R1 PWR Controls and displays the V/UHF radio power (OFF/ON).
R2 EMERG Selects the main transceiver to emergency maritime channel 16.
R3 MODE Selects mode between transmitter/receiver only (TR) and transmitter/
(TR/TR+G/DF) receiver plus guard (TR+G). Direction finder (DF) is selectable for
V/UHF1 only.
R4 SQL Controls and displays the main and the guard receiver squelch (OFF/
ON).
R5 TONE Controls and displays the V/UHF tone status (ON/OFF). Selection
sends a tone for as long as the key is pressed.
R6 NOT USED

Figure 3A-4 COMM TUNE MAR VU page (Maritime Mode)

3A-16
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

COMM TUNE V/UHF PAGE 3. Press R1 to set V/UHF radio power off or on
(as required) - Selected.
(MARITIME MODE) DATA ENTRY
4. Press R2 to select the main transceiver to
emergency maritime channel 16 - Selected.
PREREQUISITES 5. Press R3 to select V/UHF radio mode (as re-
1. Press COMM TUNE hard-key - Pressed. quired) - Selected.

a. COMM TUNE INDEX page displayed. a. Selected mode (TR, TR+G, or DF) appears
in large font.
2. Select VU1 or 2 radio (L1 or L2) - Pressed.
6. Press R4 to set squelch status (as required) -
a. COMM TUNE VU1 or 2 page displayed. Selected.
3. Press L3 MARITIME to select ON - Pressed. a. Selected squelch status (OFF or ON) ap-
a. COMM TUNE MAR VU1 or 2 (maritime pears in large font.
mode) page displayed. 7. Press R5 to transmit tone (as required) -
Pressed.

DATA ENTRY
1. Enter identifier, preset channel number, or fre-
quency into scratch pad for desired V/UHF ra-
dio - Entered.
a. Press L1 - Pressed.
b. Entered identifier/channel number/fre-
quency is displayed on IDENT CH FREQ
field.
2. Press L6 to select maritime mode (as required)
- Selected.
a. Selected mode (SHIP or SHORE) appears
in large font.

3A-17
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: This page is used for programming the UHF 1 (or 2) radio HAVE QUICK II operations.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 FREQ/NET Displays the current selected frequency or NET.

L2 Channel 20 Displays channel 20 frequency for selected day.
L3 Channel 19 Displays channel 19 frequency for selected day.
L4 Channel 18 Displays channel 18 frequency for selected day.
L5 Channel 17 Displays channel 17 frequency for selected day.
L6 Channel 16 Displays channel 16 frequency for selected day.
R1 Channel 15 Displays channel 15 frequency for selected day.
R2 20-15 DAY Upon entry of two digit date, commands radio to load MWOD (multiple
word of the day) element into non-volatile memory.
R3 TODAY Allow operational date entry. The date entered determines which
MWOD the radio is to use for frequency hopping.
R4-R5 NOT USED
R6 V/UHF1 Branches to the COMM TUNE VU1 page.

Figure 3A-5 U HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page

3A-18
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

UHF HAVE QUICK II 1/2 PAGE DATA 5. Press L5 to accept the HAVE QUICK WOD el-
ement 17 data entered in the scratch pad -
ENTRY Pressed.
6. Press L6 to accept the HAVE QUICK WOD el-
PREREQUISITES ement 16 data entered in the scratch pad -
Pressed.
1. Press COMM TUNE hard-key - Pressed.
7. Press R1 to accept the HAVE QUICK WOD el-
a. COMM TUNE INDEX page displayed. ement 15 data entered in the scratch pad -
2. Select VU1 or 2 radio (L1 or L2) - Pressed. Pressed.

a. COMM TUNE VU1 or 2 page displayed. 8. Press R2 (20-15 DAY) to accept the two-digit
operational date entered in the scratch pad
3. UHF radio tuned (U highlighted on COMM and to associate the displayed WOD elements
TUNE INDEX page). with this date - Pressed.
4. Operator presses L6 HQ on COMM TUNE VU 9. Press R3 (TODAY) to accept the current oper-
page. ational date entered in the scratch pad -
Pressed.
a. U1 or 2 HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page dis-
played. 10. Press R6 to branch to COMM TUNE VU1 or 2
page (as required) - Pressed.

DATA ENTRY 11. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to branch to U1,

or 2 HAVE QUICK II 2/2 page - Pressed.
1. Press L1 to accept the HAVE QUICK frequen-
cy/net entered in the scratch pad - Pressed.
2. Press L2 to accept the HAVE QUICK WOD el-
ement 20 data entered in the scratch pad -
Pressed.
3. Press L3 to accept the HAVE QUICK WOD el-
ement 19 data entered in the scratch pad -
Pressed.
4. Press L4 to accept the HAVE QUICK WOD el-
ement 18 data entered in the scratch pad -
Pressed.

3A-19
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: This page is used for programming the UHF 1 (or 2) radio HAVE QUICK II TOD operations.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 RCV GPS TOD Selection commands the radio to receive a Time of Day (TOD) from the
Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver.
L2 RCV RADIO TOD Selection commands the radio to receive a TOD from the currently
tuned station.
L3 SELF TOD Selection commands the radio to self-initialize a TOD.
L4 XMIT TOD Selection commands the radio to transmit its value for TOD on the cur-
rently tuned station.
L5 FMT ENTER Allows FMT entry. Displays the FMT channel number and the channel
frequency. Entry of a channel number only, results in the display of the
channel number only. Entry of a channel number and a frequency
replaces the current frequency associated with the entered channel.
L6 FMT LOAD Selection commands the radio to load the operator entered FMT chan-
nel number/frequency.
R1-R5 NOT USED
R6 V/UHF1 Branches to the COMM TUNE VU1 page.

Figure 3A-5 U HAVE QUICK II 2/2 page

3A-20
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

UHF HAVE QUICK II 2/2 PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. U1 or 2 HAVE QUICK II 1/2 page displayed.
2. Operator presses PREV PAGE or NEXT
PAGE hard-key.
a. U1 or 2 HAVE QUICK II 2/2 page dis-
played.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press L1 (RCV GPS TOD) to command the V/
UHF radio to receive TOD from the GPS -
Pressed.
2. Press L2 (RCV RADIO TOD) to command the
V/UHF radio to receive TOD from the radio -
Pressed.
3. Press L3 (SELF TOD) to command the V/UHF
radio to receive TOD from the internal clock -
Pressed.
4. Press L4 (XMIT TOD) to command the V/UHF
radio to transmit TOD - Pressed.
5. Press L5 to accept FMT frequency/net data en-
tered in the scratch pad - Pressed.
6. Press L6 to load FMT frequency/net data dis-
played adjacent to L5 - Pressed.
7. Press R6 to branch to COMM TUNE VU1 or 2
page (as required) - Pressed.

3A-21
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: This page provides a preset selection list for selection and tuning of the V/UHF radio. V or U
highlighted in title indicates which frequency band is currently tuned.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 IDENT CH FREQ Displays V/UHF current operating database identifier, preset channel
number and selected frequency of tuned radio. Database identifier,
preset channel number or frequency can be modified via the scratch
pad.
L2-L6 V/UHF radio identifier Displays V/UHF stored database identifier, preset channel number and
frequency. Five presets per page for total of 80.
R1-R5 NOT USED
R6 VU1 Branches to the previous COMM TUNE VU1 page.

Figure 3A-6 PRESETS VU page

3A-22
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PRESETS V/UHF PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Press COMM TUNE hard-key - Pressed.
a. COMM TUNE INDEX page displayed.
2. Select VU1 or 2 radio (L1 or L2) - Pressed.
a. COMM TUNE VU1 or 2 page displayed.
3. Operator presses L4 on COMM TUNE VU
page to select the PRESETS selection list of
the V/UHF radio.
a. PRESETS VU page displayed.

DATA ENTRY
1. Enter identifier/preset channel number/fre-
quency divided by a slash in the scratch pad -
Entered.
a. Press L2 through L6 to accept - Pressed.

NOTE
A total of 80 preset V/UHF channel num-
bers may be assigned, five per page on
each of the sixteen PRESETS VU pages.

2. Press R6 to branch to COMM TUNE VU1 or 2

page - Pressed.

3A-23
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays HF preset list and information pertaining to the control of the HF radio.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 IDENT CH FREQ Displays HF current operating database identifier, preset channel num-
ber and selected frequency of tuned radio. Database identifier, preset
channel number or frequency can be modified via the scratch pad.
L2-L6 HF radio identifier Displays inactive available HF identifier, preset channel number and
frequency. Five presets per page for total of 40.
R1 PWR Controls and displays the HF radio power (OFF/ON).
R2 NOT USED
R3 SELCAL Displays the current ARINC 714 SELCAL address. SELCAL is armed
once after inserting a valid four character address and pressing the R3
soft-key.
R4 MOD Displays the current modulation mode setting. Pressing the R4 soft-key
repeatedly revolves selection through LSB (Lower Side Band), USB
(Upper Side Band), AM (Amplitude Modulation), and CW (Continuous
Wave) modes.
R5 SQ UP Selection increases squelch level.
R6 SQ DN Selection decreases squelch level.

Figure 3A-7 COMM TUNE H page

3A-24
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

COMM TUNE HF PAGE DATA 3. Press R1 to set HF radio power off or on (as
desired) - Selected.
ENTRY
4. Enter the ARINC SELCAL address into scratch
pad (as required) - Entered.
PREREQUISITES a. Press R3 - Pressed.
1. Press COMM TUNE hard-key - Pressed. b. Entry displayed.
a. COMM TUNE INDEX page displayed. 5. Press R4 for desired HF modulation mode -
Selected.
2. Select H1 or 2 radio (L4 or L5) - Pressed.
a. Selected HF modulation (USB, LSB, AM or
a. COMM TUNE H1 or 2 1/8 page displayed.
CW) appears in large font.
6. Press R5 or R6 to increase or decrease
DATA ENTRY squelch level - Selected.
1. Enter identifier/preset channel number/fre-
quency into scratch pad for desired HF radio -
Entered.
a. Press L1 - Pressed.
b. Entered identifier/channel number/fre-
quency is displayed on IDENT CH FREQ
field.

NOTE
If not presently powered, tuning the radio
automatically applies power. If power is
required without tuning the radio, the op-
erator can manually control power using
the power (PWR) soft-key.

2. Enter desired identifier/preset channel num-

ber/frequency into scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L2, L3, L4, L5 or L6 to assign the
identifier and frequency to the selected
preset channel number.
b. Entered identifier/channel number/fre-
quency is displayed.

NOTE
There are five preset channels on each of
the eight COMM TUNE H pages.

3A-25 / ( 3A-26 blank )

 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PART 3B. NAV TUNE

Contents page Contents page

NAVIGATION TUNE PAGES ............................ 3B-1 NAV TUNE INDEX PAGE DATA ENTRY ....... 3B-11
NAV TUNE CONTROLS ............................... 3B-1 NAV TUNE VOR PAGE DATA ENTRY .......... 3B-13
NAV TUNE INDEX PAGE ............................. 3B-2
NAV TUNE TAC PAGE DATA ENTRY ........... 3B-15
NAV TUNE VOR PAGE ................................ 3B-3
NAV TUNE TAC PAGE ................................ 3B-4 NAV TUNE ADF PAGE DATA ENTRY ........... 3B-17
NAV TUNE ADF PAGE ................................ 3B-6

NAVIGATION TUNE PAGES NAV TUNE CONTROLS

The navigation tune pages (Figure 3B-1) are used to CNRP Controls (Refer to FAM.1C-27J-1)
tune the navigation radios and display navigation
The CNRP provides the pilots with an alternate
radio data such as radio tune mode, identifier, channel
means of tuning the radios. The NAV hard-key is used
or frequency, range, and bearing.
to select the NAV page which allows navigation radio
The navigation tune pages consist of the following:
frequencies (VOR1, VOR2, TAC1, TAC2, ADF) to be
– NAV TUNE INDEX modified using the CNRP numeric key pad.

– NAV TUNE VOR

NOTE
– NAV TUNE TAC
When retuning a navigation radio using
– NAV TUNE ADF the CNRP, the previous frequency/chan-
nel is stored and the new frequency/chan-
NOTE nel is displayed. Pressing the selected
radio key will toggle the two frequencies/
• The tune mode appears to the left of channels. This toggling function for the
the VOR and TACAN identifiers on navigation radio frequencies/channel is
the display. The following tune modes not available on the NAV TUNE INDEX
are used: page.
• A – autotune
• E – external tune SAMU Controls (Refer to FAM.1C-27J-1)
• M – manual tune
The SAMU provides an operator interface for manipu-
• P – procedure tune lation of the information contained on the CMDU PFD,
• R – remote tune and other displays. It controls the sources of informa-
• ‘ ‘ – invalid tion presented as well as the location of the CMDU
PFD format.
• Tune mode indications are available Some of the selections that may be made from the
for the VOR or TACAN radios only. SAMU include: CMDU PFD location, selection of atti-
Tune mode indications are not avail- tude and heading source (INU 1 or 2) heading select
able for the ADF radio. (MAG, TRUE, or GRID), CDI source and navigation
aid and selection for bearing pointers 1 and 2.

3B-1
FAM.1C-27J-1A

NAV TUNE INDEX PAGE Tuning requests when the radio is powered off results
in the radio being powered on. Selection results in a
The NAV TUNE INDEX page (Figure 3B-2) allows branch to the NAV TUNE VOR1 page.
access to desired navigation radio tune pages and
provides an overview of the navigation radio configu- L2 - BRANCH TO NAV TUNE VOR2 PAGE
ration by displaying current and previous identification
information, preset channel numbers, and frequencies Same functionality as L1, except operations apply to
for all navigation radios. the VOR 2 radio.
The NAV TUNE INDEX page also allows frequencies
L3 - BRANCH TO NAV TUNE TAC1 PAGE
to be modified via the scratch pad.
Data adjacent to soft-key L3 displays TAC1. This is in
NOTE small font if the radio is powered off or failed, and in
large font otherwise. If the TAC 1 radio is powered off,
Power is available when on POWER UP adjacent data displays OFF in small font. If the TAC 1
page the MSTR AV ON soft-key is select- radio is failed, data displays FAILED in small font, and
ed. If power has not been previously ap- adjacent data is blank. If the TAC 1 radio has an
plied to a navigation radio, tuning the uncleared tuning error, data displays CANT TUNE in
navigation radio automatically applies small font, and adjacent data is blank. If the radio is
power. If power is required without tuning powered up and no identifier is associated with the
the radio, the operator can manually con- commanded channel, data displays “-----”. Otherwise,
trol power using the PWR soft-key (R1) data displays the identifier currently being com-
on the NAV TUNE page for the associat- manded in large font. Tuning requests when the radio
ed navigation radio. is powered off results in the radio being powered on.
Selection results in a branch to the NAV TUNE TAC1
Page Access page.

a. Select the NAV TUNE hard-key (Figure 3-1). L4 - BRANCH TO NAV TUNE TAC2 PAGE

b. Select the NAV TUNE INDEX prompt on the NAV Same functionality as L3, except operations apply to
TUNE VOR page. the TAC 2 radio.

c. Select the NAV TUNE INDEX prompt on the NAV L5 - BRANCH TO NAV TUNE ADF1 PAGE
TUNE TAC page.
Data adjacent to soft-key L5 displays LH-ADF. This is
d. Select the NAV TUNE INDEX prompt on the NAV in small font if the radio is powered off or failed, and in
TUNE ADF page. large font otherwise. If the radio is available, and the
emergency mode has been selected, data displays
e. Return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page when
EMGL for low frequency selection, and EMGH for
the WAYPOINT SELECT page was accessed from
high frequency selection. Both emergency identifiers
the NAV TUNE INDEX page.
are displayed in large font inverse video. If the ADF
radio is failed, data displays FAILED in small font. If
Display the ADF radio has an uncleared tuning error, data dis-
plays CANT TUNE in small font, and adjacent data is
L1 - BRANCH TO NAV TUNE VOR1 PAGE blank. If no identifier is associated with the com-
manded frequency, data displays “-----”. Otherwise,
Data adjacent to soft-key L1 displays VOR1. This is in
data displays the identifier currently being com-
small font if the radio is powered off or failed, and in
manded in large font. Tuning requests when the radio
large font otherwise. If the VOR 1 radio is powered off,
is powered off results in the radio being powered on.
data displays OFF in small font, and adjacent data is
Selection of L5 branches to the NAV TUNE ADF1
blank. If the VOR 1 radio is failed, data displays
page.
FAILED in small font. If the VOR 1 radio has an
uncleared tuning error, data displays CANT TUNE in L6
small font, and adjacent data is blank. If the radio is
powered up, and no identifier is associated with the Not operational.
commanded frequency, data displays “-----”. Other-
wise, data displays the identifier currently being com-
manded in large font.

3B-2
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

R1 - VOR1 FREQUENCY R4 - TAC2 CHANNEL

The currently commanded VOR1 frequency is dis- Same functionality as R3, except operations are per-
played adjacent to soft-key R1. If no frequency is formed on TAC 2 radio.
being commanded, the field is filled with “-”. Data dis-
plays the tuning mode, showing autotune, remote R5 - LF-ADF FREQUENCY
tune, or procedure tune. When the radio is unavail- Same functionality as for R1, except operations are
able, this field is blank. performed on LF-ADF radio, and there is no connec-
Valid entries are an identifier contained in the VOR tion with tacan transceivers or the autotune function.
database, a VOR frequency, or a VOR identifier/fre-
quency, both of which are in the database. A valid R6
entry results in commanding the VOR 1 radio to the
entered identifier/frequency. If an identifier or fre- Not operational.
quency is entered and is not contained in the data-
base, the message NOT IN DATABASE is displayed.
Entry includes “A”, which sets the radio into autotune NAV TUNE VOR PAGE
mode if MC autotune enable TAC 1 is true, and pairs The NAV TUNE VOR page displays information per-
the VOR with its corresponding tacan. If an “A” is taining to the control of the VOR radio (Figure 3B-3).
entered and MC autotune enable TAC 1 is false, the
message NOT ALLOWED is displayed.
Page Access
If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier
a. Select the VOR1 or VOR2 prompt on the NAV
exists in the databases (navigation and custom), the
TUNE INDEX 1/2 page.
CNI-SP branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page.
Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with b. Return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page when
a waypoint selected, the CNI-SP uses the selected the WAYPOINT SELECT page was accessed from
waypoint in the VOR identifier field. Upon return from the NAV TUNE VOR page.
the WAYPOINT SELECT page when a waypoint is not
selected, the CNI-SP displays the entry in the scratch
pad. Data in row 4 displays the bearing being received Display
from VOR 1. If the VOR 1 radio is determined to be If access was via the VOR1 prompt, title displays 1,
unavailable, adjacent data fields are blank, and entry and all operations on this page applies to VOR 1. If
is non-operational. access was via the VOR2 prompt, title displays 2, and
all operations applies to VOR 2.
R2 - VOR2 FREQUENCY
Same functionality as R1, except operations are per- L1 - TUNED STATION
formed on VOR 2 radio. Data adjacent to soft-key L1 displays the commanded
tuning information for the VOR. Valid entries are an
R3 - TAC1 CHANNEL
identifier contained in the VOR database, a VOR fre-
Same functionality as R1 except as listed here, and quency, or a VOR identifier/frequency, both of which
operations are performed on TAC 1 radio. are in the database. If a tune request is not contained
Data adjacent to soft-key R3 displays the distance in the database, the message NOT IN DATABASE is
being received from TAC 1. Valid entries are an identi- displayed. Tuning by these methods sets the tune
fier contained in the tacan database, a VOR fre- mode to remote. If the commanded frequency has no
quency, a tacan channel, or a tacan identifier/channel. identifier, “-----” is displayed for the identifier. If the
If the tacan was commanded by entering a frequency, radio is powered off, tuning requests result in the radio
the equivalent channel is displayed, and then com- being powered up and tuned.
manded. Entry into this data field also includes an “A”, If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier
which sets the radio into autotune mode if MC auto- exists in the databases (navigation and custom), the
tune enable TAC 1 is true, and pairs the tacan with its CNI-SP branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page.
corresponding VOR. If “A” is entered and MC auto- Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with
tune enable TAC 1 is false, the message NOT a waypoint selected, the CNI-SP uses the selected
ALLOWED is displayed. waypoint in the VOR identifier field. Upon return from
the WAYPOINT SELECT page when a waypoint is not
selected, the CNI-SP displays the entry in the scratch
pad.

3B-3
FAM.1C-27J-1A

An “A” may also be entered into this line select. When R5 - TEST
MC autotune enable TACn is true, this entry sets the
VOR to autotune, and also sets VOR/tacan pairing to VOR radio test status (OFF/ON) is displayed and con-
ON. When MC autotune enable TACn is false and “A” trolled from TEST soft-key. Selection starts the VOR
is entered at this line select, the error message NOT radio internal self-test.
ALLOWED is displayed. The radio must have a valid VOR ground station sig-
nal in order to properly perform self-test. It is not nec-
L2 THROUGH L5 essary to pre-tune the VOR station; in the test mode
the radio scans for and tune a station if one is in
Not operational. range.
The self test indications are the following:
L6 - BRANCH TO NAV TUNE INDEX PAGE
– 315 degree bearing pointer indication on the
Selection of soft-key L6 branches to the NAV TUNE
PFDs. If no valid VOR station signal is present, the
INDEX page.
bearing pointer rotates at an angular rate of 40 de-
R1 - VOR POWER CONTROL grees per second.

The commanded VOR radio power status (OFF/ON) – VOR station audio is present. If no valid VOR sta-
is displayed and controlled from PWR soft-key. tion signal is present, no VOR audio is present.
– VOR 1 self-test includes MB annunciation for OM
NOTE (Outer Marker), MM (Middle Marker), and IM (Inner
Marker).
Power is available when on POWER UP
page the MSTR AV ON soft-key is select- When the self-test has completed, the state returns to
ed. The PWR soft-key may be used to OFF.
toggle VOR radio power as desired.
NOTE
R2
When the autopilot is engaged and cou-
Not operational. pled to the VOR, operation of the TEST
switch may command an undesired turn.
R3 - MARKER BEACON SENSITIVITY
The commanded VOR marker beacon sensitivity sta- R6
tus is displayed and controlled from MKR BCN soft-
Not operational.
key. It has two selections (LOW, HIGH) used to select
either low or high receiver sensitivity according to the
strength of the incoming signal on VOR 1. NAV TUNE TAC PAGE
This applies only to VOR 1. The field is blank and has
no function for VOR 2. The NAV TUNE TAC page displays information per-
taining to the control of the tacan radio (Figure 3B-4).
NOTE
To narrow the apparent width of marker Page Access
beacon transmissions, select the LOW a. Select the TAC1 or TAC2 prompt on the NAV
setting on the marker beacon soft-key TUNE INDEX 1/2 page.
when flying at high altitudes.
b. Return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page when
R4 - VOR/TACAN PAIRING the WAYPOINT SELECT page was accessed from
the NAV TUNE TAC page.
VOR/tacan pairing status (OFF/ON) is displayed and
controlled from PAIRING soft-key. Selecting pairing
sets the tacan to the VOR channel/frequency, and any Display
further tuning operation on either the VOR or the If access was via the TAC1 prompt, data in title dis-
tacan is performed on both. Unpairing separates any plays 1, and all operations on this page applies to
future tuning operations. TAC 1. If access was via the TAC2 prompt, data in title
displays 2, and all operations applies to TAC 2.

3B-4
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

L1 - TUNED STATION If the GND/AA mode soft-key is in the GND position,

the REC/TR-REC soft-key functions as follows:
Data adjacent to soft-key L1 displays the commanded
information for the tacan. Valid entries are an identifier – In the REC position the receive mode is selected.
contained in the TAC database, a TAC channel, a The TACAN system receives and measures sur-
VOR frequency, or a TAC identifier/channel, both of face beacon fundamental bearing and calculates
which are in the database. If a tune request is not con- the relative bearing.
tained in the database, the message NOT IN DATA-
– In the TR-REC position the transmit-receive mode
BASE is displayed. Tuning by these methods sets the
is selected. The TACAN system interrogates a sur-
tune mode to remote. If the commanded channel has
face beacon and receives both bearing and dis-
no identifier, “---” is displayed for the identifier. If the
tance information. It calculates slant-range
radio is powered off, tuning requests result in the radio
distance and bearing to the surface beacon.
being powered up and commanded to tune.
If the GND/AA mode soft-key is in the AA position, the
If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier REC/TR-REC soft-key functions as follows:
exists in the databases (navigation and custom), the
CNI-SP branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page. – In the REC position the air-to-air receive mode is
Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with selected. The TACAN system receives bearing in-
a waypoint selected, the CNI-SP uses the selected formation only from an aircraft operating as an air-
waypoint in the TAC identifier field. Upon return from borne beacon and calculates the relative bearing to
the WAYPOINT SELECT page when a waypoint is not that aircraft.
selected, the CNI-SP displays the entry in the scratch – In the TR-REC position with air-to-air transmit
pad. mode is selected. The TACAN system interrogates
An “A” may also be entered. This sets the tacan to an aircraft operating as an airborne beacon and re-
autotune, and also sets VOR/tacan pairing to ON. ceives both bearing and distance information to
that aircraft.
L2 THROUGH L5
Not operational. R3 - TACAN GROUND/AIR-TO-AIR MODE
Selection of soft-key R3 controls the tacan ground/air-
L6 - BRANCH TO NAV TUNE INDEX PAGE
to-air mode status (GND/AA). The GND/AA mode
Selection of soft-key L6 branches to the NAV TUNE soft-key works in conjunction with the REC/TR-REC
INDEX page. soft-key.

R1 - TACAN POWER CONTROL NOTE

The commanded tacan radio power status (OFF/ON)
In TACAN ground mode the bottom an-
is displayed and controlled from PWR soft-key.
tenna is selected. In air-to-air mode the
receiver/transmitter unit cycles between
NOTE upper and lower antennas until a signal is
received. This signal is then captured us-
Power is available when on POWER UP
ing the antenna that received the signal.
page the MSTR AV ON soft-key is select-
ed. The PWR soft-key may be used to
toggle VOR radio power as desired. R4 - VOR/TACAN PAIRING
VOR/tacan pairing status (OFF/ON) is displayed and
R2 - TACAN TRANSMIT/RECEIVE controlled from PAIRING soft-key. Selecting pairing
sets the tacan to the VOR channel/frequency, and any
Selection of soft-key R2 controls the commanded
further tuning operation on either the VOR or the
tacan radio transmit/transmit-receive mode status
tacan is performed on both. Unpairing separates any
(REC/TR-REC). The REC/TR-REC mode soft-key
future tuning operations.
works in conjunction with the TACAN ground/air-to-air
(GND/AA) mode soft-key. R5 - TEST
Tacan radio test status (OFF/ON) is displayed and
controlled from TEST soft-key. Selection starts the
tacan radio internal self-test which includes functions
other than the transmitter circuit.

3B-5
FAM.1C-27J-1A

(CBIT monitors all functions including transmitter R1 - ADF POWER CONTROL

power and operation.)
The commanded ADF radio power status (OFF/ON) is
The self-test indications are the following: displayed and controlled from PWR soft-key.

– Distance indication of 000.0-miles on the PFDs. NOTE

– 180 degree bearing pointer indication on the Power is applied when ton POWER UP
PFDs. page the MSTR AV ON soft-key is select-
– Series of audio tones. ed. The PWR soft-key may be used to
toggle ADF radio power as desired.
When the self-test has completed the display line
returns to OFF. R2 - ADF EMERGENCY MODE
R6 The commanded ADF emergency mode status
(EMGL/EMGH) is displayed and controlled from
Not operational.
EMG soft-key. It has three selections (OFF, LO, HI).
Selecting OFF turns off the automatic frequency tune
NAV TUNE ADF PAGE function and allows for manual selection of the
desired radio operating frequency.
The NAV TUNE ADF page displays information per- Selecting the LO position enters 500 KHz as the oper-
taining to the control of the ADF radio (Figure 3B-5). ating frequency. Selecting the HI position enters 2182
KHz as the operating frequency.
Page Access R3 - ADF ANTENNA/ADF
Selection of the LH-ADF prompt from the NAV TUNE The commanded ADF antenna/ADF mode status is
INDEX page displays the NAV TUNE ADF1 page. displayed and controlled from ANT/ADF soft-key.
It has two selections: antenna (ANT), and automatic
direction finder (ADF). The ANT position is used for
Display
reception of voice and for tuning. The loop antenna is
L1 - TUNED STATION not used.
With the mode switch in the ADF position, radio sig-
Data adjacent to soft-key L1 displays the currently nals received by the loop antenna are compared with
commanded ADF radio station. If the emergency signals received by the other loop antenna to provide
mode has been selected, data displays EMGL for low a magnetic bearing to the selected station. This bear-
frequency selection, and EMGH for high frequency ing information is displayed on selected displays for
selection. Both emergency identifiers are displayed in both the pilot and copilot.
large font inverse video.
Valid entries are an ADF frequency, or an ADF identi- R4 - ADF TONE GENERATION
fier/frequency. A valid entry results in commanding the
ADF radio to the entered identifier/frequency. The commanded ADF tone status (OFF/ON) is dis-
If the tuned frequency has no identifier, ----- is dis- played and controlled from TONE soft-key.
played for the identifier. If the radio is powered off, When the TONE soft-key is selected to ON, the modu-
commanding a tune request results in the radio being lated audio is disabled and connects a tone generator
powered up and tuned. for Continuous Wave (CW) operation.
When the TONE soft-key is selected to OFF, modu-
L2 THROUGH L5 lated audio is enabled.

Not operational. R5 - ADF TEST

L6 - BRANCH TO NAV TUNE INDEX PAGE ADF test status (OFF/ON) is displayed and controlled
from TEST soft-key. Selection starts the LF-ADF radio
Selection of soft-key L6 branches to the NAV TUNE radio internal self-test
INDEX page.

3B-6
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

The self test indications are the following:

– 90 degree bearing pointer indication on the PFDs
– 1000 Hz audio tone.
When the self-test has completed the display line
returns to OFF. If a failure is detected the Bearing
Pointer head tail are removed, frequency numbers are
replaced with Xs, and the identifier is blank.

R6
Not operational.

ADF ACAWS Messages

The ADF system is interfaced with the ACAWS for
displaying advisories and system fault messages. The
associated messages and specific crew actions are
listed in the Section III of the FAM.1C-27J-1 manual.

3B-7
FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3B-8
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NAV TUNE Branching

Figure 3B-1

3B-9
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: This page displays tuning information for the navigation radios.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 VOR1 Branches to the NAV TUNE VOR1 page.

L2 VOR2 Branches to the NAV TUNE VOR2 page.
L3 TAC1 Branches to the NAV TUNE TAC1 page.
L4 TAC2 Branches to the NAV TUNE TAC2 page.
L5 LF-ADF Branches to the NAV TUNE ADF1 page.
L6 NOT USED
R1 VOR 1 frequency Displays current VOR 1 frequency, database identifier, and bearing.
Frequency or database identifier can be modified via the scratch pad.
R2 VOR 2 frequency Displays current VOR 2 frequency, database identifier, and bearing.
Frequency or database identifier can be modified via the scratch pad.
R3 TACAN 1 frequency Displays current TAC 1 channel, database identifier, bearing, and dis-
tance. Channel or database identifier can be modified via the scratch
pad.
R4 TACAN 2 frequency Displays current TAC 2 channel, database identifier, bearing, and dis-
tance. Channel or database identifier can be modified via the scratch
pad.
R5 LF-ADF frequency Displays current LF-ADF frequency, and database identifier. Fre-
quency or database identifier can be modified via the scratch pad.
R6 NOT USED

Figure 3B-2 NAV TUNE INDEX page

3B-10
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NAV TUNE INDEX PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. None.

DATA ENTRY

NAV TUNE INDEX PAGE SELECTION

1. Press NAV TUNE hard-key - Pressed.
a. NAV TUNE INDEX page is displayed.

NAV RADIO TUNE PAGE SELECTION

1. Press soft-key L1-L5, corresponding to desired
navigation radio to be tuned - Pressed.
a. NAV TUNE page for selected navigation
radio is displayed.

NOTE
To display the NAV TUNE page for a dif-
ferent navigation radio, press the NAV
TUNE hard-key, or press the NAV TUNE
INDEX soft-key (L6) to display the NAV
TUNE INDEX page and repeat the above
step for the desired navigation radio.

3B-11
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: This page displays information pertaining to the control of the VOR radio.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 IDENT/FREQ Displays current VOR 1 frequency and database identifier which can
be modified via the scratch pad. GS is automatically tuned with LOC
frequencies.
L2-L5 NOT USED
L6 NAV TUNE INDEX Branches back to the NAV TUNE INDEX page.
R1 PWR Controls and displays the VOR radio power (OFF/ON).
R2 NOT USED
R3 MKR BCN Controls and displays the VOR marker beacon sensitivity status of
HIGH (for airways flight) or LOW (for approach).
R4 PAIRING Controls and displays the pairing status (ON/OFF) for VOR and
TACAN tuning synchronization.
R5 TEST Selection initiates the test mode.
R6 NOT USED

Figure 3B-3 NAV TUNE VOR page

3B-12
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NAV TUNE VOR PAGE DATA ENTRY 3. Press R4 to select PAIRING status - Selected.
a. Selected pairing status (OFF or ON) ap-
pears in large font.
PREREQUISITES
4. Press R5 to select TEST mode (if desired) ON
1. NAV TUNE VOR1 (or 2) page is displayed. - Selected.
2. Identifier or frequency of the desired VOR nav-
igation radio is known or is in the database. NOTE
Test is only functional with a valid VOR
DATA ENTRY (NAV TUNE INDEX PAGE) signal.

1. Enter identifier or frequency data in the scratch a. The test ON indication appears in large
pad for desired VOR navigation radio - En- font during test.
tered.
a. Press L1 - Pressed. NOTE
b. Selected VOR tune mode, identifier, and When the test is complete, the test indica-
frequency are displayed. tion returns to OFF (R5), and OK appears
on the FPDI if the VOR test is successful.
2. Press R3 to select marker beacon (MKR BCN)
sensitivity - Selected.
a. Selected marker beacon sensitivity (LOW
or HIGH) from VOR 1 appears in large font.

3B-13
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: This page displays information pertaining to the control of the TACAN radio.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 IDENT/FREQ Displays current TACAN 1 channel and database identifier which can
be modified via the scratch pad.
L2-L5 NOT USED
L6 NAV TUNE INDEX Branches back to the NAV TUNE INDEX page.
R1 PWR Controls and displays the TACAN radio power (OFF/ON).
R2 REC/TR-REC Displays and selects the status of the receiver mode.
R3 GND/AA Displays and selects the status of the receiver mode ground/air mode
switch.
R4 PAIRING Controls and displays the pairing status (ON/OFF) for VOR and
TACAN tuning synchronization.
R5 TEST Selection initiates the test mode.
R6 NOT USED

Figure 3B-4 NAV TUNE TAC page

3B-14
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NAV TUNE TAC PAGE DATA ENTRY 3. Press R3 to select receiver ground/air mode
status - Selected.
a. Selected receiver ground/air mode status
PREREQUISITES (GND or AA) appears in large font.
1. NAV TUNE TAC1 (or 2) page is displayed. 4. Press R4 to select PAIRING status - Selected.
2. Identifier or channel number of the desired a. Selected pairing status (OFF or ON) ap-
tacan navigation radio is known or is in the da- pears in large font.
tabase.
5. Press R5 to select TEST mode (if desired) ON
- Selected.
DATA ENTRY (NAV TUNE INDEX PAGE)
NOTE
1. Enter identifier or channel number in the
scratch pad for desired tacan navigation radio Test is only functional with a valid tacan
- Entered. signal.
a. Press L1 - Pressed.
a. The test indication ON appears in large
b. Selected tacan tune mode, identifier, and
font during test.
channel number are displayed.
2. Press R2 to select receiver mode status - Se- NOTE
lected.
When the test is complete, the test indica-
a. Selected receiver mode status (REC or tion returns to OFF.
TR-REC) appears in large font.

3B-15
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: This page displays information pertaining to the control of the ADF radio.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 IDENT/FREQ Displays current LF-ADF frequency and database identifier which can
be modified via the scratch pad.
L2-L5 NOT USED
L6 NAV TUNE INDEX Branches back to the NAV TUNE INDEX page.
R1 PWR Controls and displays the ADF No. 1 radio power (OFF/ON).
R2 EMG Displays and selects the status of the emergency mode.
R3 ANT/ADF Displays and selects the status of the antenna/ADF switch.
R4 TONE Controls and displays the tone status (ON/OFF).
R5 TEST Selection initiates the test mode.
R6 NOT USED

Figure 3B-5 NAV TUNE ADF page

3B-16
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NAV TUNE ADF PAGE DATA ENTRY 3. Press R3 to select antenna/ADF switch status
- Selected.

PREREQUISITES a. Selected antenna/ADF switch status (ANT

or ADF) appears in large font.
1. NAV TUNE ADF1 page is displayed.
4. Press R4 to select TONE status - Selected.
2. Identifier or frequency of the desired ADF nav-
igation radio is known or is in the database. a. Selected TONE status (OFF or ON) ap-
pears in large font.
5. Press R5 to select TEST mode (if desired) ON
DATA ENTRY (NAV TUNE INDEX PAGE)
- Selected.
1. Enter identifier or frequency in the scratch pad
for desired ADF navigation radio - Entered. NOTE
a. Press L1 - Pressed. ADF test is only functional with a valid
b. Selected ADF identifier and frequency are ADF signal.
displayed.
a. The test indication ON appears in large
NOTE font during test.

The suffix NB must be added to the ADF

NOTE
identifier to use database tuning of the
station. When the test is complete, the test indica-
tion returns to OFF.
2. Press R2 to select emergency frequency mode
status - Selected.
a. Selected emergency frequency mode sta-
tus (OFF, LO, or HI) appears in large font.

3B-17 / ( 3B-18 blank )

 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PART 3C. IFF

Contents page Contents page

IFF PAGES ....................................................... 3C-1 TCAS CONTROLS ....................................... 3C-4

INTRODUCTION .......................................... 3C-1 IFF 1/3 PAGE DATA ENTRY ............................ 3C-7
IFF 1/3 PAGE ............................................... 3C-1
IFF 2/3 PAGE DATA ENTRY ............................ 3C-9
IFF 2/3 PAGE ............................................... 3C-2
IFF 3/3 PAGE ............................................... 3C-3 IFF 3/3 PAGE DATA ENTRY .......................... 3C-11

IFF PAGES Display

L1 - EMERGENCY

INTRODUCTION L1 selects the system status. When selected to ON,

the MC turns system power on, set all modes to emer-
All identification operations are performed through gency settings and allows the system to transmit an
three IFF pages (Figure 3C-1). Commands from the emergency reply when interrogated.
CNI-MUs (ICDU) are relayed via the CNI-SPs to the The MC places TCAS in the Traffic Advisory (TA)
MCs, which controls the IFF transponder, and relays mode if the system is not in STANDBY.
IFF information back to the CNI-MUs and CNRP for
display.
NOTE
Selection of EMERGENCY commands
IFF 1/3 PAGE the Mode 4 to ON. If the Mode 4 codes
are not loaded, this results in a Mode 4
IFF 1/3 page (Figure 3C-2) provides for overall sys-
CAUTION annunciation.
tem control of the civil functions of the IFF transpon-
der.
L2 - MODE S
NOTE Selection of L2 enables or disables Mode S.

IFF mode 3 codes may be entered from L3 - CODE (Mode S)

either the CNRP scratch pad entry or
CNI-MU IFF 1/3 page scratch pad entry. Data adjacent to L3 displays the aircraft Mode S code.
For aircraft power up, the Mode S code defaults to the
aircraft assigned code obtained from data contained in
Page Access the mission computer Aircraft Specific Data (ASD) file.
Manual code entry allowed for individual mission
a. Select the IFF hard-key (Figure 3-1).
flight. If the ASD file data is not available upon aircraft
b. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the IFF 3/3 power up, a Mandatory Entry field will appear and
page. Mode S operation will not occur until the crew manu-
ally enters the aircraft assigned Mode S code.
c. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the IFF 2/3
page. L4 - MODE C
Selection of L4 enables or disables Mode C.

3C-1
FAM.1C-27J-1A

L5 - MODE 3 R6 - MODE TEST

Selection of L5 enables or disables Mode 3. When any IFF modes (1, 2, 3, 4, S, C) are ON, or if
TCAS is in TA or TA/RA, pressing the MODE TEST
L6 - CODE/IDENT soft-key initiates a self-test for any of the modes that
The current MODE 3 code is displayed. The code can are ON. MODE TEST is inhibited when all modes are
be entered via the scratch pad or from the CNRP. If OUT or the IFF is in STBY.
EMER is set to ON, then 7700 is displayed. Testing mode S also initiates TCAS self test. Test fail-
When IDENT is selected, (pressing soft-key when ures are displayed via the ACAWS.
scratch pad is empty) the system generates a coded While IFF modes are under test, MODE TEST display
reply for Modes 1 through 3. Mode C and 4 are not is replaced with highlighted TESTING. When test is
affected. Identification pulse trains are transmitted for complete, display returns to MODE TEST.
approximately 18 seconds and are not reinitialized by
additional soft-key presses for the duration of the NOTE
transmission. In addition IDENT can also be initiated
Mode S and TCAS mode tests only func-
by keying transmit of the V/UHF communication radio
tion when the aircraft is on the ground.
when the MIC IDENT function (IFF 2/3 page) is
enabled.

R1 - POWER IFF 2/3 PAGE

Selection of R1 controls power to both IFF and TCAS. IFF 2/3 page (Figure 3C-3) controls the military spe-
Selecting EMER to ON will also turn POWER to the cific functions of the IFF transponder.
ON state. The POWER soft-key may be used to tog-
gle power as desired. Page Access

NOTE a. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the IFF 1/3
page.
Power is applied when on POWER UP
b. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the IFF 3/3
page the MSTR AV ON soft-key is select-
page.
ed (displayed in small font). The POWER
soft-key may be used to toggle power as
desired. Display

R2 - STBY/ON L1 - MODE 1

Selection of R2 selects the IFF transceiver into Selection of L1 enables or disables Mode 1.
standby or normal mode. When aircraft power is
L2 - CODE (Mode 1)
applied, the IFF is switched in STBY mode. This line
is non-operational when the IFF POWER is set to L2 is used to enter the Mode 1 code.
OFF. Automatically turned ON when EMER is tuned
ON. Can also be tuned ON via the CNRP. L3 - MODE 2
IFF selected to STBY overrides the TCAS mode
Selection of L3 enables or disables Mode 2.
select and forces the TCAS system to remain in
standby. L4 - CODE (Mode 2)
R3 - TCAS L4 is used to enter the Mode 2 code.
(Refer to TCAS CONTROLS para.) L5 - MICROPHONE IDENTIFICATION
R4 - TCAS altitude search When the MIC IDENT soft-key is placed to ON, and
the mode 1 or mode 3 coder group selector control
(Refer to TCAS CONTROLS para.)
has a code set in, the system generates coded replies
R5 - FLT LVL for modes 1 and 3 (if a UHF radio is keyed). Modes S,
2, C, and 4 are not affected.
(Refer to TCAS CONTROLS para.) At aircraft power up, MIC IDENT defaults to OFF.

3C-2
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

L6 IFF 3/3 PAGE

Not operational. IFF 3/3 page (Figure 3C-4) provides control of certain
functions of the IFF transponder and TCAS.
R1 - MODE 4
Selection of R1 enables or disables Mode 4. Page Access
R2 - ZEROIZE a. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the IFF 2/3
page.
R2 is used to erase the Mode 4 crypto code.
b. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the IFF 1/3
NOTE page.

IFF zeroization may be activated from ei-

ther the IFF 2/3 page or ZEROIZE 1/2 Display
page (Part 3H). When the page is select- L1 - ATC REPLY
ed for display, the IFF prompt is displayed
in large font. If the IFF has been com- L1 is used to toggle ATC REPLY function between
manded to zeroize, IFF is displayed in OFF and ON.
small font while zeroization of data is in With the ATC REPLY soft-key to ON (defaulted ON
process. when power is applied to the aircraft):
– Inhibits transponder (Mode 3/A, 3/C & Mode S) Air
R3 - HOLD to Ground Replies.
R3 is used to hold the Mode 4 crypto code through a – Allows all “Formation” members to operate IFF in
long-term power interrupt such as refueling opera- ATC airspace without causing interference to ATC
tions. Will not be available, as indicated by small font, interrogator.
if the Crypto device is NOT installed in the IFF RT or if
the MC has lost communications with the IFF. – All “Formation” members remain “visible” to nearby
TCAS.
R4 - DAY A/B
– Allows “Formation” members to operate ownship
Selection of R4 selects either the A or B Mode 4 TCAS.
crypto code.
L2 - VERIFY OFF
R5 - M4 REPLY/CAUTION
Functions as a safeguard to prevent inadvertent
R5 data illuminates when the IFF is transmitting and selection of ATC REPLY off. Soft-key must be pressed
replies to a received Mode 4 interrogation (REPLY), or within 5 seconds of selecting L1 to OFF to activate the
fails to respond to a Mode 4 interrogation (CAUTION). selection.
The data field is blank until a challenge is received.
M4 CAUTION is displayed when one of the following L3 - FLT ID
conditions occur:
L3 is used to enter the aircraft call sign or tail number.
a. The IFF is not loaded with a valid Mode 4 key Allows automatic ID for ATC radar surveillance via
or has been zeroized. Mode S interrogator replies (not the same as the
b. The IFF has failed its self-test cycle. Mode S address).
c. A Mode 4 interrogation which is compatible
with the code A or B selected has been re- L4 THROUGH L6
ceived but no Mode 4 reply was transmitted. Not operational.
This can occur if IFF is in standby mode.
d. The IFF Mode 4 Crypto Card is not installed. R1- TCAS BRDCST
(Refer to TCAS CONTROLS para.)
R6 - RAD TEST
Selection of R6 initiates a radiation test on any mode R2 THROUGH R6
that is turned on. Not operational.

3C-3
FAM.1C-27J-1A

TCAS CONTROLS R4 - TCAS altitude search

R4 selects the TCAS altitude search. The soft-key has
TCAS Page Description three selections (ABV (above), BLW (below), NORM
(normal)). When ABV is selected (normally used for
TCAS operation is controlled via IFF 1/3 page and IFF
take-off), TCAS displays non-threat traffic from 9000
3/3 page (Figure 3C-2 and Figure 3C-4) to: activate or
feet above to 2700 feet below the aircraft.
deactivate the transponder, select TCAS operating
When NORM is selected (normally used for cruise),
modes, select altitude display limits, select transpon-
TCAS displays non-threat traffic from 2700 feet above
der identification code, and perform functional tests.
to 2700 feet below the aircraft.
When BLW is selected (normally used for landing),
The following soft-keys are used to control TCAS:
TCAS displays non-threat traffic from 2700 feet above
to 9000 feet below the aircraft.
IFF 1/3 Page At aircraft power up, the TCAS altitude search
defaults to NORM.
R1 - POWER
R5 - FLT LVL
Selection of R1 controls power to both IFF and TCAS.
Immediately following power on, a power-up BIT is R5 controls the presentation of the TCAS intruder
conducted to test all TCAS internal and external inter- symbol altitude data tag. When FLT LVL is selected to
faces. If no failures are detected, the system ON, the intruder altitude data tag is presented as
advances to the flight operation state. If a failure is “Absolute Altitude” in Flight Level format relative to
detected, a “TCAS FAIL” ACAWS Advisory message MSL. When selected to OFF, the intruder altitude data
is displayed and the results of the test are stored in tag is presented as “Relative Altitude” to own aircraft
non-volatile memory in the mission computer. position.
Flight level is defaulted to OFF when power is applied
R3 - TCAS to the aircraft. If a TA or RA intruder occurs, flight level
TCAS mode is set with R3, which has three selections reverts to OFF.
(STBY (standby), TA (Traffic Advisory), and RA (Res-
R6 - MODE TEST
olution Advisory)). In the standby mode, all TCAS
broadcast, surveillance, and tracking operations are When Mode S is ON, a self test of the TCAS can be
disabled and the TCAS traffic displayed is blank initiated by soft-key selection. The test will display
except for the TCAS STBY announciation. representative TCAS alerts on the CMDU PFD and
In the TA mode, the flight crew is assisted by visually perform an initiated self test of the system. A success-
locating an intruder. The display presents the range, ful test puts TCAS back into the mode it was in prior to
bearing and relative or absolute altitude (if selected). selection of the MODE TEST soft-key. If a failure is
Only traffic advisories are generated. The information detected, the “TCAS FAIL” ACAWS Advisory mes-
contains no suggested maneuvers. sage is displayed.
In the TA/RA mode, both TA and RA information is TCAS uses the weight on wheels status to inhibit the
displayed. Both traffic and resolution advisories are MODE TEST soft-key while in flight.
generated. The RA information indicates the action
the crew should take (and/or avoid taking) to minimize
the risk of collision. The RA may be preventative or IFF 3/3 Page
corrective in nature, depending on the flight regime of R1- TCAS BRDCST
the aircraft at the time of the advisory.
At aircraft power up, the TCAS mode defaults to R1 is used to deactivate TCAS self-initiated broadcast
STBY. squitter transmissions to allow “Formation” members
to operate ownship TCAS in ATC airspace.
NOTE
The TCAS soft-key may be selected inde-
pendent from the IFF STBY/ON soft-key.
However, TCAS operation is dependent
on IFF system being on and both Mode S
and Mode C (altitude reporting) being on.

3C-4
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

IFF Branching

Figure 3C-1

3C-5
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: This page is used to control the civil function of the IFF transponder.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 EMER Selects/deselects (ON/OFF) emergency mode.

L2 MODE S Displays and selects the Mode S (squitter) status (ON/OUT).
L3 CODE Displays aircraft unique Mode S code from ASD file. If required, the
code may be manually entered for individual mission flight.
L4 MODE C Displays and selects the Mode C (altitude reporting) status (ON/OUT).
L5 MODE 3 Displays and selects the Mode 3 (squawk) status (ON/OUT).
L6 CODE/IDENT Controls the Mode 3 code and IDENT status.
R1 POWER Controls and displays the IFF and TCAS power status (OFF/ON).
R2 STBY/ON Selects the IFF transceiver standby or normal mode.
R3 TCAS Selects the TCAS mode (STBY/TA/RA).
R4 Altitude search select Selects the TCAS non-threat and proximity intruder search altitude.
R5 FLT LVL If Flight Level is selected ON, TCAS intruder altitude is displayed as
“Absolute Altitude”. If Flight Level is selected to OFF, TCAS intruder
altitude is displayed as “Relative Altitude” to own-ship altitude.
R6 MODE TEST Initiates a mode test for any modes that are selected ON.

Figure 3C-2 IFF 1/3 page

3C-6
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

IFF 1/3 PAGE DATA ENTRY NOTE

Mode 3 ident code may also be entered
using the CNRP.
PREREQUISITES
1. Mission specific IFF codes are available. 8. Press R1 to turn (toggle) system power on
(ON) and off (OFF) - Selected.
2. Mode 4 loaded (if required).
NOTE
DATA ENTRY The MSTR AV ON soft-key selection
(POWER UP page) will initially apply
1. Press IFF hard-key - Pressed.
power to the system in the standby mode.
a. IFF 1/3 page displayed.
9. Press R2 to toggle the system between ON
2. Press L1 to toggle emergency mode between
and standby mode - Selected.
on (ON) and off (OFF) - Selected.
a. STBY places the system to standby and
NOTE requires a 1 minute warm-up time.
b. Selecting ON selects the system in normal
Selecting emergency setting to ON turns mode.
system power on and sets all modes to
the emergency settings until selected to 10. Press R3 to toggle between TCAS modes - Se-
OFF. If a test of the emergency transmis- lected.
sion is required, inform the tower of the
a. Selected TCAS mode (STBY, TA, or RA)
test and transmit only as long as neces-
appears in large font.
sary. Emergency mode will automatically
force ATC REPLY to ON.
NOTE
3. Press L2 to toggle Mode S between on (ON)
Selecting RA activates the TA/RA mode
and out (OUT) - Selected.
of operation.
4. Press L3 to enter Mode S code in the scratch
pad - Entered. 11. Press R4 to toggle between TCAS search
modes - Selected.
a. Press L3 - Pressed.
b. CODE line data updated. a. Selected TCAS search mode (ABV, BLW,
or NORM) appears in large font.
NOTE 12. Press R5 to select TCAS intruder altitude to
display flight level (ON) or altitude relative to
Mode S code is automatically entered un- own aircraft (OFF) - Selected.
less an “AC CONFIG INVALID” ACAWS
caution message is displayed. Mode S is 13. Press R6 to perform IFF mode testing -
aircraft specific and can be obtained from Pressed.
the aircraft identification placard located
in the flight station. NOTE

5. Press L4 to toggle Mode C between on (ON) Mode testing is only available for ground
and out (OUT) - Selected. test. The system BIT informs the crew of
status during flight.
6. Press L5 to toggle Mode 3 between on (ON)
and out (OUT) - Selected. 14. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to branch to IFF
7. Press L6 to enter Mode 3 ident code in the 2/3 page - Pressed.
scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L6 - Pressed.
b. CODE/IDENT line data updated.

3C-7
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: This page is used to control the military function of the IFF transponder.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 MODE 1 Displays and selects the Mode 1 status (ON/OUT).

L2 CODE Selection enters the Mode 1 code from the scratch pad.
L3 MODE 2 Displays and selects the Mode 2 status (ON/OUT).
L4 CODE Selection enters the Mode 2 code from the scratch pad.
L5 MIC IDENT Selects/deselects microphone key IDENT function (ON/OFF).
L6 NOT USED
R1 MODE 4 Displays and selects the Mode 4 status (ON/OUT).
R2 ZEROIZE Used to erase the Mode 4 crypto code.
R3 HOLD Used to hold the Mode 4 crypto code through a long-term power inter-
rupt.
R4 DAY A/B Selects either the A or B Mode 4 crypto code.
R5 M4 CAUTION/REPLY Used to inform the operator when the system responds or cannot
respond to a Mode 4 interrogation. Initiating emergency mode when
Mode 4 codes have not been loaded into the active IFF results in an
”IFF 1(2) MODE 4 CAUTION” ACAWS Caution message and an M4
CAUTION message on the soft-key R5 field.
R6 RAD TEST Selection initiates a radiate test on any modes that are selected ON.

Figure 3C-3 IFF 2/3 page

3C-8
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

IFF 2/3 PAGE DATA ENTRY 8. Press R3 to hold Mode 4 for an anticipated
power interrupt - Pressed.

PREREQUISITES NOTE
1. IFF 1/3 page displayed. If a brief stop is anticipated and power is
to be removed, a crew member should
2. Operator presses NEXT PAGE hard-key. stay with the aircraft to prevent possible
a. IFF 2/3 page displayed. compromise.

9. Press R4 to toggle Mode 4 day crypto code -

DATA ENTRY Selected.

1. Press L1 to toggle Mode 1 transmit state be- a. Selected Mode 4 day crypto code (A or B)
tween on (ON) and out (OUT) - Selected. appears in large font.

2. Press L2 to enter Mode 1 code in the scratch 10. Data field adjacent to R5 displays either M4
pad - Entered. REPLY or M4 CAUTION. This informs the op-
erator when Mode 4 is challenged and the sys-
a. Press L2 - Pressed. tem is responding, or if the system is
b. CODE line data updated. challenged by a code other than prescribed.
3. Press L3 to toggle Mode 2 transmit state be- 11. Press R6 to perform a mode radiate test -
tween on (ON) and out (OUT) - Selected. Pressed.
4. Press L4 to enter Mode 2 code in the scratch
pad - Entered. NOTE

a. Press L4 - Pressed. Test is only functional on the ground.

b. CODE line data updated.
12. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to branch to IFF
5. Press L5 to toggle microphone ident state be- 3/3 page - Pressed.
tween on (ON) and out (OUT) - Selected.

NOTE
If selected to ON, the IFF transmits an
IDENT reply for each interrogation re-
ceived during the 20 seconds immediate-
ly following the keying of either V/UHF
transmitter.

6. Press R1 to toggle Mode 4 transmit state be-

tween on (ON) and out (OUT) - Selected.
7. Press R2 to zeroize Mode 4 code - Pressed.

3C-9
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: This page is used to control the IFF transponder and TCAS.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 ATC REPLY Selects/deselects ATC REPLY mode (ON/OFF).

ATC REPLY is automatically selected ON when the aircraft is powered
up, IFF power is selected OFF, or IFF emergency is selected.
L2 VERIFY OFF Operator confirmation required within 5 seconds of a request to turn
ATC REPLY off.
L3 FLT ID Selection loads the crew defined aircraft ID entered in the scratch pad.
L4-L6 NOT USED
R1 TCAS BRDCST Selects/deselects TCAS broadcast mode (ON/OFF).
TCAS BRDCST is automatically selected ON when the aircraft is pow-
ered up, IFF power is selected OFF, or IFF emergency is selected.
R2-R6 NOT USED

Figure 3C-4 IFF 3/3 page

3C-10
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

IFF 3/3 PAGE DATA ENTRY 3. To select TCAS broadcast to OFF:

a. Press R1 - Pressed.
b. TCAS BRDCST OFF is displayed in in-
PREREQUISITES
verse video.
1. IFF 1/3 page displayed.
2. Operator presses NEXT PAGE hard-key twice.
NOTE

a. IFF 3/3 page displayed. TCAS BRDCST is automatically selected

ON when the aircraft is powered up, IFF
power is selected ON, or IFF emergency
DATA ENTRY is selected.

1. To select ATC REPLY to OFF:

a. Press L1 - Pressed.
b. VERIFY OFF display adjacent to L2 is
highlighted for 5 seconds.
c. Press L2 - Pressed.
d. ATC REPLY OFF is displayed in inverse
video.

NOTE
ATC REPLY is automatically selected ON
when the aircraft is powered up, IFF pow-
er is selected ON, or IFF emergency is
selected.

2. To enter aircraft ID code:

a. Enter supplement Mode 3 & Mode S code
aircraft identification (8 character alphanu-
meric) in the scratch pad.
b. Press L3 - Pressed.
c. FLT ID line data updated.

3C-11 / ( 3C-12 blank )

 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PART 3D. NAVIGATION CONTROL

Contents page Contents page

NAVIGATION CONTROL PAGES .................... 3D-1 INAV CTRL SENSORS 2/3 PAGE
INAV CONTROL SOLUTION PAGE ............. 3D-1 DATA ENTRY ............................................. 3D-15
INAV CONTROL SENSOR PAGE ................ 3D-2 INAV CTRL INDEX 3/3 PAGE
INAV CONTROL INDEX PAGE .................... 3D-2 DATA ENTRY ............................................. 3D-17
EGI STATUS 1/2 PAGE ............................... 3D-3 EGI STATUS 1/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY .......... 3D-19
EGI STATUS 2/2 PAGE ............................... 3D-4
EGI STATUS 2/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY .......... 3D-21
INS STATUS 1/2 PAGE ................................ 3D-4
INS STATUS 2/2 PAGE ................................ 3D-5 INS STATUS 1/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY .......... 3D-23
INS ALIGN PAGE ......................................... 3D-5 INS STATUS 2/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY .......... 3D-25
GPS STATUS 1/2 PAGE .............................. 3D-6
INS ALIGN PAGE DATA ENTRY .................... 3D-27
GPS STATUS 2/2 PAGE .............................. 3D-7
DADS PAGE ................................................. 3D-7 GPS STATUS 1/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY ......... 3D-29
POSITION UPDATE PAGE .......................... 3D-8 GPS STATUS 2/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY ......... 3D-31
INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 PAGE DATA ENTRY .. 3D-13 DADS PAGE DATA ENTRY ........................... 3D-33
POSITION UPDATE PAGE DATA ENTRY ..... 3D-35

NAVIGATION CONTROL PAGES b. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the INAV
CTRL INDEX 3/3 page.
The navigation control pages are used to perform c. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the INAV
navigation alignments, determine the status of the CTRL SENSORS 2/3 page.
navigation system, to control navigation sensors and
solutions, and to perform navigation position and solu-
tion updates. Display
The NAV CTRL hard-key on the CNI-MU (ICDU) pro- The page title displays the CNI-SP source. Data
vides the operator a means to access the associated below the title field displays the navigation position for
navigation control pages (Figure 3D-1). the CNI-SP.

L1 THROUGH L4, R1 THROUGH R4 - SOLUTION

INAV CONTROL SOLUTION PAGE SELECTION

The INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page displays the naviga- Soft-keys L1 through L4 and R1 through R4 list the
tion source and source information assigned to the possible navigation sources. If the navigation source
system (Figure 3D-2). is displayed in large font, it is available for use.
Data under each navigation source displays the Fig-
ure Of Merit (FOM) and Estimated Horizontal Error
Page Access (EHE), respectively, for that particular navigation
source.
a. Select the NAV CTRL hard-key (Figure 3-1).

3D-1
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Data adjacent to L1 and R1 display a U when a posi- Display

tion update is active and the position update bias has
been added to form the navigation position. This is The page title displays the CNI-SP source. Data
done only for the EGI1 and EGI2 solution. below the title field displays the navigation position for
Selection of a navigation source, when it is available, the CNI-SP.
is achieved by pressing the soft-key next to that L1 THROUGH L4, R1 THROUGH R4 - SENSOR
source. The AUTO/MAN switch is automatically SELECTION
placed into MAN, and the selected navigation source
is displayed in large font, inverse video. Soft-keys L1 through L4 and R1 through R4 displays
sensor selection. By default all navigation sensors are
L5 - INAV POSITION DELTA selected for use in the navigation solution when the
sensor becomes available. Selection is indicated by
Data adjacent to L5 contains the value of the bearing the sensor being displayed in large font, inverse
portion of the INAV position delta referenced to True video.
North, and adjacent data fields contain the range por-
tion of the same INAV position delta. L5, L6 AND R5
The values shown are computed from the onside
solution to the offside solution. If either solution is Not operational.
unavailable, the fields displays the default values. R6 - BRANCH TO POSITION UPDATE PAGE
L6 - AUTOMATIC NAVIGATION SELECTION Selection of the soft-key R6 branches to the POSI-
Data adjacent to L6 controls and displays status for TION UPDATE page.
the automatic navigation selection switch (AUTO/
MAN). When AUTO is selected, the CNI-SP selects its
navigation source. The soft-key may be used to select
INAV CONTROL INDEX PAGE
the CNI navigation source at any time. The CNI The INAV CTRL INDEX 3/3 page provides a menu to
selects the source with the best FOM and then the access the various navigation sensors (Figure 3D-4).
best EHE. If more than one solution have the same
FOM and EHE the CNI will select the navigation solu-
tion in the following order: EGI, IN/Radio, INS Only, Page Access
GPS. When in manual (MAN), the CNI-SP is prohib- a. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the INAV
ited from changing the navigation source. When CTRL SENSORS 2/3 page.
changed from AUTO to MAN, the current navigation
source remains selected. b. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the INAV
CTRL SOLN 1/3 page.
R5
Not operational. Display
R6 - BRANCH TO POSITION UPDATE PAGE The page title displays the CNI-SP source. Data
below the title field displays the navigation position for
Selection of the soft-key R6 branches to the POSI- the CNI-SP.
TION UPDATE page.
L1 - BRANCH TO EGI1 STATUS PAGE

INAV CONTROL SENSOR PAGE Selection of the soft-key L1 branches to the EGI STA-
TUS 1/2 page for EGI1.
The INAV CTRL SENSORS 2/3 page displays selec-
tion information for the navigation sensors (Figure 3D- L2 - BRANCH TO GPS1 STATUS PAGE
3).
Selection of the soft-key L2 branches to the GPS
STATUS 1/2 page for GPS1.
Page Access
L3 - BRANCH TO INS1 STATUS PAGE
a. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the INAV
CTRL INDEX 3/3 page. Selection of the soft-key L3 branches to the INS STA-
TUS 1/2 page for INS1.
b. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the INAV
CTRL SOLN 1/3 page.

3D-2
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

L4 - BRANCH TO DADS1 PAGE d. Select either the PREV PAGE or NEXT PAGE
hard-key from the EGI STATUS 2/2 page.
Selection of the soft-key L4 branches to the DADS
page for DADS1. e. The EGI STATUS 1/2 page is also accessible by
selecting the EGI prompt from the display of EGI
L5 AND L6 STATUS 1/2 for the EGI not selected on the cur-
rent page.
Not operational.

R1 - BRANCH TO EGI2 STATUS PAGE

Display
Selection of the soft-key R1 branches to the EGI STA-
The page title displays the EGI number for the page.
TUS 1/2 page for EGI2.
Data fields below the title displays the FOM and EHE
R2 - BRANCH TO GPS2 STATUS PAGE for the EGI indicated in the title. Data adjacent to soft-
key R6 contains the number for the EGI that is not
Selection of the soft-key L2 branches to the GPS contained in the title. Field below the FOM/EHE dis-
STATUS 1/2 page for GPS2. plays the current navigation source position for the
EGI indicated in the title.
R3 - BRANCH TO INS2 STATUS PAGE Remaining fields show the ground track, ground-
Selection of the soft-key R3 branches to the INS STA- speed, altitude, heading, and mode for the EGI indi-
TUS 1/2 page for INS2. cated in the title. The possible values for data
adjacent to soft-key L4 (EGI Mode) are ON, ALIGN,
R4 - BRANCH TO DADS2 PAGE IFA, NAV, NARF, and OFF.

Selection of the soft-key R4 branches to the DADS L1 THROUGH L4

page for DADS2.
Not operational.
R5
L5 - BRANCH TO GPS STATUS 1/2 PAGE
Not operational.
Selection of the soft-key L5 results in a branch to the
R6 - BRANCH TO POSITION UPDATE PAGE GPSn STATUS 1/2 page for the GPS specified adja-
cent to L5.
Selection of the soft-key R6 branches to the POSI-
TION UPDATE page. L6 - BRANCH TO INAV CTRL INDEX PAGE
Selection of the soft-key L6 results in a branch to the
EGI STATUS 1/2 PAGE INAV CTRL INDEX 3/3 page.

The EGI STATUS 1/2 page monitors and displays the R1 THROUGH R4
EGI status (Figure 3D-5).
Not operational.

Page Access R5 - BRANCH TO INS STATUS 1/2 PAGE

a. Select either the EGI1 or EGI2 prompt on the INAV Selection of the soft-key R5 results in a branch to the
CTRL INDEX 3/3 page. Selection of either prompt INSn STATUS 1/2 page for the INS specified adjacent
results in the display of the EGI STATUS 1/2 page to R5.
for the EGI indicated in the prompt.
R6 - BRANCH TO EGI STATUS 1/2 PAGE
b. Select either the EGI1 or EGI2 prompt on the INS
Selection soft-key R6 results in a branch to the EGIn
STATUS 1/2 page. Selection of either prompt re-
STATUS 1/2 page for the EGI specified adjacent to
sults in the display of the EGI STATUS 1/2 page for
R6.
the EGI indicated in the prompt.
c. Select either the EGI1 or EGI2 prompt on the GPS
STATUS 1/2 or 2/2 page. Selection of either
prompt results in the display of the EGI STATUS 1/
2 page for the EGI indicated in the prompt.

3D-3
FAM.1C-27J-1A

EGI STATUS 2/2 PAGE L6 - BRANCH TO INAV CTRL INDEX PAGE

The EGI STATUS 2/2 page monitors the EGI and dis- Selection of the soft-key L6 results in a branch to the
plays the status (Figure 3D-6). INAV CTRL INDEX 3/3 page.

R1 THROUGH R4
Page Access
Not operational.
a. Select the EGI1 or EGI2 prompt on the INS STA-
TUS 2/2 page. R5 - BRANCH TO INS STATUS 2/2 PAGE
b. Select the PREV PAGE or NEXT PAGE hard-key Selection of the soft-key R5 results in a branch to the
from the EGI STATUS 1/2 page. INSn STATUS 2/2 page for the INS specified adjacent
to R5.
c. Select the EGI prompt on the EGI STATUS 2/2 for
the EGI not selected on the current page. R6 - BRANCH TO EGI STATUS 2/2 PAGE
Selection soft-key R6 results in a branch to the EGIn
Display STATUS 2/2 page for the EGI specified adjacent to
R6.
The page title displays the EGI number for the page.
Data fields below the title displays the FOM and EHE
for the EGI indicated in the title. Data adjacent to soft-
INS STATUS 1/2 PAGE
key R6 contains the number for the EGI that is not
contained in the title. Field below the FOM/EHE dis- The INS STATUS 1/2 page monitors and controls the
plays the current navigation source position for the INS (Figure 3D-7).
EGI indicated in the title.
Remaining fields show the body axis pitch angle, body
axis roll angle, azimuth angle, and velocities in the Z Page Access
(vertical, ft/min), X (North/South, ft/sec), and Y (East/ a. Select either the INS1 or INS2 prompt on the INAV
West, ft/sec) directions for the EGI indicated in the CTRL INDEX 3/3 page. Selection of either prompt
title. results in the display of the INS STATUS 1/2 page
for the INS indicated in the prompt.
NOTE
b. Select either the INS1 or INS2 prompt on the INS
On the GPS STATUS 2/2 page, parame- STATUS 1/2 page. Selection of either prompt re-
ters of the five channels are displayed. ST sults in the display of the INS STATUS 1/2 page for
is the status of the channel. A status of D the INS indicated in the prompt.
indicates full data transmission of the sat-
c. Select either the INS1 or INS2 prompt on the EGI
ellite data is being interpreted by the EGI.
STATUS page. Selection of either prompt results in
An uncertainty of less than 1000 meters
the display of the INS STATUS 1/2 page for the INS
in GPS-only solution is required for the
indicated in the prompt.
CNI-SP to allow the display of GPS
present position. A minimum of three sat- d. Select either the PREV PAGE or NEXT PAGE
ellites are usually required for the position hard-key from the INS STATUS 2/2 page.
uncertainty to be less than 1000 meters.
The #GOOD is an indication of the num-
ber of the GPS satellites being used by Display
the blended solution (EGI solution) if GPS The page title displays the INS number for the page.
is a selected sensor. Data fields below the title displays the FOM and EHE
for the INS indicated in the title. Data adjacent to soft-
L1 THROUGH L4 key R6 contains the number for the INS that is not
Not operational. contained in the title. Field below the FOM/EHE dis-
plays the current navigation source position for the
L5 - BRANCH TO GPS STATUS 1/2 PAGE INS indicated in the title.
Remaining fields show the ground track, ground-
Selection of the soft-key L5 results in a branch to the speed, altitude, heading, and mode for the INS indi-
GPSn STATUS 1/2 page for the GPS specified adja- cated in the title.
cent to L5.

3D-4
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

The possible values for data adjacent to soft-key L4 L1 THROUGH L5

(INS Mode) are ON, ALIGN, IFA, NAV, NARF, and
OFF. Not operational.

L5 - BRANCH TO INS STATUS 2/2 PAGE

L1 THROUGH L5 Selection of the soft-key L6 results in a branch to the
Not operational. INSn STATUS 2/2 page for the INS specified adjacent
to L6.
L6 - BRANCH TO INS STATUS 1/2 PAGE
R1 THROUGH R5
Selection of the soft-key L6 results in a branch to the
INSn STATUS 1/2 page for the INS specified adjacent Not operational.
to L6. R6 - BRANCH TO EGI STATUS PAGE
R1 THROUGH R4 Selection soft-key R6 results in a branch to the EGIn
Not operational. STATUS page for the EGI specified adjacent to R6.

R5 - BRANCH TO INS ALIGN PAGE

INS ALIGN PAGE
Selection of the soft-key R5 results in a branch to the
INSn ALIGN page for the INS indicated in the title. The INS ALIGN page allows alignment selection for
the CNI-MS INSs (Figure 3D-9).
R6 - BRANCH TO EGI STATUS PAGE
Selection of the soft-key R6 results in a branch to the Page Access
EGIn STATUS page for the EGI specified adjacent to
R6. a. Select the ALIGN prompt on the INS STATUS 1/2
page. Selection results in the display of the corre-
sponding INS ALIGN page.
INS STATUS 2/2 PAGE b. Select either INS ALIGN prompts on the INDEX 2/
The INS STATUS 2/2 page monitors and controls the 2 page.
INS. (Figure 3D-8).
Display
Page Access The INS number for which operations is performed is
a. Select the INS1 or INS2 prompt on the INS STA- displayed in data field adjacent to R6. Data field below
TUS 2/2 page. Selection results in display of the ALIGN STATUS is the align position last sent to the
INS STATUS 2/2 page for the other INS. EGI during GC align. Data adjacent to ALIGN STA-
TUS contains INS align status for the INS selected.
b. Select the PREV PAGE or NEXT PAGE hard-key
from the INS STATUS 1/2 page. L1
Not operational.
Display
L2 - STORED HEADING ALIGN
The page title displays the INS number for the page.
Data fields below the title displays the FOM and EHE Data adjacent to L2 displays STORED HDG in small
for the INS indicated in the title. Data adjacent to soft- font if Stored Heading Alignment is not selectable, and
key R6 contains the number for the INS that is not selection is then non-operational.
contained in the title. Field below the FOM/EHE dis- Otherwise, STORED HDG is displayed in large font,
plays the current navigation source position for the and selection results in a stored heading align.
INS indicated in the title.
Remaining fields show the body axis pitch angle, body
axis roll angle, azimuth angle, and velocities in the Z
(vertical, ft/min), X (North/South, ft/sec), and Y (East/
West, ft/sec) directions for the INS indicated in the
title.

3D-5
FAM.1C-27J-1A

L3 - BEST AVAILABLE TRUE HEADING (BATH) R3 - IN-FLIGHT ALIGN

ALIGNMENT HEADING
Data adjacent to R3 displays IFA in small font if In-
Data adjacent to L3 displays the BATH Alignment Flight Alignment is not selectable, and selection is
Heading. BATH Alignment Heading is entered when then non-operational. Otherwise, IFA is displayed in
the INS determines that a stored heading alignment is large font, and selection results in an in-flight align-
not available. A Stored Heading Alignment is not ment. When this mode is selected and active, IFA is
available if either of the following conditions occur: displayed in inverse video, large font.
a. A full performance GC alignment with normal shut- R4 - GPS SENSOR SELECT
down has not been performed prior selection of the
Stored Heading alignment mode. Data adjacent to R4 displays the current GPS Sensor
Select status (from the INAV CTRL SENSORS 2/3
b. The Stored Heading test fails. page) of the indicated INS in the title.
A HEADING REQUIRED advisory is displayed in the Selection (when available and not selected) results in
CNI-MU scratch pad when the INS determines that a selection of the indicated GPS.
stored heading alignment is not available. BATH Selection (when available and selected) results in de-
Alignment Heading may be entered in either TRUE or selection of the indicated GPS.
MAGNETIC. If a heading is not entered, “---” is dis- Adjacent data field contains the current value of FOM
played. for the indicated GPS. If the GPS is not selected or is
invalid, the FOM field is blank.
L4 - NAV PROMPT
R5
The NAV mode prompt is displayed at L4. Small font
indicates that the NAV mode is not available for selec- Not operational.
tion. Large font indicates that it available for selection
R6 - BRANCH TO EGI STATUS 1/2 PAGE
and inverse video large font indicates that the prompt
has been selected. Selection of the soft-key R6 results in a branch to the
Data adjacent to L4 displays DEGRADED when the EGI STATUS 1/2 page for the EGI specified adjacent
INS degraded navigation is available. The field dis- to R6.
plays blanks when a full performance alignment has
completed, or when degraded navigation is not avail-
able. GPS STATUS 1/2 PAGE
L5 - BRANCH TO INS1 STATUS 1/2 PAGE The GPS STATUS 1/2 page monitors the GPS indi-
cated in the title. (Figure 3D-10).
Selection of the soft-key L5 results in a branch to the
INS1 STATUS 1/2 page.
Page Access
L6 - BRANCH TO INS2 STATUS 1/2 PAGE
a. Select the GPS1 or GPS2 prompt on the GPS
Selection of the soft-key L6 results in a branch to the STATUS 1/2 page. Selection results in the display
INS2 STATUS 1/2 page. of the GPS STATUS 1/2 page for the indicated
GPS.
R1
b. Select the GPS1 or GPS2 prompt on the INAV
Not operational. CTRL INDEX 3/3 page. Selection branches to the
GPS STATUS 1/2 page for the indicated GPS.
R2 - GYRO COMPASS ALIGN
c. Select the GPS1 or GPS2 prompt on the EGI STA-
Data adjacent to R2 displays GC in small font if Gyro
TUS 1/2 page. Selection branches to the GPS
Compass Alignment is not selectable, and selection is
STATUS 1/2 page for the indicated GPS.
then non-operational. Otherwise, GC is displayed in
large font, and selection results in a Gyro Compass d. Select the PREV PAGE or NEXT PAGE hard-key
alignment. When this mode is selected and active, GC from the GPS STATUS 2/2 page.
is displayed in inverse video, large font.

3D-6
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Display Display
The page title displays the GPS number for the page. The page title displays the GPS number for the page.
Data fields below the title display FOM and EHE for Data fields below the title display FOM and EHE for
the GPS indicated in the title. Data adjacent to soft- the GPS indicated in the title. Data adjacent to soft-
key L6 contains the number for the GPS that is not key L6 contains the number for the GPS that is not
contained in the title. Fields below the FOM/EHE and contained in the title. Fields below the FOM/EHE and
adjacent to R1 display the current navigation source adjacent to R1 display the current navigation source
position, and ZULU time for the GPS indicated in the position, and ZULU time for the GPS indicated in the
title. title. Remaining fields show the frequency tracked,
Remaining fields show the ground track, ground- tracking code, channel state, satellite number, and
speed, altitude, key state, and mode for the GPS indi- channel/number for each of the five satellites in use
cated in the title. by the GPS. Tracking codes are as follows:
The possible values for data adjacent to R4 (key
S = Searching
state) are KEYED GOOD, KEYED UNVER, KEYED
BAD, and KEY FAILED, and for adjacent field are T = Tracking
TEST, INIT, and NAV.
J = Jamming
L1 THROUGH L3
R = Re acquisition
Not operational.
D = Data demodulation (normal operation)
L4 - STATE 3 AND STATE 5 Blank = No GPS signal present for EGI processing.
L4 data fields are the State 3 and State 5 operation Data between soft-keys L5 and R5 displays the cur-
indicators. rent number of available valid satellites.
L5 L1 THROUGH L5
Not operational. Not operational.
L6 - BRANCH TO GPS STATUS 1/2 PAGE L6 - BRANCH TO GPS STATUS 2/2 PAGE
Selection of the soft-key L6 results in a branch to the Selection of the soft-key L6 results in a branch to the
GPSn STATUS 1/2 page for the GPS specified adja- GPSn STATUS 2/2 page for the GPS specified adja-
cent to L6. cent to L6.
R1 THROUGH R5 R1 THROUGH R5
Not operational. Not operational.
R6 - BRANCH TO EGI STATUS PAGE R6 - BRANCH TO EGI STATUS PAGE
Selection of the soft-key R6 results in a branch to the Selection of the soft-key R6 results in a branch to the
EGIn STATUS page for the EGI specified adjacent to EGIn STATUS page for the EGI specified adjacent to
R6. R6.

GPS STATUS 2/2 PAGE

DADS PAGE
The GPS STATUS 2/2 page monitors the GPS indi-
cated in the title. (Figure 3D-11). The DADS page displays the data being received
from the indicated air data system. (Figure 3D-12).

Page Access
Page Access
The GPS STATUS 2/2 page is accessible by selecting
the PREV PAGE or NEXT PAGE hard-key from the a. Select the DADS1 or DADS2 prompt on the INAV
GPS STATUS 1/2 page. CTRL INDEX 3/3 page.
b. Select the DADS1 or DADS2 prompt on the
DADS1 or DADS2 page. Selection branches to the
other DADS page.

3D-7
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Display POSITION UPDATE PAGE

Two DADSs reside in the system; the prompt at R6 The POSITION UPDATE page allows updating of the
will provide access to the DADS not being displayed. INAV solution. (Figure 3D-13).
The title displays the DADS number being displayed.

L1 - CAS Page Access

Data adjacent to L1 displays the CAS being received a. Select the UPDATE prompt on the INAV CTRL
from the indicated DADS. SOLN 1/3, INAV CTRL SENSORS 2/3, or INAV
CTRL INDEX 3/3 pages.
L2 - PRESSURE ALTITUDE
b. Select the UPDATE prompt on the CURSOR TAR-
Data adjacent to L2 displays the Pressure altitude GET page.
being received from the indicated DADS.
c. Return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page when
L3 - BAROMETRIC ALTITUDE the WAYPOINT SELECT page was accessed from
the POSITION UPDATE page.
Data adjacent to L3 displays the Barometric altitude
being received from the indicated DADS. d. Selection of the return prompt on the CUSTOM
DATA page when the CUSTOM DATA page was
L4 - STATIC AIR TEMPERATURE accessed from the POSITION UPDATE page.
Data adjacent to L4 displays the Static Air Tempera-
ture (SAT) being received from the indicated DADS. Display
L5 L1 - POSITION FREEZE
Not operational. When EGIn is selected and valid, and position is not
frozen, data adjacent to L1 displays FREEZE in large
L6 - BRANCH TO INAV CONTROL INDEX PAGE font. Selection results in the position freeze operation.
Selection of the soft-key L6 results in a branch to the L2 - SELECTED POSITION
INAV CONTROL INDEX 3/3 page.
Data adjacent to L2 displays the current INAV Present
R1 - TAS Position Latitude/Longitude (bias included) from the
onside CNI-SP when the active solution is EGIn. The
Data adjacent to R1 displays the True Airspeed being
position freeze operation is performed when L1 is
received from the indicated DADS.
selected and a valid INAV Present Position exists. The
R2 - VERTICAL SPEED position freeze operation records the current INAV
Present Position from the onside CNI-SP and display
Data adjacent to R2 displays the Vertical Speed being the Freeze Position.
received from the indicated DADS. When a Freeze Position is displayed adjacent to L2,
deletion results in the display of the current INAV
R3 - TEMPERATURE DEVIATION Present Position Latitude/Longitude.
Data adjacent to R3 displays the Temperature Devia-
tion being received from the indicated DADS.
L3 - REFERENCE POSITION
The Reference Position is the designated Target
R4 - TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE Location Data (output to the MC). Data field adjacent
Data adjacent to R4 displays the Total Air Tempera- to REF POS displays the Reference Position Identifier
ture (TAT) being received from the indicated DADS. and adjacent data field displays the Reference Posi-
tion Latitude/Longitude.
R5 When the Reference Position Data is invalid, data
field defaults to box prompts and adjacent data field is
Not operational. blank.
R6 - BRANCH TO DATS PAGE NOT DISPLAYED
If a Reference Position is not entered, and an OAP is
Selection of the soft-key R6 results in a branch to the active on the CURSOR TARGET page, the OAP data
DADS page for the DADS specified adjacent to R6. is displayed here unless overridden by manual entry.

3D-8
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Valid entries of a Reference Position are of the form R2

position. If more than one waypoint with the entered
identifier exists in the databases (navigation and cus- Not operational.
tom), the CNI-SP branches to the WAYPOINT R3 - REFERENCE POSITION ELEVATION
SELECT page.
A return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with a If the Reference Position Identified in data adjacent to
waypoint selected results in the selected waypoint R3 is defined and the elevation for the Reference
being displayed in the reference position fields. Position is defined, then data field adjacent to R3 dis-
A return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page when a plays the Reference Position Elevation.
waypoint is not selected results in the entry being dis- If the Reference Position Identified in data field adja-
played in the scratch pad. cent to REF POS is defined and the elevation for the
Valid waypoint entries that are not contained in a data- Reference Position is not defined, then data field adja-
base results in the display of the CUSTOM DATA cent to R3 displays the default (0FT).
page. A return from the CUSTOM DATA page with the If the Reference Position Identified in data field adja-
waypoint defined results in the custom waypoint being cent to REF POS is not defined, then blanks are dis-
displayed. played.
A return from the CUSTOM DATA page with the way-
point undefined results in the waypoint identifier being When data adjacent to R3 is not blank, valid entries
displayed in the scratch pad. are of the form elevation. When data field displays an
elevation, delete results in the default being displayed.
Selection results in the Latitude/Longitude displayed
in data field adjacent to L3 being placed into the R4 - EGI1 DELTA ACCEPT
scratch pad. If a position delta has been calculated and not incor-
Delete results in display of active OAP data from porated into the temporary or permanent bias, then
CURSOR TARGET page if a reference position has data adjacent to R4 displays the EGI1 Delta Distance
been entered here. If a reference point is deleted and and adjacent data displays the EGI1 Delta Direction.
no active OAP exists on the CURSOR TARGET page, Otherwise, data fields display blanks.
the default is displayed.

L4 - EGI1 CLEAR PROMPT If an EGI1 Delta exists and the EGI1 Delta has not
been applied to the EGI1 solution or if a temporary
When an accepted bias is applied to the EGI1 posi- bias exists and has not been applied to the permanent
tion, data adjacent to L4 displays CLEAR in large font. bias, then data field adjacent to and below R4 dis-
Otherwise, data field displays CLEAR in small font. plays ACCEPT in large font. Otherwise, data field dis-
Selection results in the EGI1 position bias being set to plays ACCEPT in small font and data fields R4 fields
zero. Adjacent field contains the value of the total are blank.
position update bias bearing that is applied to the
EGI1 solution. Selection results in the delta position offset being
applied into the EGI1 solution or the temporary bias
L5 - EGI2 CLEAR PROMPT being applied to the permanent bias, and data field
When an accepted bias is applied to the EGI2 posi- displayed in small font.
tion, data adjacent to L5 displays CLEAR in large font.
Selection results in the EGI2 position bias being set to Field adjacent to Delta Distance contains the value of
zero. Adjacent field contains the value of the total the total bias distance applied to the EGI1 solution.
position update bias bearing that is applied to the R5 - EGI2 DELTA ACCEPT
EGI2 solution.
Same as R4 except for EGI2.
L6 - BRANCH TO INAV PAGE
R6 - BRANCH TO EGI STATUS PAGE
Selection of the soft-key L6 results in a branch to the
INAV page which called the POSITION UPDATE Selection of the soft-key R6 results in a branch to the
page. CURSOR TARGET page.

R1 - POSITION UPDATE MODE

Data adjacent to R1 displays MANUAL, CURSOR, or
QUICK depending on position update mode. If NO
MODE is active, data field is blank.

3D-9
FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3D-10
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NAV CTRL Branching

Figure 3D-1

3D-11
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays information for the navigation sources and the selected navigation source.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 EGI 1 Displays EGI No. 1 availability and update status, FOM, EHE, and
allows nav source selection.
L2 GPS 1 Displays GPS No. 1 availability, FOM, EHE, and allows nav source
selection.
L3 INS 1 Displays INS No. 1 availability, FOM, EHE, and allows nav source
selection.
L4 INS 1/RAD Displays INS No. 1/RAD availability, FOM, EHE, and allows nav source
selection.
L5 INAV DELTA Displays the bearing portion of the INAV Position Delta, referenced to
True North, and the range portion of the same INAV Position Delta or
default values.
L6 Auto/Manual selector Controls and displays status of automatic/manual navigation selection
switch (AUTO/MAN).
R1 EGI 2 Displays EGI No. 2 availability and update status, FOM, EHE, and
allows nav source selection.
R2 GPS 2 Displays GPS No. 2 availability, FOM, EHE, and allows nav source
selection.
R3 INS 2 Displays INS No. 2 availability, FOM, EHE, and allows nav source
selection.
R4 INS 2/RAD Displays INS No. 2/RAD availability, FOM, EHE, and allows nav source
selection.
R5 NOT USED
R6 UPDATE Branches to the POSITION UPDATE page.

Figure 3D-2 INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page

3D-12
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.
2. Sensors must be selected on INAV SENSOR
2/3 page to enable selection of navigation sys-
tem on INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page, otherwise
the page will only display sensor data.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press NAV CTRL hard-key - Pressed.
a. INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page displayed.
2. Press L6 to select Automatic/Manual naviga-
tion solution - Selected.
a. Selected navigation solution (AUTO, or
MAN) appears in large font.
3. Soft-key corresponding to desired navigation
solution - Pressed.
4. Press L6 to branch to POSITION UPDATE
page - Pressed.

3D-13
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Allows selection and displays selection status of the navigation sensors.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 INS 1 Selects INS No. 1 as nav source and displays selection status.
L2 GPS 1 Selects GPS No. 1 as nav source and displays selection status.
L3 TACAN 1 Selects TACAN No. 1 as nav source and displays selection status.
L4 VOR 1 Selects VOR No. 1 as nav source and displays selection status.
L5-L6 NOT USED
R1 INS 2 Selects INS No. 2 as nav source and displays selection status.
R2 GPS 2 Selects GPS No. 2 as nav source and displays selection status.
R3 TACAN 2 Selects TACAN No. 2 as nav source and displays selection status.
R4 VOR 2 Selects VOR No. 2 as nav source and displays selection status.
R5 NOT USED
R6 UPDATE Branches to the POSITION UPDATE page.

Figure 3D-3 INAV CTRL SENSORS 2/3 page

3D-14
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

INAV CTRL SENSORS 2/3 PAGE

DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.
2. INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page displayed.
3. Operator presses NEXT PAGE hard-key.
a. INAV CTRL SENSORS 2/3 page dis-
played.
4. The associated navigation sensors must be
selected to enable navigation source selection
on INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page, otherwise the
page will only display sensor data if AUTONAV
fails or is deselected.

DATA ENTRY
1. Soft-key corresponding to desired navigation
sensor - Pressed.
2. Press R6 to branch to POSITION UPDATE
page - Pressed.

3D-15
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Provides access to the various navigation sensors.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 EGI1 Branches to the EGI1 STATUS 1/2 page.

L2 GPS1 Branches to the GPS1 STATUS 1/2 page.
L3 INS1 Branches to the INS1 STATUS 1/2 page.
L4 DADS1 Branches to the DADS1 page.
L5-L6 NOT USED
R1 EGI2 Branches to the EGI2 STATUS 1/2 page.
R2 GPS2 Branches to the GPS2 STATUS 1/2 page.
R3 INS2 Branches to the INS2 STATUS 1/2 page.
R4 DADS2 Branches to the DADS2 page.
R5 NOT USED
R6 UPDATE Branches to the POSITION UPDATE page.

Figure 3D-4 INAV CTRL INDEX 3/3 page

3D-16
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

INAV CTRL INDEX 3/3 PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. INAV CTRL SOLN 1/3 page displayed.
2. Operator presses NEXT PAGE hard-key two
times.
a. INAV CTRL INDEX 3/3 page displayed.

DATA ENTRY
1. Soft-key corresponding to desired navigation
sensor - Pressed.

NOTE
Pressing one of the navigation sensor
soft-keys (L1 to L4 or R1 to R4) branches
to the STATUS page of the correspond-
ing navigation sensor.

2. Press R6 to branch to POSITION UPDATE

page - Pressed.

3D-17
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Monitor the EGI status.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 FOM, EHE, Displays the EGI Figure Of Merit, Estimated Horizontal Error, and
Present Position present position. (No switch function).
L2 GTRK Displays EGI ground track and altitude. (No switch function).
ALT
L3 NOT USED
L4 MODE Displays the mode of the EGI navigation system (ON, ALIGN, IFA,
NAV, NARF, or OFF).
L5 GPS1(2) Branches to the GPSn STATUS 1/2 page.
L6 INAV CTRL Branches to the INAV CTRL INDEX 3/3 page.
R1 NOT USED
R2 GSPD Displays EGI groundspeed and heading. (No switch function).
HDG
R3-R4 NOT USED
R5 INS1(2) Branches to the INSn STATUS 1/2 page.
R6 EGI1(2) Branches to the EGIn STATUS 1/2 page.

Figure 3D-5 EGI STATUS 1/2 page

3D-18
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

EGI STATUS 1/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.

DATA ENTRY
1. None.

NOTE
The GPS1(2) STATUS 1/2 page, INAV
CTRL INDX 3/3 page, INS1(2) STATUS
1/2 page, and the EGI1(2) STATUS 1/2
page for the other EGI may be accessed
by pressing L5, L6, R5, and R6, respec-
tively.

3D-19
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Monitor the EGI status.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 FOM, EHE, Displays the EGI Figure Of Merit, Estimated Horizontal Error, and
Present Position present position. (No switch function).
L2 PITCH Displays aircraft body axis Pitch angle. (No switch function).
L3 ROLL Displays aircraft body axis Roll angle. (No switch function).
L4 AZ Displays Azimuth angle. (No switch function).
L5 GPS1(2) Branches to the GPSn STATUS 1/2 page.
L6 INAV CTRL Branches to the INAV CTRL INDEX 3/3 page.
R1 NOT USED
R2 VZ Displays Vertical speed in ft/min. (No switch function).
R3 VX Displays North (+)/South (-) speed in ft/sec. (No switch function).
R4 VY Displays East (+)/West (-) speed in ft/sec. (No switch function).
R5 INS1(2) Branches to the INSn STATUS 2/2 page.
R6 EGI1(2) Branches to the EGIn STATUS 2/2 page.

Figure 3D-6 EGI STATUS 2/2 page

3D-20
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

EGI STATUS 2/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.

DATA ENTRY
1. None.

NOTE
The GPS1(2) STATUS 1/2 page, INAV
CTRL INDX 3/3 page, INS1(2) STATUS
2/2 page, and the EGI1(2) STATUS 2/2
page for the other EGI may be accessed
by pressing L5, L6, R5, and R6, respec-
tively.

3D-21
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Controls and monitors INS.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 FOM, EHE, Displays the INS Figure Of Merit, Estimated Horizontal Error, and
Present Position present position. (No switch function).
L2 GTRK Displays INS ground track and altitude. (No switch function).
ALT
L3 NOT USED
L4 MODE Displays current INS operating mode (ON, ALIGN, IFA, NAV, or OFF).
(No switch function)
L5 NOT USED
L6 INS1(2) Branches to the INSn STATUS 1/2 page.
R1 NOT USED
R2 GSPD Displays INS groundspeed and heading. (No switch function).
HDG
R3-R4 NOT USED
R5 ALIGN Branches to the INS ALIGN page.
R6 EGI1(2) Branches to the EGIn STATUS page.

Figure 3D-7 INS STATUS 1/2 page

3D-22
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

INS STATUS 1/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.

DATA ENTRY
1. None.

NOTE
INS1(2), ALIGN, and EGI1(2) are the only
operational soft-keys on the INS STATUS
1/2 page. The other fields are for data dis-
play purposes only.

1. Press L6 to branch to INSn STATUS 1/2 page

- Pressed.
2. Press R5 to branch to INS ALIGN page -
Pressed.
3. Press R6 to branch to EGIn STATUS page -
Pressed.

3D-23
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Controls and monitors INS.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 FOM, EHE, Displays the INS Figure Of Merit, Estimated Horizontal Error, and
Present Position present position. (No switch function).
L2 PITCH Displays aircraft body axis Pitch angle. (No switch function).
ROLL Displays aircraft body axis Roll angle.
L3 AZ Displays Azimuth angle. (No switch function).
L4-L5 NOT USED
L6 INS1(2) Branches to the INSn STATUS 2/2 page.
R1 NOT USED
R2 VZ Displays Vertical speed in ft/min. (No switch function).
VX Displays North (+)/South (-) speed in ft/sec.
R3 VY Displays East (+)/West (-) speed in ft/sec. (No switch function).
R4-R5 NOT USED
R6 EGI1(2) Branches to the EGIn STATUS page.

Figure 3D-8 INS STATUS 2/2 page

3D-24
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

INS STATUS 2/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.

DATA ENTRY
1. None.

NOTE
INS1(2), and EGI1(2) are the only opera-
tional soft-keys on the INS STATUS 2/2
page. The other fields are for data display
purposes only.

1. Press L6 to branch to INSn STATUS 2/2 page

- Pressed.
2. Press R6 to branch to EGIn STATUS page -
Pressed.

3D-25
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Allows alignment selection for the inertial navigation system.

Soft-key Display Description

ALIGN STATUS Displays the INS alignment quality status.

L1 Present Position Displays the aircraft position sent to the EGI for the Gyro Compass
alignment. (No switch function).
L2 STORED HDG Selection performs a Stored Heading (SH) alignment.
L3 HEADING Accept/displays the BATH alignment heading when the INS deter-
mines that a store heading alignment is not available.
L4 NAV Displayed navigation mode. DEGRADED is displayed above NAV
prompt during INS alignment when the aircraft movement can begin
and disappears when a full performance alignment has been com-
pleted.
L5 INS1 Branches to the INS1 STATUS 1/2 page.
L6 INS2 Branches to the INS2 STATUS 1/2 page.
R1 NOT USED
R2 GC Selection performs a Gyro Compass alignment.
R3 IFA Selection performs an In-Flight Alignment.
R4 GPS1(2)/ Displays the currently selected GPS and Figure Of Merit value (from
FOM the INAV CTRL SENSORS 2/3). If the GPS is not selected or is invalid,
the Figure Of Merit is not displayed.
Selects the GPS sensor to allow/enable an IFA.
R5 NOT USED
R6 EGI1(2) Branches to the EGIn STATUS 1/2 page.

Figure 3D-9 INS ALIGN page

3D-26
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

INS ALIGN PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Type of alignment required (Stored Heading,
Best Available True Heading, Gyro Compass,
In-Flight) - Determined.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press L2 alignment heading (if HEADING RE-
QUIRED operational advisory message ap-
pears in the scratch pad) - Pressed.
2. Enter alignment heading in the scratch pad -
Entered.
a. Press L3 (HEADING), (if heading input re-
quired for alignment) - Pressed.
b. HEADING line data updated.
3. Press L5 to branch to INS1 STATUS 1/2 page
(as desired) - Pressed.
4. Press L6 to branch to INS2 STATUS 1/2 page
(as desired) - Pressed.
5. Press R2 (GC) to perform Gyro Compass
alignment (if desired) - Pressed.
6. Press R3 (IFA) to perform INS In-Flight Align-
ment (if desired) - Pressed.
7. Press R6 to branch to EGIn STATUS 1/2 page
(as desired) - Pressed.

3D-27
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Monitor GPS status.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 FOM, EHE, Displays the GPS Figure Of Merit, Estimated Horizontal Error, and
Present Position present position. (No switch function).
L2 NOT USED
L3 GTRK Displays GPS ground track and altitude. (No switch function).
ALT
L4 STATE3 Displays the number of channels in state3 and state5.
STATE5
L5 NOT USED
L6 GPS1(2) Branches to the GPSn STATUS 1/2 page.
R1 GPS time (Z) Displays GPS time (ZULU). (No switch function).
R2 GSPD Displays GPS groundspeed. (No switch function).
R3 NOT USED
R4 Key state Displays GPS key state and GPS operating mode. (No switch func-
GPS mode tion).
R5 NOT USED
R6 EGI1(2) Branches to the EGIn STATUS page.

Figure 3D-10 GPS STATUS 1/2 page

3D-28
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

GPS STATUS 1/2 PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.

DATA ENTRY
1. None.

NOTE
GPS1(2) and EGI1(2) are the only opera-
tional soft-keys on the GPS STATUS 1/2
page. The other fields are for data display
purposes only.

1. Press L6 to branch to GPSn STATUS 1/2 page

- Pressed.
2. Press R6 to branch to EGIn STATUS 1/2 page
- Pressed.

NOTE
Data adjacent to L4 showing STATE3 in-
dicates number of satellites (0 - 5) being
jammed and STATE5 indicates number
of satellites (0 - 5) in demodulation mode.

3D-29
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Monitor GPS status.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 FOM, EHE, Displays the GPS Figure Of Merit, Estimated Horizontal Error, and
Present Position present position. (No switch function).
L2 SV Displays satellite Space Vehicle (SV) serial number for each of the sat-
ellites being tracked by the GPS receiver. (No switch function).
L3 SN Displays carrier signal to noise ratio for each of the satellites being
tracked by the GPS receiver. (No switch function).
FC Displays frequency (L1 or L2) and tracking code (P or C or Y) for each
of the satellites being tracked by the GPS receiver.
L4 ST Displays channel status of the satellite (S, D, T, J, R) for each of the
satellites being tracked by the GPS receiver. (No switch function).
L5 # GOOD Displays current number of available satellites being used in the
Blended Solution, if GPS is a selected sensor. (No switch function).
L6 GPS1(2) Branches to the GPSn STATUS 2/2 page.
R1 GPS time (Z) Displays GPS time (ZULU). (No switch function).
R2-R5 NOT USED
R6 EGI1(2) Branches to the EGIn STATUS page.

Figure 3D-11 GPS STATUS 2/2 page

3D-30
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

GPS STATUS 2/2 PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.

DATA ENTRY
1. None.

NOTE
GPS1(2) and EGI1(2) are the only opera-
tional soft-keys on the GPS STATUS 2/2
page. The other fields are for data display
purposes only.

1. Press L6 to branch to GPSn STATUS 2/2 page

- Pressed.
2. Press R6 to branch to EGIn STATUS 1/2 page
- Pressed.

3D-31
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays the data being received from the indicated DADS

Soft-key Display Description

L1 CAS Displays the calibrated airspeed being received.

L2 PRES ALT Displays the pressure altitude being received.
L3 BARO ALT Displays the barometric altitude being received.
L4 SAT Displays the static air temperature being received.
L5 NOT USED
L6 INAV CTRL Branches to the INAV CTRL INDEX 3/3 page.
R1 TAS Displays the true airspeed being received.
R2 V/S Displays the vertical airspeed being received.
R3 TDEV STD Displays the temperature deviation from standard.
R4 TAT Displays the total air temperature being received.
R5 NOT USED
R6 DADS1(2) Branches to the other DADSn display page.

Figure 3D-12 DADS page

3D-32
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

DADS PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.

DATA ENTRY
1. None.

NOTE
INAV CTRL and DADS1(2) are the only
operational soft-keys on the DADS page.
The other fields are for DADS data dis-
play purposes only.

1. Press L6 to branch to INAV CTRL INDEX 3/3

page - Pressed.
2. Press R6 to branch to DADSn page - Pressed.

3D-33
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Allows updating of the INAV solution.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 PPOS FREEZE Freezes current EGI position.

L2 SELECTED POS Displays current/frozen EGI present position latitude/longitude.
L3 REF POS Displays reference position identifier and latitude/longitude.
L4 EGI1 CLEAR Prompt Sets EGI1 solution bias to zero.
L5 EGI2 CLEAR Prompt Sets EGI2 solution bias to zero.
L6 INAV Branches to the previously selected INAV page.
R1 Position Update Mode Displays position update mode.
R2 NOT USED
R3 Reference Position Displays defined or default reference position elevation.
Elevation
R4 EGI1 offset ACCEPT Displays the EGI1 delta position offset and applies the offset to the dis-
prompt played EGI1 solution bias.
R5 EGI2 offset ACCEPT Displays the EGI2 delta position offset and applies the offset to the dis-
prompt played EGI2 solution bias.
R6 CURSOR TGT Branches to the CURSOR TARGET page.

Figure 3D-13 POSITION UPDATE page

3D-34
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

POSITION UPDATE PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. REF POS - Selected/Identified.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press L1 to freeze selected position - Pressed.
a. PPOS line data displays FREEZE.
b. L2 SELECTED POS displays latitude/lon-
gitude.
2. Enter reference position latitude/longitude (if a
manually entered reference position is de-
sired) in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L3 - Pressed.
b. REF POS displays latitude/longitude.
3. Mark reference position on navigation/radar
display (if a cursor selected reference position
is desired) - Marked.
a. Press L3 - Pressed.
b. REF POS displays latitude/longitude.
4. Press R4 EGI1 ACCEPT (to accept the posi-
tion update and to apply the update to the EGI1
solution bias) - Pressed.
5. Press L4 EGI1 CLEAR (to reset the EGI1 solu-
tion bias to zero) - Pressed.
6. Press R5 EGI2 ACCEPT (to accept the posi-
tion update and to apply the update to the EGI2
solution bias) - Pressed.
7. Press L5 EGI2 CLEAR (to reset the EGI2 solu-
tion bias to zero) - Pressed.
8. Press L6 to return to the INAV CTRL page that
called up the POSITION UPDATE page -
Pressed.
9. Press R6 to branch to CURSOR TARGET
page - Pressed.

3D-35 / ( 3D-36 blank )

 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PART 3E. MISSION CONTROL PAGES

Contents page Contents page

MISSIONS CONTROL PAGE ........................... 3E-1 SAR PROGRESS PAGE DATA ENTRY ......... 3E-33
MISSIONS PAGE ......................................... 3E-1 LZ INIT 1/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY ................... 3E-35
SAR INIT PAGE ............................................ 3E-3
LZ INIT 2/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY ................... 3E-37
SAR PROGRESS PAGE .............................. 3E-4
LANDING ZONE INIT 1/2 ............................. 3E-5 RENDEZVOUS PAGE DATA ENTRY ............ 3E-39
LANDING ZONE INIT 2/2 ............................. 3E-6 RTE HOLD PAGE DATA ENTRY ................... 3E-41
RENDEZVOUS ............................................. 3E-8
CARP INIT 1/5 PAGE DATA ENTRY .............. 3E-43
RTE HOLD .................................................... 3E-9
CARP INIT 1/5 ............................................ 3E-11 CARP INIT 2/5 PAGE DATA ENTRY .............. 3E-47
CARP INIT 2/5 ............................................ 3E-12 CARP INIT 3/5 PAGE DATA ENTRY .............. 3E-50
CARP INIT 3/5 ............................................ 3E-14 CARP INIT 4/5 PAGE DATA ENTRY .............. 3E-54
CARP INIT 4/5 ............................................ 3E-16
CARP INIT 5/5 PAGE DATA ENTRY .............. 3E-58
CARP INIT 5/5 ............................................ 3E-18
CARP PROGRESS 1/2 .............................. 3E-20 CARP PROGRESS 1/2 PAGE
CARP PROGRESS 2/2 .............................. 3E-23 DATA ENTRY ............................................. 3E-62
CHUTE LIST ............................................... 3E-25 CARP PROGRESS 2/2 PAGE
DATA ENTRY ............................................. 3E-65
MISSIONS PAGE DATA ENTRY .................... 3E-29
CHUTE LIST PAGE DATA ENTRY ................ 3E-67
SAR INIT PAGE DATA ENTRY ...................... 3E-31

MISSIONS CONTROL PAGES – CARP PROG

– CHUTE LIST

INTRODUCTION Operation of these pages is identified in Section 1.

The MSN hard-key (Figure 3-1) on the CNI-MU

(ICDU) provides access to the associated mission and MISSIONS PAGE
status pages (Figure 3E-1). The pages consist of the
following:
Page Access
– MISSIONS
a. Press the MSN hard-key (Figure 3-1).
– SAR INIT
b. Select the MFP prompt on the WAYPOINT DATA
– SAR PROG page.
– LZ INIT c. Selection of the MSN prompt on the CHUTE LIST
page when that page was accessed from the MIS-
– RENDEZVOUS
SIONS page.
– RTE HOLD
– CARP INIT

3E-1
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Display When data adjacent to L4 is displayed in large font,

the MISSIONS page was accessed from the WAY-
L1 - ROUTE SELECTION POINT DATA page, and the Landing Zone defined
When the MISSIONS page was accessed from the exists in the flight plan identified by route, pressing L4
MSN hard-key, L1 controls route selection. Selection results in the NOT ALLOWED message.
will switch between route 1 and route 2. When
L5 - BRANCH TO RENDEZVOUS PAGE
selected, route 1 will be used for L2 to L5, R2, and R3
operations. Route 2 will be used for L2 to L5, R2, and If MC DEGRADED LNAV MODE is True and the
R3 operations. active route is selected, then data adjacent to L5 is
When the MISSIONS page was accessed from the displayed in small font. Numerical data displays the
WAYPOINT DATA page, L1 displays the route previously entered Rendezvous number. If a Rendez-
(ROUTE 1 or ROUTE 2 in small font) associated with vous number has not been entered, then data dis-
the waypoint and adjacent data displays blanks. plays the default.
If data adjacent to L5 is displayed in large font, entry
L2 - BRANCH TO SAR PAGE of a valid Rendezvous number (1-5) results in a
If MC DEGRADED LNAV MODE is True and the branch to the RENDEZVOUS n page of the route
active route is selected, then data adjacent to L2 is selected.
displayed in small font. Numerical data displays the If data adjacent to L5 is displayed in large font, selec-
previously entered SAR number. If a SAR number has tion results in a branch to the RENDEZVOUS n page
not been entered, then data displays the default. of the route selected.
If data adjacent to L2 is displayed in large font, entry When data adjacent to L5 is displayed in large font,
of a valid SAR number (1-4) results in a branch to the the MISSIONS page was accessed from the WAY-
SAR n INIT page of the route selected. POINT DATA page and the Rendezvous defined
If data adjacent to L2 is displayed in large font, selec- exists in the flight plan identified by route, pressing L5
tion results in a branch to the SAR n INIT page of the results in the NOT ALLOWED message.
route selected.
L6 - BRANCH TO PPOS HOLD PAGE
When data adjacent to L2 is displayed in large font,
the MISSIONS page was accessed from the WAY- If MC DEGRADED LNAV MODE is False, the active
POINT DATA page and the SAR defined exists in the route does not contain a holding pattern, there is an
flight plan identified by route, pressing L2 results in active TO waypoint, the crosstrack error is less than
the NOT ALLOWED message. 0.25 NM, and LNAV is not in a transition state and the
active waypoint is not * CARP or * DZESC, then data
L3 - BRANCH TO SAR PROGRESS PAGE adjacent to L6 are displayed in large font.
If MC DEGRADED LNAV MODE is True and the If data adjacent to L6 is displayed in large font, selec-
active route is selected, then data adjacent to L3 is tion results in a branch to the active route HOLD page.
displayed in small font. When data adjacent to L3 is
R1
displayed in large font, selection results in a branch to
the SAR PROG page of the route selected. Not operational.
L4 - BRANCH TO LANDING ZONE PAGE R2 - BRANCH TO CARP N INIT PAGE
If MC DEGRADED LNAV MODE is True and the If MC DEGRADED LNAV MODE is True and the
active route is selected, then data adjacent to L4 is active route is selected, then data adjacent to R2 is
displayed in small font. Numerical data displays the displayed in small font. Numerical data displays the
previously entered Landing Zone number. If a Landing previously entered CARP number. If a CARP number
Zone number has not been entered, then data dis- has not been entered, then data displayed is the
played is the default. default.
If data adjacent to L4 is displayed in large font, entry If data adjacent to R2 is displayed in large font, entry
of a valid Landing Zone number (1-4) results in a of a valid CARP number (1-10) results in a branch to
branch to the LZ n INIT page of the route selected. the CARP n INIT page of the route selected.
If data adjacent to L4 is displayed in large font, selec- If data adjacent to R2 is displayed in large font, selec-
tion results in a branch to the LZ n INIT page of the tion results in a branch to the CARP n INIT page of
route selected. the route selected.

3E-2
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

When data adjacent to R2 is displayed in large font, d. Selection of the return prompt on the CUSTOM
the MISSIONS page was accessed from the WAY- WAYPOINT page when the CUSTOM WAYPOINT
POINT DATA page and the CARP defined exists in page was accessed from the SAR INIT page.
the flight identified by route, pressing R2 results in the
NOT ALLOWED message.
Display
R3 - BRANCH TO CARP N PROGRESS PAGE If the route associated with the SAR is inactive, left
If MC DEGRADED LNAV MODE is True and the data field in title is blank. If the route is provisional,
active route is selected, then data adjacent to R3 is MOD is displayed. Otherwise, the route is active and
displayed in small font. Numerical data displays the ACT is displayed. Center data field in title displays the
previously entered CARP Progress number. If a SAR number corresponding to the selected SAR.
CARP Progress number has not been entered, then
data displayed is the default. L1 - SAR IDENTIFIER
If data adjacent to R3 is displayed in large font, entry Data adjacent to L1 displays the waypoint label and
of a valid CARP Progress number (1-10) results in a waypoint identifier associated with the SAR displayed
branch to the CARP n PROG page of the route in the title line. Valid Place/Bearing/Distance, Place/
selected. Bearing/Place/Bearing, Latitude/Longitude, or MGRS
If data adjacent to R3 is displayed in large font, selec- entries result in the creation of the waypoint identifier
tion results in a branch to the CARP n PROG page of using the route associated with the SAR.
the route selected. Valid waypoint entries that are contained in a data-
base results in the display of the entered identifier in
R4 - BRANCH TO CHUTE LIST PAGE data adjacent to L1 and the waypoint’s latitude/longi-
Selection of soft-key R4 branches to the CHUTE LIST tude in data adjacent to L2.
page. Valid waypoint entries that are not contained in a data-
base branches to the CUSTOM DATA page. Upon
R5 return from the CUSTOM DATA page with a waypoint
defined, the CNI-SP uses the waypoint to define data
Not operational.
adjacent to L1 and L2. Upon return from the CUSTOM
R6 - BRANCH TO TIME NAV PAGE DATA page when the waypoint is not defined, the CNI-
SP displays the entry in the scratch pad.
Selection of soft-key R4 branches to the TIME NAV If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier
page. exists in the databases, the CNI-SP branches to the
WAYPOINT SELECT page. Upon return from the
WAYPOINT SELECT page with a waypoint selected,
SAR INIT PAGE the CNI-SP uses the selected waypoint to define data
adjacent to L1 and L2. Upon return from the WAY-
The SAR INIT page (Figure 3E-3) provides a page for
POINT SELECT page when a waypoint is not
definition of a SAR.
selected, the CNI-SP displays the entry in the scratch
pad.
Page Access
L2 - SAR IP POSITION
a. Select the MFP prompt on the WAYPOINT DATA
page when the waypoint type is SAR. The way- Data adjacent to L2 displays the SAR IP Position as
point identifier and waypoint position from the defined in L1. If the SAR IP Position has not been
WAYPOINT DATA page is displayed in the SAR defined, data adjacent to L2 displays the default.
identifier and SAR IP position fields.
L3 - SAR PATTERN TYPE
b. Select the SAR prompt on the MISSIONS page. If
Data adjacent to L3 provides a switch for selecting the
access to the MISSIONS page was from the WAY-
different SAR Pattern types: EXP SQ = Expanding
POINT DATA page, then the waypoint identifier
Square; CRP LN = Creeping Line; SECTR = Sector;
and waypoint position on the WAYPOINT DATA
PARL = Parallel. The selected SAR Pattern is high-
page will be used for the SAR identifier and SAR IP
lighted in large font.
position fields.
c. Return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page when
the WAYPOINT SELECT page was accessed from
the SAR INIT page.

3E-3
FAM.1C-27J-1A

L4 - SAR INITIAL COURSE SAR PROGRESS PAGE

Data adjacent to L4 displays the initial course for the
SAR. Page Access

L5 - LEG SPACE AND WIDTH The SAR PROG page (Figure 3E-4) is displayed
when the SAR PROG prompt is selected on the SAR
Data adjacent to L5 displays the leg spacing for the INIT page, the PROGRESS 2/4 page, the MISSIONS
selected SAR Pattern. Leg Space entry range for all page, the LEGS 1 page, or the LEGS 2 page.
other types of search patterns is 0.1 to 99.9. Valid
entries are of the form SPACE or SPACE/WIDTH.
Data displays “/WIDTH” if the SAR type is Parallel or Display
Creeping Line, and is blank otherwise. The SAR PROG page displays the progress of the
Data adjacent to L5 displays the SAR Width for Paral- active SAR pattern. Data in the title displays the SAR
lel and Creeping Line searches, and is blank other- identifier, SAR pattern type, and SAR number corre-
wise. sponding to the active SAR or the next SAR to be
flown. If there is no SAR defined in the flight plan, then
L6 - ERASE/BRANCH TO CALLING PAGE
the SAR number displays 1.
Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the flight plan
which contains this SAR is provisional. Otherwise, L1 ACTIVE COURSE
data adjacent to L6 displays a branch to the page Data adjacent to L1 displays the active course of the
which resulted in the SAR INIT page to be displayed SAR being flown.
(either LEGS or MISSIONS).
If the SAR INIT page was displayed via the WAY- L2 - NEXT LEG’S COURSE
POINT DATA page, data adjacent to L6 displays
LEGS N, where “N” is the route (1 or 2) of the associ- Data adjacent to L2 displays the course of the next
ated waypoint. SAR leg to be flown.
Selection when the ERASE prompt is displayed
L3 - CROSSTRACK ERROR
results in the provisional being erased. If the resulting
flight plan does not contain the SAR number dis- Data adjacent to L3 displays the current crosstrack
played in title, a branch will be executed to the page error. When sensitive steering is active data adjacent
which resulted in the SAR INIT page to be displayed. to L3 is displayed in yards. When sensitive steering is
Selection when a branch is displayed branches to the not active data adjacent to L3 is displayed in nautical
displayed page. miles. If the aircraft is to the left or right of the pre-
dicted ground track, then data adjacent to L3 displays
R1 THROUGH R3 L or R. If the cross track error is not available, then
Not operational. adjacent to L3 display blanks.

R4 - SAR RADIUS AND RANGE L4 - WIND

Data adjacent to R4 displays the SAR Radius. SAR Data adjacent to L4 displays the current sensed winds
radius entry range for Sector search is 5.0 to 40.0. For along with head/tail wind and crosswind component.
all other pattern types, the valid range is 0.1 to 99.9.
L5 - TAS AND GROUNDSPEED
R5 - SAR TURN/ALIGNMENT Data adjacent to L5 displays the current true airspeed.
Data adjacent to R5 displays SAR ALIGN if the SAR and, if available (preceded by a /), the current ground-
type is Parallel or Creeping Line, and TURNS other- speed.
wise. Data adjacent to R5 displays a left/right (L/R)
L6 - BRANCH TO CALLING PAGE
switch which is controlled from this soft-key.
Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the SAR is in
R6 - BRANCH TO SAR PROGRESS PAGE the provisional flight plan. Selection erases the provi-
Data adjacent to R6 displays SAR PROG if SAR num- sional flight plan. If ERASE is not displayed, data
ber on title is the active leg. Selection when this is dis- adjacent to L6 displays a branch to the page which
played branches to the SAR PROG page for the resulted in the SAR PROG page being displayed.
displayed SAR. Otherwise, data adjacent to R6 is Selection results in a branch to that page.
blank and selection is non-operational.

3E-4
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

R1 - ACTIVE LEG DTG d. Select the PREV PAGE or NEXT PAGE hard-key
when the LZ INIT 2/2 page is displayed results in
Data adjacent to R1 displays the active leg’s Distance the LZ INIT 1/2 page being displayed.
to Go.
e. Return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page when
R2 - TIME TO GO TO THE NEXT LEG the WAYPOINT SELECT page was accessed from
the LZ INIT 1/2 page.
Data adjacent to R2 displays the Time to Go to the
next leg. f. Selection of the return prompt on the CUSTOM
WAYPOINT page when the CUSTOM WAYPOINT
R3 AND R4 page was accessed from the LZ INIT 1/2 page.
Not operational.

R5 - DRIFT Display

Data adjacent to R5 displays the aircraft’s current drift If the route associated with the Landing Zone is inac-
angle. Data adjacent to R5 consists of a drift magni- tive, left data field in title is blank. If the route is provi-
tude, in degrees, followed by a left/right (L/R) indica- sional, MOD is displayed. Otherwise, the route is
tion of the drift direction. active and ACT is displayed. Center data field in title
displays the LZ number corresponding to the selected
R6 - SAR EXIT PROMPT Landing Zone.

Data adjacent to R6 displays SAR EXIT when the L1 - LZ IDENTIFIER

SAR is actively being flown, and another waypoint
exists in the active flight plan after the current SAR. Data adjacent to L1 displays the LZ identifier associ-
Selection results in a direct-to being performed from ated with the LZ runway. In addition to entering an LZ
the aircraft’s present position to the next waypoint not identifier here, the LZ identifier may also be placed
in the SAR. When the direct-to is performed, a provi- into this field as described in the in the Page Access
sional flight plan is created and data displays EXIT paragraph.
ARMED. If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier
Selection of the EXEC hard-key then branches to the exists in the databases, the CNI-SP branches to the
LEGS page. WAYPOINT SELECT page. Upon return from the
WAYPOINT SELECT page with a waypoint selected,
the CNI-SP uses the selected waypoint in the LZ iden-
LANDING ZONE INIT 1/2 tifier field. Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT
page when a waypoint is not selected, the CNI-SP
displays the entry in the scratch pad.
Page Access Valid waypoint entries that are not contained in a data-
a. Select the MFP prompt on the WAYPOINT DATA base branches to the CUSTOM DATA page. Upon
page when the Waypoint Type is LZ. The Waypoint return from the CUSTOM DATA page with a waypoint
Identifier and Waypoint Position from the WAY- defined, the CNI-SP uses the waypoint to define data
POINT DATA page will be displayed in the LZ adjacent to L1 and L2. Upon return from the CUSTOM
Identifier and LZ Threshold position fields. DATA page when the waypoint is not defined, the CNI-
SP displays the entry in the scratch pad.
b. Select the LZ prompt on the MISSIONS page. If
access to the MISSIONS page was from the WAY- L2 - LZ’S THRESHOLD POSITION
POINT DATA page, then the Waypoint Identifier
Data adjacent to L2 displays the LZ’s threshold lati-
and Waypoint Position on the WAYPOINT DATA
tude/longitude. In addition to entering an LZ threshold
page will be used for the LZ Identifier and LZ
position here, the LZ threshold position may also be
Threshold position fields.
placed into this field as described in the Page Access
c. Select the LZ INIT prompt on the DEP/ARR INDEX paragraph.
page. If the Destination for which the FMS APPR
prompt was selected has a defined runway, the
runway’s position and identifier will be placed into
LZ Identifier and LZ Threshold position fields, re-
spectively.

3E-5
FAM.1C-27J-1A

L3 - TOUCHDOWN ZONE ELEVATION If the LZ INIT page was displayed via the WAYPOINT
DATA page, data adjacent to L6 displays LEGS N,
Data adjacent to L3 displays the touchdown zone ele- where “N” is the route (1 or 2) of the associated way-
vation for the LZ. Valid Touchdown Zone Elevation point.
(TDZE) entries must be less than the Minimum Selection when the ERASE prompt is displayed
Descent Altitude (MDA); otherwise, the INVALID results in the provisional being erased. If the resulting
ENTRY message is displayed. If LZ is an NDB airport flight plan does not contain the LZ number displayed
runway, NDB TDZE is displayed. in title data field, a branch will be executed to the page
L4 - DALT/MDA/HAT which resulted in the LZ INIT page to be displayed.
Selection when a branch is displayed, results in a
Data adjacent to L4 displays DALT/HAT if the LZ type branch to the displayed page. The LEGS page dis-
is precision, and MDA/HAT if not. Adjacent data field played contains the LZ number indicated in title.
displays the DALT/MDA altitude. Additional data field
displays the HAT (Height Above Threshold) elevation. R1 - DESIRED TIME OF ARRIVAL
If the LZ type is precision, data field displays box Data adjacent to R1 displays the desired time of
prompts for a default, and additional data field is com- arrival at the LZ’s runway. This is also the Desired
pletely blank. Entry of a DALT results in the DALT Time of Arrival displayed on the WAYPOINT DATA 1/2
being displayed, and the HAT is then computed and page. Delete results in data field contents being
displayed as DALT minus TDZE. restored to the default value.
If the LZ type is not precision, data field displays box
prompts for a default, and data field is completely R2
blank. Entry of a MDA results in the MDA being dis-
played, and the HAT is then computed and displayed Not operational.
as MDA minus TDZE.
R3 - LZ TYPE
If the LZ type is precision or tactical, entered values
must be less than the Final Approach Fix altitude (FAF Data adjacent to R3 provides a switch selection for
ALT)/Glideslope Intercept altitude (GSI ALT) but the different LZ types. Selection of P selects a preci-
greater than the Threshold Elevation; otherwise, the sion approach. Selection of NP selects a non-preci-
INVALID ENTRY message is displayed. sion approach. Selection of TAC selects a tactical
If the LZ type is non-precision, entered values must be approach.
less than the FAF ALT but greater than the Threshold
Elevation; otherwise, the INVALID ENTRY message is R4 - LZ COURSE
displayed.
Data adjacent to R4 displays the LZ’s inbound course.
L5 - MISSED APPROACH POINT If LZ is an NDB airport runway, NDB course is dis-
played. Delete results data field in contents being
Data adjacent to L5 is blank if the LZ type is precision, restored to the default value.
and MAP otherwise.
Data field below is blank if the LZ type is precision, R5
and contains the MAP distance otherwise. Entry is
Not operational.
non-operational when the LZ type is precision, and
entries are placed into adjacent data field otherwise. R6 - BRANCH TO PROGRESS PAGE
The default is zero and values less than zero are not
valid. If the FAF distance (FAF DIST) is valid, either Selection of soft-key R6 branches to PROGRESS 1/4
entered or calculated, then entered MAP values must page.
be less than the FAF DIST; otherwise, INVALID
ENTRY message is displayed.
LANDING ZONE INIT 2/2
L6 - ERASE/BRANCH TO CALLING PAGE
Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the flight plan Page Access
which contains this Landing Zone is provisional. Oth-
The LZ INIT 2/2 page (Figure 3E-6) is accessed by
erwise, data adjacent to L6 displays a branch to the
pressing the PREV PAGE or NEXT PAGE hard-key
page which resulted in the LZ INIT page to be dis-
from the LZ INIT 1/2 page.
played (either LEGS, MISSIONS, or DEP/ARR).

3E-6
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Display Valid entries are greater than GSI (FAF) distance.

Delete results in the entered value being removed and
L1 - RUNWAY POINT OF INTERCEPT replaced with the default value.
Data adjacent to L1 displays RPI and data field below
L6 - BRANCH TO CALLING PAGE
displays the RPI value if the LZ type is precision or
tactical. Otherwise, these two fields are blank. Data Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the flight plan
field displays data in large font if the data is entered, which contains this Landing Zone is provisional. Oth-
and in small font if computed. A distance less than erwise, data adjacent to L6 displays a branch to the
zero is not valid. If the TCH or DA is entered, RPI is page which resulted in the LZ INIT 1/2 page to be dis-
computed and displayed, even if RPI had been previ- played (either LEGS, MISSIONS, or DEP/ARR).
ously entered. If RPI has been entered, delete results If the LZ INIT 1/2 page was displayed via the WAY-
in the RPI being replaced with its default value. POINT DATA page, data adjacent to L6 displays
LEGS N, where “N” is the route (1 or 2) of the associ-
L2 - THRESHOLD CROSSING HEIGHT ated waypoint.
Data adjacent to L2 displays TCH and data field below Selection when the ERASE prompt is displayed
displays the TCH value if the LZ type is precision or results in the provisional being erased. If the resulting
tactical. Otherwise, these two fields are blank. Data flight plan does not contain the LZ number displayed
field displays data in large font if the data is entered, in title, a branch will be executed to the page which
and in small font if computed. A height less than zero resulted in the LZ INIT page to be displayed. Selection
is not valid. The default value is 50 ft. when a branch is displayed branches to the displayed
If the RPI is entered, TCH is computed and displayed, page. The LEGS page displayed contains the LZ
even if TCH had been previously entered. number indicated in title.
If TCH has been entered, delete results in the RPI
R1 - GLIDE SLOPE OR DESCENT ANGLE
being replaced with its default value.
Data adjacent to R1 displays DESCENT ANGLE and
L3 - GSI/FAF DISTANCE data field below displays descent angle if LZ type is
Data adjacent to L3 displays GSI and data field below non-precision or tactical; otherwise data field displays
displays GSI distance if LZ type is precision; other- GLIDE SLOPE, and data field below displays glide
wise data field displays FAF, and data field below dis- slope. Glide slope defaults to 3.0 degrees for a preci-
plays FAF distance. Data field displays data in large sion or tactical type LZ and defaults to blanks if a
font if the data is entered, and in small font if com- value can not be computed in a non-precision type LZ.
puted. Default and computed values are displayed in small
If the LZ type is precision or tactical, L3 is completely font, and entered values are displayed in large font.
non-operational. The default for data field is blanks. If the LZ type is non-precision, the Descent Angle is
If the LZ type is non-precision, entry of a valid FAF not computed or displayed unless the Minimum
Distance results in the display of the entered FAF dis- Descent Altitude (MDA), Final Approach Fix (FAF) dis-
tance in data field. Valid FAF Distance must be greater tance, Missed Approach Point (MAP) distance, and
than the MAP Distance; otherwise, the INVALID Final Approach Fix Altitude (FAF ALT) are valid. Entry
ENTRY message is displayed. The default for data of a descent angle in a non-precision type LZ is not
field is box prompts. allowed.
If a Descent Angle is entered, delete results in the
L4 - SLOW DOWN DISTANCE entered value being replaced with the default value.
Data adjacent to L4 displays the Slow Down Distance. R2 - THRESHOLD ELEVATION
The slow down distance defaults to GSI (FAF) dis-
tance, if it is valid, or displays dash prompts other- Data adjacent to R2 displays THR ELEV and data
wise. Valid entries are between GSI (FAF) distance field below displays the threshold elevation if LZ type
and TP. Delete results in the entered value being is precision or tactical. Otherwise, both fields are
removed and replaced with the default value. blank, and R2 is completely non-operational.
Entered values must be less than the Decision Alti-
L5 - TURN POINT DISTANCE tude (DALT)/Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA); other-
wise, the INVALID ENTRY message is displayed.
Data adjacent to L5 displays the Turn Point distance. Delete results in the entered value in data field being
The turn point distance defaults to GSI (FAF) distance replaced with the default value.
if it is valid and SD is not entered, to SD if it has been
entered, or displays dash prompts otherwise.

3E-7
FAM.1C-27J-1A

R3 - FAF/GSI ALTITUDE L1 - TARGET’S INITIAL POSITION

Data adjacent to R3 displays GSI ALT for a precision Data adjacent to L1 displays the target’s initial posi-
type LZ, and FAF ALT otherwise. tion. When LL is selected using soft-key R1, the lati-
Entered values must be greater than the Decision Alti- tude/longitude is displayed in data field adjacent to L1.
tude (DALT)/Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA); other- When MGRS is selected, the MGRS coordinates are
wise, the INVALID ENTRY message is displayed. displayed. When DEF is selected, the position is
Delete results in the entered value in data field being shown as it was defined. Entries are displayed adja-
replaced with the default value. cent to L1.
If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier
R4 - LZ CAS exists in the databases (navigation and custom), the
Data adjacent to R4 displays the CAS to be flown CNI-SP branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page.
from slowdown to touchdown. Delete results in the Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with
data in data field being replaced with its default value. a waypoint selected, the CNI-SP uses the selected
waypoint to determine the target’s initial position.
R5 Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page
when a waypoint is not selected, the CNI-SP displays
Not operational. the entry in the scratch pad.
When the rendezvous output position is frozen, entry
R6 - BRANCH TO PROGRESS PAGE
attempts will result in display of the NOT ALLOWED
Selection of soft-key R6 branches to PROGRESS 1/4 message.
page. Delete results in data field being returned to its default
data. When data field displays default data, selection
is non-operational. Otherwise, selection results in data
RENDEZVOUS field being down selected into the scratch pad.

The RENDEZVOUS page (Figure 3E-7) allows defini- L2 - TARGET’S INITIAL TIME
tion of a target’s position and heading, and then com-
putes an intercept point with the target. Data adjacent to L2 displays the target’s time at the
initial position. When the rendezvous output position
is frozen, entry attempts will result in display of the
Page Access NOT ALLOWED message. Delete results in data field
being returned to its default data.
The RENDEZVOUS page is displayed when any of
the following conditions are satisfied. L3 - TARGET’S INITIAL TRACK
a. Selection of the rendezvous prompt (RNDZ) on the Data adjacent to L3 displays the target’s track at the
MISSIONS page. initial position. When the rendezvous output position
b. Selection of the MFP prompt on the WAYPOINT is frozen, entry attempts will result in display of the
DATA page when the Waypoint Type is RNDZ. NOT ALLOWED message. Delete results in data field
being returned to its default data.
c. Return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page when
the WAYPOINT SELECT page was accessed from L4 - INTERCEPT POINT BEARING/DISTANCE
the RENDEZVOUS page.
When the intercept point has not been calculated,
data fields adjacent to L4 are blank. When the inter-
Display cept point has been calculated, data fields display the
intercept point’s bearing and distance, respectively.
If the route is active, ACT is displayed in title. If the
route is provisional (including changes to the rendez- L5 - TARGET’S BEARING/DISTANCE
vous), MOD is displayed in title. Otherwise, the route
associated with the rendezvous is inactive and left When the target’s current position is not known, data
data field in title is blank. Data field in title displays the fields adjacent to L5 are blank. When the target’s cur-
rendezvous number corresponding to the selected rent position is known, data fields display the target’s
rendezvous. bearing and range.

3E-8
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

L6 - ERASE/RETURN BRANCH Selection of R5 results in the latitude/longitude being

placed into the scratch pad.
Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the light plan
which contains this rendezvous is provisional. Other- R6
wise, L6 displays a return branch prompt. If the REN-
DEZVOUS page was accessed from the MISSIONS Not operational.
page, MISSIONS is displayed. If the RENDEZVOUS
page was accessed from a WAYPOINT DATA page,
the prompt will be to the appropriate LEGS page RTE HOLD
(LEGS 1 or LEGS 2). The RTE HOLD page (Figure 3E-8) displays detailed
Selection when ERASE is displayed results in the pro- information about selected holding patterns.
visional flight plan being erased. If the resulting flight
plan does not contain the rendezvous number dis-
played in title, a branch will be executed to the page Page Access
from which the RENDEZVOUS page was accessed.
a. Selection of the HOLD prompt on the WAYPOINT
Selection when a branch is displayed branches to the
DATA page 1/2 results in display of the HOLD
corresponding page. The LEGS page displayed con-
page.
tains the rendezvous number indicated in title.
b. Selection of the PPOS HOLD prompt from the
R1 - POSITION DEFINITION SWITCH MISSIONS page displays the HOLD page for the
Data adjacent to R1 provides a three-way switch for active route.
controlling the display of the rendezvous initial posi-
tion (LL = Latitude/longitude, MGRS = Military Grid Display
Reference and DEF = Defined). Selection results in
toggling the selected position definition in adjacent If the route is active, ACT is displayed in title. If the
field and the corresponding position display in data route is provisional, MOD is displayed in title. There
adjacent to L1. are actually two HOLD pages, one for route 1, and
one for route 2. Title displays the route number to
R2 - TARGET’S INITIAL GROUNDSPEED which the HOLD page applies.
Data adjacent to R2 displays the target’s ground- L1 - HOLD FIX
speed at the initial position. When the rendezvous
output position is frozen, entry attempts will result in The HOLD FIX is displayed in data adjacent to L1. If
display of the NOT ALLOWED message. Delete the Hold was selected as a present position hold from
results in data field being returned to its default data. the MISSIONS page, * PPOS will be displayed as the
fix.
R3 - IN-TRAIL
L2 - QUADRANT/RADIAL
Data adjacent to R3 displays the in-trail distance.
When the rendezvous output position is frozen, entry Data adjacent to L2 displays the holding Quadrant/
attempts will result in display of the NOT ALLOWED Radial. Specified values for Quadrant and Radial are
message. Delete results in data field being restored to displayed in large font while computed and default
its default data. values are displayed in small font.
Valid entries are of the form Quad/Radial, Quadrant,
R4 - INTERCEPT TIME and /Radial. A Quadrant/Radial entry where the
Radial is not within the Quadrant is considered an
Data adjacent to R4 displays the predicted intercept
invalid entry. A valid entry causes the reciprocal of the
time. If the aircraft is airborne, data field displays the
Radial to be displayed in the Inbound Course field.
predicted ETA, and data field above displays ETA. If
When a Radial is specified without the Quadrant, the
the aircraft is on ground, data field displays the pre-
Radial value is used in determining the Quadrant.
dicted ETE, and data field above displays ETE.
When a Quadrant is specified without the Radial, then
R5 - INTERCEPT POSITION the Quadrant value is used in determining the Radial.
Following list illustrates the relationship between the
When the intercept point has not been calculated, quadrant and radial.
data fields adjacent to R5 are blank. When the inter-
cept point has been calculated, data fields display the
intercept point’s latitude and longitude, respectively.

3E-9
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Quadrant/Default Relationship If the displayed Hold is not the active leg of the active
flight plan, data adjacent to L6 displays LEGS N,
Quadrant / Radial Range Default Radial where “N” is the route number. Selection of L6
(Deg) (Deg) branches to the Legs page for the indicated route.
If the Hold is the active leg and the next waypoint in
N / >337.5 to 22.5 0 the primary flight plan is defined, data adjacent to L6
NE / >22.5 to 67.5 45 displays NOW ---EXIT in large font; if the next way-
point in the primary flight plan is not defined (such as
E / >67.6 to 112.5 90 a discontinuity), then it is displayed in small font.
SE / >112.5 to 157.5 135 Selection of the prompt while it is displayed in large
font results in the creation of a provisional flight plan
S / >157.5 to 202.5 180 where an immediate hold exit has been selected.
SW / >202.6 to 247.5 225 R1 - SPEED/ALTITUDE TARGET
W / >247.5 to 292.5 270
Data fields adjacent to R1 display the speed and alti-
NW / >292.5 to 337.5 315 tude targets, respectively, for the hold fix. Computed
data is displayed in small font. Entered data is dis-
L3 - INBOUND COURSE/DIRECTION played in large font.
These data fields operate in the same fashion as data
Data adjacent to L3 displays the Inbound Course/Turn fields adjacent to R1 and R3 and display target alti-
Direction specified values for Inbound Course and tude on LEGS 2/2 page.
Turn Direction are displayed in large font while com-
puted and default values are displayed in small font. R2 - HOLD FUEL FLOW
If the Quadrant, Radial, and Inbound Course are not
specified, then the Inbound Course defaults to the Data adjacent to R2 displays the holding pattern fuel
course of the leg preceding the hold. If the leg preced- flow. Valid fuel flow entries are displayed.
ing the hold is an initial fix, the inbound course default
R3 - FIX ETA/EAT
value will be 360. The Turn Direction defaults to Right.
An Inbound Course only entry retains the Turn Direc- Data adjacent to R3 displays the ETA of the next fix
tion. The Turn Direction can be changed without alter- crossing in small font, unless an EAT has been
ing the Inbound Course. Entry of a course results in entered. If the user has entered an EAT, it is displayed
the radial displayed in data adjacent to L2 being in large font, and the title line changes to EAT. If an
recomputed. EAT has been entered, and a Leg Time or Leg Dis-
tance is entered, the title changes to its default value,
L4 - INBOUND LEG TIME and computed ETA crossing the hold fix is displayed
The Leg Time is displayed in data adjacent to L4. If an in small font. Delete while an EAT has been entered
EAT has been entered computed Leg Times are dis- results in deletion of the EAT, and display of the
played in small font. Default values are displayed in default title and computed ETA crossing the Hold fix
small font. Valid entries are displayed in large font. being displayed in small font.
Entry of a time will result in the leg distance displayed
R4 - HOLDING PATTERN ENTRY TYPE AND
in data adjacent to L5 being recomputed. COURSE
L5 - LEG DISTANCE Data adjacent to R4 display the holding pattern’s entry
type and course into the holding pattern.
The Leg Distance is displayed in data adjacent to L5.
If an EAT has been entered, computed Leg Distances R5 - HOLD TIME AVAILABLE
are displayed in small font. Valid entries are displayed
in large font. Data adjacent to R5 displays holding time available
Entry of a leg distance will result in the leg time dis- before an exit is required in order to reach the destina-
played in data adjacent to L4 being recomputed. tion with specified fuel reserves. Hold Available is dis-
played in small font with leading zeros, ending in
L6 - BRANCH TO LEGS PAGE/ERASE/EXIT column 24. If the Hold Available is not valid, blanks
HOLD NOW will be displayed in this field.
If the Route displayed in title is provisional, data adja-
cent to L6 displays ERASE. Selection then results in
the provisional being deleted.

3E-10
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

R6 - DELETE/EXIT HOLD Valid Place/Bearing/Distance, Place/Bearing/Place/

Bearing, Latitude/Longitude, or MGRS entries results
If the Hold is the active leg, data adjacent to R6 dis- in the creation of the Waypoint Identifier using the
plays HOLD ---ARM. Selection results in the creation route associated with the CARP.
of a provisional flight plan where the hold pattern exit Valid waypoint entries that are contained in a data-
is armed, and data field then displays DELETED. Oth- base results in the display of the entered identifier in
erwise, DELETE HOLD is displayed. Selection results data adjacent to L1 and the waypoints latitude/longi-
in the holding pattern being deleted. tude in data adjacent to L2.
Valid waypoint entries that are not contained in a data-
base branches to the CUSTOM DATA page. Upon
CARP INIT 1/5 return from the CUSTOM DATA page with a waypoint
The CARP INIT 1/5 page (Figure 3E-9) describes the defined, the CNI-SP uses the waypoint to define data
physical description of the CARP drop zone. adjacent to L1 and L2. Upon return from the CUSTOM
DATA page when the waypoint is not defined, the CNI-
SP displays the entry in the scratch pad. If more than
Page Access one waypoint with the entered identifier exists in the
The CARP INIT 1/5 page is displayed when any of the databases, the CNI-SP branches to the WAYPOINT
following conditions are satisfied. SELECT page. Upon return from the WAYPOINT
SELECT page with a waypoint selected, the CNI-SP
a. Selection of the MFP prompt on the WAYPOINT uses the selected waypoint to define data adjacent to
DATA page when the Waypoint Type is CARP. L1 and L2. Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT
page when a waypoint is not selected, the CNI-SP
b. Selection of the CARP prompt on the MISSIONS
displays the entry in the scratch pad.
page. If access to the MISSIONS page was from
When the CARP waypoints (TP, CARP, DZ ESC) are
the WAYPOINT DATA page, then the Waypoint
not defined in the flight plan, deletion results in
Identifier and Waypoint Position on the WAY-
defaults being displayed for all data fields on the
POINT DATA page will be used for the Drop Zone
CARP INIT pages.
Identifier and Point of Impact Position fields.
c. Selection of the PREV PAGE hard-key from the L2 - POINT OF IMPACT POSITION
CARP INIT 2/5 page. Data adjacent to L2 displays the Latitude/Longitude of
d. Selection of the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the the Point of Impact (PI) position associated with the
CARP INIT 5/5 page. CARP displayed in the title line.

e. Return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page when L3 - LEADING EDGE TO TRAILING EDGE
the WAYPOINT SELECT page was accessed from LENGTH
the CARP INIT 1/5 page. Data adjacent to L3 displays the drop zone length
f. Selection of the return prompt on the CUSTOM associated with the CARP displayed in the title line.
DATA page when the CUSTOM DATA page was Length LE-TE is the length from the Leading Edge to
accessed from the CARP INIT 1/5 page. the Trailing Edge along the drop zone axis.
Entry of the length LE-TE is in yards. Entries that are
less than the Length LE-PI results in the INVALID
Display ENTRY message.
If the route is active, ACT is displayed in title. If the L4 - SLOW DOWN DISTANCE
route is provisional (including changes to the CARP
data), MOD is displayed in title. Otherwise, the route Data adjacent to L4 displays the Slow Down Distance
associated with the CARP is inactive and left data in associated with the CARP displayed in the title line.
the title is blank. The title also displays the CARP Slow Down Distance is the great circle distance from
number corresponding to the selected CARP. the CARP to the Slow Down (SD). Entry of Slow
Down Distance is in nautical miles. Entry of a Slow
L1 - DROP ZONE IDENTIFIER Down Distance greater than the Turn Point Distance
when a Turn Point Distance is available results in a
Data adjacent to L1 displays the Waypoint Label and
NOT ALLOWED message and the entry remaining in
Waypoint Identifier associated with the CARP dis-
the scratch pad.
played in the title line.

3E-11
FAM.1C-27J-1A

L5 - RUN IN COURSE R2
The run in course defines the alignment of the drop Not operational.
zone axis.
Data adjacent to L5 displays the CARP Run In Course R3 - LEADING EDGE TO POINT OF IMPACT
referenced to either magnetic (NNN degrees) or grid LENGTH
north (NNN G). If the Heading Reference on the SYS- Data adjacent to R3 displays the Length LE-PI associ-
TEM CONTROL page is set to MAG or TRUE, data ated with the CARP displayed in the title line. Length
adjacent to L5 displays the Run In Course referenced LE-PI is the length from the Leading Edge to the Point
to magnetic north (NNN M). of Impact along the drop zone axis.
If the Heading Reference on the SYSTEM CONTROL Entry of the Length LE-PI will be in yards. Entries that
page is set to GRID, data adjacent to L5 displays the are greater than the Length LE-TE results in the
run in course referenced to grid (NNN G). INVALID ENTRY message.
Data adjacent to L5 displays the CARP Run In Course
referenced to true north (NNN T). If the Point of R4 - TURN POINT DISTANCE
Impact Latitude is greater than N 72.5° or greater than
S 59.5° the Run In Course referenced to true north is Data adjacent to R4 displays the Turn Point Distance
displayed. associated with the CARP displayed in the title line.
Entry of the Run In Course is referenced to magnetic Turn Point Distance is the great circle distance from
(NNN) or true (NNN T or /NNN) north. If the Point of the CARP to the Turn Point (TP). Entry of Turn Point
Impact Latitude is greater than N 72.5° or greater than Distance is in nautical miles. Entry of a Turn Point Dis-
S 59.5° and a magnetic heading is entered then the tance less than the Slow Down Distance when a Slow
BEARING MUST BE IN TRUE message is displayed Down Distance is available results in a NOT
and the entered course remains in the scratch pad. ALLOWED message and the entry remaining in the
scratch pad.
L6 - ERASE/RETURN BRANCH
R5 - DROP ZONE ESCAPE DISTANCE
Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the flight plan
which contains this CARP is provisional. Otherwise, Data adjacent to R5 displays the Drop Zone Escape
data adjacent to L6 displays a branch to the page Distance associated with the CARP displayed in the
which resulted in the CARP INIT page to be displayed title line. The Drop Zone Escape Distance defines the
(either LEGS or MISSIONS page). If the CARP INIT distance from Red Light to the DZ ESC waypoint.
page was displayed via the WAYPOINT DATA page, Entry of the Drop Zone Escape Distance uses the
the prompt will be to the LEGS page. CARP Distance format. Deletion of R5 results in data
Selection when the ERASE prompt is displayed adjacent to R5 being set to the default.
results in the provisional being erased. R6 - CARP PROGRESS BRANCH
Selection when a branch is displayed branches to the
displayed page. The legs page displayed contains the Selection of soft-key R6 branches to the CARP PROG
CARP number indicated in title. page for the CARP number displayed in the title line.

R1 - DESIRED TIME OVER TARGET

Data adjacent to R1 displays the Time Over Target
CARP INIT 2/5
associated with the CARP displayed in the title line. The CARP INIT 2/5 page (Figure 3E-10) describes
The Time Over Target defines the desired time of the payload to be dropped.
arrival at the CARP waypoint. This is also the Desired
Time of Arrival displayed on the WAYPOINT DATA 1/2
page. If the Time Over Target value is entered, the Page Access
Time Over Target field on the CARP PROG 1/2 page The CARP INIT 2/5 page is displayed when any of the
is updated also. If the Racetrack selection on the following conditions are satisfied.
CARP INIT 2/5 and CARP PROG 1/2 pages is L or R,
then the entered Desired Time Over Target is a. Selection of the PREV PAGE hard-key from the
replaced with the predicted time over target once the CARP INIT 3/5 page.
aircraft arrives at the * CARP waypoint on the first
b. Selection of the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the
overfly. Deletion sets the Time Over Target field to its
CARP INIT 1/5 page.
default and clear the time of arrival at the CARP way-
point.

3E-12
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

c. Selection of the CARP prompt on the CHUTE LIST Entering a Parachute Identifier that is defined in the
page when the CHUTE LIST page was accessed Chute List for the specified CARP Payload Type
from the CARP INIT 2/5 page. results in the data fields on the CARP INIT 5/5 page,
including crew specified data, being replaced with the
ballistic database values.
Display Parachute ballistic parameters not defined for the
If the route is active, ACT is displayed in title. If the entered Parachute Identifier are set to their defaults.
route is provisional (including changes to the CARP Entries that do not follow the parachute definition for-
data), MOD is displayed. Otherwise, the route associ- mat results in the INVALID ENTRY message. If the
ated with the CARP is inactive and left data in the title Parachute Identifier is not defined in the Chute List for
is blank. Additional data displays the CARP number the specified CARP Payload Type, then the CNI-SP
corresponding to the selected CARP. branches to the CHUTE LIST page.
When the * CARP or * DZESC of the CARP identified
L1 - CARP PAYLOAD TYPE in the title is the active waypoint, entry of a Parachute
Identifier and/or Number of Parachutes results in the
Data adjacent to L1 provides a three-way switch for
NOT ALLOWED message.
controlling the CARP Payload Type. In PER position,
the CARP Payload Type is set to Personnel. In CDS L4 - DROP SPEED
position, the CARP Payload Type is set to Container
Delivery System. In HE position, the CARP Payload Data adjacent to L4 displays the Drop Speed (CAS)
Type is set to Heavy Equipment. associated with the CARP displayed in the title line.
Selection of the CARP Payload Type when the CARP When the CARP Payload Type is CDS or HE, the
solution is in the flight plan is non-operational. Drop Speed defaults to 140 knots.
Selection of the CARP Payload Type when the CARP When the CARP Payload Type is PER, the Drop
solution is not in the flight plan will operate as a nor- Speed defaults to 130 knots.
mal switch. If the parachute identifier adjacent to L4 is Entry of the Drop Speed is in the form defined by
not valid for the selected Payload Type, then data field Speed CAS. Entries that do not follow the Speed CAS
(parachute identifier) is set to its default and the para- format results in the INVALID ENTRY message.
chute ballistic data on the CARP INIT 5/5 page is set If the Drop Speed is entered, the Drop Speed field on
to its default. the CARP PROG 1/2 page is also updated. Deletion
results in the Drop Speed being set to the default.
L2 - NUMBER OF STAGES
L5 - TURN DIRECTION/RACETRACK
Data adjacent to L2 provides a two-position switch for
controlling the Number of Stages associated with the Data adjacent to L5 provides a three position switch
CARP displayed in the title line. The number of stages for controlling the CARP Racetrack and Turn Direc-
is the number of separate drift effect vectors used in tion. The CARP Racetrack is enabled when the switch
the CARP calculation. is set to L or R, and disabled when the switch is set to
In the 1 position, the airdrop is defined using a single ESC. In ESC position, the CNI-SP flies to the DZESC
stage CARP calculation. In 2 position, the airdrop is waypoint then sequence to the next waypoint. In L
defined using a two stage CARP calculation. position, the CNI-SP flies to the DZESC waypoint then
When the * CARP or * DZESC of the CARP defined performs a left turn CARP racetrack. In R position, the
by CARP number in title is the active waypoint, selec- CNI-SP flies to the DZESC waypoint then performs a
tion results in the NOT ALLOWED message. Other- right turn CARP racetrack.
wise, selection toggles between 1 and 2 stage. If a CARP Abort has been executed for CARP n and
the * DZESC waypoint has not been sequenced, the
L3 - PARACHUTE IDENTIFIER AND NUMBER OF CARP Turn Direction/Racetrack switch for CARP n is
PARACHUTES non-operational.
Data field displays the same value as the Turn Direc-
Data adjacent to L3 displays the identifier defining the
tion/Racetrack field on the CARP n PROG 1/2 page.
parachute and adjoining data field displays the Num-
The racetrack speed is defaulted to 140 knots. A go
ber of Parachutes attached to an element. The Para-
around is predicted using a racetrack speed of 140
chute Identifier is one of the parachutes defined in the
KCAS.
Chute List. Valid entries are of the form Parachute
Identifier, Parachute Identifier/Number of Parachutes,
and /Number of Parachutes.

3E-13
FAM.1C-27J-1A

L6 - ERASE/RETURN BRANCH When the Drop Payload has been entered and an Ele-
ment Weight value exists for this CARP, deletion
Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the flight plan results in the Drop Payload being set the product of
which contains this CARP is provisional. Otherwise, Element Weight and Element Quantity. If either the
data adjacent to L6 displays a branch to the page Drop Payload or Element Weight has not been
which resulted in the CARP INIT 2/5 page to be dis- entered, deletion is non-operational.
played (either LEGS or MISSIONS page). If the CARP
INIT 2/5 page was displayed via the WAYPOINT R5 - CHUTE LIST BRANCH
DATA page, the prompt is to the LEGS page.
Selection when the ERASE prompt is displayed Selection of soft-key R5 branches to the CHUTE LIST
results in the provisional being erased. If the resulting page.
flight plan does not contain the CARP number dis-
R6 - CARP PROGRESS BRANCH
played in title, a branch is executed to the page which
resulted in the CARP INIT page to be displayed. Selection of soft-key R6 branches to the CARP PROG
Selection when a branch is displayed results in a page for the CARP number displayed in the title line.
branch to the displayed page. The legs page dis-
played contains the CARP number indicated in title.
CARP INIT 3/5
R1 - FUSELAGE STATION
The CARP INIT 3/5 page (Figure 3E-11) describes
When the CARP Payload Type (L1) is CDS data adja- the meteorological data for the given airdrop.
cent to R1 displays FUS STA and data field below dis-
plays the Fuselage Station. The default Fuselage
Station is 574. Data adjacent to R1 is blank when the Page Access
CARP Payload Type is PER or HE.
The CARP INIT 3/5 page is displayed when any of the
Entry of a Fuselage Station that is not within the ballis-
following conditions are satisfied.
tic table results in the DATA OUT OF RANGE mes-
sage and the entry remaining in the scratch pad. a. Selection of the PREV PAGE hard-key from the
CARP INIT 4/5 page.
R2 - EXIT LOCATION
b. Selection of the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the
When the CARP Payload Type (L1) is PER, data adja- CARP INIT 2/5 page.
cent to R2 displays EXIT and data field below displays
the Exit Location switch. Data adjacent to R2 is blank
when the CARP Payload Type is CDS or HE. Display
When CARP Payload Type is PER, data adjacent to
If the route is active, ACT is displayed in title. If the
R2 provides a switch for controlling the Exit Location.
route is provisional (including changes to the CARP
In DOOR position, the Exit Location is set to Door. In
data), MOD is displayed. Otherwise, the route associ-
RAMP position, the Exit Location is set to Ramp.
ated with the CARP is inactive and left data in the title
R3 - ELEMENT WEIGHT / ELEMENT QUANTITY is blank. Additional data displays the CARP number
corresponding to the selected CARP.
Data adjacent to R3 displays the Element Weight and
the Element Quantity associated with the CARP dis- L1 - DROP ALTITUDE WIND
played in the title line. Valid entries are of the form
Data adjacent to L1 displays the Drop Altitude Wind
Element Weight, Element Weight/Element Quantity,
bearing and speed associated with the CARP dis-
and /Element Quantity.
played in the title line.
When the Drop Payload data adjacent to R4 has not
been entered, the product of Element Weight and Ele- L2 - ACTUATION ALTITUDE WIND
ment Quantity is used for the Drop Payload. When the
entries in R3 result in a value greater than the Drop When the number of stages is 2, data adjacent to L2
Payload maximum, the entry is rejected and the displays ACTN W/V. When the number of stages is 1,
INVALID ENTRY message is displayed. data adjacent to L2 is blank.
When data field displays ACTN W/V, data field below
R4 - DROP PAYLOAD displays the Actuation Altitude Wind bearing and
speed associated with the CARP displayed in the title
Data adjacent to R4 displays the Drop Payload asso-
line.
ciated with the CARP displayed in the title line.

3E-14
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

L3 - SURFACE WIND L6 - ERASE/RETURN BRANCH

Data adjacent to L3 displays the Surface Wind bear- Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the flight plan
ing and speed, and associated with the CARP dis- which contains this CARP is provisional. Otherwise,
played in the title line. data adjacent to L6 displays a branch to the page
which resulted in the CARP INIT 3/5 page to be dis-
L4 - HI BALLISTIC WIND/BALLISTIC WIND played (either LEGS or MISSIONS page). If the CARP
The HI Ballistic Wind is the vector average of the Drop INIT 3/5 page was displayed via the WAYPOINT
Altitude Wind and the Actuation Altitude Wind used in DATA page, the prompt is to the LEGS page.
two stage drops. Selection when the ERASE prompt is displayed
Ballistic Wind is the vector average of the Drop Alti- results in the provisional being erased. If the resulting
tude Wind and the Surface Wind used in single stage flight plan does not contain the CARP number dis-
drops. played in title, a branch is executed to the page which
When the number of stages is 2, data adjacent to L4 resulted in the CARP INIT page to be displayed.
displays HI BAL W/V. When the number of stages is 1, Selection when a branch is displayed results in a
data adjacent to L4 displays BAL W/V. branch to the displayed page. The Route/Legs page
When data field displays HI BAL W/V, data field below displayed will contain the CARP number indicated in
displays the HI Ballistic Wind bearing and speed title.
associated with the CARP displayed in the title line. R1 - DROP ALTITUDE TEMPERATURE
When data field displays BAL W/V, data field below
displays the Ballistic Wind bearing and speed associ- Data adjacent to R1 displays the Drop Altitude Tem-
ated with the CARP displayed in the title line. perature associated with the CARP displayed in the
Entry of a HI Ballistic Wind/Ballistic Wind overrides title line. The temperature is displayed in both Celsius
the vector average computed by the CNI-SP. and Fahrenheit. Entry of temperature in one unit
Entry of a HI Ballistic Wind/Ballistic Wind when the results in the calculation of the equivalent value in the
Altitude Wind has not been entered results in the Alti- other unit.
tude Wind (L1) displaying dashes. Drop altitude temperature, by default, is calculated
Entry of a HI Ballistic Wind when the Low Ballistic using the standard day temperature at the Drop Alti-
Wind has been entered and the Actuation Altitude tude. This temperature is corrected using the current
Wind has not been entered results in the Actuation temperature deviation from the CNI-SP Master air
Altitude Wind (L2) displaying dashes. data source. If drop altitude or temperature deviation
Entry of a Ballistic Wind when the Surface Wind has are invalid and no drop altitude temperature is dis-
not been entered results in the Surface Wind (L3) dis- played, the default is boxes.
playing dashes. If drop altitude and temperature deviation from the
When the computed vector average wind is available CNI-SP Master air data source are valid, deletion of a
and a HI Ballistic Wind/Ballistic Wind is specified, user define value results in the CNI-SP computed
deletion of data adjacent to L4 results in the CNI-SP drop altitude temperature being displayed. Otherwise
computed vector average to be used for the HI Ballis- deletion is non-operational.
tic Wind/Ballistic Wind. Otherwise, deletion is non-
operational. R2 - ACTUATION ALTITUDE TEMPERATURE

L5 - ALTIMETER REFERENCE When the number of stages is 2, data adjacent to R2

displays ACTN TEMP associated with the CARP dis-
Data adjacent to L5 provides a switch for controlling played in the title line. The temperature is displayed in
the Altimeter Reference, QNH/QFE. In QNH position, both Celsius and Fahrenheit. Entry of temperature in
the pressure entered in data adjacent to R5 is refer- one unit results in the calculation of the equivalent
enced to QNH. In QFE position, the pressure entered value in the other unit.
in data field is referenced to QFE. When the number of stages is 1, data fields adjacent
An altimeter placed on the PI and referenced to QNH to R2 is blank.
will indicate the PI Elevation. An altimeter placed on Actuation altitude temperature, by default, is calcu-
the PI and referenced to QFE will indicate zero. lated using the standard day temperature at the Actu-
Selection of L5 results in the barometric pressure in ation Altitude. This temperature is corrected using the
R5 to be referenced to the new Altimeter Reference current temperature deviation from the CNI-SP Mas-
using the PI Elevation. If the data required to compute ter air data source. If actuation altitude or temperature
the new Altimeter Reference has not been defined, deviation are invalid and no actuation altitude temper-
then data adjacent to R5 displays dashes. ature is displayed, the default is boxes.

3E-15
FAM.1C-27J-1A

If actuation altitude and temperature deviation from The barometric pressure is displayed in both inHg and
the CNI-SP Master air data source are valid, deletion millibars. Entry of barometric pressure in one unit
of a user define value results in the CNI-SP computed results in the calculation of the equivalent value in the
actuation altitude temperature being displayed. Other- other unit. By default, Altimeter Setting is set to the
wise deletion is non-operational. altimeter setting from the CNI-SP Master selected air
data source. If altimeter setting is invalid, box prompts
R3 - SURFACE TEMPERATURE are displayed.
Data adjacent to R3 displays the Surface Temperature If CNI-SP Master selected air data altimeter setting is
associated with the CARP displayed in the title line. valid, deletion of a user defined value resets the dis-
The temperature is displayed in both Celsius and play to the CNI-SP Master selected air data altimeter
Fahrenheit. Entry of temperature in one unit results in setting. Otherwise deletion is non-operational.
the calculation of the equivalent value in the other R6 - CARP PROGRESS BRANCH
unit. Surface temperature, by default, is calculated
using the standard day temperature at the PI Eleva- Selection of soft-key R6 branches to the CARP PROG
tion. This temperature is corrected using the current page for the CARP number displayed in the title line.
temperature deviation from the CNI-SP Master air
data source. If PI Elevation or temperature deviation
are invalid and no surface temperature is displayed, CARP INIT 4/5
the default is boxes.
The CARP INIT 4/5 page (Figure 3E-12) describes
If PI Elevation and temperature deviation from the
the altitudes and elevations used in the CARP. The
CNI-SP Master air data source are valid, deletion of a
page has two forms for single stage and two stage air-
user define value results in the CNI-SP computed sur-
drops.
face temperature being displayed. Otherwise deletion
is non-operational.
Page Access
R4 - LOW BALLISTIC WIND
The CARP INIT 4/5 page is displayed when any of the
The Low Ballistic Wind is the vector average of the following conditions are satisfied.
Actuation Altitude Wind and the Surface Wind used in
two stage drops. a. Selection of the PREV PAGE hard-key from the
When the number of stages is 2, data adjacent to R4 CARP INIT 5/5 page.
displays LO BAL W/V. When the number of stages is
b. Selection of the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the
1, data adjacent to R4 is blank.
CARP INIT 3/5 page.
When data field displays LO BAL W/V, data field
below displays the Low Ballistic Wind bearing and
speed associated with the CARP displayed in the title Display
line.
Entry of a Low Ballistic Wind overrides the vector If the route is active, ACT is displayed in title. If the
average computed by the CNI-SP. route is provisional (including changes to the CARP
Entry of a Low Ballistic Wind when the Surface Wind data), MOD is displayed. Otherwise, the route associ-
has not been entered results in the Surface Wind (L3) ated with the CARP is inactive and left data in the title
displaying dashes. is blank. Additional data displays the CARP number
Entry of a Low Ballistic Wind when the HI Ballistic corresponding to the selected CARP. The minimum
Wind has been entered and the Actuation Altitude drop altitude (true altitude) is define in the CARP drift
Wind has not been entered results in the Actuation computation section.
Altitude Wind (L3) displaying dashes.
L1 - DROP ALTITUDE TYPE
When the computed vector average wind is available
and a Low Ballistic Wind is specified, deletion of data Data adjacent to L1 provides a two position switch for
adjacent to R4 results in the CNI-SP computed vector controlling the Drop Altitude Type. In QNH position,
average to be used for the Low Ballistic Wind. Other- the drop altitude is defined as the Indicated True Alti-
wise deletion is non-operational. tude based on a QNH altimeter setting. In PA position,
the drop altitude is defined as the Pressure Altitude,
R5 - ALTIMETER SETTING based on a QNE (29.92 in. Hg) altimeter setting.
Data adjacent to R5 displays the Altimeter Setting The switch displays the same setting on all three CNI-
associated with the CARP displayed in the title line. MUs.

3E-16
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

L2 - ACTUATION ALTITUDE TYPE L6 - ERASE/RETURN BRANCH

When the number of stages is 2, data adjacent to L2 Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the flight plan
displays the title ACTUATION ALTITUDE. which contains this CARP is provisional. Otherwise,
When the number of stages is 1, data adjacent to L2 data adjacent to L6 displays a branch to the page
is blank. which resulted in the CARP INIT 4/5 page to be dis-
When the number of stages is 2, data field provides a played (either LEGS or MISSIONS page). If the CARP
switch for controlling the actuation altitude type. INIT 4/5 page was displayed via the WAYPOINT
In QFE position, the actuation altitude is defined as DATA page, the prompt is to the LEGS page.
the indicated absolute altitude, based on a QFE altim- Selection when the ERASE prompt is displayed
eter setting. In PA position, the actuation altitude is results in the provisional being erased. If the resulting
defined as the pressure altitude, based on a QNE flight plan does not contain the CARP number dis-
(29.92 in. Hg) altimeter setting. In QNH position, the played in title, a branch is executed to the page which
actuation altitude is defined as the indicated true alti- resulted in the CARP INIT page to be displayed.
tude, based on a QNH altimeter setting. The switch Selection when a branch is displayed results in a
displays the same setting on all three CNI-MUs. branch to the displayed page. The Legs page dis-
played contains the CARP number indicated in title.
L3
R1 - DROP ALTITUDE
Not operational.
Data adjacent to R1 displays the Drop Altitude associ-
L4 - REQUIRED OBSTRUCTION CLEARANCE ated with the CARP displayed in the title line. The
The Required Clearance is the minimum clearance Drop Altitude Type selected on L1 defines the refer-
that must be maintained above the Obstruction Eleva- ence for the drop altitude displayed. The conversion
tion. When the number of stages is 1, data adjacent to between QNH and PA references uses PI Elevation,
L4 displays the title RQD CLNC HT and data field barometric pressure, drop altitude temperature, and
below displays the required clearance associated with surface temperature. If the required data is not avail-
the CARP displayed in the title line. When the number able, then data field displays dashes.
of stages is 2, data adjacent to L4 is blank. If the Minimum Drop Altitude is available and the Drop
When the computed Minimum Drop Altitude is greater Altitude is not entered, then the drop altitude is set to
than the Drop Altitude the DROP ALT BELOW MIN the computed minimum drop altitude.
message is displayed. When the Drop Altitude is less than the computed
When the number of stages is 1, deletion results in the Minimum Drop Altitude, the DROP ALT BELOW MIN
Required Clearance being set to the default value of message is displayed.
500 ft. If the Drop Altitude is entered, the Drop Altitude field
on the CARP PROG page is also updated.
L5 - MINIMUM DROP HEIGHT Deletion of the Drop Altitude when the Minimum Drop
Altitude is available results in the Drop Altitude being
The Minimum Drop Height is the minimum distance set to the computed Minimum Drop Altitude. Other-
required to assure full parachute deployment before wise, deletion is non-operational.
the load impacts the ground.
When the number of stages is 1, data adjacent to L5 R2 - ACTUATION ALTITUDE
displays the title MIN DROP HT and data field below
displays the minimum drop height associated with the When the number of stages is 2, data adjacent to R2
CARP displayed in the title line. When the number of displays the Actuation Altitude associated with the
stages is 2, data adjacent to L5 is blank. CARP displayed in the title line. The Actuation Altitude
Data field displays dashes when a Minimum Drop is referenced to the actuation altitude type selected on
Height is not available and the Obstruction Elevation L2. The conversion between QFE, QNH, and PA ref-
(R4) has been entered. erences uses PI Elevation, barometric pressure, actu-
When the computed Minimum Drop Altitude is greater ation altitude temperature, and surface temperature.
than the Drop Altitude the DROP ALT BELOW MIN If the required data is not available, then data field dis-
message is displayed. plays dashes. When the number of stages is 1, data
When the number of stages is 1, deletion results in the adjacent to R2 is blank.
Minimum Drop Height being set to the default of five Entries that are greater than the Drop Altitude results
entry-prompt boxes followed by FT. in the INVALID ENTRY message. Invalid entries
results in the entry remaining in the scratch pad.

3E-17
FAM.1C-27J-1A

R3 - PI ELEVATION a. Selection of the PREV PAGE hard-key from the

CARP INIT 1/5 page.
Data adjacent to R3 displays the PI Elevation associ-
ated with the CARP displayed in the title line. b. Selection of the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the
The PI elevation is measured in feet above mean sea CARP INIT 4/5 page.
level. Entries that are greater than the Drop Altitude or
c. Selection of the CARP INIT prompt on the CHUTE
greater than the Drop Zone Elevation (if a Drop Zone
LIST page.
Elevation has been entered) results in the INVALID
ENTRY message. Invalid entries results in the entry
remaining in the scratch pad. Display
R4 - OBSTRUCTION ELEVATION If the route is active, ACT is displayed in title. If the
route is provisional (including changes to the CARP
The obstruction elevation is the elevation above mean data), MOD is displayed. Otherwise, the route associ-
sea level of the obstruction that a minimum clearance ated with the CARP is inactive and left data in the title
must be maintained. is blank. Additional data displays the CARP number
When the number of stages is 1, data adjacent to R4 corresponding to the selected CARP.
displays the title OBSTR ELEV and data field below
displays the obstruction elevation associated with the L1 - PARACHUTE IDENTIFIER/NUMBER OF
CARP displayed in the title line. When the number of PARACHUTES
stages is 2, data adjacent to R4 is blank.
Data field displays dashes when an Obstruction Ele- Data adjacent to L1 displays the identifier defining the
vation is not available and the Minimum Drop Height parachute and adjacent data field displays the number
(L5) and the Drop Zone Elevation (R5) have been of parachutes attached to an element.
entered. The Parachute Identifier is one of the parachutes
defined in the Chute List. When the parachute is
R5 - DROP ZONE ELEVATION defined in the Chute List and is appropriate for the
payload defined by Payload Type, then the data dis-
The drop zone elevation is the highest point on the played on this page is computed using the chute’s bal-
drop zone measured in feet above mean sea level. listic data.
When the number of stages is 1, data adjacent to R5 Valid entries are of the form Parachute Identifier,
displays the title DZ ELEV and data field below dis- Parachute Identifier/Number of Parachutes, and /
plays the drop zone elevation associated with the Number of Parachutes.
CARP displayed in the title line. When the number of Entering a Parachute Identifier that is defined in the
stages is 2, data adjacent to R5 is blank. Chute List for the given payload results in the data
Data field displays dashes when a Drop Zone Eleva- fields, including crew specified data, being replaced
tion is not available and the Obstruction Elevation with the ballistic database values. Parachute ballistic
(R4) has been entered. parameters not defined for the entered Parachute
Entries that are greater than the Drop Altitude or less Identifier is set to their defaults. Entering a Parachute
than the PI Elevation results in the INVALID ENTRY Identifier that is not defined in the Chute List for the
message. Invalid entries results in the entry remaining given payload results in the CHUTE LIST page being
in the scratch pad. displayed.
When the * CARP or * DZESC of the CARP defined in
R6 - CARP PROGRESS BRANCH
title is the active waypoint, entry of a Parachute Identi-
Selection of soft-key R6 branches to the CARP PROG fier and/or Number of Parachutes results in the NOT
page for the CARP number displayed in the title line. ALLOWED message.

L2 - EXIT TIME/FORWARD TRAVEL TIME

CARP INIT 5/5 Exit Time defines the elapsed time, in seconds, from
The CARP INIT 5/5 page (Figure 3E-13) displays the the green light signal to the exit of the first element
ballistic data associated with the CARP in the title line. from the aircraft. Forward Travel Time is the sum of
the Exit Time and the Deceleration Quotient.
Forward Travel Time is computed when the Forward
Page Access Travel Time is not entered and the Exit Time/Deceler-
ation Quotient are available.
The CARP INIT 5/5 page is displayed when any of the
following conditions are satisfied.

3E-18
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Data adjacent to L2 displays the Exit Time and adja- When data field adjacent to L4 displays a crew
cent data field displays the Forward Travel Time asso- entered value and a ballistic database value for RF or
ciated with the CARP displayed in the title line. HI ALT RF is available, deletion results in the crew-
When a Forward Travel Time is available (either entered value being replaced by the ballistic database
entered or computed) and the Exit Time is not avail- value. Otherwise, deletion is non-operational.
able, Exit Time field displays dashes.
Valid entries are of the form Exit Time and /Forward L5 - DECELERATION TIME
Travel Time. Deceleration Time, defined in the ballistic database, is
Entry of the Exit Time when a Deceleration Quotient is the elapsed time from actuation until deployment.
available results in the Forward Travel Time being When the number of stages is 2, data adjacent to L5
computed and displayed. displays the title DECEL TIME and data field below
Entry of the Exit Time when a Deceleration Quotient is displays the deceleration time associated with the
not available results in the Forward Travel Time being CARP displayed in the title line. When the number of
set to dashes. stages is 1, data adjacent to L5 is blank.
A valid entry of /Forward Travel Time results in the When the ballistic database value of Deceleration
Exit Time and Deceleration Quotient data fields being Time is not available and an entry to data field has not
set to dashes. been made, then data field displays the default box
When data fields adjacent to L2 displays a crew prompts. Valid entries are of the Time format and
entered value and ballistic database values for Exit overrides the ballistic database value.
Time and Deceleration Quotient are available, dele- When data field adjacent to L5 displays a crew
tion results in data field being replaced by the ballistic entered value and a ballistic database value for
database value and adjacent data field being replaced Deceleration Time is available, deletion results in the
by the computed value. Otherwise, deletion is non- crew entered value being replaced by the ballistic
operational. database value. Otherwise, deletion is non-opera-
L3 - TIME OF FALL CONSTANT tional.

Time of Fall Constant, defined in the ballistic data- L6 - ERASE/RETURN BRANCH

base, compensates for the nonlinear rate of fall of the Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the flight plan
element. Data adjacent to L3 displays the Time of Fall which contains this CARP is provisional. Otherwise,
Constant associated with the CARP displayed in the data adjacent to L6 displays a branch to the page
title line. When the ballistic database value of Time of which resulted in the CARP INIT 1/5 page to be dis-
Fall Constant is not available and an entry to data field played (either LEGS or MISSIONS page). If the CARP
has not been made, then data field displays the INIT 1/5 page was displayed via the WAYPOINT
default box prompts. Valid entries are of the Time for- DATA page, the prompt is to the LEGS page.
mat and overrides the ballistic database value. Selection when the ERASE prompt is displayed
When data field adjacent to L3 displays a crew results in the provisional being erased. If the resulting
entered value and a ballistic database value for Time flight plan does not contain the CARP number dis-
of Fall Constant is available, deletion results in the played in title, a branch is executed to the page which
crew entered value being replaced by the ballistic resulted in the CARP INIT page to be displayed.
database value. Otherwise, deletion is non-opera- Selection when a branch is displayed results in a
tional. branch to the displayed page. The Legs page dis-
L4 - RATE OF FALL/HI ALTITUDE RATE OF FALL played contains the CARP number indicated in title.

Rate of Fall, defined in the ballistic database, is the R1 - TIMER DELAY

vertical velocity, in feet per second, of the element Timer Delay is the time at actuation altitude where the
under full canopy. parachute deployment is delayed.
HI Altitude Rate of Fall is the vertical velocity of the When the number of stages is 2, data adjacent to R1
element in free-fall on a two stage drop. displays the title TIMER DELAY and data field below
When the number of stages is 1, data adjacent to L4 displays the timer delay associated with the CARP
displays RF. When the number of stages is 2, data displayed in the title line. When the number of stages
adjacent to L4 displays HI ALT RF. is 1, data adjacent to R1 is blank.
When the ballistic database value of either RF or HI When an entry to data field has not been made, the
ALT RF are not available and an entry to the data field data field displays the default value of 0.0 SEC.
has not been made, the data field displays the default Deletion of data when the number of stages is 2 sets
box prompts. Valid entries, in the vertical speed for- the Timer Delay to the default.
mat, override the ballistic database value.

3E-19
FAM.1C-27J-1A

R2 - DECELERATION QUOTIENT When the ballistic database value of Low Altitude

Rate of Fall is not available and an entry to data field
Deceleration Quotient, defined in the ballistic data- has not been made, the data field displays the default.
base, is a time added to Exit Time to determine the Valid entries, in the vertical speed format, override the
Forward Travel Time. ballistic database value.
Data adjacent to R2 displays the Deceleration Quo- When data field adjacent to R4 displays a crew
tient associated with the CARP displayed in the title entered value and a ballistic database value for Low
line. When the ballistic database value of Deceleration Altitude Rate of Fall is available, deletion results in the
Quotient is not available and an entry to R2 has not crew entered value being replaced by the ballistic
been made, then data adjacent to R2 displays the database value. Otherwise, deletion is non-opera-
default. When a Forward Travel Time is available tional.
(either entered or computed) and the Deceleration
Quotient is not available, Deceleration Quotient field R5 - DECELERATION DISTANCE
displays dashes.
Valid entries are of the Time format and overrides the Deceleration Distance is the distance the element
ballistic database value. descends after exiting the aircraft until reaching a sta-
Entry of the Deceleration Quotient when an Exit Time bilized condition.
is available results in the Forward Travel Time being When the number of stages is 2, data adjacent to R5
computed. displays the title DECEL DIST and data field below
Entry of the Deceleration Quotient when an Exit Time displays the Deceleration Distance associated with
is not available results in the Forward Travel Time the CARP displayed in the title line. When the number
being set to dashes. of stages is 1, data adjacent to R5 is blank.
When data field adjacent to R2 displays a crew When the ballistic database value of Deceleration Dis-
entered value and a ballistic database value for tance is not available and an entry to data field has
Deceleration Quotient is available, deletion results in not been made, the data field displays the default.
the crew entered value being replaced by the ballistic Valid entries are of the Distance format and overrides
database value and data field adjacent to L2 (Forward the ballistic database value.
Travel Time) being replaced by the computed value. When data field adjacent to R5 displays a crew
Otherwise, deletion is non-operational. entered value and a ballistic database value for
Deceleration Distance is available, deletion results in
R3 - VERTICAL DISTANCE the crew entered value being replaced by the ballistic
database value. Otherwise, deletion is non-opera-
Vertical Distance is the distance the element tional.
descends after exiting the aircraft until reaching a sta-
bilized condition. Data adjacent to R3 displays the R6 - CARP PROGRESS BRANCH
Vertical Distance associated with the CARP displayed
in the title line. Selection of soft-key R6 branches to the CARP PROG
When the ballistic database value of Vertical Distance page for the CARP number displayed in the title line.
is not available and an entry to data field has not been
made, then data field displays the default.
Valid entries are of the Distance format and overrides CARP PROGRESS 1/2
the ballistic database value. The CARP PROG 1/2 page (Figure 3E-14) displays
When data field adjacent to R3 displays a crew current guidance and ballistic information on the air-
entered value and a ballistic database value for Verti- drop defined by CARP n.
cal Distance is available, deletion results in the crew
entered value being replaced by the ballistic database
value. Otherwise, deletion is non-operational. Page Access

R4 - LOW ALTITUDE RATE OF FALL Display of the CARP PROG page will occur when any
of the following conditions is satisfied.
Low Altitude Rate of Fall, defined in the ballistic data-
base, defines the vertical velocity, in feet per second, a. Selection of the CARP PROG prompt on the
of the element under full canopy on a two stage drop. CARP n INIT pages.
When the number of stages is 2, data adjacent to R4 b. Selection of the CARP PROG prompt on the
displays the title LO ALT RF and data field below dis- PROGRESS 2/3 page when the CARP is the next
plays the Low Altitude Rate of Fall. When the number airdrop in the route.
of stages is 1, data adjacent to R4 is blank.

3E-20
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

c. Selection of the NEXT PAGE or PREV PAGE If Ballistic Wind is computed, the CNI-SP automati-
hard-key on the CARP PROG 2/2 page. cally sets the Sensed/Entered switch to Sensed winds
once slowdown has occurred and 10 seconds before
d. Selection of the CARP PROG prompt on the MIS- CARP has not occurred provided the aircraft is within
SIONS page.
the drop altitude gate.
e. Selection of the CARP PROG prompt on the LEGS If Ballistic Wind is computed, the CNI-SP automati-
page when the CARP is active. cally sets the Sensed/Entered switch to Entered winds
at the start of the racetrack.
f. Selection of the CARP PROG prompt on the TIME If the entered Ballistic Wind is deleted, the CNI-SP
NAV page when the CARP is the active Time Nav sets the Sensed/Entered selection to display the alti-
target waypoint. tude winds currently being used in the CARP compu-
tation. If Ballistic Wind is entered, selection is non-
Display operational.

If the route associated with the CARP is inactive, left L2 - INAV FIGURE OF MERIT
data in title is blank. If the route is provisional, MOD is
Data adjacent to L2 displays the INAV 1 Figure of
displayed. If the route is active, ACT is displayed.
Merit (FOM) and the INAV 2 FOM. If the FOM is
Data in the title displays the CARP number corre-
invalid, the “N” in the data field is blank. When the cur-
sponding to the CARP number displayed in the title.
rent INAV solution is the updated EGI navigation solu-
L1 - CARP ALONG AND CROSS TRACK tion with a position update bias, a “U” next to the FOM
DISTANCE AND DIRECTION is displayed. The format of the INAV 1 and INAV 2
FOM is the following:
Data adjacent to L1 displays the CARP Along Track
N/N No active position update.
Distance and the CARP Along Track Direction. The
CARP along track distance, in yards, is the computed NU/N If INAV 1 = EGI 1 and there is an active
drift relative to the way-line at the Point of Impact. The bias for EGI 1 only.
CARP along track direction is in the form of short or N/NU If INAV 2 = EGI 2 and there is an active
long. bias for EGI 2 only.
Short is defined as an along track position located NU/NU If INAV 1 = EGI 1 and INAV 2 = EGI 2
before the Point of Impact, on the side of the slow- and there is an active bias for both EGI 1
down position. and EGI 2.
Long is defined as an along track position located
after the Point of Impact, on the side of the DZ Escape L3 - DROP ALTITUDE AND CALIBRATED
position. AIRSPEED
Data adjacent to L1 displays the CARP Cross Track
Data adjacent to L3 displays the Drop Altitude and the
Distance and the CARP Cross Track Direction. The
Drop Speed (CAS).
CARP cross track distance, in yards, is the computed
The drop altitude reflects the altitude value that was
drift relative to the run in course. The CARP cross
entered on the CARP n INIT 4/5 page.
track direction is right or left of the Point of Impact.
The drop altitude is in the units defined by Drop Alti-
L2 - SENSED/ENTERED WIND tude Type corresponding to the Drop Altitude entry on
the CARP n INIT 4/5 page. When no Drop Altitude
Data adjacent to L2 defines the selection of sensed or has been entered (i.e., the CARP computation is
entered drop altitude winds. The selection reflects the using the computed Minimum Drop Altitude), the CNI-
wind source that is currently in use for the CARP com- SP uses Altitude Type of QNH for the entry of a Drop
putation. Altitude. The drop speed reflects the CAS that was
If the selection is SEN, the CNI-SP uses sensed entered on the CARP n INIT 2/5 page.
winds for the drop altitude wind in the CARP computa- Entry of the Drop Altitude/Calibrated Airspeed fields
tion. are in the form of Altitude/Speed, Altitude only, or
If the selection is ENT, the CNI-SP utilizes the user Speed only (requires a preceding slash /).
defined drop altitude wind for the CARP calculation. If the Drop Altitude is entered, the Drop Altitude field
If Ballistic Wind (data adjacent to R2) is entered, then on the CARP n INIT 4/5 page is also updated.
data adjacent to L2 is displayed in small font. If the Drop Speed is entered, the Drop Speed CAS
field on the CARP n INIT 2/5 page is also updated.

3E-21
FAM.1C-27J-1A

L4 - TIME OVER TARGET Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the flight plan
which contains this CARP is provisional. Otherwise,
Data adjacent to L4 displays the Time Over Target data displays a branch to the CARP INIT 1/5 page.
(TOT) value from the CARP n INIT 1/5 page. Selection when the ERASE prompt is displayed
If the Time Over Target value is entered, the Time results in the provisional being erased.
Over Target field on the CARP n INIT 1/5 page is also Selection when the CARP INIT branch is displayed
updated. Deletion of data adjacent to L4 removes the branches to the CARP INIT 1/5 page.
CARP n Time Over Target value from the system.
R1 - SENSED/ENTERED WINDS
L4 - AHEAD/BEHIND TIME
The current sensed wind is displayed in data adjacent
If a Time Over Target value has been defined for to R1 in components of direction and velocity. If the
CARP n, the Ahead/Behind indicator and Ahead/ sensed wind is invalid, blanks are displayed.
Behind data is displayed in fields adjacent to L4 under Altitude Wind Bearing/Speed from the CARP INIT 3/5
header KT, respectively. page is displayed in components of direction and
When the predicted time error is ahead of plan, the velocity. If the Altitude Wind Bearing/Speed has not
Ahead/Behind indicator field is AHD. been entered then the default is displayed.
When the predicted time error is behind the plan, the Entries is also reflected on the CARP n 3/5 page.
Ahead/Behind indicator field is BHD. Entering the Altitude Wind Bearing/Speed results in
If a Time Over Target value has not been defined, the the Sensed/Entered wind selection being set to ENT.
label and field is blank. Selection of R1, with an empty scratch pad and a valid
L5 - TURN DIRECTION/RACETRACK sensed wind, down selects the current sensed wind
displayed into the scratch pad.
Data adjacent to L5 provides a three position switch
for controlling the CARP Racetrack and Turn Direc- R2 - HI BALLISTIC WIND/BALLISTIC WIND
tion. The CARP Racetrack is enabled when the switch When the number of stages is 2, data adjacent to R2
is set to L or R, and disabled when the switch is set to displays HI BAL. When the number of stages is 1,
ESC. In ESC position, the CNI-SP flies to the DZESC data adjacent to R2 displays BAL.
waypoint then sequence to the next waypoint. When data field displays HI BAL, data field below dis-
In L position, the CNI-SP flies to the DZESC waypoint plays the HI Ballistic Wind bearing and speed from the
then performs a left turn CARP racetrack. CARP n INIT 3/5 page in components of direction and
In R position, the CNI-SP flies to the DZESC waypoint velocity.
then performs a right turn CARP racetrack. When data field displays BAL, data field below dis-
If a CARP Abort has been executed for CARP n and plays the Ballistic Wind bearing and speed from the
the * DZESC waypoint has not been sequenced, the CARP n INIT 3/5 page in components of direction and
CARP Turn Direction/Racetrack switch for CARP n is velocity.
non-operational. Entry of a HI Ballistic Wind/Ballistic Wind overrides
Data field displays the same value as the Turn Direc- the vector average computed by the CNI-SP and is
tion/Racetrack field on the CARP n INIT 2/5 page. also reflected on the CARP n INIT 3/5 page.
L6 - CARP TIME TO GO AND ERASE/BRANCH TO When the computed vector average wind is available
CARP INIT PAGE and HI Ballistic Wind/Ballistic Wind specifies an
entered value, deletion of data results in the entered
CARP Time To Go is the current time to cross the HI Ballistic Wind/Ballistic Wind value to be removed
CARP Waypoint’s way-line. When CARP n is a valid and the CNI-SP computed vector average to be used
CARP in the active flight plan then the CARP Time To for the HI Ballistic Wind/Ballistic Wind, respectively.
Go is displayed in data adjacent to L6 in the format of Otherwise, deletion is non-operational.
Time under the following conditions: Entry or deletion of data adjacent to R2 changes the
display of the Sensed/Entered selection as described
a. The aircraft has not yet reached the CARP n way-
under L2, Sensed/Entered wind selection.
point.
b. The aircraft is on the racetrack of CARP n. R3 - ACTUATION ALTITUDE WIND

Otherwise, field is blank. When the number of stages is 2, data adjacent to R3

displays the ACTN. When the number of stages is 1,
data adjacent to R3 is blank.

3E-22
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

When data field displays ACTN, data field below dis- CARP ABORT. If title is ACT or MOD and the CARP n
plays the Actuation Altitude Wind bearing and speed is defined is active and the active waypoint is * CARP
from the CARP n INIT 3/5 page in components of waypoint, then data is displayed in large font. Other-
direction and velocity. wise, data is displayed in small font.
When data field displays ACTN, entry of the Actuation Selection of soft-key R6 when data is displayed in
Altitude Wind is in the form defined by Wind CARP large font results in a Direct-To the * DZESC and ESC
and is also reflected on the CARP n INIT 3/5 page. (L5) being selected.
When data adjacent to R3 is blank, entry is non-oper-
ational.
CARP PROGRESS 2/2
R4 - LOW BALLISTIC WIND
The CARP PROG 2/2 page (Figure 3E-15) is the
When the number of stages is 2, data adjacent to R4 means by which the load drop is confirmed. The
displays LO BAL. When the number of stages is 1, actual payload weight released may be updated
data adjacent to R4 is blank. before confirming the dropped payload.
When data field displays LO BAL, data field below dis-
plays the Low Ballistic Wind bearing and speed from
the CARP n INIT 3/5 page. Page Access
Entry of a Low Ballistic Wind overrides the vector The CARP PROG 2/2 page is accessed by pressing
average computed by the CNI-SP and is also the NEXT PAGE or PREV PAGE hard-key from the
reflected on the CARP n INIT 3/5 page. CARP PROG 1/2 page.
When the computed vector average wind is available
and Low Ballistic Wind specifies an entered value,
deletion of data adjacent to R4 results in the Low Bal- Display
listic Wind value to be removed and the CNI-SP com-
If the route associated with the CARP is inactive, left
puted vector average to be used for the Low Ballistic
data field in title is blank. If the route is provisional,
Wind. Otherwise deletion is non-operational.
MOD is displayed. If the route is active, ACT is dis-
R5 - SURFACE WIND played. Data in the title displays the CARP number
corresponding to the CARP number displayed in the
Data adjacent to R5 displays the Surface Wind in title.
components of direction and velocity from the CARP n
INIT 3/5 page. If Surface Wind is not specified, then L1 - DRIFT
data adjacent to R5 displays the default.
Current aircraft drift information is displayed in data
Entry of surface wind on the CARP PROGRESS page
adjacent to L1. Drift is expressed in degrees and
is reflected on the CARP n INIT 3/5 page.
direction with respect to the nose of the aircraft. Drift is
R6 - RED LIGHT TIME AND CARP ABORT defined as the angle between ground track and air-
craft heading. When the ground track is left of the air-
When CARP n is a valid CARP in the active flight craft heading adjacent to L1 displays NNNL where
plan, then the CARP estimated Red Light Time (esti- NNN is the degrees drift. When the ground track is
mated time over the drop zone based upon the drop right of the aircraft heading displays NNNR.
altitude and drop speed) is displayed in data adjacent
to R6 in the format of Time under the following condi- L2
tions:
Not operational.
a. The aircraft has not yet reached the CARP n way-
point. L3 - DROP RESULTS

b. The aircraft is passed the Red Light and on the Drop Results allows a correction to the CARP solu-
racetrack of CARP n. tion. Direction is entered as a relative bearing from the
CARP n Run In Course, (e.g., if the Run In Course is
Upon crossing the CARP n waypoint’s way-line and 80 degrees and a relative bearing of 110 degrees is
until Red Light Time is zero, the Red Light Time is the entered, the actual direction correction would be 190
current time to RED LIGHT. If Red Light Time is degrees).
invalid, the field is blank. The Drop Results data field is displayed until the
CARP n INIT data is cleared, at which time the default
is displayed.

3E-23
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Data adjacent to L3 displays Drop Results in compo- R3 - GROSS WEIGHT

nents of direction and distance.
If Drop Results is not CNI specified, then data adja- Data adjacent to R3 displays the current CNI-SP
cent to L3 displays dashes ---°/---YDS. Computed Gross Weight as displayed on the PERF
Deletion of the Drop Results field removes the correc- INIT WEIGHT page. If the Basic Weight, Payload
tion from the CARP solution and display ---°/ ---YDS. Weight, or Fuel on Board has not been specified,
blanks are displayed.
L4
R4
Not operational.
Not operational.
L5 - LOAD DROPPED
R5 - CONFIRM LOAD DROPPED
Data adjacent to L5 displays the Load Dropped. If no
entries have been made in this field and the Drop Once the CARP waypoint’s way-line has been
Payload on the CARP INIT 2/5 page is available, then crossed, data adjacent to R5 displays CONFIRM in
the Drop Payload is displayed in small font. large font. Prior to reaching the CARP or after selec-
If no Load Dropped is available then data displays tion of the CONFIRM prompt, the data is displayed in
blanks. small font. If CARP n is re-inserted into the flight plan,
Entries without the correct format or entries that cause CONFIRM is displayed in small font.
a negative Load Remaining After Drop to be com- Selection of R5 when CONFIRM is displayed in large
puted is rejected and the INVALID ENTRY message is font results in the following:
displayed. a. EXEC hard-key is illuminated, ERASE is displayed
Deletion of data when a Load Dropped value has at L6, and the provisional copy of the Total Payload
been entered results in the Drop Payload from the Dropped, Load Remaining, Payload Weight
CARP INIT 2/5 page being displayed. (PERF INIT WEIGHT page) and Gross Weight is
Deletion of data adjacent to L5 when a Load Dropped updated.
value has not been entered is non-operational.
b. The Load Dropped value is added to Total Payload
L6 - CARP INIT BRANCH AND ERASE PROMPT Dropped (limited to the maximum value of Weight,
CARP).
Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the flight plan
which contains this CARP is provisional. Otherwise, c. The Load Dropped value is subtracted from the
data displays a branch to the CARP INIT 1/5 page. Payload Weight on the PERF INIT WEIGHT page
Selection when the ERASE prompt is displayed (limited to a value of zero). The new value is re-
results in the provisional being erased. Selection flected on the PERF INIT WEIGHT page.
when the CARP INIT branch is displayed branches to
d. The Load Remaining is updated to the new Pay-
the CARP INIT 1/5 page.
load Weight value.
R1 - TOTAL PAYLOAD DROPPED Selection when CONFIRM is displayed in small font is
Total Payload Dropped is displayed in data adjacent to non-operational.
R1 in the form Weight, CARP. The data field displays Selection of ERASE (L6) results in the Total Payload
the current total CARP n payload that has been con- Dropped, Load Remaining, Payload Weight, and
firmed as dropped by the operator. The initial value for Gross Weight being restored to their previous values.
Load Dropped will be zero. Payload Dropped will be
incremented by the Load Dropped (L5) amount each
R6 - CARP ABORT
time the operator selects CONFIRM (R5). If title is ACT or MOD and the CARP n is defined is
active and the active waypoint is * CARP waypoint,
R2 - LOAD REMAINING AFTER DROP then data is displayed in large font. Otherwise, data is
Data adjacent to R2 displays the Load Remaining displayed in small font.
After Drop. Load Remaining After Drop is the differ- Selection of soft-key R6 when data is displayed in
ence of the Payload Weight on the PERF INIT large font results in a Direct-To the * DZESC for the
WEIGHT page and Total Payload Dropped. active CARP and the Racetrack/Turn Direction field
Load Remaining = Payload Weight - Total Payload (L5) on CARP PROG 1/2 page being set to ESC.
Dropped.
If Payload Weight or Total Payload Dropped is not
available, data adjacent to R2 is blank.

3E-24
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

CHUTE LIST The number of parachutes determines the number of

CHUTE LIST pages, with 10 chutes shown per page.
The CHUTE LIST page (Figure 3E-16) provides a list- Multiple CHUTE LIST pages are distinguished by the
ing of the stored parachutes. page number.

L1 - STORED CHUTE
Page Access
If a Chute name is present in data adjacent to L1,
The CHUTE LIST page is displayed when any of the
selection results in the Chute name being placed into
following conditions are satisfied.
the scratch pad.
a. Selection of the CHUTE LIST prompt on the MIS-
SION page. L2 THROUGH L5 - STORED CHUTE

b. Selection of the CHUTE LIST prompt on the CARP Same operation as L1.
INIT 2/5 page.
L6 - BRANCH TO CALLING PAGE
c. Entry of a parachute identifier on the CARP INIT 2/
Data adjacent to L6 displays a prompt to the page
5 or CARP INIT 5/5 page when the parachute iden-
which resulted in the CHUTE LIST page being dis-
tifier is not defined in the Chute List for the speci-
played. Selection of L6 branches to that page.
fied CARP Payload Type.
R1 THROUGH R5 - STORED CHUTE
Display Same operation as L1.
When the CHUTE LIST page is accessed from the
R6
CHUTE LIST prompt on the MISSIONS page, the
entire list of parachutes stored in the CNI-SP is used Not operational.
to generate the CHUTE LIST pages.
When the CHUTE LIST page is accessed from a
CARP INIT page, only the parachutes with a Payload
Type which matches the specified CARP Payload
Type is used to generate the CHUTE LIST pages.

3E-25
FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3E-26
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

MSN Branching

Figure 3E-1

3E-27
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Provides access to ROUTE 1, ROUTE 2, CARP, LZ, SAR, RENDEZVOUS, PPOS HOLD,
CHUTE LIST, and TIME NAV pages.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 ROUTE 1/ROUTE 2 Allows the operator to switch between flight plan routes.
L2 SAR INIT Selection results in a branch to the SAR INIT page.
L3 SAR PROG Selection results in a branch to the SAR PROGRESS page.
L4 LZ INIT Selection results in a branch to the (landing zone) LZ INIT page.
L5 RNDZ Selection results in a branch to the RENDEZVOUS page.
L6 PPOS HOLD Selection results in a branch to the present route HOLD page.
R1 NOT USED
R2 CARP INIT Selection results in a branch to the CARP INIT page.
R3 CARP PROG Selection results in a branch to the CARP PROGRESS page.
R4 CHUTE LIST Selection results in a branch to the CHUTE LIST page.
R5 NOT USED
R6 TIME NAV Selection results in a branch to the (time navigation) TIME NAV page.

Figure 3E-2 MISSIONS page

3E-28
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

MISSIONS PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. None.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press MSN hard-key - Pressed.
a. MISSIONS page displayed.
2. Press L1 to select predetermined flight plan for
route 1 or route 2 - Selected.
3. Press L2 to branch to the SAR INIT page (as
desired) - Pressed.
4. Press L3 to branch to the SAR PROG page (as
desired) - Pressed.
5. Press L4 to branch to the LZ INIT page (as de-
sired) - Pressed.
6. Press L5 to branch to the RNDZ page (as de-
sired) - Pressed.
7. Press L6 to branch to the PPOS HOLD page
(as desired) - Pressed.
8. Press R2 to branch to the CARP INIT page (as
desired) - Pressed.
9. Press R3 to branch to the CARP PROG page
(as desired) - Pressed.
10. Press R4 to branch to the CHUTE LIST (as re-
quired) - Pressed.
11. Press R6 to branch to the TIME NAV (as de-
sired) - Pressed.

3E-29
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays for definition of a SAR.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 LBL/IDENT Displays the SAR label/identification.

L2 IP POSITION Displays the SAR initial point (IP) position.
L3 SAR PATTERN The operator toggles to select the type of SAR pattern (Expanding
Square, Creeping Line, Sector, Parallel).
L4 INIT CRS Displays initial course for the SAR.
L5 SPACE/WIDTH Displays the leg spacing for the selected SAR pattern. /WIDTH is dis-
played if SAR is Parallel or Creeping Line.
L6 MISSIONS/ Branches to the MISSIONS page.
LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan.
R1-R3 NOT USED
R4 RAD/RANGE Displays selected SAR radius.
R5 SAR ALIGN/ Displays SAR ALIGN if SAR type is Parallel or Creeping Line. Other-
TURNS wise TURNS (L/R) is displayed.
R6 SAR PROG Branches to the SAR PROGRESS page.

Figure 3E-3 SAR INIT page

3E-30
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

SAR INIT PAGE DATA ENTRY 5. Press L5 to input SAR leg spacing as required
for area coverage in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L5 - Pressed.
PREREQUISITES
b. SPACE line data updated.
1. SAR INIT page is selected from MISSIONS
page, WAYPOINT DATA page, or WAYPOINT NOTE
CUSTOM DATA page.
Width entry is displayed with leg spacing
(SPACE/WIDTH) if SAR type selected is
DATA ENTRY PARL or CRP LN.

1. Press L1 to input SAR label/identifier from 6. Press L6 to branch to the LEGS n or MIS-
scratch pad (if required) - Entered. SIONS page as desired - Pressed.
a. Press L1 - Pressed.
b. LBL/IDENT line data updated. NOTE

2. Press L2 to insert initial position in the scratch If SAR pattern is provisional, ERASE is
pad - Entered. displayed. Pressing L6 erases the provi-
sional SAR pattern.
a. Data is not required if previously filled from
CUSTOM DATA page or WAYPOINT SE- 7. Press R4 to enter SAR radius range as desired
LECT page. in the scratch pad - Entered.
b. Press L2 - Pressed.
a. Press R4 - Pressed.
c. IP POSITION line data updated.
b. RAD/RANGE line data updated.
3. Press L3 to select SAR PATTERN as desired
- Selected. 8. Press R5 to select TURNS in the SAR pattern
- Selected.
a. Selected SAR pattern (EXP SQ, CRP LN,
SECTR, or PARL) appears in large font. a. Selected turns (L or R) appears in large
font.
4. Press L4 to input desired SAR course in the
scratch pad - Entered. 9. Press R6 to branch to the SAR PROGRESS
page - Pressed.
a. Press L4 - Pressed.
b. INIT CRS line data updated.

3E-31
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays the progress of the active SAR pattern.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 ACT CRS Displays the active course of the SAR leg being flown.
L2 NEXT CRS Displays the course of the next SAR leg to be flown.
L3 XTK ERROR Displays the current crosstrack error.
L4 WIND Displays the current winds with head/tail wind and crosswind compo-
nent.
L5 TAS/GSPD Display the current airspeed and groundspeed.
L6 MISSIONS/ Branches to the MISSIONS page.
LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n page.
PROGRESS 2/ Branches to the PROGRESS 2/4 page.
SAR INIT/ Branches to the SAR INIT page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan.
R1 DTG NEXT CRS Displays the active leg Distance To Go.
R2 TTG NEXT CRS Displays the Time To Go to the next leg.
R3-R4 NOT USED
R5 DRIFT Displays the current drift angle.
R6 SAR EXIT Exits SAR pattern if SAR watpoint active.

Figure 3E-4 SAR PROGRESS page

3E-32
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

SAR PROGRESS PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. SAR INIT page displayed.
2. Operator presses R6 on SAR INIT page.
a. SAR PROGRESS page displayed.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press L6 to branch to the MISSIONS page as
desired - Pressed.
2. Press R6 to exit SAR pattern - Pressed.
a. A provisional is created and EXIT ARMED
appears adjacent to R6.
b. Green EXEC light illuminates.
3. Press EXEC hard-key as desired - Pressed.

NOTE
Selection of the EXEC hard-key results in
a branch to the LEGS page.

3E-33
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Used to enter specific data concerning the landing area.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 LBL/IDENT Displays the landing zone label and identifier.

L2 THRESHOLD POSITION Displays the landing zone threshold latitude and longitude.
L3 TDZE Displays the Touchdown Zone Elevation (TDZE) for the landing zone.
L4 DALT/HAT Displays the DALT/HAT if landing zone type is precision, and MDA/
MDA/HAT HAT otherwise.
L5 Blank/ Blank if landing zone type is precision.
MAP MAP (Missed Approach Point) if landing zone type is non-precision
and tactical.
L6 MISSIONS/ Branches to the MISSIONS page.
LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n page.
DEP/ARR/ Branches to the DEP/ARR page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan.
R1 DES TOA Displays the Desired Time Of Arrival.
R2 NOT USED
R3 TYPE Displays and selects the type of landing zone approach being used
Precision (P), Non-Precision (NP), or Tactical (TAC).
R4 CRS Displays the landing zone inbound course.
R5 NOT USED
R6 PROGRESS Branches to the PROGRESS 1/4 page.

Figure 3E-5 LZ INIT 1/2 page

3E-34
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

LZ INIT 1/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY 7. Press L5 to enter Missed Approach Point (if
available) in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L5 - Pressed.
PREREQUISITES
b. MAP line data updated.
1. None.
NOTE

DATA ENTRY Not operational if LZ type is precision.

1. Press MSN hard-key - Pressed. 8. Press L6 to branch back to entry page (LEGS,
a. MISSIONS page displayed. MISSIONS, DEP/ARR) - Pressed.

2. Press L4 on MISSIONS page - Pressed.

NOTE
a. LZ INIT 1/2 page displayed.
A provisional LZ displays ERASE to re-
3. Press L1 to enter landing zone label/identifier move the LZ initialization information. If
in the scratch pad (if required) - Entered. ERASE is pressed, the EXEC is dis-
played to execute the erasure of the data.
a. Press L1 - Pressed.
b. LBL/IDENT line data updated. 9. Press R1 to enter Desired Time Of Arrival in
the scratch pad - Entered.
4. Press L2 to enter threshold latitude/longitude
in the scratch pad - Entered. a. Press R1 - Pressed.
a. Press L2 - Pressed. b. DES TOA line data updated.
b. THRESHOLD POSITION line data updat- 10. Press R3 to select desired LZ type approach -
ed. Selected.
5. Press L3 to enter Touchdown Zone Elevation a. Selected landing zone TYPE approach (P,
(if required) in the scratch pad - Entered. NP, or TAC) appears in large font.
a. Press L3 - Pressed. 11. Press R4 to enter the LZ inbound course in the
b. TDZE line data updated. scratch pad - Entered.

6. Press L4 to enter DALT or MDA elevation (if re- a. Press R4 - Pressed.

quired) in the scratch pad - Entered. b. CRS line data updated.
12. Press R6 to branch to the PROGRESS 1/4
NOTE
page - Pressed.
Entry of DALT/HAT is displayed if the LZ 13. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to branch to LZ
is precision, otherwise MDA/HAT is dis- INIT 2/2 page - Pressed.
played.

a. Press L4 - Pressed.
b. DALT or MDA/HAT line data updated.
If precision:
c. If DALT is computed, DALT/HAT is dis-
played as DALT minus TDZE.
If non-precision:
d. If MDA is computed, MDA/HAT is dis-
played as MDA minus TDZE.

3E-35
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Used to enter specific data concerning the landing area.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 RPI Displays the Runway Point of Intercept (RPI) value.

L2 TCH Displays the Threshold Crossing Height (TCH) value.
L3 GSI/ For precision, displays the Glide Slope Intercept (GSI) distance.
FAF For non-precision, displays the Final Approach Fix (FAF) distance.
L4 SD Displays Slow Down distance from landing zone.
L5 TP Displays Turn Point distance from landing zone.
L6 MISSIONS/ Branches to the MISSIONS page.
LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n page.
DEP/ARR/ Branches to the DEP/ARR page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan.
R1 GLIDE SLOPE/ For precision, displays the Glide Slope.
DESCENT ANGLE For tactical or non-precision, displays the Descent Angle.
R2 Blank/ Blank if landing zone type is non-precision.
THR ELEV Displays the Threshold Elevation when landing zone is precision or
tactical.
R3 GSI ALT/ For precision, displays the GSI ALT altitude.
FAF ALT For for tactical or non-precision, displays the FAF ALT altitude.
R4 CAS Displays the computed airspeed to be flown from slowdown to touch-
down.
R5 NOT USED
R6 PROGRESS Branches to the PROGRESS 1/4 page.

Figure 3E-6 LZ INIT 2/2 page

3E-36
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

LZ INIT 2/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY If the LZ is precision:

7. Press R1 to enter Glide Slope (if required) in
the scratch pad - Entered.
PREREQUISITES
a. Press R1 - Pressed.
1. LZ data entered on LZ INIT 1/2 page.
b. GLIDE SLOPE line data updated.
2. Operator presses NEXT PAGE hard-key from
LZ INIT 1/2 page. If the LZ is tactical or non-precision:

a. LZ INIT 2/2 page displayed. 7. Press R1 to enter Descend Angle (if required)
in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press R1 - Pressed.
DATA ENTRY
b. DESCENT ANGLE line data updated.
1. Press L1 to enter Runway Point of Intercept (if
required) in the scratch pad - Entered. NOTE
a. Press L1 - Pressed. Entry not operational if LZ type is non-
b. RPI line data updated. precision.
2. Press L2 to enter Threshold Crossing Height (if
required) in the scratch pad - Entered. 8. Press R2 to enter Threshold Elevation (LZ tac-
tical or precision) in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L2 - Pressed.
a. Press R2 - Pressed.
b. TCH line data updated.
b. THR ELEV line data updated.
If the LZ is precision:
For precision altitude:
3. L3 displays Glide Slope Intercept distance.
9. Press R3 to enter Glide Slope Intercept Alti-
If the LZ is non-precision: tude in the scratch pad - Entered.

3. Press L3 to enter Final Approach Fix distance a. Press R3 - Pressed.

(if required) in the scratch pad - Entered. b. GSI ALT line data updated.
a. Press L3 - Pressed. For tactical or non-precision altitude:
b. FAF line data updated.
9. Press R3 to enter Final Approach Fix Altitude
4. Press L4 to enter Slow Down distance from the in the scratch pad - Entered.
LZ (if required) in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press R3 - Pressed.
a. Press L4 - Pressed. b. FAF ALT line data updated.
b. SD line data updated.
10. Press R4 to enter LZ CAS to be flown from
5. Press L5 to enter Turn Point distance (if re- slowdown to touchdown - Entered.
quired) - Entered.
a. Press R4 - Pressed.
a. Press L5 - Pressed. b. CAS line data updated.
b. TP line data updated.
11. Press R6 to branch to PROGRESS 1/4 page -
6. Press L6 to branch to the entry page (LEGS, Pressed.
MISSIONS, DEP/ARR) - Pressed.

NOTE
A provisional LZ displays ERASE to re-
move the LZ initialization information. If
ERASE is pressed, the EXEC is dis-
played to execute the erasure of the data.

3E-37
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Allows the aircraft to intercept another aircraft if certain parameters about the target are known.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 INIT POS Displays the target’s initial position.

L2 INIT TIME Displays the target’s time at the initial position.
L3 INIT TRK Displays the target’s track at the initial position.
L4 CRS/DTG Displays the intercept point bearing and distance.
L5 TGT BRG/RNG Displays the target’s bearing and range.
L6 MISSIONS/ Branches to the MISSIONS page.
LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan.
R1 Position definition Selects format type of displayed position.
switch
R2 INIT GS Displays the target’s groundspeed at the initial position.
R3 IN-TRAIL Displays the in-trail distance in the range of 0.0 to 20 NM.
R4 ETE/ Displays the predicted intercept time. ETE (Estimated Time Enroute)
ETA on the ground and ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) when airborne.
R5 POS Displays the latitude and longitude of the intercept point calculated.
R6 NOT USED

Figure 3E-7 RENDEZVOUS page

3E-38
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

RENDEZVOUS PAGE DATA ENTRY 7. Press R1 to select rendezvous target initial po-
sition display mode - Selected.
a. Selected position definition (LL, MGRS, or
PREREQUISITES DEF) appears in large font.
1. Waypoint identified as initial position of ren- 8. Press R2 to enter rendezvous target ground-
dezvous intercept target. speed in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press R2 - Pressed.
DATA ENTRY b. INIT GS line data updated.
1. Press MSN hard-key - Pressed. 9. Press R3 to enter in-trail distance in the
scratch pad - Entered.
a. MISSIONS page displayed.
a. Press R3 - Pressed.
2. Press L5 on MISSIONS page - Pressed.
b. IN-TRAIL line data updated.
a. RENDEZVOUS page displayed.
3. Press L1 to enter rendezvous target Initial Po-
sition in the scratch pad (if required) - Entered.
a. Press L1 - Pressed.
b. INIT POS line data updated.
4. Press L2 to enter rendezvous target Initial
Time in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L2 - Pressed.
b. INIT TIME line data updated.
5. Press L3 to enter rendezvous target Initial
Track in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L3 - Pressed.
b. INIT TRK line data updated.
6. Press L6 to branch to entry page (LEGS, MIS-
SIONS) - Pressed.

3E-39
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays detailed information about selected hold patterns.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 LBL/IDENT Displays the waypoint label and waypoint identifier of the hold fix.
L2 QUAD/RADIAL Displays the holding quadrant/radial.
L3 INBD CRS/DIR Displays the inbound course/turn direction.
L4 LEG TIME Displays the inbound leg time.
L5 LEG DIST Displays the leg distance.
L6 LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n page of the indicated route.
ROUTE/ Branches to the ROUTE page when the displayed hold is not the active
leg of the active Flight Plan.
ERASE/ Selection results in the erasure of the provisional route.
NOW ---EXIT Displays when hold is the active legs. Selection results in an immediate
exit from hold.
R1 SPD/TGT ALT Displays the speed and altitude targets for the holding fix.
R2 HOLD FF Displays the holding pattern fuel flow.
R3 FIX ETA/ Displays the computed Estimated Time Arrival of the next fix crossing.
EAT Enters an Exit At Time.
R4 ENTRY/CRS Displays the type of entry (PARALLEL, DIRECT, or TEAR DRP for tear
drop) and entry course to be used for the holding pattern.
R5 HOLD AVAIL Displays holding time available before an exit is required to reach the
destination with specified fuel reserves.
R6 DELETE HOLD When HOLD is active, displays HOLD ---ARM and pressing results in
the creation of a provisional Flight Plan with the holding pattern exit
armed. Otherwise DELETE HOLD is displayed and pressing results in
delection of the holding pattern.

Figure 3E-8 HOLD page

3E-40
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

HOLD PAGE DATA ENTRY 7. Press L5 to enter leg distance in the scratch
pad - Entered.
a. Press L5 - Pressed.
PREREQUISITES
b. LEG DIST line data updated.
1. Active route established.
8. Press L6 to branch back to originating page -
2. Data entered in the scratch pad when required. Pressed.
9. R1 displays computed speed and target alti-
tude for hold pattern.
DATA ENTRY
Press R1 to enter speed and target altitude (if
1. Press MSN hard-key - Pressed. required).

a. MISSIONS page displayed. 10. Press R2 to enter fuel flow desired in the
scratch pad - Entered.
2. Press L6 on MISSIONS page - Pressed.
a. Press R2 - Pressed.
a. HOLD page displayed.
b. HOLD FF line data updated.
3. Press L1 to enter label/identifier of the hold fix
11. R3 displays computed Estimated Time Arrival
in the scratch pad (if required) - Entered.
to next fix crossing.
a. Press L1 - Pressed.
or
b. LBL/IDENT line data updated.
11. Press R3 to enter an Exit At Time in the scratch
4. Press L2 to enter quadrant/radial in the scratch pad - Entered.
pad - Entered.
a. Press R3 - Pressed.
a. Press L2 - Pressed.
b. EAT line data updated.
b. QUAD/RADIAL line data updated.
12. R4 displays type of entry and entry course.
5. Press L3 to enter desired inbound course in
the scratch pad - Entered. 13. R5 displays hold time available.

a. Press L3 - Pressed. 14. R6 displays delete/exit hold if hold is on an ac-

b. INBD CRS/DIR line data updated. tive route/leg.

6. Press L4 to enter hold leg time in the scratch

pad - Entered.
a. Press L4 - Pressed.
b. LEG TIME line data updated.

NOTE
Depending on the altitude, the hold pat-
tern time is 4 minutes <14000 feet and 6
minutes >14000 feet.

3E-41
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Describes physical description of the CARP drop zone.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 LBL/IDENT Displays the waypoint label and waypoint identifier associated with the
displayed release point.
L2 PI POSITION Displays the latitude/longitude of the point of impact position.
L3 LENGTH LE-TE Displays the length, from Leading Edge to Trailing Edge, of the drop
zone.
L4 SD DIST Displays the point of impact from Slow Down Distance.
L5 RUN IN CRS Displays the course to be used for the run-in on the drop zone.
L6 MISSIONS/ Branches to the MISSIONS page.
LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan.
R1 TOT Displays the Time Over Target.
R2 NOT USED
R3 LE-PI Displays the length from Leading Edge of the drop zone to the Point of
Impact position.
R4 TP DIST Displays the distance from the point of impact to the Turn Point.
R5 DZ ESC Displays the Drop Zone Escape distance.
R6 CARP PROG Branches to the CARP PROG page.

NOTE

If a Point of Impact (PI) is not defined for a CARP, a default magnetic variation of +8 degrees is
used to calculate the CARP run-in course. Upon entering a PI, or defining the CARP to a way-
point in the flight plan, the run-in course is adjusted to the new magnetic variation at the newly
defined PI or waypoint.

Figure 3E-9 CARP INIT 1/5 page

3E-42
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

CARP INIT 1/5 PAGE DATA ENTRY 8. Press L6 to branch back to originating page (if
required) - Pressed.

PREREQUISITES NOTE
1. Active or provisional route is established. If CARP is provisional, ERASE is dis-
played to clear all programmed data.

DATA ENTRY 9. Press R1 to enter Time Over Target in the

scratch pad - Entered.
1. Press MSN hard-key - Pressed.
a. Press R1 - Pressed.
a. MISSIONS page displayed.
b. TOT line data updated.
2. Press R2 on MISSIONS page - Pressed.
10. Press R3 to enter Leading Edge to Point of Im-
a. CARP INIT 1/5 page displayed. pact position in the scratch pad - Entered.
3. L1 displays drop zone identifier. a. Press R3 - Pressed.
b. LE-PI line data updated.
NOTE
11. Press R4 to enter Turn Point Distance in the
Operator may manually enter drop zone scratch pad - Entered.
identifier and position if other than way-
point. NOTE

4. L2 displays drop zone Point of Impact (PI). TP DIST must be greater than SD DIST.

5. Press L3 to enter Leading Edge to Trailing a. Press R4 - Pressed.

Edge spacing in the scratch pad - Entered. b. TP DIST line data updated.
a. Press L3 - Pressed. 12. Press R5 to enter Drop Zone Escape distance
b. LE-TE line data updated. in the scratch pad - Entered.
6. Press L4 to enter Slow Down Distance in the a. Press R5 - Pressed.
scratch pad - Entered.
b. DZ ESC line data updated.

NOTE 13. Press R6 to advance to CARP PROG page (if

required) - Pressed.
SD DIST must be less than TP DIST.
14. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to branch to
a. Press L4 - Pressed. CARP INIT 2/5 page - Pressed.
b. SD DIST line data updated.
7. Press L5 to enter Run In Course (M or T) (if re-
quired) in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L5 - Pressed.
b. RUN IN CRS line data updated.

3E-43
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Describes the payload (Personnel) to be dropped.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 LOAD Selects and displays the payload type Personnel (PER), Container
Delivery System (CDS), or Heavy Equipment (HE).
L2 STAGE Selects and displays the number of stages used in the CARP calcula-
tion.
L3 CHUTE/# Displays the type and number of parachutes attached to an element to
be dropped.
L4 CAS Displays the proper drop speed for the Personnel (PER).
L5 RACETRACK Selects and displays the multiple run option: ESC (no racetrack), L (left
turn racetrack), or R (right turn racetrack).
L6 MISSIONS/ Branches to the MISSIONS page.
LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan.
R1 NOT USED
R2 EXIT Displays and controls the exit location (DOOR or RAMP) for personnel
drops.
R3 ELEM WT/QTY Displays the weight and quantity of the element(s) to be dropped.
R4 DROP PAYLD Displays the weight to be dropped, in pound, at the CARP.
R5 CHUTE LIST Branches to the CHUTE LIST page.
R6 CARP PROG Branches to the CARP PROG page.

Figure 3E-10 CARP INIT 2/5 page (payload type PER) (sh. 1/3)

3E-44
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Describes the payload (Container Delivery System) to be dropped.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 LOAD Selects and displays the payload type Personnel (PER), Container
Delivery System (CDS), or Heavy Equipment (HE).
L2 STAGE Selects and displays the number of stages used in the CARP calcula-
tion.
L3 CHUTE/# Displays the type and number of parachutes attached to an element to
be dropped.
L4 CAS Displays the proper drop speed for the Container Delivery System
(CDS).
L5 RACETRACK Selects and displays the multiple run option: ESC (no racetrack), L (left
turn racetrack), or R (right turn racetrack).
L6 MISSIONS/ Branches to the MISSIONS page.
LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan.
R1 FUS STA Displays the fuselage station location of the first element to be dropped
during a CDS airdrop.
R2 NOT USED
R3 ELEM WT/QTY Displays the weight and quantity of the element(s) to be dropped.
R4 DROP PAYLD Displays the weight to be dropped, in pound, at the CARP.
R5 CHUTE LIST Branches to the CHUTE LIST page.
R6 CARP PROG Branches to the CARP PROG page.

Figure 3E-10 CARP INIT 2/5 page (payload type CDS) (sh. 2/3)

3E-45
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Describes the payload (Heavy Equipment) to be dropped.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 LOAD Selects and displays the payload type Personnel (PER), Container
Delivery System (CDS), or Heavy Equipment (HE).
L2 STAGE Selects and displays the number of stages used in the CARP calcula-
tion.
L3 CHUTE/# Displays the type and number of parachutes attached to an element to
be dropped.
L4 CAS Displays the proper drop speed for the Heavy Equipment (HE).
L5 RACETRACK Selects and displays the multiple run option: ESC (no racetrack), L (left
turn racetrack), or R (right turn racetrack).
L6 MISSIONS/ Branches to the MISSIONS page.
LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan.
R1-R2 NOT USED
R3 ELEM WT/QTY Displays the weight and quantity of the element(s) to be dropped.
R4 DROP PAYLD Displays the weight to be dropped, in pound, at the CARP.
R5 CHUTE LIST Branches to the CHUTE LIST page.
R6 CARP PROG Branches to the CARP PROG page.

Figure 3E-10 CARP INIT 2/5 page (payload type HE) (sh. 3/3)

3E-46
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

CARP INIT 2/5 PAGE DATA ENTRY 5. Press L5 to select racetrack turn requirement -
Entered.
a. Selected RACETRACK (ESC, L, or R) ap-
PREREQUISITES pears in large font.
1. Active or provisional route is estabstalished. 6. Press L6 to branch back to originating page (if
2. CARP INIT 1/5 page displayed. required) - Pressed.

3. Operator presses NEXT PAGE hard-key. 7. Press R1 to enter fuselage station (if required)
only if payload type CDS is selected - Entered.
a. CARP INIT 2/5 page displayed.
a. Press R1 - Pressed.
b. FUS STA line data updated.
DATA ENTRY
8. Press R2 to select exit location only if payload
1. Press L1 to select CARP payload type - Select- type PER is selected - Selected.
ed.
a. Selected EXIT (DOOR or RAMP) appears
a. Selected payload type LOAD (PER, CDS, in large font.
or HE) appears in large font.
9. Press R3 to enter element weight and quantity
2. Press L2 to select number of stages - Select- in the scratch pad - Entered.
ed.
a. Press R3 - Pressed.
a. Selected STAGE (1 or 2) appears in large b. ELEM WT/QTY line data updated.
font.
10. Press R4 to enter drop payload weight in the
3. Press L3 to enter chute identifier and number scratch pad - Entered.
of chutes in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press R4 - Pressed.
NOTE b. DROP PAYLD line data updated.

Chute identifier can be selected from the 11. Press R5 to branch to the CHUTE LIST page -
CHUTE LIST and entered into the scratch Pressed.
pad for transfer into this field.
12. Press R6 to branch to CARP PROG page (if
required) - Pressed.
a. Press L3 - Pressed.
b. CHUTE/# line data updated. 13. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to branch to
CARP INIT 3/5 page - Pressed.
4. Press L4 to enter drop speed CAS in the
scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L4 - Pressed.
b. CAS line data updated.

3E-47
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Describes the meteorological data for the given single-stage airdrop (1 stage CARP).

Soft-key Display Description

L1 ALT W/V Displays the drop altitude wind bearing and speed.
L2 NOT USED
L3 SFC W/V Displays the surface wind bearing and speed.
L4 BAL W/V Displays a vector equal to the average of the drop altitude and surface
winds.
L5 ALTIMETER SETTING Displays and controls the altitude reference (QNH or QFE).
L6 MISSIONS/ Branches to the MISSIONS page.
LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan.
R1 ALT TEMP Displays the drop altitude temperature in Celsius and Fahrenheit.
R2 NOT USED
R3 SFC TEMP Displays the surface temperature in Celsius and Fahrenheit.
R4 NOT USED
R5 ALTIMETER SETTING Displays the altimeter setting. Barometric pressure is displayed in both
inches Hg and millibar.
R6 CARP PROG Branches to the CARP PROG page.

Figure 3E-11 CARP INIT 3/5 page (1 stage CARP) (sh. 1/2)

3E-48
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Describes the meteorological data for the given two-stage airdrop (2 stage CARP).

Soft-key Display Description

L1 ALT W/V Displays the drop altitude wind bearing and speed.
L2 ACTN W/V Displays the actuation altitude wind bearing and speed.
L3 SFC W/V Displays the surface wind bearing and speed.
L4 HI BAL W/V Displays a vector equal to the average of the drop altitude and actua-
tion altitude winds.
L5 ALTIMETER SETTING Displays and controls the altitude reference (QNH or QFE).
L6 MISSIONS/ Branches to the MISSIONS page.
LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan.
R1 ALT TEMP Displays the drop altitude temperature in Celsius and Fahrenheit.
R2 ACTN TEMP Displays the actuation altitude temperature in Celsius and Fahrenheit.
R3 SFC TEMP Displays the surface temperature in Celsius and Fahrenheit.
R4 LO BAL W/V Displays a vector equal to the average of the actuation altitude and
surface winds.
R5 ALTIMETER SETTING Displays the altimeter setting. Barometric pressure is displayed in both
inches Hg and millibar.
R6 CARP PROG Branches to the CARP PROG page.

Figure 3E-11 CARP INIT 3/5 page (2 stage CARP) (sh. 2/2)

3E-49
FAM.1C-27J-1A

CARP INIT 3/5 PAGE DATA ENTRY 5. Press L5 to select altimeter reference - Select-
ed.
a. Selected ALTIMETER SETTING (QNH or
PREREQUISITES QFE) appears in large font.
1. Active or provisional route is established. 6. Press L6 to branch to the Legs page (if de-
2. CARP INIT 1/5 page displayed. sired) - Pressed.

3. Operator presses NEXT PAGE hard-key two 7. Press R1 to enter altitude temperature in the
times. scratch pad - Entered.

a. CARP INIT 3/5 page displayed. a. Press R1 - Pressed.

b. ALT TEMP line data updated.
NOTE 8. Press R2 to enter actuation altitude tempera-
ture in the scratch pad - Entered.
If STAGE is selected to 1, data in L2, R2,
and R4 are blank. a. Press R2 - Pressed.
b. ACTN TEMP line data updated.
DATA ENTRY 9. Press R3 to enter surface temperature in the
scratch pad - Entered.
1. Press L1 to enter drop altitude wind direction
and velocity information in the scratch pad - a. Press R3 - Pressed.
Entered. b. SFC TEMP line data updated.
a. Press L1 - Pressed. 10. Press R4 to enter low ballistic wind direction
b. ALT W/V line data updated. and velocity (if desired) in the scratch pad - En-
tered.
2. Press L2 to enter wind actuation altitude infor-
mation in the scratch pad - Entered. a. Press R4 - Pressed.
a. Press L2 - Pressed. b. LO BAL W/V line data updated.
b. ACTN W/V line data updated. 11. Press R5 to enter altimeter measurement in
the scratch pad - Entered.
3. Press L3 to enter surface wind direction and
velocity in the scratch pad - Entered. a. Press R5 - Pressed.
a. Press L3 - Pressed. b. ALTIMETER SETTING line data updated.
b. SFC W/V line data updated. 12. Press R6 to branch to the CARP PROG page
(if desired) - Pressed.
If STAGE is selected to 1:
13. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to branch to
4. Press L4 to enter ballistic wind direction and CARP INIT 4/5 page - Pressed.
velocity (if desired) in the scratch pad - En-
tered.
a. Press L4 - Pressed.
b. BAL W/V line data updated.

If STAGE is selected to 2:
4. Press L4 to enter high ballistic wind direction
and velocity (if desired) in the scratch pad - En-
tered.
a. Press L4 - Pressed.
b. HI BAL W/V line data updated.

3E-50
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3E-51
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Describes the altitudes and elevations for single-stage airdrop (1 stage CARP).

Soft-key Display Description

L1 DROP ALTITUDE Selects and displays the drop altitude type (QNH or PA).
L2-L3 NOT USED
L4 RQD CLNC HT Displays the minimum clearance that must be maintained above the
obstruction elevation.
L5 MIN DROP HT Displays the minimum altitude required to assure full parachute deploy-
ment before the load impacts the ground.
L6 MISSIONS/ Branches to the MISSIONS page.
LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan.
R1 DROP ALTITUDE Displays the drop altitude.
R2 NOT USED
R3 PI ELEVATION Displays the Point of Impact (PI) elevation relative to sea level.
R4 OBSTR ELEV Displays the elevation above sea level of the obstruction requiring a
maintained minimum clearance.
R5 DZ ELEV Displays the elevation of the drop zone.
R6 CARP PROG Branches to the CARP PROG page.

Figure 3E-12 CARP INIT 4/5 page (1 stage CARP) (sh. 1/2)

3E-52
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Describes the altitudes and elevations for two-stage airdrop (2 stage CARP).

Soft-key Display Description

L1 DROP ALTITUDE Selects and displays the drop altitude type (QNH or PA).
L2 ACTUATION ALTITUDE Selects and displays the actuation altitude type (QFE, PA or QNH).
L3-L5 NOT USED
L6 MISSIONS/ Branches to the MISSIONS page.
LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan.
R1 DROP ALTITUDE Displays the drop altitude.
R2 ACTUATION ALTITUDE Displays the actuation altitude.
R3 PI ELEVATION Displays the Point of Impact (PI) elevation relative to sea level.
R4-R5 NOT USED
R6 CARP PROG Branches to the CARP PROG page.

Figure 3E-12 CARP INIT 4/5 page (2 stage CARP) (sh. 2/2)

3E-53
FAM.1C-27J-1A

CARP INIT 4/5 PAGE DATA ENTRY 5. Press L6 to branch to originating page (if re-
quired) - Pressed.
6. Press R1 to enter drop altitude in the scratch
PREREQUISITES pad - Entered.
1. Active or provisional route is established. a. Press R1 - Pressed.
2. CARP INIT 1/5 page displayed. b. DROP ALTITUDE line data updated.

3. Operator presses NEXT PAGE hard-key three 7. Press R2 to enter actuation altitude only if
times. STAGE is selected to 2 - Entered.

a. CARP INIT 4/5 page displayed.

NOTE
NOTE If STAGE is selected to 1, data is blank.

If STAGE is selected to 2, L4, L5, R4 and a. Press R2 - Pressed.

R5 are blank.
b. ACTUATION ALTITUDE line data updat-
ed.
DATA ENTRY 8. Press R3 to enter point of impact elevation in
1. Press L1 to select drop altitude type - Selected. the scratch pad - Entered.

a. Selected DROP ALTITUDE (QNH or PA) a. Press R3 - Pressed.

appears in large font. b. PI ELEVATION line data updated.

2. Press L2 to select actuation altitude type only 9. Press R4 to enter obstruction elevation in the
if STAGE is selected to 2 - Entered. scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press R4 - Pressed.
NOTE
b. OBSTR ELEV line data updated.
If STAGE is selected to 1, data is blank. 10. Press R5 to enter drop zone elevation in the
scratch pad - Entered.
a. Selected ACTUATION ALTITUDE (QFE,
PA, or QNH) appears in large font. a. Press R5 - Pressed.
b. DZ ELEV line data updated.
3. Press L4 to enter required clearance altitude in
the scratch pad - Entered. 11. Press R6 to branch to the CARP PROG page
(if desired) - Pressed.
a. Press L4 - Pressed.
b. RQN CLNC HT line data updated. 12. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to branch to
CARP INIT 5/5 page - Pressed.
4. Press L5 to enter minimum drop altitude in the
scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L5 - Pressed.
b. MIN DROP HT line data updated.

3E-54
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3E-55
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays the ballistic data for single-stage airdrop (1 stage CARP).

Soft-key Display Description

L1 CHUTE/NO Displays the type and number of parachutes attached to an element.

L2 ET/FTT Displays the exit time and the froward travel time.
L3 TFC Displays the time of fall constant.
L4 RF Displays the rate of fall.
L5 NOT USED
L6 MISSIONS/ Branches to the MISSIONS page.
LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan.
R1 NOT USED
R2 DECEL QUOT Displays the deceleration quotient.
R3 VERT DIST Displays the vertical distance an element travels after leaving the air-
craft before reaching a stabilized condition.
R4-R5 NOT USED
R6 CARP PROG Branches to the CARP PROG page.

Figure 3E-13 CARP INIT 5/5 page (1 stage CARP) (sh. 1/2)

3E-56
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays the ballistic data for two-stage airdrop (2 stage CARP).

Soft-key Display Description

L1 CHUTE/NO Displays the type and number of parachutes attached to an element.

L2 ET/FTT Displays the exit time and the froward travel time.
L3 TFC Displays the time of fall constant.
L4 HI ALT RF Displays the high altitude rate of fall.
L5 DECEL TIME Displays the deceleration time.
L6 MISSIONS/ Branches to the MISSIONS page.
LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan.
R1 TIMER DELAY Displays the parachute deployment timer delay.
R2 DECEL QUOT Displays the deceleration quotient.
R3 VERT DIST Displays the vertical distance an element travels after leaving the air-
craft before reaching a stabilized condition.
R4 LO ALT RF Displays the low altitude rate of fall.
R5 DECEL DIST Displays the deceleration distance.
R6 CARP PROG Branches to the CARP PROG page.

Figure 3E-13 CARP INIT 5/5 page (2 stage CARP) (sh. 2/2)

3E-57
FAM.1C-27J-1A

CARP INIT 5/5 PAGE DATA ENTRY 5. Press L5 to enter deceleration time (if required)
in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L5 - Pressed.
PREREQUISITES
b. DECEL TIME line data updated.
1. Active or provisional route is established.
6. Press L6 to branch back to originating page (if
2. CARP INIT 1/5 page displayed. desired) - Pressed.

3. Operator presses NEXT PAGE hard-key four 7. Press R1 to enter timer delay (seconds) (if re-
times. quired) in the scratch pad - Entered.

a. CARP INIT 5/5 page displayed. a. Press R1 - Pressed.

b. TIMER DELAY line data updated.
NOTE 8. Press R2 to enter deceleration quotient (if re-
If STAGE is selected to 1, data in L5, R1, quired) in the scratch pad - Entered.
R4, and R5 are blank. a. Press R2 - Pressed.
b. DECEL QUOT line data updated.
DATA ENTRY 9. Press R3 to enter vertical distance (if required)
1. Press L1 to enter chute identifier and number in the scratch pad - Entered.
of chutes in the scratch pad - Entered. a. Press R3 - Pressed.
b. VERT DIST line data updated.
NOTE
10. Press R4 to enter low altitude rate of fall (if re-
Chute identifier can be selected from the quired) in the scratch pad - Entered.
CHUTE LIST and entered into the scratch
pad for transfer into this field. a. Press R4 - Pressed.
b. LO ALT RF line data updated.
a. Press L1 - Pressed.
11. Press R5 to enter deceleration distance (if re-
b. CHUTE/NO line data updated. quired) in the scratch pad - Entered.
2. Press L2 to enter exit time and forward travel a. Press R5 - Pressed.
time (if required) in the scratch pad - Entered.
b. DECEL DIST line data updated.
a. Press L2 - Pressed.
12. Press R6 to branch to CARP PROG page (if
b. ET/FTT line data updated. desired) - Pressed.
3. Press L3 to enter time of fall constant (if re-
quired) in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L3 - Pressed.
b. TFC line data updated.

If STAGE is selected to 1:
4. Press L4 to enter rate of fall (if required) in the
scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L4 - Pressed.
b. RF line data updated.

If STAGE is selected to 2:
4. Press L4 to enter high altitude rate of fall (if re-
quired) in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L4 - Pressed.
b. HI ALT RF line data updated.

3E-58
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3E-59
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays current guidance and ballistic information on the current airdrop for single-stage airdrop
(1 stage CARP).

Soft-key Display Description

L1 CARP Display the CARP along tack distance and the CARP along track direc-
tion.
L2 WINDS Selects sensed or entered drop altitude winds (SEN or ENT).

FOM Displays the INAV1 and INAV2 Figure of Merit (FOM).

L3 D ALT/CAS Displays the drop altitude and drop speed.
L4 TOT Displays the time over target (TOT) value from the CARP INIT 1/5
page.
AHD or BHD Displays the Ahead or Behind time.
L5 RACETRACK Selects and displays the multiple run option: ESC (no racetrack), L (left
turn racetrack), or R (right turn racetrack).
L6 TTG Displays the estimated time to cross CARP waypoint.
CARP INIT/ Branches to the CARP INIT 1/5 page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan which con-
tains this CARP.
R1 SEN/ENT Displays the sensed and entered altitude wind direction and speed.
R2 BAL Displays the ballistic wind direction and speed.
R3-R4 NOT USED
R5 SFC Displays the surface wind direction and speed from CARP INIT 3/5
page.
R6 REDLT Displays the estimated red light time (time estimated to fly over the
drop zone from the release point to the end of the drop zone “red light”)
based on the drop altitude and speed.
CARP ABORT Selection aborts CARP processing if *CARP status in title is ACT or
MOD.

Figure 3E-14 CARP PROGRESS 1/2 page (1 stage CARP) (sh. 1/2)

3E-60
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays current guidance and ballistic information on the current airdrop for two-stage airdrop (2
stage CARP).

Soft-key Display Description

L1 CARP Display the CARP along tack distance and the CARP along track direc-
tion.
L2 WINDS Selects sensed or entered drop altitude winds (SEN or ENT).

FOM Displays the INAV1 and INAV2 Figure of Merit (FOM).

L3 D ALT/CAS Displays the drop altitude and drop speed.
L4 TOT Displays the time over target (TOT) value from the CARP INIT 1/5
page.
AHD or BHD Displays the Ahead or Behind time.
L5 RACETRACK Selects and displays the multiple run option: ESC (no racetrack), L (left
turn racetrack), or R (right turn racetrack).
L6 TTG Displays the estimated time to cross CARP waypoint.
CARP INIT/ Branches to the CARP INIT 1/5 page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan which con-
tains this CARP.
R1 SEN/ENT Displays the sensed and entered altitude wind direction and speed.
R2 HI BAL Displays the high ballistic wind direction and speed.
R3 ACTN Displays the actuation wind direction and speed.
R4 LO BAL Displays the low ballistic wind direction and speed.
R5 SFC Displays the surface wind direction and speed from CARP INIT 3/5
page.
R6 REDLT Displays the estimated red light time (time estimated to fly over the
drop zone from the release point to the end of the drop zone “red light”)
based on the drop altitude and speed.
CARP ABORT Selection aborts CARP processing if *CARP status in title is ACT or
MOD.

Figure 3E-14 CARP PROGRESS 1/2 page (2 stage CARP) (sh. 2/2)

3E-61
FAM.1C-27J-1A

CARP PROGRESS 1/2 PAGE DATA If STAGE is selected to 1:

ENTRY 11. Press R2 to enter ballistic wind direction and
speed in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press R2 - Pressed.
PREREQUISITES
b. BAL line data updated.
1. CARP initialization is complete or provisional.
If STAGE is selected to 2:
2. CARP PROG 1/2 page is selected from CARP
INIT pages, MISSIONS page or LEGS page. 12. Press R2 to enter high ballistic wind direction
and speed in the scratch pad - Entered.
NOTE a. Press R2 - Pressed.
If STAGE is selected to 1, data in R3 and b. HI BAL line data updated.
R4 are blank. 13. Press R3 to enter actuation wind direction and
speed in the scratch pad - Entered.
DATA ENTRY a. Press R3 - Pressed.
1. L1 displays CARP along tack distance and di- b. ACTN line data updated.
rection to enter usable drop zone time. 14. Press R4 to enter low ballistic wind direction
2. Press L2 to select sensed/entered winds for and speed in the scratch pad - Entered.
ballistic calculations - Selected. a. Press R4 - Pressed.
a. Selected WINDS (SEN or ENT) appears in b. LO BAL line data updated.
large font.
15. R5 displays surface wind direction and speed.
3. L2 displays Figure of Merit (FOM). Press R5 to enter surface wind direction and
speed in the scratch pad - Entered.
4. Press L3 to enter drop altitude and drop speed
in the scratch pad - Entered. a. Press R5 - Pressed.
b. SFC line data updated.
a. Press L3 - Pressed.
b. D ALT/CAS line data updated. 16. R6 displays estimated red light time (REDLT).

5. R5 displays time over target. 17. Press R6 to abort an active or provisional

Press L4 to enter time over target in the CARP (if required) - Pressed.
scratch pad - Entered.
18. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to branch to
a. Press L4 - Pressed. CARP PROG 2/2 page - Pressed.
b. TOT line data updated.
6. L4 displays ahead or behind time (AHD/BHD).
7. Press L5 to select racetrack turn requirement -
Entered.
a. Selected RACETRACK (ESC, L, or R) ap-
pears in large font.
8. L6 displays estimated time to go (TTG).
9. Press L6 to branch to CARP INIT 1/5 page -
Pressed.
10. Press R1 to update sensed winds.

3E-62
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3E-63
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays current CARP drop status for current airdrop.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 DRIFT Displays aircraft drift along CARP path.

L2 NOT USED
L3 DROP RESULT Displays drop result from planned drop.
L4 NOT USED
L5 LOAD DROPPED Load dropped information (wt/confirmed).
L6 CARP INIT/ Branches to the CARP INIT 1/5 page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan which con-
tains this CARP.
R1 TOTAL DROPPED Displays total weight drop.
R2 LOAD REMAINING Displays load remaining to drop.
R3 GROSS WT Displays aircraft gross weight.
R4 NOT USED
R5 LOAD DROPPED CONFIRM displayed to prompt operator input after drop.
R6 CARP ABORT Selection aborts CARP processing if *CARP status in title is ACT or
MOD.

Figure 3E-15 CARP PROGRESS 2/2 page

3E-64
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

CARP PROGRESS 2/2 PAGE DATA 4. Press L6 to branch to CARP INIT 1/5 page or
to erase provisional CARP program informa-
ENTRY tion (as desired) - Pressed.

NOTE
PREREQUISITES
ERASE is displayed for provisional CARP
1. Review computed data.
programming.
2. Drop results update desired.
5. Press R5 to confirm drop (when available and
3. CARP PROG 1/2 page displayed.
appropriate) - Pressed.
4. Operator presses NEXT PAGE hard-key.
a. CARP PROG 2/2 page displayed.
NOTE
When the soft-key R5 is pressed to con-
firm drop the TOTAL DROPPED, LOAD
DATA ENTRY REMAINING, and GROSS WT fields are
1. L1 displays aircraft drift angle. updated.

2. L3 displays drop result. 6. Press R6 to abort drop and branch to DZ ESC

Press L3 to enter direction/yards relative drop (as required) - Pressed.
zone PI, if an adjustment is needed - Entered.
a. Press L3 - Pressed.
b. DROP RESULT line data updated.
3. Press L5 to enter the appropriate amount for
load dropped after each drop in multiple run
CARP - Entered.
a. Press L5 - Pressed.
b. LOAD DROPPED line data updated.

3E-65
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Provides a listing of the stored parachutes.

Soft-key Display Description

L1-L5 Stored chute Displays the various types of parachutes/configurations.

Selection results in the type chute being placed into the scratch pad.
L6 MISSIONS/ Branches to the MISSIONS page.
CARP INIT Branches to the CARP INIT 1/5 page.
R1-R5 Stored chute Displays the various types of parachutes/configurations.
Selection results in the type chute being placed into the scratch pad.
R6 NOT USED

NOTE

The number of chute list pages depends on the amount of chute type loaded into the data base.

Figure 3E-16 CHUTE LIST page

3E-66
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

CHUTE LIST PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. CHUTE LIST page is selected from CARP INIT
2/5 page or MISSIONS page.

DATA ENTRY
1. L1 through L5 and R1 through R5 displays
available chute listing.
2. Press L6 to branch back to originating page (if
desired) - Pressed.

3E-67 / ( 3E-68 blank )

 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PART 3F. DIRECT-TO/INTERCEPT

Contents page

DIRECT-TO/INTERCEPT ................................. 3F-1

DIRECT-TO/INTERCEPT PAGE
DATA ENTRY ............................................... 3F-5

DIRECT-TO/INTERCEPT

INTRODUCTION
Pressing the DIR/INTC hard-key on the CNI-MU
(ICDU) displays the ACTIVE LEGS DIR/INTC LEGS
page (Figure 3F-1 and Figure 3F-2). The DIR/INTC
mode provides a means of flying direct-to, or inter-
cepting, a course to any waypoint stored in the navi-
gation or custom database, to a line selectable
waypoint in the route, or to a crew defined waypoint.

Page Access
Pressing the DIR/INTC hard-key displays the direct-to
or intercept page 2 if a route is active. If no route is
active, the message NO ACTIVE ROUTE is displayed
and no page branching occurs.

3F-1
FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3F-2
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

DIR-INTC Branching

Figure 3F-1

3F-3
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Provide a means of flying direct-to or intercepting a course to any waypoint stored in the naviga-
tion or custom database, line selectable waypoint in the route, crew defined waypoint.

Soft-key Display Description

L1-L5 Waypoint information

L6 DIRECT TO Control and display waypoint information.
Valid waypoint entries are navaids, waypoints, airports, or destination
airport runways contained in the database.
R1-R5 NOT USED
R6 INTC LEG Branch to intercept the leg page.

Figure 3F-2 ACT LEGS page

3F-4
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

DIRECT-TO / INTERCEPT DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. There is an active route in the system.
2. There is a present position in the system.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press DIR/INTC hard-key - Pressed.
a. Ensure there is an ACT LEGS page dis-
played.
b. Ensure there are active waypoints or na-
vaids listed on the LEGS page.

DIRECT-TO data entry:

1. Enter DIRECT-TO point data - Entered.
a. Enter point desired position in the scratch
pad or press desired soft-key L1 through
L5 for waypoint, navaid, etc.
2. Press L6 to enter desired position - Pressed.
a. Verify MOD LEGS page is displayed.
3. Press EXEC hard-key to activate modification
- Pressed.

Intercept:
1. Enter intercept point data - Entered.
2. Enter inbound course - Entered.
3. Press L6 to enter desired position - Pressed.
4. Press EXEC hard-key to activate modification
- Pressed.
a. Route on NAV radar display and CNI-MU
(ICDU) updates.

3F-5 / ( 3F-6 blank )

 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PART 3G. PERFORMANCE DATA

Contents page Contents page

PERFORMANCE DATA PAGES ...................... 3G-1 PERF INIT WEIGHT 1/4 PAGE
PERFORMANCE DATA PAGE ACCESS DATA ENTRY ............................................. 3G-17
AND BRANCHING ........................................ 3G-1 PERF INIT CLIMB 2/4 PAGE
DATA INPUT AND DISPLAY ........................ 3G-2 DATA ENTRY ............................................. 3G-19
PERFORMANCE INITIALIZATION PAGES ..... 3G-2 PERF INIT CRUISE 3/4 PAGE
PERF INIT WEIGHT 1/4 PAGE .................... 3G-2 DATA ENTRY ............................................. 3G-21
PERF INIT CLIMB 2/4 PAGE ....................... 3G-3 PERF INIT DESCENT 4/4 PAGE
PERF INIT CRUISE 3/4 PAGE ..................... 3G-4 DATA ENTRY ............................................. 3G-23
PERF INIT DESCENT 4/4 PAGE ................. 3G-5
TOLD INIT 1/3 PAGE DATA ENTRY .............. 3G-25
TOLD INITIALIZATION PAGES ........................ 3G-5
TOLD INIT 2/3 PAGE DATA ENTRY .............. 3G-29
TOLD INIT 1/3 PAGE ................................... 3G-5
TOLD INIT 2/3 PAGE ................................... 3G-7 TOLD INIT 3/3 PAGE DATA ENTRY .............. 3G-31
TOLD INIT 3/3 PAGE ................................... 3G-8 TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY .... 3G-33
TAKEOFF DATA PAGES ................................. 3G-8 TAKEOFF DATA 2/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY .... 3G-35
TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 PAGE .......................... 3G-8 LANDING DATA 1/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY ..... 3G-37
TAKEOFF DATA 2/2 PAGE ........................ 3G-10
LANDING DATA 2/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY ..... 3G-39
LANDING DATA PAGES ................................ 3G-11
LANDING DATA 1/2 PAGE ........................ 3G-11
LANDING DATA 2/2 PAGE ........................ 3G-12

PERFORMANCE DATA PAGES – TAKEOFF DATA 2/2

– LANDING DATA 1/2
The performance data pages are used to verify or
– LANDING DATA 2/2
input aircraft performance data. The performance data
pages include the following:
– PERF INIT WEIGHT 1/4 PERFORMANCE DATA PAGE ACCESS AND
BRANCHING
– PERF INIT CLIMB 2/4
The TOLD hard-key on the CNI-MU (ICDU) allows
– PERF INIT CRUISE 3/4 access to the associated performance data pages.
– PERF INIT DESCENT 4/4 Performance data page branching is shown in Figure
3G-1. Various conditions determine which perfor-
– TOLD INIT 1/3 mance data page is displayed when the TOLD hard-
key is pressed:
– TOLD INIT 2/3
a. If an active route exists and the PERF INIT
– TOLD INIT 3/3
WEIGHT page is not initialized, then the PERF
– TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 INIT WEIGHT page for the active route (1 or 2) is
displayed.

3G-1
FAM.1C-27J-1A

b. If the TOLD INIT page is not initialized, then the Page Access
TOLD INIT 1/3 page is displayed.
a. Press the TOLD hard-key (Figure 3-1) when an ac-
c. If the PERF INIT WEIGHT and TOLD INIT pages tive route exists and the PERF INIT WEIGHT page
are initialized, and the mission computer (MC) is not initialized.
senses that it is not airborne, then the TAKEOFF
DATA 1/2 page is displayed. b. Select the PERF WGT prompt on the INDEX 1/2
page.
d. If the MC senses a climb, and the sensed calibrat-
ed airspeed is less than the take-off climb speed, c. Select the PERF INIT prompt on the route plan
then the TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 page is displayed. page, if the route is provisional or active.

e. If the MC senses that it is airborne, and a climb is d. Press the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the PERF
not sensed, then the LANDING DATA 1/2 page is INIT DESCENT page.
displayed. e. Press the PREV PAGE hard-key from the PERF
INIT CLIMB page.

DATA INPUT AND DISPLAY

Display
When selecting modes on the performance data
pages, the selected mode is displayed in large font L1 - BASIC OPERATING WEIGHT
(inverse video), and the unselected mode is displayed
The entered basic operating weight (BOW) is dis-
in small font. Default values are displayed in small
played adjacent to L1 in large font.
font. Some default values may be changed manually.
Manually entered values are displayed in large font. L2 - PAYLOAD WEIGHT

NOTE The payload weight (+PAYLOAD) is displayed adja-

cent to L2.
Pressing the DEL key and then the appli-
cable soft-key replaces the entered value L3 - WEIGHT WITHOUT FUEL
with the default value. Data adjacent to L3 displays the calculated weight
without fuel (=WT W/O FUEL).

NOTE
PERFORMANCE INITIALIZATION
PAGES Weight without fuel is calculated by the
CNI-MS and is not modifiable.

The performance initialization pages include the

L4 - FUEL ON BOARD / FOB SOURCE
PERF INIT WEIGHT, PERF INIT CLIMB, PERF INIT
CRUISE, and PERF INIT DESCENT pages. These Data adjacent to L3 displays the fuel on board
pages will display data used to calculate TOLD and (+FOB). When valid, the calculated fuel is displayed in
other related aircraft performance calculations. small font. If the calculated fuel is not valid, either the
first fuel entry, the fuel quantity sensor value, or box
NOTE prompts are displayed. Calculated and sensed values
are displayed in small font. Entries and box prompts
The title line on all performance pages are displayed in large font.
displays the route number to which the Adjacent data field displays the source of FOB. If cal-
page applies. culated fuel is shown, then CALC is displayed in adja-
cent data field. If the fuel quantity sensor value is
shown, adjacent data field displays SENSED. If a
PERF INIT WEIGHT 1/4 PAGE manual entry is shown, adjacent data field displays
MANUAL. Delete results in the entered FOB value
The PERF INIT WEIGHT page (Figure 3G-2) displays
being deleted, and the default value restored.
the various aircraft weights. There are two PERF INIT
WEIGHT pages, one for route 1 and one for route 2. L5 - GROSS WEIGHT
Data adjacent to L5 displays the calculated gross
weight (=GROSS WT).

3G-2
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NOTE PERF INIT CLIMB 2/4 PAGE

Gross weight is calculated by the CNI-MS The PERF INIT CLIMB page (Figure 3G-3) displays
and is not modifiable. climb speeds and altitudes, and other climb parame-
ters. There are two PERF INIT CLIMB pages, one for
L6 - BRANCH TO ROUTE PLAN PAGE route 1 and one for route 2.

Selection of the soft-key L6 results in a branch to the

route plan page for the route specified adjacent to L6. Page Access

R1 - TRIP FUEL a. Press the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the PERF
INIT WEIGHT page.
The trip fuel (TRIP) is displayed in data adjacent to
R1. The default value is displayed in small font. b. Press the PREV PAGE hard-key from the PERF
Default box prompts are displayed in large font. INIT CRUISE page.
c. Select the PERF CLB prompt on the INDEX 1/2
R2 - FIXED RESERVE FUEL
page.
The fixed reserve fuel (FIXED) is displayed in data
adjacent to R2. NOTE
R3 - VARIABLE RESERVE FUEL The PERF INIT CLIMB page will display
the same route as the PERF INIT
Variable reserve fuel (% VAR) is displayed adjacent to WEIGHT or CRUISE page, or as indicat-
R3, below the line header. Available percentages for ed in the PERF CLB prompt.
calculating fuel is displayed to the left of the variable
reserve fuel and toggle between 0%, 5%, 10%, and
15%. The selected percentage is displayed in inverse Display
large font.
L1 - CLIMB SPEED / ALTITUDE 1
R4 - EXTRA FUEL / ENDURANCE TIME / ALERT
VALUE Climb speed/altitude 1 (CLB SPD1) is displayed in
data adjacent to L1. If the climb speed/altitude 1 is
Data adjacent to R4 (+EXTRA) displays the extra fuel displayed in large font, delete results in the entries
alert value (to the left of the line title) and extra fuel being removed, and the default value being displayed.
endurance time and extra fuel (on the line below).
The alert value is selectable between 2.6 and 4.0 L2 - CLIMB SPEED / ALTITUDE 2
(2600 and 4000 pounds) or a user-defined value may L2 same as L1 except for climb speed/altitude 2.
be entered. Default value is 4.0.
L3 - CLIMB SPEED / ALTITUDE 3
NOTE
L3 same as L1 except for climb speed/altitude 3.
Extra fuel weight and endurance are cal-
culated by the CNI-MU (ICDU) and are L4 - TWO ENGINE CLIMB SPEED
not modifiable. Data adjacent to L4 displays the predicted two-engine
climb speed (V2 ENG CLB). Selection down-selects
R5 - FUEL ON BOARD / FOB ENDURANCE TIME the predicted climb speed, if a speed is displayed.
Data adjacent to R5 displays the fuel on board and L5 - BLEED
the total endurance time (=FOB), respectively. Display
of data is the same as described for L4. Delete results Not operational.
in the entered FOB value being deleted, and the
default value restored. L6 - BRANCH TO ROUTE PLAN PAGE
Selection of the soft-key L6 results in a branch to the
R6
route plan page for the route specified adjacent to L6.
Not operational.

3G-3
FAM.1C-27J-1A

R1 - CLIMB FUEL FLOW Display

The climb fuel flow (CLB FF) is entered and displayed L1 - CRUISE ALTITUDE
adjacent to R1. Delete results in the data being
removed and replaced with the default data. The cruise altitude (CRZ ALT) is displayed in data
adjacent to L1. When the active waypoint is the *TP,
R2 - TRANSITION ALTITUDE *SD, *FAF or *GSI waypoint of a Landing Zone
Approach or the *CARP waypoint of a CARP, modifi-
The transition altitude (TRANS ALT) is displayed adja- cation of data field is not allowed and will result in the
cent to R2. Delete results in the data being removed NOT ALLOWED message being displayed.
and replaced with the default data. Delete results in entered data adjacent to L1 and L3
being removed and replaced with the default.
R3
Not operational. L2 - CRUISE WIND
The cruise wind (CRZ WIND) is displayed in data
R4 - ONE ENGINE CLIMB SPEED
adjacent to L2.
Data adjacent to R4 displays the predicted one-
engine climb speed (V1 ENG CLB). Selection down- L3 - CRUISE SPEED
selects the predicted climb speed, if a speed is dis- Data adjacent to L3 will initially display (three box
played. prompts) /---T/---G in large font. CAS entries are
accomplished by entering the desired speed. A speed
R5
entry appended with a T is interpreted as a TAS entry,
Not operational. and a speed entry appended with a G is interpreted as
a groundspeed. When one speed type is entered, it is
R6 - BRANCH TO TOLD INIT PAGE displayed in large font. The other two speed types are
then computed and displayed in small font. When a
Not operational.
computed speed is unavailable, small font dashes are
displayed for that speed value. When the active way-
point is the *SD, *FAF or *GSI waypoint of a Landing
PERF INIT CRUISE 3/4 PAGE
Zone Approach or the *CARP waypoint of a CARP,
The PERF INIT CRUISE page (Figure 3G-4), displays modification of data field is not allowed and will result
the cruise parameters for the indicated route. There in the NOT ALLOWED message being displayed.
are actually two PERF INIT CRUISE pages, one for
route 1 and one for route 2. L4 - SENSED FUEL FLOW / CRUISE FUEL FLOW
The cruise fuel flow is displayed in data adjacent to
Page Access L4. Delete results in entered data being removed and
replaced with the default. The sensed fuel flow (SEN
a. Press the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the PERF FF) is displayed on the data line above the cruise fuel
INIT CLIMB page. flow (CRZ FF).
b. Press the PREV PAGE hard-key from the PERF L5 - DRAG INDEX
INIT DESCENT page.
Not operational.
c. Select the PERF CRZ prompt on the INDEX 1/2
page. L6 - BRANCH TO ROUTE PLAN PAGE
Selection of the soft-key L6 results in a branch to the
NOTE route plan page for the route specified adjacent to L6.
The PERF INIT CRUISE page will display
the same route as the PERF INIT CLIMB
R1 - ESTIMATED ENROUTE TIME
or DESCENT page, or as indicated in the The estimated enroute time (ETE) to the last primary
PERF CRZ prompt. waypoint in the flight plan is displayed in data adjacent
to R1.

R2 - TRIP FUEL
The trip fuel is displayed in data adjacent to R2.

3G-4
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

R3 - TEMPERATURE DEVIATION L2 - DESCENT SPEED / ALTITUDE 2

The temperature deviation (T DEV) is displayed in L2 same as L1 except for descent speed/altitude 2.
data adjacent to R3. A computed value is displayed in
small font. An entered value is displayed in large font. L3 - DESCENT SPEED / ALTITUDE 3
Delete results in entered data being removed and L3 same as L1 except for descent speed/altitude 3.
data adjacent to R3 and R4 being replaced with the
defaults. L4 - DESCENT SPEED / ALTITUDE 4
R4 - TOP OF CLIMB OAT L4 same as L1 except for descent speed/altitude 4.
The top of climb OAT (TOC OAT) is displayed in data L5 - END OF DESCENT SPEED / ALTITUDE
adjacent to R4. A computed value is displayed in
small font. An entered value is displayed in large font. The end of descent speed/altitude (EOD SPD) is dis-
Delete results in entered data being removed and R3 played in data adjacent to L5.
and R4 being replaced with the defaults.
L6 - BRANCH TO ROUTE PLAN PAGE
R5 - BRANCH TO OPTIMAL CRUISE PAGE Selection of the soft-key L6 results in a branch to the
Not implemented. route plan page for the route specified adjacent to L6.

R6 - BRANCH TO TOLD INIT PAGE R1

Not operational. Not operational.

R2 - TRANSITION LEVEL
PERF INIT DESCENT 4/4 PAGE The transition level (TRANS LVL) is displayed in data
adjacent to R2.
The PERF INIT DESCENT page (Figure 3G-5), dis-
plays descent speeds and altitudes, and other R3 - DESCENT ANGLE
descent parameters. There are two PERF INIT
DESCENT pages, one for route 1 and one for route 2. Data adjacent to R3 displays the descent angle (DES
ANGLE).
Page Access R4 AND R5
a. Press the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the PERF Not operational.
INIT WEIGHT page.
R6 - BRANCH TO TOLD INIT PAGE
b. Press the PREV PAGE hard-key from the PERF
INIT CRUISE page. Not operational.

c. Select the PERF DES prompt on the INDEX 1/2

page.
TOLD INITIALIZATION PAGES
NOTE
The PERF INIT DESCENT page will dis-
play the same route as the PERF INIT TOLD INIT 1/3 PAGE
WEIGHT or CRUISE page, or as indicat- The TOLD INIT 1/3 page (Figure 3G-6) defines the
ed in the PERF DES prompt. aircraft and airfield parameters used for take-off and
landing computations.
Display
L1 - DESCENT SPEED / ALTITUDE 1 Page Access

Descent speed/altitude 1 (DES SPD1) is displayed in a. Press the TOLD hard-key (Figure 3-1) when:
data adjacent to L1. If the descent speed/altitude 1 is 1. TOLD INIT page is not initialized,
displayed in large font, delete results in the default 2. TOLD INIT page is initialized, aircraft is on the
value being placed into data field. ground.

3G-5
FAM.1C-27J-1A

b. Select the TOLD INIT prompt on the TAKEOFF L4 - TOLD TYPE

DATA, or LANDING DATA pages.
Data adjacent to L4 displays the status of the TOLD
c. Press the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the TOLD type (NORM/TAC). Selection results in toggling the
INIT 3/3 page. selected TOLD type. If TOLD type is TAC, the selec-
tion of the soft-key L3 ICING to “ON” on TOLD INIT 2/
d. Press the PREV PAGE hard-key from the TOLD
3 page is inhibited. If TOLD type is NORM and the
INIT 2/3 page.
soft-key L3 ICING is “ON” on the TOLD INIT 2/3 page,
e. Return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page when the selection of TAC is inhibited.
the WAYPOINT SELECT page was accessed from If TOLD type is selected from NORM to TAC, the MC
the TOLD INIT 1/3 page. automatically commands the soft-key L5 REV ENG to
“2REV” mode. If TOLD type is selected from TAC to
NORM, the MC automatically commands the soft-key
Display L5 REV ENG to “0REV” mode.
L1 - FIELD L5 - ENGINES IN REVERSE
The airfield is displayed in data adjacent to L1. If more
Data adjacent to L5 displays the status of the number
than one waypoint with the entered identifier exists in
of engines in reverse (0 or 2). Selection results in tog-
the databases (navigation and custom), the CNI-SP
gling the selected number of engines in reverse for
will branch to the WAYPOINT SELECT page. Upon
calculations.
return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with a way-
point selected, the CNI-SP will use the selected way- L6
point in the airfield field. Upon return from the
WAYPOINT SELECT page when a waypoint is not Not operational.
selected, the CNI-SP displays the entry in the scratch
pad. If data field displays data in large font, delete will
R1 - OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
remove the entered data, and return the default data. The outside air temperature (OAT) is displayed in data
adjacent to R1. A temperature entered in °C is con-
NOTE verted to the equivalent temperature in °F, and vice-
versa, and both are displayed. If data displayed is
The airfield identifier must be inserted or large font, delete will remove the entered data, and
all other data is lost. return the default data.

L2 - RUNWAY R2 - SURFACE WINDS

If data adjacent to L1 does not display an airfield, the Valid entries of a surface winds (SFC WINDS) are dis-
default value for data field is blank. If an airfield is dis- played in data adjacent to R2. When an airfield is not
played in data adjacent to L1, the default value is ”---”. available, entry and display of surface wind bearing is
The runway is displayed in the data field. Entries are reference to true north “T”. Valid entries are of the
operational only if data field is not blank. If data field form: surface wind bearing/wind speed, surface wind
displays data in large font, delete will remove the bearing/wind speed - wind gust, surface wind bearing
entered data, and return the default data. “T” /wind speed, or surface wind bearing “T” /wind
speed - wind gust.
L3 - GROSS WEIGHT When the entry of a magnetic heading is attempted for
surface wind bearing and an airfield does not exist,
The gross weight (GROSS WT) is displayed in data
the MC displays the message BEARING MUST BE IN
adjacent to L3. When a operator gross weight entry is
TRUE in the scratch pad. If data displayed is large
not available and PERF INIT WEIGHT Gross Weight
font, delete will remove the entered data, and return
is available, the MC converts PERF INIT WEIGHT
the default data.
Gross Weight from pounds to kilopounds. When a
operator gross weight entry is not available and PERF R3 - BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
INIT WEIGHT Gross Weight is not available, the MC
displays “--.-”. The MC updates the gross weight on The barometric pressure (BARO) is displayed in data
the TOLD INIT 1/3 page when it is changed on the adjacent to R3. A BARO setting entry in millibars is
PERF INIT WEIGHT page. converted to inHg, and vice-versa, and both are dis-
played. Valid entries are of the form: baro (millibars),
baro (millibars) /, or / baro (inches).

3G-6
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

R4 - ELEVATION / PRESSURE ALTITUDE L2 - RUNWAY LENGTH

The elevation (ELEV) is displayed in data adjacent to The runway length (RWY LGTH) is displayed in data
R4. The pressure altitude (PA) is displayed in adja- adjacent to L2. When a runway length entry is not
cent field. The default value, received from the TOLD available and the runway length exists in the naviga-
function, will be displayed in small font. Valid pressure tion database, the MC displays the database runway
altitude entries into R4 are displayed in data field in length in small font.
large font. Valid entries are of the form: elevation/alti- When the runway length cannot be determined by
tude, elevation, elevation/, or /altitude. If either the TOLD calculations, the MC displays “-----”. If data field
elevation or pressure altitude are displayed in large displays data in large font, delete will remove the
font, delete results in the entries being removed, and entered data, and return the default data “-----”.
the default values displayed.
L3 - ICING PROTECTION
R5 - BRANCH TO TAKEOFF DATA PAGE
Data adjacent to L3 displays the status of the icing
Selection of the soft-key R5 results in a branch to the protection system configuration. Selection results in
TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 page. toggling the ICING option between “ON/OFF”.

R6 - BRANCH TO LANDING DATA PAGE L4 - CLIMB SPEED RATIO

Selection of the soft-key R6 results in a branch to the The climb speed ratio (CLB SPD RATIO) is displayed
LANDING DATA 1/2 page. in data adjacent to L4. If data field displays data in
large font, delete will remove the entered data, and
return the default data.
TOLD INIT 2/3 PAGE
L5 - MINIMUM CLIMB GRADIENT
The TOLD INIT 2/3 page (Figure 3G-7) defines the
aircraft and airfield parameters used for take-off and The minimum climb gradient (MIN CLB GRAD) is dis-
landing computations. played in data adjacent to L5. If data field displays
data in large font, delete will remove the entered data,
and return the default data.
Page Access
R1 - RUNWAY CONDITION READING / RUNWAY
a. Press the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the TOLD SURFACE COVERING
INIT 1/3 page.
The runway condition reading and runway surface
b. Press the PREV PAGE hard-key from the TOLD covering (RCR/RSC) are displayed and entered in
INIT 3/3 page. data adjacent to R1. A valid runway condition reading
entry into R1 clears any previous runway surface cov-
Display ering entry. A valid runway surface covering entry into
R1 clears any previous runway condition reading
Data between L5 and L6 in the center of the display entry. If the RCR or RSC is displayed in large font,
indicates the aircraft take-off weight, the take-off air- delete results in the entries being removed, and the
field, and the take-off runway. Entry is not permitted default value being displayed.
into these data fields.
R2 - RUNWAY SLOPE
L1 - RUNWAY HEADING
The runway slope (SLOPE) is displayed in data adja-
The runway heading (RWY HDG) is displayed in data cent to R2. The default runway slope is displayed as
adjacent to L1. When an airfield is not available, entry boxes. If runway slope is displayed in large font,
and display of runway heading is referenced to true delete results in the default value being displayed
north. When the entry of a magnetic heading is adjacent to R2.
attempted and the airfield is not available, the MC dis-
plays the message BEARING MUST BE IN TRUE in R3 AND R4
the scratch pad. When the runway heading cannot be
Not operational.
determined by TOLD calculations, the MC displays
boxes. If runway heading is displayed in large font, R5 - BRANCH TO TAKEOFF DATA PAGE
delete results in the default value being displayed
adjacent to L1. Selection of the soft-key R5 results in a branch to the
TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 page.

3G-7
FAM.1C-27J-1A

R6 - BRANCH TO LANDING DATA PAGE R3 - LIFT OFF SPEED RATIO

Selection of the soft-key R6 results in a branch to the The lift-off speed ratio (LO SPD RATIO) is displayed
LANDING DATA 1/2 page. in data field adjacent to R3.
If TOLD type is TAC on TOLD INIT 1/3 page, the data
field displays the default value “1.18”. If TOLD type is
TOLD INIT 3/3 PAGE NORM, the data field is blank.
If data field displays data in large font, delete will
The TOLD INIT 3/3 page (Figure 3G-8) defines the
remove the entered data, and return the default data.
aircraft and airfield parameters used for take-off and
landing computations. R4
Not operational.
Page Access
R5 - BRANCH TO TAKEOFF DATA PAGE
a. Press the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the TOLD
INIT 2/3 page. Selection of the soft-key R5 results in a branch to the
TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 page.
b. Press the PREV PAGE hard-key from the TOLD
INIT 1/3 page. R6 - BRANCH TO LANDING DATA PAGE
Selection of the soft-key R6 results in a branch to the
Display LANDING DATA 1/2 page.
Data between L5 and L6 in the center of the display
indicates the aircraft take-off weight, the take-off air-
field, and the take-off runway. Entry is not permitted
into these data fields. TAKEOFF DATA PAGES
L1 - DRAG INDEX
TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 PAGE
The drag index is displayed in data field adjacent to
L1. If data field displays data in large font, delete will The TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 page (Figure 3G-9) displays
remove the entered data, and return the default data. the computed take-off speeds for the take-off airfield/
runway.
L2 THROUGH L6
Not operational. Page Access
R1 - BRAKE COEFFICIENT a. Select the TOLD hard-key (Figure 3-1).
The brake coefficient (BRAKE COEF) is displayed in b. Select the T/O DATA prompt on the TOLD INIT or
data field adjacent to R1. LANDING DATA pages.
If TOLD type is TAC on TOLD INIT 1/3 page, the data
field displays the default value “0.50”. If TOLD type is c. Press NEXT PAGE or PREV PAGE hard-key from
NORM, the data field is blank. the TAKEOFF DATA 2/2 page.
If data field displays data in large font, delete will
remove the entered data, and return the default data. Display
R2 - REFUSAL SPEED RATIO Data below the title field displays the selected option
based on the TOLD INIT 1/3 page soft-key L4.
The refusal speed ratio (REF SPD RATIO) is dis-
Data between L5 and L6 in the center of the display
played in data field adjacent to R2.
indicates the aircraft take-off weight, the take-off air-
If TOLD type is TAC on TOLD INIT 1/3 page, the data
field, and the take-off runway. Entry is not permitted
field displays the default value “1.00”. If TOLD type is
into these data fields.
NORM, the data field is blank.
If data field displays data in large font, delete will L1 - MINIMUM CONTROL SPEED (GROUND)
remove the entered data, and return the default data.
The minimum control speed on the ground (VMCG) is
displayed in data field adjacent to L1.

3G-8
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Represents the minimum speed at which the aircraft R1 - CRITICAL ENGINE FAILURE SPEED
can be controlled in case of one engine failure during
take-off run. The computed value for VMCG received The critical engine failure speed (VCEF) is displayed
from the TOLD function is displayed in small font. in data field adjacent to R1.
When the VMCG cannot be determined by TOLD cal- Represents the speed at which the aircraft can accel-
culations, the MC displays “---KT”. erate, experience an engine failure, and can either
take-off with the remaining engine or stop in the same
L2 - MINIMUM CONTROL SPEED (AIR) total runway distance.
The computed value for VCEF received from the
The minimum control speed in the air (VMCA) is dis- TOLD function is displayed in small font. When the
played in data field adjacent to L2. critical engine failure speed cannot be determined by
Represents the minimum speed at which, with take-off TOLD calculations, the MC displays “---KT”.
flap configurations and gear retracted, the aircraft can
be controlled in case of one engine failure. R2 - REFUSAL SPEED
The computed value for VMCA received from the
TOLD function is displayed in small font. When the The refusal speed (VREF) based on available runway
VMCA cannot be determined by TOLD calculations, is displayed in data field adjacent to R2.
the MC displays “---KT”. Refusal speed is the maximum speed that the aircraft
can accelerate with engines at maximum take-off
L3 - BRAKE ENERGY SPEED power and then stop within the remaining available
runway with one engine flight idle, the other with pro-
The brake energy speed (BE SPD) is displayed in peller feathered and maximum anti-skid braking.
data field adjacent to L3. The computed value for VREF received from the
Represents the maximum speed maximum speed TOLD function is displayed in small font. When the
allowed to apply the brake for a rejected take-off. refusal speed cannot be determined by TOLD calcula-
The computed value for BE SPD received from the tions, the MC displays “---KT”.
TOLD function is displayed in small font. When the
brake energy speed cannot be determined by TOLD R3 - ROTATE SPEED
calculations, the MC displays “---KT”.
The rotate speed (V ROT) is displayed in data field
L4 - BEST ONE ENGINE CLIMB SPEED adjacent to R3.
Represents the adequate margins above stall speed
The best climb speed with one engine (VBEST 1ENG to guarantee comfortable flight characteristics. Pro-
CLB) is displayed in data field adjacent to L4. vides tolerance for gusts and for maneuvering which
Represents the best climb speed for aircraft with flaps may be required to follow a proper flight path.
up, OEI, and remaining engine at maximum continu- The computed value for V ROT received from the
ous power. The computed value for VBEST 1ENG TOLD function is displayed in small font. When the
CLB received from the TOLD function is displayed in rotate speed cannot be determined by TOLD calcula-
small font. When the best one engine climb speed tions, the MC displays “---KT”.
cannot be determined by TOLD calculations, the MC
displays “---KT”. R4 - TAKE-OFF SPEED
The take-off speed (lift-off speed) (V LO) is displayed
NOTE in data field adjacent to R4.
In icing conditions add 20 Kts to the Represents the speed necessary for the aircraft to
VBEST 1ENG CLB displayed. physically leave the ground. The computed value for
V LO received from the TOLD function is displayed in
L5 - FLAPS small font. When the take-off speed cannot be deter-
mined by TOLD calculations, the MC displays “---KT”.
Data adjacent to L5 displays the status of the FLAPS
position (1/2). Selection results in toggling the R5 - OBSTACLE CLEARANCE SPEED
selected FLAPS position. The obstacle clearance speed (V CO) is displayed in
L6 - BRANCH TO TOLD INIT PAGE data field adjacent to R5.
The V CO is the best speed to obtain the optimum
Selection of the soft-key L6 results in a branch to the climb rate for obstacle clearance. The computed value
TOLD INIT 1/3 page. for V CO received from the TOLD function is dis-
played in small font.

3G-9
FAM.1C-27J-1A

When the obstacle clearance speed cannot be deter- If TOLD type is NORM on TOLD INIT 1/3 page, the
mined by TOLD calculations, the MC displays “---KT”. data field is blank. The computed value for ASDR
received from the TOLD function is displayed in small
R6 - BRANCH TO LANDING DATA PAGE font. When the accelerate stop distance reference
Selection of the soft-key R6 results in a branch to the cannot be determined by TOLD calculations and
LANDING DATA 1/2 page. TOLD type is TAC, the MC displays “-----FT”.

L4
TAKEOFF DATA 2/2 PAGE Not operational.
The TAKEOFF DATA 2/2 page (Figure 3G-10) dis- L5 - FLAPS
plays the runway lengths for the take-off airfield/run-
way. Data adjacent to L5 displays the status of the FLAPS
position (1/2). Selection results in toggling the
selected FLAPS position.
Page Access
L6 - BRANCH TO TOLD INIT PAGE
Press NEXT PAGE or PREV PAGE hard-key from the
TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 page. Selection of the soft-key L6 results in a branch to the
TOLD INIT 1/3 page.
Display R1 - CLIMB GRADIENT
Data below the title field displays the selected option The climb gradient (CLB GRAD) is displayed in data
based on the TOLD INIT 1/3 page soft-key L4. field adjacent to R1.
Data between L5 and L6 in the center of the display Represents the climb gradient of the aircraft after
indicates the aircraft take-off weight, the take-off air- take-off at the given ambient conditions, flap setting,
field, and the take-off runway. Entry is not permitted weight, and climb speed, with critical engine inopera-
into these data fields. tive, and remaining engine at take-off power.
The computed value for CLB GRAD received from the
L1 - CRITICAL FIELD LENGTH TOLD function is displayed in small font.
The critical field length (CFL) is displayed in data adja- When the climb gradient cannot be determined by
cent to L1. The CFL is the total runway distance TOLD calculations, the MC displays “--.--%”.
required to accelerate on all engines to critical engine
failure speed, experience an engine failure, then con-
R2 - ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE GROUND RUN
tinue the take-off or stop within the same distance. The one engine inoperative ground run (OEI GND
If TOLD type is TAC on TOLD INIT 1/3 page, the data RUN) is displayed in data adjacent to R2. This is the
field is blank. The computed value for CFL received total distance required to accelerate to the take-off
from the TOLD function is displayed in small font. speed, lift-off, and climb to a 50 foot screen height
When the critical field length cannot be determined by with flaps 1 or 2.
TOLD calculations, the MC displays “-----FT”. If TOLD type is NORM on TOLD INIT 1/3 page, the
data field is blank.
L2 - ALL ENGINES OPERATING GROUND RUN The computed value for OEI GND RUN received from
The all engines operating ground run (AEO GND the TOLD function is displayed in small font. When the
RUN) is displayed in data adjacent to L2. This is the one engine inoperative ground run cannot be deter-
distance required to accelerate to take-off speed with mined by TOLD calculations and TOLD type is TAC,
both engines and leave the runway. The computed the MC displays “-----FT”.
value for AEO GND RUN received from the TOLD
function is displayed in small font. When the all
R3 - ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE DISTANCE
50FT
engines operating ground run cannot be determined
by TOLD calculations, the MC displays “-----FT”. The distance from take-off to 50 ft obstacle height with
one engine inoperative (50FT OEI DIST) is displayed
L3 - ACCELERATE STOP DISTANCE REQUIRED in data adjacent to R3. If TOLD type is TAC on TOLD
The accelerate stop distance required (ASDR) is dis- INIT 1/3 page, the data field is blank. The computed
played in data adjacent to L3. value for 50FT OEI DIST received from the TOLD
This is the runway length required to accelerate to function is displayed in small font.
refusal speed, lose one engine, and stop.

3G-10
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

When the distance from take-off to 50 ft obstacle Display

height with OEI cannot be determined by TOLD calcu-
lations and TOLD type is NORM, the MC displays “---- Data between L5 and L6 in the center of the display
-FT”. indicates the aircraft take-off weight, the take-off air-
field, and the take-off runway. Entry is not permitted
R4 - ENGINE POWER into these data fields.

The engine power (POWER) is displayed in data adja- L1 THROUGH L4

cent to R4. The computed value for POWER received
from the TOLD function is displayed in small font. Not operational.
When the engine power cannot be determined by L5 - BRAKE ENERGY SPEEDS
TOLD calculations, the MC displays “----HP”.
Data fields adjacent to L5 display the landing brake
R5 - MINIMUM ACCELERATION CHECK SPEED / energy speeds (BE SPD) for flap positions UP, 2,
TIME FULL, and TAC, respectively. This is the initial braking
The minimum acceleration check speed and time speeds not to be exceeded in order to preserve brake
(CHECK TIME) is displayed in data field adjacent to integrity and avoid risk of fire to the brake system.
R5. The minimum acceleration check time is the nor- When the brake energy speeds cannot be determined
mal time required to accelerate to a specified speed by TOLD calculations, the MC displays dashes.
with all engines operational. The acceleration check
L6 - BRANCH TO TOLD INIT PAGE
should be made at speeds approximately 10 knots
below the refusal speed. Selection of the soft-key L6 results in a branch to the
The minimum acceleration check speed is determined TOLD INIT 1/3 page.
by the taking the rotate speed, subtracting 10 knots
and then rounding down to the nearest 10 knots. R1 - FLAPS POSITION
The computed value for CHECK TIME received from
Data fields adjacent to R1 display the flaps position
the TOLD function is displayed in small font. When the
(FLAPS) UP, 2, FULL, and TAC. When the TOLD type
minimum acceleration check speed and time cannot
on TOLD INIT 1/3 page is set to NORM, operation of
be determined by TOLD calculations, the MC displays
R1 is similar to that of a switch. Selection toggles
“---KT/---SEC”.
selected flaps position to UP, 2, or FULL.
R6 - BRANCH TO LANDING DATA PAGE Setting the TOLD type to TAC on the TOLD INIT 1/3
page sets the selected flaps position to TAC and inhib-
Selection of the soft-key R6 results in a branch to the its operation of R1.
LANDING DATA 1/2 page. Resetting the TOLD type to NORM restores operation
of R1 and restores the selected flaps position to the
previous setting. The selected field is displayed in
large font, inverse video, and the others are displayed
LANDING DATA PAGES in small font, normal video.

NOTE
LANDING DATA 1/2 PAGE
If a data field is selected adjacent to R1,
The LANDING DATA 1/2 page (Figure 3G-11) dis- the corresponding data field adjacent to
plays the computed approach, threshold, touchdown, R2, R3, and R4 are also selected.
and brake energy speeds for the destination airfield/
runway. R2 - APPROACH FLAP SPEEDS
Data fields adjacent to R2 display the approach
Page Access speeds (APP SPEEDS) for flap positions UP, 2, FULL,
a. Select the TOLD hard-key (Figure 3-1) when air- and TAC, respectively. This is a function of the flap
borne and not in a climb. position and threshold speeds. The approach speed
for each flap position is the corresponding threshold
b. Select the LDG DATA prompt on the TOLD INIT or speed plus 10 knots.
LANDING DATA pages. When the approach speeds cannot be determined by
TOLD calculations, the MC displays dashes.
c. Press NEXT PAGE or PREV PAGE hard-key from
the LANDING DATA 2/2 page.

3G-11
FAM.1C-27J-1A

R3 - THRESHOLD FLAP SPEEDS Represents the climb gradient of the aircraft after
aborting the landing approach at the given ambient
Data fields adjacent to R3 display the threshold conditions, aircraft weight, flap setting of 2, and
speeds (THR SPEEDS) for flap positions UP, 2, FULL, threshold speed, with critical engine inoperative, and
and TAC, respectively. This is the 50 ft height speeds remaining engine at take-off power.
required to meet the landing distances on the landing When the one engine inoperative approach gradient
distances charts. cannot be determined by TOLD calculations, the MC
When the threshold speeds cannot be determined by displays “-.--%”.
TOLD calculations, the MC displays dashes.
L5 - BRAKE ENERGY SPEED
R4 - TOUCHDOWN FLAP SPEEDS
Data field adjacent to L5 displays the brake energy
Data fields adjacent to R4 display the touchdown speed (BE SPD) for flap positions UP, 2, FULL, or
speeds (TD SPEEDS) for flap positions UP, 2, FULL, TAC. This is the initial braking speed not to be
and TAC, respectively. This is the threshold speed exceeded in order to preserve brake integrity and
minus 4 knots indicated airspeed. avoid risk of fire to the brake system.
When the touchdown speeds cannot be determined When the brake energy speed cannot be determined
by TOLD calculations, the MC displays dashes. by TOLD calculations, the MC displays “---KT”.
R5 L6 - BRANCH TO TOLD INIT PAGE
Not operational. Selection of the soft-key L6 results in a branch to the
R6 - BRANCH TO TAKEOFF DATA PAGE TOLD INIT 1/3 page.

Selection of the soft-key R6 results in a branch to the R1 - FLAPS POSITION

TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 page. Data fields adjacent to R1 display the flaps position
(FLAPS) UP, 2, FULL, and TAC. When the TOLD type
on TOLD INIT 1/3 page is set to NORM, operation of
LANDING DATA 2/2 PAGE R1 is similar to that of a switch. Selection toggles
The LANDING DATA 2/2 page (Figure 3G-12) dis- selected flaps position to UP, 2, or FULL.
plays the computed landing distance, landing ground Setting the TOLD type to TAC on the TOLD INIT 1/3
roll, and one engine inoperative approach gradient for page sets the selected flaps position to TAC and inhib-
the destination airfield/runway. its operation of R1.
Resetting the TOLD type to NORM restores operation
of R1 and restores the selected flaps position to the
Page Access previous setting. The selected field is displayed in
Press NEXT PAGE or PREV PAGE hard-key from the large font, inverse video, and the others are displayed
LANDING DATA 1/2 page. in small font, normal video.

NOTE
Display
If a data field is selected adjacent to R1,
Data between L5 and L6 in the center of the display the corresponding data field adjacent to
indicates the aircraft take-off weight, the take-off air- R2, R3, and R4 are also selected.
field, and the take-off runway. Entry is not permitted
into these data fields.
R2 - 50FT LANDING DISTANCE
L1 THROUGH L3 Data fields adjacent to R2 display the 50 ft landing
Not operational. distance (50FT LDG) for flap positions UP, 2, FULL,
and TAC, respectively. This is the distance required to
L4 - ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE APPROACH land and come to a complete stop from a point of 50
CLIMB GRADIENT feet above the obstacle. When the 50 ft landing dis-
tance cannot be determined by TOLD calculations,
The one engine inoperative approach gradient (OEI the MC displays dashes.
APP GRAD) is displayed in data field adjacent to L4.

3G-12
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NOTE
For Antiskid off multiply by 1.4 the dis-
played 50 ft Landing Distance.

R3 - LANDING GROUND ROLL

Data fields adjacent to R3 display the landing ground
roll (GND ROLL) for flap positions UP, 2, FULL, and
TAC, respectively. This is the distance on the ground
from touchdown to a full stop.
When the landing ground roll cannot be determined
by TOLD calculations, the MC displays dashes.

NOTE
For Antiskid off multiply by 1.4 the dis-
played Ground Roll.

R4
Not operational.

R5 - SURFACE WINDS
The surface winds (SFC WINDS) are displayed in
data adjacent to R5. Represents the direction, steady
speed, and gust speed of reported winds based on
surface wind bearing, surface wind steady speed, and
surface wind gust speed parameters.
When an airfield is not available, entry and display of
surface wind bearing is reference to true north “T”.
Valid entries are of the form: surface wind bearing/sur-
face wind speed, surface wind bearing/surface wind
speed - wind gust, surface wind bearing “T” /surface
wind speed, or surface wind bearing “T” /surface wind
speed - wind gust.

R6 - BRANCH TO TAKEOFF DATA PAGE

Selection of the soft-key R6 results in a branch to the
TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 page.

3G-13
FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3G-14
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PERF INIT Branching

Figure 3G-1

3G-15
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Allows entry and display of various aircraft weights.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 BOW Entry and display of the basic operating weight.

L2 +PAYLOAD Displays the payload weight.
L3 =WT W/O FUEL Displays the calculated aircraft weight without fuel.
L4 +FOB Displays the fuel on board.
L5 =GROSS WT Displays the calculated gross weight.
L6 ROUTE Branches to the ROUTE plan page.
R1 TRIP Displays the calculated trip fuel.
R2 FIXED Displays the fixed fuel reserve.
R3 % VAR Displays the variable fuel reserve calculated using the selected per-
centage of TRIP fuel.
R4 +EXTRA Displays the extra fuel endurance time and extra fuel as well as the
LOW CALCULATED FUEL advisory limit.
R5 =FOB Displays the fuel on board and the total endurance time.
R6 NOT USED

Figure 3G-2 PERF INIT WEIGHT 1/4 page

3G-16
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PERF INIT WEIGHT 1/4 PAGE DATA FOB weight entry is limited to a maximum of 20600
pounds. If the actual total fuel (indicated on the FUEL
ENTRY panel) exceeds this value, while the FOB readout is
less than 20600 pounds, the crew will be unable to
enter the correct FOB value. For example, if the air-
PREREQUISITES craft is refueled and power is not removed from the
1. Aircraft and fuel weight values are available. CNI-MS, the actual FOB may exceed 20600 pounds
when the PERF INIT WEIGHT page FOB readout is
2. Displayed values - Reviewed. less than 20600 pounds. To correct the readout:
a. Momentarily activate the secondary route
NOTE (RTE 1 if RTE 2 is active, or vice versa).
Default values may be changed manual- This will cause the FOB for the primary route to go
ly, if required, where shown. (See CNI- to a SENSED value.
MS DATA ENTRY CONVENTIONS in
b. Enter any valid FOB quantity (0.0 to 20.6).
Section 3).
c. Delete the manual entry.
The FOB readout will correspond to the actual total
DATA ENTRY fuel displayed on the FUEL panel.
1. Enter basic operating weight (in thousands of
pounds) in the scratch pad - Entered. NOTE

a. Press L1 - Pressed. If a CNI-MU (ICDU) alert message FUEL

QTY ERROR is annunciated in flight, the
b. BOW line data updated.
CNI-MS will not access the mission com-
puter for FUEL panel total fuel quantity.
NOTE To match the FOB readout and the FUEL
BOW entry is limited to a maximum of panel total fuel quantity, a fuel adjustment
60000 pounds. If the aircraft BOW ex- must be entered into a down path way-
ceeds this value, additional payload point (WAYPOINT DATA 2/2 page).
weight can be entered into the PERF INIT
WEIGHT 1/4 page at L2. 5. To change the default trip fuel, enter weight of
trip fuel (in thousands of pounds) in the scratch
2. Enter payload weight (in thousands of pounds) pad - Entered.
in the scratch pad - Entered. a. Press R1 - Pressed.
a. Press L2 - Pressed. b. TRIP line data updated.
b. PAYLOAD line data updated. 6. To change the default fixed fuel reserve, enter
3. To override the default calculated or sensed weight of fixed fuel reserve (in thousands of
value for fuel on board, enter weight of fuel on pounds) in the scratch pad - Entered.
board (in thousands of pounds) in the scratch a. Press R2 - Pressed.
pad - Entered.
b. FIXED line data updated.
a. Press L4 - Pressed.
7. To change the default variable fuel reserve, se-
b. FOB line data updated. lect between available percentages used in
fuel calculation (0, 5, 10 or 15), press R3 until
NOTE desired percent is highlighted.

The source of the FOB is displayed as 8. Press R4 to change the default extra fuel alert
CALC (calculated by the CNI-MS), amount. Soft-key toggles between 2.6 and 4.0
SENSED (from fuel quantity sensor), or (thousands of pounds). A user-defined value
MANUAL (manually entered). may be entered.

4. Press L6 to branch to ROUTE plan page (as

required) - Pressed.

3G-17
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Entry and display of climb speeds, altitudes, and other climb parameters.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 CLB SPD1 Entry and display of climb speed to altitude 1.

L2 CLB SPD2 Entry and display of climb speed to altitude 2.
L3 CLB SPD3 Entry and display of climb speed to cruising altitude.
L4 V2 ENG CLB Displays the predicted 2-engine climb speed.
L5 BLEED NOT OPERATIONAL
L6 ROUTE Branches to the ROUTE plan page.
R1 CLB FF Entry and display of the climb fuel flow.
R2 TRANS ALT Entry and display of the transition altitude.
R3 NOT USED
R4 V1 ENG CLB Displays the predicted 1-engine climb speed.
R5 NOT USED
R6 TOLD INIT Branches to the TOLD INIT page (NOT OPERATIONAL).

NOTE

The climb profile altitudes entered on this page are not cross-checked with other altitudes
entered to verify sequential climb altitudes for the route. If climb 2 altitude is below climb 1 alti-
tude and climb 3 altitude is above climb 2 altitude, climb 2 altitude will be ignored.

Figure 3G-3 PERF INIT CLIMB 2/4 page

3G-18
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PERF INIT CLIMB 2/4 PAGE DATA 2. Data field adjacent to L4 displays predicted
two-engine climb CAS.
ENTRY
NOTE
PREREQUISITES Predicted two-engine climb CAS is calcu-
lated by the CNI-MS and is not modifi-
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.
able. Downselect of CAS to scratch pad is
available.
NOTE
Default values may be changed manual- 3. Press L6 to branch to ROUTE plan page (as
ly, if required, where shown. (See CNI- required) - Pressed.
MS DATA ENTRY CONVENTIONS in 4. To change the default climb fuel flow, enter
Section 3). climb fuel flow value in the scratch pad - En-
tered.
DATA ENTRY a. Press R1 - Pressed.
b. CLB FF line data updated.
1. To change the default values:
5. To change the default transition altitude, enter
NOTE transition altitude value in the scratch pad - En-
tered.
• Data may be entered as speed only,
altitude only, or speed/altitude. a. Press R2 - Pressed.
b. TRANS ALT line data updated.
• A climb profile altitude entered here is
not cross-checked with the other alti- 6. Data field adjacent to R4 displays predicted
tudes entered to verify that the climb one-engine climb CAS.
altitudes are sequential for the route.
For example, if climb altitude 2 is be- NOTE
low climb altitude 1, and the cruise al-
titude is above climb altitude 2, then Predicted one-engine climb CAS is calcu-
climb altitude 2 will be ignored. lated by the CNI-MS and is not modifi-
able. Downselect of CAS to scratch pad is
a. Enter climb CAS and first intermediate alti- available.
tude in the scratch pad and press L1, the
CLB SPD1 line data updated.
b. Enter climb CAS and second intermediate
altitude in the scratch pad and press L2,
the CLB SPD2 line data updated.
c. Enter climb CAS to cruise altitude in the
scratch pad and press L3, the CLB SPD3
line data updated.

3G-19
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Allows entry and display of cruise parameters for the indicated route.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 CRZ ALT Entry and display of the cruise altitude.

L2 CRZ WIND Entry and display of the cruise wind.
L3 CRZ SPEED Entry and display of the calibrated cruise airspeed, true airspeed, and
ground speed.
L4 SEN FF Display of the sensed fuel flow.
CRZ FF Entry and display of the cruise fuel flow.
L5 DRAG INDEX NOT OPERATIONAL
L6 ROUTE Branches to the ROUTE plan page.
R1 ETE Displays the estimated enroute time to the last primary waypoint on the
flight plan.
R2 TRIP FUEL Displays the fuel trip.
R3 T DEV Entry and display of the temperature deviation.
R4 TOC OAT Displays the top of climb outside air temperature.
R5 OPTIMAL CRZ Branches to the optimal cruise page (NOT IMPLEMENTED).
R6 TOLD INIT Branches to the TOLD INIT page (NOT OPERATIONAL).

Figure 3G-4 PERF INIT CRUISE 3/4 page

3G-20
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PERF INIT CRUISE 3/4 PAGE DATA 4. Enter cruise fuel flow value in the scratch pad
- Entered.
ENTRY
a. Press L4 - Pressed.
b. CRZ FF line data updated.
PREREQUISITES
5. Press L6 to branch to ROUTE plan page (as
1. Displayed values - Reviewed. required) - Pressed.
6. Data field adjacent to R1 displays ETE.
NOTE
7. Data field adjacent to R2 displays trip fuel.
Default values may be changed manual-
ly, if required, where shown. (See CNI-
MS DATA ENTRY CONVENTIONS in
NOTE
Section 3). Estimated Time Enroute and trip fuel are
calculated by the CNI-MS and are not
modifiable.
DATA ENTRY
1. Enter cruise altitude value in the scratch pad - 8. Enter temperature deviation value in the
Entered. scratch pad - Entered.

a. Press L1 - Pressed. a. Press R3 - Pressed.

b. CRZ ALT line data updated. b. T DEV line data updated.

NOTE NOTE

Cruise altitude is entered as Flight Level Changing the value of either T DEV or
or feet. TOC OAT results in an automatic change
in the other value.
2. Enter cruise wind direction/velocity values in
the scratch pad - Entered. 9. Enter top of climb temperature value in the
scratch pad (in degrees celsius) - Entered.
a. Press L2 - Pressed.
a. Press R4 - Pressed.
b. CRZ WIND line data updated.
b. TOC OAT line data updated.
3. To change the default value, enter cruise cali-
brated airspeed, true airspeed, or ground-
speed value in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L3 - Pressed.
b. CRZ SPEED line data updated.

NOTE
• When one speed value is entered, the
other two are computed by the CNI-
MS.

• When the active waypoint is the TP,

SD, FAF, or GSI waypoint of a Land-
ing Zone Approach or the CARP way-
point of a CARP, modification of
cruise altitude is not allowed and will
result in the NOT ALLOWED mes-
sage being displayed.

3G-21
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Entry and display of descent speeds and altitudes, and other descent parameters.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 DES SPD1 Displays the descent speed between intermediate altitude 1 and 2.
L2 DES SPD2 Displays the descent speed between intermediate altitude 2 and 3.
L3 DES SPD3 Displays the descent speed between intermediate altitude 3 and 4.
L4 DES SPD4 Displays the descent speed between intermediate altitude 4 and EOD.
L5 EOD SPD Displays the end of descent speed and altitude.
L6 ROUTE Branches to the ROUTE plan page.
R1 NOT USED
R2 TRANS LVL Entry and display of the transition level.
R3 DES ANGLE Displays the descent angle.
R4-R5 NOT USED
R6 TOLD INIT Branches to the TOLD INIT page (NOT OPERATIONAL).

NOTE

The descent profile altitudes entered on this page are not cross-checked with other altitudes
entered to verify sequential descent altitudes for the route. If descent 2 altitude is above descent
1 altitude, and descent 3 altitude is less than descent 2 altitude, descent 2 altitude will be
ignored.

Figure 3G-5 PERF INIT DESCENT 4/4 page

3G-22
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PERF INIT DESCENT 4/4 PAGE 2. Enter speed below descent altitude in the
scratch pad - Entered.
DATA ENTRY
a. Press L5 - Pressed.
b. EOD SPD line data updated.
PREREQUISITES
3. Press L6 to branch to ROUTE plan page (as
1. Displayed values - Reviewed. required) - Pressed.
4. Enter transition level value in the scratch pad -
NOTE Entered.
Default values may be changed manual- a. Press R2 - Pressed.
ly, if required, where shown. (See CNI-
b. TRANS LVL line data updated.
MS DATA ENTRY CONVENTIONS in
Section 3). 5. To change the default descent angle, enter de-
scent angle value in the scratch pad - Entered.

DATA ENTRY a. Press R3 - Pressed.

b. DES ANGLE line data updated.
1. To change the default values:
a. Enter first descent speed/first intermediate NOTE
descent altitude in the scratch pad and
press L1, the DES SPD1 line data updat- Allowable descent angle values are in the
ed. range from 0.1 to 15.0 degrees.
b. Enter second descent speed/second inter-
mediate descent altitude in the scratch pad
and press L2, the DES SPD2 line data up-
dated.
c. Enter third descent speed/third intermedi-
ate descent altitude in the scratch pad and
press L3, the DES SPD3 line data updat-
ed.
d. Enter fourth descent speed/fourth interme-
diate descent altitude in the scratch pad
and press L4, the CLB SPD4 line data up-
dated.

3G-23
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Defines the aircraft and airfield parameters used for take-off and landing computations.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 FIELD Displays the selected airfield identifier.

L2 RWY Displays the runway number.
L3 GROSS WT Displays the current aircraft weight in kilopounds (KLB).
L4 TOLD TYPE The operating standard for TOLD computations.
Selects and displays told type (NORM for normal take-off and TAC for
tactical take-off).
L5 REV ENG Selects the number of engines in reverse (0REV or 2REV).
L6 NOT USED
R1 OAT Displays the outside air temperature.
R2 SFC WINDS Displays the direction, steady speed, and gust speed of reported winds
based on surface wind bearing, surface wind steady speed, and sur-
face wind gust speed parameters.

NOTE: Gust wind can not be lower than steady wind. If no gust is
reported, steady wind value must be entered in place of gust.
R3 BARO Displays the barometric pressure in millibar (MB) and inches of mer-
cury (IN), used to adjust a pressure altimeter for variations in existing
atmospheric pressure or to the standard altimeter setting.
R4 ELEV/PA Displays the elevation and pressure altitude of the selected airfield.
Either Elevation or Pressure Altitude is input directly by operator. If Ele-
vation is entered by the operator, the Pressure Altitude is computed
using BARO (soft-key R3) setting.
Pressure Altitude at airfield. Direct input by the operator, or derived
from Elevation and BARO setting.
R5 T/O DATA Branches to the TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 page.
R6 LDG DATA Branches to the LANDING DATA 1/2 page.

Figure 3G-6 TOLD INIT 1/3 page

3G-24
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

TOLD INIT 1/3 PAGE DATA ENTRY 3. Press L5 to select the number of engines in re-
verse (REV ENG) for engine out computational
purposes - Selected.
PREREQUISITES a. Selected number of engines in reverse
1. Displayed values - Reviewed. (0REV or 2REV) is highlighted.
4. To change the default values:
NOTE
a. Enter outside air temperature value in the
Default values may be changed manual- scratch pad and press R1, the OAT line
ly, if required, where shown. (See CNI- data updated.
MS DATA ENTRY CONVENTIONS in
Section 3). NOTE
The temperature is entered as °C or °F.
The entered temperature (°C or °F) is
DATA ENTRY converted by the CNI-MS to the other
1. To change the default values: scale and both temperatures are dis-
played.
a. Enter airfield identifier in the scratch pad
and press L1, the FIELD line data updated. b. Enter surface wind direction/velocity and
gust values in the scratch pad and press
NOTE R2, the SFC WINDS line data updated.
• Changing the airfield identifier re-
quires any entered data to be reen- NOTE
tered. Default/calculated data will
• If an airfield identifier is to be entered,
automatically be changed.
wind direction is entered in magnetic.
• Drag Index value is reset to 0 both on If no airfield is entered, winds are to
TOLD INIT 3/3 and PERF INIT be entered in true.
CRUISE 3/4 pages.
• Gust wind can not be lower than
b. Enter runway number in the scratch pad steady wind. If no gust is reported,
and press L2, the RWY line data updated. steady wind value must be entered in
c. Enter aircraft weight (in thousands of place of gust.
pounds) in the scratch pad and press L3, • With high value of gust "out of bound"
the GROSS WT line data updated. conditions could be encountered. In
this case reducing on TOLD INIT 2/3
WARNING page the CLB SPD RATIO value
(1.22 to 1.18 as function of TOW) the
calculations can be regained. Please
The automatic gross weight update on note that reducing input climb speed
TOLD page is unreliable. ratio does not affect climb perfor-
The crew must always manually insert mances, because the absolute gust
the gross weight data on TOLD page. value is automatically added to the
TOLD data are to be used as reference obstacle clearance speed, thus main-
only. taining the calculated climb speed ra-
tio always near to the optimum.
2. Press L4 to select TOLD TYPE to normal c. Enter barometric altimeter setting, in milli-
(NORM) or tactical (TAC) - Selected. bars (MB) or inches of mercury (IN) in the
a. Selected TOLD TYPE (NORM or TAC) is scratch pad and press R3, the BARO line
highlighted. data updated.

3G-25
FAM.1C-27J-1A

NOTE
The entered altimeter setting is converted
by the CNI-MS to the other scale setting
and settings for both scales are dis-
played.

d. Enter field elevation and/or pressure alti-

tude in the scratch pad and press R4, the
ELEV/PA line data updated.

NOTE
Data may be entered as elevation/alti-
tude, elevation only or altitude only.

5. Press R5 to branch to TAKEOFF DATA 1/2

page (as required) - Pressed.
6. Press R6 to branch to LANDING DATA 1/2
page (as required) - Pressed.

3G-26
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3G-27
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Defines the aircraft and airfield parameters used for take-off and landing computations.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 RWY HDG Displays the heading of the runway.

L2 RWY LGTH Displays the entered length of the runway available.
L3 ICING Selects and displays the icing protection system configuration (ON or
OFF).
L4 CLB SPD RATIO Displays the minimum climb speed ratio for takeoff, VCO/VS.
L5 MIN CLB GRAD Displays the minimum required second segment climb gradient, based
on one engine inoperative.
L6 NOT USED
R1 RCR/RSC Displays the Runway Condition Reading (RCR) and the Runway Sur-
face Covering (RSC) of the selected airfield.
R2 SLOPE Displays the slope of the runway, where positive is up-hill and negative
is down-hill.
R3-R4 NOT USED
R5 T/O DATA Branches to the TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 page.
R6 LDG DATA Branches to the LANDING DATA 1/2 page.

Figure 3G-7 TOLD INIT 2/3 page

3G-28
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

TOLD INIT 2/3 PAGE DATA ENTRY NOTE

Aircraft take-off weight (WT:) is displayed
adjacent to L6, and may not be modified.
PREREQUISITES
4. To change the default values:
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.
a. Enter Runway Condition Reading and/or
NOTE Runway Surface Covering in the scratch
pad and press R1, the RCR/RSC line data
Default values may be changed manual- updated.
ly, if required, where shown. (See CNI-
MS DATA ENTRY CONVENTIONS in NOTE
Section 3).
• Entry of a valid RCR clears a previ-
ously entered RSC. Entry of a valid
DATA ENTRY RSC clears a previously entered
RCR.
1. To change the default values:
• Tactical take-off Accelerate Stop Dis-
a. Enter runway heading in the scratch pad
tance is corrected for RCR and not for
and press L1, the RWY HDG line data up-
µB (braking friction coefficient).
dated.
The table below gives an indication of
b. Enter runway length (in feet) in the scratch the correspondence between RCR
pad and press L2, the RWY LGHT line and µB:
data updated.
2. Press L3 to select the icing protection system RCR µB
configuration (ICING) - Selected. Surfaces Tactical Tactical
Take-off Landing
a. Selected ICING (ON or OFF) is highlight-
ed. hard, concrete, dry runway 23 0.5
3. To change the default values: sand 15 0.42
a. Enter climb speed ratio in the scratch pad dirt 14 0.39
and press L4, the CLB SPD RATIO line
data updated. dry grass 10 0.25

wet grass 8 0.2

NOTE
With high value of gust "out of bound" b. Enter runway slope in the scratch pad and
conditions could be encountered. In this press R2, the SLOPE line data updated.
case reducing the CLB SPD RATIO value
(1.22 to 1.18 as function of TOW) the cal- NOTE
culations can be regained. Please note
Runway slope is entered in a range from
that reducing input climb speed ratio does
-3.0 to 3.0 percent.
not affect climb performances, because
the absolute gust value is automatically 5. Press R5 to branch to TAKEOFF DATA 1/2
added to the obstacle clearance speed, page (as required) - Pressed.
thus maintaining the calculated climb
speed ratio always near to the optimum.
NOTE
b. Enter minimum climb gradient in the Take-off airfield identifier and runway
scratch pad and press L5, the MIN CLB number are displayed adjacent to R6, and
GRAD line data updated. may not be modified.
6. Press R6 to branch to LANDING DATA 1/2
page (as required) - Pressed.

3G-29
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Defines the aircraft and airfield parameters used for take-off and landing computations.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 DRAG INDEX Displays the additional drag associated with non-standard configura-
tion of aircraft.
L2-L6 NOT USED
R1 BRAKE COEF Displays the brake coefficient for maximum effort or tactical landing.
R2 REF SPD RATIO Displays the refusal speed ratio, V1/VLO, for maximum effort or tactical
takeoff.
R3 LO SPD RATIO Displays the minimum takeoff speed ratio, VLO/VS, for maximum effort
or tactical takeoff.
R4 NOT USED
R5 T/O DATA Branches to the TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 page.
R6 LDG DATA Branches to the LANDING DATA 1/2 page.

Figure 3G-8 TOLD INIT 3/3 page

3G-30
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

TOLD INIT 3/3 PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.

NOTE
Default values may be changed manual-
ly, if required, where shown. (See CNI-
MS DATA ENTRY CONVENTIONS in
Section 3).

DATA ENTRY
1. To change the default drag index, enter drag
index value (if available) in the scratch pad -
Entered.
a. Press L1 - Pressed.
b. DRAG INDEX line data updated.

NOTE
Aircraft take-off weight (WT:) is displayed
adjacent to L6, and may not be modified.

2. To change the default values:

a. Enter brake coefficient in the scratch pad
and press R1, the BRAKE COEF line data
updated.
b. Enter refusal speed ratio in the scratch pad
and press R2, the REF SPD RATIO line
data updated.
c. Enter lift-off speed ratio in the scratch pad
and press R3, the LO SPD RATIO line data
updated.
3. Press R5 to branch to TAKEOFF DATA 1/2
page (as required) - Pressed.

NOTE
Take-off airfield identifier and runway
number are displayed adjacent to R6, and
may not be modified.

4. Press R6 to branch to LANDING DATA 1/2

page (as required) - Pressed.

3G-31
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays the computed take-off speeds for the origin airfield/runway.

Soft-key Display Description

NORM/TAC Displays the normal or tactical take-off setting based on the TOLD INIT
1/3 page, soft-key L4 selection.
L1 VMCG Displays the minimum control speed on the ground.
L2 VMCA Displays the minimum control speed in the air.
L3 BE SPD Displays the brake energy speed.
L4 VBEST 1ENG CLB Displays the best climb speed for aircraft with flaps up, critical engine
inoperative, and remaining engine at maximum continuous power.
Equivalent to 1.25 VS.
L5 FLAPS Selects and displays the flaps setting (1 or 2).
L6 TOLD INIT Branches to the TOLD INIT 1/3 page.
R1 VCEF Displays the critical engine failure speed.
R2 VREF Displays the refusal speed based on available runway.
R3 V ROT Displays the rotate speed.
R4 V LO Displays the lift-off speed.
R5 V CO Displays the obstacle clearance speed.
R6 LDG DATA Branches to the LANDING DATA 1/2 page.

Figure 3G-9 TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 page

3G-32
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.

DATA ENTRY

NOTE
• Value for VMCG, VMCA, brake ener-
gy speed, and best climb speed with
one engine are displayed and are not
modifiable.

• In icing conditions add 20 Kts to the

VBEST 1ENG CLB displayed.

1. Press L5 to select the flaps setting (FLAPS) -

Selected.
a. Selected flaps position (1 or 2) is highlight-
ed.

NOTE
Aircraft take-off weight (WT:) is displayed
adjacent to L6, and may not be modified.

2. Press L6 to branch to TOLD INIT 1/3 page (as

required) - Pressed.

NOTE
• Value for critical engine failure speed,
refusal speed, rotate speed, lift-off
speed, and obstacle clearance speed
are displayed and are not modifiable.

• Take-off airfield identifier and runway

number are displayed adjacent to R6,
and may not be modified.

• Upon modification of selected airfield

identifier on TOLD INIT 1/3 page,
Drag Index value is reset to 0 both on
TOLD INIT 3/3 and PERF INIT
CRUISE 3/4 pages.

3. Press R6 to branch to LANDING DATA 1/2

page (as required) - Pressed.

3G-33
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays runway lengths for the origin airfield/runway.

Soft-key Display Description

NORM/TAC Displays the normal or tactical take-off setting based on the TOLD INIT
1/3 page, soft-key L4 selection.
L1 CFL Displays the critical field length.
L2 AEO GND RUN Displays the all engines operating ground run.
L3 ASDR Displays the accelerate stop distance required.
L4 NOT USED
L5 FLAPS Selects and displays the flaps setting (1 or 2).
L6 TOLD INIT Branches to the TOLD INIT 1/3 page.
R1 CLB GRAD Displays the climb gradient.
R2 OEI GND RUN Displays the one engine inoperative ground run.
R3 50FT OEI DIST Displays the take-off distance from brake release to 50 ft obstacle
height with one engine inoperative.
R4 POWER Displays the take-off engine power in HP (horsepower).
R5 CHECK TIME Displays the minimum acceleration check speed and time.
R6 LDG DATA Branches to the LANDING DATA 1/2 page.

Figure 3G-10 TAKEOFF DATA 2/2 page

3G-34
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

TAKEOFF DATA 2/2 PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.

DATA ENTRY

NOTE
Value for critical field length, AEO ground
run, and accelerate stop distance re-
quired are displayed and are not modifi-
able.

1. Press L5 to select the flaps setting (FLAPS) -

Selected.
a. Selected flaps position (1 or 2) is highlight-
ed.

NOTE
Aircraft take-off weight (WT:) is displayed
adjacent to L6, and may not be modified.

2. Press L6 to branch to TOLD INIT 1/3 page (as

required) - Pressed.

NOTE
• Value for climb gradient, OEI ground
run, air distance from lift-off to 50 ft
height with OEI, take-off engine pow-
er, and minimum acceleration check
speed and time are displayed and are
not modifiable.

• Take-off airfield identifier and runway

number are displayed adjacent to R6,
and may not be modified.

3. Press R6 to branch to LANDING DATA 1/2

page (as required) - Pressed.

3G-35
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays the computed approach, threshold, touchdown, and brake energy speeds for the desti-
nation airfield/runway.

Soft-key Display Description

L1-L4 NOT USED

L5 BE SPD Displays the brake energy speeds in relation to the flap position.
L6 TOLD INIT Branches to the TOLD INIT 1/3 page.
R1 FLAPS Displays the desired flap setting.
Selects/deselects the values of UP, 2, FULL and TAC.
R2 APP SPEEDS Displays the approach speeds in relation to the flap position.
R3 THR SPEEDS Displays the threshold speeds in relation to the flap position.
R4 TD SPEEDS Displays the touchdown speeds in relation to the flap position.
R5 NOT USED
R6 T/O DATA Branches to the TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 page.

Figure 3G-11 LANDING DATA 1/2 page

3G-36
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

LANDING DATA 1/2 PAGE DATA 5. Approach speeds in relation to the selected
flap position is displayed adjacent to R2 for UP,
ENTRY 2, FULL flap position, and TAC effort landing.
6. Threshold speed in relation to the selected flap
PREREQUISITES position is displayed adjacent to R3 for UP, 2,
FULL flap position, and TAC effort landing.
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.
7. Touchdown speed in relation to the selected
flap position is displayed adjacent to R4 for UP,
DATA ENTRY 2, FULL flap position, and TAC effort landing.

1. Data fields adjacent L1 through L4 are blank.

NOTE
Soft-keys are not operational.
The landing airfield identifier and runway
2. Brake energy speed in relation to the selected
number are displayed adjacent to R6, and
flap position is displayed adjacent to L5 for UP,
may not be modified.
2, FULL flap position, and TAC effort landing.

8. Press R6 to branch to TAKEOFF DATA 1/2

NOTE page (as required) - Pressed.
Aircraft landing weight (WT:) is displayed
adjacent to L6, and may not be modified.

3. Press L6 to branch to TOLD INIT 1/3 page (as

required) - Pressed.
4. Press R1 to toggle required flap position.
(FLAPS) between UP, 2, and FULL - Selected.
a. Selected flaps position is highlighted.

NOTE
• The flap position may be selected us-
ing R1 when the TOLD type on TOLD
INIT 1/3 page is NORM (normal).

• To select maximum effort landing da-

ta, select TAC using R1 when the
TOLD type on TOLD INIT 1/3 page is
TAC (tactical).

3G-37
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays the computed landing distance, landing ground roll, and one engine inoperative
approach gradient for the destination airfield/runway.

Soft-key Display Description

L1-L3 NOT USED

L4 OEI APP GRAD Displays the one engine inoperative approach climb gradient.
L5 BE SPD Displays the brake energy speed in relation to the flap position.
L6 TOLD INIT Branches to the TOLD INIT1/3 page.
R1 FLAPS Displays the desired flap setting.
Selects/deselects the values of UP, 2, FULL and TAC.
R2 50FT LDG (FT) Displays the landing distance over 50 ft obstacle in relation to the flap
position.
R3 GND ROLL (FT) Displays the landing ground roll in relation to the flap position.
R4 NOT USED
R5 SFC WINDS Displays the direction, steady speed, and gust speed of reported winds
based on surface wind bearing, surface wind steady speed, and sur-
face wind gust speed parameters.

NOTE: Gust wind can not be lower than steady wind. If no gust is
reported, steady wind value must be entered in place of gust.
R6 T/O DATA Branches to the TAKEOFF DATA 1/2 page.

Figure 3G-12 LANDING DATA 2/2 page

3G-38
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

LANDING DATA 2/2 PAGE DATA 4. Landing distance (50FT LDG) in relation to the
selected flap position is displayed adjacent to
ENTRY R2 for UP, 2, FULL flap position, and TAC ef-
fort landing.

PREREQUISITES
NOTE
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.
For Antiskid off multiply by 1.4 the dis-
played 50 ft Landing Distance.
NOTE
Default values may be changed manual- 5. Ground roll (GND ROLL) in relation to the se-
ly, if required, where shown. (See CNI- lected flap position is displayed adjacent to R3
MS DATA ENTRY CONVENTIONS in for UP, 2, FULL flap position, and TAC effort
Section 3). landing.

NOTE
DATA ENTRY
For Antiskid off multiply by 1.4 the dis-
1. Data fields adjacent L1 through L3 are blank. played Ground Roll.
Soft-keys are not operational.
6. To change the default value, enter surface
NOTE wind direction/velocity and gust values in the
scratch pad and press R5, the SFC WINDS
• Value for OEI approach gradient, and line data updated.
brake energy speed are displayed
and are not modifiable.
NOTE
• Aircraft landing weight (WT:) is dis-
• If an airfield identifier is to be entered,
played adjacent to L6, and may not
wind direction is entered in magnetic.
be modified.
If no airfield is entered, winds are to
2. Press L6 to branch to TOLD INIT 1/3 page (as be entered in true.
required) - Pressed.
• Gust wind can not be lower than
3. Press R1 to toggle required flap position. steady wind. If no gust is reported,
(FLAPS) between UP, 2, and FULL - Selected. steady wind value must be entered in
place of gust.
a. Selected flaps position is highlighted.
7. Press R6 to branch to TAKEOFF DATA 1/2
NOTE page (as required) - Pressed.

• The flap position may be selected us- NOTE

ing R1 when the TOLD type on TOLD
INIT 1/3 page is NORM (normal). The landing airfield identifier and runway
number are displayed adjacent to R6, and
• To select maximum effort landing da- may not be modified.
ta, select TAC using R1 when the
TOLD type on TOLD INIT 1/3 page is
TAC (tactical).

3G-39 / ( 3G-40 blank )

 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PART 3H. INDEX

Contents page Contents page

INDEX CONTROL PAGES ............................... 3H-1 POWER UP PAGE DATA ENTRY .................. 3H-23
INDEX 1/2 ..................................................... 3H-2 ZEROIZE 1/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY ................ 3H-25
INDEX 2/2 ..................................................... 3H-2
ZEROIZE 2/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY ................ 3H-27
POWER UP .................................................. 3H-3
ZEROIZE ...................................................... 3H-4 DATA TRANSFER 1/3 PAGE DATA ENTRY . 3H-29
DATA TRANSFER 1/3 .................................. 3H-6 DATA TRANSFER 2/3 PAGE DATA ENTRY . 3H-31
DATA TRANSFER 2/3 .................................. 3H-6
DATA TRANSFER 3/3 PAGE DATA ENTRY . 3H-33
DATA TRANSFER 3/3 .................................. 3H-7
NAVAID INHIBIT ........................................... 3H-8 NAVAID INHIBIT PAGE DATA ENTRY .......... 3H-35
FIX INFO ....................................................... 3H-8 FIX INFO PAGE DATA ENTRY ...................... 3H-37
FROM/TO ................................................... 3H-10 FROM/TO PAGE DATA ENTRY ..................... 3H-39
CURSOR TARGET ..................................... 3H-11
CURSOR TARGET PAGE DATA ENTRY ...... 3H-41
NAV DATA .................................................. 3H-11
CUSTOM DATA LIST ................................. 3H-13 NAV DATA PAGE DATA ENTRY ................... 3H-43
CUSTOM DATA .......................................... 3H-13 CUSTOM DATA LIST PAGE DATA ENTRY ... 3H-45
SYSTEM CONTROL .................................. 3H-14
CUSTOM DATA PAGE DATA ENTRY ........... 3H-47
TIMERS ...................................................... 3H-15
CNI CONFIGURATION ............................... 3H-16 SYSTEM CONTROL PAGE DATA ENTRY .... 3H-49

INDEX 1/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY .................... 3H-19 TIMERS PAGE DATA ENTRY ........................ 3H-51

INDEX 2/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY .................... 3H-21 CNI CONFIG PAGE DATA ENTRY ................ 3H-53

INDEX CONTROL PAGES • RTE 1

• RTE 2
The INDEX pages (Figure 3H-1) provide access to
various functions associated with flight planning nor- • STORED ROUTE LIST
mally accomplished prior to flight. • DEP/ARR INDEX
The INDEX 1/2 page accesses the following pages:
• DATA TRANSFER
• POWER UP
• PROGRESS
• PERF INIT WEIGHT
The INDEX 2/2 page accesses the following pages:
• PERF INIT CLIMB
• NAVAID INHIBIT
• PERF INIT CRUISE
• FIX INFO
• PERF INIT DESCENT
• FROM/TO
• ZEROIZE

3H-1
FAM.1C-27J-1A

• MARK LIST L5 - BRANCH TO PERF INIT DESCENT PAGE

• CURSOR TARGET Same as L2, except the branch is to the PERF INIT
DESCENT page.
• INS1 ALIGN
• NAV DATA L6 - BRANCH TO ZEROIZE PAGE

• CUSTOM DATA LIST Selection of soft-key L6 branches to the ZEROIZE

page.
• SYSTEM CONTROL
R1 - BRANCH TO ROUTE 1 PAGE
• TIMERS
Selection of soft-key R1 branches to the RTE 1 page
• CNI CONFIG 1/2 (route plan page). (Refer to Part 3K).
• INS2 ALIGN
R2 - BRANCH TO ROUTE 2 PAGE
Selection of soft-key R2 branches to the ROUTE 2
INDEX 1/2 page 1/2 (route plan page). (Refer to Part 3K).
The INDEX 1/2 page (Figure 3H-2) provides a menu R3 - BRANCH TO STORED ROUTE LIST PAGE
to access functions within the flight management com-
puter. Selection of soft-key R3 branches to the STORED
ROUTE LIST page. (Refer to Part 3K).

Page Access R4 - BRANCH TO DEP/ARR INDEX PAGE

a. Press the INDX hard-key (Figure 3-1). If data adjacent to R4 is displayed in large font, press-
ing soft-key R4 branches to the DEP/ARR INDEX
b. From the INDEX 2/2 page, press the PREV PAGE
page of the active (indicated) route. Entry of a 1 or 2 in
or NEXT PAGE hard-key.
the scratch pad results in a branch to the DEP/ARR
c. From the STORED ROUTE LIST page, press the INDEX page of the selected route (1 or 2). If MC
soft-key L6 INDEX. DEGRADED LNAV MODE is True, data adjacent to
R4 is displayed in small font, and selection is not pos-
sible. (Refer to Part 3K).
Display
R5 - BRANCH TO DATA TRANSFER PAGE
L1 - BRANCH TO POWER UP PAGE
Selection of soft-key R5 branches to the DATA
Selection of soft-key L1 branches to the POWER UP
TRANSFER 1/3 page.
page.
R6 - BRANCH TO PROGRESS 1/4 PAGE
L2 - BRANCH TO PERF INIT WEIGHT PAGE
Selection of soft-key R6 branches to the PROGRESS
Selection of soft-key L2 branches to the PERF INIT
1/4 page. (Refer to Part 3K).
WEIGHT page of the active route. The active route
number is displayed in the page title. Entry of a 1 or 2
in the scratch pad results in a branch to the PERF INDEX 2/2
INIT WEIGHT page of the selected route (1 or 2).
(Refer to Part 3G). The INDEX 2/2 page (Figure 3H-3) provides a menu
to access functions within the flight management com-
L3 - BRANCH TO PERF INIT CLIMB PAGE puter.
Same as L2, except the branch is to the PERF INIT
CLIMB page. Page Access
L4 - BRANCH TO PERF INIT CRUISE PAGE a. From the INDEX 1/2 page, press the PREV PAGE
or NEXT PAGE hard-key.
Same as L2, except the branch is to the PERF INIT
CRUISE page. b. From the NAVAID INHIBIT, NAV DATA, FIX INFO,
FROM/TO, SYSTEM CONTROL, and TIMERS
pages, press the soft-key L6 INDEX.

3H-2
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

c. From the CUSTOM DATA LIST, press the soft-key R6 - BRANCH TO INS2 ALIGN PAGE
L6 INDEX, only available if the CUSTOM DATA
LIST page was accessed from the INDEX 2/2 Selection of soft-key R6 branches to the INS2 ALIGN
page. page.

Display POWER UP
L1 - BRANCH TO NAVAID INHIBIT PAGE The POWER UP page (Figure 3H-4) displays informa-
tion pertaining to the database, date/time, and current
Selection of soft-key L1 branches to the NAVAID CNI-SP software.
INHIBIT page.

L2 - BRANCH TO FIX PAGE Page Access

Selection of soft-key L2 branches to the FIX INFO a. The POWER UP page is displayed upon power up.
page 1.
b. Select the POWER UP prompt on the INDEX 1/2
L3 - BRANCH TO FROM/TO PAGE page.
Selection of soft-key L3 branches to the FROM/TO c. Select the POWER UP prompt on the WAYPOINT
page. SELECT page, (available only when page was ac-
cessed from the POWER UP page).
L4 - BRANCH TO MARK LIST
d. Select the POWER UP prompt on the DATA
Selection of soft-key L4 branches to the MARK LIST TRANSFER 1/3, DATA TRANSFER 2/3, or DATA
page. (Refer to Part 3L). TRANSFER 3/3 page.
L5 - BRANCH TO CURSOR TARGET PAGE e. Select the POWER UP prompt on the CUSTOM
DATA or CUSTOM DATA LIST page (available
Selection of soft-key L5 branches to the CURSOR when the CUSTOM DATA page was accessed
TARGET 1/1 page. from the POWER UP page).
L6 - BRANCH TO INS1 ALIGN PAGE
Selection of soft-key L6 branches to the INS1 ALIGN Display
page. (Refer to Part 3D). L1 - NAVIGATION DATABASE IDENTIFIER
R1 - BRANCH TO NAV DATA PAGE The data field adjacent to L1 displays the identifier of
the navigation database.
Selection of soft-key R1 branches to the NAV DATA
page. L2 - NAV DATABASE CYCLE
R2 - BRANCH TO CUSTOM DATA LIST PAGE Data fields adjacent to L2 display the active and inac-
tive cycles of the navigation database. When the air-
Selection of soft-key R2 branches to the CUSTOM
craft is airborne, selection generates the message
DATA LIST page.
NOT ALLOWED, and no database cycle takes place.
R3 - BRANCH TO SYSTEM CONTROL PAGE Otherwise, selection results in an exchange of data-
base cycles and clears the routes and the FIX INFO
Selection of soft-key R3 branches to the SYSTEM pages.
CONTROL page.
L3
R4 - BRANCH TO TIMERS PAGE
Not operational.
Selection of soft-key R4 branches to the TIMERS
page. L4 AND L5 - SELECTED INITIALIZATION
POSITION/REFERENCE WAYPOINT
R5 - BRANCH TO CNI CONFIGURATION PAGE
Data fields adjacent to L4 and L5 below ALIGN POS
Selection of soft-key R5 branches to the CNI CONFIG display the latitude/longitude of the reference way-
page. point selected by soft-key L5.

3H-3
FAM.1C-27J-1A

If GPS has been selected, the current GPS position is Time received from the GPS receiver always is
displayed adjacent to L4 and L5, with the data field appended with a “Z” to indicate zulu time. Time entries
below displaying FOM x (x is the current GPS FOM). may be appended with a single character in the range
If GPS data is not valid, the data field adjacent to L4 A-Z to indicate a time zone. Entered data is displayed
and L5 and the FOM value below are blank. If LAST in large font, while GPS data is displayed in small font.
has been selected adjacent to L5, the last valid FMS GPS data is displayed whenever it is available and the
position is displayed, and the FOM data field is blank. time field does not contain an entry.
If REF has been selected adjacent to L5, the entered If GPS time is not available upon power-up, the time is
reference latitude/longitude is displayed in the data initialized to midnight and time starts counting from
field adjacent to L4 and L5, and the data field below there. No time zone character is appended and it is
displays the position as it was entered (waypoint displayed in small font. Deletion of an entered value,
name, MGRS, PBD, latitude/longitude, etc.). The data when GPS time is available, results in the entered
field adjacent to L4 displays “-----” if the selected posi- value being removed and replaced with GPS time.
tion results in no valid position data. Otherwise, delete is non-operational.

The reference position is defined by entering latitude/ R4 - MASTER AVIONICS ON

longitude, MGRS, or any waypoint definition in the Upon power-up, MSTR AV ON is displayed in large
data field adjacent to L4. If a waypoint is entered, it is font. When MSTR AV ON is displayed in small font,
displayed in the FOM data field as described above. this line select is non-operational. When displayed in
Entry in L4 results in the position latitude/longitude large font, selection results in the COMM and NAV
being displayed in the data field adjacent to L2 and radios being powered up (except for the HF radios), a
L5, and data adjacent to L5 displaying REF as the message being sent to the mission computer to indi-
active switch position. If no reference position has cate MSTR AV ON has been selected.
been entered, data displays “-----” in large font, left Once selection occurs MSTR AV ON is then displayed
justified. in small font.
If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier
exists in the databases (navigation and custom), the R5 - AUTONAV
SP branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page. Upon
return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with a way- Upon power-up, AUTONAV is displayed in large font.
point selected, the SP uses the selected waypoint in Selection initiates the AUTONAV function. If no UTC
the reference waypoint field. Upon return from the time or date is displayed, the message ENTER UTC
WAYPOINT SELECT page when a waypoint is not TIME/DATE is displayed, and no action occurs. If no
selected, the SP displays the entry in the scratch pad. position is displayed, the message NO PRESENT
If the entered identifier is not defined in the databases POSITION is displayed, and no action occurs.
(navigation and custom), a branch to the CUSTOM Once selection occurs with UTC time and date dis-
DATA page occurs. Pressing L4 places the data adja- played and a position displayed, AUTONAV is dis-
cent to L4 and L5 in the scratch pad. played in small font.

L6 - BRANCH TO DATA TRANSFER PAGE R6 - BRANCH TO ROUTE 1 PAGE

Selection of soft-key L6 branches to the DATA Selection of soft-key R6 branches to the ROUTE 1
TRANSFER 1/3 page. page 1.

R1 - SP SOFTWARE ID/AIRCRAFT TYPE

ZEROIZE 1/2
The data field adjacent to R1 displays the CNI-SP
software load (part number). The ZEROIZE 1/2 page (Figure 3H-5) is used to
select items to be zeroized, and then to perform the
R2 - DATE zeroization on all selected items.
The date is displayed adjacent to R2. The date must
be entered and is displayed in large font. When no Page Access
date is entered, the data field displays dashes.
a. Select the ZEROIZE prompt on the INDEX 1/2
R3 - TIME page.
The time is displayed adjacent to R3. The time may b. From the ZEROIZE 2/2 page, press the PREV
be entered or supplied by the GPS receiver. PAGE or NEXT PAGE hard-key.

3H-4
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Display L5 - GPS
L1 - ROUTES Selection of GPS for zeroization is controlled and dis-
played by soft-key L5. If the GPS has been com-
Selection of routes for zeroization is controlled and manded to zeroize, GPS is displayed in small font
displayed by soft-key L1. If the ROUTES has been while the page is displayed, and selection is non-oper-
commanded to zeroize, ROUTES is displayed in small ational.
font while the page is displayed, and selection is non-
operational. L6 - RECORD INHIBIT
L2 - CUSTOM DATABASE Record inhibit status is controlled and displayed by
soft-key L6. Entry and deletion functions are non-
Selection of the custom database for zeroization is operational.
controlled and displayed by soft-key L2. If the CUS-
TOM DB has been commanded to zeroize, CUSTOM R1 - IFF
DB is displayed in small font while the page is dis-
played, and selection is non-operational. Selection of the IFF for zeroization is displayed and
controlled by soft-key R1. If the IFF has been com-
L3 - COMMUNICATION PRESELECTS manded to zeroize, IFF is displayed in small font while
the page is displayed, and selection is non-opera-
Selection of communication presets for zeroization is tional.
controlled and displayed by soft-key L3. If the commu-
nication presets have been commanded to zeroize, R2 - CAPS
COMM PRESELECTS is displayed in small font
while the page is displayed, and selection is non-oper- Not operational.
ational.
R3 - DEFENSIVE SYSTEMS
L4 - COMMUNICATION RADIOS Not operational.
Selection of the communication radios for zeroization
R4 - DTM
is controlled and displayed by soft-key L4. Activation
of L4 results in selection of the next available radio Selection of the DTM for zeroization is displayed and
function in the sequence shown below. If a radio func- controlled by soft-key R4. If the DTM has been com-
tion is not available for selection, then its identifier is manded to zeroize, DTM is displayed in small font
displayed in small font, standard video, and its selec- while the page is displayed, and selection is non-oper-
tion is bypassed. If functions of communication radios ational.
have been commanded to zeroize, those selected
functions are displayed in small font while the page is R5 - ALL
displayed and selection of L4 is non-operational.
Selection of ALL items for zeroization is displayed and
Sequence for radio function activation:
controlled by soft-key R5. Selection of ALL selects all
a. VU1 items on the ZEROIZE page for zeroization. All items
on the page are then displayed as selected. Selection
b. VU2 of an item when ALL has already been selected
c. None. results in that item being deselected, along with the
ALL prompt. All other items on the page that were
NOTE selected by the selection of ALL remain selected.
Deselection of ALL deselects all items on the page.
The time required to zeroize all sensitive
Zeroization when ALL has been selected results in the
data on both RMMs is approximately 16
ALL prompt being displayed in small font while the
minutes (8 minutes if only one RMM is page continues to be displayed.
used). No zeroization progress enuncia-
tion is provided to the crew. The entire 16 R6 - VERIFY ZEROIZE
minutes must be allowed to ensure com-
plete zeroization. If no RMMs are loaded, The data field adjacent to R6 displays the status of
zeroziation of data is almost instanta- zeroization verification. Selection when VERIFY is
neous. displayed in large font, inverse video, results in the
selected items being commanded to zeroize. When
zeroization is complete, all items selected for zeroiza-
tion are then automatically deselected.

3H-5
FAM.1C-27J-1A

ZEROIZE 2/2 R1 - ROUTE 2

The ZEROIZE 2/2 page (Figure 3H-6) is used to (See L1 for route 2)
select items to be zeroized, and then to perform the
zeroization on all selected items. R2 - ROUTE 2 PERFORMANCE DATA
(See L2 for performance data 2)
Page Access
R3 - ROUTE 2 MISSION DATA
From the ZEROIZE 1/2 page, press the PREV PAGE
(See L3 for mission data 2)
or NEXT PAGE hard-key.
R4 - CUSTOM CHUTE DATA
Display Selection of custom chute data for zeroization is con-
L1 - ROUTE 1 trolled and displayed by soft-key R4. If the CHUTES
has been commanded to zeroize, CHUTES is dis-
Selection of route 1 for zeroization is controlled and played in small font while the page is displayed, and
displayed by soft-key L1. If the ROUTE 1 has been selection is non-operational.
commanded to zeroize, ROUTE 1 is displayed in
small font while the page is displayed, and selection is R5 - INHIBITED NAVAIDS
non-operational.
Selection of inhibited NAVAIDS for zeroization is con-
L2 - ROUTE 1 PERFORMANCE DATA trolled and displayed by soft-key R5. If the INH
NAVAIDS has been commanded to zeroize, INH
Selection of performance data 1 for zeroization is con- NAVAIDS is displayed in small font while the page is
trolled and displayed by soft-key L2. If the PERF 1 displayed, and selection is non-operational.
has been commanded to zeroize, PERF 1 is dis-
played in small font while the page is displayed, and R6 - VERIFY
selection is non-operational.
The data field adjacent to R6 displays the status of
L3 - ROUTE 1 MISSION DATA zeroization verification. Selection when VERIFY is
displayed in large font, inverse video, results in the
Selection of mission data 1 for zeroization is con- selected items being commanded to zeroize. When
trolled and displayed by soft-key L3. If the MSN 1 has zeroization is complete, all items selected for zeroiza-
been commanded to zeroize, MSN 1 is displayed in tion are then automatically deselected.
small font while the page is displayed, and selection is
non-operational.
DATA TRANSFER 1/3
L4 - CUSTOM WAYPOINTS
The DATA TRANSFER 1/3 page (Figure 3H-7) pro-
Selection of custom waypoints for zeroization is con- vides a menu to select data to be transferred from the
trolled and displayed by soft-key L4. If the CUSTOM DSDTS to the Mission Computer (CNI-SP).
WPTS has been commanded to zeroize, CUSTOM
WPTS is displayed in small font while the page is dis-
NOTE
played, and selection is non-operational.
The DATA TRANSFER 1/3 page is not
L5 - STORED ROUTES functional.
Selection of stored routes for zeroization is controlled
and displayed by soft-key L5. If the STORED RTES
has been commanded to zeroize, STORED RTES is DATA TRANSFER 2/3
displayed in small font while the page is displayed, The DATA TRANSFER 2/3 page (Figure 3H-8) pro-
and selection is non-operational. vides a menu to select data to be transferred from the
CNI-SPs to the DSDTS.
L6 - TOLD DATA
Selection of TOLD data for zeroization is controlled NOTE
and displayed by soft-key L6. If the TOLD has been
commanded to zeroize, TOLD is displayed in small The DATA TRANSFER 2/3 page is not
font while the page is displayed, and selection is non- functional.
operational.

3H-6
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

DATA TRANSFER 3/3 L4 - TRANSFER COMPLETE MESSAGE

The DATA TRANSFER 3/3 page (Figure 3H-9) sup- When a crossload is in progress, the data field adja-
ports a commanded crossload of the navigation data- cent to L4 displays TRANSFER in large font.
base, magnetic variation table, or mission data Otherwise, the data field is blank. When a crossload is
between the two CNI-SPs. in progress, the data field adjacent to R4 displays
STARTING, COMPLETE, or ENDING in large font;
otherwise, the data field is blank.
Page Access STARTING indicates the transmitting CNI-SP is pre-
a. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the DATA paring for the data transfer. COMPLETE indicates the
TRANSFER 2/3 page. actual data transfer is in progress. ENDING indicates
the receiving CNI-SP is processing the transferred
b. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the DATA data.
TRANSFER 1/3 page. When the data field displays COMPLETE, the data
field adjacent to R3 displays the percent complete of
Display the data transfer. Otherwise, the data field is blank.

L1 L5

Not operational. Not operational.

L2 - TRANSMIT CROSSLOAD DATA L6 - BRANCH TO POWER UP PAGE

The data field adjacent to L1 displays CROSSLOAD Selection of soft-key L6 branches to the POWER UP
NDB if two CNI-SPs have a mismatch in navigation page. Entry and delete are non-operational.
databases. The data field adjacent to L1 displays
R1
CROSSLOAD MISSION if the two CNI-SP navigation
databases match, but their mission data is mis- Not operational.
matched. The data field adjacent to L1 displays
CROSSLOAD MAGVAR if the two CNI-SP navigation R2 - RECEIVE CROSSLOAD DATA
databases and mission data match but their MAGVAR
The data field adjacent to R2 displays RECEIVE in
data is mismatched. If the navigation databases, mis-
large font if data is displayed adjacent to L1, the off-
sion data, and MAGVAR data of the two CNI-SPs
side CNI-SP mismatched data is valid, and a cross-
match, the data field adjacent to L1 is blank.
load is not in progress. RECEIVE is displayed in small
The data field adjacent to L2 displays TRANSMIT in
font if data field adjacent to L1 is blank, the offside
large font if data is displayed adjacent to L1, the
CNI-SP mismatched data is invalid, or the onside
onside CNI-SP mismatched data is valid, and a cross-
CNI-SP is transmitting a crossload. The data field
load is not in progress. TRANSMIT is displayed in
below R2 displays the offside CNI-SP navigation data-
small font if the data field adjacent to L1 is blank, if the
base if the data field adjacent to L1 displays NDB and
onside CNI-SP mismatched data is invalid, or if the
RECEIVE is displayed in large font adjacent to soft-
onside CNI-SP is receiving a crossload.
key R2. Otherwise, the data field is blank.
The data field displays the onside CNI-SP navigation
Selecting R2 when RECEIVE is displayed in large font
database if NDB and TRANSMIT are displayed in
results in the database displayed in L1 being received
large font. Otherwise, the data field adjacent to L3 is
from the offside CNI-SP. Otherwise, selection is non-
blank. Selecting L2 when TRANSMIT is displayed in
operational.
large font transmits the database displayed adjacent
When a receive from the offside CNI-SP is in process,
to CROSSLOAD to the offside CNI-SP. Otherwise, the
RECEIVE is displayed in large font, inverse video.
soft-key is non-operational.
When a transmit to the offside CNI-SP is in process, R3 THROUGH R6
TRANSMIT is displayed in large font, inverse video.
Not operational.
L3
Not operational.

3H-7
FAM.1C-27J-1A

NAVAID INHIBIT L4 - FOURTH NAVAID PERMANENTLY

INHIBITED
The NAVAID INHIBIT page (Figure 3H-10) is used to
invalidate NAVAIDs used for navigation. (see L1).

L5 - FIFTH NAVAID PERMANENTLY INHIBITED

Page Access
(see L1).
a. Select the NAV INHIBIT prompt from the INDEX 2/
2 page. L6 - BRANCH TO INDEX 2/2 PAGE

b. Select the NAV INHIBIT prompt on the WAY- Selection of soft-key L6 results in branching to the
POINT SELECT page, (available only when page INDEX 2/2 page.
was accessed from the NAVAID INHIBIT page).
R1- FIRST NAVAID TEMPORARILY INHIBITED

Display Data below TEMPORARY operate the same as data

adjacent to the left soft-keys, except they operate on
Permanently inhibited NAVAIDs remain inhibited until the temporarily inhibited NAVAID list. (See L1).
cleared by the crew. Temporarily inhibited NAVAIDs If an entry already exists as a permanently inhibited
are cleared on flight completion. NAVAID, the temporarily inhibited NAVAID is not
accepted and an ALREADY IN PERM LIST message
L1 - FIRST NAVAID PERMANENTLY INHIBITED is generated. If an entry already exists as a tempo-
NAVAIDs that are entered as permanently inhibited rarily inhibited NAVAID, the existing temporarily inhib-
remain in this list until manually deleted. ited NAVAID is deleted.
Data below PERMANENT left column displays “-----” if R2 - SECOND NAVAID TEMPORARILY
a NAVAID has not been entered. Data in the right col- INHIBITED
umn displays the country code for the NAVAID dis-
played in the left column. If the data field does not (see R1).
contain a NAVAID, the adjacent data field is blank.
Valid entries are any tacan, VOR or DME type R3 - THIRD NAVAID TEMPORARILY INHIBITED
NAVAID that is contained in the navigation database. (see R1).
If an entry already exists as a temporary inhibited
NAVAID, the temporary inhibited NAVAID is deleted R4 - FOURTH NAVAID TEMPORARILY INHIBITED
and an ALREADY IN TEMP LIST message is gener-
ated. If an entry already exists as a permanent inhib- (see R1).
ited NAVAID, the existing permanent inhibited R5 - FIFTH NAVAID TEMPORARILY INHIBITED
NAVAID is deleted. If more than one NAVAID with the
entered identifier exists in the navigation database, (see R1).
the CNI-SP branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT
page. Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT R6
page with a NAVAID selected, the CNI-SP uses the Not operational.
selected NAVAID in the NAVAID identifier field. Upon
return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page when a
NAVAID is not selected, the CNI-SP displays the entry FIX INFO
in the scratch pad. Selection of this field places the
NAVAID identifier into the scratch pad, if this entry The FIX INFO page (Figure 3H-11) displays fix infor-
exists. Otherwise, selection is non-operational. mation from a waypoint/NAVAID to the active flight
Delete removes the NAVAID identifier in this field and plan.
replaces it with “-----”, if this NAVAID exists. Other-
wise, delete is non-operational. NOTE
L2 - SECOND NAVAID PERMANENTLY There are two FIX INFO pages, page 1/2
INHIBITED and 2/2. Access between the two is via
the NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE hard-
(see L1).
keys. The format of the two pages is iden-
L3 - THIRD NAVAID PERMANENTLY INHIBITED tical, but each page operates indepen-
dently of the other.
(see L1).

3H-8
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Page Access If data in the D TK field contains data, delete results in

all data fields on L2 being cleared. Otherwise, delete
a. Select the FIX prompt on the INDEX 2/2 page. is non-operational.
b. Select the FIX INFO prompt on the WAYPOINT
SELECT page, (available when the WAYPOINT
L3
SELECT page was accessed from the FIX page). (See L2)

L4
Display
(See L2)
L1 - FIX IDENTIFIER
L5 - ABEAM INTERCEPT
Entries into data adjacent to L1 may be any defined
selected reference point. An entry into this field clears If identifier data field is blank, or contains an identifier
data adjacent to L2 through L5 and R2 through R5. and no abeam intercept exists within 400 NM of the
Undefined identifier entries generate the message fix, then data adjacent to L5 displays ABEAM in small
NOT IN DATABASE. font. If identifier field contains data and an abeam
If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier intercept point does exist within 400 NM of the fix,
exists in the databases (navigation and custom), the then ABEAM is displayed in the data field adjacent to
CNI-SP branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page. L5 in large font.
Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with When data adjacent to L5 contains ABEAM in either
a waypoint selected, the CNI-SP uses the selected font, adjacent data fields are blank. When data adja-
waypoint for the fix identifier field. Upon return from cent to L5 displays ABEAM in small font, selection
the WAYPOINT SELECT page when a waypoint is not and deletion are not operational. When displayed in
selected, the CNI-SP displays the entry in the scratch large font, selection results in the data field above dis-
pad. Selection results in the identifier being placed playing ABEAM in small font, and data adjacent dis-
into the scratch pad. playing the abeam radial and flight path intersection
Data fields adjacent to the identifier are blank when no information.
fix identifier has been entered. Otherwise, these data The course reference displayed (magnetic, true, or
fields display the bearing and distance from the data grid) is determined using the heading reference on the
identifier to the aircraft. If bearings are displayed in SYSTEM CONTROL page. If the reference displayed
true, the bearing format is NNN”T”, and the distance is the same as the entered reference, then data adja-
format is NNNN. If bearings are displayed in mag- cent to L5 is displayed in large font. If the reference
netic, the bearing format is NNN”°” and the distance displayed is not the same as the entered reference,
format is NNNN. If bearings are displayed in grid, the then data is displayed in small font. The display format
bearing format is NNN”G”, and the distance format is for bearings is NNN”°”, NNN”T”, or NNN”G”, for mag-
NNNN. netic, true, and grid respectively, and the distance for-
mat is NNN.
L2 - DOWN TRACK FIX INFORMATION When data fields display abeam data, deletion results
Data adjacent to L1 below BRG DIS displays ETA if remaining fields being blanked, and data adjacent to
the aircraft is airborne and Time is valid. Data fields L5 displaying ABEAM as described above.
below BRG DIS then display ETAs. Entry is non-operational. Selection if an abeam inter-
Otherwise, the field displays ETE and data below it cept is displayed results in the PBD for this intercept
displays ETEs. Upon entry of an identifier, data below being placed into the scratch pad, as described in L2.
D TK displays “---”. Otherwise, selection is non-operational.
When data field either displays “---” or data, a radial
L6 - BRANCH TO INDEX 2/2 PAGE
may be entered into data below D TK. Data in adja-
cent fields displays the distance, ETA, along track dis- Selection of soft-key L6 branches to the INDEX 2/2
tance, and predicted altitude, respectively, of the page.
intersection of the data below D TK radial with the
flight path. If no intersection exists, these data fields R1 THROUGH R5
remain blank.
Not operational.
If data field below FX contains data, selection results
in the identifier being placed into the scratch pad R6 - CLEAR
along with data in the fields below D TK and FX, in the
format of a PBD. If data in the field below FX contains If data adjacent to L6 contains data, CLEAR is dis-
no data, selection is non-operational. played adjacent to R6 in large font.

3H-9
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Selection results in all data fields on the FIX page A third type of valid entry consists of “/” followed by a
being cleared. If no data is contained in the data field reference point. This permits entry of only the TO ref-
adjacent to L1, CLEAR is displayed in small font, and erence point. If a FROM reference point already
selection is non-operational. exists, it remains. If one doesn’t exist, PPOS is
assumed and displayed as the FROM reference point.
If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier
FROM/TO exists in the databases (navigation and custom), the
SP branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page. Upon
The FROM/TO page (Figure 3H-12) allows for entry of
return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with a way-
two reference points and a selected groundspeed,
point selected, the CNI-SP uses the selected way-
and computes the bearing, distance and time between
point in the FROM/TO field. Upon return from the
the two points.
WAYPOINT SELECT page when a waypoint is not
selected, the CNI-SP displays the entry in the scratch
NOTE pad.
When the FROM/TO reference points are entered, the
Data displayed on CNI-MU 1 (SP 1) are
outbound bearing from the FROM point is displayed
independent from data displayed on CNI-
under FROM field (in row 2), the distance (in nautical
MU 2 and 3 (SP 2). Therefore, a total of
miles) between the FROM and TO points is displayed
10 possible FROM/TO points may be dis-
in row 3, and the time between these two points is dis-
played at one time.
played in row 2. The time is an Estimated Time En
Route (ETE) if the FROM reference point is not
Page Access PPOS, or an Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) if the
FROM reference point is PPOS. The groundspeed in
a. Select the FROM/TO prompt on the INDEX 2/2 row 3 is used to compute the time. Selection is non-
page. operational.
b. Select the FROM/TO prompt on the WAYPOINT If data FROM/TO field contains an entry, pressing
SELECT page, (available when the WAYPOINT DELETE deletes the data in this field, and the remain-
SELECT page was accessed from the FROM/TO ing data fields are also cleared. Otherwise, DELETE
page). is non-operational.

L2 THROUGH L5 - FROM/TO
NOTE
These line selects operate the same as L1, except
There are two FROM/TO pages, page 1/ operation is on the data fields associated with these
2 and 2/2. Access between the two is via line selects.
the NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE hard-
keys. The format of the two pages is iden- L6 - BRANCH TO INDEX 2/2 PAGE
tical, but each page operates indepen-
dently of the other. Selection of soft-key L6 branches to the INDEX 2/2
page. Entry and deletion are not operational.

Display R1 THROUGH R5 - GROUNDSPEED

L1 - FROM/TO Initially the groundspeed defaults to current aircraft

groundspeed if airborne, and 320 knots if not air-
Data adjacent to L1 (associated with L1) displays the borne. If a groundspeed is entered, it is displayed in
FROM/TO reference points. Initially this field defaults large font.
to “-----/--- --”. A valid entry consists of a reference Delete results in the data field displaying its default
point defined in the database or flight plan followed by groundspeed.
a “/”, followed by a second reference point. Entry of
PPOS as the first reference point implies the current R6
aircraft position is to be used as the FROM waypoint,
Not operational.
and the FROM point is displayed as PPOS.

3H-10
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

CURSOR TARGET When the OAP is defined and is not currently

selected, deletion results in the deletion of the OAP
CURSOR TARGET 1/2 page (Figure 3H-13) displays data on the CURSOR TARGET page.
the data for Offset Aim Point (OAP) 1 through 5 and
CURSOR TARGET 2/2 page displays the data for L6 - BRANCH TO POSITION UPDATE PAGE
OAPs 6 through 10.
Selection of soft-key L6 branches to the POSITION
UPDATE page.
Page Access
R1 THROUGH R5 - OAP ELEVATION
a. Select the CURSOR TGT prompt on the INDEX 2/
2 page. If the OAP and the OAP elevation are defined, OAP
elevation is displayed adjacent to R1 through R5.
b. Select the CURSOR TGT prompt on the POSI- When elevation field is not blank, valid entries are of
TION UPDATE page. the form elevation. When an elevation is displayed,
c. Select the CURSOR TGT prompt on the WAY- delete results in the default being displayed.
POINT SELECT page, (available when the WAY-
R6 - BRANCH TO CUSTOM DATA LIST PAGE
POINT SELECT page was accessed from the
CURSOR TARGET page). Selection of soft-key R6 branches to the CUSTOM
DATA LIST page.
d. Select the return prompt on the CUSTOM DATA
page when the CUSTOM DATA page was access-
ed from the CURSOR TARGET page.
NAV DATA
e. Select the PREV PAGE or NEXT PAGE hard-key
The NAV DATA page (Figure 3H-14) is used to
from the CURSOR TARGET 1/2 page, to display
retrieve information from the Navigation Database.
the CURSOR TARGET 2/2 page.
f. Select the PREV PAGE or NEXT PAGE hard-key-
Page Access
from the CURSOR TARGET 2/2 page, to display
the CURSOR TARGET 1/2 page. a. Select the NAV DATA prompt on the INDEX 2/2
page.
Display b. Select the NAV DATA prompt on the WAYPOINT
SELECT page, (available when the WAYPOINT
L1 THROUGH L5 - OAP IDENTIFIER AND
LATITUDE/LONGITUDE SELECT page was accessed from the NAV DATA
page).
The waypoint identifier and the latitude/longitude of
the OAP are displayed adjacent to L1 through L5, if
the OAP waypoint is defined. Otherwise, dashes are Display
displayed. Valid entries are of the form identifier. Upon accessing the NAV DATA page, all data fields
If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier are cleared.
exists in the data bases, the system processor
branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page. Upon L1 - IDENTIFIER AND COUNTRY CODE
return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with a way-
point selected, the system processor uses the Data adjacent to L1 displays box prompts if a valid
selected waypoint to display the waypoint identifier, identifier has not been entered. Otherwise, L1 dis-
latitude/longitude, and elevation. A return from the plays the entered identifier. When an identifier has
WAYPOINT SELECT page when a waypoint is not been entered, adjacent data displays the country code
(i.e., USA, CAN etc.) of the identifier. Otherwise, this
selected displays the entry in the scratch pad. Valid
field is blank.
waypoint entries that are not contained in a data base
Valid entries are any permanent database NAVAID,
result in the display of the CUSTOM DATA page.
waypoint, or airport. Entries not in the navigation data-
Upon return from the CUSTOM DATA page with the
base generate the message NOT IN DATABASE.
waypoint defined, the system processor uses the cus-
If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier
tom waypoint information to fill the data fields on the
exists in the databases (navigation and custom), the
CURSOR TARGET page.
CNI-SP branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page.
A return from the CUSTOM DATA page with the way-
point undefined results in the waypoint identifier being
displayed in the scratch pad.

3H-11
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with If the identifier in the data field adjacent to L1 is a
a waypoint selected, the CNI-SP uses the selected NAVAID, the following acronyms are used:
waypoint in the identifier field. Upon return from the
DME - DME only
WAYPOINT SELECT page when a waypoint is not
selected, the CNI-SP displays the entry in the scratch N DME - non-collocated DME component
pad. Selection when the data field contains an entry
results in the identifier being placed into the scratch TACAN - TACAN only
pad. Otherwise, selection is non-operational. N TACAN - non-collocated TACAN component
L2 - IDENTIFIER’S LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE VORTAC - VORTAC
If the data field adjacent to L1 contains an identifier, VORDME - collocated VOR/DME
L2 and R2 display LATITUDE and LONGITUDE and
the latitude and longitude of the identifier. Otherwise, N VOR - non-collocated VOR/DME
these fields are blank. VOR - VOR component (VOR only)
L3 - IDENTIFIER’S MAGNETIC VARIATION If the identifier in page title is an ILS/MLS, the follow-
ing acronyms are used:
If the data field adjacent to L1 contains an identifier,
L3 displays MAG VAR and the magnetic variation of ILS - ILS
the identifier. Otherwise, these fields are blank.
MLS - MLS
L4 - IDENTIFIER’S FREQUENCY/CHANNEL
ILSDME - ILS precision DME
If the data field adjacent to L1 contains a NAVAID, the
MLSDME - MLS precision DME
data field above L4 displays CHAN if the NAVAID is a
tacan, or FREQ if the NAVAID is a VOR or DME type. LOC - Localizer
The data field adjacent to L4 then displays the identi-
fier frequency or channel. If the identifier in page title is a waypoint, the following
If the data field adjacent to L1 contains a VORTAC, acronyms are used:
the data field adjacent to L4 displays FREQ and NDB - nondirectional beacons
CHAN, respectively. The adjacent data field then dis-
plays the NAVAID frequency and channel, respec- WPT - for all other waypoints types
tively. Otherwise, the data fields are blank. If no type is contained in the database for the identifier
L5 - FRONT COURSE in adjacent to L1, data fields are blank.

If the data field adjacent to L1 contains an ILS, the R5 - CLASS/CATEGORY

data field adjacent to L5 displays FCRS and the ILS If a NAVAID identifier is in the data field adjacent to
front course value. Otherwise, these data fields are L1, the data field adjacent to R5 displays CLASS.
blank. Data below then displays the class. The acronyms
L6 - BRANCH TO INDEX 2/2 PAGE used to display NAVAID class are as follows:
T - terminal
Selection of soft-key L6 branches to the INDEX 2/2
page. LA - low altitude
R3 - ELEVATION UR - unrestricted
If the identifier in the data field adjacent to L1 has an HA - high altitude, low power
elevation in the database, the data field adjacent to
HH - high altitude, high power
R3 displays the elevation. Otherwise, these data fields
are blank. TEST - test
R4 - IDENTIFIER TYPE
If the identifier in the data field adjacent to L1 has an
associated type in the database, data adjacent to R4
displays TYPE and data below displays that type as
follows.

3H-12
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

If an ILS/MLS identifier is in the data field adjacent to L1 - SHOW WAYPOINT

L1, the data field adjacent to R5 displays CATEGORY.
Data below then displays the category. The acronyms Valid waypoint identifier format entries into L1 result in
used to display the ILS/MLS category are as follows: a branch to the CUSTOM DATA page with the entered
identifier displayed in the CUSTOM DATA page Way-
LOC - LOC only point Identifier field. Selection and delete are non-
operational.
I - ILS category I
II - ILS category II L2 - STORED WAYPOINT

III - ILS category III If a waypoint identifier is displayed next to this soft-
key, selection results in the waypoint identifier being
If no type is contained in the database for the identifier placed into the scratch pad.
in adjacent to L1, fields are blank. Delete when field displays a waypoint identifier and
the waypoint is in a flight plan generates the error
R6 message WPT IN FP. Delete when field displays
Not operational. blanks is not operational. Otherwise, delete results in
the waypoint being deleted from the custom waypoint
database. Entry is non-operational.
CUSTOM DATA LIST
L3 THROUGH L5 - STORED WAYPOINT
The CUSTOM DATA LIST page (Figure 3H-15) pro-
Same operation as L2.
vides a list of the stored custom waypoints.
L6 - BRANCH TO CALLING PAGE
Page Access Selection of soft-key L6 branches to the page that
a. Select the CUSTOM DATA prompt on the INDEX accessed the CUSTOM DATA LIST or CUSTOM
2/2 page. DATA page. Selection branches to the page from
which the CUSTOM DATA LIST or CUSTOM DATA
b. Select the CUSTOM LIST prompt on the CUSTOM page was accessed.
DATA page.
R1 THROUGH R5 - STORED WAYPOINT
c. Select the CUSTOM LIST prompt on the CURSOR
TGT page. Same operation as L2, except data field replaces data
field adjacent to L1.

Display R6
The CUSTOM DATA LIST pages are created as Not operational.
required to display the entire list of custom waypoints
stored in the SP. The number of custom waypoints
determines the number of CUSTOM DATA LIST CUSTOM DATA
pages, with nine waypoints shown per page.
Multiple CUSTOM DATA LIST pages are distin- The CUSTOM DATA page (Figure 3H-16) provides
guished by the page number. The page number is of detailed information on the custom waypoint shown in
the form X/Y, where X is the current page number, and the page title.
Y is the total number of pages needed to view the
entire stored custom data listing. Page Access
The PREV PAGE and NEXT PAGE hard-keys are
used to move between these multiple pages. a. Enter a waypoint identifier into the SHOW WAY-
The waypoints are listed alphabetically down the left POINT field on the CUSTOM DATA LIST page.
side of the page, from top to bottom, then down the
b. Press the CUSTOM DATA prompt on the WAY-
right side of the page.
POINT SELECT page, (available when the WAY-
POINT SELECT page was accessed from the
CUSTOM DATA page).
c. Enter an undefined waypoint identifier in a field
that accepts waypoint identifier entries on one of
the pages listed in the L6.

3H-13
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Display Delete when field 3 displays an elevation and the cus-

tom waypoint is in a flight plan generates the message
L1 - CUSTOM WAYPOINT LATITUDE/ WPT IN FP, and no further action occurs. Otherwise,
LONGITUDE
delete removes the entered elevation, if it exists.
Data adjacent to L1 displays the latitude/longitude of Selection is non-operational.
the custom waypoint identified in title, if the waypoint
is defined. Otherwise, blanks are displayed. Selection L4 AND L5
results in that data being down selected to the scratch Not operational.
pad.
L6 - BRANCH TO CALLING PAGE
L2 - CUSTOM WAYPOINT POSITION DEFINITION
Selection of soft-key L6 branches to the page that
If the custom waypoint identified in title is defined, accessed the CUSTOM DATA or CUSTOM DATA
data adjacent to L2 displays the waypoint position def- LIST page.
inition. Otherwise, data displays dashes. Selection when ROUTE x or LEGS x is displayed
Valid position entry formats are latitude/longitude, branches back to the particular page where the CUS-
MGRS, place/bearing/distance (PBD), and place/ TOM DATA page was accessed from. Otherwise,
bearing/place/bearing (PBPB). Entry of a valid posi- selection branches back to the displayed calling page.
tion when the custom waypoint database is full gener-
ates the message WPT LIST FULL and no further R1 THROUGH R5
action occurs.
Entry of a valid position when the custom waypoint is Not operational.
in a flight plan generates the message WPT IN FP R6 - BRANCH TO CUSTOM DATA LIST PAGE
and no further action occurs. Otherwise, when a valid
position entry occurs, the latitude/longitude is com- Selection of soft-key R6 branches to the CUSTOM
puted, the latitude/longitude is displayed adjacent to DATA LIST page.
L1, and the defined custom waypoint is stored.
Entry of a position containing a place identifier that is
not defined in the navigation or custom database gen- SYSTEM CONTROL
erates a NOT IN DATABASE message and no further
The SYSTEM CONTROL page (Figure 3H-17) is used
action occurs. If a PBD or PBPB position entry con-
to specify which CNI-SP is controlling the CNI-MU
tains a place identifier that matches multiple naviga-
(ICDU), the heading reference, and the grid conver-
tion and custom database waypoints, the CNI-SP
gence factor.
branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page. Upon
return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with a way-
point selected, the CNI-SP uses the selected way- Page Access
point to determine the entered position. Upon return
from the WAYPOINT SELECT page when a waypoint Select the SYS CONTROL prompt on the INDEX 2/2
is not selected, the CNI-SP displays the entry in the page.
scratch pad.
Selection results in data adjacent to L2 being down Display
selected into the scratch pad, if the waypoint is
defined. Otherwise, selection is non-operational. L1 - ICDU SOURCE

L3 - CUSTOM WAYPOINT ELEVATION ICDU source selection is displayed and controlled

using soft-key L1. Selection results in toggling of the
If the custom waypoint identified in page title is CNI-MU (ICDU) source select, if the other CNI-SP is
defined and an elevation has been entered, data adja- available. Otherwise, selection is non-operational.
cent to L3 displays the waypoint elevation. Otherwise,
dashes are displayed. L2 THROUGH L5
Entry of a valid elevation when the custom waypoint is
in a flight plan generates the message WPT IN FP, Not operational.
and no further action occurs. Otherwise, a valid eleva- L6 - BRANCH TO INDEX 2/2 PAGE
tion entry is stored if the custom waypoint exits.
Selection of soft-key L6 branches to the INDEX 2/2
page.

3H-14
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

R1 - HEADING REFERENCE • Timer 1 is not running, the timer 1 up/down mode

is down, and a time is displayed in the timer 1 time
Heading reference selection is displayed in the data field.
field adjacent to and is controlled by R1.
Selection results in timer 1 starting. If the mode is up,
R2 THROUGH R4 timer 1 starts counting up at the currently displayed
time in the timer 1 time field, or at 0000:00 if no data
Not operational.
has been entered into the timer 1 time field. If the
R5 - GRID CONVERGENCE FACTOR mode is down, timer 1 starts counting down from the
currently displayed time in the timer 1 time field. When
Data adjacent to R5 displays the grid convergence 0000:00 is reached, the timer stops and a message
factor. The default value of 1.00000 is displayed when TIMER 1 EXPIRED is generated.
the INAV latitude is not south of the equator. When the If the conditions for display of START in large font are
INAV latitude is south of the equator, -1.00000 is dis- not met, START is displayed in small font and selec-
played. Selection results in the grid convergence fac- tion is non-operational.
tor being placed in the scratch pad. Delete results in
the default value being placed into the data field adja- L6 - BRANCH TO INDEX 2/2 PAGE
cent to R5.
Selection of soft-key L6 branches to the INDEX 2/2
R6 page.

Not operational. R1 - TIMER 1 TIME

The data field adjacent to R1 displays the time of
TIMERS timer 1. Entry attempts while timer 1 is running gener-
ate the message NOT ALLOWED. Otherwise, entries
The TIMERS page (Figure 3H-18) allows the setting are displayed. Deletion clears the time displayed, and
of crew-alerting timers. the default data is displayed. If deletion occurs while
the timer is running, the timer is also stopped. Selec-
tion is non-operational.
Page Access
Select the TIMERS prompt on the INDEX 2/2 page. R2 - TIMER 2 TIME
Data adjacent to R2 displays the time of timer 2. Valid
Display entries are displayed in the data field adjacent to R2.
If data adjacent to R2 displays a time, the message
L1 - TIMER 1 UP/DOWN MODE TIMER 2 TARGET is generated when the CNI-SP
time is equal to the time of timer 2. Data adjacent to
L1 controls mode of timers to either UP or DOWN and R2 is then cleared. Delete restores the default data.
displays the state of the switch.
R3 - TIMER 3 TIME
L2 AND L3
Data adjacent to R3 displays the time of timer 3. Valid
Not operational. entries are displayed. Upon entry of a time interval X,
L4 - TIMER 1 STOP the message TIMER 3 INTERVAL is generated every
time the entered interval is reached following the time
Data adjacent to L4 displays STOP in large font if of initial entry. Delete restores the default data, and
timer 1 is active (running). Selection in this case stops timer 3 is disabled.
timer 1 from running. If timer 1 is not running, L4 dis-
plays STOP in small font, and selection is non-opera- R4 - TIMER 1 RESET
tional. The data field adjacent to R4 displays RESET in small
L5 - TIMER 1 START font if no time is displayed in the timer 1 data field.
When RESET is displayed in small font, selection is
Data adjacent to L5 displays START in large font if: not operational. At all other times, RESET is displayed
in large font. When RESET is displayed in large font,
• Timer 1 is not running and the timer 1 up/down
pressing R4 clears the timer 1 data field, and stops
mode is up, or
timer 1.

3H-15
FAM.1C-27J-1A

R5 AND R6
Not operational.

CNI CONFIGURATION
The CNI CONFIG page (Figure 3H-19) provides a list-
ing of the aircraft configuration radios HF and V/UHF
used by the SP and supplied by the onside mission
computer.

Page Access
Select the CNI CONFIG prompt on the INDEX 2/2
page.

Display
Adjacent to L1, the data fields below HF1 display the
radio type provided by the sources MC1, MC2 and SP.
Adjacent to R1, the data fields below HF2 display the
radio type provided by the sources MC1, MC2 and SP
If the SP detects a configuration conflict will display
the default HF radio configuration in small font,
inverse video.

Adjacent to L3, the data fields below VUHF1 display

the radio type provided by the sources MC1, MC2 and
SP.
Adjacent to R3, the data fields below VUHF2 display
the radio type provided by the sources MC1, MC2 and
SP
If the SP detects a configuration conflict will display
the default VUHF radio configuration in small font,
inverse video.

L1 THROUGH L5
Not operational.

L6 - BRANCH TO INDEX 2/2 PAGE

Selection of soft-key L6 branches to the INDEX 2/2
page.

R1 THROUGH R6
Not operational.

3H-16
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

INDX Branching

Figure 3H-1

3H-17
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays branches to functions which are not always easily available through other function keys.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 POWER UP Branches to the POWER UP page.

L2 PERF WGT Branches to the PERF INIT WEIGHT page.
L3 PERF CLB Branches to the PERF INIT CLIMB page.
L4 PERF CRZ Branches to the PERF INIT CRUISE page.
L5 PERF DES Branches to the PERF INIT DESCENT page.
L6 ZEROIZE Branches to the ZEROIZE page.
R1 ROUTE 1 Branches to the ACT RTE 1 Route Plan page.
R2 ROUTE 2 Branches to the ACT RTE 2 Route Plan page.
R3 RT LIST Branches to the STORED ROUTE LIST page.
R4 DEP/ARR 1 Branches to the DEP/ARR INDEX page.
R5 DATA XFR Branches to the DATA TRANSFER page.
R6 PROGRESS Branches to the PROGRESS page.

Figure 3H-2 INDEX 1/2 page

3H-18
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

INDEX 1/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY 8. Press R1 to branch to the ROUTE 1 page -
Pressed.
9. Press R2 to branch to the ROUTE 2 page -
PREREQUISITES Pressed.
1. None. 10. Press R3 to branch to the STORED ROUTE
LIST page - Pressed.

DATA ENTRY 11. Press R4 to branch to the DEP/ARR INDEX

page associated with the active route -
1. Press INDX hard-key - Pressed. Pressed.
a. INDEX 1/2 page is displayed. 12. Press R5 to branch to the DATA TRANSFER
page - Pressed.
NOTE
13. Press R6 to branch to the PROGRESS page -
Pressing L2, L3, L4, L5 or L6 with a 1 or 2 Pressed.
entered in the scratch pad results in a
14. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to branch to IN-
branch to the page associated with the
DEX 2/2 page - Pressed.
route number entered. Otherwise, selec-
tion branches to the page associated with
the active route.

2. Press L1 to branch to the POWER UP page -

Pressed.
3. Press L2 to branch to the PERF INIT WEIGHT
1/4 page - Pressed.
4. Press L3 to branch to the PERF INIT CLIMB 2/
4 page - Pressed.
5. Press L4 to branch to the PERF INIT CRUISE
3/4 page - Pressed.
6. Press L5 to branch to the PERF INIT DE-
SCENT 4/4 page - Pressed.
7. Press L6 to branch to the ZEROIZE page -
Pressed.

3H-19
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Provides a menu to access functions within the flight management computer.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 NAV INHIBIT Branches to the NAVAID INHIBIT page.

L2 FIX Branches to the FIX INFO page.
L3 FROM/TO Branches to the FROM/TO page.
L4 MARK LIST Branches to the MARK LIST page.
L5 CURSOR TGT Branches to the CURSOR TARGET page.
L6 INS 1 ALIGN Branches to the INS 1 ALIGN page.
R1 NAV DATA Branches to the NAV DATA page.
R2 CUSTOM DATA Branches to the CUSTOM DATA LIST page.
R3 SYS CONTROL Branches to the SYSTEM CONTROL page.
R4 TIMERS Branches to the TIMERS page.
R5 CNI CONFIG Branches to the CNI CONFIG page.
R6 INS 2 ALIGN Branches to the INS 2 ALIGN page.

Figure 3H-3 INDEX 2/2 page

3H-20
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

INDEX 2/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. INDEX 1/2 page is displayed.
2. Operator presses NEXT PAGE hard-key.
a. INDEX 2/2 page is displayed.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press L1 to branch to the NAVAID INHIBIT
page - Pressed.
2. Press L2 to branch to the FIX INFO page -
Pressed.
3. Press L3 to branch to the FROM/TO page -
Pressed.
4. Press L4 to branch to the MARK LIST page -
Pressed.
5. Press L5 to branch to the CURSOR TARGET
page - Pressed.
6. Press L6 to branch to the INS 1 ALIGN page -
Pressed.
7. Press R1 to branch to the NAV DATA page -
Pressed.
8. Press R2 to branch to the CUSTOM DATA
page - Pressed.
9. Press R3 to branch to the SYSTEM CONTROL
page - Pressed.
10. Press R4 to branch to the TIMERS page -
Pressed.
11. Press R5 to branch to the CNI CONFIG page -
Pressed.
12. Press R6 to branch to the INS 2 ALIGN page -
Pressed.

3H-21
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays information pertaining to the database, date/time, and current CNI-SP software.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 NAV DB Displays the navigation database identifier.

L2 Navigation database Displays the navigation database, active (large font) and inactive
cycle (small font), cycles.
L3 NOT USED
L4 Selected initialization Displays the selected initial position used to align EGI navigation sys-
position tems.
L5 Reference waypoint Chooses the initial position used to align the EGI navigation systems.
REF requires pilot input of position in the scratch pad
L6 DATA XFR Branches to the DATA TRANSFER page.
R1 C27J SP SW Displays the CNI-SP software identification.
R2 DATE Displays the date from the GPS. Otherwise, the date should be
entered manually. This entry checks the database effectivity.
R3 TIME Displays the time. Will be sourced from the GPS receiver, or the time
may be entered manually.
R4 MSTR AV ON Selection powers up all the nav and comm radios except for the HF
radios.
R5 AUTONAV Selection begins a GC alignment of the EGI, enables all available sen-
sors, selects AUTO solution, enables AUTOTUNE of the navigation
radios, and commands the EGI to NAV mode when the alignment has
been completed.
R6 ROUTE 1 Branches to the ACT RTE 1 Route Plan page.

Figure 3H-4 POWER UP page

3H-22
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

POWER UP PAGE DATA ENTRY 6. R1 displays aircraft configuration and SP soft-

ware number. Selection is non-operational.
7. Press R2 to enter the date in the scratch pad -
PREREQUISITES Entered.
1. None. a. Press R2 - Pressed.
b. DATE line data updated.
DATA ENTRY 8. Press R3 to enter the time in the scratch pad -
Entered.
1. L1 displays database identifier. Selection is
non-operational. a. Press R3 - Pressed.
2. Press L2 to exchange database cycles - b. TIME line data updated.
Pressed. 9. Press R4 to turn master avionics on - Pressed.
a. Selected active navigation database iden- 10. Press R5 to select AUTONAV - Selected.
tifier appears in large font.
NOTE
NOTE
Present position must be displayed adja-
• Selection of the navigation database cent to L4 prior to selecting AUTONAV.
cycle using L2 results in the deletion
of contents of route 1, route 2, and
11. Press R6 to branch to the ROUTE page -
data on the FIX INFO page. If the da-
Pressed.
tabase must be recycled, store routes
before the database cycle is per-
formed.

• Selectable only when the aircraft is on

the ground.

• Exchanging database cycles with

stored navigation database informa-
tion, such as flight plan routes and fix
information, results in loss of that in-
formation from memory.

3. Press L4 to enter latitude and longitude in the

scratch pad - Entered.

NOTE
REF must be selected using L5 prior to
entering latitude and longitude.

a. Press L4 - Pressed.
b. ALIGN POS lines data updated.
4. Press L5 to select source for position informa-
tion - Selected.
a. Selected source (GPS, LAST, or REF) ap-
pears in large font.
5. Press L6 to branch to the DATA TRANSFER
page - Pressed.

3H-23
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Provides the crew one location to remove (zeroize) either selected or all sensitive or classified
data from the memories of various LRUs. The zeroize page also contains a record inhibit feature
which, when selected, prevents the recording of sensitive data.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 ROUTES Selects Routes to be zeroized.

L2 CUSTOM DB Selects Custom Database to be zeroized.
L3 COMM PRESELECTS Selects Communication Presets to be zeroized.
L4 VU1/VU2 Selects HAVE QUICK to be zeroized.
L5 GPS Selects GPS to be zeroized.
L6 OFF/ON Selects/deselects the record inhibit function.
R1 IFF Selects IFF to be zeroized.
R2 CAPS NON-OPERATIONAL
R3 DEF SYS NON-OPERATIONAL
R4 DTM Selects the Data Transfer Module to be zeroized.
R5 ALL Selects ALL available systems to be zeroized.
R6 VERIFY Zeroizes selected systems.

Figure 3H-5 ZEROIZE 1/2 page

3H-24
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

ZEROIZE 1/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY 7. Press L5 to select the GPS to be zeroized - Se-
lected.
8. Press L6 to select record inhibit - Selected.
PREREQUISITES
a. Selected record inhibit (ON or OFF) ap-
1. None. pears in large font.
9. Press R1 to select the IFF system to be ze-
DATA ENTRY roized - Selected.

1. Press INDX hard-key - Pressed. 10. Press R4 to select the DTM to be zeroized -
Selected.
a. INDEX 1/2 page is displayed.
2. Press L6 on INDEX 1/2 page - Pressed. NOTE
a. ZEROIZE 1/2 page is displayed. After selecting DTM, either individually or
by using R5 (all systems), do not remove
3. Press L1 to select routes to be zeroized
the mission data RMM from the DSDTS
(ROUTE 1, ROUTE 2, CARP, SAR, LZ, and
for at least 8 minutes. Otherwise, the
RZ) - Selected.
DTM does not completely zeroize and the
4. Press L2 to select the custom data base to be DATA TRANSFER page is inoperative
zeroized to be zeroized (TOLD, INH, NA- until the system power is cycled.
VAIDS, STORE RTE, CUSTOM WPTS,
CHUTES, and PERF INIT) - Selected. 11. Press R5 to select all systems on the 1/2 page
to be zeroized - Selected.
5. Press L3 to select the communication presets
to be zeroized - Selected. 12. Press R6 to zeroize the selected systems -
Pressed.
6. Press L4 to select the Havw Quick (HQ) radio
to be zeroized - Selected. 13. Press NEXT PAGE hard-key to branch to ZE-
ROIZE 2/2 page - Pressed.
a. Selected radios (VU1/VU2) appears in
large font.

NOTE
The L4 toggling sequence is:
- VU1/VU2
- VU1
- VU2
- None.

3H-25
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Provides the crew one location to remove (zeroize) either selected or all sensitive or classified
data from the memories of various LRUs.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 ROUTE 1 Selects ROUTE 1 to be zeroized.

L2 PERF 1 Selects PERF 1 to be zeroized.
L3 MSN 1 Selects the MISSION 1 to be zeroized.
L4 CUSTOM WPTS Selects CUSTOM WAYPOINTS to be zeroized.
L5 STORES RTES Selects STORES ROUTES to be zeroized.
L6 TOLD Selects TOLD to be zeroized.
R1 RUOTE 2 Selects ROUTE 2 to be zeroized.
R2 PERF 2 Selects PERF 2 to be zeroized.
R3 MSN 2 Selects MISSION 2 to be zeroized.
R4 CHUTES Selects CHUTES to be zeroized.
R5 INH NAVAIDS Selects INIHBIT NAVAIDS to be zeroized.
R6 VERIFY Zeroizes all selected systems.

Figure 3H-6 ZEROIZE 2/2 page

3H-26
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

ZEROIZE 2/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. ZEROIZE 1/2 page is displayed.
2. Operator presses NEXT PAGE hard-key.
a. ZEROIZE 2/2 page is displayed.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press L1 to select the ROUTE 1 to be zeroized
- Selected.
2. Press L2 to select the PERF 1 to be zeroized -
Selected.
3. Press L3 to select the MISSION 1 to be ze-
roized - Selected.
4. Press L4 to select the Custom Waypoints to be
zeroized - Selected.
5. Press L5 to select the Stored Routes to be ze-
roized - Selected.
6. Press L5 to select the TOLD to be zeroized -
Selected.
7. Press R1 to select the ROUTE 2 to be zeroized
- Selected.
8. Press R2 to select the PERF 2 to be zeroized
- Selected.
9. Press R3 to select the MISSION 2 to be ze-
roized - Selected.
10. Press R4 to select the Chutes to be zeroized -
Selected.
11. Press R5 to select Inhibit Navaids to be ze-
roized - Selected.
12. Press R6 to zeroize the selected systems -
Pressed.

3H-27
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Provides a menu to select data to be transferred to the mission computer from the DS-DTS.
(NOT FUNCTIONAL)

Soft-key Display Description

L1 ROUTE 1 Selects/deselects route 1 data to be transferred to the mission com-

puter from the DS-DTS. Route 1 data consists of such things as routing
waypoints and flight legs.
L2 ROUTE 2 Selects/deselects route 2 data to be transferred to the mission com-
puter from the DS-DTS. Route 2 data consists of such things as routing
waypoints and flight legs.
L3 TOLD Selects/deselects take-off and landing data to be transferred to the
mission computer from the DS-DTS.
L4 COMM PRESETS Selects/deselects preset radio communication frequency data to be
transferred to the mission computer from the DS-DTS.
L5 HAVE QUICK Selects/deselects HAVE QUICK to be transferred to the mission com-
puter from the DS-DTS.
L6 POWER UP Branches back to the POWER UP page.
R1 STORED RTES Selects/deselects stored route data to be transferred to the mission
computer from the DS-DTS.
R2 CUSTOM WPTS Selects/deselects custom waypoints data to be transferred to the mis-
sion computer from the DS-DTS.
R3 INH NAVAIDS Selects/deselects inhibit radio navigation aids data to be transferred to
the mission computer from the DS-DTS.
R4 CHUTES Selects/deselects parachute ballistic data to be transferred to the mis-
sion computer from the DS-DTS. Parachute data consists of informa-
tion on each types of parachute.
R5 ALL Selects/deselects all available data to be transferred to the mission
computer from the DS-DTS.
R6 LOAD Initiates data transfer of selected items.

Figure 3H-7 DATA TRANSFER 1/3 page

3H-28
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

DATA TRANSFER 1/3 PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Not Functional.

DATA ENTRY
1. None.

NOTE
This page is non-operational.

3H-29
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Provides a menu to select data to be transferred from the mission computer to the DS-DTS.
(NOT FUNCTIONAL)

Soft-key Display Description

L1 ROUTE 1 Selects/deselects route 1 data to be transferred to the DS-DTS.

L2 ROUTE 2 Selects/deselects route 2 data to be transferred to the DS-DTS.
L3 TOLD Selects/deselects TOLD to be transferred to the DS-DTS.
L4 COMM PRESETS Selects/deselects preset radio communication frequency data to be
transferred to the DS-DTS.
L5 NOT USED
L6 POWER UP Branches back to the POWER UP page.
R1 STORED RTES Selects/deselects stored route data to be transferred to the DS-DTS.
R2 CUSTOM WPTS Selects/deselects custom waypoints data to be transferred to the DS-
DTS.
R3 INH NAVAIDS Selects/deselects inhibit radio navigation aids data to be transferred to
the DS-DTS.
R4 CHUTES Selects/deselects parachute ballistic data to be transferred to the DS-
DTS. Parachute data consists of information on each types of para-
chute.
R5 ALL Selects/deselects all available data to be transferred to the DS-DTS.
R6 STORE Initiates data transfer of selected items.

Figure 3H-8 DATA TRANSFER 2/3 page

3H-30
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

DATA TRANSFER 2/3 PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Not Functional.

DATA ENTRY
1. None.

NOTE
This page is non-operational.

3H-31
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Provides for transfer of data from one CNI-SP to the other CNI-SP.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 NOT USED
L2 TRANSMIT Initiates the data transfer to the opposite (offside) CNI-SP.
L3 NOT USED
L4 Transfer Status Displays the status message (Transfer in Progress, Transfer Aborted,
Messages or Transfer Complete).
L5 NOT USED
L6 POWER UP Branches back to the POWER UP page.
R1 NOT USED
R2 RECEIVE Initiates the data transfer from the opposite (offside) CNI-SP.
R3-R6 NOT USED

Figure 3H-9 DATA TRANSFER 3/3 page

3H-32
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

DATA TRANSFER 3/3 PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. DATA TRANSFER 1/3 page is displayed.
2. Operator presses NEXT PAGE hard-key two
times.
a. DATA TRANSFER 3/3 page is displayed.

DATA ENTRY

NOTE
Text message may indicate, or prompt,
crossload of navigation database
(CROSSLOAD NDB), mission database
(CROSSLOAD MISSION), or magnetic
variation (CROSSLOAD MAGVAR) be-
tween the two CNI-SPs.

1. Press L2 to initiate data transfer to the opposite

system processor - Pressed.
2. L4 displays transfer status. Selection is non-
operational.
3. Press L6 to branch to the POWER UP page -
Pressed.
4. Press R2 to initiate data transfer from the op-
posite system processor - Pressed.

3H-33
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Used to nullify navaids.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 1ST Inhibit Displays the first permanently inhibited navaid.

L2 2ND Inhibit Displays the second permanently inhibited navaid.
L3 3RD Inhibit Displays the third permanently inhibited navaid.
L4 4TH Inhibit Displays the fourth permanently inhibited navaid.
L5 5TH Inhibit Displays the fifth permanently inhibited navaid.
L6 INDEX Branches back to the INDEX 2/2 page.
R1 1ST Inhibit Displays the first temporarily inhibited navaid.
R2 2ND Inhibit Displays the second temporarily inhibited navaid.
R3 3RD Inhibit Displays the third temporarily inhibited navaid.
TH
R4 4 Inhibit Displays the fourth temporarily inhibited navaid.
R5 5TH Inhibit Displays the fifth temporarily inhibited navaid.
R6 NOT USED

Figure 3H-10 NAVAID INHIBIT page

3H-34
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NAVAID INHIBIT PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. None.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press L1 to L5 to enter NAVAIDs to be perma-
nently inhibited - Entered.
2. Press L6 to branch to the INDEX 2/2 page -
Pressed.
3. Press R1 to R5 to enter NAVAIDs to be tempo-
rarily inhibited - Entered.

3H-35
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays fix information from a waypoint/navaid to the active flight plan.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 Fix Identifier Displays fix Identification, range and bearing.

FIX BRG/DIS FR
L2-L4 Down track fix Displays entered radial and computed distance from reference fix to
information flight plan route. Also displays predicted Estimated Time of Arrival
D TK FX ETA DTG ALT (ETA), (Estimated Time of Enroute (ETE) if not airborne), Distance To
Go (DTG), and predicted altitude (ALT) which the flight plan will inter-
cept the entered radial.
L5 ABEAM intercept fix When selected, displays down track information corresponding to
information ABEAM position.
L6 INDEX Branches back to the INDEX 2/2 page.
R1-R5 NOT USED
R6 CLEAR Selection results in all data on fix page being cleared.

Figure 3H-11 FIX INFO page

3H-36
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

FIX INFO PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. None.

DATA ENTRY

NOTE
There are two FIX INFO pages, page 1/2
and 2/2. Access between the two is via
the NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE hard-
keys. The format of the two pages is iden-
tical, but each page operates indepen-
dently of the other.

1. Press L1 to enter waypoint identifier - Entered.

2. Press L2 to L4 to down track information -
Pressed.
3. Press L5 to display the abeam intercept radial
and distance - Pressed.
4. Press L6 to branch to the INDEX 2/2 page -
Pressed.
5. Press R6 to clear all information on the FIX
INFO page - Pressed.

3H-37
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Allows for entry of two reference points and a selected groundspeed, and computes the bearing,
distance, and time between two points.

Soft-key Display Description

L1-L5 FROM/TO Displays FROM/TO waypoints entered via the scratch pad, and out-
bound bearing.
L6 INDEX Branches back to the INDEX 2/2 page.
R1-R5 Groundspeed Displays ETA/ETE, range, and current groundspeed is airborne or
used 320 Kts if not airborne for its associated reference positions.
R6 NOT USED

Figure 3H-12 FROM/TO page

3H-38
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

FROM/TO PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. None.

DATA ENTRY

NOTE
There are two FROM/TO pages, page 1/
2 and 2/2. Access between the two is via
the NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE hard-
keys. The format of the two pages is iden-
tical, but each page operates indepen-
dently of the other.

1. Press L1 to L5 to enter from/to waypoint iden-

tifiers - Entered.
2. Press L6 to branch to the INDEX 2/2 page -
Pressed.
3. Press R1 to R5 as applicable to enter ground-
speed - Entered.

3H-39
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Allows selection and definition of cursor points.

Soft-key Display Description

L1-L5 OAP Identifier- Displays the identifier and latitude/longitude of the Offset Aim Points
LAT/LONG (OAP).
L6 UPDATE Branches to the POSITION UPDATE page.
R1-R5 OAP Elevation Displays the elevation of the Offset Aim Points (OAP).
R6 CUSTOM LIST Branches to the CUSTOM DATA LIST page.

Figure 3H-13 CURSOR TARGET page

3H-40
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

CURSOR TARGET PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. None.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press L1 to L5 to enter OAP identifiers - En-
tered.
2. Press L6 to branch to the POSITION UPDATE
page - Pressed.
3. Press R1 to R5 display the OAP elevation - En-
tered.
4. Press R6 to branch to the CUSTOM DATA
LIST page - Pressed.

3H-41
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Used to retrieve information from the navigation database.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 IDENT Displays the waypoint identifier and country code.

L2 LATITUDE Displays the latitude of the waypoint identifier.
L3 MAG VAR Displays the magnetic variation of the waypoint identifier.
L4 FREQ CHAN If waypoint is a navaid identifier, displays the frequency and/or chan-
nel.
L5 FCRS If waypoint identifier contains an ILS, the front course is displayed.
L6 INDEX Branches back to the INDEX 2/2 page.
R1 NOT USED
R2 LONGITUDE Displays the longitude of the waypoint identifier.
R3 ELEVATION Displays the elevation of the waypoint identifier.
R4 TYPE If specified in the database, displays the type of the waypoint identifier.
R5 CLASS Displays the class of the identifier.
R6 NOT USED

Figure 3H-14 NAV DATA page

3H-42
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NAV DATA PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. None.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press L1 to enter facility identifier and country
code in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L1 - Pressed.
b. IDENT line data updated.
2. L2 to L5 display identifier data. Selection is
non-operational.
3. Press L6 to branch to the INDEX 2/2 page -
Pressed.
4. R2 to R5 display identifier data. Selection is
non-operational.

3H-43
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Provides a listing of the stored custom waypoints.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 SHOW WAYPOINT Used to enter desired waypoint identifier.

L2-L5 Stored Waypoint Displays an inactive, available custom waypoint.
L6 Branch to calling page Displays a prompt to return to the page that called up this page.
R1-R5 Stored Waypoint Displays an inactive, available custom waypoint.
R6 NOT USED

Figure 3H-15 CUSTOM DATA LIST page

3H-44
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

CUSTOM DATA LIST PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. None.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press soft-key to downselect waypoint position
and/or position definition - Pressed.
a. If waypoint position is displayed, press L1.
b. If waypoint position definition is displayed,
press L2.
2. Press L2 to L5 to downselect stored waypoint
to scratch pad - Pressed.
3. Press L6 to branch to the page from which the
CUSTOM DATA LIST page was accessed -
Pressed.
4. Press R1 to R5 to downselect stored waypoint
to scratch pad - Pressed.

3H-45
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Used to allow the operator to enter custom waypoints into the navigation database.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 LAT/LON Displays the latitude and longitude of the custom waypoint.

L2 POSITION Displays the position definition of the custom waypoint.
L3 ELEVATION Displays the elevation of the custom waypoint.
L4-L5 NOT USED
L6 Branch to calling page Branch to the page from which the custom data page was called.
R1-R5 NOT USED
R6 CUSTOM LIST Branches back to the CUSTOM DATA LIST page.

Figure 3H-16 CUSTOM DATA page

3H-46
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

CUSTOM DATA PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. None.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press soft-key to downselect waypoint position
and/or position definition - Pressed.
a. If waypoint position is displayed, press L1.
b. If waypoint position definition is displayed,
press L2.
2. Press L3 to enter waypoint elevation in the
scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L3 - Pressed.
b. ELEVATION line data updated.
3. Press L6 to branch to the page from which the
CUSTOM DATA page was accessed -
Pressed.
4. Press R6 to branch to the CUSTOM DATA
LIST page - Pressed.

3H-47
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Used to specify which CNI-SP is driving the CNI-MU (ICDU), what heading reference is used,
and the grid convergence factor.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 ICDU SOURCE Displays and controls the management unit source selection.
L2-L5 NOT USED
L6 INDEX Branches back to the INDEX 2/2 page.
R1 HEADING Displays and controls the heading reference selection. Selection tog-
gles the heading reference between Magnetic, True, and Grid.
R2-R4 NOT USED
R5 GRID FACTOR Displays the grid convergence factor.
R6 NOT USED

Figure 3H-17 SYSTEM CONTROL page

3H-48
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

SYSTEM CONTROL PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. None.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press L1 to select the desired system proces-
sor - Selected.
a. Selected ICDU SOURCE (SP1 or SP2) ap-
pears in large font.
2. Press L6 to branch to the INDEX 2/2 page -
Pressed.
3. Press R1 to select the desired heading refer-
ence - Selected.
a. Selected heading (MAG, TRUE, or GRID)
appears in large font.
4. Press R5 to enter grid convergence factor or
downselect displayed grid convergence factor
in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press R5 - Pressed.
b. GRID FACTOR line data updated.

3H-49
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Allows the setting of crew alerting timers.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 TIMER 1 UP/DOWN Displays and controls the status of the switch (UP/DOWN).
L2 TIMER 2 ALERT AT (No switch function)
L3 TIMER 3 ALERT EVERY (No switch function)
L4 STOP Selection while Timer 1 is running, stops the timer.
L5 START Selection if Timer 1 is NOT running, starts the timer.
L6 INDEX Branches back to the INDEX 2/2 page.
R1 TIMER 1 time Allows selection/display Timer 1 time.
R2 TIMER 2 time Allows entry of Timer 2 alert time to be set.
R3 TIMER 3 time Allows Timer 3 alert interval to be set.
R4 RESET Selection stops and clears Timer 1.
R5-R6 NOT USED

Figure 3H-18 TIMERS page

3H-50
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

TIMERS PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. None.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press L1 to select TIMER 1 status - Selected.
a. Selected Timer 1 status (UP or DOWN) ap-
pears in large font.
2. L2 and L3 display timer data. Selection is non-
operational.
3. Press L4 to stop Timer 1 - Pressed.
4. Press L5 to start Timer 1 - Pressed.
5. Press L6 to branch to the INDEX 2/2 page -
Pressed.
6. Enter Timer 1 time in the scratch pad - En-
tered.
a. Press R1 - Pressed.
b. Timer 1 line data updated.
7. Enter Timer 2 time in the scratch pad - En-
tered.
a. Press R2 - Pressed.
b. Timer 2 line data updated.
8. Enter Timer 3 time in the scratch pad - En-
tered.
a. Press R3 - Pressed.
b. Timer 3 line data updated.
9. Press R4 to reset Timer 1 - Pressed.

3H-51
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays the configuration of the Radios.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 HF1 Displays the MC1, MC2, and SP reported HF 1 radio type.

L2 NOT USED
L3 VUHF1 Displays the MC1, MC2, and SP reported V/UHF 1 radio type.
L4-L5 NOT USED
L6 INDEX Branches to the INDEX 2/2 page.
R1 HF2 Displays the MC1, MC2, and SP reported HF 2 radio type.
R2 NOT USED
R3 VUHF2 Displays the MC1, MC2, and SP reported V/UHF 2 radio type.
R4-R6 NOT USED

Figure 3H-19 CNI CONFIG page

3H-52
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

CNI CONFIG PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. None.

DATA ENTRY
1. L1 data fields below HF1 display the radio type
provided by the sources MC1, MC2 and SP.
Selection is non-operational.
2. L3 data fields below VUHF1 display the radio
type provided by the sources MC1, MC2 and
SP. Selection is non-operational.
3. R1 data fields below HF2 display the radio type
provided by the sources MC1, MC2 and SP.
Selection is non-operational.
4. R3 data fields below VUHF2 display the radio
type provided by the sources MC1, MC2 and
SP. Selection is non-operational.

3H-53 / ( 3H-54 blank )

 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PART 3J. MISSION COMPUTER INDEX

Contents page Contents page

MISSION COMPUTER INDEX CONTROL SOFT PANEL PAGES ....................................... 3J-2

PAGES .......................................................... 3J-1
MC INDEX PAGE DATA ENTRY ....................... 3J-7
MISSION COMPUTER INDEX PAGE ........... 3J-1
TACTICAL PLOT PAGE DATA ENTRY ............. 3J-9
TACTICAL PLOT PAGE ..................................... 3J-1
V SPEEDS PAGE DATA ENTRY .................... 3J-11
V SPEEDS PAGE .............................................. 3J-2

MISSION COMPUTER INDEX TACTICAL PLOT PAGE

CONTROL PAGES
The tactical plot function (Figure 3J-3) allows for dis-
play of manually entered threats on any CMDU
The mission computer index control pages provide
selected to display tactical information using the digi-
access to various MC-controlled functions by turning
tal map overlays page on the SAMU (Refer to
over control of that CNI-MU (ICDU) to the mission
FAM.1C-27J-1).
computer. All functionality and data displayed on the
There are 6 pages available allowing for a maximum
CNI-MU (ICDU) is directed by the mission computer
of 6 plots to be displayed.
until one of the other hard-keys is pressed.
Figure 3J-1 provides an overview of functions acces-
sible from the MC INDEX page. NOTE
Tactical plots cannot be defined directly
from mark points. If a tactical plot is re-
MISSION COMPUTER INDEX PAGE
quired based on a mark point position, the
coordinates of the mark point must be
Page Access manually entered on the TACTICAL
PLOT page.
Select the MC INDX hard-key (Figure 3-1).

Page Access
Display
Select the TAC PLOT prompt on the MC INDEX page.
The MC INDEX page (Figure 3J-2) provides access to
the various mission computer-controlled pages listed
below, that can be manipulated using the CNI-MU Display
(ICDU).
L1 - TYPE
• TACTICAL PLOT
Pressing L1 toggles between the selections for the
• V SPEEDS type of plot. Selections are SAM (Surface to Air Mis-
sile), AAA (Anti-Aircraft Artillery), and AI (Airborne
• SOFT PANELS:
Intercept).
– PILOT LIGHTING PANEL
– COPILOT LIGHTING PANEL
– RADAR CONTROL PANEL

3J-1
FAM.1C-27J-1A

L2 - LATITUDE/LONGITUDE Display
Enter the latitude and longitude of the plot POSITION L1 - REFUSAL SPEED
using the CNI-MU scratch pad and press L2 to enter
data. Crew entered V1 (refusal speed) is displayed adjacent
to L1.
L3
L2 - ROTATION SPEED
Not operational.
Crew entered VR (rotation speed) is displayed adja-
L4 - RADIUS cent to L2.

Enter the radius of the plot area using the CNI-MU L3 - V2

(ICDU) scratch pad and press L4. Radius may be
entered in feet or nautical miles. Nautical miles is the Crew entered V2 (take-off obstacle clearance speed)
default. When entering radius in feet, the suffix FT is displayed adjacent to L3.
must be typed in the scratch pad. L4 THROUGH L6
L5 AND L6 Not operational.
Not operational. R1 - MAXIMUM OPERATING SPEED
R1 - LABEL Maximum operating speed (VMO) is displayed adja-
Enter the type of threat in the CNI-MU (ICDU) scratch cent to R1.
pad and press R1 to enter data. Entry of the label is
optional. R2 - DIVE SPEED
The label can be up to nine alphanumeric characters.
Maximum dive speed (VD) is displayed adjacent to
R2 THROUGH R5 R2.
Not operational. R3 THROUGH R5
R6 - BRANCH TO MC INDEX PAGE Not operational.
Selection of soft-key R6 branches to the MC INDEX R6 - BRANCH TO MC INDEX PAGE
page.
Selection of soft-key R6 branches to the MC INDEX
page.

V SPEEDS PAGE

The V SPEEDS page (Figure 3J-4) displays critical SOFT PANEL PAGES
airspeeds on the CMDU PFD.
The V SPEEDS for refusal and rotation are input by The CNI-MU (ICDU) soft panel pages replicate the
entering the values from the performance charts or functions of the equivalent hardware control panels.
CNI-MS TOLD data pages into the CNI-MU (ICDU) This provides a method of controlling system func-
scratch pad and selecting the appropriate soft-key. tions in the event of a hardware panel failure.
The V2 speed can be entered using the V SPEEDS Access to the soft panel pages are gained by pressing
page or through the reference set panel. the MC INDX hard-key and then selecting the SOFT
With weight on wheels, V1 (refusal), VR (rotation), PANELS soft-keys from the MC INDEX page.
and V2 are displayed on the flight displays. When a soft panel has been selected ON, the soft
Without weight on wheels, only V2 is displayed on the panel legend on the MC INDEX page is displayed in
flight displays. inverse video.

The soft panel does not assume the function of the

Page Access corresponding hard panel until it has been selected
Select the V SPEEDS prompt on the MC INDEX ON using PNL soft-key R5. R5 and R6 are the only
page. keys that are active when the soft panel is in the OFF
state.

3J-2
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

The initial settings displayed on the soft panel match

the last known settings of the hard panel.
When the soft panel has been selected ON, inputs to
the mission computer are ONLY accepted from the
soft panel. Inputs to the hard panel are not accepted.
Once a soft panel has been selected ON, leaving the
soft panel page has no effect on the settings of that
system and does not return system control to the hard
panel.
If the soft panel has been selected OFF, inputs are no
longer accepted from the soft panel, and control
reverts back to the hard panel.

After the soft panel has been in control, the switch set-
tings on the hard and soft panels may no match.
Unanticipated changes in system operation could
occur when the soft panel is turned off and the hard
panel switch settings take command.

To prevent inadvertent changes in system operation,

whenever a soft panel is turned off, and the settings
between the mechanical switches on the hard panel
and the digital representation on the soft panel do not
match, the OFF/ON legend next to PNL soft-key R5
changes to VERIFY OFF, and the message CHK
HARD PNL appears on the scratch pad.
If soft-key R5 is pressed within 5 seconds, then the
soft panel is turned off and the hard panel resumes
control. The legend on R5 reverts to OFF/ON and the
message disappears. If soft-key R5 is not pressed
within 5 seconds, the legend reverts to OFF/ON, the
CHK HARD PNL message disappears, and the soft
panel remains in control.
If the MC has lost communication with the associated
hard panel is failed (as noted on the CMDU by a “PNL
FAIL” Advisory ACAWS message), the soft panel shall
not be turned off until the hard panel has recovered
from its failed condition.
Any attempt to turn off the soft panel in this failure
condition results in the OFF DENIED - PNL FAIL mes-
sage on the soft panel scratch pad line.

Soft panel control is available for the following:

• PILOT LIGHTING PANEL
• COPILOT LIGHTING PANEL
• RADAR CONTROL PANEL

The various soft panel screens are shown in Figure

3J-5 through Figure 3J-8.

3J-3
FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3J-4
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

MC INDX Branching

Figure 3J-1

3J-5
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: The MC index permits access to certain functions via the CNI-MU (ICDU), however these func-
tions are not performed by the CNI-MS. The functions accessed via the MC INDEX page are per-
formed by the mission computers.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 TAC PLOT Branches to the TACTICAL PLOT page.

L2 NOT USED
L3 V SPEEDS Branches to the V SPEEDS page.
L4-L6 NOT USED
R1 P LIGHTS Branches to the PILOT LIGHTING soft panel page.
R2 CP LIGHTS Branches to the COPILOT LIGHTING soft panel page.
R3 RADAR Branches to the RADAR soft panel page.
R4-R6 NOT USED

Figure 3J-2 MC INDEX page

3J-6
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

MC INDEX PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. None.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press MC INDX hard-key - Pressed.
a. MC INDEX page displayed.
2. Press L1 to branch to the TAC PLOT page -
Pressed.
3. Press L3 to branch to the V SPEEDS page -
Pressed.
4. Press R1 to branch to the PILOT LIGHTING
1/2 soft panel page - Pressed.
5. Press R2 to branch to the COPILOT LIGHT-
ING soft panel page - Pressed.
6. Press R3 to branch to the RADAR soft panel
page - Pressed.

3J-7
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Allows the crew to display manually entered threat.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 TYPE Selects the type of threat (SAM / AAA / AI).

L2 LAT/LON Displays location (latitude/longitude) of threat.
L3 POSITION Enter threat position expressed in Identifier, Latitude/Longitude, or
Place/Bearing/Distance.
L4 RADIUS Display radius of threat.
L5-L6 NOT USED
R1 LABEL Optional entry of label for threat or tactical plot description.
R2-R5 NOT USED
R6 MC INDEX Branches to the MC INDEX page.

Figure 3J-3 TACTICAL PLOT page

3J-8
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

TACTICAL PLOT PAGE DATA 5. Press L4 to enter radius of threat area (feet or
nautical miles) in the scratch pad - Entered.
ENTRY
a. Press L4 - Pressed.
b. RADIUS line data updated.
PREREQUISITES
6. Press R1 to enter an optional label for threat or
1. None. tactical plot in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press R1 - Pressed.
DATA ENTRY b. LABEL line data updated.

1. Press MC INDX hard-key - Pressed.

NOTE
a. MC INDEX page displayed.
A maximum of six plots may be entered
2. Press L1 on MC INDEX page - Pressed. on six pages.
a. TACTICAL PLOT page displayed.
7. Press R6 to branch to the MC INDEX page -
3. Press L1 to select TYPE of threat - Selected. Pressed.
a. Selected type of threat (SAM, AAA, or AI)
appears in large font.
4. Press L3 to enter location of threat in the
scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L3 - Pressed.
b. POSITION line data updated.
c. LAT/LON line displays the threat entered
position in relevant Latitude/Longitude co-
ordinates.

3J-9
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: The V speeds (take-off) for V1 and VR are input by entering the values from the performance
charts into the CNI-MU (ICDU) scratch pad and selecting the appropriate key.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 V1 Entry and selection of V1 (refusal speed) from scratch pad.

L2 VR Entry and selection of VR (rotation speed) from scratch pad.
L3 V2 Entry and selection of V2 (take-off obstacle clearance speed) from
scratch pad.
L4-L6 NOT USED
R1 VMO MC calculated value representing Maximum Operating speed (VMO).
R2 VD MC calculated value representing Maximum Dive speed (VD).
R3-R5 NOT USED
R6 MC INDEX Branches to the MC INDEX page.

Figure 3J-4 V SPEEDS page

3J-10
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

V SPEEDS PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. None.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press MC INDX hard-key - Pressed.
a. MC INDEX page displayed.
2. Press L3 on MC INDEX page - Pressed.
a. V SPEEDS page displayed.
3. Press L1 to enter refusal speed in the scratch
pad - Entered.
a. Press L1 - Pressed.
b. V1 line data updated.
4. Press L2 to enter rotation speed in the scratch
pad - Entered.
a. Press L2 - Pressed.
b. VR line data updated.
5. Press L3 to enter take-off obstacle clearance
speed in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L3 - Pressed.
b. V2 line data updated.
6. Press R6 to branch to the MC INDEX page -
Pressed.

3J-11
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: The pilot lighting soft panel pages are used to control the various lighting systems in the flight
station.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 MSTR MODE Selects/arms and displays the master lighting mode.

L2-L3 NOT USED
L4 ANNUNCIATORS Selects and displays the annunciator display status (DIM/BRT).
L5-L6 NOT USED
R1 NVIS Used to place the lighting master mode in night vision lighting mode.
R2 NORM Used to place the lighting master mode in normal mode.
R3 T-STORM Used to place the lighting master mode in thunder storm lighting mode.
R4 NOT USED
R5 PNL Used to enable/disable (OFF/ON) the soft panel.
R6 MC INDEX Branches to the MC INDEX page.

Figure 3J-5 PILOT LIGHTING 1/2 page

3J-12
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: The pilot lighting soft panel pages are used to control the various lighting systems in the flight
station.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 DISPLAY MSTR Arms and displays the selected brightness level of electro-optical dis-
plays in the pilot zone (pilot's SAMU, CNRP, CMDU No. 1, 2 and 3).
L2 SD& INSTR PNL Arms and displays the selected brightness level of the side and main
instrument panels integral lights on pilot zone.
L3 NOT USED
L4 CARGO MASTER (Reserved)
L5-L6 NOT USED
R1 INCR Used to increase the brightness level of the armed lighting element.
R2 DECR Used to decrease the brightness level of the armed lighting element.
R3-R4 NOT USED
R5 PNL Used to enable/disable (OFF/ON) the soft panel.
R6 MC INDEX Branches to the MC INDEX page.

Figure 3J-6 PILOT LIGHTING 2/2 page

3J-13
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: The copilot lighting soft panel page is used to control the various lighting systems in the flight sta-
tion. The soft panel may also be used to initiate both the display test and the lamp test.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 DISPLAY MSTR Arms and displays the selected brightness level of electro-optical dis-
plays in the copilot zone (copilot's SAMU, CMDU No. 4 and 5).
L2 SD& INSTR PNL Arms and displays the selected brightness level of the side and main
instrument panels integral lights on copilot zone.
L3 CTR CNSL Arms and displays the selected brightness level of the central console
integral lights.
L4 NOT USED
L5 DISPLAY TEST Initiates a lamp inspection test on all numeric displays in the flight sta-
tion.
L6 LAMP TEST Initiates a lamp inspection test on all lighted annunciators in the flight
station.
R1 INCR Used to increase the brightness level of the armed lighting element.
R2 DECR Used to decrease the brightness level of the armed lighting element.
R3-R4 NOT USED
R5 PNL Used to enable/disable (OFF/ON) the soft panel.
R6 MC INDEX Branches to the MC INDEX page.

Figure 3J-7 COPILOT LIGHTING page

3J-14
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: The low power colour radar soft panel page provides mode and master power control of the radar
system.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 MASTER Enables or disables (OFF/ON) radar operation.

L2 PSEL Enables selected displays to change or adjust radar modes/functions
(FULL/PART).
L3 MAP Selects MAP mode when FULL is selected on PSEL; MGM mode
when PART is selected on PSEL.
L4 MGM Selects/deselects (OFF/ON) the monopulse ground mapping at all
ranges.
L5 WX Selects/deselects (OFF/ON) the weather avoidance mode of opera-
tion.
L6 WS Selects/deselects (OFF/ON) the windshear mode.
R1 GAIN INCR Not displayed if the radar is off or if selected on and no mode is
selected. If the radar is selected on, the full or partial channel is
selected, and a radar mode is selected, allows adjustment of the com-
puter normalized gain.
R2 GAIN DECR Not displayed if the radar is off or if selected on and no mode is
selected. If the radar is selected on, the full or partial channel is
selected, and a radar mode is selected, allows adjustment of the com-
puter normalized gain.
R3 SCTR Toggles among different sector sizes for radar operating mode: + and -
15, 30, 60, and 90 degrees. Not displayed if the radar is off or if
selected on and no mode is selected. If the radar is selected on, the full
channel is selected, and a radar mode is selected, allows selection of
sector width. Function is disabled when WS is selected.
R4 OFS Selection moves the radar image to the bottom of the screen or centers
around cursor if cursor is active. OFS selection is not available if in WS
or SP mode.
R5 PNL Used to enable/disable (OFF/ON) the soft panel.
R6 MC INDEX Branches to the MC INDEX page.

Figure 3J-8 RADAR page

3J-15 / ( 3J-16 blank )

 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PART 3K. FLIGHT PLANNING PAGES

Contents page Contents page

FLIGHT PLANNING PAGES ............................ 3K-2 ROUTE TO ALTERNATE PAGE

DATA ENTRY ............................................. 3K-45
LEGS/ROUTE PAGES ..................................... 3K-2
ROUTE/LEGS PAGE CONVENTIONS ........ 3K-2 LEGS HISTORY PAGE DATA ENTRY ........... 3K-49
ROUTE PLAN PAGE .................................... 3K-3 LEGS PRIMARY PAGE DATA ENTRY .......... 3K-51
PRIMATY ROUTE PAGE ............................. 3K-6
LEGS TO ALTERNATE PAGE
ROUTE TO ALTERNATE PAGE .................. 3K-9 DATA ENTRY ............................................. 3K-55
LEGS HISTORY PAGE .............................. 3K-10
STORED ROUTE LIST PAGE DATA ENTRY 3K-59
LEGS PRIMARY PAGE .............................. 3K-10
LEGS TO ALTERNATE PAGE ................... 3K-15 WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY .. 3K-61
STORED ROUTE LIST PAGE .................... 3K-18 WAYPOINT DATA 2/2 PAGE DATA ENTRY .. 3K-63
ROUTE HOLD PAGE ................................. 3K-16
WAYPOINT SELECT PAGE DATA ENTRY ... 3K-65
WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 PAGE ..................... 3K-16
WAYPOINT DATA 2/2 PAGE ..................... 3K-17 PROGRESS 1/4 PAGE DATA ENTRY ............ 3K-67
WAYPOINT SELECT PAGE ....................... 3K-18 PROGRESS 2/4 PAGE DATA ENTRY ............ 3K-69
PROGRESS PAGES ...................................... 3K-18 PROGRESS-ETP 3/4 PAGE DATA ENTRY ... 3K-71
PROGRESS 1/4 PAGE .............................. 3K-18 PROGRESS-DIVR 4/4 PAGE DATA ENTRY . 3K-73
PROGRESS 2/4 PAGE .............................. 3K-20
TIME NAV DATA ENTRY ............................... 3K-75
PROGRESS-ETP 3/4 PAGE ...................... 3K-21
PROGRESS-DIVR 4/4 PAGE ..................... 3K-22 DEPARTURE/ARRIVAL INDEX PAGE
TIME NAV PAGE ........................................ 3K-24 DATA ENTRY ............................................. 3K-77

DEPARTURE/ARRIVAL PAGES .................... 3K-25 DEPARTURE RUNWAYS PAGE

DATA ENTRY ............................................. 3K-79
DEPARTURE/ARRIVAL INDEX PAGE ...... 3K-25
DEPARTURE RUNWAYS PAGE ............... 3K-26 DEPARTURE SIDS PAGE DATA ENTRY ...... 3K-81
DEPARTURE SIDS PAGE ......................... 3K-27 DEPARTURE TRANSITIONS PAGE
DEPARTURE TRANSITIONS PAGE .......... 3K-28 DATA ENTRY ............................................. 3K-83
DEPARTURE SID REVIEW PAGE ............. 3K-29 SID REVIEW PAGE DATA ENTRY ................ 3K-85
ARRIVAL RUNWAYS PAGE ...................... 3K-30
ARRIVAL RUNWAYS PAGE DATA ENTRY ... 3K-87
ARRIVAL STARS PAGE ............................ 3K-31
ARRIVAL TRANSITIONS PAGE ................ 3K-31 ARRIVAL STARS PAGE DATA ENTRY ......... 3K-89
ARRIVAL STAR REVIEW PAGE ................ 3K-32 ARRIVAL TRANSITIONS PAGE
ROUTE PLAN PAGE DATA ENTRY .............. 3K-37 DATA ENTRY ............................................. 3K-91

PRIMARY ROUTE PAGE DATA ENTRY ....... 3K-41 STAR REVIEW PAGE DATA ENTRY.............. 3K-93

3K-1
FAM.1C-27J-1A

FLIGHT PLANNING PAGES ROUTE/LEGS PAGES

CNI-MU flight planning pages include route/leg,

departure/arrival, and progress pages (Direct to and ROUTE/LEGS PAGE CONVENTIONS
intercept pages are discussed in Part 3F). The flight The route and legs pages are similar in their layout
planning pages provide for control of legs, waypoints, and display of data. The following conventions apply
and routes. to all the route and legs pages, unless otherwise
The LEGS hard-key (Figure 3-1) on the CNI-MU noted in the specific page descriptions.
(ICDU) provides access to the following legs control
and associated pages (see Figure 3K-1).
Page Layout
Route/Legs pages include:
ROUTE PAGE NUMBERING
• RTE 1/3 page,
The route pages are laid out sequentially (Route Plan,
• RTE 2/3 page, Primary Route, and Route To Alternate), for each of
the two routes.
• RTE ALTN page,
The Route Plan page displays the airfield and certain
• LEGS HIST page, parameters for the route. The Primary Route page dis-
plays the waypoints contained in the primary flight
• LEGS page, plan. Typically more than one Primary Route page is
• LEGS ALTN page, needed to display the entire route. Multiple Primary
Route pages are then created, permitting the entire
• WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 page, list of route Waypoints to be laid out sequentially. The
Route To Alternate page content is identical to the Pri-
• WAYPOINT DATA 2/2 page,
mary Route page, except that the legs displayed are
• STORED ROUTE LIST page, in the route-to-alternate destination portion of the flight
plan. Additional Route To Alternate pages are created,
• WAYPOINT SELECT page. as needed, to display the entire route-to-alternate
Departure/Arrival pages include: destination.
For example, if a flight plan needs 2 Primary Route
• DEP/ARR INDEX page, pages to display all of the route waypoints, and 3
• DEPARTURE RWYS page, Route To Alternate pages to display the waypoints in
the route-to-alternate destination, the page numbering
• DEPARTURE SIDS page, would be:
• DEPARTURE TRANS page, • Route Plan page 1/6,
• SID REVIEW page, • Primary Route page 2/6,
• ARRIVAL RWYS page, • Primary Route page 3/6,
• ARRIVAL STARS page, • Route To Alternate page 4/6,
• ARRIVAL TRANS page, • Route To Alternate page 5/6,
• STAR REVIEW page. • Route To Alternate page 6/6.
Progress pages include: LEGS PAGE NUMBERING
• PROGRESS 1/4 page, The legs pages (Legs History, Legs Primary, and Legs
• PROGRESS 2/4 page, To Alternate) are also laid out sequentially.
The Legs History page displays the last five waypoints
• PROGRESS-ETP 3/4 page, sequenced. The Legs Primary page displays the cur-
rent waypoints in the primary route. Multiple Legs Pri-
• PROGRESS-DIVR 4/4 page,
mary pages may be needed to display all of the legs
• TIME NAV page. sequentially, and these pages are created as needed.
The Legs To Alternate pages are essentially the same
as the Legs Primary pages, except the legs displayed
are the legs to the alternate destination.

3K-2
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

For example, if 3 Legs Primary pages are needed to A route changes from the inactive state to the provi-
display the Legs in the flight plan and 2 Legs To Alter- sional state when the ACTIVATE function is selected
nate pages are needed to display the legs in the for that route.
route-to-alternate destination, the page numbering
would be:
Provisional Route
• Legs History 1/6 page,
The purpose of the provisional route is to provide for a
• Legs Primary 2/6 page, two step process in making route changes that affect
the guidance of the aircraft. A provisional route is indi-
• Legs Primary 3/6 page,
cated in flight plan page titles by the word MOD in
• Legs Primary 4/6 page, front of the page name (for example, MOD RTE 1).
Only one provisional route may exist at a time. When
• Legs To Alternate 5/6 page, a displayed route is provisional, the green execute
• Legs To Alternate 6/6 page. (EXEC) light is illuminated, and the corresponding
route pages display ERASE adjacent to soft-key L6.
A provisional route is created in one of two ways.
Origin First, selecting the ACTIVATE function in an inactive
route creates a provisional route. This provisional
Before any destination or waypoint data can be
route can then be modified, and as this is done, it
entered into the flight plan, the origin must be entered.
remains a provisional route.
If an origin has not been entered, the Primary RTE
Second, an active route can be modified, at which
and RTE ALTN page do not exist. The LEGS Primary
point a provisional route with the modifications is cre-
page exists, but all data fields are blank, and the
ated. When this occurs, the original active route
LEGS ALTN page does not exist.
remains intact to provide guidance to the aircraft.
Once an origin has been entered, the Primary RTE
Again, changes may be made to this provisional
page is created and accessible and the LEGS Primary
route, and it remains a provisional route. Selecting the
page allows for data entry. The Route and Legs pages
ERASE function when the provisional route exists
to the alternate destination will still not exist. Once the
deletes the provisional route. The page being dis-
destination has been entered, all route and legs
played reverts back to displaying the active route,
pages will be accessible.
without any modifications made to the provisional.
Selecting the EXEC hard-key when a provisional
route exists changes the route state from provisional
ROUTE PLAN PAGE
to active. If, for example, route 2 is active, and route 1
The route pages are laid out sequentially (Route Plan, is provisional, route 2 becomes inactive and route 1
Primary Route, and Route To Alternate), for each of becomes active when the EXEC hard-key is pressed.
the two routes selectable from the index page.
The Route Plan page (Figure 3K-2) displays the
departure, destination, and alternate airfields. The
Active Route
Route Plan page is also used to retrieve a route from An active route is indicated by the word ACT preced-
the database or store a custom route to the database ing the page title of the route or legs page (for exam-
and to define some parameters for the route. ple, ACT RTE 1). Only one route may be active at one
The CNI-MS has the capability for two independent time. Only the active route is capable of providing
routes. These routes are referred to as Route 1 and guidance for the aircraft.
Route 2. At any time, only one route may be active
and providing guidance information for the aircraft.
Upon power-up, neither route is active. There are ERASE/EXEC Logic
three possible route states: inactive, provisional, and As described above, the ERASE function and the
active. EXEC hard-key allow for erasing or executing flight
plan changes. These functions operate the same
Inactive Route across all flight plan pages, unless specified otherwise
on the individual page description. The ERASE func-
Upon power-up, both routes default to the inactive tion is selectable, and the EXEC hard-key illuminates
state. The route and legs page titles indicate, for and is selectable, only when a route is provisional,
example, RTE 1 with no MOD or ACT modifier. Flight and a page displaying information for that route is dis-
plan changes that are made to an inactive route go played on the CNI-MU (ICDU).
directly into the route; no provisional route is created.

3K-3
FAM.1C-27J-1A

The pages which provide for these functions are: • DEPARTURE RWYS,
• ROUTE page, • DEPARTURE SIDS,
• DEPARTURE TRANS,
• RTE ALTN page,
• SID REVIEW,
• LEGS page, • ARRIVAL RWYS,
• LEGS ALTN page, • ARRIVAL STARS,

• All WAYPOINT DATA pages,

• ARRIVAL TRANS,
• STAR REVIEW,
• All CARP pages,
• CUSTOM DATA.
• All SAR pages,
• All Departure pages, Display
• All Arrival pages, L1 - ORIGIN WAYPOINT
• All Landing Zone pages, The Origin may be entered by entering a Stored
Route that has an Origin (using L2) or by typing a
• RENDEZVOUS page. valid waypoint identifier in the CNI-MU (ICDU) scratch
Selecting ERASE deletes the provisional route and pad and pressing L1. Valid waypoint entries that are
restores the display of the active route. not contained in the database result in the display of
Selecting EXEC changes the provisional route into an the CUSTOM DATA page.
active route, and the EXEC light extinguishes. If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier
Before any destination or waypoint data can be exists in the databases (navigation and custom), the
entered into the flight plan, the origin must be entered. WAYPOINT SELECT page is displayed. Upon return
If an origin has not been entered, the Primary RTE from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with a waypoint
and RTE ALTN pages do not exist. The Route page is selected, the selected waypoint is displayed adjacent
cleared when the navigation database is recycled by to L1. Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT
pressing soft-key L2 on the POWER UP page or when page when a waypoint is not selected, the CNI-SP
the flight is completed. displays the entry in the scratch pad.
A valid entry that is accepted over a previous entry
clears all existing waypoints, runways, destinations,
NOTE
and en route procedures from the route. Entry of an
The navigation database can only be re- origin into an active route while airborne is not permit-
cycled when the aircraft is on the ground. ted, and attempted entries result in the display of a
Attempting to recycle in the air causes a NOT ALLOWED message.
NOT ALLOWED error message to be dis- Pressing L1 downselects the Origin, if it exists, into
played. the scratch pad. Deletion of the Origin is not allowed
and results in the display of an INVALID DELETE
message.
Page Access
L2 - RETRIEVE ROUTE
a. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the Primary
Route page. The default display for Route Retrieval is a series of
dashes. Entry of a valid Route Identifier into the CNI-
b. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the Route
MU (ICDU) scratch pad and then pressing L2 displays
To Alternate page.
the database stored origin, destination, and en route
c. Select the ROUTE prompt on the WAYPOINT SE- procedures (airways) on the appropriate Route pages,
LECT page (available if the WAYPOINT SELECT where applicable.
page was accessed from the RTE (Route Plan) All previously selected procedures, airports, runways,
page). etc., are cleared and replaced with the stored route. If
the entry is not found in the STORED ROUTE LIST,
d. Select the ROUTE soft-key on any of the following the error message NOT IN DATABASE is displayed.
pages: Deletion of the Retrieved Route is not allowed and
• INDEX 1/2, results in the display of an INVALID DELETE mes-
• LEGS, sage. Once a Stored Route has been entered, route
modifications do not alter the Retrieve Route display.

3K-4
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

The display adjacent to L2 returns to dashes when- If LEGS is displayed, pressing L6 branches to the
ever the origin airport is changed (via L1 entry). LEGS, LEGS ALTN, or DIR/INTC page where the
waypoint adjacent to L1 is displayed.
L3 - STORE ROUTE
R1 - DESTINATION
The current flight plan can be stored using L3. If the
displayed flight plan contains no Origin, L3 is not oper- An Origin must be entered before a Destination can
ational and the display adjacent to L3 defaults to a be entered. The display adjacent to R1 is blank if no
series of dashes. Origin exists. Once an Origin does exist, dashes are
Valid entry formats are Stored Route names. Entering displayed adjacent to R1 until a valid entry has been
a Stored Route name stores the current flight plan in accepted. Entry of a valid waypoint whose identifier is
the stored route list under the entered name, and the not contained in the database results in a branch to
Stored Route name is displayed adjacent to L2. the CUSTOM DATA page for definition of the identi-
If the entered name already exists in the stored route fier. Destination airport entries may be made at any
list, the message ROUTE ALREADY EXISTS is dis- time, regardless of whether the route is active or the
played, and the route will not be stored. aircraft is airborne.
If the route list is full, attempting to store the route If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier
generates a LIST FULL message, and the route will exists in the databases (navigation and custom), the
not be stored. CNI-MU branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page.
The display adjacent to L3 returns to dashes when- Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with
ever the Origin airport is changed (via L1 entry). a waypoint selected, the waypoint is displayed adja-
Pressing L3 downselects the Route Identifier, if it cent to R1. Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT
exists, into the scratch pad. page when a waypoint is not selected, the CNI-MU
(ICDU) displays the entry in the scratch pad.
L4 - RUNWAY Entry of any valid Destination identifier using R1
Valid entries are airport runways contained in the nav- causes any STAR, STAR transition, approach, or
igation database. If no origin airport is displayed adja- approach transition associated with the previous des-
cent to L1, L4 is not operational. tination airport to be deleted.
If an origin airport has been entered, a series of The newly entered Destination is displayed adjacent
dashes is displayed adjacent to L4 until a Runway has to R1, replacing the previous Destination. If the air-
been entered. If the entry is not contained in the data- craft is airborne and the aircraft is active on a leg con-
base for the entered origin airport, NOT IN DATA tained in an approach, approach transition, STAR, or
BASE message is displayed. STAR transition, entry of a valid Destination causes all
Valid Runway identifiers may be transferred from the approach procedures to be deleted with the exception
DEPARTURES page. The Runway may be overwrit- of the active waypoint.
ten by manual entry only when the entry is compatible R2 - ALTERNATE DESTINATION
with the selected SID or when no SID has been
entered. Alternate Destination entries may be made using R2
If a valid Runway which is not compatible with the SID as long as a destination exists in the route. If no desti-
is entered, RUNWAY N/A FOR SID message is dis- nation exists, the display adjacent to R2 is blank. If a
played. A Runway entry causing one of the above destination does exist, then dashes are displayed until
messages to be displayed is rejected and no modifi- a valid Alternate Destination has been entered.
cation to the flight plan is made. Valid entries are the same as Destination entries.
Following the first waypoint sequence on the active Entry of any valid Alternate Destination identifier will
route, runway entries are not allowed. This only cause any STAR, STAR transition, approach, or
occurs on the active route and is independent of approach transition associated with the previous
whether a valid Runway has been entered. Alternate Destination to be deleted.
Deletion of the Alternate Destination results in the
L5 - DEPARTURE/ARRIVAL INDEX BRANCH deletion of the entire alternate flight plan.
If DEP/ARR is shown in large font, selection branches R3 - BANK ANGLE
to the DEP/ARR INDEX page.
The Bank Angle to be used by guidance for waypoint
L6 - ERASE/LEGS BRANCH transitions not in SIDs, STARs, MFPs, holding pat-
If a provisional route exists (with MOD displayed in the terns, and legs that specify a Bank Angle is displayed
title), then ERASE is displayed, and pressing the soft- adjacent to R3.
key L6 removes pending changes.

3K-5
FAM.1C-27J-1A

The default value is displayed in small font. Entered PRIMARY ROUTE PAGE
values are displayed in large font. Deletion of the
Bank Angle restores the default value of 30°. The Primary RTE page provides a means of entering
legs and procedures in the route (Figure 3K-3).
R4 - WAYPOINT SEQUENCE
Route sequencing status is displayed and controlled Page Access
using R4. Selecting AUTO allows guidance to auto-
a. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the first
matically sequence the legs as the flight plan is flown.
Route To Alternate page.
Selecting MAN prohibits any automatic sequencing by
the guidance function when the flight plan is active. b. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the Route
Plan page.
R5 - WAYPOINT TRANSITION TYPE
c. Select the ROUTE prompt on the WAYPOINT SE-
The waypoint transition type is displayed and con- LECT page (available if the WAYPOINT SELECT
trolled using R5. This soft-key allows selection of tran- page was accessed from the Primary Route page).
sition type for waypoint transitions not in SIDs,
STARs, MFPs, and legs whose leg type specify the d. Select the ROUTE prompt on the CUSTOM DATA
transition type. page (available if the CUSTOM DATA page was
accessed from the primary RTE page).
R6 - ACTIVATE/PERF INIT BRANCH
e. Select the ROUTE prompt on the CUSTOM DATA
If the route is inactive, ACTIVATE is displayed adja- LIST page (available if the CUSTOM DATA LIST
cent to R6. Selection creates a provisional route and page was accessed from the Primary RTE page).
illuminates the EXEC hard-key.
If the route is provisional or active, PERF INIT is dis- f. Select the ROUTE prompt on any LEGS page.
played adjacent to R6, and selection of R6 branches
to the PERF INIT WEIGHT page for the specified Display
route.
L1 THROUGH L4 - VIA
The display format and examples of the types of infor-
mation that can be displayed adjacent to L1 through
L4 are shown in the Table 1.

Table 1 VIA Field Display Format

Procedure Route VIA Display Example

SID SID Name CYN9

STAR STAR Name LGC2

En route Transition SID Name. Transition Name, or BOOGA.ALS

Transition Name. STAR Name, or SAF.ROMME
Transition Name TRANS TCC TRANS

Airway Airway Name J5

Direct To DIRECT DIRECT

Hold HOLD HOLD

CNI-MS Approach APPR APPR

SAR SAR SAR

CARP CARP Number CARP1

Initial Fix ----- -----

3K-6
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

The scratch pad entry format determines the action • Place/Bearing/Place/Bearing,

performed by the CNI-MU (ICDU) when a line is
selected. If the scratch pad entry is in the form of • MGRS,
VIA.TO (or VIA (blank), where VIA is a six-character • Latitude/Longitude.
stored route identifier), a route segment is entered
into the flight plan at the insertion point. To add the waypoint to the flight plan, enter the way-
When the scratch pad displays a VIA (blank) format, point in the scratch pad and press the left soft-key on
the entire stored route segment beginning at the way- the appropriate line; the added waypoint is displayed
point that is the insertion point is inserted into the flight on this line.
plan. If the scratch pad entry is in waypoint format, the
single waypoint is entered at the insertion point with When adding a waypoint, the flight plan is searched
DIRECT displayed in the VIA field. forward of the point of insertion. If the waypoint
appears in the flight plan (the Waypoint Identifier,
In order to insert an airway, the start point, the airway Label, and Latitude/Longitude are the same as the
identifier, and the end waypoint must be specified. entered waypoint), all the waypoints between the
The start point is the waypoint preceding the insertion point of insertion and the first appearance of the
point. The airway identifier and end waypoint are added waypoint are deleted.
specified by the AIRWAY.WAYPOINT entry. Both the If the waypoint does not appear forward of the point of
start point and the end point must be on the airway. insertion, the flight plan is opened and the new way-
When two airways exist consecutively in the flight plan point is inserted. Searching forward in the flight plan is
having the same Airway Identifier but are in opposite restricted to the portion of the flight plan being modi-
directions of flight, the airways are displayed sepa- fied (either the primary flight plan or the alternate flight
rately. plan).

Inserting a stored route is accomplished by entering A Waypoint Identifier in the flight plan can be used to
the stored route identifier. The end point along the define the “place” in a place/bearing/distance entry.
stored route can also be specified. This allows inser- The identifier is copied to the scratch pad by selecting
tion of only a portion of a stored route. the left soft-key adjacent to the chosen waypoint.
The form of the entry is STORED ROUTE The “/bearing/distance” is then entered following the
NAME.WAYPOINT. When a stored route is inserted, identifier to complete the place/bearing/distance entry.
flight planning takes the active flight plan waypoint
prior to point of insertion and searches forward in the If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier
stored route for that waypoint. If the waypoint is found exists in the databases (navigation and custom), the
in the stored route, the waypoints prior to it in the CNI-SP branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page.
stored route are not inserted. Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with
a waypoint selected, the CNI-SP uses the selected
Flight planning also takes the specified end point or waypoint in the waypoint identifier field.
last waypoint of the stored route and searches for- Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page
ward of the point of insertion in the selected flight when a waypoint is not selected, the CNI-SP displays
plan. If the last waypoint is found, the waypoints prior the entry in the scratch pad.
in the active flight plan are deleted. Entry of a stored
route that is not in the database results in the error A single waypoint can be deleted from the flight plan
message NOT IN DATABASE. using the ROUTE page only if the VIA field displays
DIRECT. Waypoint deletion is accomplished using the
A single waypoint may be added to the flight plan. DEL key, which inserts * DELETE * into the scratch
Additional waypoints can be downselected to the pad. After entering * DELETE * in the scratch pad, the
scratch pad or entered in the scratch pad. appropriate left soft-key deletes the associated way-
point. When the waypoint is deleted, the flight plan is
Entered waypoints can be in the form of: closed and linked together. As described above, way-
points can be deleted by entering a waypoint which is
• Waypoint Name, in the flight plan forward of the point of entry.
• Label/Waypoint Name,
Deletion of a waypoint that terminates a procedure or
• Place/Bearing/Distance, an airway results in the entire procedure or airway
being deleted.

3K-7
FAM.1C-27J-1A

When the active waypoint is part of the procedure/air- • Latitude/Longitude,

way to be deleted, then all the waypoints of the proce-
dure/airway except the active waypoint are deleted. • MGRS.
As described above, waypoints can be deleted by When the scratch pad displays a waypoint format and
entering a waypoint or label which is in the flight plan a waypoint is displayed adjacent to R1, R2, R3, or R4,
forward of the point of entry. pressing the appropriate R1 through R4 results in the
waypoint displayed in the scratch pad being inserted
The deletion of an arrival segment, when a landing into the flight plan. The insertion point is the waypoint
zone is defined, results in the removal of the arrival displayed adjacent to the soft-key immediately above
procedure and the retention of the landing zone. Dele- the soft-key pressed. The inserted waypoint displays
tion of a landing zone waypoint (* TP, * SD, * FAF, DIRECT adjacent to its associated L1 through L4.
* GSI, * MAP or * LLnns), when an arrival procedure If the insertion point is part of an airway or stored
is defined, results in the landing zone being deleted route, the line following the inserted waypoint displays
and the arrival procedure being retained. DIRECT in the VIA field. The next waypoint in the air-
way or stored route is displayed in the TO field on that
Deleting a landing zone and an arrival procedure, line. The airway or stored route identifier is displayed
respectively, results in the deletion of the landing in the VIA field of the next line, and the TO waypoint in
zone, arrival procedure and any discontinuities the airway is displayed adjacent to R1, R2, R3, or R4.
beyond the last waypoint in the flight plan.
The VIA field displays blanks and the TO field will dis- A Waypoint Identifier in the flight plan can be used to
play the runway associated with the arrival procedure define the “place” in a place/bearing/distance entry.
when the arrival procedure and the landing zone are The identifier is copied to the scratch pad by selecting
deleted, respectively. the right soft-key adjacent to the chosen waypoint.
The “/bearing/distance” is then entered following the
L5 - DEPARTURE/ARRIVAL INDEX BRANCH identifier to complete the place/bearing/distance entry.
When DEP/ARR is shown in large font, selection
branches to the DEP/ARR INDEX page. If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier
exists in the databases (navigation and custom), the
L6 - ERASE/LEGS BRANCH CNI-SP branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page.
Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with
If the route is provisional (with MOD displayed in the a waypoint selected, the CNI-SP uses the selected
title), then ERASE is displayed adjacent to L6. Selec- waypoint adjacent to the soft-key that was pressed to
tion deletes the provisional route, extinguishes the initiate the branch to the WAYPOINT SELECT page.
EXEC light, and returns the route to its previous state Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page
(either inactive or active). when a waypoint is not selected, the CNI-SP displays
If the route is not provisional, LEGS is displayed adja- the entry in the scratch pad.
cent to L6 and pressing L6 branches to the LEGS Pri- If the waypoint is not defined in the database, a
mary page. branch to the CUSTOM DATA page results.
R1 THROUGH R4 - TO
When a Waypoint Identifier is displayed adjacent to
The last Waypoint Identifier contained in the proce- R1 through R4, a two character label can be added by
dure displayed adjacent to L1 through L4 is displayed entering the label at the soft-keys. The label cannot be
adjacent to R1 through R4. No entry can be made deleted once entered without deleting the waypoint.
adjacent to R1 through R4 unless an entry is first The label can be changed by entering the new label
made using L1 through L4. followed by “/” at the soft-key. A label can only be in a
flight plan once. Attempting to enter a label more than
Valid entry formats are in the form of: once results in the error message DUPLICATE
LABEL.
• VIA.TO,
• Waypoint, When a field displays a Waypoint Identifier, pressing
the adjacent soft-key results in the Waypoint Identifier
• NAVAID, being copied to the scratch pad.
• Airfield,
A single waypoint can be deleted from the flight plan
• Place/Bearing/Distance, using the ROUTE page only if the VIA field displays
DIRECT.
• Place/Bearing/Place/Bearing,

3K-8
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Waypoints are deleted by pressing the DEL key, to If the route is provisional or active, PERF INIT is dis-
insert * DELETE * into the scratch pad, and then played adjacent to R6, and selection of R6 branches
pressing the soft-key adjacent to the associated way- to the PERF INIT WEIGHT page for the specified
point. When the waypoint is deleted, the flight plan is route.
closed and linked together. Deletion of a waypoint
which terminates a procedure or an airway results in
the entire procedure or airway being deleted. ROUTE TO ALTERNATE PAGE
When the active waypoint is part of the procedure or
The ROUTE ALTN page provides a means of entering
airway to be deleted, then all the waypoints of the pro-
legs in the route to an alternate destination (Figure
cedure or airway are deleted except the active way-
3K-4). The system creates as many Route To Alter-
point. As described above, waypoints can be deleted
nate pages as required to accommodate the entries
by entering a waypoint or label which is already in the
made to plan a route to an alternate destination. The
flight plan forward of the point of entry.
Route To Alternate page exists only when a destina-
tion is entered on the Route Plan page.
The deletion of an arrival segment, when a landing
zone is defined, results in the removal of the arrival
procedure and the retention of the landing zone. Dele- Page Access
tion of a landing zone waypoint (* TP, * SD, * FAF,
* GSI, * MAP or * LLnns), when an arrival procedure a. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the Route
is defined, results in the landing zone being deleted Plan page.
and the arrival procedure being retained. b. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the last Pri-
mary Route page.
A discontinuity may be cleared by first pressing the
DEL key, then pressing the right soft-key adjacent to c. Select the ROUTE ALTN (R5) on the Primary RTE
the discontinuity. A discontinuity defined by a data- page.
base SID or STAR procedure or the discontinuity pre-
d. Select a waypoint on the WAYPOINT SELECT
ceding a runway cannot be cleared and NOT
page when the WAYPOINT SELECT page was ac-
ALLOWED will be displayed.
cessed from the ROUTE ALTN page.
When the TO field is not blank, entry of an airway or e. Select the ROUTE prompt on the LEGS ALTN
stored route is allowed using the appropriate right page.
soft-key for the TO field. Operation is identical to that
described previously for entry of an airway segment
using left soft-keys. Display
L1 THROUGH L4 - VIA
When the scratch pad displays a VIA.TO format, the
insertion point is the waypoint displayed in the TO Entry, selection, and deletion of data in the VIA field
field in the line immediately above the selected soft- are as described on the Primary Route page for L1
key. The route segment between the insertion point through L4. All operations are the same as on the Pri-
and the ending waypoint is inserted into the flight plan. mary Route page, except that operations here apply
When the scratch pad displays a VIA (blank), where to the route to alternate destination.
VIA is a six-character stored route identifier, the entire
stored route segment beginning at the waypoint that is L5 - DEPARTURE/ARRIVAL INDEX BRANCH
the insertion point is inserted into the flight plan. When DEP/ARR is shown in large font, selection
branches to the DEP/ARR INDEX page for the route
R5 - ROUTE TO ALTERNATE BRANCH
specified in the title.
If the flight plan contains a destination, ROUTE ALTN
is displayed adjacent to R5, and pressing R5 L6 - ERASE/LEGS BRANCH
branches to the RTE ALTN page for the specified If the route is provisional (with MOD displayed in the
route indicated in the title. title), then ERASE is displayed adjacent to L6. Selec-
tion deletes the provisional route, extinguishes the
R6 - ACTIVATE/PERF INIT BRANCH
EXEC light, and returns the route to its previous state
If the route is inactive, ACTIVATE is displayed adja- (either inactive or active).
cent to R6. Selection creates a provisional route and If the route is not provisional, LEGS is displayed adja-
illuminates the EXEC hard-key. cent to L6 and pressing L6 branches to the LEGS Pri-
mary page.

3K-9
FAM.1C-27J-1A

R1 THROUGH R4 - TO When data is present in L1 and R1 and a waypoint

sequence occurs, the data at L1 and R1 is discarded,
Entry, selection, and deletion of data in the TO field and L2 through L5 and R2 through R5 data are shifted
are as described on the Primary Route page for R1 into L1 through L4 and R1 through R4. The left soft-
through R4. All operations are the same as on the Pri- keys (L1 through L5) may be used to downselect a
mary Route page, except that operations here apply label/waypoint. Otherwise, all soft-keys are not opera-
to the route to alternate destination. tional.
R5 - ARM ALTERNATE L6 - PROGRESS BRANCH, ERASE AND EXIT
When at least one waypoint exists in the route to alter- HOLD PROMPTS
nate flight plan, ARM ALTN is displayed adjacent to ERASE and EXIT HOLD prompts if a provisional
R5 in large font. Otherwise, it is displayed in small exists (MOD is displayed in the title), then ERASE will
font. Selection, when displayed in large font, results in be displayed. If a provisional does not exist, EXIT
the flight plan to the alternate destination being HOLD will be displayed if the route is active, and
appended to the end of the existing primary flight plan. either a holding pattern is being flown or a hold will
become the active leg within 1 minute.
R6 - ACTIVATE/PERF INIT BRANCH
When ERASE or EXIT HOLD is not displayed, a
If the route is inactive, ACTIVATE is displayed adja- PROGRESS page prompt will be displayed.
cent to R6. Selection creates a provisional route and Selection of EXIT HOLD prior to entering holding will
illuminates the EXEC hard-key. generate a provisional flight plan and delete the hold-
If the route is provisional or active, PERF INIT is dis- ing pattern from the provisional route.
played adjacent to R6, and selection of R6 branches Selection of EXIT HOLD while holding will generate a
to the PERF INIT WEIGHT page for the specified provisional flight plan where the hold is exited.
route. Selection of PROGRESS, CARP PROG, or SAR
PROG branches to the respective progress page.

LEGS HISTORY PAGE R6 - BRANCH TO ROUTE PAGE

The Legs History page displays historical leg informa- Selection of R6 branches to the Primary Route page.
tion for the last five waypoints sequenced (Figure 3K- The route number being branched to will be the route
5). number displayed.

Page Access LEGS PRIMARY PAGE

a. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the Legs The Legs Primary page (Figure 3K-6) displays legs
Primary page. and leg data in the primary portion of the flight plan.
b. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the last
Legs To Alternate page. Page Access
a. Press the LEGS hard-key (Figure 3-1).
Display
The route number on the accessing page will be the NOTE
route number on LEGS HIST page. The route data to be displayed will be de-
If the route is inactive, MOD will be displayed in title. termined at the time the LEGS hard-key is
Otherwise, the route is active and ACT is displayed. pressed:
L1 THROUGH L5, R1 THROUGH R5 - • If a provisional route exists, that route
HISTORICAL LEGS number is displayed.
Legs History page displays the last five waypoints • If access was not from the LEGS
sequenced. When a waypoint is sequenced, the hard-key, the route number on the
sequenced waypoint along with its associated data page which accessed this page will
are displayed adjacent to L5 or R5. Subsequent way- be the route number displayed.
point sequences continue to fill the page data one line
at a time from the bottom up.

3K-10
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

b. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the Legs a. If the leg is a heading leg, then the specified head-
History page. ing will be displayed. The FP MAGNETIC VARIA-
TION of the previous waypoint will be used to
c. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the first display a magnetic heading.
Legs To Alternate page.
b. If the leg is a CF, DF, or FA, then the leg’s Course
d. Select the LEGS prompt on the Primary Route To will be displayed. The FP MAGNETIC VARIA-
page. The LEGS page displayed will contain the TION of the current waypoint will be used to dis-
waypoint displayed as the first waypoint on the Pri- play a magnetic course.
mary Route page. If the first waypoint on the
ROUTE page is the termination of a procedure, the c. If the leg is a TF, then the leg’s Course From will
LEGS page displayed will display the first waypoint be displayed. The FP MAGNETIC VARIATION of
of that procedure. the previous waypoint will be used to display a
magnetic course.
Display d. If the leg is a holding pattern, then the course of the
inbound leg will be displayed followed by the turn
Legs Primary pages are created as required to display direction of the hold (“L” for a left turn and “R” for
the entire route. If the flight is completed and a route is right). This actually extends the bearing data field
active, the active route will clear. one column to the right. Since leg distance is in-
L1 THROUGH L5 - WAYPOINT INFORMATION valid in this case, there is no loss of display area.
e. If the leg is an IF and therefore has no defined
Each waypoint displays procedure information. The
course, small font dashes “---T”, “---°”, or “---G” will
displayed waypoint bearing is dependent upon the leg
be displayed.
type.
The Table 2 describes the procedure information dis-
played in the header.

Table 2 Procedure Display on Legs Page

Procedure Legs Page Display Example

SID SID Name CYN9

STAR STAR Name LGC2

En route Transition Transition Name ALS

Airway Airway Name J5

Direct To DIR DIR

Hold HOLD HOLD

CNI-MS Approach APPR + Number APPR1

SAR SAR + Number SAR3

CARP CARP + Number CARP2

Track to Fix Blank

Initial Fix ----- -----

When the waypoint adjacent to L1 is the active way- When the Desired Course is displayed referenced to
point and the leg type is not VM, the bearing will be magnetic north, the magnetic variation for the air-
the guidance Desired Course. If the provisional is dis- craft’s present position will be used.
played and the leg type of the first waypoint is not VM, If the Desired Course is not valid, small font dashes
Desired Course will be displayed for the first waypoint. will be displayed for the active waypoint bearing.

3K-11
FAM.1C-27J-1A

When the waypoint in L1 is the first waypoint in the

inactive flight plan, the computations for the display
fields will use the “From” waypoint.

The Table 3 describes the identifiers displayed for

SAR and CARP procedures.

Table 3 Identifiers for Mission Procedures

Procedure Type Display Identifier

SAR SAR Approach Waypoint SARAW

Initial Point SARIP

Constructed Waypoint SARn

Exit Point * EXIT

CARP Turn Point * TP

Release Point * CARP

DZ Escape * DZESC

RENDEZVOUS Rendezvous Intercept RZnn

APPROACH/LZ Turn Point * TP

Slow Down SD

Final Approach Fix * FAF

Glideslope Intercept * GSI

Missed Approach Point * MAP

Landing Zone * LZnns

Single waypoints can be added to the flight plan. Addi- A waypoint identifier in the flight plan can be used to
tions can be line selected to the scratch pad or define the “place” in a place/bearing/distance entry.
entered in the scratch pad. To add the waypoint to the The identifier is copied to the scratch pad by selecting
flight plan, a soft-key is used on the appropriate line the left soft-key adjacent to the chosen waypoint.
and the added waypoint is displayed on this line. The “/bearing/distance” is then entered following the
When adding a waypoint, the flight plan is searched identifier to complete the place/bearing/distance entry.
forward of the point of insertion. If the waypoint
appears in the flight plan (the Waypoint Identifier, If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier
Label, and Latitude/Longitude are the same as the exists in the databases (navigation and custom), the
entered waypoint), all the waypoints between the CNI-SP branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page.
point of insertion and the first appearance of the Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with
added waypoint are deleted. a waypoint selected, the CNI-SP uses the selected
If the waypoint does not appear forward of the point of waypoint in the waypoint identifier field.
insertion, the flight plan is opened and the new way- Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page
point inserted. Searching forward in the flight plan is when a waypoint is not selected, the CNI-SP displays
restricted to the portion of the flight plan being modi- the entry in the scratch pad.
fied. That is either the primary flight plan or the alter-
nate flight plan. Route discontinuities are displayed by overwriting
data fields with the text string “>>DISCONTINUITY<<“
centered on this row. Data in the waypoint identifier
field will display dashes.

3K-12
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

NOTE If no ending waypoint is specified (scratch pad dis-

plays VIA (blank)), the entire stored route segment is
A discontinuity may be removed with the inserted into the flight plan starting with the waypoint
route bypass operation. immediately preceding the selected waypoint.
A TF leg is constructed from the last waypoint in the
A discontinuity will not be displayed following a VM inserted route segment, and the next waypoint in the
leg. flight plan.

When holding patterns are displayed on the Legs All the legs in the route segment identified will be
page, the bearing field will overwrite the distance field, added to the flight plan, and the number of LEGS
which is blank. The bearing field displays either pages will be increased as necessary to display all the
“XXXTC”, “XXX°C” or “XXXGC” where “XXX” is the legs of the flight plan. However, the LEGS page that
inbound course of the holding pattern, and “C” is the was being displayed when the insertion was per-
turn direction of the hold, either “R” or ”L”. formed will continue to be displayed.
The Page title will display MOD LEGSn and the
When a heading leg is displayed on the Legs page, ERASE prompt will be displayed in data field until the
data fields are overwritten by the text string “FLY EXEC hard-key is depressed.
XXX° OR AS ASSIGNED”, in small font.
Selection of the ERASE prompt will result in removal
NOTE of the inserted route segment, and any other pending
flight plan modifications, and removal from MOD from
If bearings are being displayed in true the page title. Selection of a blank field will be not
heading, the degree symbol is replaced operational. Insertion at a waypoint that is not
with a “T”. included in the route identified in the scratch pad will
be not operational, and will result in the message
Single waypoints can be deleted from the flight plan. WAYPOINT NOT FOUND being displayed.
Waypoint deletion is accomplished by utilizing the
DEL key, which inserts * DELETE * into the scratch Attempting to insert a stored route or airway segment
pad. After entering * DELETE * in the scratch pad, with an ending waypoint that is not in the stored route
soft-key selecting deletes the associated waypoint. or airway identified will be not operational and will
When the waypoint is deleted, the flight plan is closed result in the message ENDING WPT NOT FOUND
and linked together. As described above, waypoints being displayed. Attempted insertion of a route that is
can be deleted by entering a waypoint which is in the not in the database will result in the message INVALID
flight plan forward of the point of entry. ENTRY being displayed.
A discontinuity may be cleared by first pressing the
Strings of waypoints may be added. When a route DEL key, then pressing the left soft-key adjacent to
identifier and last waypoint are entered into the the discontinuity. A discontinuity defined by a data-
scratch pad in the VIA.TO format, selection of the soft- base SID or STAR procedure or the discontinuity pre-
key next to a waypoint immediately following a way- ceding a runway will not be cleared and NOT
point that is in the route that is identified in the scratch ALLOWED message will be displayed. Deletion when
pad, will result in the segment of that route lying data field contains active waypoint, dashes or blanks
between the waypoint immediately preceding the is not operational.
selected waypoint, and the last waypoint (as entered
in the scratch pad) being added to the flight plan. Data fields centered on the page displays the com-
Flight planning searches forward in the flight plan for puted curve path leg distance for certain leg types.
the ending waypoint (as entered in the scratch pad). If Distance To Go (DTG) is displayed for leg distance if
the ending waypoint is in the flight plan, the segment the waypoint is active. Blanks will be displayed if the
of the flight plan between the insertion point, and the DTG is invalid for the active waypoint. If the provi-
ending waypoint is deleted, and replaced with the sional is displayed, DTG is displayed for the first way-
route segment just entered. point. Blanks are also displayed for leg distance if the
leg is a holding pattern or IF. Note that leg distances
If the VIA in the scratch pad is an airway, an endpoint may be blank until the CNI-SP has computed a value.
must be entered. If the VIA in the scratch pad is a
stored route, the endpoint is optional.

3K-13
FAM.1C-27J-1A

A manual sequence operation can be accomplished R1 THROUGH R5 - TIME, SPEED, AND

by entering an active flight plan waypoint identifier or ALTITUDE
label/waypoint into L1 when:
If the aircraft is on the ground, data displays the ETE
a. Aircraft is airborne. (Estimated Time En route). If the aircraft is airborne,
then this field displays ETA (Estimated Time of
b. L1 contains the active waypoint. Arrival). Blanks are displayed if the leg is a holding
c. Waypoint identifier is not the * CARP or * DZESC pattern or IF.
waypoint of a CARP, and the waypoint identifier is Adjacent data fields display the descent angle/speed,
not the * SD, * FAF, * GSI, * MAP, or * LZnn way- and altitude for the waypoint. Pilot entered or proce-
point of an approach. dure constraint data has priority over predicted data.
Altitude constraints will be either AT OR ABOVE, AT
The error message NOT ALLOWED is displayed OR BELOW, or AT constraints. Window constraints
when: cannot be entered, but are defined in SID and STAR
a. Attempting a manual sequence with a waypoint procedures. If a waypoint has an altitude window, the
identifier or label/waypoint not specified in the flight higher altitude will be displayed if the waypoint is in
plan. climb, and the lower altitude will be displayed if the
waypoint is in cruise or descent. Constraints may be
b. Waypoint identifier is the * CARP or * DZESC way- pilot entered or Mission Plan generated.
point of a CARP.
a. If there is no waypoint identifier or if there are dash-
c. Waypoint identifier is the * SD, * FAF, * GSI, es in the opposite LEGS page field, then blanks will
* MAP, or * LZnn waypoint of an approach. be displayed in the corresponding constraint field.
Selection of L1 when data displays the active way- b. If there is a valid waypoint and the waypoint has a
point is not allowed. When the waypoint in L1 is the constraint (descent angle/speed or altitude) speci-
active waypoint, delete is not operational. The scratch fied, then the constraint(s) will be displayed in large
pad entry format determines the action performed by font in these data field(s).
the CNI-SP when a line is selected. If the scratch pad
entry is in the form of VIA.TO (or VIA (blank), where c. If there is a valid waypoint, but there are no perfor-
VIA is a six-character stored route identifier), a route mance speed or altitude predictions displayed in
segment is entered into the flight plan at the insertion the constraint field, then dashes will be displayed.
point. When the scratch pad displays a VIA (blank) Predicted data will remain dashes until perfor-
format, the entire stored route segment beginning at mance predictions are available.
the waypoint that is the insertion point is inserted into d. If there is a valid waypoint displayed, and if perfor-
the flight plan. If the scratch pad entry is in waypoint mance predictions are valid for the waypoint, the
format the single waypoint is entered at the insertion predictions will be displayed in small font.
point.
Selection of the soft-key adjacent to the data field
L6 - PROGRESS BRANCH, ERASE AND EXIT results in the display of the WAYPOINT DATA 1/2
HOLD PROMPTS page corresponding to the waypoint selected on the
LEGS page.
ERASE and EXIT HOLD prompts if a provisional
exists (MOD is displayed in the title), then ERASE will
Entry of a valid Cruise Speed/Cruise Altitude will be
be displayed in data adjacent to L6. If a provisional
displayed in large font. The new Cruise Speed/Alti-
does not exist, EXIT HOLD will be displayed if the
tude will be propagated to the next user defined
route is active, and either a holding pattern is being
speed/altitude. Propagated Cruise Speed/Altitude val-
flown or a hold will become the active leg within 1
ues are not displayed. Cruise Speed entries may be a
minute.
CAS, TAS, or groundspeed. A Cruise Speed
When ERASE or EXIT HOLD is not displayed, a
appended with a “T” is interpreted as a TAS entry. A
PROGRESS page prompt will be displayed.
Cruise Speed appended with a “G” is interpreted as
Selection of EXIT HOLD prior to entering holding will
groundspeed entry. TAS and groundspeed Cruise
generate a provisional flight plan and delete the hold-
Speed entries will be displayed with an appended
ing pattern from the provisional route.
large font “T” or “G”.
Selection of EXIT HOLD while holding will generate a
provisional flight plan where the hold is exited.
Entry of a descent angle without a bottom of descent
Selection of PROGRESS, CARP PROG, or SAR
altitude (constraint altitude) defined at the selected
PROG branches to the respective progress page.
waypoint will result in the INVALID ENTRY message.

3K-14
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Entry of a Descent Angle/Speed and/or Altitude when Display

the selected waypoint is the * CARP waypoint of a
CARP, * SD, * FAF, * GSI, * MAP or * LZnn waypoint L1 THROUGH L6, R1 THROUGH R5 - LEG DATA
of a Landing Zone Approach, and * SARAW or The Legs To Alternate page is identical to Legs Pri-
* SARnn waypoint of a SAR pattern is not allowed and mary page, except that the Legs To Alternate page
will result in NOT ALLOWED being displayed. displays the legs in the route to the alternate destina-
Entry of an Altitude when the selected waypoint is the tion.
* TP waypoint of a Landing Zone Approach is not
allowed and will result in NOT ALLOWED message R6 - BRANCH TO ROUTE TO ALTN PAGE
being displayed.
Selection of R6 branches to the Route To Alternate
Deletion of a large font Cruise Speed/Cruise Altitude page. The route number for the Route To Alternate
will remove the entered Cruise Speed/Cruise Altitude, page will be the route number displayed in title. The
thus reverting to predicted speed and altitude. first waypoint displayed on the Legs To Alternate page
Deletion of the data field when a constraint(s) is will be displayed on the Route To Alternate page.
present will remove the constraint(s) from the way- If the first waypoint on this Legs To Alternate page is
point, thus reverting to predicted speed and altitude. part of a procedure, the procedure containing that leg
Deletion of the data field is not operational when no will be displayed on the Route To Alternate page.
constraint is present.

R6 - BRANCH TO ROUTE PAGE STORED ROUTE LIST PAGE

Selection of R6 branches to the Primary Route page. The STORED ROUTE LIST pages are created as
The route number being branched to will be the route required to display the entire list of routes stored in the
number displayed. The first waypoint displayed on the CNI-MU (ICDU) (Figure 3K-8). Each page can list up
LEGS page will be displayed on the ROUTE page to ten routes.
being branched to.
If the first waypoint on the LEGS page is part of a pro- Page Access
cedure, the procedure containing that leg will be dis-
played on the ROUTE page which is displayed. a. Select the RT LIST prompt on the INDEX 1/2 page.
b. Select the RETRIEVE ROUTE prompt on RTE
LEGS TO ALTERNATE PAGE page 1.

The Legs To Alternate page displays leg information

for the route to the alternate destination (Figure 3K-7). Display
The STORED ROUTE LIST pages are created as
Page Access required to display the entire list of routes stored in the
CNI-SP. The number of routes determines the number
a. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the last of STORED ROUTE LIST pages, with 10 routes
Legs Primary page. shown per page.
Multiple STORED ROUTE LIST pages are distin-
b. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from Legs Histo-
guished by the page number in title. The PREV PAGE
ry page. The route number on the page which ac-
and NEXT PAGE hard-keys are used to move
cessed this page will be the route displayed.
between these multiple pages.
c. Select the LEGS prompt on the Route To Alternate The routes are listed down the left side of the page,
page. The Legs To Alternate page displayed will from top to bottom, then down the right side of the
contain the waypoint displayed as the first way- page.
point on the Route To Alternate page.
L1 - STORED ROUTE
d. Select the LEGS prompt on the WAYPOINT DATA
page. If a route name is present in data adjacent to this soft-
key, selection results in the route name being placed
e. Select the LEGS prompt on the WAYPOINT SE- into the scratch pad.
LECT page (available if the WAYPOINT SELECT If a route name is present in data next to this soft-key,
page was accessed from the LEGS page). delete results in the route being removed from the
stored route list.

3K-15
FAM.1C-27J-1A

The other routes following this route are then moved L2 - WAYPOINT POSITION DEFINITION
up in the list display.
Data adjacent to L2 provides a three-way switch for
L2 THROUGH L5 - STORED ROUTE controlling the waypoints position definition in field
above L2. In LL position the waypoints Latitude/Longi-
Same operation as L1. tude is displayed in field above L2. In MGRS position
the waypoints MGRS coordinates are displayed. In
L6 - INDEX 1/2 PAGE
DEF position the waypoints position, is shown as it
Selection of L6 branches to the INDEX 1/2 page. was defined.

R1 THROUGH R5 - STORED ROUTE L3 AND L4

Same operation as L1. Not operational.

R6 - ROUTE PAGE L5 - HOLD BRANCH PROMPT

If the STORED ROUTE LIST page was accessed When HOLD is displayed in large font, pressing L5
from a route page, data adjacent to R6 will display that branches to the HOLD page.
route number. Otherwise, data displays 1. Selection
branches to RTE page 1 of the route number shown. L6 - ERASE/LEGS BRANCH
If a provisional route exists (with MOD displayed in the
title), then ERASE is displayed, and pressing the soft-
ROUTE HOLD PAGE key L6 removes pending changes.
The Route Hold page displays detailed information If LEGS is displayed, pressing L6 branches to the
about selected holding patterns. See paragraph enti- LEGS, LEGS ALTN, or DIR/INTC page where the
tled HOLD in Section 3E for detailed information waypoint adjacent to L1 is displayed.
about the Route Hold page.
R1 - DESIRED TIME OF ARRIVAL
Predicted Time Of Arrival is normally displayed adja-
WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 PAGE cent to R1. When a Desired Time Of Arrival is entered
in the scratch pad, pressing R1 accepts the time, and
The WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 page displays leg and way-
DES is displayed to the left of TOA.
point information for the flight plan waypoints (Figure
3K-9).
NOTE

Page Access A desired time of arrival may be entered if

the waypoint type is WPT, or the waypoint
a. Select the right soft-key adjacent to a waypoint on is the CARP TP, CARP, SAR IP, or LZ
the Legs History page. runway. Otherwise, NOT ALLOWED
b. Select the right soft-key adjacent to a waypoint on message is displayed. Deleting the de-
the Legs Primary page. sired time of arrival restores the default
predicted TOA.
c. Select the right soft-key adjacent to a waypoint on
the Legs to Alternate page. R2
d. Select the right soft-key adjacent to a waypoint on Not operational.
the Legs DIR/INTC page.
R3 - WINDS
Display Wind direction and velocity may be entered by press-
ing R3.
L1 - WAYPOINT LABEL/NAME
The waypoint label/identifier, and type are displayed NOTE
adjacent to L1.
When the waypoint type is CARP, LZ,
SAR, or RNDZ, the area adjacent to R3 is
blank, and wind entry is not allowed.

3K-16
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

R4 AND R5 L3 - WAYPOINT TRANSITION TYPE

Not operational. Data adjacent to L3 allows selection of transition type
(Curved Path, Radius-Of-Turn, Point-To-Point) for
R6 - MFP BRANCH waypoint transitions not in SIDs, STARs, MFPs, way-
Soft-key R6 functions in the following ways: points before MFPs, and legs whose leg type specify
the transition type.
a. When MFP is displayed in large font and the way-
point type is not CARP, LZ, SAR, or RNDZ, press- L4 - LEG FUEL FLOW
ing R6 branches to the MISSIONS page.
The Leg Fuel Flow is displayed adjacent to L4. If no
b. When MFP is displayed in large font and the way- entry is made and the predicted fuel flow is available,
point type is CARP, pressing R6 branches to the then the predicted fuel flow is displayed.
CARP INIT page.
L5 - LEG FUEL ADJUSTMENT
c. When MFP is displayed in large font and the way-
point type is LZ, pressing R6 branches to the LZ The Leg Fuel Adjustment is displayed adjacent to L5.
INIT page. L6 - ERASE/LEGS BRANCH
d. When MFP is displayed in large font and the way-
If a provisional route exists (with MOD displayed in the
point type is SAR, pressing R6 branches to the
title), then ERASE is displayed, and pressing the soft-
SAR INIT page.
key L6 removes pending changes.
e. When MFP is displayed in large font and the way- If LEGS is displayed, pressing L6 branches to the
point type is RNDZ, pressing R6 branches to the LEGS, LEGS ALTN, or DIR/INTC page where the
Rendezvous page. waypoint adjacent to L1 is displayed.

f. When MFP is displayed in small font, selection is R1 - LEG ETE/ACCUMULATED LEG ETE
not available.
The Leg ETE and Accumulated Leg ETE are dis-
played adjacent to R1.
WAYPOINT DATA 2/2 PAGE
R2 - LEG DISTANCE/ACCUMULATED LEG
The WAYPOINT DATA 2/2 page displays leg and way- DISTANCE
point information for the flight plan waypoints (Figure The Leg Distance/Accumulated Leg Distance are dis-
3K-10). played adjacent to R2.

R3 - WAYPOINT ELEVATION
Page Access
Data adjacent to R3 displays the Waypoint Elevation
Select the NEXT PAGE or PREV PAGE hard-key from
from the database, if available, in small font. If no ele-
the WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 page.
vation is available, dashes are displayed. Valid Way-
point Elevation entries are displayed in large font.
Display
R4 - LEG BURN/LEG WEIGHT
L1 - WAYPOINT LABEL/NAME
The Leg Burn/Leg Weight are displayed adjacent to
The waypoint label and identifier are displayed adja- R4.
cent to L1.
R5 - WAYPOINT FUEL ON BOARD/LEG
L2 - LEG BANK ANGLE ENDURANCE TIME
The Leg Bank Angle to be used by guidance for way- The Waypoint Fuel on Board/Leg Endurance Time are
point transitions not in SIDs, STARs, MFPs, and hold- displayed adjacent to R5.
ing patterns that specify a Leg Bank Angle is
displayed adjacent to R3. R6 - MFP BRANCH
Entered values are displayed in large font. The default Soft-key R6 functions in the following ways:
value is the Flight Plan Bank Angle specified on the
Route Plan page and is displayed in small font. Dele- a. When MFP is displayed in large font and the way-
tion of the Bank Angle restores the default value. point type is not CARP, LZ, SAR, or RNDZ, press-
ing R6 branches to the MISSIONS page.

3K-17
FAM.1C-27J-1A

b. When MFP is displayed in large font and the way- PROGRESS PAGES
point type is CARP, pressing R6 branches to the
CARP INIT page.
c. When MFP is displayed in large font and the way- PROGRESS 1/4 PAGE
point type is LZ, pressing R6 branches to the LZ The PROGRESS 1/4 page displays current aircraft
INIT page. position relative to the active flight plan (Figure 3K-
d. When MFP is displayed in large font and the way- 12).
point type is SAR, pressing R6 branches to the
SAR INIT page. NOTE
e. When MFP is displayed in large font and the way- • The CNI-MS predicted turn path dis-
point type is RNDZ, pressing R6 branches to the tance for performing large course
Rendezvous page. changes (more than 135 degrees)
while in a descent may differ from ac-
f. When MFP is displayed in small font, selection is
tual conditions achieved and increase
not available.
the subsequent active leg distance af-
ter completion of the turn transition.
WAYPOINT SELECT PAGE Crews should be aware an update to
the AHD/BHD times and a variation in
The WAYPOINT SELECT page is used to select the VTK ERROR displayed on the
which reference point is desired when an identifier PROGRESS 2/4 page may occur
with multiple occurrences has been specified (Figure when the aircraft levels out on the
3K-11). new course following transition of a
descent WPT with a large course
change.
Page Access
• The CNI Commanded Speed (CMD
Enter a waypoint identifier when multiple records of
SPD) displayed on the progress page
the identifier exist in the database.
is limited to a minimum computed val-
ue to provide low speed awareness.
Display The minimum value is computed
based on cruise characteristics and
L1 THROUGH L5, R1 THROUGH R5 - FIX does not accurately account for bank
OCCURRENCE DATA angle effects to the stall speeds.
The lines adjacent to soft-keys L1 through L5 display Crews should not use the CNI CMD
the identifier, country code, latitude/longitude, and the SPD as an indication of the stall
frequency or channel (if applicable) of the fixes that speed but simply as a low speed
share a given identifier. awareness indication for the entered
Pressing L1 through L5 adjacent to a displayed lati- cruise speed.
tude/longitude branches back to the previously dis-
played page at the point where the WAYPOINT Page Access
SELECT page was called up.
a. Press the INDX hard-key (Figure 3-1) on the CNI-
L6 MU (ICDU) and then select PROGRESS from the
INDEX 1/2 page.
Not operational.
b. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the
R6 - BRANCH TO CALLING PAGE PROGRESS 2/4 page.
The originating page that called up the WAYPOINT c. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the
SELECT page appears adjacent to R6. Selection of PROGRESS 4/4 page.
R6 branches back to the originating page.
d. Select the PROGRESS 1 on the WAYPOINT SE-
LECT page, (available if the WAYPOINT SELECT
page was accessed from the PROGRESS 1/4
page).

3K-18
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Display If no waypoint is selected on the WAYPOINT SELECT

page, the CNI-SP displays the entered identifier in the
L1 AND R1 - LAST WAYPOINT STATUS scratch pad when returning to the PROGRESS 1/4
The last sequenced waypoint identifier, Actual Alti- page.
tude, Actual Time and Fuel On Board are displayed
L5 - COMMANDED SPEED
across the top of the screen between L1 and R1.
The currently commanded speed or Time Of Arrival
L2 AND R2 - CURRENT (TO) WAYPOINT STATUS (TOA) speed is displayed adjacent to L5.
The active waypoint identifier, Distance To Go, Esti-
mated Time of Arrival at the waypoint or Estimated NOTE
Time En route, and predicted Fuel On Board are dis-
played across the screen between L2 and R2. • If Time Of Arrival speed is valid, the
label adjacent to L5 will change from
CMD SPD to CMD/TOA SPD.
NOTE
• The CNI Commanded Speed (CMD
The ETAs for the active, next, and desti- SPD) displayed on the progress page
nation waypoints are shown if the aircraft is generated based on the aircraft
is airborne and time is valid. Otherwise, current altitude and the altitude se-
ETE is shown. lected on the Reference Set/Warning
panel. The Altitude Reference is cap-
L3 AND R3 - NEXT WAYPOINT STATUS tured on the Progress page and is
The next waypoint identifier, Distance To Go, Esti- displayed as the CMD ALT. If this al-
mated Time of Arrival at the waypoint or Estimated titude is above the current aircraft al-
Time En route, and predicted Fuel On Board are dis- titude, the appropriate climb speed
played across the screen between L3 and R3. from the PERF INIT CLIMB page is
displayed as the CMD SPD. If the
L4 AND R4 - DESTINATION/ALTERNATE CMD ALT is below the current aircraft
WAYPOINT STATUS altitude, then the appropriate descent
speed from the PERF INIT DE-
The destination waypoint identifier, Distance To Go,
SCENT page is displayed. If the CMD
Estimated Time of Arrival at the waypoint or Estimated
ALT matches aircraft altitude, then
Time En route, and predicted Fuel On Board are dis-
the current cruise speed from the
played across the screen between L4 and R4.
PERF INIT CRUISE page is dis-
Data displayed across the screen between L4 and R4
played as the CMD SPD. The CMD
displays data for the active flight plan destination,
SPD is limited to a minimum value
labeled DEST. If the flight plan is provisional, MOD
above stall speed to provide slow
DEST is displayed. Only valid waypoint identifiers
speed awareness. CMD SPD is also
contained in the database may be entered using L4.
limited to a maximum value based on
If the entered identifier is in the active flight plan, the
landing gear and flap position to pro-
label changes to ENROUTE WPT, and the data dis-
vide high speed awareness. They are
played between L4 and R4 pertain to the en route
made available to the pilot to assist
waypoint. If the entered identifier is not in the flight
him in maintaining the CNI vertical
plan, ALTN WPT page is displayed, and the data dis-
flight plan based on the clearance al-
played assumes a direct course to that waypoint.
titude input made using the Refer-
Entry of an identifier not defined in the database gen-
ence Set/Warning panel.
erates the message NOT IN DATABASE.
L6 - COMMANDED ALTITUDE
If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier
exists in the database (navigation and custom), the The currently commanded altitude is displayed adja-
CNI-SP branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page to cent to L6.
allow selection of the desired waypoint. When return-
ing to the PROGRESS 1/4 page after selection of the R5 - VERTICAL PROFILE POINT
desired waypoint on the WAYPOINT SELECT page, If the next Vertical Profile Point is defined, the identi-
the CNI-SP uses the selected waypoint in the Desti- fier, Estimated Time of Arrival and the Distance To Go
nation/Alternate Waypoint field. to the point are displayed adjacent to R5.

3K-19
FAM.1C-27J-1A

R6 - BRANCH TO TIME NAV PAGE L2 - CURRENT CROSSTRACK ERROR

Selection of soft-key R6 branches to the TIME NAV The direction and magnitude of the crosstrack error is
page. displayed adjacent to L2. When sensitive steering is
active, the error is displayed in yards. When sensitive
steering is not active, the error is displayed in nautical
PROGRESS 2/4 PAGE miles.
The PROGRESS 2/4 page displays current aircraft L3 - CURRENT TRUE AIRSPEED
position relative to the active flight plan, and current
speed, wind and temperature information (Figure 3K- The current true airspeed of the aircraft is displayed
13). adjacent to L3.

L4 - CURRENT GROUNDSPEED
NOTE
Current groundspeed of the aircraft is displayed adja-
A speed descent is predicted for all verti- cent to L4.
cal commands entered on the LEGS
page with a “D” altitude suffix. Speed de- L5 - CURRENT STATIC AIR TEMPERATURE
scents begin at the WPT with the vertical
command Top Of Descent (TOD) and Current static air temperature is displayed adjacent to
end at a predicted Bottom Of Descent L5.
(BOD). Path descents are predicted for all
L6 ERASE/CARP PROG/SAR PROG
vertical commands entered on the legs
page with a “C” altitude suffix. Path de- The legend ERASE is displayed adjacent to L6 if a
scents begin at a predicted TOD and ter- provisional flight plan exists. Selection results in the
minate at the WPT with the vertical provisional flight plan being deleted.
command as a BOD. The speed descent If no provisional flight plan exists, and the active way-
BOD will move laterally along the flight point is part of a CARP, then CARP PROG is dis-
plan based on how well the aircraft is played adjacent to L6. Selection branches to the
flown in accordance with the performance CARP PROGRESS page.
initial descent profile speeds and alti- If the active waypoint is part of a SAR, then SAR
tudes. Crews should avoid entering TOD PROG is displayed adjacent to L6. Selection of L6
and BOD vertical commands at adjacent branches to the SAR PROGRESS page.
WPTs unless a cruise segment occurs
between the two descents. When flying R2 - VERTICAL TRACK ERROR
TOD and BOD vertical commands at ad-
The vertical track error, including a positive (+) or neg-
jacent WPTs crews should monitor the
ative (-) sign is displayed adjacent to R2.
NAV-radar display flight plan to ensure
The vertical track error is displayed when flying a ver-
the TOD and BOD WPTs do not cross.
tical path descent, otherwise data display is blank.

Page Access R3 - CROSSTRACK LIMIT TOGGLE

The commanded crosstrack limit status (ON/OFF) is
a. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the
displayed and controlled using R3. The default posi-
PROGRESS-ETP 3/4 page.
tion is ON.
b. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the
PROGRESS 1/4 page. R4 - CROSSTRACK LIMIT
The crosstrack limit is displayed adjacent to R4. The
Display default value is 3.75 NM, but may be changed by a
manual entry. Deletion of an entered value results in
L1 AND R1 - CURRENT WIND the crosstrack limit being restored to its default value.
Current wind information is displayed across the top R5 - POSITION ALERTS
of the screen between L1 and R1. The headwind (H/
WIND) or tailwind (T/WIND) velocity is shown adja- INAV position alert criteria are displayed adjacent to
cent to L1. Wind direction and velocity are shown in R5. Default values are 1.00 NM for POS ALERT 1 and
the center of the screen, and the crosswind (X/WIND) 5.00 NM for POS ALERT 2. The position alert values
component is shown adjacent to R1. may be entered manually.

3K-20
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

POS ALERT 1 values are entered directly. A single If the PROGRESS-ETP 3/4 page is displayed again
entry of POS ALERT 2 requires a leading “/”. If both without selecting one of the waypoint identifiers on the
POS ALERT 1 and POS ALERT 2 are entered simul- WAYPOINT SELECT page, the identifier appears in
taneously, there must be a “/” separating the two val- the scratch pad. If the waypoint identifier is not found
ues. in the flight plan, the message WAYPOINT NOT
Entry of a POS ALERT 1 value that is greater than the FOUND appears in the scratch pad.
POS ALERT 2 value, or entry of a POS ALERT 2
value that is less than the POS ALERT 1 value L2 - FIRST WAYPOINT
causes an INVALID ENTRY scratch pad message to The identifier of the First Waypoint in the flight plan
be displayed. Deletion of a manually entered value following the ETP segment is entered using L2.
causes the default value to be restored. If entry of a first waypoint is attempted without a valid
R6 - FLIGHT COMPLETE last waypoint, a NOT ALLOWED message appears in
the scratch pad.
Pressing R6 when FLT CMPLT is displayed in large If the entered identifier is not found in the database,
font results in the flight complete function being per- the message NOT IN DATABASE is displayed in the
formed, and the FLT CMPLT prompt then changes to scratch pad. If multiple waypoints with the entered
small font. identifier exist in the database (navigation and cus-
tom), the CNI-SP branches to the WAYPOINT
SELECT page. After selecting the desired waypoint
PROGRESS-ETP 3/4 PAGE identifier on the WAYPOINT SELECT page and
returning to the PROGRESS-ETP 3/4 page, the
The PROGRESS-ETP 3/4 page computes and dis-
selected waypoint identifier appears adjacent to L1.
plays Equal Time Point (ETP) information (Figure 3K-
If the PROGRESS-ETP 3/4 page is displayed again
14).
without selecting one of the waypoint identifiers on the
WAYPOINT SELECT page, the identifier appears in
Page Access the scratch pad. If the waypoint identifier is not found
in the flight plan, the message WAYPOINT NOT
a. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the FOUND appears in the scratch pad.
PROGRESS-DIVR 4/4 page.
L3 - ETP SEGMENT DISTANCE
b. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the
PROGRESS 2/4 page. The distance from the last nearest airfield direct to the
last waypoint prior to the ETP segment, along the
c. Select the PROGRESS 3 on the WAYPOINT SE-
flight plan to the first waypoint following the ETP seg-
LECT page, (available when the WAYPOINT SE-
ment, and direct to the first nearest airport is displayed
LECT page was accessed from the PROGRESS-
adjacent to L3.
ETP 3/4 page).
L4 - GROUNDSPEED OUT AND TIME OUT
Display The groundspeed out and time en route from the last
L1 - LAST WAYPOINT waypoint along the flight plan to the first waypoint fol-
lowing the ETP segment are displayed adjacent to L4.
The identifier of the Last Waypoint in the flight plan
prior to entry of the ETP segment is entered using L1. L5 - TIME TO OR PAST ETP
The time to or past the ETP is displayed adjacent to
If the entered identifier is not found in the database L5. If the aircraft is past the ETP, the label TIME PAST
(navigation or custom), the message NOT IN DATA- ETP is displayed and the time past the ETP is shown
BASE is displayed in the scratch pad. below it.
If multiple waypoints with the entered identifier exist in If the aircraft has not reached the ETP, the label TIME
the database (navigation and custom), the CNI-SP TO ETP is displayed and the time to the ETP is shown
branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page. After below it. If the calculated time is invalid, no informa-
selecting the desired waypoint identifier on the WAY- tion is displayed adjacent to L5.
POINT SELECT page and returning to the
PROGRESS-ETP 3/4 page, the selected waypoint
identifier appears adjacent to L1.

3K-21
FAM.1C-27J-1A

L6 - ETP POSITION PROGRESS-DIVR 4/4 PAGE

The ETP position is displayed adjacent to L6. If the The PROGRESS-DIVR 4/4 page displays diversion
position calculation is invalid, no information is dis- (DIVR) waypoint prediction values (Figure 3K-15).
played. Pressing L6 places the ETP position into the
scratch pad.
Page Access
R1 - LAST NEAREST AIRPORT a. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the
R1 enters the identifier of the airport nearest the Last PROGRESS-ETP 3/4 page.
Waypoint prior to the ETP segment. If the entered b. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the
identifier is not found in the database, the message PROGRESS 1/4 page.
NOT IN DATABASE is displayed in the scratch pad.
If multiple airports with the entered identifier exist in c. Select the PROGRESS 4 on the WAYPOINT SE-
the database (navigation and custom), the CNI-SP LECT page, (available when the WAYPOINT SE-
branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page. After LECT page was accessed from the PROGRESS-
selecting the desired airport on the WAYPOINT DIVR 4/4 page).
SELECT page and returning to the PROGRESS-ETP
d. Return from the CUSTOM DATA page when the
3/4 page, the selected airport identifier appears adja-
CUSTOM DATA page was accessed from the
cent to R1.
PROGRESS-DIVR 4/4 page.
If the PROGRESS-ETP 3/4 page is displayed again
without selecting one of the airports on the WAY-
POINT SELECT page, the identifier is displayed in the Display
scratch pad. Deleting the entered waypoint identifier
restores the default airport identifier. L1 - FIRST DIVERSION WAYPOINT

R2 - FIRST NEAREST AIRPORT The First Diversion Waypoint (DIVR1) identifier (navi-
gation or custom data base waypoint only) is entered
The airport nearest the First Waypoint following the and displayed adjacent to L1.
ETP segment is entered using R2. Undefined identi- If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier
fier entries generate the message NOT IN DATA- exists in the databases (navigation and custom), the
BASE. If more than one waypoint with the entered CNI-SP branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page.
identifier exists in the databases (navigation and cus- Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with
tom), the CNI-SP branches to the WAYPOINT a waypoint selected, the CNI-SP uses the selected
SELECT page. Upon return from the WAYPOINT waypoint. Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT
SELECT page with a waypoint selected, the CNI-SP page when a waypoint is not selected, the CNI-SP
uses the selected waypoint adjacent to R2. Upon displays the entry in the scratch pad.
return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page when a
waypoint is not selected, the CNI-SP displays the Valid waypoint entries that are not contained in a data-
entry in the scratch pad. Delete results in the entered base results in a branch to the CUSTOM DATA page.
waypoint being deleted, and the default data restored. Upon return from the CUSTOM DATA page with a
waypoint defined, the CNI-SP uses the waypoint.
R3 - ALTERNATE TAS Upon return from the CUSTOM DATA page when the
The alternate TAS to be used in the ETP calculation is waypoint is not defined, the CNI-SP displays the entry
entered using R3. Delete results in dashes being dis- in the scratch pad. Delete results in display of the
played. default value.

R4 - ROUNDSPEED BACK L2 - SECOND DIVERSION WAYPOINT

The computed groundspeed back to the last waypoint The Second Diversion Waypoint (DIVR2) identifier
is displayed adjacent to R4. (navigation or custom data base waypoint only) is
entered and displayed adjacent to L2.
R5 AND R6 If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier
exists in the databases (navigation and custom), the
Not operational. CNI-SP branches to the WAYPOINT SELECT page.
Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page with
a waypoint selected, the CNI-SP uses the selected
waypoint.

3K-22
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Upon return from the WAYPOINT SELECT page If more than one waypoint with the entered identifier
when a waypoint is not selected, the CNI-SP displays exists in the databases, the CNI-SP branches to the
the entry in the scratch pad. WAYPOINT SELECT page. Upon return from the
Valid waypoint entries that are not contained in a data- WAYPOINT SELECT page with a waypoint selected,
base results in a branch to the CUSTOM DATA page. the CNI-SP uses the selected waypoint to define data
Upon return from the CUSTOM DATA page with a adjacent to L6. Upon return from the WAYPOINT
waypoint defined, the CNI-SP uses the waypoint. SELECT page when a waypoint is not selected, the
Upon return from the CUSTOM DATA page when the CNI-SP displays the entry in the scratch pad.
waypoint is not defined, the CNI-SP displays the entry
in the scratch pad. Delete results in display of the Valid waypoint entries that are not contained in a data-
default value. base results in a branch to the CUSTOM DATA page.
Upon return from the CUSTOM DATA page with a
L3 - SEGMENT DISTANCE AND GROUNDSPEED waypoint defined, the CNI-SP uses the waypoint to
FOR DIVR1 AND DIVR2 define data displayed. Upon return from the CUSTOM
Data adjacent to L3 displays the distance from the DATA page when the waypoint is not defined, the CNI-
diversion position to the DIVR1 waypoint and adjacent SP displays the entry in the scratch pad.
data displays the distance from the diversion position If data adjacent to L6 is in large font, delete removes
to the DIVR2 waypoint. the entered data and return default data.
Groundspeed data displays the groundspeed from the
R1 - DIVERSION FUEL FLOW
diversion position to the DIVR1 waypoint and adjacent
data displays the groundspeed from the diversion Diversion fuel flow is entered and displayed using
position to the DIVR2 waypoint. soft-key R1. When data adjacent to R1 contains a
valid fuel flow entry, selection results in the displayed
L4 - TIME AND BURN FOR DIVR1 AND DIVR2 fuel flow value being placed into the scratch pad.
SEGMENTS
Delete results in display of the default value.
Data adjacent to L4 displays the en route time from
diversion position to the DIVR1 waypoint and adjacent R2 - DIVERSION WIND
data displays the en route time from the diversion Diversion wind is entered and then displayed adjacent
position to the DIVR2 waypoint. to R2. Delete results in display of the default value.
Fuel data displays the fuel burn from diversion posi-
tion to the DIVR1 waypoint and adjacent data displays R3 - DIVERSION TRUE AIRSPEED
the fuel burn from the diversion position to the DIVR2
waypoint. Diversion true airspeed is entered and then displayed
adjacent to R3. Delete results in display of the default
L5 - FUEL RESERVE DIVR1/DIVR2 value.

Data adjacent to L5 displays the reserve fuel at the R4 - DIVERSION FUEL ON BOARD
DIVR1 waypoint and adjacent data displays the
reserve fuel at DIVR2 waypoint. A negative value The diversion fuel on board is entered and displayed
results in dashes being displayed. using soft-key R4. The value displayed is the first
available of a valid diversion fuel on board entry, the
L6 - DIVERSION POSITION VP fuel on board value, or box prompts.
If data is displayed in large font, delete removes the
Data adjacent to L6 displays the diversion waypoint entered data, and return the default data.
position. The value displayed is the first available of a
valid diversion position entry, a valid INAV present R5 - DIVERSION VARIABLE PERCENTAGE OF
position, or dashes. BURN.
Valid waypoint entries that are contained in a data-
Data adjacent to R5 displays the percentage of burn
base result in the display of the entered identifier adja-
used in calculating the required reserve. Selection
cent to L6. Valid Place/Bearing/Distance, Place/
toggles the selected percentage to the next value.
Bearing/Place/Bearing, Latitude/Longitude, or MGRS
entries result in no data adjacent to L6. The diversion R6
position latitude/longitude is displayed below the iden-
tifier. Not operational.

3K-23
FAM.1C-27J-1A

TIME NAV PAGE L6 - BRANCH TO CARP PROGRESS PAGE

The TIME NAV page displays target time, speed, and Selection of the soft-key L6 branches to the CARP
distance parameters (Figure 3K-16). Computed speed PROGRESS page.
and distances that exceed the allowed range are dis-
played using the maximum/minimum allowed value. NOTE
If the active target has been defined as a
Page Access Time Over Target (TOT), L6 displays
a. Select the TIME NAV prompt on the PROGRESS CARP PROG. Selection results in a
1/4 page. branch to the CARP PROGRESS page of
the active target. Otherwise L6 display
b. Select the TIME NAV prompt on the MISSIONS blank.
page.
R1 - TARGET DESIRED ARRIVAL TIME
Display Data adjacent to R1 displays Target Desired Arrival
L1 - TIME OF ARRIVAL WAYPOINT LABEL Time. The title field above R1, displays the active tar-
get identifier. Data adjacent to R1 displays the user
Data adjacent to L1 displays the Active Target Way- defined Target Desired Arrival Time. This is also the
point label. A target is defined as a WAYPOINT DATA Desired Time of Arrival displayed on the WAYPOINT
1/2 page Desired Time of Arrival (DTOA), CARP INIT DATA 1/2 page.
1/5 page Time Over Target (TOT), or LZ INIT page Valid entry results in a new Desired Arrival Time (and
Desired Time of Arrival. WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 page Desired Time of Arrival)
being defined. Deletion results in the active target time
L2 - TARGET TIME TO GO being removed.
Data adjacent to L2 displays the active target Time to R2 - TARGET ESTIMATED TIME OF ARRIVAL
Go (TTG). TTG is displayed in HHMM:SS format with
leading zeros blank. Data adjacent to R2 displays Target Estimated Time
of Arrival (TETA). The title field above R2, displays
L3 - TARGET DISTANCE TO GO the active target identifier. TETA is displayed as
Data adjacent to L3 displays the active target Dis- HHMM:SS with leading zeros blank.
tance to Go (DTG). DTG is displayed in XXXX.XX NM R3
format with leading zeros blank.
Not operational.
L4 - PHASE OF FLIGHT
R4 - AHEAD/BEHIND TIME
Data adjacent to L4 displays the current planned
phase of flight. If the phase of flight is undefined, Data adjacent to R4 displays the active target Ahead/
blanks are displayed adjacent to L4. Behind Time and AHD or BHD indicator. Ahead/
Behind Time is displayed as HHMM:SS with leading
L5 - CONSTANT SPEED COMPUTED FOR THE zeros blank. A negative Ahead/Behind Time results in
ACTIVE TARGET display of BHD. Otherwise, a valid Ahead/Behind
Data adjacent to L5 displays a constant speed Time results in display of AHD.
required to reach a target at a user defined Time of
R5 - TARGET SPEED TO ACTIVE WAYPOINT
Arrival.
The title field above L5, displays the active target way- Data adjacent to R5 displays a constant speed
point identifier. Left position displays Calibrated Air- required to reach the Active Waypoint.
speed (CAS) while the right position displays The title field above R5, displays the active waypoint
Groundspeed (GS). Selection toggles between CAS identifier. Left position displays Calibrated Airspeed
and GS. The non-selected field is computed as a con- (CAS) while the right position displays Groundspeed
version of target speed based on current aircraft con- (GS). The target speed is defined as a speed required
ditions. to reach the next active waypoint so that the planned
profile will reach the target on time.

3K-24
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

R6 - BRANCH TO PROGRESS PAGE L2 THROUGH L5

Selection of the soft-key R6 branches to the Not operational.
PROGRESS 1/4 page.
L6 - OTHER DEPARTURE PROCEDURE
PROMPT
Entry of a valid airport identifier into the CNI-MU
DEPARTURE/ARRIVAL PAGES (ICDU) scratch pad and subsequent selection of L6
results in the display of the DEPARTURE RWYS page
corresponding to that airport. Valid entries are four-
DEPARTURE/ARRIVAL INDEX PAGE character International Civil Aviation Organization
(ICAO) airport identifiers contained in the database.
The DEP/ARR INDEX page (Figure 3K-17) provides Any entry not contained in the database airport file is
access to the departure and arrival procedures for ori- rejected and results in the display of the NOT AN AIR-
gin and destination airports selected for the flight plan PORT message.
(primary and alternate flight plans). This page pro-
vides access to the LZ INIT pages for the primary and R1 - ORIGIN ARRIVAL
alternate flight plans. This page also provides access
to departure and arrival procedures for any airport If data field adjacent to L1 contains an origin, and the
contained in the database. navigation database contains runway information for
that origin, data adjacent to R1 displays ARR in large
font. Selection results in a branch to the ARRIVAL
NOTE
RWYS page for the specified origin.
If MC DEGRADED LNAV MODE is True
and the Route below the title is active, se- R2 - DESTINATION ARRIVAL
lection of the DEP/ARR INDEX page will If a destination exists for the route number displayed
branch to INDEX 1/2 page. in the data field below the title, data field under DES-
TINATION displays that destination.
Page Access If destination data field contains a destination, and the
navigation database contains runway information for
a. Select the DEP/ARR prompt on the Primary Route, that destination, data adjacent to R2 displays ARR in
Route Plan, or Route To Alternate page. If selec- large font. Selection results in a branch to the
tion was from route 1, the route 1 DEP/ARR INDEX ARRIVAL RWYS page for the specified destination.
page is displayed. If selection was from route 2, the
route 2 DEP/ARR INDEX page is displayed. R3 - DESTINATION LZ

b. Select the DEP/ARR prompt on the INDEX page. If the displayed route contains a destination, data
Selection results in the DEP/ARR INDEX page for adjacent to R3 displays LZ n in large font. The default
route indicated on the INDEX page. landing zone number is 1. If the displayed route does
not contain a destination, data displays LZ n in small
c. Select the DEP/ARR INDEX prompt on any depar- font.
ture or arrival page, (available if those pages were If data is displayed in large font and the navigation
accessed from the OTHER selection (L6 and R6) database contains runway information for the destina-
on the DEP/ARR INDEX page). tion displayed in destination data field, selection
results in a branch to the ARRIVAL RWYS page for
Display the specified destination. Otherwise, if data is dis-
played in large font, selection results in a branch to
L1 - ORIGIN DEPARTURE the LZ n INIT page of the route displayed.
If an origin exists for the route number displayed in If data is displayed in large font and the navigation
data field below the title, data field under ORGIN dis- database contains runway information for the destina-
plays that origin airfield. tion displayed in destination data field, entry of a land-
If on the ground, the origin data field contains an ori- ing zone number results in a branch to the ARRIVAL
gin, and the navigation database contains runway RWYS page for the specified destination.
information for that origin, data adjacent to L1 will dis-
play DEP in large font. Selection results in a branch to
the DEPARTURE RWYS page for the specified origin;
otherwise selection is not operational.

3K-25
FAM.1C-27J-1A

The entered landing zone number may be either the DEPARTURE RUNWAYS PAGE
number of the existing landing zone at that destination
or a landing zone not in the flight plan. Entry of a land- The DEPARTURE RWYS page (Figure 3K-18) pro-
ing zone number whose landing zone is in the flight vides a means for the pilot to select a runway from a
plan, but not at the destination will result in the NOT list of runways associated with a selected airport.
ALLOWED message and no branch from the DEP/
ARR INDEX page. NOTE

R4 - ALTERNATE DESTINATION ARRIVAL If MC DEGRADED LNAV MODE is True

and the Route below the title is active, se-
If an alternate destination exists for the route number lection of the DEPARTURE RWYS page
displayed in the data field below the title, data field will branch to INDEX 1/2 page.
under ALTERNATE displays that destination.
If data contains an alternate destination, and the navi-
gation database contains arrival information for that Page Access
destination, data adjacent to R4 displays ARR in large a. Select the DEP prompt on the DEP/ARR INDEX
font. Selection branches to the ARRIVAL RWYS page page (page corresponds to the origin airport dis-
for the specified alternate destination. played on the DEP/ARR INDEX page).
R5 - ALTERNATE DESTINATION LZ b. Enter a valid airport identifier into the CNI-MU
(ICDU) scratch pad and select L6 on the DEP/ARR
If the displayed route contains an alternate destina-
INDEX page. Data below the title on this page will
tion, data adjacent to R5 displays LZ n in large font.
be blank.
The default landing zone number is 1. If the displayed
route does not contain an alternate destination, data c. Delete a departure procedure displayed at L1 on
displays LZ n in small font. the DEPARTURE SIDS, DEPARTURE TRANS, or
If data is displayed in large font and the navigation SID REVIEW page.
database contains runway information for the destina-
tion displayed in alternate data field, selection results d. Select the DEP RWYS prompt on the SID REVIEW
in a branch to the ARRIVAL RWYS page for the spec- page, (available when the SID REVIEW page was
ified destination. Otherwise, if data is displayed in accessed by the DEPARTURE RWYS page).
large font, selection branches to the LZ n INIT page of e. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the DE-
the route displayed. PARTURE RWYS X/X page.
If data is displayed in large font and the navigation
database contains runway information for the destina- f. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the DE-
tion displayed in alternate data field, entry of a landing PARTURE RWYS 2/X page.
zone number branches to the ARRIVAL RWYS page
for the specified destination.
Display
The entered landing zone number may be either the The DEPARTURE RWYS page provides a list of the
number of the existing landing zone at that destination runways for the specified airfield. If the list is greater
or a landing zone not in the flight plan. than can be displayed on one page, a second
Entry of a landing zone number whose landing zone is DEPARTURE RWYS page is provided and accessed
in the flight plan, but not at the alternate destination through the PREV PAGE and NEXT PAGE hard-keys.
will result in the NOT ALLOWED message and no Data adjacent to the title reflects the page numbering.
branch from the DEP/ARR INDEX page. Data field below the title displays the route which is
selecting the procedure. If access to the procedure
R6 - OTHER ARRIVAL PROCEDURE PROMPT pages was via the OTHER departure prompt on the
Entry of a valid airport identifier into the CNI-MU DEP/ARR INDEX page, data field is blank.
scratch pad and subsequent selection of L6 results in
L1 AND R1 - DEPARTURE PROCEDURE
the display of the ARRIVAL RWYS page correspond-
ing to that airport. Valid entries are four-character Data adjacent to L1 displays the airport identifier
ICAO airport identifiers contained in the database. associated with the access of this page. The selected
Any entry not contained in the database airport file is departure procedure is displayed in data adjacent to
rejected and results in the display of the NOT AN AIR- the identifier. The display format is runway (RWNNA)
PORT message. followed by a space, the SID, and “.TRANS”, where
TRANS is the transition name.

3K-26
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Deletion results in the currently selected departure DEPARTURE SIDS PAGE

being deleted. If an active departure procedure is
deleted, a provisional flight plan will be created and The DEPARTURE SIDS page (Figure 3K-19) provides
the EXEC hard-key will be illuminated. Deletion when a means for the pilot to select a SID from a list of SIDs
a departure procedure is pending activation results in associated with a selected airport and runway.
the departure procedure being deleted while leaving
the origin airport displayed. Deletion when only the NOTE
airport identifier is displayed is not operational.
If MC DEGRADED LNAV MODE is True
L2 - RUNWAY and the Route below the title is active, se-
lection of the DEPARTURE SIDS page
Data field displays NNA where NN is a number will branch to INDEX 1/2 page.
between 01 and 36 and A is L, C, R or blank.
Selection results in any previous runway, SID, or
departure being cleared from field adjacent to identi- Page Access
fier and the selected runway being displayed in the a. Select a runway on the DEPARTURE RWYS
field. If the displayed route in data field below the title page. (Displays the DEPARTURE SIDS page, if
is active or provisional, the EXEC hard-key will be illu- there are SIDs available.)
minated and ERASE will be displayed in L6.
If no route is displayed in data field below the title, the b. Select DEP SIDS prompt on the SID REVIEW
selected procedure has no affect on either flight plan. page, (available when the SID REVIEW page was
If SIDs are available from the navigation database, accessed via the DEPARTURE SIDS page).
the DEPARTURE SIDS page is displayed upon run-
c. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the DE-
way selection.
PARTURE SIDS X/X page.
L3 THROUGH L5 - RUNWAY d. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the DE-
Same as L2. PARTURE SIDS 2/X page.

L6 - BRANCH TO ROUTE PAGE, ERASE

PROMPT Display

Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the route spec- The DEPARTURE SIDS page provides a list of the
ified in data field below the title is provisional. ROUTE SIDs for the specified airfield and runway. If the list is
1 is displayed if data field indicates route 1, and greater than can be displayed on one page, a second
ROUTE 2 if data field indicated route 2. If no route is DEPARTURE SIDS page is provided and accessed
specified, DEP/ARR is displayed. through the PREV PAGE and NEXT PAGE hard-keys.
Selection when ERASE is displayed results in the Data adjacent to the title reflects the page numbering.
pending departure modification as well as any other Data field below the title displays the route which is
pending flight plan modifications being erased and the selecting the procedure. If access to the procedure
ROUTE PAGE 1 page being displayed for the route pages was via the OTHER departure prompt on the
that was being modified. DEP/ARR INDEX page, data field is blank.
Selection when ROUTE x is displayed results in the
L1 AND R1 - DEPARTURE PROCEDURE
display of the ROUTE PAGE 1 page for that route.
Selection when DEP/ARR is displayed branches to Data adjacent to L1 displays the airport identifier
the DEP/ARR INDEX page. (associated with the access of this page), followed by
the selected departure procedure. The display format
R2 THROUGH R5 - RUNWAY is runway (RWNNA) followed by a space, the SID,
Same as L2 except the data field displays NNA where and “.TRANS”, where TRANS is the transition name.
NN is a number between 01 and 36 and A is L, C, R or
blank. Deletion results in a branch to the DEPARTURE
RWYS page and the currently selected departure
R6 - BRANCH TO SID REVIEW PAGE being deleted. If an active departure procedure is
deleted, a provisional flight plan will be created and
Selection of the soft-key R6 branches to the SID the EXEC hard-key will be illuminated. Deletion when
REVIEW page. a departure procedure is pending activation results in
the departure procedure being deleted while leaving
the origin airport displayed.

3K-27
FAM.1C-27J-1A

L2 - STANDARD INSTRUMENT DEPARTURE b. Select DEP TRANS prompt on the SID REVIEW
page, (available if the SID REVIEW page was ac-
Selection results in the SID identifier being appended cessed from the DEPARTURE TRANS page).
to the runway identifier in L1 and the DEPARTURE
TRANS page being displayed if transitions are avail- c. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the DE-
able. If no transitions are available, the DEPARTURE PARTURE TRANS X/X page.
SIDS page remains displayed. Selection when no SID
d. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the DE-
is displayed at that soft-key is not operational.
PARTURE TRANS 2/X page.
L3 THROUGH L5 - SID
Same as L2. Display

L6 - BRANCH TO ROUTE PAGE, ERASE The DEPARTURE TRANS page provides a list of the
PROMPT transitions for the specified airfield and SID. If the list
is greater than can be displayed on one page, a sec-
Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the route spec- ond DEPARTURE TRANS page is provided and
ified in data field below the title is provisional. ROUTE accessed through the PREV PAGE and NEXT PAGE
1 is displayed if data field indicates route 1, and hard-keys. Data adjacent to the title reflects the page
ROUTE 2 if data field indicated route 2. If no route is numbering. Data field below the title displays the route
specified, DEP/ARR is displayed. which is selecting the procedure. If access to the pro-
Selection when ERASE is displayed results in the cedure pages was via the OTHER departure prompt
pending departure modification as well as any other on the DEP/ARR INDEX page, data field is blank.
pending flight plan modifications being erased and the
ROUTE PAGE 1 page being displayed for the route L1 AND R1 - DEPARTURE PROCEDURE
that was being modified.
Data adjacent to L1 displays the airport identifier
Selection when ROUTE x is displayed results in the
(associated with the access of this page), followed by
display of the ROUTE PAGE 1 page for that route.
the selected departure procedure. The display format
Selection when DEP/ARR is displayed branches to
is runway (RWNNA) followed by a space, the SID,
the DEP/ARR INDEX page.
and “.TRANS”, where TRANS is the transition name.
R2 THROUGH R5 - SID Deletion results in a branch to the DEPARTURE
RWYS page and the selected departure being
Same as L2. deleted. If an active departure procedure is deleted, a
provisional flight plan will be created and the EXEC
R6 - BRANCH TO SID REVIEW PAGE hard-key will be illuminated. Deletion when a depar-
Selection of the soft-key R6 branches to the SID ture procedure is pending activation results in the
REVIEW page. departure procedure being deleted while leaving the
origin airport displayed.

DEPARTURE TRANSITIONS PAGE L2 - DEPARTURE TRANSITION

Selection results in the transition identifier being
The DEPARTURE TRANS page (Figure 3K-20) pro-
appended to the SID identifier in L1. Selection when
vides a means for the pilot to select a transition from a
no transition is displayed at that soft-key is not opera-
list of transitions associated with a selected airport
tional. Selection of a transition when data field is blank
and SID.
results in no changes to either flight plan.

NOTE L3 THROUGH L5 - DEPARTURE TRANSITION

If MC DEGRADED LNAV MODE is True Same as L2.
and the Route below the title is active, se-
lection of the DEPARTURE TRANS page L6 - BRANCH TO ROUTE PAGE, ERASE
will branch to INDEX 1/2 page. PROMPT
Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the route spec-
Page Access ified in data field below the title is provisional. ROUTE
1 is displayed if data field indicates route 1, and
a. Select a SID on the DEPARTURE SIDS page, if ROUTE 2 if data field indicated route 2. If no route is
there are transitions available. specified, DEP/ARR is displayed.

3K-28
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

Selection when ERASE is displayed results in the L1 AND R1 - DEPARTURE PROCEDURE

pending departure modification as well as any other
pending flight plan modifications being erased and the Data adjacent to L1 displays the airport identifier
ROUTE PAGE 1 page being displayed. (associated with the access of this page), followed by
Selection when ROUTE x is displayed results in the the selected departure procedure. The display format
display of the ROUTE PAGE 1 page for that route. is runway (RWNNA) followed by a space, the SID,
Selection when DEP/ARR is displayed branches to and “.TRANS”, where TRANS is the transition name.
the DEP/ARR INDEX page. Deletion results in a branch to the DEPARTURE
RWYS page and the currently selected departure
R2 THROUGH R5 - DEPARTURE TRANSITION being deleted. If an active departure procedure is
deleted, a provisional flight plan will be created and
Same as L2. the EXEC hard-key will be illuminated. Deletion when
a departure procedure is pending activation results in
R6 - BRANCH TO SID REVIEW PAGE
the departure procedure being deleted while leaving
Selection of the soft-key R6 branches to the SID the origin airport displayed.
REVIEW page.
L2 - DEPARTURE PROCEDURE WAYPOINT
Remaining data fields display leg data for the SID.
DEPARTURE SID REVIEW PAGE These data fields are the same as data fields, respec-
The SID REVIEW pages (Figure 3K-21) are used to tively, on the LEGS page. However, no leg data may
display the legs of the SID, sequentially. If more legs be changed on this page.
are contained in the SID than are capable of being After the last waypoint in the procedure, the next soft-
displayed on one SID REVIEW page, additional SID key displays END OF PROCEDURE in large font.
REVIEW pages are created as needed to display all
L3 THROUGH L5 - DEPARTURE PROCEDURE
of the SID. WAYPOINT
Information about each waypoint such as course, dis-
tance, and constraint data is displayed if available. Same as L2.

L6 - BRANCH TO ROUTE PAGE, ERASE

NOTE PROMPT
If MC DEGRADED LNAV MODE is True Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the route spec-
and the Route below the title is active, se- ified in data field below the title is provisional.
lection of the SID REVIEW page will ROUTE 1 is displayed if data field indicates route 1,
branch to INDEX 1/2 page. and ROUTE 2 if data field indicated route 2. If no route
is specified, DEP/ARR is displayed.
Page Access Selection when ERASE is displayed results in the
pending departure modification as well as any other
a. Select R6 on the DEPARTURE RWYS, DEPAR- pending flight plan modifications being erased and the
TURE SIDS or DEPARTURE TRANS page. ROUTE PAGE 1 page being displayed for the route
that was being modified.
b. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the SID RE-
Selection when ROUTE x is displayed results in the
VIEW X/X page.
display of the ROUTE PAGE 1 page for that route.
c. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the SID RE- Selection when DEP/ARR is displayed branches to
VIEW 2/X page. the DEP/ARR INDEX page.

R2 THROUGH R5 - DEPARTURE PROCEDURE

Display WAYPOINT
Data field below the title displays the route which is Same as L2.
selecting the procedure. If access to the procedure
pages was via the OTHER departure prompt on the R6 - BRANCH TO DEPARTURE PAGE
DEP/ARR INDEX page, data field is blank. Data adjacent to R6 displays a branch to the page
which accessed the SID REVIEW page.
Possible branch displays are: DEPARTURE RWYS,
DEPARTURE SIDS and DEPARTURE TRANS.
Selection branches to the page displayed.

3K-29
FAM.1C-27J-1A

ARRIVAL RUNWAYS PAGE Format is “TRANS.”, where TRANS is the transition

name, the STAR, a space, and the runway (RWNNA).
The ARRIVAL RWYS page (Figure 3K-22) provides a
means for the pilot to select a runway from a list of Deletion results in the currently selected arrival being
runways associated with a selected airport. deleted. If an active arrival procedure is deleted, a
provisional flight plan will be created and the EXEC
NOTE hard-key will be illuminated. Deletion when a arrival
procedure is pending activation results in the arrival
If MC DEGRADED LNAV MODE is True
procedure being deleted while leaving the destination
and the Route below the title is active, se-
airport displayed.
lection of the ARRIVAL RWYS page will
branch to INDEX 1/2 page. L2 - RUNWAY
Data field displays NNA where NN is a number
Page Access between 01 and 36 and A is L, C, R or blank.
a. Select any ARR prompt on the DEP/ARR INDEX Selection results in any previous runway, STAR, or
page. arrival being cleared from field adjacent to identifier
and the selected runway being displayed in the field.
b. Select either LZ n prompt on the DEP/ARR INDEX If the displayed route in data field below the title is
page. active or provisional, the EXEC hard-key will be illumi-
nated and ERASE will be displayed in L6. If no route
c. Enter a valid airport identifier into the CNI-MU
is displayed in data field below the title, the selected
(ICDU) scratch pad and select R6 on the DEP/
procedure has no affect on either flight plan. If STARs
ARR INDEX page. Data below the title on this page
are available from the navigation database, the
will be blank.
ARRIVAL STARs page is displayed; otherwise, this
d. Delete an arrival procedure displayed at L1 on the page remains displayed.
ARRIVAL STARS, ARRIVAL TRANS, or STAR
REVIEW page. L3 THROUGH L5 - RUNWAY

e. Select ARR RWYS prompt on the STAR REVIEW Same as L2.

page, (available when the STAR REVIEW page
L6 - BRANCH TO ROUTE PAGE, ERASE
was accessed via the ARRIVAL RWYS page). PROMPT
f. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the ARRIV- Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the route spec-
AL RWYS X/X page. ified in data field below the title is provisional. ROUTE
g. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the ARRIV- 1 is displayed if data field indicates route 1, and
AL RWYS 2/X page. ROUTE 2 if data field indicated route 2. If no route is
specified, DEP/ARR is displayed.
Selection when ERASE is displayed results in the
Display pending arrival modification as well as any other
pending flight plan modifications being erased and the
The ARRIVAL RWYS page provides a list of the run-
ROUTE PAGE 1 page being displayed.
ways for the specified airfield. If the list is greater than
Selection when ROUTE x is displayed results in the
can be displayed on one page, a second ARRIVAL
display of the ROUTE PAGE 1 page for that route.
RWYS page is provided and accessed through the
Selection when DEP/ARR is displayed branches to
PREV PAGE and NEXT PAGE hard-keys. Data adja-
the DEP/ARR INDEX page.
cent to the title reflects the page numbering.
Data field below the title displays the route which is R2 THROUGH R5 - RUNWAY
selecting the procedure. If access to the procedure
pages was via the OTHER arrival prompt on the DEP/ Same as L2 except the data field displays NNA where
ARR INDEX page, data field is blank. NN is a number between 01 and 36 and A is L, C, R or
blank.
L1 AND R1 - ARRIVAL PROCEDURE
R6 - BRANCH TO STAR REVIEW PAGE
Data adjacent to R1 displays the airport identifier
associated with the access of this page. The selected Selection of the soft-key R6 branches to the STAR
arrival procedure is displayed in data adjacent to the REVIEW page.
identifier.

3K-30
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

ARRIVAL STARS PAGE L2 - STANDARD ARRIVAL

The ARRIVAL STARS page (Figure 3K-23) provides a Selection results in the STAR identifier being
means for the pilot to select a STAR from a list of appended to the runway identifier in R1 and the
STARs associated with a selected airport and runway. ARRIVAL TRANS page being displayed if transitions
are available. Selection when no STAR is displayed at
NOTE that soft-key is not operational.

If MC DEGRADED LNAV MODE is True L3 THROUGH L5 - STANDARD ARRIVAL

and the Route below the title is active, se-
Same as L2.
lection of the ARRIVAL STARS page will
branch to INDEX 1/2 page. L6 - BRANCH TO ROUTE PAGE, ERASE
PROMPT
Page Access Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the route spec-
ified in data field below the title is provisional. ROUTE
a. Select a runway on the ARRIVAL RWYS page,
1 is displayed if data field indicates route 1, and
(displays the ARRIVAL STARS page, if there are
ROUTE 2 if data field indicated route 2. If no route is
STARs available).
specified, DEP/ARR is displayed.
b. Select ARR STARS prompt on the STAR REVIEW Selection when ERASE is displayed results in the
page, (available when the STAR REVIEW page pending arrival modification as well as any other
was accessed via the ARRIVAL STARS page). pending flight plan modifications being erased and the
ROUTE PAGE 1 page being displayed for the route
c. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the ARRIV- that was being modified.
AL STARS X/X page. Selection when ROUTE x is displayed results in the
d. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the ARRIV- display of the ROUTE PAGE 1 page for that route.
AL STARS 2/X page. Selection when DEP/ARR is displayed branches to
the DEP/ARR INDEX page.

Display R2 THROUGH R5 - STANDARD ARRIVAL

The ARRIVAL STARS page provides a list of the Same as L2.
STARs for the specified airfield and runway. If the list
is greater than can be displayed on one page, a sec- R6 - BRANCH TO STAR REVIEW PAGE
ond ARRIVAL STARS page is provided and accessed Selection of the soft-key R6 branches to the STAR
through the PREV PAGE and NEXT PAGE hard-keys. REVIEW page.
Data adjacent to the title reflects the page numbering.
Data field below the title displays the route which is
selecting the procedure. If access to the procedure ARRIVAL TRANSITIONS PAGE
pages was via the OTHER arrival prompt on the DEP/
ARR INDEX page, data field is blank. The ARRIVAL TRANS page (Figure 3K-24) provides a
means for the pilot to select a transition from a list of
L1 AND R1 - ARRIVAL PROCEDURE transitions associated with a selected airport and
STAR.
Data adjacent to R1 displays the airport identifier
associated with the access of this page. The selected
arrival procedure is displayed in data adjacent to the NOTE
identifier. Format is “TRANS.”, where TRANS is the If MC DEGRADED LNAV MODE is True
transition name, the STAR, a space, and the runway and the Route below the title is active, se-
(RWNNA). lection of the ARRIVAL TRANS page will
Deletion results in a branch to the ARRIVAL RUN- branch to INDEX 1/2 page.
WAYS page and the currently selected arrival being
deleted. If an active arrival procedure is deleted, a
provisional flight plan will be created and the EXEC Page Access
hard-key will be illuminated. Deletion when an arrival
a. Select a STAR on the ARRIVAL STARS page,
procedure is pending activation results in the arrival
(displays the ARRIVAL TRANS page, if there are
procedure being deleted while leaving the destination
transitions available).
airport displayed.

3K-31
FAM.1C-27J-1A

b. Select the ARR TRANS prompt on the STAR RE- Selection when ERASE is displayed results in the
VIEW, (available when the STAR REVIEW page pending arrival modification as well as any other
was accessed via the ARRIVAL TRANS page). pending flight plan modifications being erased and the
ROUTE PAGE 1 page being displayed for the route
c. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the ARRIV-
that was being modified.
AL TRANS X/X page
Selection when ROUTE x is displayed results in the
d. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the ARRIV- display of the ROUTE PAGE 1 page for that route.
AL TRANS 2/X page. Selection when DEP/ARR is displayed branches to
the DEP/ARR INDEX page.

Display R2 THROUGH R5 - ARRIVAL TRANSITION

The ARRIVAL TRANS page provides a list of the tran- Same as L2.
sitions for the specified airfield and STAR. If the list is
greater than can be displayed on one page, a second R6 - BRANCH TO STAR REVIEW PAGE
ARRIVAL TRANS page is provided and accessed Selection of the soft-key R6 branches to the STAR
through the PREV PAGE and NEXT PAGE hard-keys. REVIEW page.
Data adjacent to the title reflects the page numbering.
Data field below the title displays the route which is
selecting the procedure. If access to the procedure ARRIVAL STAR REVIEW PAGE
pages was via the OTHER arrival prompt on the DEP/
ARR INDEX page, data field is blank. The STAR REVIEW pages (Figure 3K-25) are used to
display the legs of the STAR, sequentially. If more
L1 AND R1 - ARRIVAL PROCEDURE legs are contained in the STAR than are capable of
being displayed on one STAR REVIEW page, addi-
Data adjacent to R1 displays the airport identifier
tional STAR REVIEW pages are created as needed to
associated with the access of this page. The selected
display all of the STAR.
arrival procedure is displayed in data adjacent to the
Information about each waypoint such as course, dis-
identifier. Format is “TRANS.”, where TRANS is the
tance, and constraint data is displayed if available.
transition name, the STAR, a space, and the runway
(RWNNA).
Deletion results in a branch to the ARRIVAL RUN- NOTE
WAYS page and the currently selected arrival being
If MC DEGRADED LNAV MODE is True
deleted. If an active arrival procedure is deleted, a
and the Route below the title is active, se-
provisional flight plan will be created and the EXEC
lection of the STAR REVIEW page will
hard-key will be illuminated. Deletion when an arrival
branch to INDEX 1/2 page.
procedure is pending activation results in the arrival
procedure being deleted while leaving the destination
airport displayed. Page Access
L2 - ARRIVAL TRANSITION a. Select R6 on the ARRIVAL RWYS, ARRIVAL
STARS or ARRIVAL TRANS page.
Selection results in the transition identifier being
appended to the STAR identifier in R1. Selection b. Select the NEXT PAGE hard-key from the STAR
when no transition is displayed at that soft-key is not REVIEW X/X page.
operational. Selection of a transition when data field is
c. Select the PREV PAGE hard-key from the STAR
blank results in no changes to either flight plan.
REVIEW 2/X page.
L3 THROUGH L5 - ARRIVAL TRANSITION
Same as L2. Display
Data field below the title displays the route which is
L6 - BRANCH TO ROUTE PAGE, ERASE
PROMPT selecting the procedure. If access to the procedure
pages was via the OTHER arrival prompt on the DEP/
Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the route spec- ARR INDEX page, data field is blank.
ified in data field below the title is provisional. ROUTE
1 is displayed if data field indicates route 1, and
ROUTE 2 if data field indicated route 2. If no route is
specified, DEP/ARR is displayed.

3K-32
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

L1 AND R1 - ARRIVAL PROCEDURE R6 - BRANCH TO ARRIVAL PAGE

Data adjacent to R1 displays the airport identifier Data adjacent to R6 displays a branch to the page
associated with the access of this page. The selected which accessed the STAR REVIEW page.
arrival procedure is displayed in data adjacent to the Possible branch displays are: ARRIVAL RWYS,
identifier. Format is “TRANS.”, where TRANS is the ARRIVAL STARS and ARRIVAL TRANS.
transition name, the STAR, a space, and the runway Selection branches to the page identified.
(RWNNA).
Deletion results in a branch to the ARRIVAL RUN-
WAYS page and the currently selected arrival being
deleted. If an active arrival procedure is deleted, a
provisional flight plan will be created and the EXEC
hard-key will be illuminated. Deletion when an arrival
procedure is pending activation results in the arrival
procedure being deleted while leaving the destination
airport displayed.

L2 - ARRIVAL PROCEDURE WAYPOINT

Remaining data fields display leg data for the STAR.
These data fields are the same as data fields, respec-
tively, on the LEGS page. However, no leg data may
be changed on this page.
After the last waypoint in the procedure, the next soft-
key displays END OF PROCEDURE in large font.

L3 THROUGH L5 - ARRIVAL PROCEDURE

WAYPOINT
Same as L2.

L6 - BRANCH TO ROUTE PAGE, ERASE

PROMPT
Data adjacent to L6 displays ERASE if the route spec-
ified in data field below the title is provisional. ROUTE
1 is displayed if data field indicates route 1, and
ROUTE 2 if data field indicated route 2. If no route is
specified, DEP/ARR is displayed.

Selection when ERASE is displayed results in the

pending arrival modification as well as any other
pending flight plan modifications being erased and the
ROUTE PAGE 1 page being displayed for the route
that was being modified.
Selection when ROUTE x is displayed results in the
display of the ROUTE PAGE 1 page for that route.
Selection when DEP/ARR is displayed branches to
the DEP/ARR INDEX page.

R2 THROUGH R5
Not operational.

3K-33
FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3K-34
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

LEGS Branching

Figure 3K-1

3K-35
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Provides a means of entering or storing a route, an of defining certain parameters for the route.

Soft-key Display Description

ACT RTE 1 Displays route status: active (ACT) or provisional (MOD) and route
number (1 or 2).
L1 ORIGIN Accepts/displays origin airfield identifier for new route or retrieved
route.
L2 RETRIEVE RTE Accepts the identifier of a stored route for retrieval of the route.
L3 STORE RTE Stores the current flight plan under the entered route identifier.
L4 RWY Enters/displays departure airport runway contained in the database.
L5 DEP/ARR Branches to the DEP/ARR INDEX page.
L6 LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n primary page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional route.
R1 DEST Enters/displays the planned destination airfield for the displayed route.
R2 ALTN Enters/displays the planned alternate destination airfield for the dis-
played route.
R3 NOM BANK Enters/displays the bank angle for waypoint transitions not in SIDs,
STARs, MFPs, holding patterns, and leg with a specified bank angle.
R4 WP SEQ Controls/displays waypoint sequencing mode (MAN/AUTO).
R5 WP TRANS Controls/displays waypoint transition type (Curved Path (CP)/ Radius
of Turn (ROT)/ Point to Point (P-P)).
R6 PERF INIT/ If the route is provisional or active, selection branches to the PERF
INIT WEIGHT 1/4 page.
ACTIVATE If the route is inactive, selection creates a provisional route and illumi-
nates the EXEC light.

Figure 3K-2 ROUTE PLAN page

3K-36
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

ROUTE PLAN PAGE DATA ENTRY 4. Enter departure runway in the scratch pad -
Entered.
a. Press L4 - Pressed.
PREREQUISITES
b. RWY line data updated.
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.
5. Press L5 to branch to the DEP/ARR INDEX
page - Pressed.
DATA ENTRY 6. Press L6 to branch to the LEGS primary page
- Pressed.
1. Enter identifier of route origination point in the
scratch pad - Entered.
NOTE
a. Press L1 to accept route origination point -
Pressed. • LEGS is displayed adjacent to L6 if
b. ORIGIN line data updated. the route is not provisional.

• If the route is provisional, ERASE is

NOTE displayed adjacent to L6, and the
EXEC light is illuminated. Pressing L6
• Entry of an origination point will delete deletes the provisional route, extin-
all previously entered data. guishes the EXEC light, and returns
• Deletion of the origin is not allowed, the route to its previous state.
and results in the display of an IN- 7. Enter identifier of route destination point in the
VALID DELETE message. scratch pad - Entered.
• Pressing L1 soft-key with an origin a. Press R1 - Pressed.
identifier displayed will downselect to
b. DEST line data updated.
scratch pad.

2. To retrieve a stored route, enter identifier of NOTE

stored route in the scratch pad - Entered.
• The origin must be entered before en-
a. Press L2 to retrieve stored route - Pressed. tering a destination.
b. RETRIEVE RTE line data updated.
• If a new route destination point is en-
tered, all approach procedures are
NOTE deleted, except for the active way-
A stored route may not be retrieved into point.
an active flight plan when the aircraft is • Pressing R1 with an origin identifier
airborne. displayed will downselect to scratch
pad.
3. Enter identifier of route to be stored in the
scratch pad - Entered. 8. Enter identifier of route alternate destination
point in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L3 to store the current route into the
database under the entered identifier - a. Press R2 - Pressed.
Pressed. b. ALTN line data updated.

NOTE NOTE
The format of the stored route identifier If a new route alternate destination point
must contain 6 to 10 alphanumeric char- is entered, all approach procedures are
acters. deleted, except for the active waypoint.

3K-37
FAM.1C-27J-1A

NOTE
The en route bank angle limit is a nominal
bank angle limit used to construct turn ra-
dii for the en route portion of the flight
plan. Mission segments and other proce-
dures are not affected. During flight, the
CNI-MS will determine the bank angle (up
to 30 degrees) required to maintain the
flight plan track and send it to the autopi-
lot. The CNI-MS derived bank angle is not
limited by the crew selected nominal bank
angle entered on the ROUTE PLAN
page.

9. Enter desired nominal bank angle in the

scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press R3 - Pressed.
b. NOM BANK line data updated.
10. Press R4 to select type of waypoint sequenc-
ing - Selected.
a. Selected type of waypoint sequencing
(MAN, or AUTO) appears in large font.
11. Press R5 to select desired waypoint transition
type - Selected.
a. Selected desired waypoint transition type
(CP, ROT, or P-P) appears in large font.
12. Press R6 to branch to the PERF INIT page -
Pressed.

NOTE
ACTIVATE is displayed adjacent to R6 if
the route is inactive. Pressing L6 in this
case creates a provisional route and illu-
minates the EXEC light.

3K-38
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3K-39
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Provides a means of entering legs and procedures in the route.

Soft-key Display Description

ACT RTE 1 Displays route status: active (ACT) or provisional (MOD) and route
number (1 or 2).
L1-L4 VIA Enters/displays a procedure, route, or airway identifier.
L5 DEP/ARR Branches to the DEP/ARR INDEX page.
L6 LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n primary page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional route.
R1-R4 TO Enters/displays a waypoint label/identifier, navaid, airfield, place/bear-
ing/distance, place/bearing/place/bearing, latitude/longitude, or MGRS
point.
R5 ROUTE ALTN Branches to the first route to the alternate (RTE 1 ALTN) page.
R6 PERF INIT/ If the route is provisional or active, selection branches to the PERF
INIT WEIGHT 1/4 page.
ACTIVATE If the route is inactive, selection creates a provisional route and illumi-
nates the EXEC light.

Figure 3K-3 PRIMARY ROUTE page

3K-40
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PRIMARY ROUTE PAGE DATA Adding an Airway or Stored Route Segment:

ENTRY 1. Enter airway or stored route segment in the
scratch pad - Entered.
2. Press L1 through L4 or R1 through R4 corre-
PREREQUISITES sponding to the desired line of entry in the flight
1. Displayed values - Reviewed. plan - Pressed.

NOTE
DATA ENTRY
• To insert an airway, the start point,
the airway identifier, and the end way-
Adding a Waypoint: point must be specified. The start
1. Enter additional waypoint in the scratch pad - point is the waypoint preceding the in-
Entered. sertion point. The airway identifier
and the end waypoint are specified
2. Press L1 through L4 or R1 through R4 corre- using the airway or VIA.TO.WAY-
sponding to the desired line of entry in the flight POINT format. Both the start point
plan - Pressed. and the end point must be on the air-
way.
a. If a route is active, green EXEC light illumi-
nates. • To insert a stored route, the stored
b. ERASE appears adjacent to L6. route identifier is entered. The end
point along the stored route may also
3. Press L6 to cancel the change - Pressed.
be specified, to insert only a portion of
4. Press EXEC hard-key to implement change - a stored route, using the STORED
Pressed. ROUTE NAME or VIA.TO.WAY-
POINT format.

Deleting a Waypoint: • Deletion of an arrival segment, when

a landing zone is defined, results in
NOTE the removal of the arrival procedure
and the retention of the landing zone.
Single waypoints can be deleted from the
flight plan using the Primary RTE page • Deletion of a landing zone waypoint,
only if the VIA field displays DIRECT. when an arrival procedure is defined,
results in the removal of the landing
1. Press DEL key - Pressed. zone and the retention of the arrival
procedure.
a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
2. Press soft-key corresponding to the waypoint Clearing a Discontinuity:
to be deleted - Pressed.
a. If a route is active, green EXEC light illumi- NOTE
nates. If a route discontinuity exists, >>DIS-
b. ERASE appears adjacent to L6. CONTINUITY<< appears on the affected
line.
3. Press L6 to cancel the change - Pressed.
4. Press EXEC hard-key to implement change - 1. Press DEL key - Pressed.
Pressed.
a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.

NOTE 2. Press left soft-key adjacent to the discontinuity

- Pressed.
Waypoints may also be deleted from a
flight plan by inserting an existing down-
route waypoint in front of the waypoint(s)
to be deleted.

3K-41
FAM.1C-27J-1A

NOTE
Discontinuities that precede a runway or
are defined by a database SID or STAR
cannot be cleared, and attempts to clear
these cause a NOT ALLOWED message
to be displayed.

Other Functions:
1. Press L5 to branch to the DEP/ARR INDEX
page - Pressed.
2. Press L6 to branch to the LEGS page -
Pressed.

NOTE
If the route is provisional, ERASE is dis-
played adjacent to L6, and the EXEC light
is illuminated. Pressing L6 deletes the
provisional route, extinguishes the EXEC
light, and returns the route to its previous
state.

3. Press R5 to branch to the RTE ALTN page -

Pressed.
4. Press R6 to branch to the PERF INIT page -
Pressed.

NOTE
ACTIVATE is displayed adjacent to R6 if
the route is inactive. Pressing R6 in this
case creates a provisional route and illu-
minates the EXEC light.

3K-42
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3K-43
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Provides a means of entering legs and procedures in the route to alternate destinations.

Soft-key Display Description

ACT RTE 1 Displays route status: active (ACT) or provisional (MOD) and route
number (1 or 2).
L1-L4 VIA Enters/displays a procedure, route, or airway identifier.
L5 DEP/ARR Branches to the DEP/ARR INDEX page.
L6 LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n primary page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional route.
R1-R4 TO Selects the displayed waypoint identifier and down-selects it to the
scratch pad. Enters and displays a waypoint label/identifier, navaid,
airfield, place/bearing/distance, place/bearing/place/bearing, latitude/
longitude, or MGRS point.
R5 ARM ALTN Appends the flight plan to the alternate destination to the end of the
existing primary flight plan.
R6 PERF INIT/ If the route is provisional or active, selection branches to the PERF
INIT WEIGHT 1/4 page.
ACTIVATE If the route is inactive, selection creates a provisional route and illumi-
nates the EXEC light.

Figure 3K-4 ROUTE TO ALTERNATE page

3K-44
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

ROUTE TO ALTERNATE PAGE Adding an Airway or Stored Route Segment:

DATA ENTRY 1. Enter airway or stored route segment in the
scratch pad - Entered.
2. Press L1 through L4 or R1 through R4 corre-
PREREQUISITES sponding to the desired line of entry in the flight
1. Displayed values - Reviewed. plan - Pressed.

NOTE
DATA ENTRY
• To insert an airway, the start point,
Adding a Waypoint: the airway identifier, and the end way-
point must be specified. The start
1. Enter additional waypoint in the scratch pad - point is the waypoint preceding the in-
Entered. sertion point. The airway identifier
and the end waypoint are specified
1. Press L1 through L4 or R1 through R4 corre-
using the airway or VIA.TO.WAY-
sponding to the desired line of entry in the flight
POINT format. Both the start point
plan - Pressed.
and the end point must be on the air-
a. If a route is active, green EXEC light illumi- way.
nates.
• To insert a stored route, the stored
b. ERASE appears adjacent to L6. route identifier is entered. The end
2. Press L6 to cancel the change - Pressed. point along the stored route may also
be specified, to insert only a portion of
3. Press EXEC hard-key to implement change - a stored route, using the STORED
Pressed. ROUTE NAME or VIA.TO.WAY-
POINT format.
Deleting a Waypoint: • Deletion of an arrival segment, when
a landing zone is defined, results in
NOTE the removal of the arrival procedure
and the retention of the landing zone.
Single waypoints can be deleted from the
flight plan using the RTE ALTN page only • Deletion of a landing zone waypoint,
if the VIA field displays DIRECT. when an arrival procedure is defined,
results in the removal of the landing
1. Press DEL key - Pressed. zone and the retention of the arrival
procedure.
a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
2. Press soft-key corresponding to the waypoint
Clear a Discontinuity:
to be deleted - Pressed.
a. If a route is active, green EXEC light illumi- NOTE
nates.
If a route discontinuity exists, >>DIS-
b. ERASE appears adjacent to L6.
CONTINUITY<< appears on the affected
3. Press L6 to cancel the change - Pressed. line.

4. Press EXEC hard-key to implement change - 1. Press DEL key - Pressed.

Pressed.
a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
NOTE 2. Press left soft-key adjacent to the discontinuity
- Pressed.
Waypoints may also be deleted from a
flight plan by inserting an existing down-
route waypoint in front of the waypoint(s)
to be deleted.

3K-45
FAM.1C-27J-1A

NOTE
Discontinuities that precede a runway or
are defined by a database SID or STAR
cannot be cleared, and attempts to clear
these cause a NOT ALLOWED message
to be displayed.

Other Functions:
1. Press L5 to branch to the DEP/ARR INDEX
page - Pressed.
2. Press L6 to branch to the LEGS page -
Pressed.

NOTE
If the route is provisional, ERASE is dis-
played adjacent to L6, and the EXEC light
is illuminated. Pressing L6 deletes the
provisional route, extinguishes the EXEC
light, and returns the route to its previous
state.

3. Press R5 to append the route to the alternate

destination to the end of the existing primary
route - Pressed.
4. Press R6 to branch to the PERF INIT page -
Pressed.

NOTE
ACTIVATE is displayed adjacent to R6 if
the route is inactive. Pressing R6 in this
case creates a provisional route and illu-
minates the EXEC light.

3K-46
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3K-47
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays historical leg information for the last five waypoints sequenced.

Soft-key Display Description

L1-L5 Historical legs Display historical leg information: waypoint label/identifier, procedure,
leg course/heading, leg distance, actual time of arrival, target speed/
descent angle, and altitude constraint.
L6 PROGRESS/ Branches to the PROGRESS 1/4 page.
CARP PROG/ Branches to the CARP PROG page.
SAR PROG/ Branches to the SAR PROG page.
EXIT HOLD/ Exits holding pattern.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional route (MOD dis-
played in title).
R1-R5 Display target speed/descent angle, actual TOA, and altitude target.
R6 ROUTE 1 Branches to the primary RTE page.

Figure 3K-5 LEGS HISTORY page

3K-48
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

LEGS HISTORY PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press L1 through L5 to downselect data to
scratch pad - Pressed.
2. Press L6 to branch to the PROGRESS 1/4
page - Pressed.
3. R1 to R5 display leg information. Selection is
not operational.
4. Press R6 to branch to the Primary RTE page -
Pressed.

3K-49
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays legs and leg data in the primary portion of the flight plan.

Soft-key Display Description

ACT LEGS 1 Displays status of associated route: active (ACT) or provisional (MOD)
and route number (1 or 2).
L1-L5 Leg information Display leg information: waypoint label/identifier, procedure, leg
course/heading, leg distance, predicted time of arrival, target speed/
descent angle, airways, altitude constraint, and/or commanded cruise
altitude.
L6 PROGRESS/ Branches to the PROGRESS 1/4 page.
CARP PROG/ Branches to the CARP PROG page.
SAR PROG/ Branches to the SAR PROG page.
EXIT HOLD/ Exits holding pattern.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional route (MOD dis-
played in title).
R1-R5 Branches to the ACT WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 page for the associated
displayed waypoint.
R6 ROUTE 1 Branches to the primary RTE page.

Figure 3K-6 LEGS PRIMARY page

3K-50
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

LEGS PRIMARY PAGE DATA NOTE

ENTRY • To insert an airway, the start point,
the airway identifier, and the end way-
point must be specified. The start
PREREQUISITES point is the waypoint preceding the in-
sertion point. The airway identifier
1. Displayed values - Reviewed. and the end waypoint are specified
using the AIRWAY.WAYPOINT for-
mat. Both the start point and the end
DATA ENTRY point must be on the airway.

• To insert a stored route, the stored

Adding a Waypoint:
route identifier is entered. The end
1. Enter additional waypoint in the scratch pad - point along the stored route may also
Entered. be specified, to insert only a portion of
a stored route, using the STORED
2. Press L1 through L5 corresponding to the de- ROUTE NAME.WAYPOINT format.
sired line of entry in the flight plan - Pressed.
• Deletion of an arrival segment, when
a. Green EXEC light illuminates.
a landing zone is defined, results in
b. ERASE appears adjacent to L6. the removal of the arrival procedure
3. Press L6 to cancel the change - Pressed. and the retention of the landing zone.

4. Press EXEC hard-key to implement change - • Deletion of a landing zone waypoint,

Pressed. when an arrival procedure is defined,
results in the removal of the landing
zone and the retention of the arrival
Deleting a Waypoint: procedure.
1. Press DEL key - Pressed.
Exiting a holding Pattern:
a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
1. Press L6 to exit a holding pattern - Pressed.
2. Press soft-key corresponding to the waypoint
to be deleted - Pressed.
a. Green EXEC light illuminates.
Clearing a Discontinuity:
b. ERASE appears adjacent to L6.
NOTE
3. Press L6 to cancel the change - Pressed.
If a route discontinuity exists, >>DIS-
4. Press EXEC hard-key to implement change - CONTINUITY<< appears on the affected
Pressed. line.

NOTE 1. Press DEL key - Pressed.

Waypoints may also be deleted from a a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
flight plan by inserting an existing down- 2. Press left soft-key adjacent to the discontinuity
route waypoint in front of the waypoint(s) - Pressed.
to be deleted.
NOTE
Adding an Airway or Stored Route Segment:
Discontinuities that precede a runway or
1. Enter airway or stored route segment in the are defined by a database SID or STAR
scratch pad - Entered. cannot be cleared, and attempts to clear
these cause a NOT ALLOWED message
2. Press any L1 through L4 or R1 through R4 cor- to be displayed.
responding to the desired line of entry in the
flight plan - Pressed.

3K-51
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Other Functions:
1. Press L6 to branch to the PROGRESS 1/4
page - Pressed.
2. Press any R1 through R5 to branch to the ACT
WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 page - Pressed.
3. Press R6 to branch to the Primary RTE page -
Pressed.

3K-52
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3K-53
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays the legs in the route to alternate destination.

Soft-key Display Description

L1-L5 Leg information Display leg information: waypoint label/identifier, procedure, leg
course/heading, leg distance, predicted time of arrival, target speed/
descent angle, airways, altitude constraint, and/or commanded cruise
altitude.
L6 PROGRESS/ Branches to the PROGRESS 1/4 page.
CARP PROG/ Branches to the CARP PROG page.
SAR PROG/ Branches to the SAR PROG page.
EXIT HOLD/ Exits holding pattern.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional route (MOD dis-
played in title).
R1-R5 Branches to the ACT WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 page for the associated
displayed waypoint.
R6 ROUTE 1 Branches to the ROUTE ALTN page.

Figure 3K-7 LEGS TO ALTERNATE page

3K-54
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

LEGS TO ALTERNATE PAGE DATA NOTE

ENTRY • To insert an airway, the start point,
the airway identifier, and the end way-
point must be specified. The start
PREREQUISITES point is the waypoint preceding the in-
sertion point. The airway identifier
1. Displayed values - Reviewed. and the end waypoint are specified
using the VIA.TO format. Both the
start point and the end point must be
DATA ENTRY on the airway.

• To insert a stored route, the stored

Adding a Waypoint:
route identifier is entered. The end
1. Enter additional waypoint in the scratch pad - point along the stored route may also
Entered. be specified, to insert only a portion of
a stored route, using the STORED
2. Press L1 through L5 corresponding to the de- ROUTE NAME. or VIA.TO format.
sired line of entry in the flight plan - Pressed.
• Deletion of an arrival segment, when
a. Green EXEC light illuminates.
a landing zone is defined, results in
b. ERASE appears adjacent to L6. the removal of the arrival procedure
3. Press L6 to cancel the change - Pressed. and the retention of the landing zone.

4. Press EXEC hard-key to implement change - • Deletion of a landing zone waypoint,

Pressed. when an arrival procedure is defined,
results in the removal of the landing
zone and the retention of the arrival
Deleting a Waypoint: procedure.
1. Press DEL key - Pressed.
Exiting a Holding Pattern:
a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
1. Press L6 to exit a holding pattern - Pressed.
2. Press L1 through L4 corresponding to the way-
point to be deleted - Pressed.
a. Green EXEC light illuminates.
Clearing a Discontinuity:
b. ERASE appears adjacent to L6.
NOTE
3. Press L6 to cancel the change - Pressed.
If a route discontinuity exists, >>DIS-
4. Press EXEC hard-key to implement change - CONTINUITY<< appears on the affected
Pressed. line.

NOTE 1. Press DEL key - Pressed.

Waypoints may also be deleted from a a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
flight plan by inserting an existing down- 2. Press left soft-key adjacent to the discontinuity
route waypoint in front of the waypoint(s) - Pressed.
to be deleted.
NOTE
Adding an Airway or Stored Route Segment:
Discontinuities that precede a runway or
1. Enter airway or stored route segment in the are defined by a database SID or STAR
scratch pad - Entered. cannot be cleared, and attempts to clear
these cause a NOT ALLOWED message
2. Press L1 through L4 or R1 through R4 corre- to be displayed.
sponding to the desired line of entry in the flight
plan - Pressed.

3K-55
FAM.1C-27J-1A

Other Functions:
1. Press L6 to branch to the PROGRESS 1/4
page - Pressed.
2. Press R1 through R5 to branch to the ACT
WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 page - Pressed.
3. Press R6 to branch to the ROUTE ALTN page
- Pressed.

3K-56
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3K-57
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Provides the list of stored routes for selection and display on the route plan page.

Soft-key Display Description

L1-L5 Stored route Recalls stored routes.

L6 INDEX Branches to the INDEX 1/2 page.
R1-R5 Stored route Recalls stored routes.
R6 ROUTE Branches to the Primary RTE page.

Figure 3K-8 STORED ROUTE LIST page

3K-58
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

STORED ROUTE LIST PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press L1 through L5 or R1 through R5 to place
a route identifier in the scratch pad for recall -
Pressed.

Deleting a Route:
1. Press DEL key - Pressed.
a. DELETE appears in scratch pad.
2. Press soft-key adjacent to the route to be de-
leted - Pressed.

Other Functions:
1. Press L6 to branch to the INDEX 1/2 page -
Pressed.
2. Press R6 to branch to the Primary RTE page -
Pressed.

3K-59
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays leg and waypoint information for the flight plan waypoints.

Soft-key Display Description

ACT Displays status of associated route: active (ACT) or provisional (MOD).

L1 LBL/IDENT/TYPE Displays the waypoint label, identifier, and type.
L2 LL/MGRS/DEF Selects waypoint position reference (LAT/LON, MGRS, or defined).
L3-L4 NOT USED
L5 HOLD Branches to the HOLD page.
L6 LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n primary page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional route.
R1 DES TOA Enters/displays the desired (DES) or predicted Time Of Arrival.
R2 NOT USED
R3 WINDS Enters/displays the wind direction and speed.
R4-R5 NOT USED
R6 MFP Branches to MISSIONS, CARP INIT, LZ INIT, SAR INIT, or RNDZ
page, depending on type of waypoint.

Figure 3K-9 WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 page

3K-60
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

WAYPOINT DATA 1/2 PAGE DATA 5. To change displayed wind, enter wind direction
and speed in the scratch pad - Entered.
ENTRY
a. Press R3 - Pressed.
b. WINDS line data updated.
PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed. NOTE
When the waypoint type is CARP, LZ,
SAR, or RNDZ, then the display adjacent
DATA ENTRY to R3 is blank.
1. Press L2 to select desired waypoint position
reference - Selected. 6. Press R6 to branch to the page of the associ-
ated waypoint type (displayed adjacent to L1) -
a. Selected desired waypoint position refer- Pressed.
ence (LL, MGRS, or DEF) appears in large
font.
NOTE
2. Press L5 to branch to HOLD page - Pressed.
The page branching options are:
3. Press L6 to branch to the calling LEGS page -
• CARP INIT (if waypoint type is CARP)
Pressed.
• LZ INIT (if waypoint type is LZ)
a. The LEGS primary, LEGS ALTN, or Legs
• SAR INIT (if waypoint type is SAR)
DIR/INTC page is displayed.
• RENDEZVOUS (if waypoint type is
RNDZ)
NOTE
• MISSIONS (if waypoint type is WPT).
If the displayed route is provisional,
ERASE is displayed adjacent to L6, and
pressing L6 deletes the provisional route.

4. Enter time constraint (desired time of arrival, in

HH:MM:SS) in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press R1 - Pressed.
b. DES appears adjacent to TOA and desired
time constraint is displayed in large font.

NOTE
The default display is predicted time of ar-
rival. A NOT ALLOWED message ap-
pears in the scratch pad if a time
constraint entry is not allowed.

3K-61
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays leg and waypoint information for the flight plan waypoints.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 LBL/IDENT Displays the waypoint label, identifier, and type.

L2 NOM BANK Enter/display of leg bank angle limit to be used by guidance for way-
point transitions.
L3 WP TRANS Controls and displays the waypoint transition type.
L4 FUEL FLOW Enter/display of leg fuel flow.
L5 FUEL ADJUST Enter/display of leg fuel flow adjustment.
L6 LEGS 1(2)/ Branches to the LEGS n primary page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional route.
R1 ETE/TTG Displays leg estimated time en route and total accumulated leg esti-
mated time en route (No switch function).
R2 LEG/DTG Displays leg distance to go and total accumulated leg distance to go.
R3 ELEV Display of the waypoint elevation from the database, if available, or
accepts an entry for waypoint elevation.
R4 LEG BURN/WT Displays the calculated leg burn and leg weight of fuel.
R5 FOB Displays the fuel on board and the leg endurance time.
R6 MFP Branches to MISSIONS, CARP INIT, LZ INIT, SAR INIT, or RNDZ
page, depending on type of waypoint.

Figure 3K-10 WAYPOINT DATA 2/2 page

3K-62
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

WAYPOINT DATA 2/2 PAGE DATA 5. Press L6 to branch to the calling LEGS page -
Pressed.
ENTRY
a. The LEGS primary, LEGS ALTN, or Legs
DIR/INTC page is displayed.
PREREQUISITES
NOTE
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.
If the displayed route is provisional,
ERASE is displayed adjacent to L6, and
DATA ENTRY pressing L6 deletes the provisional route.
1. To change the leg bank angle, enter a desired
angle in the scratch pad - Entered. 6. To change waypoint elevation, enter value for
waypoint elevation in the scratch pad - En-
a. Press L2 - Pressed. tered.
b. NOM BANK line data updated. a. Press R3 - Pressed.
b. ELEV line data updated.
NOTE
7. Press R6 to branch to the page of the associ-
If the waypoint is part of a SID, STAR, ated waypoint type (displayed adjacent to L1
Hold, or Mission Function, the display ad- on page 1/2) - Pressed.
jacent to L2 is blank.
NOTE
2. Press L3 to select desired waypoint transition
type - Selected. The page branching options are:
a. Selected desired waypoint transition type • CARP INIT (if waypoint type is CARP)
(DEF, CP, ROT, or P-P) appears in large • LZ INIT (if waypoint type is LZ)
font.
• SAR INIT (if waypoint type is SAR)
3. To change the fuel flow value, enter fuel flow • RENDEZVOUS (if waypoint type is
value and units in the scratch pad - Entered. RNDZ)
a. Press L4 - Pressed. • MISSIONS (if waypoint type is WPT).
b. FUEL FLOW line data updated.

NOTE
If no value is entered, predicted fuel flow
is displayed in small font.

4. Enter fuel weight adjustment value in the

scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press L5 - Pressed.
b. FUEL ADJUST line data updated.

3K-63
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Used to select the desired reference point when an identifier with multiple occurrences has been
specified.

Soft-key Display Description

L1-L5 Fix occurrence data Contains fix data, consisting of the identifier, country code, latitude and
longitude, and possibly the frequency or channel
L6 NOT USED
R1-R5 NOT USED
R6 ROUTE 1 Branches to the previously displayed page.

Figure 3K-11 WAYPOINT SELECTED page

3K-64
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

WAYPOINT SELECT PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press L1 through L5 to select the desired way-
point - Pressed.
a. The selected waypoint appears in the
scratch pad and page that was viewed to
advance to WAYPOINT SELECT page is
redisplayed.

NOTE
If there are more than five waypoints that
share the same identifier, pressing the
PREV PAGE or NEXT PAGE hard-key
displays the additional page(s).

2. Press R6 to branch to the previously displayed

page - Pressed.

3K-65
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays current aircraft position relative to the active flight plan.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 LAST/ALT/ATA/FUEL Displays the last sequenced waypoint identifier, actual altitude, actual
time of arrival, and fuel on board.
L2 TO/DTG/ETE (ETA) Displays the active waypoint identifier, distance to go, estimated time
en route (or estimated time of arrival), and predicted fuel on board.
L3 NEXT Displays the next waypoint identifier, distance to go, estimated time en
route (or estimated time of arrival), and predicted fuel on board.
L4 DEST Displays the destination waypoint identifier, distance to go, estimated
time en route (or estimated time of arrival), and predicted fuel on
board.
L5 CMD SPD Displays the currently commanded speed.
L6 CMD ALT Displays the currently commanded altitude.
R1-R4 NOT USED
R5 Vertical profile point Displays the label for the next vertical profile point, the estimated time
of arrival and the distance to go to that point.
R6 TIME NAV Branches to the TIME NAV page

Figure 3K-12 PROGRESS 1/4 page

3K-66
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PROGRESS 1/4 PAGE DATA ENTRY • The TO, NEXT, or DEST waypoint
may be changed.

• The default display for L4 is DEST. If

PREREQUISITES the flight plan is provisional, MOD
1. Displayed values - Reviewed. DEST is displayed.

• If the entered waypoint is in the active

DATA ENTRY flight plan, ENROUTE WPT is dis-
played. If the entered waypoint is not
in the active flight plan, ALTN WPT is
NOTE
displayed with data assuming a direct
For data entry, first enter data in scratch course to that waypoint, but the pre-
pad, and then select required soft-key to dicted FOB will be invalid.
enter into the CNI-MS.
• If the entered waypoint is not in the
navigation database, NOT IN DATA-
Changing a Destination/Alternate Waypoint: BASE message is displayed.

1. Enter new waypoint in the scratch pad - En- 3. Press L6 to cancel the change - Pressed.
tered.
4. Press EXEC hard-key to implement change -
2. Press left soft-key corresponding to the de- Pressed.
sired line of entry - Pressed.
5. Press R6 to branch to TIME NAV page -
a. Green EXEC light illuminates. Pressed.
b. ERASE appears adjacent to L6.

NOTE
• If the waypoint label/name exceeds
the allocated display field length, the
label/name is truncated to fit into the
field.

3K-67
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays current aircraft position relative to the active flight plan, and current speed, wind and
temperature information.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 H / WIND Displays the current headwind (H / WIND), tailwind (T / WIND) compo-

nent.
WIND Displays the current wind direction/velocity.
L2 XTK ERROR Displays the direction and magnitude of the current crosstrack error.
L3 TAS Displays the current true airspeed.
L4 GRD SPD Displays the current groundspeed.
L5 SAT Displays the current static air temperature.
L6 CARP PROG/ Branches to the CARP PROG page.
SAR PROG/ Branches to the SAR PROG page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional flight plan.
R1 X / WIND Displays the current crosswind component direction (L or R)/velocity.
R2 VTK ERROR Displays the vertical track error.
R3 ON/OFF Controls/displays the crosstrack limit status.
R4 XTK LIM Displays the crosstrack limit. If crosstrack error (L2 soft-key) is greater
than XTK LIM, XTK LIM EXCEEDED message is displayed on the
scratch pad.
R5 POS ALERT 1/ Displays the INAV position alert 1 and alert 2 criteria.
ALERT 2
R6 FLT CMPLT FLT CMPLT is shown in large font when the aircraft is past the final
waypoint and landing has occurred within 10 NM. Selection causes the
flight complete function being performed and the flight plan is erased.
If FLT CMPLT is not selected, the flight plan remains in FMS.
When the prompt is in small font, no selection is possible.

Figure 3K-13 PROGRESS 2/4 page

3K-68
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PROGRESS 2/4 PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press L6 to erase provisional flight plan, or
branch to CARP Progress or SAR Progress
page as applicable - Pressed.
2. Press R3 to toggle crosstrack limit (ON/OFF) -
Pressed.
3. Crosstrack limit (in N.N format) entered in the
scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press R4 - Pressed.
b. XTK LIM line data updated.
4. Position alert values (in N.NN format) entered
in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press R5 - Pressed.
b. POS ALERT 1/ALERT 2 line data updated.

NOTE
• The POS ALERT 1 and POS ALERT
2 values must be separated by a /. If
only the POS ALERT 2 value is en-
tered, it must be preceded by a /.

• The POS ALERT 1 value must be

less than the POS ALERT 2 value.
If the POS ALERT 1 value is not less
than the POS ALERT 2 value, an IN-
VALID ENTRY scratch pad message
is displayed.

5. Press R6 to complete a flight plan (if flight plan

is complete) and FLT CMPLT is displayed -
Pressed

3K-69
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Computes and displays Equal Time Point (ETP) information.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 LAST WPT Displays the last waypoint in the flight plan prior to entry of the ETP
segment.
L2 FIRST WPT Displays the first waypoint in the flight plan following the ETP segment.
L3 DIST Displays the distance from the last nearest airport direct to the last
waypoint prior to the ETP segment, along the flight plan to the first
waypoint following the ETP segment, and direct to the first nearest air-
port.
L4 GS OUT/T-OUT Displays groundspeed out and the time en route from the last waypoint
along the flight plan to the first waypoint following the ETP segment.
L5 TIME TO/PAST ETP Displays the to/past ETP indicator and time.
L6 ETP POSITION Displays and selects the ETP position (latitude and longitude).
R1 NEAREST APT Displays the airport nearest the last waypoint prior to the ETP seg-
ment.
R2 NEAREST APT Displays the airport nearest the first waypoint following the ETP seg-
ment.
R3 ALTN TAS Displays the alternate TAS to be used in the ETP calculation.
R4 GS BACK Displays the computed groundspeed to the last waypoint prior to the
ETP segment.
R5-R6 NOT USED

Figure 3K-14 PROGRESS-ETP 3/4 page

3K-70
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PROGRESS-ETP 3/4 PAGE DATA 5. Press L6 to copy the ETP POSITION to the
scratch pad - Pressed.
ENTRY
6. To enter the airport nearest the LAST WPT,
enter ICAO identifier of airport in scratch pad -
PREREQUISITES Entered.

1. Displayed values - Reviewed. a. Press R1 - Pressed.

b. NEAREST APT line data R1 updated.

DATA ENTRY 7. To enter the airport nearest the FIRST WPT,

enter ICAO identifier of airport in scratch pad -
Entered.
NOTE
a. Press R2 - Pressed.
• To obtain an accurate prediction of
ETP while on the ground, cruise alti- b. NEAREST APT line data R2 updated.
tude should be set to airfield elevation 8. Enter the alternate true airspeed in the scratch
on the PERF INIT CRUISE page and pad - Entered.
the expected TAS at actual cruise al-
titude should be manually entered on a. Press R3 - Pressed.
the PROGRESS-ETP page (soft-key b. ALTN TAS line data updated.
R3).

• The time to ETP shown on NOTE

PROGRESS-ETP page may not
R3 displays the alternate TAS to be used
agree with the ETP position shown on
in the ETP calculation.
the NAV-radar display. In this case,
the decision to divert should be based
on the time to ETP data displayed on
the PROGRESS-ETP page.

1. L1 displays the last waypoint in the flight plan

prior to the ETP segment. To downselect last
waypoint to the scratch pad press L1.
2. Entered last waypoint in the scratch pad - En-
tered.
a. Press L1 - Pressed.
b. LAST WPT line data updated.
3. L2 displays the first waypoint in the flight plan
following the ETP segment. To downselect the
first waypoint to the scratch pad press L2.
4. Entered first waypoint in the scratch pad - En-
tered.
a. Press L2 - Pressed.
b. FIRST WPT line data updated.

NOTE
A valid LAST WAYPOINT must be en-
tered prior to entering a valid FIRST
WAYPOINT. If a valid LAST WAYPOINT
is not entered prior to entering a valid
FIRST WAYPOINT, a NOT ALLOWED
scratch pad message appears.

3K-71
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Allows entry and display of diversion information.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 DIVR1 Displays the first diversion waypoint identifier.

L2 DIVR2 Displays the second diversion waypoint identifier.
L3 DIST Displays the calculated or entered distance and groundspeed to diver-
GSPD sion waypoint 1 and 2.
L4 TIME Displays the calculated or entered en route time and required fuel burn
BURN to diversion waypoint 1 and 2.
L5 RSV Displays the calculated fuel reserve to diversion waypoint 1 and 2.
L6 PPOS Displays the diversion present position.
R1 FF Enters/displays the fuel flow for calculating diversion information.
R2 WIND Entry/displays the wind direction and vector for calculating diversion
information.
R3 TAS Entry/displays the true airspeed for calculating diversion information.
R4 FOB Entry/displays the fuel on board for calculating diversion information.
R5 % VAR Display the variable fuel reserves calculated using the selected per-
0 / 5 / 10 / 15 centage of BURN fuel.
R6 NOT USED

Figure 3K-15 PROGRESS-DIVR 4/4 page

3K-72
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PROGRESS-DIVR 4/4 PAGE DATA 5. Enter the wind direction and vector in the
scratch pad - Entered.
ENTRY
a. Press R2 - Pressed.
b. WIND line data updated.
PREREQUISITES
6. Enter the true airspeed in the scratch pad - En-
1. Displayed values - Reviewed. tered.
a. Press R3 - Pressed.
DATA ENTRY b. TAS line data updated.
7. Enter the fuel on board in the scratch pad - En-
NOTE tered.
For data entry, first enter data in scratch a. Press R4 - Pressed.
pad, and then select required soft-key to
b. FOB line data updated.
enter into the CNI-MS.

1. Enter the first diversion waypoint identifier NOTE

(navigation or custom data base waypoint
The value displayed is the first available
only) in the scratch pad - Entered.
of a valid diversion fuel on board entry,
a. Press L1 - Pressed. the calculated fuel on board value, or box
prompts.
b. DIVR1 line data updated.
2. Enter the diversion 2 waypoint identifier (navi- 8. Press R5 to toggle variable fuel reserves (%
gation or custom data base waypoint only) in VAR) as required - Selected.
the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Selected variable fuel reserves (0, 5, 10, or
a. Press L2 - Pressed. 15) appears in large font.
b. DIVR2 line data updated.
NOTE
3. Enter the diversion present position in the
scratch pad - Entered. Selection toggles the selected percent-
a. Press L6 - Pressed. age to the next value.

b. PPOS line data updated.

4. Enter the fuel flow in the scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press R1 - Pressed.
b. FF line data updated.

NOTE
When data adjacent to R1 contains a val-
id fuel flow entry, selection results in the
displayed fuel flow value being placed
into the scratch pad.

3K-73
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays time navigation information.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 TOA WPT Time Of Arrival at waypoint label.

L2 TTG Time To Go to waypoint label.
L3 DTG Distance To Go to waypoint.
L4 Phase of Flight Blank if undefined
L5 DATS TSPD Constant speed computer for active target.
L6 CARP PROG Branches to the CARP PROGRESS page.
R1 DATS TOT Desired Time On Target.
R2 DATS ETA Target Estimated Time of Arrival.
R3 NOT USED
R4 AHD/BHD Ahead/behind time.
R5 DATS TSPD Target speed to active target waypoint.
R6 PROGRESS Branches to the PROGRESS 1/4 page.

Figure 3K-16 TIME NAV page

3K-74
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

TIME NAV PAGE DATA ENTRY 4. R2, R4, and R5 display ETA, AHD/BHD, and
TSPD respectively.

PREREQUISITES NOTE
1. Displayed values - Reviewed. • Under certain conditions when the
aircraft is so far behind that the BHD
time exceeds the time-to-go to the
DATA ENTRY target waypoint, the CNI Time Nav
page will show the aircraft as AHD of
1. L5 displays the computed constant speed plan by an amount equal to 24 hours
(CAS or GS) required for a desired TOA. Press minus the BHD time.
L5 to toggle between CAS and GS - Selected.
• Time navigation data may not be ac-
a. Selected speed (CAS or GS) appears in
curate. If data is not reasonable, re-
large font.
view flight plan and performance
2. Press L6 to branch to the CARP PROGRESS inputs before accepting time naviga-
page - Pressed. tion cues.

5. Press R6 to branch to the PROGRESS 1/4

NOTE page.
CARP PROGRESS branching is avail-
able if the active time navigation target is
a CARP TOT. Otherwise the data field is
blank.

3. Enter the target desired arrival time in the

scratch pad - Entered.
a. Press R1 - Pressed.
b. DATS TOT line data updated.

3K-75
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Provides access to the departure and arrival procedures for origin and destination airports
selected for the flight plan (primary and alternate flight plans), the LZ INIT pages for the primary
and alternate flight plans, and the departure and arrival procedures for any airport contained in
the database.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 ORIGIN DEP Displays the origin of the displayed route and branches to the DEPAR-
TURE RWYS page of the origin airport.
L2-L5 NOT USED
L6 DEP OTHER Branches to the DEPARTURE RWYS page for the selected database
airport.
R1 ORIGIN ARR Branches to the ARRIVAL RWYS page for the specified origin airport.
R2 DESTINATION ARR Branches to the ARRIVAL RWYS page of the destination airport.
R3 DESTINATION LZ Branches to the landing zone initialization page.
R4 ALTERNATE ARR Branches to the alternate destination ARRIVAL RWYS page.
R5 ALTERNATE LZ Branches to the alternate landing zone initialization page.
R6 OTHER ARR Branches to the ARRIVAL RWYS page for the selected database air-
port.

Figure 3K-17 DEPARTURE/ARRIVAL INDEX page

3K-76
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

DEPARTURE/ARRIVAL INDEX
PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.

DATA ENTRY
1. Press L1 to branch to the DEPARTURE RWYS
page for the specified origin - Pressed.

NOTE
L1 is functional only while the aircraft is
on the ground.

2. Enter a valid airport identifier in the scratch pad

- Entered.
3. Press L6 to branch to other airport DEPAR-
TURE RWYS page - Entered.
4. Press R1 to branch to the ARRIVAL RWYS
page for the specified origin - Pressed.
5. Press R2 to branch to the ARRIVAL RWYS
page for the specified destination - Pressed.
6. Press R3 to branch to the LZ INIT page for the
specified destination - Pressed.
7. Press R4 to branch to the ARRIVAL RWYS
page for the specified alternate - Pressed.
8. Press R5 to branch to the LZ INIT page for the
specified alternate - Pressed.
9. Enter a valid airport identifier in the scratch pad
- Entered.
10. Press R6 to branch to other airport ARRIVAL
RWYS page - Entered.

3K-77
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Allows selection of a departure runway from a list of runway associated with a selected airport.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 Departure procedure Displays the airport identifier associated with the access of this page
and departure procedure.
L2-L5 Runway Pressing results in the displayed runway being selected, as applicable.
L6 ROUTE 1(2)/ Branches to the RTE n plan page.
DEP/ARR Branches to the DEP/ARR INDEX page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional route.
R1 NOT USED
R2-R5 Runway Pressing results in the displayed runway being selected, as applicable.
R6 REVIEW Branches to the SID REVIEW page.

Figure 3K-18 DEPARTURE RUNWAYS page

3K-78
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

DEPARTURE RUNWAYS PAGE 5. Press L6 to ERASE or branch to the Route or

DEP/ARR INDEX page - Pressed.
DATA ENTRY
NOTE
PREREQUISITES If the displayed route is provisional, the
EXEC hard-key illuminates and ERASE
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.
is displayed adjacent to L6. Pressing L6
erases the provisional flight plan chang-
DATA ENTRY es.

1. Press DEL key to delete the displayed depar- 6. Press R6 to branch to the SID REVIEW page -
ture - Pressed. Pressed.
a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
2. Press L1 - Pressed.
a. Green EXEC light illuminates.
3. Press EXEC hard-key to implement change -
Pressed.
4. Press L2 through L5 or R2 through R5 to select
the desired departure runway - Pressed.
a. Selected runway appears adjacent to
ICAO airport identifier at L1 soft-key.

NOTE
If SIDs are available from the navigation
database, the display branches to the
DEPARTURE SIDS page.

3K-79
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Allows selection of a SID from a list of SIDs associated with a selected airport and runway.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 Departure procedure Displays the airport/runway identifier associated with the access of this
page and the departure procedure.
L2-L5 SID Selection appends the SID to the runway identifier displayed in the
departure procedure line.
L6 ROUTE 1(2)/ Branches to the RTE n plan page.
DEP/ARR Branches to the DEP/ARR INDEX page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional route.
R1 NOT USED
R2-R5 SID Selection appends the SID to the runway identifier displayed in the
departure procedure line.
R6 REVIEW Branches to the SID REVIEW page.

Figure 3K-19 DEPARTURE SIDS page

3K-80
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

DEPARTURE SIDS PAGE DATA 4. Press L2 through L5 or R2 through R5 to ap-

pend the selected SID to the runway identifier
ENTRY - Pressed.
a. If transitions are available in the navigation
PREREQUISITES database, the display branches to the DE-
PARTURE TRANS page.
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.
5. Press L6 to ERASE or branch to the Route or
DEP/ARR INDEX page - Pressed.
DATA ENTRY
NOTE
1. Press DEL key to delete the currently selected
departure - Pressed. If the displayed route is provisional, the
EXEC hard-key illuminates and ERASE
a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
is displayed adjacent to L6. Pressing L6
2. Press L1 - Pressed. erases the provisional flight plan chang-
es.
a. The display branches to the DEPARTURE
RWYS page.
6. Press R6 to branch to the SID REVIEW page -
Pressed.
NOTE
• If an active departure procedure is
deleted, a provisional flight plan is
created and the EXEC hard-key illu-
minates.

• Deletion when a departure procedure

is pending activation results in dele-
tion of the departure procedure, but
the origin airport remains displayed.

3. Press EXEC hard-key to implement change -

Pressed.

3K-81
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Allows selection of a transition procedure from a list of transitions associated with a selected air-
port and SID.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 Departure procedure Displays the airport/runway identifier associated with the access of this
page and the departure procedure.
L2-L5 Departure transition Selection appends the transition identifier to the SID identifier dis-
played in the departure procedure line, if available.
L6 ROUTE 1(2)/ Branches to the RTE n plan page.
DEP/ARR Branches to the DEP/ARR INDEX page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional route.
R1 NOT USED
R2-R5 Departure transition Selection appends the transition identifier to the SID identifier dis-
played in the departure procedure line, if available.
R6 REVIEW Branches to the SID REVIEW page.

Figure 3K-20 DEPARTURE TRANSITIONS page

3K-82
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

DEPARTURE TRANSITIONS PAGE 4. Press L2 through L5 or R2 through R5 to ap-

pend the selected transition identifier to the
DATA ENTRY SID identifier - Pressed.
5. Press L6 to ERASE or branch to the Route or
PREREQUISITES DEP/ARR INDEX page - Pressed.

1. Displayed values - Reviewed.

NOTE
If the displayed route is provisional, the
DATA ENTRY EXEC hard-key illuminates and ERASE
is displayed adjacent to L6. Pressing L6
1. Press DEL key to delete the currently selected
erases the provisional flight plan chang-
departure - Pressed.
es, including the departure.
a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
6. Press R6 to branch to the SID REVIEW page -
2. Press L1 - Pressed.
Pressed.
a. The display branches to the DEPARTURE
RWYS page.

NOTE
• If an active departure procedure is
deleted, a provisional flight plan is
created and the EXEC hard-key illu-
minates.

• Deletion when a departure procedure

is pending activation results in dele-
tion of the departure procedure, but
the origin airport remains displayed.

3. Press EXEC hard-key to implement change -

Pressed.

3K-83
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Used to sequentially display the legs of the SID.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 Departure procedure Displays the airport/runway identifier associated with the access of this
page and the departure procedure.
L2-L5 Departure procedure Displays the leg data of the selected SID.
waypoint
L6 ROUTE 1(2)/ Branches to the RTE n plan page.
DEP/ARR Branches to the DEP/ARR INDEX page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional route.
R1 NOT USED
R2-R5 Departure procedure Displays the leg data of the selected SID.
waypoint
R6 DEP SIDS Branches to the originating page, DEPARTURE RWYS page, DEPAR-
TURE SIDS page, or DEPARTURE TRANS page.

Figure 3K-21 SID REVIEW page

3K-84
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

SID REVIEW PAGE DATA ENTRY 4. Leg data of the selected SID are displayed ad-
jacent to L2 through L5 or R2 through R5.

PREREQUISITES NOTE
1. Displayed values - Reviewed. No leg data may be changed on the SID
REVIEW page. END OF PROCEDURE is
displayed on the line following the last leg
DATA ENTRY in the arrival procedure.
1. Press DEL key to delete the currently selected
5. Press L6 to ERASE or branch to the Route or
departure - Pressed.
DEP/ARR INDEX page - Pressed.
a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
2. Press L1 - Pressed. NOTE

a. The display branches to the DEPARTURE If the displayed route is provisional, the
RWYS page. EXEC hard-key illuminates and ERASE
is displayed adjacent to L6. Pressing L6
erases the provisional flight plan chang-
NOTE es, including the departure.
• If an active departure procedure is
deleted, a provisional flight plan is 6. Press R6 to branch to the page that accessed
created and the EXEC hard-key illu- the SID REVIEW page - Pressed.
minates.

• Deletion when a departure procedure

is pending activation results in dele-
tion of the departure procedure, but
the origin airport remains displayed.

3. Press EXEC hard-key to implement change -

Pressed.

3K-85
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Allows selection of an arrival runway from a list of runways associated with a selected airport.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 Arrival procedure Displays the airport/runway identifier associated with the access of this
page and the arrival procedure.
L2-L5 Runway Select the displayed runway for the arrival procedure and branch to the
ARRIVAL STARS page.
L6 ROUTE 1(2)/ Branches to the RTE n plan page.
DEP/ARR Branches to the DEP/ARR INDEX page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional route.
R1 Arrival procedure Displays the airport/runway identifier associated with the access of this
page and the arrival procedure.
R2-R5 Runway Select the displayed runway for the arrival procedure and branch to the
ARRIVAL STARS page.
R6 REVIEW Branches to the STAR REVIEW page.

Figure 3K-22 ARRIVAL RUNWAYS page

3K-86
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

ARRIVAL RUNWAYS PAGE DATA 4. Press L2 through L5 or R2 through R5 to select

the desired arrival runway - Pressed.
ENTRY
NOTE
PREREQUISITES • Selected runway appears adjacent to
ICAO airport identifier at R1 soft-key.
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.
• If STARs are available from the navi-
gation database, the display branch-
DATA ENTRY es to the ARRIVAL STARs page.
1. Press DEL key to delete the currently selected 5. Press L6 to ERASE or branch to the Route or
arrival - Pressed. DEP/ARR INDEX page - Pressed.
a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
NOTE
2. Press L1 or R1 - Pressed.
If the displayed route is provisional, the
NOTE EXEC hard-key illuminates and ERASE
is displayed adjacent to L6. Pressing L6
• If an active arrival procedure is delet- erases the provisional flight plan chang-
ed, a provisional flight plan is created es.
and the EXEC hard-key illuminates.
6. Press R6 to branch to the STAR REVIEW
• Deletion when an arrival procedure is
page - Pressed.
pending activation results in deletion
of the arrival procedure, but the desti-
nation airport remains displayed.

3. Press EXEC hard-key to implement change -

Pressed.

3K-87
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Allows selection of a STAR from a list of STARs associated with the displayed airport and run-
way.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 Arrival procedure Displays the airport/runway identifier associated with the access of this
page and the arrival procedure.
L2-L5 Standard arrival Selection appends the STAR identifier to the runway identifier in the
arrival procedure line.
L6 ROUTE 1(2)/ Branches to the RTE n plan page.
DEP/ARR Branches to the DEP/ARR INDEX page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional route.
R1 Arrival procedure Displays the airport/runway identifier associated with the access of this
page and the arrival procedure.
R2-R5 Standard arrival Selection appends the STAR identifier to the runway identifier in the
arrival procedure line.
R6 REVIEW Branches to the STAR REVIEW page.

Figure 3K-23 ARRIVAL STARS page

3K-88
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

ARRIVAL STARS PAGE DATA 4. Press L2 through L5 or R2 through R5 to ap-

pend the selected STAR to the runway identifi-
ENTRY er - Pressed
a. If transitions are available in the navigation
PREREQUISITES database, the display branches to the AR-
RIVAL TRANS page.
1. Displayed values - Reviewed.
5. Press L6 to ERASE or branch to the Route or
DEP/ARR INDEX page - Pressed.
DATA ENTRY
NOTE
1. Press DEL key to delete the currently selected
arrival - Pressed. If the displayed route is provisional, the
EXEC hard-key illuminates and ERASE
a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
is displayed adjacent to L6. Pressing L6
2. Press L1 or R1 - Pressed. erases the provisional flight plan chang-
es.
a. The display branches to the ARRIVAL
RWYS page.
6. Press R6 to branch to the STAR REVIEW
page - Pressed.
NOTE
• If an active arrival procedure is delet-
ed, a provisional flight plan is created
and the EXEC hard-key illuminates.

• Deletion when an arrival procedure is

pending activation results in deletion
of the arrival procedure, but the desti-
nation airport remains displayed.

3. Press EXEC hard-key to implement change -

Pressed.

3K-89
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Allows selection of an arrival transition from a list of transitions associated with the displayed air-
port and STAR.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 Arrival procedure Displays the airport/runway identifier associated with the access of this
page and the arrival procedure.
L2-L5 Arrival transition Selection appends the transition identifier to the STAR identifier in the
arrival procedure line.
L6 ROUTE 1(2)/ Branches to the RTE n plan page.
DEP/ARR Branches to the DEP/ARR INDEX page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional route.
R1 Arrival procedure Displays the airport/runway identifier associated with the access of this
page and the arrival procedure.
R2-R5 Arrival transition Selection appends the transition identifier to the STAR identifier in the
arrival procedure line.
R6 REVIEW Branches to the STAR REVIEW page.

Figure 3K-24 ARRIVAL TRANSITIONS page

3K-90
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

ARRIVAL TRANSITIONS PAGE 4. Press L2 through L5 or R2 through R5 to ap-

pend the transition identifier to the STAR iden-
DATA ENTRY tifier - Pressed.
5. Press L6 to ERASE or branch to the Route or
PREREQUISITES DEP/ARR INDEX page - Pressed.

1. Displayed values - Reviewed.

NOTE
If the displayed route is provisional, the
DATA ENTRY EXEC hard-key illuminates and ERASE
is displayed adjacent to L6. Pressing L6
1. Press DEL key to delete the currently selected
erases the provisional flight plan chang-
arrival - Pressed.
es.
a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
6. Press R6 to branch to the STAR REVIEW
2. Press L1 or R1 - Pressed.
page - Pressed.
a. The display branches to the ARRIVAL
RWYS page.

NOTE
• If an active arrival procedure is delet-
ed, a provisional flight plan is created
and the EXEC hard-key illuminates.

• Deletion when an arrival procedure is

pending activation results in deletion
of the arrival procedure, but the desti-
nation airport remains displayed.

3. Press EXEC hard-key to implement change -

Pressed.

3K-91
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Sequentially displays the legs of the STAR. Waypoint information such as course and constraint
data is displayed if available.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 Arrival procedure Displays the airport/runway identifier associated with the access of this
page and the arrival procedure.
L2-L5 Arrival procedure Displays the STAR leg data.
waypoint
L6 ROUTE 1(2)/ Branches to the RTE n plan page.
DEP/ARR Branches to the DEP/ARR INDEX page.
ERASE Selection results in the erasure of the provisional route.
R1 Arrival procedure Displays the airport/runway identifier associated with the access of this
page and the arrival procedure.
R2-R5 NOT USED
R6 ARR STARS Branches to the originating page, ARRIVAL RWYS page, ARRIVAL
STARS page, or ARRIVAL TRANS page.

Figure 3K-25 STAR REVIEW page

3K-92
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

STAR REVIEW PAGE DATA ENTRY 4. STAR leg data are displayed adjacent to L2
through L5.

PREREQUISITES NOTE
1. Displayed values - Reviewed. No leg data may be changed on the
STAR REVIEW page. END OF PROCE-
DURE is displayed on the line following
DATA ENTRY the last leg in the arrival procedure.
1. Press DEL key to delete the currently selected
5. Press L6 to ERASE or branch to the Route or
arrival - Pressed.
DEP/ARR INDEX page - Pressed.
a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
2. Press L1 or R1 - Pressed. NOTE

a. The display branches to the ARRIVAL If the displayed route is provisional, the
RWYS page. EXEC hard-key illuminates and ERASE
is displayed adjacent to L6. Pressing L6
erases the provisional flight plan chang-
NOTE es.
• If an active arrival procedure is delet-
ed, a provisional flight plan is created 6. Press R6 to branch to the page that accessed
and the EXEC hard-key illuminates. the STAR REVIEW page (i.e., ARRIVAL RW-
YS, ARRIVAL STARS, or ARRIVAL TRANS
• Deletion when an arrival procedure is page) - Pressed
pending activation results in deletion
of the arrival procedure, but the desti-
nation airport remains displayed.

3. Press EXEC hard-key to implement change -

Pressed.

3K-93 / ( 3K-94 blank )

 FAM.1C-27J-1A

PART 3L. MARK CONTROL

Contents page Contents page

MARK CONTROL PAGES ................................. 3L-1 MARK POSITION PAGE DATA ENTRY ........... 3L-5
MARK POSITION PAGE ............................... 3L-1 MARK LIST PAGE DATA ENTRY .................... 3L-7
MARK LIST PAGES ...................................... 3L-2

MARK CONTROL PAGES Display

L1 - MARK IDENTIFIER
The MARK control pages are used to provide informa-
tion about marked positions, and to store a list of the The Mark point identifiers appear on the left side of
marked positions. The MARK control pages consist of each MARK POSITION page, adjacent to L1 soft-key.
the MARK POSITION and MARK LIST pages An identifier (MRK01 through MRK10) is assigned in
chronological sequence to each marked point each
Mark control page branching is shown in Figure 3L-1. time the MARK hard-key is pressed. Once all 10 iden-
tifiers have been allocated, the 11th marked point is
assigned MRK01, and overwrites the associated data
MARK POSITION PAGE of the original MRK01 point.

The MARK POSITION page displays the mark point NOTE

identifier, latitude/longitude, Military Grid Reference
System (MGRS) coordinates, time of mark, and date Pressing L1 soft-key places the displayed
of mark associated with the marked position (see Fig- mark point identifier in the scratch pad.
ure 3L-2).
L2 - MARKED LATITUDE/LONGITUDE
Page Access The MARKED LAT/LON field displays the latitude and
longitude of the mark point.
Pressing the MARK hard-key (Figure 3-1) on the CNI-
MU (ICDU) marks the present position of the aircraft
and provides access to the MARK POSITION page. NOTE
Pressing L2 soft-key places the displayed
NOTE mark point latitude and longitude in the
scratch pad.
The MARK POSITION page displays only
if the CNI-SP has a valid position. If the
CNI-SP does not have a valid position, a L3 - MARKED MGRS
NO PRESENT POSITION error message The MARKED MGRS field displays the MGRS coordi-
is displayed. nates of the mark point.

NOTE
Pressing L3 soft-key places the displayed
mark point MGRS coordinates in the
scratch pad.

3L-1
FAM.1C-27J-1A

L4 - IDENTIFIER’S MARK TIME NOTE

The Mark time field displays the time that the point • MARK LIST 1/2 page displays mark
was marked. points 01 through 05. MARK LIST 2/2
page displays mark points 06 through
L5 - IDENTIFIER’S MARK DATE 10. The PREV PAGE and NEXT
The Mark date field displays the date that the point PAGE hard-keys are used to scroll
was marked. between the two MARK LIST pages.

• If a point associated with a given

L6 THROUGH R5
identifier has been marked, pressing
Not operational. the adjacent soft-key places the iden-
tifier in the scratch pad.
R6 - BRANCH TO MARK LIST PAGE
• Pressing the DEL key while an identi-
Selection of soft-key R6 branches to the MARK LIST fier is in the scratch pad clears all
page. mark point data associated with the
identifier.

MARK LIST PAGE L6

The MARK LIST page lists the mark identifiers and Not operational.
their positions (see Figure 3L-3).
R1 THROUGH R5 - MARK POINT ADDITIONAL
DATA
Page Access
If a Mark point has been marked, the latitude/longi-
The MARK LIST page is accessed by pressing the tude appear to the right of the associated identifier,
MARK LIST soft-key on either the INDEX 2/2 page, or and the symbol > appears, indicating that additional
the MARK POSITION page. mark point data may be viewed on the MARK POSI-
TION page by pressing the adjacent R1 through R5.
Display R6
L1 THROUGH L5 - MARK POINT IDENTIFIER Not operational.
The Mark point identifiers appear on the left side of
each MARK LIST page, adjacent to L1 through L5. An
identifier (MRK01 through MRK10) is assigned in
chronological sequence to each marked point each
time the MARK hard-key is pressed.
Once all 10 identifiers have been allocated, the 11th
marked point is assigned MRK01, and overwrites the
associated data of the original MRK01 point.

3L-2
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

MARK Branching

Figure 3L-1

3L-3
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: Displays information relative to the mark points.

Soft-key Display Description

L1 IDENT Displays the mark point identifier.

L2 MARKED LAT/LONG Displays the latitude/longitude of the marked point.
L3 MARKED MGRS Displays the MGRS coordinates of the marked point.
L4 MARK TIME Displays the time that the point was marked
L5 MARK DATE Displays the date that the point was marked
L6 NOT USED
R1-R5 NOT USED
R6 MARK LIST Branches to the MARK LIST page.

Figure 3L-2 MARK POSITION page

3L-4
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

MARK POSITION PAGE DATA

ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. CNI-SP has a valid position.

DATA ENTRY

Marking a Point:
1. Press MARK hard-key - Pressed.
a. MARK POSITION page displayed.

Deleting a Marked Point:

1. Press DEL key - Pressed.
a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
2. Press soft-key adjacent to mark point identifier
- Pressed.
a. All data associated with the marked point is
deleted.

Copying the Mark Point Latitude/Longitude:

1. Press soft-key adjacent to latitude/longitude to
downselect to scratch pad - Pressed.

Copying Marked MGRS:

1. Press soft-key adjacent to MGRS to downse-
lect to scratch pad - Pressed.

Displaying the MARK LIST Page:

1. Press MARK LIST soft-key - Pressed.
a. MARK LIST page displayed.

3L-5
FAM.1C-27J-1A

PURPOSE: List the mark point identifiers and their position.

Soft-key Display Description

L1-L5 MRK Displays the mark point identifier. Pressing the soft-key results in the
identifier being placed in the scratch pad.
L6 NOT USED
R1-R5 Mark point additional Displays the latitude and longitude of marked points. Branches to the
data MARK POSITION page of the selected mark point if > is displayed.
R6 NOT USED

Figure 3L-3 MARK LIST page

3L-6
 FAM.1C-27J-1A

MARK LIST PAGE DATA ENTRY

PREREQUISITES
1. At least one point has been marked, and is dis-
played on the MARK LIST page.

DATA ENTRY

Displaying Additional Mark Point Data:

1. Press right soft-key corresponding to mark
point of interest (“>” displayed) - Pressed.
a. MARK POSITION page displayed, show-
ing all data related to the mark point of in-
terest.

Deleting a Marked Point From the List:

1. Press DEL key - Pressed.
a. DELETE appears in the scratch pad.
2. Press soft-key adjacent to mark point identifier
- Pressed.
a. All data associated with the marked point is
deleted.

3L-7 / ( 3L-8 blank )